yee ans yre Curt “st eet Leal Ss ; a : ‘ ce ine Me 2 1h eee bs vot gta vy Pee te 4 ay mo TU Tail oad las ft uep eke Mette ¥, aay ot * . PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. © sey Vol. XXVIII. JANUARY TO DECEMBER, 1990. PHILADELPHIA : PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY MAC CALLA & COMPANY. 1890. LABRAR - ¢, MAY 191971 OF se? Jan, 3, 1890.] 1 [Gatschet. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, POR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vou. XXVIII. JANUARY TO JUNE, 1890. No. 182. THE BEOTHUK INDIANS. By Apert S. GATSCHET. Third Article. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 8, 1890.) Among the three vocabularies which I have recently had the good for- tune of receiving, there is one just as old as the century, and another comes from an aged person who has actually heard words of the language pronounced by a Beothuk Indian. I take pleasure in placing these lists before the Society, together with a number of new ethnographic facts gathered in the old haunts of the extinct race, which will prove to be of scientific value. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Since my first article the following publications on the Beothuk Indians have come to my notice : Blake, Mrs. Edith: ‘‘The Beothuk Indians,’’ in the monthly periodical, Nineteenth Century (Kegan & Co., publishers, London), December, 1888, pp. 899-918. This article contains important extracts from J. Cartwright’s manuscript and interesting details about Shanandithit. An American reprint of the Nineteenth Century is published by Leonard Scott, New York City. Murray, Chas. Aug. (author of the “Prairie Bird,”’ ete.): ‘‘The Red In- dians of Newfoundland.’’ Philadelphia: T. B. Peterson, 98 Chest- nut street (no date, about 18507?) ; illustrated. The book is pure fiction ; the first chapter alone contains some ethnologic points. New York Herald, Correspondence of. Date specified below. Stearns, Winfrid Alden: ‘‘ Labrador: A Sketch of its Peoples, its Indus- tries,’’ etc. Boston: Lee & Shepard, 1884. Small 8vo, 8 and 295 pages. The description, pp. 254-272, suggests interesting compari- sons of the Labrador Indians with the Beothuks. PROC, AMER. PHILOS, SOC, XXVIII. 132. A. PRINTED FEB. 12, 1890. Gatschet.] 2 [Jan. 3, Storm, Prof. Gustav: ‘Studies on the Vineland Voyages.’’ In Mémoires de la société royale des antiquaires du Nord ; nouvelle série. Copen- hague, 1888. 8vo. The Beothuks are spoken of, pp. 361, 362. Storm assumes, that the Helluland of the Norse explorers was Labrador ; Vineland, Nova Scotia ; Markland, Newfoundland. The Harbor Grace Standard and Conception Bay Advertiser: Linguistic and biographic article. Date specified below. ETHNOGRAPHIC NOTES. While returning from one of his annual explorations in the autumn of 1882, Mr. James P. Howley met Mr. Duggan, who owns a settlement at La Scie, one of the more northern harbors of Newfoundland, in north- east part of the isle; he informed him that numerous stone implements and utensils had at various times been found in his neighborhood, espe- cially at Pacquet and Fleur-de-lys harbors,* and that the officers of the French men-of-war, as well as the fishermen of that nationality, who annually frequent that part of the island, took away many of these relics. He noticed that the marine officers took special care in collecting such specimens, and hence they may have been commissioned to do so by one or some of the scientific institutions of France. At Fleur-de-lys, he stated, many stone pots were found, the material having been evidently quarried from the steatite rock occurring in the neighborhood. Many cavities are seen in the rock corresponding with the size of the pots themselves, while others are still there half-grooved out. His description of the process, by which he supposed the Indians performed this difficult task, struck Mr. Howley forcibly as being identical with the one described in Lieut. Geo. M. Wheeler’s “ Reports,’’ Vol. vii, pp. 117-121 (“ The Method of Manu- facture of Soapstone Pots.’’ By Paul Schumacher; with illustration ex- hibiting method, p. 121). A pipe of black marble found on an island in White Bay, and given away by Mr. Duggan’s father to one of the French ship captains about 1850, had a large bow] and was beautifully finished, but part of the stem was broken off. The carved figure of what seemed to be a dragon rested against the inner side of the bowl, with its head projecting over the edge of the latter, while the tail was twisted around the stem (a similarly carved pipe from Vancouver's Island was deposited in the Geological Museum, Ottawa). Before this it had always been asserted that the Beothuks were not acquainted with tobacco or any narcotic usages ; but they had a word lor tobacco, nechwa, and kinnikinnik as well as red-rod are abundant upon the island; when the Micmacs have run short of the white man’s tobacco, they make use of these. Black marble exists not far from where the pipe was found. While engaged in locating land and making a survey of the Bay of * Flour-de-lys Island and harbor is situated near Partridge Point, in 50° 7” Lat, 1890. J 3 [Gatschet. . Exploits during the summer season of 1886, Mr. J. P. Howley had the opportunity of conversing with some of the oldest settlers, who saw and remembered well the last individuals of the Red Indian race. He also collected a number of relics from an old burial place of theirs, which was known as such to the fishermen for the last thirty-five years, and hence had been tansacked repeatedly and by different parties. Lloyd visited it when there and took away everything he could find. While overhauling this interesting spot, Mr. Howley found a number of curiously fashioned and carved bone ornaments, with fragments of human skeletons scattered about. The latter appear to be of little scientific value. In an- other part of the Great Bay of Notre Dame, the interesting and valuable find of the mummified body of a boy, about ten years old, was made. Besides this, the following objects were found there and afterwards placed ’ on exhibition at St. John’s, in 1886 :—the skull and leg bones of an adult male, several stone implements, a large number of ingeniously carved bone ornaments, models of canoes, cups, dishes, etc., made of birch bark, beautifully sewn together and all daubed with red ochre ; fragments of deer-skin dresses, models of bows, arrows, paddles, a package of dried fish bound up in a casing of birch bark, and other articles. In the mum- my «a few of the neck vertebre are disconnected, and one of the hands is missing, but otherwise the body of the boy is perfectly preserved. It is doubled up with the knees against the stomach, feet slightly crossed, arms folded across the chest, and when found it lay on the left side. The skin is intact, even the finger and toe nails being uninjured. The fleshy por- tions appear to have dried up completely, leaving only the bones encased in the shrunken and wrinkled skin, which latter has the appearance of dressed deer skin or well-tanned chamois. The whole was encased first in a deer-skin robe, then placed into a casket of birch bark neatly and closely sewn together, being apparently almost air-tight. The mummy bore a close resemblance to the Alaskan mummy preserved in the National Mu- seum in Washington, and described by Mr. William H. Dall, in Vol. xxii of “Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge,’’ 1878, 4to. The reason why this body was interred with so much care, provided with fine and new clothing and accompanied with food, tools and spare garments, must be sought for in the tender years of the deceased child, which needed more care and support on its peregrinations toward the future abode of the soul than an adult would require. The same find is referred to in the article on the Beothuk by Mrs. Blake, and in a correspondence of The New York Herald from St. John’s, N. F., dated October 23, 1886, where the locality is distinctly specified as being on Pilley’s tsland, Notre Dame Bay. That bay may be described as form- ing the northern part of the Bay of Exploits, one of the old homes of the Red Indian people; the island is situated about 55° 42’ Long. west of Greenwich, and 49° 35’ Lat. The Herald correspondent adheres to the old and mistaken idea that the Beothuks are a branch ef the Algonkin family. His statements, not included in the reports of others, are as follows: . Gatschet.] 4 (Jan. 38, **Only a few relics of the Beothuks have been preserved ; they are either in private hands, or on exhibition in the Newfoundland Museum. * * * In the Pilley island excavation the skull of an adult was found in an excellent state of preservation. It has the characteristics of the skull of a savage, but it is well shaped and pretty well developed in the intellectual region * * * and proves that the ‘Bethuks’ were by no means of alowtype. * * #* Only three bones of the skeleton were found along with theskull. * * * But the greatest curiosity is the nearly perfect skeleton of a young ‘Boethic’ nine or ten years of age. The body had been wrapped in birch bark, doubled together, laid on its side and covered with a heap of stones; * * * — it has somewhat the appearance of amummy. The skull is detached from the body, the ver- tebree of the neck having been destroyed or removed. It is well shaped and in a good state of preservation. In addition, there are in the collec- tion specimens of beautifully finished arrow-heads, small models of canoes made of birch bark, bone ornaments, * * * which, according to the Indian:custom, had been buried with the dead.”’ ; Small objects made by this people, especially bone carvings, have lately come into Mr. Howley’s possession which attract attention through their peculiar form and nice finish. He thinks they were used as pendants to their deer-skin dresses, and all have some rude design carved upon either side. Many of them are simple flat pieces, either square or cut obliquely at the lower ends ; others have from two to four prong-shaped ends : LR fA foe Perforated circular pieces of bone and shell accompanied the above carvings, also some red ochre tied up in small packages encased in birch bark, and some neatly made birch-bark cups of an oval pattern and red- ochred. Also a small iron knife. and tomahawk with wooden handles. Some of the above articles manufactured of bone apparently represent the human frame. What Mr. Howley learned on the Bay of Exploits about the peculiarities of Shanandithit was the following : When any of the Micmacs came near her during her stay with Peyton and his family, she exhibited the greatest antipathy toward any of them, especially toward one Noél Boss, whom she greatly dreaded. Mr, Peyton stated that, whenever he or even his dog appeared near the house, Shanandithit would run screeching with terror towards him and cling to him for protection, She called him Mudty Noal (** Wicked Noél’’), and stated that he once fired at her across the Exploits river, wounding her in the hips and legs, as she was in the act of cleaning venison. In proof thereof she exhibited several shot wounds at the spots reforred to, and W. E. Cormack confirms this statement. The — 1890.] ek [Gatschet. enmity between the two tribes must have been at a high pitch to prompt a man to perform such an act against a defenseless woman. Micmac tradition states, however, that in earlier tinres a better feeling existed between the two peoples. The Red Indians certainly were on good terms with the ‘‘Mountaineers’’ or Naskapi of Labrador, whose language is of the same family as that of the Micmacs. The above anecdote fully proves that Shanandithit became acquainted with individuals of the Micmac tribe, and this explains why Cormack has so many Micmac terms mixed with his Beothuk words. He was unable to distinguish the ones from the others. Mudty, ‘‘bad,’’ is a Micmac, not a Beothuk word. A CAPTURE FOLLOWED BY A WEDDING. The capture of another Beothuk woman is related at length in the fol- lowing traditionary account, which Rev. Silas Tertius Rand, of Hantsport, Nova Scotia, sent me in August, 1886. The event may have occurred as early as the beginning of the nineteenth century, for Mr. Rand heard it from an aged woman of Hantsport, Mrs. Nancy Jeddore, and she heard it from her father, Joseph Nowlan, who died about A. D. 1870, ninety-five years old. Nowlan had at one time stayed with the family of which that Beothuk woman was the mother and mistress, in Newfoundland, and had also lived long with the Eskimos. His regular home was in Nova Scotia, at St. Margaret’s Bay, on the side of the Atlantic ocean. The history of this woman is rather extraordinary, and with serious peo- ple I might incur the peril of being regarded as pitching into the domain of romance. But to avoid all suspicion, I shall transcribe the account with the very words of my correspondent, who made use of the same provincialisms, which have served in delivering the ‘‘story’’ tohim. The absence of the Beothuk woman’s name is a great deficiency in the tale. Some of the more learned remarks will be readily recognized as additions made by Mr. Rand, whose works prove him to have been a studious ex- pounder of the Micmac grammar and lexicon (died October 4, 1889). “The Micmacs have been in the habit of crossing over to Newfoundland to hunt ‘time out of mind.’ They called it Uktakumcook, mainland ; so they supposed at the time when the name was given that it was not an island. Still it is as good or perhaps better than the silly and untruthful long name Newfoundland. The Micmacs could never ‘scrape acquaint- ance’ with the Indians of the other tribe there. Still, they found them out, also their red custom (their skin was quite white) and their power of magic, by which they became aware of the distant approach of strangers, when they fled on their snowshoes for their lives. But once three young hunters from ‘Micmac-Land,’ Meghum-ahghee, came upon three huts belonging to them, which were built up with logs around a ‘cradle hol- low,’ so as to afford protection from the guns of the foe. These huts had just been deserted, but the three men gave chase, came as near to the Gaitschet.] 6 (Jan. 3, fugitives as to hail them and make signs of friendship, which were left unheeded. On and on they pursued--one of the young women of the party snapped the strap of the snowshoes and had to sit down and repair it. Her father came back, assisted her and they fled again; but the mended strap failed a second time. The poor girl shrieked with fright ; she was left and overtaken. She could not be induced to go with her pur- suers ; so they constructed a small wigwam and remained on the spot a day ortwo. At first, she touched no food for days ; then her fear relented in regard to one of the young men, and starting out again with the hunting party, clung to that youth who had first won her confidence. This she showed by keeping him between her and all the others. After staying two years with the Micmac people she acquired their language.and was married to that same young man. She often recounted the eventful story of her life, and conversed with Nancy Jeddore’s father on the circumstances connected therewith, after she had become the mother of a family.” A correction of a former statement needs to be inserted here. The Hudson Bay Company never had control of Newfoundland, but it was a number of English merchants who retarded settlement in the interior. The im- mense tracts and forests of the interior were given up to the deer, bears, foxes, wolves, and to a few straggling Micmac hunters, whereas tbe entire white population was compelled to live along the sea-coast. Mr. Howley having favored me with more particulars about these firms, I would state first that these merchants were chiefly fish dealers, and that they purchased furs only incidentally. Even now fish is the chief article of trade with them. There are but few of these old firms now in exist- ence, and of these, Newman & Co.’s establishment at Harbor Button, Fortune Bay, and Gaultor’s, in Hermitage Bay, south side of the island, are probably the oldest. Slade & Co. once ruled supreme in Notre Dame Bay during the first half of this century, and to their employés is ascribed the cruel treatment of the last Beothuk Indians. But things are now assuming a different aspect, and the present mercantile firms no longer oppose the opening up of the country, for a railway act together with a loan act has lately passed the legislature. The railway is now being constructed, and will be of best service for opening the lands for settlement. THE JURE VOCABULARY. While engaged in surveying the Bay of Exploits during the summer months of 1886, Mr. Howley became acquainted with Mrs. Jure, then about seventy-five years old, who once had been the fellow-servant of Shanandithit, or Nancy, at Mr. John Peyton's, whose widow died about the close of the year 1885. Mrs, Jure was, in spite of her age, hale and sound in body and mind, and remembered with accuracy all the little peculiarities of Shanandithit, familiarly called ‘‘Nance.’’ Many terms of Beothuk learned from Nance she remembered well, and at times was s 1890.] T [Gatschet. complimented by Nance for the purity of her pronunciation ; many other terms were forgotten owing to the great lapse of time since 1829. Mr. Howley produced his vocabularies and made her repeat and pronounce such words in it as she could remember. Thus he succeeded in correcting some of the words recorded by Leigh and Cormack, and also to acquire a few new ones. He satisfied himself that Mrs. Jure’s pronunciation must be the correct one, as it came directly from Shanandithit, and that its pho- netics are extremely easy, much more so than those of Micmac, having none of the nasal draw] of the latter dialect. She also pronounced sevetal Micmac words exactly as Micmacs pronounce them, and in several in- stances corrected Mr. Howley as to the mistranslation of some Beothuk words. The twenty-three words which Mr, Howley has obtained from this aged woman embody nine new ones; he repeated all of them to his brother, Rev. Dr. M. F. Howley, P.A., and I received a second copy of the list written by that gentleman, having the words accentuated. This enabled me to add in parentheses their true pronunciation and wording in my scientific alphabet. THE MONTREAL VOCABULARY. Although this is a misnomer, I shall designate by it another copy or ‘recension ’’ of the W. E. Cormack vocabulary which I obtained from Rev. Silas T. Rand, of Hantsport, N.S., on September 1, 1885. It was accompanied by the following remarks : ‘Sir William Dawson, my excellent friend,* sent me this list of Beo- thuk words some years ago, and I had to return his copy te him. There were copyist’s mistakes init, u for a, u forn, etc. I don’t remember the name of the man who took the vocabulary, nor that of the woman who gave it to him. But I remember that the woman was said to have married a man of another tribe, and that she was the last of the race and theonly one of the race ever tamed (to use the Indian term). She cannot have been Mary March.”’ ' This vocabulary contains 228 items, including the numerals and names of months; the words are syllabicated, and begin with capital letters. The copy before me was written by a scribe who evidently did not realize the importance of the document, for even the English significations are, in part, faulty, as anus for arms (memayet), cattle for cattle, celp for cup, tick- levee for ticklas (gotheyet), on page 419, and others. The letter u is often put instead of n, 1 for t, o fora, t for k, r for z, e for c, and vice versa, the whole being written in a sloven hand, as all the Beothuk vocabularies are which I have seen. The manuscript has haddabothie body instead of had- dabothic, molheryet cream jug for motheryet, adademiuk spoon for adadi- miute, jigganisut gooseberry instead of jiggamint; but, in many instances, appears to have a more original form preferable to the one copied by Mr. Howley, which I have utilized, as in giwashuwet bear for gwashuwet, * Principal of McGill College, Montreal. Gatschet.] 8 “Jan. 3, atho-onut twenty for dtho-onut, and in some instances has two words for one English term, as in ankle moosin, and gei-je-bursut ; (to) bite boshoo- dik or boshwadit ; boat and vessel adothe, or odeothyke ; and what-will be found under head, man, moon, stockings, sun, teeth, woman, woodpecker. This vocabulary is arranged alphabetically after the English terms, which stand before their Beothuk equivalents, and contains many terms new to us, which corroborates the supposition previously advanced by me, that the original Cormack vocabulary must have been more extensive. To insert all the two hundred and twenty-eight terms of this new ‘‘re- cension”’ of the Cormack collection iv bulk into the list to be given below, would have the result of increasing the confusion already existing in the wording of the Beothuk terms. Therefore, I have omitted not only those terms which are written alike to the terms which stand first in my list of 1885, pp. 415-424, but also those which rest upon an evident error of the copyist, as mamiruateek houses for mammateek, berroieh clouds for berroick, moocas elbow for moocus, etc. It is probable, that W. E. Cormack made several copies of his vocabu- lary himself, which differed among each other, or were written in an illegible hand ; this would explain many of the ‘‘lectiones varie ’’ which now puzzle the Beothuk student, and cause more trouble to him than it does to edit a Roman or Greek author from the medieval manuscripts with all their errors and mistakes. THE CLINCH VOCABULARY. A vocabulary of Beothuk has just come to light, which appears to be, if not more valuable, at least older than the ones investigated by me here- tofore. It contains one hundred and twelve terms of the language, many of them new tous. It was obtained, as stated, by the Rev. John Clinch, a minister of the Church of England, and a man of high education, stationed as parish priest at Trinity, in Trinity Bay, Newfoundland. The original is contained in the ‘‘Record Book,” preserved in the office of Justice Pinsent, D.C.L., of the Supreme Court at Harbor Grace, and it has been printed in the Harbor Grace Standard and Conception Bay Advertiser, of Wednesday, May 2, 1888, some biographic and other notes being added to it in the number of May 12. Among these the following will give us a clearer insight into the ques- tion of authenticity of Clinch’s vocabulary. John Clinch was born in Gloucestershire, Englund, and in early youth studied medicine under a practitioner at Cirencester, where he became a fellow of Dr. Jenner, who discovered the celebrated specific against small-pox. In those times, no law compelled a man to undergo examinations for diplomas ; so Clinch migrated to Bonavista, Newfoundland, and established himself there in 1775 as a physician, but in 1788 removed to Trinity. Besides his practice, he conducted services in church, was ordained deacon and priest in Lon- don, in 1787, then worked over thirty years at Trinity in his sacred calling, 1890.] 9 [Gatschet. until his death, which must have occurred about 1827. He has the merit of introducing vaccination upon that island, and there are people living now who were vaccinated by him. He was also appointed to judicial charges. Simultaneously with Mr. Clinch, a Beothuk Indian stayed in that town, known as John August. Tradition states that he was taken from bis mother when a child and brought up by a colonist, Jeffrey G. Street. He then remained in Street’s house as a faithful and intelligent servant, and when arrived at manhood was entrusted with the command of a fishing smack manned by whites, Frequently he obtained leave to go into the country, where he probably communicated with his tribe. The parish register of Trinity records his interment there on October 29, 1788. As there is no other Beothuk Indian known to have resided among white people of Newfoundland at that time, it is generally supposed that Mr. Clinch, who lived there since 1783, obtained his collection from none else but from John August. The selection of words differs greatly from that in Leigh’s vocabulary, but the identity of a few terms, which are quite specific, as hiccups, shaking hands, warming yourself, induces Mr. Howley to believe that he had Clinch’s vocabulary before him. One item in Clinch’s list, ‘‘Ou-bee : her own name,’’ seems to indicate that it was obtained from a female. Indeed, in 1803, a Beothuk woman-was cap- tured, presented to Governor Gambier, and subsequently sent back to her tribe. Mrs. Edith Blake, in her article, ‘‘The Beothuks,”’ gives a descrip- tion of her and of her presence at a social meeting at the Governor’s house, at St. John’s. [ have obtained a copy of the printed vocabulary through Mr. Howley. It was full of typographic errors, and these were corrected by him with the. aid of a copy made of the original at Trinity by Mrs. Edith Blake, who took the greatest pains to secure accuracy. The ‘ Record Book” states that Rev. Clinch obtained the vocabulary in Governor Waldegraves’ time, and the volume which contains it embodies documents of the year 1800 ; this date would form an argument against the supposition, that it was obtained from the female captured in 1803. Below I have reproduced all the terms of this vocabulary, as it surpasses all the others in priority, though perhaps not in accuracy. The words are all syllabicated, but none of them shows accentuation marks ; [ have printed most of them in their syllabicated form. Capt. Robinson has consulted and partly copied the Clinch vorutaitare as will be readily seen by a comparison of the terms in both. PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XXVIII. 132. B. PRINTED FEB. 12, 1890. Gatschet.] 10 [Jan. 3, THE THREE VOCABULARIES COMBINED. Abbreviations —CM.: The W. E. Cormack vocabulary ri a Montreal copy of the manuscript. J.: The Jure vocabulary. No letter : The Clinch vocabulary. Words in parentheses contain the transcription: of vocables into my scientific alphabet. abenick gaping, CM. abideeshook domestic cat, CM. abus-thib-e kneeling. epee eight ; ee-adajook eighteen, CM. adi-ab wood. ~ adjieich two ; ee-ajike twelve, adjeich atho-onut twenty-two, CM. adothe or odeothyke boat, vessel,CM. agamet butions and money, CM. ah-wadgebick, awadgebick (a/wa- dshibik), middle finger, J. amshut or yamyess get up, CM.; cf. kinnup. anaduck sore throat, CM. arrobauth blood ; ashabooutte or ig- gobauth (for izzobauth) blood, CM. : atho-onut twenty ; adjeich atho-onut twenty-two, CM. bashedtheek siz ; sizteen, CM. bay-sot, bizot, besot, besut, to walk, J. beathook Red Indian, CM. beteok good night, CM. boas-seek blunt, CM. bobodish sea pigeon, J.; bobbidish pigeon, black guillemot, CM. boddebmoot woman's bosom, CM. boo-it, buit (bi-it), thumd, J. boshoodik or boshwadit to bite, CM. botonet - onthermayet teeth, COM. ee- beshedtheek (onthermayet alone means teeth; ef. below). buggishama’n man, J.; bukashman or bookshimén man, CM ; push- aman man, buggishami:h boy, J.; bugasmeesh white boy, CM. chee-a-shit groaning ; cheasit, CM. chee-thing @ walking stick. cobthun-eesamut January, CM. co-ga-de-alla leg. coosh lip. corrasoob sorrow; snow (snow, by confounding it with kausussa- book 2). cowasazeek July, CM. cusebee louse ; casebeet, OM. cush nails. dabseek four ; ee-dabseek fourteen, OM. deshudodoick to blow, CM. deu-is sun or moon (doubtful). dis-up fishing line. dogemat or ashoog-ing (Howley : ash-vog-ing) arrow, CM. drimmet, drtim-mét (driin’t), hazr, J.; don-na (Clinch). ebauthoo water ; ebanthoo, CM. eemommoos, {mmawmoose ({ima- mis), woman, J. eemommooset, {mmomoosét (ima- muset), girl, J. ; eewo-in, éwoin (i/wo-in), knife, J.; yew-oin a knife. ejeedowéshin, edgedoweshin (edshi- dowéshin), fowl, J. ejibidinish silk handkerchief, CM. emeethook dogwood, CM. ersh-bauth catching fish. euano go out, CM, eve-nau feathers. gei-je bursiit ; see moosin, giggaremanet net, COM. 1990. ] giwashuwet bear, CM. gosset stockings; gasaek, CM. gothieget ticklas, OM. goun chin, CM. gun or guen nose, OM. hadda-bothy body. hadibiet glass, CM. hados-do-ding sitting. _hanamait spoon. han-nan a spear ; first letter uncer- tain. ha-the-may @ bow. hedy-yan stooping. hods-mishit knee. . hod-thoo to shoot. ‘hod-witch fool. hurreen and huz-seen a gun. huzza-gan rowing. ii-be-ath yawning. io-ush-zath stars (doubtful). is-shu, izhu, ishu (i/zhu), make haste, J. ite-ween thigh. jib-e-thun (or, iib-e-thun) atrap or gin. jigganisut gooseberry, CM. yamyess ; see amshut. yaseek one ; ee-yagiesk eleven, CM. yeothoduck nine; ee-yeothoduck nineteen, CM. yew-one wild goose. yew-why dirt. keathut ; gorathun (obj. case) head, OM.; he-aw-thou head, ke-aw- thon your head. kess-yet @ flea. king-abie standing. kinnup, kinup, get up, J. koo-rae lightning ; fire. koothabonong - bewajowite Febru- ary, OM. kuis; mangaronish sun, CM.; kuis watch, CM. kuis and washewnishte moon, CM. mady-u-a leaves. magorrm deer’s horns, CM. ° mamasheek islands, CM. mam-isutt alive, CM. 11 [Gatschet. mamegemethin shoulders, CM.; mo- mezabethon shoulder. mammadronitan lord bird, CM. mammasamit dog, J. (mammasavit is incorrect); mammasareet, ma- moosernit dog, CM. (-reet false for mit). mamoosemich puppy, CM. manarooit blanket, CM. mangaronish ; see kuis. manjebathook beard (on page 421 : bread, which is probably false ; see annawhadya), CM. mau-the-au-thaw crying ; cf. su-au- thou. memajet anus, CM. (false for arms). memet hand, CM.; memen (obj. case) hands and fingers ; meman momasthus shaking hands. me-ma-za tongue. menome dogberries. me-roo-pish twine, thread. midy-u-theu sneezing. mithie coal. mi-a-woth flying; meaoth flying,CM. mis-muth ear. moadamitt to boil, as dinner, CM. mom-au @ seal. mome-augh eyebrow. moocus elbow. moosin and gei-je-bursit ankle, CM. mowgeentck, mougenuk (maud- shinik), iron, J.; mowageene tron. mudy-rau Aiceups. mud-ty bad (dirty); mudeet bad (of character). mush-a-bauth oakum or tow. nethabete cattle, CM. nine knife, CM. (false for u-ine, yewoin). ninejeek five; ee-ninezeek fifteen, CM. no-mash-nush scalping. now-aut hatchet. obod{sh, obbodish, cat, J.; obditch a’ beast ; cf. abideeshook. Gatschet.] . obosheen warming yourself. obseedeek gloves, CM. odasweet-eeshamut December, CM. od-au-sot rolling. oddesamick, ddd-essimick (odesi- mik), little finger, J. odemet ochre, CM. (ochre mixed with oil, emet, Howley). onnus, onnfis (0’/nés), forefinger, index, J. oodzook seven; ee-oodyook seven- teen, CM. oregreen (?) scissors, CM. oreru ice, CM.; cf: ozeru. osarate rowing, CM. Osweet (6’swit) deer, J.; osweet, CM. Ou-bee (nom. pr. fem.) ‘her own name.”’ ou-gen stone. ou-ner-mish a little bird (species of ?). outhermay teeth. ow-the-je-arra-thunum to shoot an arrow perpendicularly. pa-pa de.aden a fork. pau-shee birch rind ; paper. peatha fur, hair of beast. pedth-ae rain. pe-to-tho-risk thunder. pig-a-thee a scab. pis-au-wau lying. podibeac oar, CM. ; poodybe-ac an oar. poopusraut fish. poorth thumb ; cf. boad. popa-dish a large bird (species of 2). posson the back. poss-thee smoke ; cf. baasdic. puga-thuse beating; puga-tho throwing. pug-a-zoa eating. pug-e-non to break a stick. puth-u-auth sleep, shabathooret trap, CM. shamye currants, shansee ten, OM, 12 Jan, 3, shaub-ab-un-o I have to throw your irap. : shau-da-me partridge berries. shebohowit ; sheebuint woodpecker, CM. she-both kissing. shédbasing upper arm, CM. she-ga-me to blow the nose; shega- mik, CM. shemabogosthue moskito (black fly), CM. shendeek (or sheudeek ?) three ; ee-shaedeek thirteen, CM. shisth grass. : shucodimit Indian cup, CM. sou-sot spruce rind. stioeena thumb, CM. su-au-thou singing. su-gu-mith bird’s excrement. susut fowl, partridge. x tupaithook canoe, CM.; cf. thub-a- thew. . tedesheet neck. the-oun the chin; cf. goun. thub-a-thew boat or canoe. thub-wed gie dancing. tis eu-thun wind. traw-na-soo spruce. : tus-mug pin; tus-mus needle. tu-wid-yie swimming. waine hoop, OM. washeu night, darkness, CM. wasumaw - eeseek April, June, Sep- tember, CM. washewnishte ; see kuis and washeu. weshemesh herring, OM, who-ish-me laughing. — widdun (widun or widin), asleep ; also euphemistically for dead. woodrut fire, CM, wothamashet running, COM.; wotha- mashee running. wooth-yan walking. wyabick (wiyabik) ring-finger, J. zatrook husband, CM. zosweet partridge (willow grouse), CM, (same word as susut), 1890.] 13 [Gatschet. REMARKS ON SINGLE TERMS. The ending -bauth occurs so frequently that we may have to consider it as a suffix used in the derivation of substantives ; thus we have, ¢. g., izzo- bauth blood, ersh-bauth catching fish, mushabauth oakum, tow. emamoose woman, emamoset child, girl, resemble strongly the follow- ing Algonkin terms: amemens child in Lenape (Barton), amosens daughter in Virginian (Strachey, Vocab., p. 183). Ama/ma is mother in the Greenland Inuit. The sound / occurs but four times in the words which have come to our notice: adolthtek, lathun, messiliget-hook, nadalahet. In view of the negligent handwriting in which all of these vocabularies have reached us, it is permitted to doubt its existence in the language. menome dogberries is a derivative of manus berries. mamoose whoritle- berries, Rob., is perhaps misspelt for manoose. Cf. min grain, fruit, berry, in all Eastern Algonkin dialects. ozeru, ozrook, ice; E. Petitot renders the Montagnais (Tinné) ezogé by ‘‘gelée blanche’’ (frost), t’en-zure by ‘‘glace vive.’’ The resem- blance with the Beothuk word seems only fortuitous. poopusraut fish is identical with bobboosoret codfish (or bacalaos, Mscr.). pug-a-zoa eating ; the latter probably misspelt for beating. stioeena thumb, CM., is misspelling of itweena, which means thigh, not thumb. The new ethnologic and linguistic facts embodied in this ‘‘Third Arti- cle’’ do not alter in the least the general results which I deduced from my two previous articles and specified in ‘‘ Proceedings’’ of 1886, pp. 426 to 428. On the contrary, they corroborate them intrinsically and would almost by themselves be sufficient to prove that the Beothuk race and language were entirely sui generis. By the list contained in this ‘Third Article’’ the number of Beothuk vocables known to us is brought up to- four hundred and eighty, which is much more than we know of the ma- jority of other American languages and dialects. The violent hatred and contempt which the Beothuks nourished against all the races in their vicinity seems to testify by itself to a radical difference between these and the Algonkin tribes. The fact that we know of no other homes of the Beothuk people than Newfoundland, does not entitle us to con- jecture, that they were once driven from the mainland opposite and settled as refugees upon the shores of that vast island. It is more probable that * this race anciently inhabited a part of the mainland simultaneously with the island, which would presuppose that the Beothuks were then more populous than in the historic period. Numerous causes may account for the fact that we do not notice them elsewhere since the beginning of the sixteenth century : fragmentary condition of our historic knowledge, Gatschet.] 14 [Jan. 3, rigorous colds, epidemics, want of game, famine, infanticide, may be wars among themselves or with strangers. Some of these potent factors may have codperated in extinguishing the Beothuks of the mainland, from whom the island Beothuks must have once descended—while the tribes settled upon Newfoundland may have increased and prospered, owing to to a more genial climate and other pbysical agencies. ENGLISH-BEOTHUK VOCABULARY. alive mam-isutt. canoe tapaithook ; thub-a-thew ; see ankle ; see moosin. boat. anus ; see memajet. cat, domestic, abideshook ; obbodish. April wasumaw - eeseek. cattle nethabete. arm, upper, shédbasing. catching fish ersh-bauth. arms memajet. chin goun, the-oun. arrow ; see dogemat. coal mithie. asleep wi/ddun. crying mau-the-au-thaw. bad mud-ty. currants shamye. back, the, posson. dancing thub-wed-gie. beard ; see manjebathook. darkness washeu. bear giwashuwet. dead widdun. beast ; see obodish. December odasweet - eeshamut. beast, hair or fur of, peatha. deer Osweet. beating pug-a thuse. deer’s horns magorrm. birch rind pau-shee. dirt yew-why. bird, a little (not specified), ou ner- dirty mud-ty. mish. dog ; see mammasamit. bird, a large (not specified), popa- dogberries. menome. dish. dogwood emeethook. bite, to, boshoodik. ear mis-muth, black guillemot ; see sea pigeon. eating ; see pug-a-zoa, blanket manarooit. eight adayook. blood arrobauth. eighteen ; see eight. blow, to, deshudodoick. elbow moocus. blow the nose, to, she-ga-me. eleven ; see yaseek, bosom, woman's, boddebmoot. excrement of bird su-gu-mith. blunt boas-seek. eyebrow mome-augh. boat adothe, thub-a-thew ; see canoe. feathers eve-nau. body hadda. bothy. February koothabonong - bewajo- boil, to, ¥. trans., moadamitt. wite, bow ha-the-may. ~ Jifleen ; see ninejeek. boy buggishamish, Jingers ; see memet, break a stick, to, pug-e-non. Jinger, middle, ah-wadgebick. buttons agamet., Jire woodrut ; koo-rae, ; ee ee Se ee 1890.] fish poopusraut. fishing line dis-up. five ninejeek. flea, a, kess-yet. Sly, to, mi-a-woth. fool hod-witch. fork, a, pa-pa-de-aden. Sorefinger onnus. Sourteen ; see dabseek. four dabseek. foul ejeedowéshin ; susut. Sur peatha. gaping abenick. getup amshut; kinnup. gin, a (‘‘atrap or gin’), jib-e-thun. girl eemommooset. glass hadibiet. gloves obseedeek. good night beteok. gooseberry jigganisut. go out euano. grass shisth. groaning chee-a-shit. grouse ; see zosweet. gun, a, hurreen. hair draimmet. hand memet. handkerchief of silk ejibidinish. hatchet now-aut. head ; see keathut. herring weshemesh. hiccups mudy-rau. hoop waine. husband zatrook. wce oreru ; ozeru. I have to throw your trap shaub-ab- un-o. index onnus. Indian cup shucodimit. tron ; see mowgeentick. islands mamasheek. January cobthun - eesamut. June wasumaw - eeseek. July cowasazeek. kissing she-both. knee hods-mishit. 15 re {Gatschet. kneeling abus-thib-e. knife ; see eewo-in, nine. laughing who-ish-me. leaves mady-u-a. leg co-ga-de-alla. lightning koo-rae. lip coosh. little finger oddesamick. lord bird mammadronitan. louse cusebee. lying pis-au-wau. man buggishama/n. make haste is-shu. money ; see buttons. moon deu-is ; kuis. moskito shemabogosthue. nails cush. neck tedesheet. needle tus-mus. net giggaremanet. night washeu. nine yeothoduck. nineteen ; see nine. nose gun, guen. oakum mush-a-bauth. oar podibeac. ochre odemet. one yaseek. Oubee ; nom. pr. fem. paper pau-shee. partridge susut ; zosweet. partridge berries shau-da-me. pigeon ; see sea pigeon. pin tus-mug. puppy mamoosemich. rain pedth-ae. Red Indian beathook. ring-finger wyabick. rolling odausoot. rowing huzza-gan ; osuarate. running wot amashet. scab pig-a-thee. scalping no-mash-nush. scissors ; sev oregreen. seal, a, mom-au. sea pigeon bobodish. Ryder.) — 16 (Jan. 3 September wasumaw - eeseek. ticklas gothieget. seven oodzook. thirteen ; see three. shaking hands ; see memet. thigh ite-ween. shoot, to, hod-thoo. tongue me-ma-za. shoot, to, an arrow perpendicularly, tow or oakum ; see oakum. ow-the-je-arra-thunum. thread me-roo-pish. shoulder ; see mamegemethin. three shendeek. singing su-au-thou. throwing ; see pug-a-thuse. sitting hados-do-ding. thumb boo-it, poorth ; see stioeena. siz bashedtheek. thunder pe-to-tho-risk. . sixteen ; see six. trap, a, jib e-thun, shabathooret. sleep puth-u-auth. twelve ; see two. smoke poss-thee. twenty atho-onut. sneezing midy-u-theu. twenty-two ; see two. snow ; see corrasoob. twine me-roo-pish. sore throat anaduck. two adjieich. sorrow corrasoob. vessel adothe. spear ; see han-nan. walk, to, bay-sot ; wooth-yan. spoon hanamait. walking stick chee-thing. spruce traw-na-soo. warming yourself obosheen. spruce rind sou-sot. watch, a, kuis. standing king-abie. water ebauthoo. stars io-ush-zath. wild goose yew-one. stockings gosset. willow-grouse zosweet. stone ou-gen. wind tis-eu-thun. stooping hedy-yan. woman eemommoodos. sun kuis; deu-is (?). : wood adi-ab. swimming tu-wid-yie. woodpecker shebohowit. teeth outhermay ; see botonet. yawning ii-be-ath. ten shansee. your, in: ‘‘your head;’’ see keathut, The Eye, Ocular Muscles and Lachrymal Glands of the Shrew-mole (Blarina talpoides Gray). By John A, Ryder. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 3, 1890.) As far as I am aware, the minute anatomy of the eyes of the American Soricide or shrew-mice has been but little studied. Recently I have had an opportunity to obtain the eyes of the short-tailed shrew-mole, Blarina talpoides, and thinking their anatomy might present something novel, they were cut into series of sections. These disclosed the peculiarities to be mentioned later. The eyes were dissected out, and, as the sequel proved, together with the uninjured lachrymal) glands and ocular muscles. 1890.] 17 (Ryder. The eye and gland together measured 2.5 mm. in the longest diameter, and about 1.5 mm. thick, and nearly 2 mm. wide. The form of the whole mass was that of a depressed oval. So far as the evidence goes, that can be derived from the sections, it indicates that the ocular muscles do not reach the skull, and that the eyes are no longer under the control of the same kind of a muscular mechanism as is found in other mammals. In fact, the tendons and muscles of the snout seem to completely cover the skull in the region of the orbit. Indeed so slight is the attachment of the eyes to the skull, that in removing the skin from the head but little diffi- culty is found in removing the eye-ball and lachrymal gland with the former. In Scalops, our common mole, this happens with still less dif- ficulty. The whole eye-ball in Blarina measures 0.9 mm. in diameter or consider- — ably less than one-twenty-fifth ofaninch. The lens is well developed and is very large in proportion to the whole eye-bal], measuring more than half the diameter of the latter. Consequently there is but little aqueous humor, and also but little vitreous, since the lens fills nearly the whole of the chamber of the ball. The cornea is thin, very convex, and approximates the lens anteriorly. At the edge of the cornea there is no thickening of the sclerotic, such as occurs in the eyes of other vertebrates as a result of the development of the ciliary muscles or apparatus of accommodation. This apparatus is obviously very rudimentary and defective, from which it may be inferred that the power of adjustment of the lens for different ranges of vision is poorly developed in Blarina. There is a retinal coat of pigment and a choroid coat, which Jatter extends for a little distance over the optic nerve. The thickness of the sclerotic, choroid and retinal layer of pigment taken together is not over a fourth of the total thickness of the retina, thus showing other strong con- trasts in respect to the development of the tunics of the eye-ball in other forms of vertebrates. . The total thickness of the retina is nearly a third of the total diameter of the eye-ball, and is developed as fur forward as the ciliary region, though it is thickest a little behind this point. The usual number of layers are discernible in the retina, and it is perforated as usual by the very slender and diminutive optic nerve, which is only .07 mm. in diameter. The retina is therefore developed as usual, though the rods and cones were not well enough preserved in my materials to be certainly made out. At any rate, it is clear that such an eye may still be more or less functional as a visual organ even though obviously degenerate in some respects. The number of retinal elements is absolutely and relatively much less, how- ever, than in a larger eye where the arc covered by the retina is part of a larger circle than in Blarina. There is a well-defined iris and pupil. The lachrymal gland is many times larger than the entire eye ball. Its duct opens into the conjunctival cavity. The muscles of the eye consist, first, of a teaduasa muscle or retractor ofthe ball. It is inserted upon the sclerotic in a circular manner near PROC, AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII, 132. C. PRINTED FEB, 25, 1890. Ryder.] 18 (Jan. 3, 1890. ; the entrance of the optic nerve ; it extends back and its origin is lost in the | connective tissue of the lachrymal gland. No definite account of the recti muscles or of the oblique muscles can be given here. _ All that my © sections disclose is the fact that muscles which are apparently the homo- — logues of the recti are inserted upon the sclerotic nearly as far forward as the ciliary region. These muscles, like the choanoid, pass backward to — arise from the connective tissue of the lachrymal gland with which they — blend and in which they become lost, or they join a relatively thick muscular tunic composed of voluntary muscular fibres which invests — nearly the whole lachrymal gland. This muscular investment of the lachrymal gland suggests that the function of such a muscular apparatus is to compress the tear gland and force its secretion over the eye-ball, and to thus wash away any dirt which — may find its way under the very much reduced eye-lids, the opening in — which is scarcely half a millimetre wide. | The foregoing brief sketch cf the anatomy of the eyes of one of the commonest of our American shrew-mice suggests much in the way of further study. The remarkable and apparently voluntary mechanism for compressing the tear gland is evidence distinctly against the conclusion as respects at least our North American shrews, reached by Mr. Darwin in regard to the Tucu-tuco or Clenomys of South America, in which case he suggests that the repeated irritation and inflammation of the eyes of these burrowing rodents, due to the dirt or sand which found its way beneath the lids, would aid in rendering the eyes inefficient, and-in the course of generations abortive, as they are sometimes found to be. It is clear that if the interpretation of the function of the muscular investment of the tear gland in Blarina here suggested is correct, that in this case, at least, there is a direct and very special structural provision by which irritation from the presence of sand or dirt in the eyes, as a consequence of a bur- rowing habit, may be guarded against in the most efficient manner con- ceivable. That the eye of Blarina, as a whole, has suffered from degeneration may be inferred with certainty from the diminutive size of the eye-ball and optic nerve, and the evidence furnished by the muscles suggests that while the eye-ball is no longer rotated in precisely the manner which obtains in other forms, it is clear that there are ocular muscles, and that the eye is capable of adjustment for the direction of vision, though it is evident that the muscles which effect such an adjustment no longer arise directly from the skull, as in all other normal forms of the eye of verte- brates. The extra tunic of voluntary muscular fibres investing the lach- rymal gland seems to be something which has been superadded to the optic apparatus of Blarina, which, like the relatively large lachrymal gland liself, is really an indication of specialization to meet the require- ments of special conditions of life. Dec. 6, 1889.] 19 [Allen. Description of a New Species of Carollia and Remarks on Carollia brevicauda. By Harrison Allen. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 6, 1889.) Curollia is one of the most common of the South American leaf-nosed bats. Notwithstanding its wide range of distribution (it is found from Mexico to the southern limit of Brazil, including the Antilles), the type of the genus is that of the single species also. I have recently examined this form—Carollia brevicauda—with the object in view of determining whether or not an example of Carollia in the collections of the National Museum might prove to be new. The facts which led me to suppose that this might be the case were the following : The specimen was smaller than (0. brevicauda, the color was of a light chestnut brown tint, instead of the ashy shade of C. brevicauda. The in- terfemoral membrane was not incised. The nose-leaf was relatively small, delicate, with entire, rounded nostrils, and the lower border sharply de- fined toa point near the median line, where a small naked space alone was seen, : ‘I have had a knowledge of these facts for a long time, but I hesitated to describe the form as new, for in general appearance in the proportions of the membrane, in the form of the ear, in the markings of the wing membranes and the shapes of the terminal phalanges, the two forms ap- peared to be essentially the same. I had but a single specimen—a young male from Costa Rica. I concluded that before describing it an examina- tion of all the specimens of Carollia should be made. A large number of specimens of the genus were available for the purpose from the collections of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, but unfortunately nine only of the twenty-six examples were in good condition. From among these a young male was found, and I was thus able to -show that the smaller size of the specimen, as well as the difference of coloration of the new form, as compared with the old, were not due to age.* As a result of this examination, I venture to describe the single example as a type of a new species in the following language : CAROLLIA CASTANEA, 0. sp. Smaller than C. brevicauda. Fur long and silky. Above, lustrous light chestnut brown at basal one- half and at the tip. The intervening portion is yellow brown (old gold). Below, the same colors prevail, excepting that over the abdomen and pubis the brown- ish tip is absent and the body of the hair not golden. There is no hair on the forearm (the parts are slightly *The teeth were all erupted, the epiphyses of the radii, metacarpals and phalanges were united to their shafts, but the tibia wasslightly flexible and the foot was covered by a looser skin than is seen in matured individuals. It isnot always easy to determine the age of bats, Allen.] 20 [Dec. 6, rubbed), and scarcely any on the dorsum-of the metacarpal bone of the thumb. The distribution of the hair on the wing membrane is as in C. brevicauda.* The general form of the auricle as in 0. brevicauda, but is proportion- ately longer. The outer border is more emarginate. When the auricle is laid on the head, it reaches a point as far as the end of the muzzle. The tragus is obscurely acuminate ; the inner border, therefore, not straight, but the apical half abruptly narrowed. The outer border crenulate, rather than pectinate. The basal lobe and the process above it well de- veloped. The nose-leaf is more delicate than in (@. brevicauda. The height is 7mm.;the breadth 44 mm. The lower border is much more distinct than in C. brevicauda. The nostrils are rounded, well defined, and not continuous with a concavity on the outer border.t The warts on the mentum are arranged in three obscurely disposed rows, the middle one being the larger, but none of them are elongate. The tail reaches to a point opposite the knee. Skull. The general proportions of the skull are the same in the two species. The brain case at the procephalon is inflated and the temporal crest does not extend over the inflated part. Hence the impressions for the temporal muscles are not defined on the frontal bone. The upper border of the anterior nasal aperture is on a line with the canine tooth. The distance between the lachrymal ridges is greater than between the lachrymal ridge of one side and the corresponding central incisor. The distance from the last maxillary molar to the posterior limit of the nasal chamber is less than the distance from the point last named to the end of the long endo- pterygoids. The palatal ruge are more trenchant, curved and wider apart opposite the premolars, than is the case with C. brevicauda. Teeth. The number of the teeth is the same as in C. brevicauda, viz.: The maxillary central incisors touch their entire lengths. The lateral * The fur of C. brevicauda is described as follows : Above, moderately long only. The base is plumbeous, the tip brown, and the interme- dilate part pallid—almost white. Below, the fur is short, plumbeous at basal half, and of the peculiar mouse gray so often seen in Phyllostomide. G. E, Dobson (Cat, Chir, Br, Mus., 1878) describes the fur as brown above and beneath. None of the nine specimens examined were so marked, The brown aspect of the animal as seen in spirit is much more apparent than when dried, The nose-leaf is covered with fine short hairs on both sides. The back of the thumb is densely covered with short hair in C. brevicauda, + The nostrils are oval in outline, are not separable from the outline of the nose-leaf above, and are continuous with a concavity (as one speaks of a mouth of a pitcher being concave), on the outer border, The peculiarity just named is best seen by holding the specimen so as to keep the vertex of the head upward, the observer looking downward from the tip to the base of the nose-leaf, 1G. B. Dobson (Cat, Chir, Br. Mus,, 1878) gives this asa character of C. brevicauda, From my examinations, I cannot agree with this writer, The teeth exhibit a A-shaped space between the cutting edges, 1889.] ; 21 [Allen. incisors are very small and are free from both the central incisor and the canine. The first premolar is distinctly caniniform and does not touch either the canine or the second premolar, The mandibular second premolar does not touch the third premolar. The distance from the anterior border of the canine to the first molar is 3mm., a distance over + mm. greater than that from the anterior border of the canine to the central incisors. Measurements. mm. Head and body (from crown of head to base of tail)..... Ad DUAR OF AIT oa’ s oe kone tisan ea cceuneee we ikem na ses 25 Mhiir SURO be recone senescence negmnagrie Shaan en 32 , Length of first metacarpal bone...... + i t d it. ee panes | ss first phalanx..... err errr 8 Second digit... | Length of second metacarpal bone.... 26 a first phalanx. 6 Udcek hepeeebreneuued 8 } - Costa Rica. Collections of National Museum. Collected by J. C. Zele- don. ; The nine specimens of C. brevicauda, which formed the basis of my study, were chiefly interesting from the measurements which were made of the peripheral parts. These are arranged in tabular form (p. 22). : [Dee. 6, 22 Allen.] PPIG'SL ‘'VANVISV) VITTIOUVD “1api0g 133nO | *£|101103s0d Jepiog iano wiorg t *snT PBI JO pus 0} a[Apuoaide wiorg 4 *atApuoolde 03 Japjnoys jo do} wos om 9% oe og 1S Ry «| 8 1g dovdsi19}Uy [BSIp YIF JO GIP 61 1% & , 1% 0 91 %% sovdsiojul [eIISIp pe JO WIPIAL Perret nv g ¢ t 9 sovdsi9zUy [8131p PZ JO WIPEAL 9 %, 9 9 bt) 9 ec 9 a, Sines @. 02.4: 6 & 9 © {sn3e1y, a HE ras rf ot. aL Chee OPES = Be, Jopuny 8 % bed ¥% KU tod po Nee en ths oe eo pveH L FAL FAL 9 L ¢ vA Meare Allg tad Fee h a bec RA tg UBL IL IL Ir Ir sa It [oad air cae oh PRR a at 005 SL oT a 9 LI I WE 22S Star See Re Sani ee BIGLL ial bas SI ras cL ¥I BL ae Se ae a eee anurg KO St IL IL I IL | | eens Nias ig Ar Matte 2 xuveyd pz aL (ae ai ZL ra ZL BE St aes Se xusypeyd yt pA 98 og o8 og HLS HLS ae aa Te a ih i Tedivowiay 4 rae SL S401 HCI bad 8 | IR Di as °° *xuspeqd pz as I SI Ir SI $I Pe ee - * *xuvpuqd yst ¢ AT +8 #8 8. og 98 98 3° cee 8° * TedsoTeT KO Ir ia I IL IL Bett See xuvpeqd pe 1% od 0 Ks w w 1 OS eee °° * xuvyeqd pz Wm LI HO I LI LT Lt eee ae oe * - * xuvpeqd 31 18 oS 98 48 4g MoS tse * pediwoepayy g $ 8 p ¥ g Mess see ee * *xuueqd 37 } 18 1g 08 ic 08 08 % ssses s+ pedawomsagy f g ¥ b g ¢ 9 ee G 9 a ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Cin ec ee SOc . sotinentemeet 88 $8 18 OF 68 1g bg ie: 6S 9: © a ee 9% @ % % % % om cht o + * omy Ju “Ua "Ulta mu “mu “ma “mm Poss dees dees discs decis dec s1663 “VGAVOIATUA VITIOUVD AO SINAKAUOSVAY 40 ATV, 1889.] 23 [Allen. With the exception of the foot, which is constantly 11 mm. long, all the measurements are subject to variation—indeed, no two specimens in all respects are alike. This statement is made while making due allowance for the difficulty in taking some of the measurements, as for example those of the thigh and of the membranous expansions. Specimens which had been macerated in weak alcohol were rejected. But among those which were accepted it was not always possible to determine (owing to the con. traction of the tissues), the exact extent to which the parts should be ex- tended, so as to represent as far as possible the position of the wings in flight, One of the most interesting measurements is that of the width of the third digital interspace. This space, so small in Pteropid, Molossi, and in Noctilio, is wide in Phyllostomide, excepting Phyllostoma. An- other interesting feature is the extent of the incision on the free margin of the interfemoral membrane: In well-preserved specimens of 0. brevicwuda the incision is conspicuous, while in the type of OC. castanea, which is also in good condition, the incision is absent. Yet in slightly macerated speci- mens of C. brevicauda the incision disappears, showing that it is a charac- ter which is dependent upon tonicity and not on any distinctive structural peculiarities, and cannnot, therefore, have much value. One of the marked ranges of measurements is seen in the length of the tail. The shortest tail is 5 mm. long and the longest 7 mm. The tipof the tail answered in three specimens to the middle of the femur, in four to the junction of the middle with the lower third, and in two lack one-fifth only in being as long as the femur. In none, therefore, was the tail as long as in the single exam- ple of C. castanea, The length of the thigh varies from 12 mm. to15 mm. Hence the rela- tive lengths of these quantities will be also variable, especially so since even in the same individual the length of the tail does not tautogenize* with the length of the femur. The length of the tibia—a character of value in Cheiroptera—varies from 14 mm. to 18 mm. The length of the forearm, perhaps the most important single measure - ment which can be taken, varies from 35 mm. to 40 mm. The following includes the variations of the manus and their range : mm. mm. mm. First metacarpal.......... veeee-from 4 to 6 Range 2 Second * Ee aE pape ie” Sap doy Saket | A Third a See sar elaieuig <3 io ee ee a 4 os TERE Be eae ope esigesh + 2 8 Boo & Me TEM as anni eens ines “3 “ 84 « 2 First phalanx first digit.......... ee, eS ae a 2 RS Sheep ame taedic? G8. ira | aang Poca nee de evi vewenee ce aeds 44 “ee ee ee eeeetereee eer eee eee ee eeeeeee 4 as Ist digit.. ties phalanx ........ oablpeewen pesca thm second ‘ rrr Ts ota dew eka ee ote a m. c fee ew eee eee eeeeeeeerereere eee ee ee eeeee 45 ih mesthan Sites MP MMBIORE: 3 pds ccadasens istbneaaes’ ao ‘PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xxvill. 132. J. PRINTED MAY 10, 1890. | and Stokes.] v4 [April 18, Measurements. Sh PG alete ceeheeceb ieee ae Oo Mie frst phalanx..... obevepeabeeaee boca ene os ead 3d digit.. 4 second 67s Gi es ile ee cree tah s wes WHtaree third)! i SS U00, See See eee eee Ores on 7 ONE A Ciba POE Rc REE twice Sik chide éV ewe e male enenme Vie PORE first nse side Tewewh dew ec ae eeu wmet AAT ee sna. {a sf evident Web Seats Sige eee SPE ist third: “6 <2 eued Saaeee eb : 5° WisG.35 Bie oes jodvaweyewens upd sass Couns’ we first phalanx..../...... Banke crate Sid TAU vi vi. A Laie eA tins SRLS ePID EK septal ibe we IOt third 2* ae es NURS. OSA Nie Posse Length of femur... i. essed in ese cbev esse tates Bae! bs Eh £64: DIB Koa eeblee ee ewok CAR CHEM Pea Py tan Ede ap tei Wa 4 7 $6. MOOk: spin sseees See SOA ates Alpe a eietaleh ee ASE, tf 66 paths 2 ee eee cabo ds cen epee ee ‘** free portion of tail........ steceeees weeees Bb Notices of New Fresh-water Infusoria. By Alfred C. Stokes, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 18, 1890.) Mastigamebda reptans, sp. nov. Figs. 1-5.—Body constantly ama@boid, at its apparently greatest extension ovate, depressed, about two and one- half times as long as broad, the pseudopodia few, scattered, lobate, short and unbranched, progression being chiefly by the ameboid expansions of the body; flagellum apical, about three times as long as the extended zooid, only the tip usually vibrating ; nucleus not observed ; contractile vesicles several, small, scattered ; motion commonly very slow, occasion- ally rapidly and irregularly vibratory. Length of the extended body yyy5 inch. Hab.—Pond water with decaying vegetation. Heteromita fusiformis, sp. nov. Figs. 6 and 7.— Body elongate fusiform, from three to four times as long as broad, widest centrally, tapering thence to both extremities ; soft and changeable in shape, having the ability to protrade filamentous pseudopodic prolongations of the body substance, the extremities of these extensions not rarely becoming amm- boid and producing a reticulation by the interlacing of the minute branches or by the formation of minute vacuoles; flagella diverse in length, originating close together at the frontal extremity, the anterior one vibratile, less than twice as long as the body, the other trailing and more than twice the body in length; contractile vesicle small, apparently 1890] 75 [Stokes. single, situated in the posterior body-half ; endoplasm finely granular. Length of body ;s55 inch. Hab.—Standing pond water. Movements rapidly vibratory. Heteromita triangularis, sp. nov. Fig. 8.—Body ovate or subtriangu- lar, depressed, smooth, twice as long as broad, the anterior border obliquely truncate, sometimes slightly concave, the shorter lateral border often flattened ; the longer convex ; posterior extremity obtusely pointed; anterior flagellum about one-half as long as the body, the posterior or trailing appendage from two to three times the length of the zooid ; con- tractile vesicle single, posteriorly situated near the longer lateral border ; nucleus apparently represented by a small light spot near the centre of the anterior body-half, Length of body from 7,55 to y¢yy inch. Hab.— Standing pond water. ‘ Food seems to be engulfed chiefly near the anterior extremity, this region surrounding the particle by an irregular outflow of endoplasm, the zooid then becoming indescribably unsymmetrical in form. The anal aperture is postero-terminal or nearly so. Macromastix (v2Kpos, long ; vaotts, lash), gen. nov.—Animalcules free swimming, ovate, having three flagella arising near together, one short, antero-terminal and vibratile, two opposite, lateral and trailing ; food engulfed at any point on the surface. Inhabiting standing water. Macromastiz lapsa, sp. nov. Figs. 9 and 10.—Body ovate, about twice as long as broad, the anterior region changeable in shape, that margin rounded and often obliquely truncate, the posterior obtusely pointed ; ante- rior flagellum short, arising from the centre of the anterior truncation, the lateral appendages trailing, about three times as long as the body; endoplasm colorless, transparent ; contractile vesicle single, laterally placed near the body centre; nucleus not observed. Length ze55 inch. Hab.—Standing pond water. - This form is a member of the Trimastigide of Saville Kent, and resem- bles most nearly the Dallingeria of the same authority, differing chiefly in the diverse length of the flagella, these appendages in Dallingeria being subequal. The lateral flagella of Macromastiz arise from opposite points nearer the frontal border than do the similar appendages of Dal- lingeria, in the last named form arising from the lateral borders at some _ distance from the frontal margin, and possessing adhesive power in the distal extremities, nothing of the kind having been observed with the present form. Food is engulfed at any point of the surface. Trachelomonas cervicula, sp. nov. Fig. 11.—Lorica subspherical, smooth, orange yellow in color; anterior orifice with a thickened, slightly projecting external border, and produced internally as a straight, cylin- drical, chitinous tube about one-third as long as the diameter of the lorica, its anterior border attached around the anterior orifice of the sheath, its posterior or internal margin circular and free, the long flagellum of the enclosed animalcule protruded through this internal, tubular passage; and the body, when completely filling the lorica, surrounding the cylinder as if pierced by it. Diameter of the lorica ;?;; inch. Hab.—Pond water. Stokes.] 76 [April 18, The species differs from all other known forms by the presence of the internal tubular prolongation. It was collected in some abundance from a sheltered pond in the early part of February, 1890. It is, therefore, probably a vernal Infusorian. Trachelomonas similis, sp. nov. Fig. 12.—Lorica oval or subelliptical, nearly twice as long as broad, the extremities subequally rounded, the surface irregularly and finely punctate, the aperture produced as an obliquely directed neck-like prolongation, the margin oblique and irreg- ularly denticulate ; color chestnut brown. Length of lorica 5}, inch. Hab.—Standing pond water, with aquatic plants. This approaches most nearly the 7" lagenella (Ehr.) Stein, which is described as colorless and entirely smooth, neither of which conditions are observable in the present form. Trachelomonas obevata, sp. nov. Fig. 13.—Lorica obovate, less than twice as long as broad, the anterior border convexly truncate, the poster- ior obtusely pointed ; surface minutely hispid, aperture slightly project- ing, its margin rather more coarsely hispid ; color deep chestnut brown ; flagella twice or more as long as the lorica. Length of lorica yy5 inch. Hab.—Standing water from the pools of early spring. Trachelomonas spinosa, sp. nov. Fig. 14.—Lorica oval, about one and one-third times as long as broad, both extremities equally and evenly rounded, the entire surface clothed with slightly recurved spines, which are largest at the posterior border; the anterior aperture produced as a short, smooth, truncate extension ; color brown. Length, exclusive of the spinous processes, ;}; inch. Hab.—Pond water, with aquatic plants. Epipyzis socialis, sp. nov. Fig. 15.—Lorica elongate subcylindrical, from eight to ten times as long as broad, often variously curved and bent, the lateral borders nearly parallel, tapering posteriorly to the subacute point of attachment, the anterior border truncate, usually not everted, sometimes slightly flaring. Length of lorica g}5 to x45 inch. Hab.—- Pond water in early spring ; attached to Conferve. Social, occasionally forming radiating, rosette-like clusters composed of fifty or more thecz, or in irregular fascicles produced by the attachment of from eight to ten lorice toa single supporting theca. The colonies formed by the attachment of one or more lorice to a single theca as a basis of support, would seem to foreshadow the polythecium or compound branching colony of Dinobryon, to which Hpipyvis is closely allied. Groups not rarely occur formed of from eight to ten thece basally attached to one and the same supporting lorica, Epipyais eurystoma, sp. nov. Fig. 16.—Lorica elongate-vasiform, about three times as long as broad, widest at the anterior aperture, that orifice flaring, constricted near the anterior border, widening subcentrally and thence tapering to the subacute posterior point of attachment. Length of lorica from yhy tO yyy inch. Pond water, attached to various aquatic plants. Cryptoglena alata, sp. nov. Fig. 17.—Lorica obovate, colorless, less than twice as long as broad, the anterior region widest, the frontal border 1890.] 17 [Stokes. obliquely truncate ; the lateral margins thinned and projecting beyond the borders of the enclosed animalcule in a wing-like manner, the borders somewhat curved in opposite directions as seen when the Infusorian is examined ‘‘end on,”’ or with the anterior or posterior region presenting upward ; posterior border narrowed, obtusely rounded ; the dorsal and ventral aspects apparently encircled by a shallow transverse groove or depression, at times two ; anterior orifice circular, its walls comparatively thick, the two vibratile flagella passing out close to the lateral margins ; enclosed body elongate ovate, granular. Length of lorica yoy5 inch ; greatest width 355 inch. Hab.—Pond water in early spring. Furcilla, gen. nov.—Animalcules persistent in shape, free-swimming, the anterior border rounded or minutely and centrally pointed, the pos- terior extremity bifid, the bifurcation remote or approximate ; flagella two, subequal, arising close together from the anterior apex. The position of this newly instituted genus in a scheme of classification would probably be in the Heteromonadide of Biitschli, Goniomonas of Stein and the Amphimonas of Dujardin, having its affinities closer to those of the former than ofthe latter. Although the single known species of the genius was exceedingly abundant in the infusion, I have not seen the oral aperture in any, neither have I seen any in the act of taking food, nor observed any whose endoplasm contained colored granules or other pre- sumable food particles. I therefore assume, on these negative grounds alone, that the genus should be classed among the Flagellata-Pantosto- mata of Saville Kent. Furcilla lobosa, sp. nov. Figs. 18-21.—Body more or less ovate, less than twice as long as broad, or in dorsal and ventral view somewhat horse-shoe-shaped, the posterior region bifid, the bifurcation forming about one-half the entire length of the body, straight, somewhat diver- gent or slightly and inwardly curved, tapering and their extremities obtusely rounded ; anterior border convex, with a slight central acumina- tion from which arises the two subequal, vibratile flagella; the lateral borders bearing two rounded lobules or conspicuous protuberances, one on each side, oppositely placed and alternating with the elongated furcated region, the body in transverse optic section presenting an unequally quadrilobate outline, but in Jateral view more or less ovate with two opposite, lateral, obtusely rounded wing-like projections or protuberances ; flagella exceed- ing the body in length ; contractile vesicle double, near the centre of the frontal border ; nucleus single, located anteriorly near one lateral margin ; endoplasm granular, Length ,;5 to yyy inch. Hab. A vegetable infusion of decaying Alge and aquatic plants. Movements rotatory and tremulous, The body, as far as the prolongation and two lateral protuberances are concerned, is somewhat variable. The latter are, at times, so obscurely developed and are apparently so nearly merged into the anterior body- half that the region becomes subglobose. The posterior prolongations vary in curvature, in their distance apart, and somewhat in their extremi- ties, being at times rounded, at others subacute. The varying direction of Stokes. ] 78 [April 18, the furcation is such that they may slightly diverge, or be so closely approximated that their inner borders are almost in contact and broadly obovate in outline. Lagenophrys bipartita, sp. nov. Fig. 22.—Lorica subhemispherical, depressed ; dorsal surface rounded, ventral flattened, and surrounded horizontally by a depression that gives the adherent margin a projecting aspect as if bordered by a narrow rim, an internal membrane extending as a floor across the lorica at the position of the encircling constriction and dividing it into two unequal parts ; posterior border irregularly crenate, the surface obliquely striate or ridged ; the anterior valvular aperture small, the valves acuminate. Diameter of the lorica z4,; inch. Hab.— Ectoparasitic on Daphnia. This was taken abundantly adherent on the entomostracon mentioned, being observed in-a gathering made on January 19, 1890. The winter had been an exceptionally mild one, and this collection resembled collec- tions made in the early spring in the abundance, variety and activity of their microscopic life. Even the entomostraca were burdened by their usual load of infusorial parasites. This is the only member of the genus in which a “dividing membrane has been observed above the region adherent to the supporting object, and acting as a floor on which rests the soft body of the enclosed animalcule. This floor-like structure exists, and is readily demonstrated if the lorica can be detached uninjured from the host, as the writer has several times had the opportunity todo. The enclosed zooid seems to rest on this floor-like partition, being of course adherent at the anterior valvular orifice, as is commonly the structural arrangement with all the observed species. The projecting basal rim has a tendency to become brown, as is so frequently observed in many infusorial lorice, and its surface isirregularly crenulate. With advanced age it probably changes color entirely. Podophrya pusilla, sp. nov. Fig. 23.—Body subspherical, pedicle com- paratively stout, its length equaling about one-half the diameter of the body ; tentacles from twelve to fourteen, irregularly distributed, distinctly capitate, often twice as long as the diameter of the body ; contractile vesi- cle apparently single, situated near the centre of the frontal border: nucleus obscure, apparently subspherical ; endoplasm usually finely gran- ular. Diameter of the body y¢y, inch. Hab.—Pond water, attached to various aquatic weeds. Solenophrya oblonga, sp. nov. Fig. 24.—Lorica oblong, very much com- preseed, less than three times as long as broad, often tapering posteriorly, the lateral borders nearly straight, the posterior margin rounded or somewhat flattened, seemingly by the pressure of the supporting object ; anterior margins somewhat convex, not continuous but separated by a narrow interval, the lateral borders enlarged and rounded ; tentacles in two antoero-lateral fascicles, capitate; contractile vesicle single, small, located near the anterior border; nucleus ovate, slightly curved, placed subcentrally near one lateral border ; endoplasm granular, almost entirely | and 1890.] ‘9 [Stokes. filling the cavity of the lorica. Length z1, inch. Hab.—Standing pond water, attached to the rootlets of aquatic plants. Solenophrya alata, sp. nov. Fig 25.—Lorica, when viewed laterally, irregularly ovate, depressed, longitudinally traversed by five broad, thin, equidistant, perpendicular and anteriorly converging ale, their free mar- gins irregularly undulate, and their height varying, usually being greatest near their centre ; posterior border evenly convex, the anterior narrowly concave and alate. Lorica when viewed from above pentagonal, a longi- tudinally disposed ala originating from each angle, converging anteriorly . and meeting at the summit of the sheath which is apparently continuous - across the frontal region ; enclosed animalcule almost entirely filling the cavity of the lorica, the tentacles capitate, protruding through the ale ; endoplasm granular ; nucleus obscure, apparently ovate and subcentrally located ; contractile vesicle single, posteriorly placed near one border, Diameter of the lorica 5}5 inch, height 735 inch; length of each of the five sides ;},; inch. Hab.—Attached to the rootlets of Lemna. Apgaria purpurascens, sp. nov.—Body elongate ovate, longitudinally furrowed, anteriorly flattened, in general outline and aspect resembling A, elongata; endoplasm deep reddish purple in color; nucleus double, ovate, the nodules situated in the posterior and the anterior body-halves respectively, and connected by a funiculus ; contractile vesicle double, located near the posterior extremity. Length of mature forms ;}, inch, the length being from three to four times the width. Hab.—Pond water, and on the lower surface of water-lily leaves, near Minneapolis, Minn. _ This beautiful and interesting form was originally discovered by Dr. P. L. Hatch, of Minneapolis, where it was abundant, and specimens were kindly sent to me. From A. elongata, which it resembles in general contour, it differs widely in three important particulars : the remarkable deep purplish-pink color of the parenchyma, in the double nucleus with a funiculus connecting the nodules, and in the great size. A. elongata, the most nearly related species, is colorless, it has but a single nucleus, and is in size only about 5}, inch inlength. Reproduction with the form here referred to as Apgaria purpurascens takes place by transverse, often somewhat oblique, fission. ' Homalozoon (Spatos, flat; Fwov, body), gen. nov.—Animulcules free- swimming, hypotrichous, soft, flexible and elastic; elongate, much de- pressed, the anterior border obliquely rounded, thickened and abundantly supplied with trichocysts ; oral aperture terminal, very expansile ; no differ- entiated neck-like prolongation ; ventral surface flattened, entirely ciliated. In the Annals and Magazine of Nutural History for August, 1887, the writer described an Infusorian under the name of Litonotus vermicularis, relegating it to that generic group with much doubt and hesitation. In the Journal of the Trenton Natural History Society for January, 1888, the diagnosis is republished without comments, and without any expression of that doubt as to its proper position which was still felt by the writer. Recently another Infusorian closely related to the one here referred to, but differing from it specifically, has confirmed the opinion that the former Stokes. ] 80 [April 18, must, with the latter, be denied admission into the genus Zitonotus, and perhaps into the family Litonotide. The forms differ from the typical Litonotus in the absence of the neck-like prolongation, in the absence of the roundedand often conspicuously elevated dorsum, and especially in the position of the oral aperture, which in Litonotus is ventrally situated near the base of the neck, while in Homalozoon it is exactly apical and terminal. The Infusorian therefore formerly described by the writer under the name of Litonotus vermicularis is here transferred to the generic group now proposed for the reception of the two allied forms. Homalozoon vermiculare, Stokes.—Litonotus vermicularis, Stokes, Ann. and Mag. Nat, Hist., Aug., 1887 ; Journ. Trenton Nat. Hist. Soc., Jan., 1888. Homalozoon flexile, sp. nov.—Body elongate, from twelve to fifteen times as long as broad, widest centrally, tapering to the obtusely pointed posterior extremity, and to a slight anterior constriction beneath the thick- ened and obliquely rounded frontal border; cilia short and _ fine, arranged in longitudinal lines on the flattened ventral surface; dorsal aspect bearing numerous, minute, hispid sete ; trichocysts within the fron- tal extremity abundant and conspicuous, a few scattered throughout the anterior region ; contractile vesicles from twelve to fifteen, arranged in a series near one lateral border ; nucleus long, narrow, band-like, variously 2 curved ; endoplasm usually granular. Length of body yz}; to yy inch. Hab.—Pond water, with aquatic plants. _ This resembles Homalozvon vermiculare in contour, but differs in size, in the number of contractile vesicles, and especially in the form of the nucleus and the absence of a keel-like ridge traversing the dorsal aspect. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATE. Fig. 1 to 5. Various forms assumed by Mastigamceba reptans. ** 6. Heteromita fusiformis. aber " sf with amceboid protrusions. * 8. Heteromita triangularis. ** 9and 10. Two forms of Macromastix lapsa. ** 11. Trachelomonas cervicula. An empty lorica. ** 12. Trachelomonas similis. ; ‘13. Trachelomonas obovata. **14. Trachelomonas spinosa. “15. Epipyxis eurystoma. An empty lorica. ** 16. Epipyxis socialis. An empty lorica. ‘17. Cryptoglena alata. ** 18, Furcilla lobosa. 19. " ** Jateral view. ** 20, sig ‘* a variety. ae ) " ‘** transverse optic section ; diagram. ‘22. Lagenophrys bipartita, ** 28. Podophrya pusilla, ‘24, Solenophrya oblonga, 25. Solenophrya alata, Vol, XXVIII, No. 132. Proceedings Amer, Philos, Soc, Fresh-water Infusoria.—Stokes. i Ce bleed a 81 - The Asiatic Affinities of the Malay Language. 1890.] [Wake. By C. Staniland Wake. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 18, 1890.) The existence of a connection between the language of the Malagasy and that of the Malays is so evident that all matters relating to the latter people are of importance, as bearing on the question of the origin of the natives of Madagascar. ' The Malays would seem to be first mentioned in the Chinese annals, which refer to the existence, between the years 618 and 939 of our era, of eighteen small States, probably Shan, in Further India, north of the coun- try of the Malays. The Shans, to whom the Siamese are closely allied, were therefore preceded in that region by not only the Burmese, who are probably related to the Naga tribes, but also the allied Chams and Malays, whose affinities would be rather with the Mongolian peoples of India, now represented by the Kolarian tribes. This view is evidently supported by the statement of M. Vivien de Saint-Martin that there is a general and primitive relationship between the ‘‘ innumerable ramifications of the non- Aryan race of India and Indo-China,’’ The Rev. Dr. Mason and other writers have found a similarity between the language of the Mén of Tegu and that of the Mundakols of Chutia Nagpur, and Dr. Latham states that the Malay language is connected with the Mén, and therefore also with the Kolarian dialects of India, He associates with them, as belong- ing to the same group, the language of Cambodia. Mr. Cust agrees in allowing a relationship between M6n and Cambodian, but he classes the Malay language as a distinct family. Prof. A. H. Keane affirms, on the other hand, that the Khmer of Cambodia has nothing in common with the Kolarian except a few verbal resemblances through the Talaing, and that the Malay is ‘‘ unmixed in structure and fundamentally related to the Cambodian.’’ If we test these statements by reference to the numerals of those languages, we find that the Khmer differs from Malay and agrees with the Kolarian dialects. This is shown by the following table : Kolarian. Khmer. Malay. Talaing. Hos. Sontal. 1 muy mooa mi mia satu 2 pir ba bara baria dua 3. bey pee apia pia tiga 4 buon paun apania ponia ampat PROG. AMER, PHILOS, SOC, XXVIII. 182, K. PRINTED MAY 27, 1890, Wake.] - 82 [April 18, The Malay numeral ampat, four, is probably derived from the Kolarian, but some of the others are evidently of Dravidian origin. This is true doubtless of satu, one, which appears to be connected with Brahui asit, one, in Dravidian or-u, the r and s being interchangeable. The Malay numerals dalapan, eight, sambilan, nine, and sapula, ten, are certainly connected with the Dravidian. Dr. Caldwell remarks* that the classical Tamil grammars teach that pattu, ten, may in certain connections be written pahdu, from pag-u, to divide, which corresponds to pagwdt, classi- cal Tamil pal, a division. Thus the ancient Tamil orupukadu is oru pahdu, one ten. We have here the explanation of the Malay sapula, which likewise means ‘‘one ten,’”’ the word pula being evidently con- nected with the Dravidian numeral. The Malay word sambilan, nine, has a similar explanation. Dr. Caldwell explains the Tamil ondadu, nine, in Malayalam ombadu, as compounded of the ordinary Dravidian or, one, and padu, ten, and as having the meaning of “‘ one from ten.’’ The Malay sambilan has the same sense, and is compounded of sa(m), one, and pula (bilan), ten. Dr. Caldwell applies to the Dravidian numerals the rule “characteristic of the Scythian languages,’’ that they “use for eight and nine compounds which signify ten minus two and ten minus one.’’ This rule applies, as we have seen, to the Malay numeral nine, and it does so also to eight. Thus dalapan is compounded of dua, two, and pula, ten ; as in Telugu enimidi, ten, meaning ‘‘ two from ten,”’ is formed of ent, two, and midi, which is really identical with padi, ten. Prof. Keane refers to the Indo-Pacific numerals as common elements in the Malay and Polynesian Janguages ; he points out that in the Samoan sefalu, ten, we have a reduplication of the ‘‘ enunciative particle,” ‘the expression being really equivalent to sa-sa-falu, ‘a one-ten.’’” He says further that “‘the needless repetition shows that the original sense has long been lost : a further proof of the vast antiquity and independence of the Sawaiori [Polynesian] tongues.”’ Prof. Keane adds that as the ‘*com- mon elements in the Indo-Pacific languages are organic and not bor- rowed,’ these languages ‘‘form a linguistic family in the same sense that the Aryan or Semitic are linguistic families."” The evident connection between the Malay and the Dravidian numerals throws doubt, however, on that conclusion. Prof. Keane refers also to the Polynesian word for five, lima, which he supposes to have originally meant hund, as it still usually does, and he states that “ this meaning is lost in Malay, Javanese, Malagasy, etc., where lima, retained as a numeral, has been replaced in the sense of hand by tanghan, tahan, etc.’” So far, however, from the Malay having exchanged lima for tanghan, the probability is that it never used the former word in the sense of “hand ;’’ as tanghan or an allied form is thus used by the Asiatic peoples to whom the Malays are most closely related. This view is not inconsistent with the remarks on the numeral “ five’’ in the Dravidian languages made by Dr. Caldwell, who suggests that it might be derived from ei, in Tamil a hand, Probably * Grammar of the Dravidian Languages, p. 248, 1875.. 1890. 83 - [Wake, the Dravidian word for hand, in Gond kaik, as well as the numeral five, saighan in Gond, and the Malay tanghan are derived from a common root meaning ‘‘hand.’’ It is noticeable that in Samoan the word lima is not used in speaking of a chiet’s hand. This is ‘a ‘ao, in other Polynesian dia- lects kakao, which is the original form, and is evidently allied to the words just referred to. The origin of the word lima is probably to be sought in the languages of Cochin China, in which the numeral five is narw or laru, unless it is derived from the Shan dialects, which have the word mu or mi for ‘‘hand.’’ The Malay would seem to have taken its numerals ‘‘two ”’ and ‘‘three ’’ from the same source as that to which it was indebted for the word tanghan. In the Tungus languages “‘ five’ is tonga, ora slightly differing form of this word, and in the same languages we have dzur, dzhoua, dyul, dyur for ‘‘two,’’ and ela, gilang, ilan for ‘‘ three,’’ answer- ing to the Malay dua and tiga, which in Polynesian become lua and tolu, The consideration of the numeral systems of the Malay and Cambodian does not support the conclusion that these languages are of the same fam- ily. Prof. Keane refers, however, to a feature possessed by both of them, which he considers so peculiarly distinctive as of itself alone almost to be sufficient to establish their common origin. This is the use of identical tnfixes.* It should be noted, however, that this important feature is not met with in the Polynesian dialects, which employ a prefixt instead, al- though it is found in all the true Malayan dialects, and is especially fre- quent in those of the Philippine islands. Prof. Keane does not give the origin of this ‘‘ Malayan feature,’’ as it is termed by the Rev. L. Dahle, who first pointed out its presence in Malagasy. It is somewhat difficult to understand how the use of infixes can be universal in Malay, but nct be met with in Polynesian, if, as Prof. Keane supposes, those languages form one family with the ‘ polysyllabic untoned languages of Indo- China,’’ which the Malays are said to have acquired. If the Polynesian and Cambodian languages belong to the same family, that feature must either have been developed after their separation or have been acquired by the latter from a foreign source. When we consider that the use of infixes is essentially Malayan, we are tempted to believe that it has been taken by the Cambodian from the Malay or an allied language, such as the Cham. The latter opinion is supported by certain other characters of the Khmer tongue. This is classed by Mr. Keane with the ** polysyllabic untoned languages,’’ and rightly so inasmuch as the Khmer is pronounced recto-tono ; although the same word has several significations, the sense of ‘the phrase alone giving the true signification. According to M. Moura, however, the Cambodian language is really monosyllabic. He says ex- pressly, ‘‘like all the languages and idioms spoken in our days by the peoples of the extreme East, the Cambodian is a monosyllabic language.”’ * Prof. Keane says that the infix is always the Send m or n or mn, with or without the vowels a, 0 with m, or a, i with n. Tt The Samoan prefz is mo. Wake.] 84 [April 18, He adds, ‘‘in books of poetry, theology and even sometimes in ordinary language, a certain number of polysyllabic words are found, but these words are generally of Sanskrit or Pali origin, and prove nothing against the general character of the language.’’? M. Moura cites various words which have been derived from the Pali, and which could be indefinitely added to. He states that they have been shortened, so as to reduce them as much as possible to the monosyllabic form, ‘‘ which is one of the dis- tinctive features of the genius of the Khmer language.’’ If this language is in reality monosyllabic, Prof. Keane’s argument, based on its polysyl- labic character, cannot be sustained, but even if M. Moura is wrong, we must conclude that the Khmer has been indebted for certain of its features to the Malay rather than the reverse. As to the verbal relationship between the Khmer and Malay languages we may judge from the comparative vocabularies contained in M. Moura’s work. Of the 124 words there given only twenty-four are the same in those languages, of which sixteen are however the same also in Cham, which has thirteen other words common to it and Khmer alone. It ap- pears, therefore, that Cham is more nearly related to Khmer, judging from their vocabularies than is Malay. This agrees with the fact of the early communication between the Khmers and the Cham. Moreover, Malay and Cham agree in thirty-three instances out of the 124, showing a closer relation between these two languages than exists between either of them and Khmer. That all these languages include both Kolarian and Dravidian elements is shown by reference to the short comparative vocab- ulary appended to this paper. Those elements have, however, been derived from different sources. M. Moura would, indeed, seem to think that the language as well as the written character of the Cambodians is derived from the Sanskrit and Pali, and it has no doubt obtained its tor- eign element chiefly from the north. The Malay, on the other hand, is fundamentally related to the Kolarian and the allied Mongolian lan- guages, and its Dravidian element has been obtained from the south. This feature occupies a more important position in Malay than Dr. Caldwell appears to allow. When referring to the Dravidian word krpp.al, a ship, he says that the Malay word for ‘‘ship’’ is kapal. He adds, however, that ‘this has probably been borrowed direct from Tamil, and forms one of a small class of Malay words which have sprung from a Dravidian origin, and which were introduced into the Eastern archipelago, either by means of the Klings (Kalingas), who settled there in primitive times, or by means of the Arab traders, whose first settlers in the East were on the Malabar coast, where the Malaydlam, the oldest daughter of the Tamil, is spoken.’’ Reference has already been made to the Dravidian origin of some of the Malay numerals, to which may be added that the affix ¢w in Malay satu, one, appears to be only the neuter formative du, which, according to Dr. Caldwell, is contained in various shapes in the first three Dravidian numerals, Moreover, the Malay sa, like the Dravidian oru, one, is used as the indefinite article, Other verbal agreements could be 1890] 85 [Wake. mentioned, but I will refer to only one other example. Dr. Caldwell states that i is the classical Tamil word for ‘‘fire,’’ but that the more commonly used word is neruppu, in Telugu nippu. Here we have, no doubt, the origin of the Malay api (in Samoan afi), which in Cham takes the form apui. Dr. Leyden long since pointed out that the language of the Malays contains a great number of Tamil, Malayalam and Telinga words which are not found in Sanskrit or the allied Indian languages, and particularly ‘‘a variety that are only to be found in Telinga,’’ the ver- nacular of the ancient kingdom of Kalinga.* * Asiat. Researches, Vol. x, p. 171. Water = S ceewe caon ~ 3 KHMER CHAM. sat hor Dravidian k6r-i chim po (see Egg) Persian _ khor-os(coex) chhké Tibetan khyi asau Sanskrit swan : Hindi kootha Kolarian séta trachick Tibetan(Sok) khikhé tanhu Naga tenhaun Kolarian khetway (see Malay) pong Yeniseian ong bo Kolarian pito phnek Dravidian kank mata Kolarian met panék Hindi ankh Mon (Tegu) mot nhi Dravidian henn-u benai Dravidian pen,henn-u phlung Kolarian sengel apui Dravidian uippu trey Kolarian hai akan Kolarian haku Burmese kha ehung Tibetan kango takai Kolarian kata Mon (Pegn) jaing day Kolarian tih tangun Yeneseian hanga Dravidian kei kabal Sanskrit kapdla akak Dravidian kuk Dravidian tala Burm, (Sak) akhu sé Tibetan ta asé (see Khmer) Sanskrit aswa ptea Drav.(Gond) erpa sang Tibetan nang menus pros. Pati manut oranglokayKolarian koro, lokka Sanskrit manusha A ke 2 Paes la bulan Kolarian lerung Shan len ? mot Kolarian tamode chebuoi ? Yeneseian hohui, bu- Bengali mukh [khom ehrémo Mongolian khamar adung Yeneseian hang Siamese tamua Sanskrit ghrana {ma, elu-mbu ka Sanskrit go (cow) lama Dravidian eruma, er- tanla Dravidian kole sungai CochinChina song Nepaul khola Mongolian uhung(wa- foo Sit Nep.(Tharu)sapa ala (see Malay) [ter) n) Dravidian pab, pavu Burmese mo singi (sun) pakai Drav.(Gond) binka bintang Dravidian binka thma Mon (Pegu) tmauon botau (see Egg) thngai Kolarian singi haray Mongolian nara tangai (see fire) Sanskrit sdrya tenk, tak Kolarian dah ea Dravidian yer Mon (Pegu) dai ehhu Dravidian chettu (tree) | kayou —- Dravidian chettu,gida muy Kolarian mia Dravidian or-u Brahut as-it ir do. daria dua Tungusian dzur, dyur buon do. ponia pac Kolarian ponia, apa- Tonkin lam jému Tonkin lam [nia pram *} ‘4 . = Tungusian sail pram nam cid on tuju Dravidian edu, yetu pram bey dopan (two from ten) pram buon samlan Dravidian onbadu (one from ten) dap Dravidian pada saphu Dravidian ora padu Tonkin tap (one ten) Sse 8 B® RBRE Horse Sweomsaanrone MALAY. SAMOAN. .| burang tarbeang manu Fiji manumanu moa (fowl) Khmer mon (fowl) anjing Dravidian nf&y uti, maile Fiji koli asu (Java) Singhalese balla talinga Naga telanno taliga Fiji daliga Arakan (Kumi), kano kana (Java) Singpho kana Sanskrit sila (stone) talor Dravidian kal (stone) fua Fiji vua (fruit) Koreng talo (stone) mata (see Cham) mata Fiji mata botina (see Cham) fafine api Dravidian nippu afi That fai ikan (see Cham) ia koki Kolarian kata yae Dayak pai Trbetan kango Fiji yava Permian kok : tangan (see Cham) lima ? Siamese mu . ‘a’ao (chief's) Fiji liga kapala Sanskrit kapdla ulu ulu Dravidian tala Arakan (Kumi) ali Z kudo Dravidian kudirei Yeneseian kut ruma Dravidian (Gond) roon | fale Arakan (Kumi) im Kolarian ora orang koki (see Cham) tane,tugata Fiji tagane, tamata bulan (see Cham) ma-uli, ma-sina Fiji vula mulot (see Khmer) gutu Fiji gusu Arakan (Kumi) amoké Singhalese kata hidong (see Cham) isn Fiji ucu a Sanskrit - nasa lambu (see Cham) singei (see Cham) vaitafe (see Water) ulor gata ? Siamese ngu kulet (skin) uli (skin at Dravid, tol -| langet (see Cham) lagi Fiji lagi bintang (see Cham) feta (see Khmer) botu Kolarian pito (egg) fatu Fiji vatu mato hari (see Cham) la Fiji siga Kolarian singi ayor (see Cham) vai “ taufa sailiant FUG. waa kayu (see Cham) la‘au Fiji kau (tree) Eskimo keiyu sdtu tasi Malagasy iray, isa dia lua mee roa tiga tolu do. telo ampat (Bugis apa) fa do. efatra lima lima do. dimy a/nam ono do. enina tijoh fitu do. fito delapan valu do. valo sambilan iva do. sivy saptiloh sefulu do. folo 88 [Feb. 21, Stated Meeting, February 21, 1890. Present, 23 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Letters of envoy were received from the Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science, Halifax; Museum of -Compara- tive Zodlogy, Cambridge, Mass. ; Depdrtsent of the Lausicer Washington, D.C. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Natur- wissenschaftlicher Verein, Bremen (12%); Entomological So- ciety, Brooklyn (130); University of the City of New York (130); Prof. Henry M. Baird, Yonkers (130); Dr. Charles C. Abbott, ‘l'renton, N. J. (180); Dr. F. A. Genth, Prof. Lewis M. Haupt, Dr. George H. Horn, John Marshall, Hon. Henry Reed (130), Prof. John A. Ryder, Philadelphia (125, 130); State Historical Society, Topeka, Kans, (130); University of California, Prof. John Le Conte, Berkeley, Cal. (180); Mr. George Davidson, San Francisco, Cal. (180). A circular from the Sociedade de Geografia, of Lisbon, em- bodying a protest against the English aggressions in Africa. The Section fiir Naturkunde des (Esterreichen-Touristen - Club was placed on the Society’s exchange list to receive Proceedings from No. 130. Accessions to the Library were announced from the Geolog- ical Survey of India, Calcutta; K. K. Sternwarte, Prag; ' Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Vienna; Verein fiir Erdkunde, Metz; Statistika Central Byran, Stockholm; Prof. Lorenzo M. Billia, Turin; Societé D’Ethnographie, Ministeré des Tra- vaux Publics, Mr. Henry Carnoy, Paris; Royal Society, Lon- don; Mr. William H. Whitmore, Boston; Harvard Univer- sity, Cambridge, Mass.; Yale University, New Haven; Astor Library, New York; State Museum of Natural History, Albany; Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Editor of “American Notes and Queries,” Dr. George H. Horn, Mr, Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University, 1890.] 89 Baltimore; War Department, Department of the Interior, Washington, D. C.; Rev. Stephen D. Peet, Mendon, IIl.; State Historical Society of Wisconsin, Madison; State Uni- versity of Iowa, Iowa City. Prof. John A. Ryder presented his photograph for the Soci- ety’s Album. Prof. Lesley read an obituary notice of the late Charles A. Ashburner, D.Sc. The Proceedings of the Board of Officers and Council were submitted. Pending nominations, Nos. 1203, 1204, 1205, 1206, 1207 and 1208 were read, spoken to and balloted for. Prof. E. D. Cope made some observations on the gigantic chincilla of North America, Casteroides ohioensis. The annual report of the Trustees of the Building Fund was presented. Prof. Cope offered the following resolution, which, he stated, was intended to supersede the one presented by him to Coun- cil at its meeting last week, and by it deferred until its next stated meeting : Resolwed, That the Proceedings of the Society be issued whenever an amount of matter is ready for press which will make seventy-five pages of text. On motion, the resolution was referred to thé next regular meeting of the Board of Officers and Council. The Committee on Accommodations reported progress and was continued, All other business of the meeting having been finished, the Tellers reported the result of the poll to the President, who thereupon declared that the following gentlemen had been duly elected members of the Society : No. 2175. Hon. James T. Mitchell, Philadelphia. No. 2176. Samuel Timmins, Arley near Coventry, England. No. 2177. Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Haverford College, Pa. No. 2178. Prof. Henry Willis, Philadelphia. And the Society was adjourned by the President. PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC, XXVIII. 182. L. PRINTED MAY 27, 1890. 90 [March7, Stated Meeting, March 7, 1890. Present, 10 members. — Mr. RicHARD VAUX in the Chair. Prof. Henry Willis, a newly elected member, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters accepting membership from Prof. Robert W. Rogers and from Prof. Henry Willis, Philadelphia. Letters of envoy were received from the Museo Nacional de Buenos Aires; Royal Statistical Society, London. Letters of ackuanledeeiiiad were received from Sir J. W. Dawson, Montreal (180); University of Pennsylvania (129, 130), Mrs. Helen Abbott Michael (130), - Prof. Henry D. Gregory (130), Philadelphia ; sauces Historical Society, Baltimore (1380). A letter from the Department of State in rolasariti to cer- tain MSS. in the possession of the Society was ordered to be filed. A letter was read from E. Frank Carson, requesting the loan of the Society’s Hall for an approaching reunion of the Ritten- house family, to be held April 8, 1890, being the 168th anni- versary of his birth; and also requesting that the Society should be represented on the occasion, which, on motion, was referred to the President with power to act. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Académie des Sciences, Cracow, Austria; Section fiir Naturkunde, O C., Vienna; Verein fiir Liibeckische Geschichte und Alter- thumskunde, Liibeck, Germany ; Société Hollandaise des Sci- ences, Harlem, Holland; Philological Society, Cambridge, England; Rousdon Observatory, Devon, England; Geological, Royal Statistical Societies, London; Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada, Montreal; Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass; Mr. Charles J. Hoadley, Hartford, Conn.; Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Philadelphia; Wyoming Historical Society, Wilkes-Barré ; Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore; i i i i ll i i) 1890.] 91 U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Bureau of Ethnology, Inter- state Commerce Commission, Washington, D.C.; Kansas Acad- emy of Science, Topeka; University of California, Berkeley ; Observatorio Meteorologico-Central, Mexico; Museo Nacional de Buenos Aires, 8. A. Mr. Phillips exhibited and presented to the Cabinet of the Society a bottle of “ Earthquake sand from the Geysers at Summerville, S. C., August 31, 1886.” Mr. Vaux read an obituary notice of the late Franklin B. Gowen. An obituary notice of the late Henry S. Frieze, LL.D., by Hon. James B. Angell, was presented by the Secretaries. The death of Martin B. Anderson (formerly of Rochester, N. Y.) was reported as having taken place at Lake Helena, Florida, on February 26, 1890 (born February 12, 1815), Prof. Barker exhibited to the Society four stellar photo- graphs taken by Prof. Pickering, Director of the Harvard College Observatory, as a part of the Henry Draper Memorial. The photographs were of the spectrum of the star # Aurigz, and showed the K line single in the first set and double in the second, although taken only about seventeen hours apart. This result appears to show that this star is binary, its com- ponents revolving about each other in somewhat less than four days. From the displacement of the components of the K line, the change in wave length and the velocity of motion may be calculated. Prof. Pickering finds this velocity to be 150 miles per second. The distance apart of the components he estimates to be eight million miles, and their joint mass about 2.8 times that of the sun. Since the spectrum method of detecting binary stars is independent of distance, it must always have an advantage in detecting such stars over the telescopic method. Dr. Brinton offered the following resolution, which was adopted : ' Resolved, That the Committee on the Commemoration of the Death of Franklin be instructed to select all speakers on that occasion from mem- bers of the Society, and if engagements of others have already been made, 92 | [Maren 21, that they be informed that owing to alterations in the plan of the com- memoration, the thanks of the Society are tendered them, but their attend- ance will not be expected. Dr. Horn offered the following resolution, which was adopted: Resolved, That a Committee of three be appointed by the President to examine an oil portrait of Prof. S. F. Baird by Mr. H. Ulke, report on its desirability, and, if favorably, to solicit subscriptions for its purchase at a price not exceeding $200, for the gallery of this Society. The President subsequently appointed as such Committee, Dr. George H. Horn and Messrs. J. Sergeant Price and Wil- liam A. Ingham. And the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. Stated Meeting, March 21, 1890. Present, 30 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Prof. Robert W. Rogers and Mr. Talcott Williams, lately elected members, were presented to the Chair and took their seats. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters from Hon. James T. Mitchell and Mr. Samuel Tim- mins accepting membership. A cireular from the University of Toronto, requesting dona- tions to its library, to replace the one destroyed by fire on the 14th of February last; on motion, the Librarian was directed to forward to it such of the Proceedings of the Society as could be sent. : A letter from the Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Emden, Hannover, thanking the Society for its letter of congratulation , on the late celebration of the seventy-fifth anniversary of its foundation. 1890,] 93 A letter from the Trinity Historical Society, Dallas, Tex., asking for autograph letters. A letter from the Societas linguam universalem scientiarum ac negotiorum ancillam fundantium Internationalis. A prospectus of the “ Antananarivo Annual,” published in Madagascar. The Museo Michoacano, Morelia, Mexico, was placed on ex- change list from No. 96. Letters of acknowledgment (Transactions, xvi, 8) were re- ceived from the Boston Public Library; Museum of Compara- tive Zodlogy, Cambridge; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester; Buffalo Library; Astor Library, New York; Library U. S. Military Academy, West Point; New Jersey Historical Society, Newark; Pennsylvania Hospital, Franklin Institute, Library Co. of Philadelphia, Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia; State Library of Pennsylvania, Harrisburg; U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.; University of Michigan; State Historical Society of Wiscon- sin, Madison; University of California, Berkeley. Letters of acknowledgment (Proceedings, 130) were received from Prof. William P. Trowbridge, New York; Mr. Inman Horner, Philadelphia; Colorado Scientific Society, Denver; Central Meteorological Observatory, Mexico; Deutscher Wis- senschaft Verein, Santiago de Chile. Accessions to the Library were reported from the K, K. Zool.-botanische Gesellschaft, Vienna; Verein zur Befirderung des Gartenbaues, Berlin; Dr. Paul Topinard, Paris; Royal Institution, Dr. Beniamin W. Richardson, London; Hon. John Canon O'Hanlon, Dublin; Massachusetts Bureau of Statistics of Labor, Boston; Mercantile Library, Drs. Daniel G. Brinton, F, A. Miihlenberg, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Editor of “ American Journal of Philology ;” Legation de la Republica de Costa Rica, C. A.; Chief of Engineers, Depart- ment of State, Washington, D.C.; Museo Michoacano, Morelia, _ Mexico. A photograph of the alleged Runic characters on Mananas island, near Monhegan, Maine, phohoerep ee and presented by Prof. J. F. Rothrock, Philadelphia. 94 (March 21, A letter from Rev. F. A. Miihlenberg, D.D., accompanying his donation of the botanical note books of his grandfather, Rev. Henry E. Miihlenberg, a former member of this Society, and the letters to him of Rev. Christian Fr. Denke, a Moravian missionary.* Botanical Journals, etc., by Dr. Henry E. Muhlenberg ; born Novy. 17, 1753, died at Lancaster, Pa., May 23, 1815; presented to the American Philosophical Society, of which he was a member, by his grandson, Dr. F. A. Muhlenberg, March 21, 1890: 1. Botanice. 2. Book of descriptions, without title. 8. Plants not determined,: according to Linneeus’ System, etc., 1788. 4. Folia plantarum Lancast. and a catalogue of the plants of North America, 1808. 5. Tage Buch, 1784. 6. Tage Buch, 1785. 7. Noten Buch, 1785. 8. Tage Buch, 1786-89. 9. Catalogus arborum et fruticum Americe Septentrionalis. 10. Cryptogamia Lancastriensis, 1791. _ I. Filices. II. Musci. Ill. Fungi. contains, also, Lichens Lancastriensis, etc. * There is no autobiography in existence of Christian Fr. Denke ; but, from informa- tion gained from conversations with Denke and others, a biographical sketch of Chris- tian Heinrich Denke was published in ‘‘ Nachrichten aus der Briider Gemeinde,’’ 1841, Heft ili, pages 467-477. (The name Heinrich is either a mistake, or possibly Denke may have been baptized Christian Friedrich Heinrich. I have not yet examined the baptis- mal records in Bethlehem). Denke was born at Bethlehem, Pa., September 8, 1775, and was sent to Nazareth Hall in 1785, remained there after his father's death, and afterwards was appointed one of the teachers. In 1797, he resolved to become a missionary among the Indians. After having been ordained Deacon in Bethlehem, he left May, 1800, with Heckewaelder for Gosen on the Muskiagum, remained here until August, studying the: Delaware language, and then went to Fairfield in Upper Canada, commencing in June, 1801, his labors among the Chippeways. He translated into the Delaware language vari- ous parts of the Bible, of which the Epistles of 8. John were printed. In 1808, he re- turned to Pennsylvania, married August 7, at Lititz, Anna Maria Heckedorn, went back to Canada, 1804 to Youngquakamick, 1807 to Pettquoting, then back to Fairfield. After the burning of Fairfield in autumn, 1813, he fled to Delawaretown. In September, 1815, he began to bulld New Fairfield, but returned to Bethlehem in 1818, Receiving a call as pastor to Hope, in the Wachau, he reached Salem, N. Car,, in summer, 1820 ; in 1822, he became pastor at Friedberg, but retained charge also of the small congregation in Hope. His wife died In 1828, and September 12, he married Marie Steiner. 1832, he retired from his spiritual labors, and intended to again devote his time to botany and’ other branches of natural science, 1834, symptoms of dropsy appeared; his right side was paralyzed in November, 1837, and he died at Salem, January 12, 1838. Joun M, Maser, 1890.] 95 11. Agrostographia Pennsylvanie, etc. 12. Griser, die bei Lancaster wild wachsen oder die ich sonst auf meinen inlandischen Reisen bemerkte. 18. Planiwe cryptogamice Lancastriensis, etc. 14. Fungi Pennsylvanie, Mediz, etc., 1793 et anni seq. 15. Monographien von Gewichsen von Lancaster, 1790, Vol. i. 16. Monographien plantarum Lancastriensis, Vol. ii. 17. Descriptio ,plantarum ex alies partibus Americe Septentrionalis, incepta a 1792. 18, Sammlung von Beltrégen zur Kenntniss der Natur, 1785. With . observations on agriculture. 19, Fortsetzung meines Journals von Jahren 1799-1806. 20. Botanical Journal, 1807-1815, to May 20, three days before his death. 21. Flora Lancastriensis, 1790. 22. Letters, etc., of the Rev. C. F. Denke, Moravian preacher and missionary, and one of the early botanists of America. Prof. Lesley read an obituary notice of the late Leo Les- quereux. The death was announced of Rey. Daniel R. Goodwin, D.D., Philadelphia, on March 15, 1890, in the seventy-ninth year of his age. On motion, the President was authorized to appoint a suita- ble person to prepare the usual obituary notice. Mr. J. Vaughan Merrick was subsequently appointed by the President. The death of Dr. Gustav Weil, Heidelberg, September 10, 1889, et. 71, was also announced. The Secretaries presented for the Proceedings the two fol- lowing papers by Dr. Harrison Allen: “ Description of a New Species of Macrotus” and “ Description of a New Species of Pteropus.” New nomination 1209 was read. Dr. Horn, from the Committee on the Portrait of Prof. Baird by H..Uhlke, reported it now at Earle’s Galleries in this city, and to be a good painting. On motion, the Committee was continued, Dr. Oliver, from the Committee on Franklin Celebration, reported progress, The President of the Society reported that he had conferred 96 [March 21, with the writer of the letter to the Society respecting the Rittenhouse celebration (March 7, 1890), and that he was of the opinion that such a use of the Society’s Hall as was therein . requested, was not expedient. Dr. Brinton asked as a question of privilege what action the Committee on the Franklin Celehration had taken on the So- ciety’s resolution passed at the last meeting. Mr. Biddle, of the Committee, stated it had been carefully and respectfully considered, and that after two meetings it-had been laid over until the next meeting. Dr. Horn offered the following preamble and resolution: Having been present at the meeting of March 7, and voting in the affir- mative, I move to reconsider the following resolution passed at that time: Resolved, That the Committee on the Commemoration of the Death of Franklin be instructed to select all speakers on that occasion from members of the Society, and if engagements of others have already been made, that they be informed that owing to alterations in the plan of the com- memoration, the thanks of the Society are tendered them, but their attend- ance will not be expected. The motion was seconded by Dr. Brinton, and the question was discussed by Messrs. Horn, Brinton, Oliver, Biddle, Morris, Vaux, Martindale, Potts, Cope, Lesley, and Greene. The question being put it was agreed that the Society should reconsider the original motion. . The original motion then being put, by a.viva voce vote was not agreed to. On which the ayes and nays being demanded the resolution was voted on and not agreed to by 26 nays to 2 ayes. Dr. Jayne offered the following resolution, which was agreed to: Resolved, That the Secretaries be requested to communicate with the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty with a view to obtaining as a — donation the Reports on the Voyage of the Challenger. And, further, should such application prove unsuccessful, that the Committee on Library should procure the same by purchase, And the Society was adjourned by the President, 1890.} 97 No MEETING of the Society was held on April 4, 1890, it being Good Friday. Aprit 17, 1890. _ The One-hundredth Anniversary of the death of Benjamin Franklin was commemorated at Association Hall, by the Society. Addresses were delivered as follows: A Short Biography of Dr. Franklin, by John Bach McMas- ter, Professor of American History in the University of Penn- sylvania ; “ His Literary Labors,” by G. Brown Goode, Assist- ant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, at Washington ; “His Scientific Work,” by Prof. J. W. Holland, Professor of Medical Chemistry and Toxicology in the Jefferson Medical College; ‘His Association With the Society,” by Frederick Fraley, LL.D., President of the Society; “His Diplomatic Services,” by Prof. Henry M. Baird, Professor of English Lit- erature and Greek in the University of the City of New York. A full account will be published in Proceedings, No. 183. Stated Meeting, April 18, 1890. Present, 14 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters of envoy were received from the Australasian Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science, Sydney ; Societas Pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors; Observatoire Astrono- mique et Physique, Tashkend; Physikalische Gesellschaft, Berlin; Bureau des Longitudes, Paris; Bath and West of PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 182, M. PRINTED MAY 26, 1890, 98 [April 18, England Society and Southern Counties Association, Bath; Meteorological Office, London. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal Society of New South Wales, Sydney (129); Academie Royale Danoise des Sciences, ete., Copenhagen (128, 129); Natural History Society, Montreal (129, 130); Sociedad Cientifica “ Alzate,’’ Mexico (129, 180). Letters of acknowledgment (180) were received from the K. K. Central-Anstalt fiir Meteorologie, etc., Wien; Naturfor- schende Gesellschaft, Emden; Naturwissenschaftliche Gesell- schaft “Isis,” Dresden; Dr. Julius Platzmann, Leipzig; So- ciété Linneenne de Bordeaux ; Société de Borda, Dax; Société d’Anthropologie, Profs. Abel Hovelacque, Léon de Rosny, Rémi Siméon, Paris; Geological and Natural History Survey, Ottawa, Canada; Mr. Talcott Williams, Philadelphia; Prof. S. P. Langley, Washington, D. C.; California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. A letter of acknowledgment for diploma was received from Prof. Dr. Hugo Von Meltzel, Koloszvar, Hungary. A letter of acknowledgment, Transactions, Vol. xvi, Part iii, was received from the San Francisco Free Public Library, San Francisco, Cal. A letter from Daniel F. Wolf, suggesting that the tombstone of Franklin should be re-lettered and a bronze tablet placed on the graveyard wall with a suitable inscription. The following letter from M. P. Massion (Notaire, Boule- vard Haussmann, 58, Paris, France) was read : P, Massron, Paris, le 31 Mars, 1890. NOTAIRE, SUCCESSEUR DE SON PRRE 58, BouLEVARD HaussMANN. MONSIEUR LE PRESIDENT : J’ai l'honneur de vous informer qu’aux termes de son testament déposé en mon étude, Monsieur Auguste Carlier, décédé en son domicile & Paris, rue de Berlin, N* 12, le 16 Mars courant, a légué & la Société Philosoph- ique de Philadelphie, dont il était membre, une somme de vingt mille francs, Oette Société en fera l’usage qu'elle jugera convenable pour l’alder dans ses travaux, 1890.] . 99 Quand cette somme pourra étre mise 4 votre disposition, je vous en aviserai, : Veuillez agréer, Monsieur le President, l’assurance de mes sentiments distin gués, MAassIon. MONSIEUR LE PRESIDENT DE LA SOCIBTE PHILOSOPHIQUE, PHILADELPHIE. On motion, the letter was referred to the Committee on Fi- nance, and the President was requested to prepare and transmit a suitable answer to the same. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Royal So- ciety of New South Wales, Australian Association for the Advancement of Science, Sydney; Société des Naturalistes, Kief; Observatoire Astronomique et Physique, Tashkend; Societas Pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors, Finland ; K. K. Naturhistorisches Hof-Museum, K. K. Geographische Ge- sellschaft, K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt, Wien; Gesell- schaft fiir Erdkunde, Physikalische und Physiologische Gesell- schaft, K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin; Mr. A. Radcliffe Grote, Bremen; Oberlausitzer Gesellschaft der Wis- senschaften, Gérlitz; Mr. Aug. Nilson, Gefle, Sweden; K. Danske Videns Rabernes Selskab, Copenhagen; “Flora Ba- tava,” Leyden; R. Istituto, Lombardo, Milan; Accademia Reale delle Scienze, Turin; Corpo delle Miniere, Servizio Geo- logico, R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome; R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettre ed Arti, Venice; Société Historique, etc., du Cher, Bourges; Société de Borda, Dax; Académie des Sciences, ete., Dijon; Sociétés d’Anthropologie, Zoologique de France, Bureau des Longitudes, Paris; Société des Antiqua- ries de la Morinie, Saint-Omer; R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid; Commission des Travaux Geologiques de Portugal, Lisbon; Bath and West of England Society, and Southern Counties Association, Bath ; Philosophical Society, Cambridge, Eng.; Meteorological Council, London; Mr. Horatio Hale, Clinton (Ontario), Canada; Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Cambridge, Mass.; Essex Institute, Public Library, Salem; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester ; Rhode Island His- torical Society, Providence; Commissioners of the State Reser- 100 [April 18, vation at Niagara, Albany; Academy of Sciences, Dr. J. 5S. Newberry, Mr. J. Bleecker Miller, Messrs. Ivison, Blakeman & Co., New York; Mr. Franklin Leonard Pope, Elizabeth, N. J.; Academy of Natural Sciences, Mercantile Library, Messrs. Edwin A. Barber, W.C. Blelock, D. G. Brinton, E. D. Cope, Walter M. James, Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Maryland Academy of Sciences, Baltimore; U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Fish Commission, Geological Survey, Bureau of Edu- cation, Smithsonian Institution, Secretary of War, Dr. Albert S. Gatschet, Hon. Charles O’Neill, Washington, D. C. Mrs. Jane Rittenhouse Wilson presented a cornelian said to have been formerly worn by Dr. Benjamin Franklin, of which she gave the following account : Benjamin Franklin, during his attendance at the Convention that adopted the Declaration of Independence, wore a certain watch chain on which was a cornelian charm, This chain and charm he gave toa personal friend, a veteran of the war of 1812, named Daniel Leman, who gave it to his friend, Mrs, JANE RITTENHOUSE WILSON, One of the Rittenhouse family. The following deaths were reported : M. Louis A. OC. Carlier, Paris, March 19, 1890, set. 87. Mr. Frederick Graff, Philadelphia, March 80, 1890, eet. 73. On motion, the President was requested to appoint suitable persons to prepare the usual obituary notices, A paper on “Fresh Water Infusoria,” by Dr. Alfred ©, Stokes (Trenton, New Jersey), was presented through the Secretaries. A paper on the “ Asiatic Affinities of the Malay Language,” ; by O. Staniland Wake, was presented by the Secretaries, Pending nomination No. 1209 and new nominations Nos, 1210, 1211 and 1212 were read. 1890.] 101 The Committee on Extended Accommodations presented the following Report : PuHILADELPHIA, April 16, 1890. The Committee on Extended Accommodations, appointed January 17, would respectfully report, That they have carefully considered the various propositions referred to them ; and after due deliberation, concluded to request from J. M. Wilson, Esq., Architect, plans for the alteration of the present building, such as would render it completely fire-proof, harmonize with its surroundings, and provide for the Society’s present needs as well as its prospective ones for a period of at least twenty years to come. He has submitted the accompanying plans and proposal, the adoption of which we would recommend : and therefore offer the following reso- lution : That the Committee on Extended Accommodations be continued and empowered to enter into negotiations for alterations to the present build- , ings in accordance with the plan now submitted. W. P. Taruam, RicHarD VAvx, FREDERICK FRALEY, J. Cueston Morris, Chairman. A discussion ensued upon the subject, in which Messrs. Mor- ris, Hays, Baker, Dudley, Vaux, Tatham, Potts and others took part. Dr. Hays moved that the subject be made the special order for the next stated meeting and that notice thereof be put on the meeting cards. : Mr. Vaux moved that the subject be considered at a special meeting, to be held on next Friday (April 25), and that notice should be placed on the meeting cards, and further that the Librarian should place on the cards the words “ the plans can be examined at the rooms of the Society.” Mr. Vaux’s motion was carried nem. con. On motion, the Treasurer was authorized and empowered to satisfy a mortgage of William J. Norris for $4000, the same having been paid off. And the Society was adjourned by the President. 102 [April 25, Special Meeting, April 25, 1890. Present, 27 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. No Secretaries being present at the time of calling the meeting to order, Mr. J. Sergeant Price was chosen as Secre- tary pro tem. The object of the meeting, as ordered at the last meeting of the Society, was announced, and Dr. J. Cheston Morris, Chairman of the Special Committee on Extended Accommo- dations, made a detailed statement of the changes proposed to the building and exhibited and explained the plans for the same. Mr. Price made a statement in regard to the rights of the Society to the property and read the various Acts of Assembly bearing on the subject. The resolution from the Committee on Extended Accom- modations, submitted at the last meeting (April 18), came up for consideration as follows: Resowed, That the Committee on Extended Accommodations be con- tinued and empowered to enter into negotiations for alterations to the present building in accordance with the plan now submitted, or such modifications thereof as may be suggested by the Committee or its archi- tect. After discussion and debate, the resolution was adopted by a vote of 21 to 5, and the yeas and nays being called the vote stood as follows: 21 to 5. On motion of Mr, Vaux, it was resolved that the Committee be directed to proceed with the business authorized by the Society to be done by it. — And the meeting was adjourned by the President. 1890. 103 Stated Meeting, May 2, 1890. Present 14 members. President, Mr. FraugEy, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: The annual program of the R. Academia Nederlandica, ex legato Hoeufftiano, for 1891 was presented. Letters of envoy were received from the K. P. Meteorolo- gisches Institut, Berlin; Mr. Clifford P. MacCalla, Philadel- phia ; Smithsonian Institution, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Sur- vey, Washington. A letter of acknowledgment (Transactions xvi, 3) was re- ceived from the Geological and Natural History Survey, Ottawa, Canada. Letters of acknowledgment (129) were received from the K. K. Sternwarte, Prag; Drs. Friederich Miiller, Dionys Stur, - Edward Suess, Vienna. Letters of acknowledgment (1380) were received from Drs. Friederich S. Krauss, Vienna; Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes, Altenburg; Naturhistorische Gesellschaft, Hannover; K. Siichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig; Verein fiir Vaterliindische Naturkunde, W iirtem- berg; Royal Society, Royal Meteorological, Royal Astronom- ical Societies, Linnean Society, Society of Antiquaries, Lon- don; University Library, Cambridge, England. The Tokyo Anthropological Society was placed on the exchange list to receive Proceedings from 119. A letter from Mrs. Harriet Maxwell Converse (New York city, N. Y., April 28, 1890), soliciting subscriptions for a mon- ument to Red Jacket, was read. The following letter was read : 1825 WaLNuT STREET. To THE HONORABLE FREDERICK FRALEY, AND THE MEMBERS OF THE AMERICAN PHrILosopuHicaL SOCIETY : Gentlemen :—I have the honor to offer for your acceptance, the portrait of my brother, the late Henry M. Phillips, formerly a member of your Society, in whose memory The Prize Essay Fund was established. Very respectfully, EmiLy PHILLIPS. PHILADELPHIA, May 1, 1890. 104 [May 2, On motion, the Society accepted the gift and requested the President to express its thanks for the same. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Société de Ja Litérature Finnoise, Helsingfors; Naturforscher- Verein, Riga; Société Malacologique de Belgique, Bruxelles; K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt, Vienna; K. P. Meteorologische Institut, Physikalische Gesellschaft, Gesellschaft fiir Anthropo- logie, Ethnologie, etc., Messrs. M. Friedliinder & Sohn, Berlin ; K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Gdttingen; Voigtliindi- sche Alterthumsforschende Verein, Hohenleuben; Biblioteca N. C. V. E., Rome; The Boletin Meteorolégico, Madrid; Public Library, Salem, Mass.; Yale University, New Haven ; Engineers’ Club, Mr. C. P. MacCalla, Philadelphia; U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Smithsonian Institution, Wash- ington, D. C.; Leander McCormick Observatory, University of Virginia; Mr. William Harden, Savannah ; Society of Na- tural History, Cincinnati; Historical Society, Mr. Philip C. Frieze, Chicago; Iowa Academy of Sciences, Des Moines ; University of California, Berkeley; California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. The President announced that he had appointed Mr. Wil- liam P. Tatham to prepare the obituary notice of the late Frederick Graff, and that the appointment had been accepted. The death of James McClune (Philadelphia, May 1, 1890, et. 83) was announced. Dr. Bonwill, through the Secretaries, presented a paper en- titled “Geometry and Mechanics Deny Evolution.” Pending nominations Nos, 1209, 1210, 1211 and 1212 were read, The Committee on the Purchase of the Baird Portrait re- ported progress and was continued, And the Society was adjourned by the President. 190.) 105 Stated Meeting, May 16, 1890. Present, 22 members. President, Mr. FRAuEy, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters of envoy were received from the Observatoire Phy- sique Central, St. Petersburg; Royal Observatory, Greenwich ; Literary and Philosophical Society, Liverpool. . Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Institut Egyptien, Cairo (128, 129, 130); Bureau des Longitudes, Paris (126); Library of the University of California, Berkeley (126, 127, 129, 180). Letters of acknowledgment (130) were received from Socie- tas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Prof. Otto Donner, Helsing- fors, Finland; Comité Géologique de la Russie, Observatoire Physique Central, Prof. Serge Nikitin, St. Petersburg; K. Zoologisch Genootschap, Amsterdam ; K. Zoologisch-Botanisch Genootschap, The Hague; Bataafsch Genootschap der Proe- fondervindelijke Wijsbegeerte, Rotterdam; Prof. Dr. Japetus Steenstrup, Copenhagen; Société Vaudoise des Sciences Natu- relles, Lausanne; K. Bibliothek, Berlin; Verein fiir Erdkunde, Dresden ; Editor of “Cosmos,” Mr. A. Des Cloezeaux, Comte Hyacinthe de Charencey, St. Maurice-les-Charencey, Paris ; Royal Dublin Society, Dublin; Cambridge Philosophical So- ciety, Cambridge, England; Dr. John Evans-Hemel, Hemp- stead; Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society, Chevi- ais, Halifax, England; Royal Institution, Local Government Board, Dr. Joseph D. Hooker, Sir John Lubbock, London; Mr. Joseph S. Harris, Philadelphia. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Linnean Society, N. S. Wales; Anthropological Society, Tokyo; So- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 182. N. PRINTED MAY 26, 1890. 106 [May 16, ciété Impéreale des Naturalistes, Moscow; Physikalische Cen- trai-Observatoriums, St. Petersburg; Prof. Hugo von Meltzel, Dr. M. Faths, Kolozsviér, Hungary ; Société de Physique, etc., Geneva; Ronsdon Observatory, Devon; Royal Observatory, Greenwich ; Literary and Philosophical Society, Liverpool ; Rhode Island Historical Society, Providence ; Cornell Univer- sity, Ithaca; Editor of “The Nation,” New York; State Li- brarian of New Jersey, Hopewell; Zodlogical Society, College of Physicians, Franklin Reformatory Home for Inebriates, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia ; Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore; National Academy of Sciences, Mr. Lester F. Ward, Washington, D. C.;, Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, Raleigh, N. C.; University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa; Prof. James B. Angell, Ann Arbor; Public Library, Peoria, Il. ; Geological Survey of Missouri, Jefferson City ; Commissio Geographica Geologica, 8. Paulo, Brazil. Pending nominations Nos. 1209, 1210, 1211 and 1212 were read, spoken to and balloted for. The proceedings of the Board of Officers and Council were submitted. - The Secretaries reported that the paper presented by Dr. Bonwill at the last meeting of the Society should appear, if at all, in the Transactions and not in the Proceedings. On motion, the President was authorized to appoint at his leisure a committee of three members to examine and report upon the same. Prof. Cope made a communication on “The Dinosauria of the Laramie Formation,” illustrating the subject with many fossil specimens. Prof. Ryder presented a paper entitled “On the Origin of Sex through Cumulative Integration and the Relation of Sex- uality to the Genesis of Species.” On motion of Mr, Tatham, the Society adopted the follow- ing resolutions : Resolved, 1. That whenever the Committee on Extended Accommoda- tions, charged with the alteration and improvement of the building, 1§90.] 107 shall have perfected the plans and specifications for the same and have had a contract prepared for the execution thereof, the President and Treas- urer of the Society shall be and are hereby authorized to execute such contract under the corporate seal of the Society. Resolved, 2. That said Committee, in conjunction with the Curators and the Committee on the Hall, be authorized to rent a suitable place or places to which to remove the Library, Portraits and other Collections and to have such removals effected in such manner as will secure the property from injury, and to continue the insurance thereon against loss by fire, and also to rent a suitable room in which the Secretary and Librarian can transact the business of the Society until the Hall can be reoccupied. Resolwed, 3. That the Treasurer be authorized to make payments upon the contracts for the alterations and improvements and of other expenses incident to the removal. Resolved, 4. That the Librarian of the Society be added to the aforesaid Committee as a member thereof. The following resolutions, offered on behalf of the Trustees of the Building Fund, were adopted : Wuereas, The American Philosophical Society, at a meeting held on October 5, 1866, did adopt a preamble and resolution setting forth that it was ‘‘expedient for the security of the books and property of the So- ciety there should be erected a fire-proof building,’’ and did thereby also provide for the appointment of Trustees of and the raising of money for a Building Fund and to ‘continue to invest and reinvest all principal, in- terest and income of said fund until this Society shall determine to build for itself a fire-proof building, and make commencement thereof, and then to pay to the Treasurer of the Society out of the proceeds of such in- vestments such.sums as the Society shall from time to time direct to be paid to him for that purpose.” AND WHEREAS, The Society, on April 25, 1890, after having had plans for the alteration of their Hall submitted to them, authorized and empowered their Committee on Extended Accommodations to enter into negotiation for alteration of their present building in accordance with the plans then presented, or such modifications of them as might be suggested by the Committee or its architect. AnD WHEREAS, The said plans have been so modified by the Commit- tee as to make said Hall a fire-proof building ; therefore, be it Resolved, That the Trustees of the Building Fund of the American Philosophical Society be directed to pay to the Treasurer of the Society 108 [May 16, out of the proceeds of the investment held by them such sums as will be. necessary to pay for the addition and improvement to the present Hall of the Society, so as to make it a fire-proof building. Resolved, That the Trustees of the Building Fund of the American Philosophical Society are hereby authorized and directed to sell and dis- pose of the City Loans and other securities held by them, and to make and execute the necessary transfers and assignments thereof so as to vest. in the purchasers a full title to said securities. ‘ The Committee on the Franklin Centennial Commemora- tion reported that it had duly taken place, and presented bills amounting to $258.93, which were ordered to be paid, and on motion the Committee was discharged. The Special Committee on the Purchase of the Baird Por- trait reported progress and was continued. The Society adopted the following resolution reported from Council : . Resolved, That hereafter 250 copies of ‘‘separata’’ of papers published in the Proceedings be furnished to the author if requested by him, and that Council recommends that the Society should request the Secretaries to inquire how far it would be practicable in the present state of its finances to adopt a resolution to issue the Proceedings more frequently than at present. All other business having been finished, the Tellers counted the ballots cast for the respective candidates and reported the result to the President, who declared the following to have been duly elected to membership in the Society : 2179. Prof. George S. Fullerton, Philadelphia. 2180. Robert Patterson Field, Philadelphia. 2181. Rev. Heman L. Wayland, D.D., Philadelphia. 2182. Charles Godfrey Leland, London. And the Society was adjourned by the President. 1890.] 109 (Ryder. The Origin of Sex through Oumulative Integration, and the Relation of Sexuality to the Genesis of Species. ‘ By John A. Ryder. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 16, 1890.) GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS, A careful survey of the living world leads to the conclusion that sexual- ity has been, in all probability, one of the many results of the operation of the forces of evolution. A further examination of the evidence discloses the fact that sexuality has arisen very gradually and only through an extensive series of very gentle progressive and successive steps. These steps seem to have had a definite sequence and to have been accompanied by such a gradual complication of means, that it seems highly probable, indeed certain, that in many instances, a given higher grade of sexuality has grown out of the preceding one. This serial superimposition of means to serve apparently more advantageous ends proceeds according to fixed rules or laws, apparently determined by the already attained “structural complication and physiological activities of organisms, and in conformity with the controlling conditions offered by their surroundings. A still further examination of the data of sexuality leads to the conclu- sion that the methods of it which may be observed in the vegetable and animal worlds have proceeded along two parallel but distinct lines of progress. Both have ended in the achievement of the same re- sult, namely, viviparity or the production of offspring in an advanced state of development, before the latter is set free from the parent to begin an independent existence for itself. An acorn is as truly a product of viviparous development as an infant human being. The elaborate process of organic evolution through which it has been possible to develop the one, is just as wonderful as in the case of the other. The end-result of the achievement of viviparity has been to enable forms so produced to survive with fur more certainty, and to begin their struggle for existence with a greater chance of success than if the complex series of processes of germ-development, in these cases, had to proceed to the same stage without the elaborate means of protection afforded by the parent. This is so obvious that it seems hardly necessary to call attention to the significance of the gradual complication of sexual pro- cesses: Yet, as one finds the subject usually dealt with, sexuality seems to be regarded, by the majority of writers, as an ultimate fact, and as such, incapable of interpretation in more general terms. That sexuality has an important bearing. upon some of the most im- portant questions in evolution, no. thoughtful biologist would probably doubt. Notwithstanding this, there have been few serious attempts made to grapple with the problem of ‘‘sex.’’ Many of the attempts which have Ryder.] 110 [May 16, been made have failed because of the way in which the fundamental question, sex itself, was ignored. Most of the speculations in relation to sex have been content with determining the effects of self and cross- fertilization, and have accordingly dealt with some of the consequences of already achieved sexuality, but have thrown no light whatever upon the probable origin of sex itself. Without questioning the high value of the results of such experimental investigations, the question of the origin of sex is probably nearly or quite beyond the pale of experimental inquiry, in virtue of the fact that even the lowest organisms in which sexuality is manifested, are already so persistently adapted to a certain habit of life, and are consequently so fixed in organization that experimental investigation louvking to a modi- fication of their reproductive processes through artificial interference is quite impossible within the limits of a single life-time devoted to experi- mental research. We shall accordingly have to examine the phenomena of sexuality as we find them, and upon careful analysis and comparison try to reach such conclusions as seem to be warranted by the evidence. Since sexuality leads to processes of discontinuous growth in the pro- duction of new beings or offspring, it is of the utmost importance that this very important fact should be kept in mind from the start. That it has a significance there can be no doubt, when considered in connection with the manner in which germs are produced in the various types. The manner in which such discontinuity is effected varies within wide limits and is associated with other preliminary processes, such as the formation of fixed colonies of animal organisms and the multiplication of axes or branches in the vegetable kingdom. One of these two processes is, in fact, usually the prelude to the occurrence of the process of the dehiscence of the definitive sexual elements in a great variety of forms, When the one process, namely, that of continuous growth of the parent organism, ceases, the reproductive process seems to recur, so that sexual genesis and growth seem to be opposed to each other, as has often been pointed out. The impossibility of otherwise adding or integrating more tissue through the incorporation of more nutriment to a structure already finished, or fully developed, at least for the time being, leads apparently to the recurrence of sexuality. The expression of sexuality is accordingly largely, if not wholly, dependent upon nutrition, and it is from this fun- damental standpoint that it will be dealt with here. It will be equally important to consider the peculiar characteristics of sexual cells, In almost all biological works it is asserted that the germ- cells of multicellular forms are in all respects, at first, morphologically identical with the other undifferentiated cells of the parent body. While this statement is true of the young germ-cells, it is untrue of nearly all mature germ-cells. The latter, in their mature condition, present us with form-elements, either of a size greatly in excess of those of the rest of the body or others which are, invariably within the limits of the animal kingdom at least, smaller than any of the cells of the parent organism, The 1890.] 111 (Ryder. significance of this fact must also be constantly borne in mind, as well as the equally important one respecting the usual morphological equivalence of myriads of the smaller or male germ-cells and a single large or female germ-cell, in the majority of higher forms. This frequent, indeed usual, lack of equivalence of the male and female reproductive bodies has been almost entirely ignored by many authors, and has led, as the present writer is convinced, to erroneous interpreta- tions of some of the most important phenomena of subsequent develop- ment. The peculiar function of growth of the female cell and its special- ized method of segmentation, after the initiation of development, has apparently contained little of significance for the great majority of biolo- gists. Segmentation of the odsperm, as the fertilized egg is termed, is a matter of course with the majority of embryologists, whose work begins with the institution of segmentation and not with any apparent anxiety as to the origin or cause of the thing which segments, and which does little else for a considerable space of time. While the high value of the work done through careful embryological research is to be properly appreciated and is so appreciated by no one more than by the present writer, 1 believe that embryological teaching and investigation should begin with a consideration of the probable causes which have led to the production of the fully developed and united elements which are usually the subject of the embryologist’s study. The universal occurrence of sexuality amongst all plants and animals, except amongst the very lowest forms, is surely evidence enough, if any were needed, that somehow sex must have been a most important factor in biological development. To say that sexuality was developed solely for the purpose of inducing variability or of favoring fertility and vigor through crossing does not suffice in the face of the evidence presently to be offered. When the defenders of the view, that sexuality was developed in order to favor variability and cross-fertilization, are asked to give any probable reason for the origin of sexuality, the causes alleged are such as have seemed, to the present writer at least, so unsatisfactory that they are hardly worth serious attention. What, then, was the origin and meaning of sexuality? What were some of the causes which may be reasonably supposed to have been oper- ative in inducing sexual differentiation? Was sexuality differentiated for any purpose, or was its development merely the result of the operation of natural causes? These are some of the questions that the present writer has set before himself to answer, with such light as may be derived from the facts in the present state of our knowledge. The value of this attempt at an approximation to an answer to these questions must be determined by the judgment of those most competent to form an opinion and the value of the results as a working hypothesis in the hands of such persons. If, as the writer believes, sexuality has been the means through which morphological complexes or organisms of all sorts, animal and vegetable, Ryder.] 112 [May 16, have been built up, that alone would be.a sufficient reason for a renewed discussion of the subject. If, moreover, the evolution of sexuality, through natural causes, has not only been one of the most important agents in evolution of all the multicellular types past and present, but also the means through which the first possibilities of individual varia- bility, fertility and morphological capability were greatly augmented, it is exceedingly desirable that the evidence upon which such claims are based, should be presented. Finally, if sexuality has led to consequences as far-reaching as these, it is also obvious that its claim to consideration, as a factor in biological evolution, is, perhaps, quite as great as that of the principle of natural selection, to the elucidation and demonstration of which Darwin devoted the best years of his life with a singleness of pur- pose which has been rarely equaled. That so strongly-expressed a characteristic as sexuality, in both the animal and vegetable kingdoms, should have been developed for mere reproduction, is completely disproved by the data of sexuality themselves. It is clear that sexuality becomes more specialized with the progress of the structural complication of organisms, yet external influences may lead to the suppression of fully developed sexuality. It has been most conclu- sively proved, that if a species is artificially cared for, ina word, culti- vated, as in the case of plants, it may be indefinitely reproduced by means other than those of sexuality. It is even probable that partial or complete sterility has been so induced in not a few plants cultivated for their fruits. The only remaining effect, if effect it can be called, is the impotent fructification of the ovules, whereby the fleshy esculent meso- carp of the ovary or fruit is stimulated to growth and development, for which alone the plant is valued by its cultivator, man. But, so far as I am aware, it has not yet been even proved that such fertilization is necessary. If parthenogenesis can and does occur in, Cwlobogyne and in Saprolegnia, there is no reason why, even in highly developed monocotyledons, such as the astonishingly productive Banana, in spite of its sterility, should pro. duce indefinitely, through a kind of abortive parthenogenesis and as a result of its great vigor, its succulent but seedless fruits. If the progressive differentiation or the gradually more intensified expres- sion of sexuality means anything at all, in both plants and animals, beyond providing for mere reproduction, it must mean something of far more utility to species than to provide for variability alone. If the grad. ual acquirement of viviparity in both animals and plants has any signifi- cance, it includes not only a provision for variability, but also achieves the far more important end of providing greatly increased chances for the survival of the thus protected germs or viviparously produced young. That the young of such forms are more susceptible to the altering influ- ences of outer conditions than the adult is conspicuously established by the evidence drawn from comparatively complex forms, It is well known that the normal alga-like, filiform protonema of Sphagnum may, in some 1390. _ Eee [Ryder. cases, become a flat thallus if grown upona solid, moist substratum. And doubtless, corresponding modifications may be otherwise induced in the further development of its sexual offspring, but of this I know of no direct proof. : That it should have been assumed that sexuality provides for variability is not strange. If one considers the problem of variability from morpho- logical and physiological points of view, the evidence is wholly in favor of the conclusion that increased complexity would favor variability. That sexuality has increased the complication of its attendant processes there cannot be the slightest doubt. If the results have become more complex as viviparously developed germs were evolved, not only would the capac- ity of those germs to vary be increased in virtue merely of such increased ‘complexity, but the offspring of two parent individuals, differing even very slightly, would also have to be added as a factor favorable to varia- tion. Unfavorable to some forms of the doctrine of rejuvenescence or that view which regards sexuality as a means of rejuvenating certain cells by means of conjugation or the act of fertilization, are the facts which prove that, in the vegetable world at least, growth may go on indefinitely without the recurrence of sexuality, and with increased, rather than with dimin- ished, vigor. I need only to cite the Banana which has been asexually propagated by cuttings for centuries. The significant and persistent vigor through twenty centuries of a Draczena, or Dragon’s blood tree, is also of interest in this connection. The persistent growth of the asexual genera- tions of tree ferns in the present age and of the gigantic Lepidodendrons and Equisetums of the carboniferous period, shows that conditions of life have much to doin maintaining the vigor of such asexual generations. Senility, or impairment of vigor, does not then seem to result from con- tinued growth, as is shown by these facts, and this conclusion is equally well established by the facts which are known in relation to the reproduc- tion of the Cyanophyces, Schizomycetes and the yeast plant. This unimpaired vigor seems to be associated with the continuous pro- duction of new axes in the higher plants, or with continuous fission of cell-units in the lower ones. In animals, on the other hand, this vigor shows itself most pronounced in the colonial forms (cormi), or in such as are specially nourished, as the Queen Bee or ant-queen of Termites, amongst Anthropods, and amongst which these animals are also the long- est lived, and where it finds expression partly, at least, in parthenogenesis. The astonishing vigor of the fertile parents of these forms is largely de- termined by their abundant nutriment. The genesis of sexuality, upon final analysis, will probably be found to be a purely physiological question, in the discussion of which the energies represented by the cytoplasm of the egg on the one hand, and its nucleus ' and that of the spermatozoan on the other, will have to be considered. This will, however, represent only the germinal or embryological side of | the problem, which takes no cognizance of the preémbryonic history of PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XXVIII. 182. 0. PRINTED MAY 24, 1890. Ryder.] 4 14 [May 16, the germinal elements before the latter are set free from the parent. The attempt to formulate the laws of sexuality without examining into the preémbryonic history of the germinal elements must necessarily end in failure and disappointment. The generative forces at work within the psrent organisms are nicely adjusted, or in a state of equilibrium with those which are concerned in the conduct of the ordinary physiological activities of the parent body. It is, therefore, imperatively necessary to consider the question of sex not simply as one involving embryological data, but rather as embracing the sum total of physiological energies of the parent organisms, and where the sexes are separate these energies must be considered as represented in the species by the sexually differ- entiated individuals composing the latter. It will be obvious to those who have kept pace with the growth of phy- sical science, that sexuality may be thus brought more nearly within the dominion of purely physical laws. In other words, sexuality is a ques- tion involving the discussion of matter and its energy of motion, and should be so treated if it is expected to reach conclusions which are in harmony with the genius of modern science. That such a project may be accomplished in the present state of our knowledge may well be doubted, yet there is ample reason to warrant making an attempt to clear the ground for further work in that direction. The attempt to trace the ways in which one form of reproduction gave place to a more complex one in the next higher type is beyond the scope of the present paper. To consider this question adequately would require a far more extensive acquaintance with the facts than is possible at present. In plants it would require a consideration of the modifying effect of the evolution of a mechanical supporting system and the correlative modifica- tions which this must have induced in the sexual processes, since the evolution of powerful supporting axes, which were capable of indefinite growth, dichotomy, and consequent multiplication of fertile apical axes enabled the plant to multiply the possibilities of the production of male and female prothalli, or of protected and attached macrospores and dehis- cent microspores. Not only this, but aérial currents would now become available, as the plants become taller, in carrying the microspores, or male prothalli, as pollen grains, from one flower to another. Finally, this was supplemented by flying insects, which, it is fair to assume, first began to visit the plants for the sake of their microspores or pollen as food. Later, as these insects began to set up irritations in the flowers, there is reason to think that the surfaces which they habitually abraded would, if wetted with saccharine solutions regurgitated by such visitants, begin to pour out additional nectar or saccharine matters in obedience to well-known rules of ormotic action. That such a result would happen is, at any rate, strongly indicated by the experimental results obtained by my colleague, Prof. W. P. Wilson, in wetting abraded surfaces of leaves with saccharine solutions. The elaboration of sweets so begun would be a stimulus, causing the insect world to become still more interested 1890.] 115 (Ryder. in the flowers, and such may have been the further effect of the new diet upon insect life as to be directly responsible for the evolution of those wonderful insect communities developed amongst the honey-lov- ing hymenoptera or bees. The further consequences of entomophilous traits developed by plants must react in other ways, probably through epinasty and hyponasty, in modifying the shapes of flowers, while pro- tandry, a natural consequence of the earlier maturation of the andre- cium, as a lower whorl of the flower, would eventually tend to establish cross-fertilization, through insect agency, as an imperative necessity, and not wholly, perhaps, because cross-fertilization meant the preduction of a more vigorous offspring. The gradual evolution of sexuality by slow stages in plants is now so well understood, that it is not necessary to enter into the details which may be found in any standard botanical text-book. It is sufficient to indi- cate that the transition from asexuality to female macrogonidia and male microgonidia is effected by mere differentiation of cells as re- spects their size, From naked odspores to carpospores is the next step, with microscopic flagellate male elements. Finally, the prothallus ap- pears, first, with both odspheres and antherozoids; then the prothalli themselves become distinguished as small male and large female ones; then the female prothallus is no longer at once detached, but becomes covered in, while the minute male prothallus still dehisces, but finally be- comes partially parasitic upon the stigma where it vegetates and throws out a hollow process, which serves to convey the now highly modified antherozoid to the ovicell. The prolonged adherence of the female pro- thallus to the parent axis enables the next important step to be taken in the evolution of the seed containing a viviparously produced embryo pro- vided with a store of nutriment and protective envelopes. In this way the superimposition of more and more successful means of reproduction seems to have occurred in plants, tending also to secure the final victory of the phanerogams over all other rivals in the struggle for existence, largely through the evolution of viviparity as supposed above, How much of this success was due to the principle of overgrowth or cumiu- lative integration, which made rapid, continuous assimilation and growth possible through the evolution of a mechanical supporting system, is hard to tell, but it doubtless was quite as important a factor as natural selection itself, Similar conclusions are borne in upon the zodlogist in a study of the reproductive processes in the animal world. From asexual frag- mentation and consequent multiplication, the advance to larger and smaller, or female.and male elements, was a gradual one, with or without _ hermaphroditism. Then came hermaphroditism with large female and ‘small male germs, then maleness and femaleness, as characterizing dis- tinct individuals of the same species. Finally, protective processes were developed, accompanied by ovulation, followed by parental care, such as incubation, nidification, gestation with or without placentation, and at last, in the highest forms, lactation was developed. Ryder.] 116 [May 16, These processes seem to have grown up as if superimposed upon each other, just as it can be shown that the progress of embryological onto- genetic development has followed as a consequence of the superimposition of one morphological complication upon the immediately preceding one, and often as a consequence of direct adaptation. Similarly, the inclusion of the germ tracts, as morphological advances shut off the gut-pouches from the archenteron, became more decided. The complexity of the out- lets for the reproductive products, at first by way of the nephridia, as these were fused into a serially connected system, became more marked, the sexual products were now discharged through the passages serving also for the emission of the urinary secretion. Finally, this passage became divided lengthwise, so as to serve for the separate discharge of the urinary and sexual products, until at last the lower end of the reproductive channel became modified into a brood chamber or uterus for the viviparous development of the young, dccompanied with sexual intercourse, now rendered possible by the further modification of the extreme outer por- tions of the reproductive passages and the parts immediately adjacent to them. Pari passu with the higher development of the reproductive processes the fertility of the female became absolutely reduced, partly in consequence of the precocious overgrowth of the female germs through a primary sup- pression of the tendency to spontaneous segmentation of such germs, as will be more fully illustrated later. This reduction in the fertility of the female gonads is also doubtless correlated with the increased chances of the survival of the offspring produced by the more protective methods of reproduction, while the material diverted from ovogenesis, to carry on the formation of secondary egg-envelopes, incubation, nidification, gestation, placentation, lactation and other parental care, also reacts directly upon fertility, while the great lengthening of the period of fetal and infantile development, tends to still further reduce the possibilities of rapid repro- duction. The recurrence of the seasons tends to make the reproductive periods annual in all forms except the lowest asexual, and the highest form, man, who lives under approximately uniform artificial conditions of his own creating. There is, therefore, a widespread tendency toward a reduction of the fertility of most forms below what it would be if there existed uniformly favorable conditions throughout the year, due solely to the recurrence of unfavorable annual periods. The fertility of the male, or rather his functional activity, may be affected in a corresponding manner by the seasons, but the absolute fer- tility of the male as compared to the number of germs produced is invariably greater than that of the female, usually by many thousand- fold. This greater male fertility depends upon the minute size and rapid production of male elements through the breaking down of protova— spermatogonia—and the rapid integration of chromatin or nucleoplasm as will be shown later. Such a rapid and abundant production of male elements may be one of the causes leading to the persistent pursuit of the 1890.] 117 (Ryder. female by the male, and one of the causes of the genesis of sexual pas- sion as interpreted farther on. Sexual passion, which accompanies the highest forms of reproduction, finally becomes functional in this intricate series of superimposed processes as a means tending to maintain the fertil- ity of all the females of a species at its highest point of efficiency, and thus reacts as an aid in the survival of species. The superabundant fertility of the male renders the possibility of the conjugation of the male and female elements more certain, under the favor of the various devices which have been evolved to effect that process, and thus again be the means of assur- ing reproduction and the survival of the species, The necessary correlation of the male and female is probably secondary. In my view, that the flagellate forms are the oldest, since they are cer- tainly the simplest and minutest, the male element represents, morpho- logically, a perpetuation of the most primitive form of organized existence. Through cumulative integration the germ elements, which would other- wise have tended to break down into flagellate germs; have, on the contrary, been impelled to grow to large dimensions as ova, through the rapid access of nutriment to them, which probably prevented their cyto- plasm from having time to elaborate nucleoplasm and chromatin, and thus become male in character. The male element is certainly the most ancient, the female is a secondary and later product of evolution. The correlation of the male and female was, therefore, secondary ; the male elements represent, morphologically, the primordial asexual type. The primitive representative of the male element was at one time “ maternal,’’ through simple fission and a capacity for growth ; it became ‘“‘ paternal ”’ through conjugation, Sexuality was the outcome of the unequal growth of germ-cells of the same species, induced by the self-regulative influences exerted by internal physiological conditions operating under the influence of varying external conditions, The determination of the sex of an embyro has depended in some way upon a tendency, early established through some internal equilibration of the forces of growth, in response to outer conditions of nutrition, etc. There is no conclusive evidence tending to show that the sex of an embryo is.predetermined in the egg ; _ on the contrary, much evidence exists tending to show that the sex of an _ embryo may be influenced by an increase or diminution of the supply of food. It is a curious circumstance to note that many writers on sex seem to have failed to see that the sexual cells of multicellular forms were func. _ tionless, in that they exercise no physiological function which is essential to the life of the parent organism. In that such functionless cells could not disintegrate their substance through the active metabolism which _ obtained in respect to all the other cells of the body, in consequence of the action of the principle of cumulative integration or assimilation beyond the _ current physiological needs of the body, they must either increase enor- - mously in size and become ova, or run down as a result of rapid karyokinesis into minute male elements which are rapidly dehisced and set free. - It is Ryder.] 1 18 [May 16, this exemption of the germ-cells from the disintegrating effects of active or functional metabolism which has given the first impulse to the accumu- lation of yolk and the overgrowth of the spermatogonia, ending in the production of the ovum and the essentially female condition. The apical position in many plants of the female germ is significant in this connec- tion, no less than the fact observed by Mr. Meehan, that in conifers the female flowers are produced at the apex of the tree and by the most vig- orous shoots. THE ORIGIN OF KARYOKINESIS, THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE POLAR Bopres, VARIABILITY, SEXUAL PAssION AND SEx IN RELATION TO THE GENESIS OF SPECIES. It is a remarkable fact that in the lowest forms of life no evidence of karyokinetic changes has ever been noticed. Spores are produced within the body of the parent individual by the direct fragmentation of the slightly more chromatophilous or deeply staining portion of the parent plasma that fills nearly the whole of the latter, so that it is still not possi- ble to speak of a nucleus in contradistinction to a cell-body of cytoplasm in these organisms. These facts tend to show thatin such very low forms there is still a want of mobility of the plasma itself as well as a lack ot differentiation into nuclear and cytoplasmic matter.* Is or is not the want of a differentiation of cytoplasm associated with the absence of karyokinetic phenomena? There is much reason to assume that it is from the consideration of a great variety of facts, mainly those observed in the earlier stages of development of higher sexually produced forms. The main argument in favor of such a view is the circumstance which has fallen under the eyes of every investigator, that the karyokinetic phe- nomena are most pronounced in the earlier stages and on a larger scale than in the later stages when the cells become smaller. This is either associated with a larger proportional amount of cytoplasm or it is inde- pendent of it. So far as observation has extended, the facts of early seg- mentation tend to favor the first alternative of the foregoing proposition. Another body of facts is equally favorable to such an interpretation, namely, that of spermatogenesis. It is true that many forms of spermato- genesis are known where karyokinesis is maintained up to the time that the spermatic elements are beginning to form, but there are many other cases known where this is not the case and where during the later stages of spermatogenesis leading to the fragmentation of the spermatogonia there is no evidence of accompanying karyokinesis. These facts tend to show that, with the gradual diminution of the amount of investing cyto- *De Bary, in his Lectures on Bacteria, affirms that a nuclens is wanting in the Schizomycetes, and the only case where these forms haye been known to exhibit ama- bold movements, 80 as to throw out processes, is that described by Prof. Samuel G. Dick- son, of this elity; at least Ihave been unable to find any other instances of the kind described. There appears to be little cytoplasm in these forms, so that these organisms correspond mainly to the nuclei of the cells of higher types, 1890.] 119 [Ryder. plasm, the process of karyokinesis or movement of the fragments of chromatin is finally restricted to such an extent, from the want of a cyto- plasmic field, that nuclear movement is at last rendered impossible. Much as the lengthening of the spermatozoén resembles a diastolic phase of karyokinesis, there is no evidence that the elongation of the male element preparatory to being set free, can be identified in any case with such a final karyokinetic diastolic phase. If this were so it might be supposed that the momentum of karyokinesis, in this case, had reached a potential state or condition of tension ready to exhibit itself as segmenta- tion, as soon as there was a large enough cytoplasmic field, as in the cyto- plasm of the egg, in which the opposite condition of systole could occur, and thus bring back the nucleus to a condition of equilibrium. While the foregoing conclusion cannot be assumed, it may be assumed that the male cells, in undergoing their rapid multiplication, do acquire a certain karyokinetic momentum predisposing them to set up segmentation in other funétionless plasmic bodies—ova—which they may enter. Yet, as we have seen, karyokinesis is not always an accompaniment of sper- matogenesis, a condition which may arise, as supposed above, from the gradual diminution of the cytoplasmic field. The method of evolution of spermatozoa is not uniform in all cases. In Ostrea edulis there are rarely individuals in which spermatogenesis ap- proximates that of 0. virginica. Then, rarely, intermediate forms occur between this and the normal form, where large masses of chromatin are formed by direct elaboration from the nuclei of elements which cannot be regarded as other than ova. In the latter case the metabolism which leads to the development of spermatozoa is clearly carried a step further than in ovogenesis, because the huge masses of chromatin imbedded in the ova from which the nuclei of the spermatozoa are formed are very certainly developed after the stage is reached which answers to that of the mature ovum. The male condition is reached therefore in this last case after the female, and is an outgrowth of the latter consequent upon the develop- ment of large masses of chromatin in the egg and its direct fragmentation into the nuclei of spermatozoa. In those cases where the spermatozoa are developed more directly from smaller cells which never reach the dimen- sions of ova, we have a totally different case, and one which indicates a protandrous tendency. The other case where the male condition depends upon the previous development of a fully differentiated female state of the germ-cells obviously corresponds to a protogynous condition. The formation of chromatin in the last case does not proceed as a result of metabolism and growth following a rapid series of karyokineses alter- nating with periods of rest, but follows the formation of a female nucleus in which a rapid endogenous formation of chromatin first occurs, followed, as it increases in bulk, by the extrusion of the chromatin from the parent nucleus into the surrounding cytoplasm, where it breaks up into small masses which are later separated in large groups as the nuclear basis of large coherent clumps of spermatozoa. Ryder.] 120 e [May 16, Clearly, then, the amount of chromatin in relation to the amount of cytoplasm varies all the way from an almost inappreciable quantity in the nucleus of the true egg to a very great quantity in proportion to the cyto- plasm in the egg which produces a large quantity of chromatin from its nucleus to provide the material for the nuclei of the multitudes of sper- matozoa to which such an egg gives rise. Maleness, therefore, in the case of Ostrea edulis is certainly, and proba- bly in all other forms, a condition where the chromatin preponderates . over the amount of cytoplasm, while, conversely, femaleness is charac- terized by the preponderance of cytoplasm over chromatin or nuclear matter ; that is to say in the sexual elements only. Such a preponderance is not simply relative, it is absolute as respects the one or the other of the primary germ-constituents. It is also a fact that the amount of.chromatin or nucleoplasm in an egg-nucleus, when nearly mature, is in excess, as expressed in volumes, by at least four times that of the chromatin contained in the mature male element of the same species. Does this last fact signify anything in reference to the expulsion of the polar bodies? It probably does if the interpretation of the polar bodies presently to be offered is true. And that that interpretation proba- bly is true or-more nearly true than any other yet offered, will become clearer as we proceed, since it imports nothing into the discussion of the. data which is not in conformity with the facts of continuous growth or which must be brought in in order to save previously suggested hypoth- esis. It postulates only continuous growth under the condition of an ex- cess of nutrition beyond that required in the secular exhibition of the physiological activities of living forms. It supposes that this excess is somehow influenced in one of two ways, that is, it is either preponderat- ingly converted into chromatin or preponderatingly into cytoplasm. If mainly into cytoplasm, the process may go on until the cytoplasm itself may tend to run down chemically into the more stable conditions of oils, or yolk granules and tablets consisting of simpler molecular units. This last process may go on until an enormous yolk is developed which is composed of inert or immobile nutritive matters, while the active cyto- plasm itself may become small in amount and reduced toa relatively small volume. * Such a process never occurs in the male. Here karyoki- netic processes keep the upper hand (not necessarily katabolic ones, or those leading to destructive metabolism), and the result is that the male element tends to be reduced in dimensions with no katabolically simpli- fied contents, such as are met within many eggs, but, on the contrary, con- sisting mainly of plasma in a highly anabolic condition as chromatin. How these differences on the sexual elements are produced is not known, but it is certain that they must be produced by the action of the physio- *This is so clearly In its general features a katabolic process, that it is Impossible to see how Geddes and Thomson can reconcile this with their hypothesis that the egg is anabolic, while the male element is essentially katabolic see their work, ‘‘The Evolu- tion of Sex,”’ New York, 1890.) eo De nea enerty Heaton 1890.] 121 [Ryder. logical activities of the parent organism modified or swayed toward male- ness or femaleness, through some series of correlated influences which are self-regulated in some way through nutrition, in the struggle of the parts of the parent organism with each other for their allotment of nutriment. So far, the evidence tends to indicate that the egg is a repressed condi- tion of maleness. That is, the high anabolic condition of the male ele- ment is the consequence of unimpeded growth resulting in rapid segmen- tation, while the female element is in some respects katabolic with an unimpeded growth of its cytoplasmic constituents accompanied by a repression of the capacity for segmentation. The peculiar conditions of growth of the egg, and its usual trait of great size, constitute probably the real essence of the meaning of sex, as a means of favoring, in an increased ratio, the survival of offspring. The preponderance in the actual volume of the chromatin of the egg, over that of the spermatozoin, expresses a physiological differentiation not reached by the latter so much more quickly matured. This might be due to the fact that the cytoplasm in the male element is smallerin amount than that of the egg, and may be coérdinated or physiologically con- trolled by less chromatin. On such a basis the hypothesis of Minot and Balfour might be rehabilitated in part, but not on the erroneous basis of sexuality as they supposed, but upon the far more significant one of physio- logical differentiation or division of labor, Maleness is characterized, in the male element, by the absence of a cytoplasmic field in which nuclear motion or karyokinesis can occur. With this in the male element goes an inability, after sexuality is fully established, to maintain further nutrition and growth without the help of the female element. Femaleness, on the other hand, is characterized by the presence of an enormous cytoplasmic field in the midst of which there is placed a large nuclear body containing proportionally to its envelope of cytoplasm a very small amount of chromatin. Such a germ is incapable, except under the antecedent stimulus of exceedingly vigorous processes of growth, as in the case of parthenogenesis, of spontaneously beginning and maintaining an orderly process of karyokinetic movement leading to further metabol- ism growth and development, unless “ fertilized ’’ or fused with the male element, The tendency in the male cell is towards a preponderance of chromatin, in the female cell towards a preponderance of cytoplasm. The elabora- tion of the chromatin in the male clearly takes place in some cases at the expense of cytoplasm ; the elaboration of cytoplasm in the female is pos- sibly at the expense of chromatin, and certainly at the expense of the pro- longed exercise of the function of the latter as an essential part of the egg nucleus. These processes in the two sexes admit of further contrasts. The cyto- plasm is mobile and ameeboid and the immediate instrument of intussus- ception of new material. The chromatin, on the other hand, while PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C, XXVIII. 182. Pp. PRINTED MAy 24, 1890. Ryder.] 122 [May 16, appearing to centrally control this process, is never immediately, but only mediately involved in its execution. No cases are recorded where the chromatin shares directly or immediately in the process of digestion orin- tussusception of new matter, except possibly the Bacteria or Schizomy- cetes. The female cell previous to final maturity has been involved in the ac- cumulation of the cytoplasm ; in this process its chromatin las been indi- rectly involved and has increased in volume proportionally. This same fact is illustrated in the increased dimensions and complexity of the nu- cleus as growth in cytoplasmic dimensions increases in even such simple forms as Ame@ba, as may be clearly seen in Leidy’s monograph upon the Rhizopods of North America, where the changes in the relative proportions and arrangement of these substances are fully illustrated in the progress from the young to the adolescent stages. There is therefore ground for the belief that there is a certain minimal proportion of chromatin necessary for every cell which is necessary to maintain its physiological integrity. In the egg-cell the chromatin must share in the constructive metabolism involved in the prolonged growth necessary to mature the ovum. It is not improbable that this function of sharing in constructive metabolism and not in that of karyokinesis has rendered the egg incapable of spontaneous segmentation, unless it be the product of a tremendous energy of growth and conditions of assimilation, as in the case of parthenogenetic ova. Not only the chromatin, but also the whole of the rest of the nucleo- plasm of the egg, is probably, like that of any other physiological differ- entiated cell of the parent body thus rendered in most cases incapable of undergoing immediately the spontaneous changes necessary to cause the beginning of development. The equilibration of forces leading to the growth of male and female elements, respectively, in the parent organism is in some way self-ad- justed or self-regulated. It is probably true that in many cases there is good reason to assuine that the eggs are more favorably situated in refer- ence to supplies of nutriment than the spermatogonia, or conditions sub- sist which tend to repress spermatogonial segmentation. Such a view may be fortified with a great host of facts drawn from the relations of the male and female reproductive organs, in many forms, to the sources of nutriment. In many cases the ovaries are clearly in a more direct and favorable relation to the sources of supply of nutriment than the testes, as in many Bryozoa, forexample. Or the source of supply of nutriment for the reproductive organs is more remote for the testes than it is for the ovaries, as is actually the case in many forms, notably a large proportion of mammals where a descensus testiculorum supervenes. Or, in other cases, the surplus nutritive matters are competed for within the organism by structures which are usually described as belonging to the category of the secondary sexual characters, Or, in another very large class of data, we have evidence tending to show that the ovum is placed 1890.] 123 . [Ryder. under conditions of growth, or is encapsuled within a porous basement membrane—the zona radiata—so as to favor from every point on its sur- face its cumulative growth in bulk, rather than its cleavage or segmenta- tion within the parent, which would end in its breaking up into male ele- ments. The male elements, on the other hand, are not encapsuled, at least in a very large proportion of cases, and are free to grow in another way without an intracapsular repression of karyokinetic processes. It would be an easy matter to cite multitudes of facts in support of the argu- ment here offered, though I am aware that strong counter-arguments might be produced, yetI do not believe that they are anything like as weighty as the affirmative evidence. Again, all the facts tend to prove that the recurrence of male forms in parthenogenetic types is associated with a decrease of the supply of nutri- ment and a slight lowering of temperature. How do these facts comport with the data in our possession respecting the manner of development of the characteristic male plasma or chro- matin? We find that after a certain limit of size has been attained by the egg or spermatogonium ih Ostrea edulis that the evolution of chromatin begins and with this process the production and freeing of spermatozoa. It looks as if the chromatin or characteristically male plasma required a longer time for its elaboration than the cytoplasm, which is in consonance with fact. In other words chromatin can be formed only from previously elaborated cytoplasm, and the latter when its sources of nutriment are cut off or diminished tends, in virtue of its freedom from any functional duty in the parent body to be built up into a still more complex molecu- lar form, as chromatin, Or the struggle of cells in the gonads for nutri- ment may tend towards the male condition provided all take part, and spermatozoa result ; if only a few take part in the,struggle, under encap- suled or other conditions unfavorable to the elaboration of chromatin and karyokinesis, the female or large celled type of germ is formed. That something of this nature must occur is evident if we contemplate the problem from the purely morphological side, but with the physiologi- cal aspect of the matter still in view. The chromatin is primitively the most central element of the plasmic contents of the cell. It is the most homogeneous of all cell contents; it is least like an emulsion of any of the cellular constituents. In that it is the most distantly removed from the periphery of all the cell-contents and the latest to appear when developed in great quantity from the nuclei of egg-like spermatogonia, it is the highest and latest product of cellular metabolism. It is therefore clear that the element of time is to be considered, and that chromatin or the ' most characteristic plasmic basis of the male element is the end-product of the untrammeled exhibition of the energies of functionless or sexual ‘protoplasm. It is upon this ground that it is safe to assume that the male element is the primary one and that the female element is secondary and has arisen through a repression of the processes which lead to the meta- morphosis of cytoplasm into chromatin. The male state is therefore the Ryder. ] z 124 [May 16, - oldest ; the female the youngest. The male state also as represented in the spermatic body tends to revert to the most ancient form of all free mobile organisms, namely, the flagellate Schizomycetes. The tendency towards maleness is therefore also to be identified with a universal ten- dency of all organisms to recapitulate the most ancient and primitive of living conditions when organisms existed only in watery or fluid media. The further generalizations that all organisms tend to recapitulate the primeval monadiform condition is also fully justified, and that the really primordial type of the germs of all living forms is a flagellate cell and notan ovum. This will become clearer, as it will be later shown that the ovum is secondary and is really a germ which has been arrested ‘in its attempt to reach the flagellate condition, and that the polar bodies are merely the expression of an expiring tendency in the egg to revert to the male or primeval flagellate condition. The genesis of sexuality itself is merely incidental to the continuous processes of growth manifested by all living forms, It is an outgrowth of self-regulated processes of nutrition and of the repulsion of accumulations -of surplus nutriment to parts of the organization of multicellular forms where it is not in the way of the other physiological activities. This is the real significance and origin of the process of the isolation of germinal matter. It is not a ‘‘device’’ or an ‘‘expedient’”’ specially contrived for the preservation of the immortality of ‘‘ germ-plasma,’’ which was not first ‘‘set aside ’’ in Metazoa, as held by Weismann, but which began to be pushed aside and out of the way in Protozoa, as many facts show even as low down in the scale as Ameeba, thus placing Lendl's criticisms of Weismann upon the basis of fact.* We have seen that the female and male germs can be actually con- trasted only on the ground that they are constituted of two kinds of plas- ma in different proportions. We have also seen that the chromatin pre- sumably preponderates in the lowest living forms, which are also univer- sally asexual but capable of the most prodigious rates of multiplication owing to rapid growth of their substance (mainly chromatin-like) under favorable conditions. These lowest forms are also flagellate, probably universally so under certain conditions. In the next stage of evolution the tendency is for certain cells to grow to a large size and then break down into flagellate spores which are alike and constitute the germs of the species. The next stage is where certain of these enlarged cells break down into flagellate spores of unequal size, the larger become female and the smaller male and incipient sexuality is developed. The process may even begin with the conjugation of similar binucleated individual cells, as in ciliate Protozoa, but there again the production of the spermatic plasma *In this connection see Brass, ‘Die Zelle das Element der Organischen Welt,” pp, 63-65. Leipzig, 1889. Also Lendl, ‘‘ Hypothese tiber die Entstehung von Soma- und Propa- * gations-Zellen.” Berlin, 1889, Also Lillie E. Holman, “ Observation on Multiplication in Ama@be.”’ Proc, Acad, Nat, Sci. Philad,, pp. 346-348, 1886. Leidy’s ‘‘ Rhizopods N, America,” where the chromatin balls of the nuclel are figured as being expelled from the nucleus and the animal presumably as germs, 1890.] : 125 [Ryder. or chromatin proceeds in a way which may be compared to an endogenous or intraplasmic fragmentation of the chromatin substance, part of which is probably not functional as the nucleus, so that even here the germinal matter is ‘‘ set aside ’’ contrary to the assumption of Weismann, who only finds such a process taking place in Metazoa. These binucleated forms have one macronucleus functional and another sexual micronucleus which is not functional in the ordinary life processes of the species. It is this latter which multiplies and grows at the expense of the cyfoplasm of the parent cell, so as to form not only the material for the new micronu- cleus but also that of the new macronucleus, the old macronucleus when exhausted being disintegrated and absorbed by the cytoplasm. In this case the process of conjugation signified a reconstitution of the exhausted macronucleus, a process which always occurs in some forms only when the cytoplasm of the parent is free from unelaborated and non-assimilated » constituents. An excess of chromatin and nucleoplasm is produced, part of which becomes the functional nucleus and part is thrust aside as a qui- escent functionless body, the micronucleus. When conjugation occurs it acts as a stimulus, causing the rapid growth and division of the micronu- cleus at the expense of the cytoplasm of both individuals which are not feeding during this process. The reconstitution of the nucleus is there- fore to be interpreted in terms of continuous growth and as a physiologi- cal process which is directly adaptive under the conditions of morphologi- cal differentiation attained by these organisms. The reciprocal fusion of one of the nuclear bodies produced by a subdivision of the micronucleus is to be understood in the way which will be indicated later. The death and loss of the power of codrdination of movement shown by the cytoplasm of lower unicellular forms, when the nucleus with its chromatin is removed, simply demonstrates the transcendent physiologi- cal importance of the nucleus as a directive centre. This view is also sustained by the fact that ultimate nerve terminations in the Metazoa are lost in some cases within the nucleus. The effects produced by the arti- ficial removal of the nucleus in impairing the power of growth and repro- duction are due to the destruction of the physiological equilibrium between the chromatin and cytoplasm as well as the morphological integrity of . | the individual. It does not necessarily mean that the nucleus is the repro- ductive agent, but rather that this highest end-product of protoplasmic metabolism is the central object for which the investing cytoplasm labors. Neither can, probably, become the centre of reproductive energy or the energy of growth in absolute independence of the other, notwithstanding the fact that there is an apparent absence of the nucleus in Monera, while the cytoplasm is reduced to a minimum in Schizomycetes. The conjugation of ciliated Infusoria therefore becomes plainly a pro- cess wherein the nucleus has-the usual reproductive function through division of labor coupled with an adaptive arrangement by which a physi- ological substitution of an old for a new nucleus is effected, while the act of conjugation is merely the stimulus through which the active functions Ryder. ] 1 26 [May 16, are diverted into another channel ending in the metabolism of both indi- viduals manifesting itself in the production of a larger amount of fresh chromatin, capable of taking upon itself the work of the former nucleus, a part being pushed or ‘‘set aside’’ as a functionless surplus ready to be stimulated to growth through conjugation. Maupas’ theory of senescence may therefore be regarded as in the highest degree probable, in that in those cases where conjugation has long been in abeyance the stimulus of growth leading to the production of an abundance of chromatin has been absent. From this point of view the Infusoria present a most specialized type of reproductive activity in which the cytoplasm and chromatin have never been freed or separated from each other as marking independent sexual states in which these two cellular constituents have preponderated, as the female and male respectively. In other words, the Infusoria are practically odsperms which are reciprocally stimulated to reproductive activity through the act of conjugation. The ovum of the Metazoa is in the same case with the Infusoria, but behaves differently because it is purely an ovum. Here the polar bodies . are to be regarded as exhausted chromatin or nucleoplasm with a decidedly male tendency in that the cytoplasm investing them is usually small in amount. The polar bodies are to be regarded as representing not only the disintegrated macronucleus but also the disintegrated fragments of the first or preparatory stages of division of the micronucleus. While the products of the fusion of the pronuclei of Infusoria again contrast with the fusion products of the pronuclei of Metazoa, in that they are at once divided into a functional or physiological and a functionless or reproduc- tive nucleus. In the Metazoa the separation of reproductive functions from the other physiological ones is effected through cell-division and does not coéxist in two nuclei lying side by side in the cytoplasm of the same cell. Nevertheless, there is reason to believe that the chromatin of the egg is partly exhausted, as it is in the Infusoria, and must be got rid of in part in order to regenerate the remaining chromatin through a process of growth accompanied by active karyokineses. This exhaustion supervenes upon the prolonged exercise of its physiological function in building up a large amount of investing cytoplasm under conditions which have inter- fered with the normal segmentation of the whole into cells no larger than those of the rest of the body. The characteristic overgrowth of the ovum beyond the size of its companions in the body of a Metazoan, is the real ground of the specialization of the egg through which it may be supposed that part of its nuclear matter has been exhausted through prolonged ex- ercise of the physiological functions of the nucleus, It will be seen that this view is similar to that of Weismann, but it is more specific. Accord- ingly the degree of specialization of an ovum must influence the extent to which its nucleus is exhausted, Parthenogenetic ova are for obvious reasons to be regarded as less specialized than those which are not par- thenogenetic, This hypothesis therefore fits in well with the fact of the i 4 : i My | y 1890.] 127 [Ryder. decrease of the number of polar bodies in the eggs of many partheno- genetic forms, in which the period uf growth of the eggs is often short- ened, and where the physiological function of the chromatin in the con- structive metabolism of the egg is exerted over a less prolonged period. The result is that the exhausted chromatin or nucleoplasm which is to be expelled from some parthenogenetic ova is just half that of the other type requiring fertilization. Such a separation and regeneration leave enough chromatin or nucleoplasm behind to initiate development by beginning a spontaneous and continuous fission of the egg without the access of the male element. This I believe, however, to be only a partial explanation of the causes leading to the expulsion of the polar bodies, since the genesis of the ovum itself remains unexplained. The specializa- tion of the ovum and its hypertrophy as a cell is connected in another way with the operation of the processes of continuous growth, and with the evolution of the primeval form of germs which were unquestionably flagellate. That the ovum is the most specialized cell of the two kinds of sexual cellular types found in Metazoa there can be no doubt. If it is true that the only thing that stands in the way of the develop- ment of any cell of the body into a germ is its physiological and morpho- logical specialization, then the egg with its mass of cytoplasm in excess of that of any cell in the body is certainly 2 morphologically and physiologic- ally specialized cell-unit. The expulsion of the polar bodies brings it back to an unspecialized condition, in which its nucleus (the female pronucleus) no longer bears any imprint of its former physiological specialization which it had acquired during the elaboration of its bulky mass of cyto- plasm. The history of the spermatic body, or cell, is exactly the reverse of the preceding. If protandrously developed, karyokinetic or fissive processes go on more rapidly from the start than processes of growth through con- structive metabolism and spermatozoa result. If the spermatic body is produced through a protogynous process and from large cells simulating ova, the fissive tendency again finally obtains the upper hand, but only after a certain maximum size of the female cells is reached, when they may be recognized as ova. The tendency towards maleness is thus con- stantly against any persistence of a condition favoring constructive meta- bolism in the direction of the elaboration of cytoplasm. In fact, so rap- idly does the fissive process go on, that the nuclei of the spermatic or male cells have no opportunity to acquire any physiological function, such as that enjoyed by the nucleus of the egg. The tendency in the male cells is rather to intensify the tendencies of metabolism towards the elaboration of chromatin only, carrying the latter process so far that little or no field of cytoplasm finally remains in which fission or nuclear movement can occur ; nay, many instances are known where even the remaining remnant of the cytoplasm is cast off from the spermatozoén previous to maturity, this being in exact contrast again with the extrusion of a part of the egg’s chromatin as polar bodies. The rapidity of the successive processes of Ryder.] 128 ; [May 16, fission in the course of the development of the male cell is such as to give its quiescent nucleus, in its restricted cytoplasmic field, a karyokinetic momentum, so to speak, which will be expressed as segmentation as soon as it is fused with the female pronucleus in a large cytoplasmic field, in the egg, where karyokinesis or nuclear motion again becomes possible. In the same way the tendency towards developing a karyokinetic mo- mentum must occur in the egg, owing to the limited number of rapidly successive karyokineses in the expulsion of the physiologically differenti- ated. chromatin in the form of the polar bodies, which may themselves manifest subsequent spontaneous segmentation, or even make abortive unions with spermatozoa, which are abortive only, probably, because of the small size of the cytoplasmic field. If the results of Hertwig and ° Boveri in fertilizing non-nucleated fragments of the cytoplasm of the eggs of Echinoderms are correctly reported, it is certain that the spermatozo6én is in a condition of karyokinetic tension, which lacks only a cytoplasmic field in which to find expression as segmentation. The views here developed also harmonize with what is known of the behavior of the nuclei of conjugating Infusoria. It is only the micro- nuclei or paranuclet which enter into the reciprocal conjugation. The macronuclei or functional] centres of control of the physiological energies of these animals never enter into the process, but are disintegrated and lost in the cytoplasm, while some of the new micronuclei now formed be- come, after conjugation and reciprocal fertilization, the new functional or physiological nucleus, and one or two remain, for the time being, at least, as passive, and probably functionless, micronuclei.* It may be supposed by some that the foregoing account is merely a recapitulation of Weismann’s hypothesis respecting the significance of the polar bodies. Not so; Weismann’s very elaborate and artificial methods have no charm for me. He is continually trammeled by his own cumber- some hypothesis of a germ-plasma. But he is probably right as far as assuming that the first polar body represents chromatin of a “‘ histoge- netic’’ character, but I should say in a totally different sense from that which he implies. I should also agree with him that it is expelled in order that the egg may revert to its unspecialized condition, but again in a widely different sense from that which he holds. Unfortunately for Weismann, he renders his hypothesis utterly improb- able from the necessity of working out a second hypothesis to account for the expulsion of the second polar body, in order to save his first unfounded assumption respecting the immortality of the germ-plasma. That doc- trine, driven to its logical conclusion, leads ultimately to the molecular disintegration of the vast series of ancestral plasmas, finally present in the egg in the course of a vast series of generations. Accordingly the only way to save his hypothesis was, as soon as certain parthenogenetic *In this I follow the recent researches of Maupas; “ La Rajeunissement Karyogam- ique chez les Cilies,""’ Arch, Zool. Exper, et Generale, 2¢ Ser., Tome vil, Nos, 1 and 2, 1489. Pp. 149-320 et seq, 1890. | a 29 (Ryder. eggs were discovered by him, to expel only one polar body ; to make use of this new fact in such a way as to make the expulsion of the second polar body in perfectly sexual forms, remove a certain proportion of the ances- tral germ-plasma, else, in time, the subdivisions of the ancestral plasmas would ultimately be so great in number as to destroy, by repeated division, the molecular integrity of the molecules representing such ancestral plasmas. Unfortunately for such an hypothesis, Nature does not work through foresight and does not anticipate such difficulties, and he is unable to produce the slightest evidence that she does. Organisms do not possess the power to foresee the remote consequences of their pro- cesses ; they respond directly to conditions, or not at all. The logic of this argument of Weismann is exactly similar to that used by Balfour in reference to the polar bodies in his ‘‘Comparative Embry- ology ”’ (i, p. 63), when he says ‘“‘that the function of forming the polar cells has been acquired by the ovum for the express purpose of preventing parthenogenesis.’’ This implies that the egg possesses foresight of harm coming to it through falling into a parthenogenetic habit! And when Weismann proceeds to elaborate his necessary hypothesis of a reduction of ancestral germ-plasmas, and says ‘‘this must be so,’’ he seems to for- get altogether about the probably self-regulating physiological factors controlling the dimensions of cells and their proportions of chromatin and cytoplasm. The same difficulty was perceived in a somewhat different form and very pointedly alluded to as fatal to the hypothesis of pangenesis, as early as 1878, by Prof. J. Clerk-Maxwell, in his article, ‘‘ Atom,” in the third volume of the “‘ Encyclopedia Britannica,’’ p. 42. Lately, however, Platner’s discovery that in Liparis dispar partheno- genesis occurs with the extrusion of two polar globules, is sufficient to render Weismann’s hypothesis as to the significance of the second polar body thoroughly untenable. There is clearly nothing left but to suppose that the polar bodies are an expedient through which the egg returns to a condition of equilibrium - different from what it possessed prior to their expulsion. We have no warrant whatever for assuming that this return is other than automatic or comes from other than self-regulated impulses arising within the ovum. Such impulses are very probably merely a manifestation of the attempt to recur to and maintain a continuous process of growth, in the course of which the production of polar bodies is only an incident. The physiological impulse from within which effects this equilibration works, if my hypothesis has any value, as if certain parts of the egg were to be excreted. In fact, if the hypothesis that the huge mass of cytoplasm represented by an egg is a highly differentiated cell-product, resulting from a very prolonged activity extending sometimes over many months, or even years, of the nucleus and its chromatin, while the sper- matic body is produced in a much shorter period, it must necessarily fol- low that the controlling central nuclear body of the egg would undergo a PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 182. Q. PRINTED MAY 27, 1890, Ryder.] 130 [May 16, corresponding greater specialization and differentiation than that of the spermatozoon. This view then satisfactorily accounts for the expulsion of the polar bodies and also gives some indication of the significance of the reduction of the cytoplasm of the spermatozoén or its complete loss, if we regard the egg and spermatozoén as antipodal expressions of a physiological pro- cess of evolution, which has resulted in forming bodies which are comple- mentary to each other in every physiological trait which they present. Since spermatozoa, also, are very often produced from what are mani- - festly ova, by the breaking down of the latter and the augmentation of their chromatin, it is clear that the spermatic body is a product derived from the egg by carrying its cleavage farther either by means of the direct ‘or indirect method, but while still attached to the parent or nour- ished by it. From this consideration it follows that the egg and spermatic body are not homologues before the final maturation of the former. It is, therefore, useless to expect to find any structures thrown off by spermatozoa which are complementary, in the sense implied by Minot and others, to the polar bodies of the egg. As I have been led to the views expressed above by following a totally different path from Weismann, and as I reject his hypothesis of the physi- ological isolation of the germ-plasm on the basis of fact, as shown else- where,* as incapable alike of proof or of serving a better purpose than a much simpler hypothesis, it seemed best to continue the argument upon the lines begun in earlier papers. It may, however, be well to point out here that what Weismann means by his ‘‘histogenetic’’ or ‘‘ovogenetic ’’ nucleoplasm, I distinctly limit to the genesis of the huge cytoplasmic field or cytoplasm and yolk of the ovum, The egg membranes are basement membranesand it is difficult to say what share the egg had in their formation except in lower forms, so that they are of far less consequence in this discussion than Weismann supposes. Another point is that parthenogenetic ova are certainly smaller than the fertilized ova of the same species, in some forms, though this is not always the case. This fact, however, is in accord with the hypothesis of the polar bodies set forth above. The mode of feeding the queen bee + shows, also, that parthenogenetic eggs, or those capable of developing in that way, are probably produced through the expenditure of less energy in the parent organism than those which develop only in the sexual way in strictly sexual forms. The connection of these facts with the explanation offered of the expulsion of the polar bodies is so obvious that it hardly needs to be indicated, It has been made clear that the overgrowth of the egg has resulted in its specialization, but the question still remains, What led to such an over- *‘*A Physiological Hypothesis of Heredity and Variation,’’ American Naturalist, pp. 85-02, xxiv, 1800, + Cheshire, ** Bees and Bee Keeping,’’ Vol. 1, pp. 82-85. 1890.) 131 [Ryder, growth of theovum? This, I believe, may be answered on the supposi- tion already to some extent elaborated that the egg is an abortive attempt at the production of an overgrown spermatogonium which is set free before it has been fully matured, asa result of the precocious determina- tion of superabundance of surplus nutriment to it. This has been due to forces operating within the parent organism ; how, we are still unable to clearly state. If this is so, then the speciali- zation of the egg is accounted for and the expulsion of the polar bodies may be approached from another point of view, namely, that of their morphological equivalence to spermatozoa, since they represent largely the characteristically male plasma in their chromatin. The egg is, there- fore, specialized in so far as it is an abortive spermatogonium, und the num- ber of polar bodies, produced as abortive spermatic elements, represent its degree of specialization. The consequent reduction of the chromatin in the egg nucleus may then also be compared with the processes of spermato- genesis in which a certain minimal size of the chromatin mass of the egg is reached, which now makes the ovum the exact homologue of the _ spermatozoén, but with an enormous cytoplasmic body fitted for the exhi- bition of active karyokinetic movements and an elaborate series of suc- cessive and finally simultaneous karyokineses. In this way it may be supposed that the peculiar advantages offered for the survival of a species through sexual processes may be realized.* But such advantages were developed not as the result of any foresight, but as a consequence of the action of the principle of overnutrition ending in _ the production of spermatogonia which failed to segment or break down _ into male elements before they were freed from the parent. In this way _ it may be supposed that the ovum itself arose, but that it was a later phase _ of development than that of the flagellate male germs, which type still prevails in asexual or very primitive forms. This gives us the real _ grounds for the evolution of the ovum ; accounts for its specialization, for _ the reduction in volume of its chromatin to that of the male element _ through the expulsion of the polar bodies, through which it also again becomes the immobile overgrown, but exact morphological homologue of the spermatazoiin. The specialization which the ovarian egg has attained as an overgrown spermatogonium also makes it certain that the cells ex- _ pelled as polar bodies represent the energy in part which has been _ expended, and which is signified by the great size of the ovarian egg. _ These products of specialized development must be got rid of so that this part of my hypothesis respecting the polar bodies is a necessary corollary ¥ of the first part developed in the earlier portion of this paper. The impulse towards the expulsion of the polar bodies comes from with- _ in, upon the advent of an adequate stimulus, and the tendency is to run _ down towards the male condition from the egg, but such a result is pre- vented from proceeding far by the small original amount of chromatin in _ the egg which prevents the formation of more than two cleavages, on the * “Origin and Meaning of Sex,” Am. Naturalist, June, 1889, pp. 501-508. Ryder.] 132 [May 16, average, when the chromatin is reduced to a volume equivalent to that of the chromatin in a single spermatozoin of the same species. The tendency towards the expulsion of polar bodies is therefore probably self-regulative as soon as a certain minimum in the size of the chromatin masses is attained. The impulse leading to such a result arises from the presence of a large cytoplasmic field sensitive to external stimuli, but in that such a field is cut off from further possibility of growth by detachment from the parent organism and incapable of further growth except through the stimulus of its chromatin, and in that no more of the latter is forthe time being elaborated after detachment, it is clear that the cleavages which give rise to the polar bodies are self-limited in number by conditions aris- ing within the egg, and as a consequence of the specialization of the latter as a cell, and in the sense that it differs from primitive types of cells as a consequence of its method of protected growth within the parent. Why, however, should the polar bodies be so small? Why does not the egg divide equally? This may be answered on the ground already as- sumed that the chromatin is yet neither male nor female, but tends univer- sally to be reduced to male dimensions even in the egg. The cytoplasm being the most abundant in the egg and the chromatin in the spermato- zoon, it is clear that totally different physiological characters must be offered by the two elements. This, in fact, is the essence of the meaning of the term specialization as applied to them, and involves the conception of wide differences in the modes in which physiological energy has worked to produce them, respectively. If the yolk is abundant, the cytoplasm, at one pole of the egg where nuclear cleavage occurs most readily to form the polar bodies, is reduced to a thin layer or disk. This, in many cases, is the condition under which polar bodies are produced so that a great inequality in the size of the cleavage products must result. Later, when the egg nucleus is reduced and can return to a deeper position in the egg, it can gain control of a still larger cytoplasmic field, which is still further enlarged by the advent of a fresh male chromatin and cytoplasmic element. When the male and female elements finally unite there is a com- plete readjustment of the equilibrium between the cytoplasm and chroma - tin centres, because the introduced male is capable of taking control of a still larger cytoplasmic field and may even at times overtop the female, as in the case of Rhynchelmis described by Vejdowsky. The two together now regain control of the cytoplasmic field of the egg, but cut off from direct dependence upon the parent, so that a new cycle of changes can go on in a new way, and instead of running down towards the male condi- tion, normal segmentation goes on which ends in the formation of a new being under the impulse of the tendencies towards continuoys growth under new conditions. The cases of egg and spermatozoOn are clearly merely specialized states of chromatin and cytoplasm and their separated and united conditions are merely phases of a continuous process of growth under widely differing conditions which are ushered in as the results, first, of an incipient and complete exclusion from the parent (formation of polar 1890.] 1 33 [Ryder. bodies and spermatogenesis), and, secondly, as the results of their union as complementary bodies through which.a new development is initiated. Their reciprocal saturation of each other also prevents polyspermy and is self-regulative, just as all of the processes of development will ultimately be found to be, and as we have seen good reason for believing must be the case in respect to the polar bodies. Finally, on our hypothesis it may be said that the chromatin and cyto- plasm in the egg bear acertain proportion to each other, regulated in the ovary. The effort to adjust this relation further after the ovum is free’ (usually) ends in the expulsion of the polar bodies, which represents an effort at the production of male cells, since the egg as a protovum is invariably the prelude to the production of spermatozoa. The ovum pre- cedes the spermatozo6n in the order of time, and the latter must be pro- duced from the former. Protogyny is, in the widest sense, therefore universal, since it is only ova-like bodies which can break down into spermatozoa in which chromatin preponderates. But this may be further qualified by the statement that protogynous tendencies greatly developed must finally themselves lead to the development of an ovum with a large cytoplasmic field. Or, in other words, a condition is reached in which great cytoplasmic specialization is attained, so that the expulsion of the polar bodies may be regarded as the expiring effort of protogyny to pro- duce spermatozoa. If this is so, why do not all ova develop parthenogenetically? Simply because these spermatic elements—polar bodies—are not completely ma- tured or developed, and while the transmitted energy of growth is insuffi- cient. The remaining body with its reduced chromatin is now, however, the equivalent of a spermatozoén but with an enormous cytoplasmic body, It is complementary to the male element in that it is physiologically recep- tive, and food through karyokinesis for further processes of segmentation. But how about parthenogenetic ova? Why do these develop and why do some of these develop two polar bodies? Here we often, if not always, have, as already supposed, a greater momentum of growth, with frequently a smaller mass, protogyny is not so markedly developed, and the tendency towards maleness and cleavage is therefore inherently greater. If now new relations or rather want of former modes of nutrition of the cyto- plasm supervenes after oviposition, the momentum of growth tending to segmentation, received from the parent even after the expulsion of the polar bodies, is still sufficient, so that the so-called female pronucleus is able to proceed under these new conditions to take possession of the cyto- plasmic field and initiate normal development under new and independent conditions, through segmentation, leading to the formation of an embryo. If these views are correct, parthenogenesis is the vanishing point of male- ness and femaleness, yet, in some cases, its energy is so great that it sometimes, even then, ends in maleness as seen in the development of drones amongst bees, thus illustrating still further the tendency in some cases to run down to the male condition. Ryder. ] 134 [May 16, If these conclusions will hold universally, there is good ground for believing that in the gradual evolution of protogyny the cytoplasmic field, in which rapidly successive segmentations were possible, was also evolved. If this is true, then sexuality itself arose as the consequence of protogyny starting in parthenogenesis. The primary and secondary sexual charac- ters of multicellular forms were also probably the outgrowth of secondary and adaptive processes consequent upon the effects wrought as here sup- posed through protogyny and the evolution of a large cytoplasmic field. The origin of sex at any rate hinges upon the decision of how the dispro- portion between the chromatin and cytoplasm arose in the sexual pro- ducts of the two sexes fespectively. Upon its last analysis this problem must resolve itself into purely physiological factors. These views are in accord with the first part.of this paper, though it may at first seem that the theory that the egg expels polar bodies because of its specialized nature is not well founded. What there is in favor of such a view is, that it harmonizes with the morphological and physiological data of ovogenesis, and the conjugation of Infusoria. In any event, it is cer- tain that if ova represent an incompleted effort to produce spermatozoa, it is very certain that they are specialized in so far as this effort has been realized as supposed, in the formation of polar bodies and a large volume of cytoplasm. Consequently ova may be regarded as incompletely differentiated sper- matogonia. The undoing of this specialization whereby the egg becomes the morphological equivalent of spermatozoén so far as its chromatin is concerned brings us back to essentially the same basis as was followed in the first part of this paper. Experimental evidence shows that the process of fertilization is self- regulative and restricted to a single spermatozoén. Indeed, one might infer from the evidence of the phenomena of fertilization that such must be the case, and that the ingress of the spermatic element, in sexual forms, is a consequence of the exhaustion of the power of continuous growth, as shown in the abortive effort at spermatogenesis in the extrusion of the polar bodies. A consequence, however, following because of the appe- tency of the spermatozodn to set up a segmentation in the cytoplasm which should end in a continuation of the process of spermatogenesis set agoing by the expulsion of the polar bodies, Yet, this does not occur, and, as we have seen, a good reason can be assigned why spermatogenesis does not go on indefinitely after being initiated by the extrusion of the polar bodies. Equally good reasons can be assigned why the method of nuclear movement is changed after the entrance of the spermatozoén. On my view this is wholly due to the sudden advent of wholly new con- ditions, since about the time of the ingress of the spermatozodn the egg is not only cut off from its supply of nutriment and is now an isolated being the whole of the cytoplasmic field of which is at the mercy of the com- bined action of the pronuclei, while the preparatory equilibrium resulting from the extrusion of the polar bodies has been attained beforehand. Te ee ee ee nT eae 1890.] 135 [Ryder. The new external conditions constitute a continuously acting series of stimuli provoking the action and reaction of the chromatin, achromatin, and cytoplasm upon each other, as has been rendered probable by the studies of Boveriand Watase. The isolation of the egg makes it inde- pendent; its cleavage products now cohere and the whole plan of its fragmentation depends upon its using every particle of its cytoplasm as reciprocally nutritive material for the maintenance of the integrity of the whole, Maturation is truly the proper name for the process of the extrusion of polar bodies, and it may be that in some cases the polar bodies may be large enough to merit the name of protova, especially the first one, and that a large enough cytoplasmic field may exist around its nucleus to attract spermatozoa, Yet the polar bodies are nevertheless to be regarded as abortive attempts at the production of spermatozoa. It may also be that the male condition characterized by the assumption by the elements of that sex of a monad-like flagellate form, is really an attempt at the recapitulation of the most ancient ancestral monadiform condition. In the female we have seen that the attainment of such a condition is abortive, but enough is left in the disguise of the polar bodies to represent a reminiscence of the lowest phase of organic evolution. We have now recapitulated all the important and difficult queries that have arisen in regard to the meaning of the polar bodies, which we also now see probably have a phylogenetic significance. The evolution of complicated apparatus and processes for the emission — of the sexual products, when mature, is only an accessory and a secondary consequence of the continuous series of processes described above, and which has also proceeded pari passu with the divergence in the morpho- logical and physiological characters of the products of the two sexes, The primary sexual characters and probably also the secondary ones have been evolved in response to the all-important requirement of most efficiently disposing of the sexual products. The habit of copulation itself must have so arisen, and the stimulus effecting the discharge of the sexual products finally acts through the sensorium and through the recip- rocal contact of the nerve terminations in special dermal tracts concerned in copulation in the two sexes. In this way it must be supposed that eventually the sexual passion became intensified as the provisions for effecting the union of the sexual cells became more elaborate, and as the parent-body became more and more differentiated and specialized to take a more and more important share in this process. The presence of the germ cells has undoubtedly reacted upon the soma or parent body so as to intensify the tendency towards a greater differentiation of the primary sexual organs, and this through the sensorium and its sensory terminals. It is interesting to reflect that the tendency to a repression of the male traits in the ovum has been manifested in the adult organization of the two sexes in Metazoa. The assertion of some writers to the effect that Ryder.] 1 36 [May 16, the female is merely a retarded stage of the development of the male may be correlated with the singular and suggestive contrasts between the egg and spermatozo6n. ~The evolution of sex and the evolution of sexual love or passion are inextricably intertwined, The history of the one is the history of the other. There are many reasons leading to the conclusion that the earliest and lower forms of sexuality were never in the past and are not now impelled to conjugate by anything akin to the gratification of passion such as is met with amongst the higher series of animal forms. Sexual passion is the outgrowth of a gradually developed and increased capacity for experiencing pleasurable sensations by the parent body or soma which is the producer or bearer of the sexual products. The high specialization of the sexual processes in higher forms has also unfortunately Jed to the possibility of their perversion. No sexual perversion is possible amongst lower forms where the essence of sexuality is the mere concrescence or conjugation of sexual cells. Courtship, violence towards and pursuit of the female, sexual love, etc., are the consequences of the evolution of a soma or parent body, which is the mere carrier of germ-cells, but which is capable of experiencing exquisite pleasure in the consummation of the sexual act. The intromission of an erectile organ covered with highly sensitive ner- vous end-organs into the genital passages of the female is the appetency for the sexual elements to conjugate reflected upon the soma. Copulation and the development of erectile or other sensitive intromittent and recip- rocally coadapted primary sexual organs must have been due to the effect ~ of use, since disuse, as in castration, affects the development of the parts, while abnormal activity, under favorable conditions, is said to increase their development. This view is sustained by the evidence in both plants and animals ; in both the devices for effecting conjugation of the sexual elements and developed in the most gradual manner, until, in plants, the pollen-grains, with the help of various secondary adaptations, © such as their morphological development, insect agency, the wind, etc., are evolved into true intromittent organs answering to the function ofa penis in the form of a growing pollen-tube, stimulated to growth by nutri- ment supplied by the stigma and carrying the very minute, elongate, male chromatin element in its very narrow passage to the ovicell of the ovary. In the same way the male intromittent organs of animals have been developed from a mere cloacal papilla, or a low-grooved fleshy erectile process toa highly differentiated and excessively complex penis with, in some cases, an elaborate series of rosettes and flanges covered with a thin integument with highly sensitive terminal sensory nerves, that are in reflex connection with the higher parts of the sensorium and through the lumbar region of the spinal cord with the testes, spermatic vesicles and accelerator urine and other muscles which they may throw into spasmodic contrac- tions in order to compress the vesiculw and cause the emission of the male elements in the act of coition, Similar actions result in the female which | ee 1890.] 137 [Ryder. affect the peristaltic contraction of the oviducts, the enclosure of the ovary by the fimbriz leading to conditions favorable to the emission of the egg at the time of coitus, In animals, the provisions for rendering the male elements more effi- cient are thus rendered more perfect. There is not wanting evidence that the glans penis may serve as a sort of piston, fitting closely against the sides of the vaginal passages so as to prevent the regurgitation and loss of the semen. In mice I have observed that in those which have recently been in coitus, the uterus is actually distended with semen. These con- trivances, many of which are of the most singular conformation, as that of the pig, for example, probably serve the purpose of more efficiently carrying the seminal matter into the genital passages of the female where they are to subserve the essential purposes of reproduction. At any rate, the wonderful contrivances in the higher plants serving the purpose of efficient fertilization are no more remarkable than those in the higher animals, the study of which has been singularly neglected by physiolo- gists. In the lowest types of living forms there is nothing which suggests in any way the gratification of passion, The mere tendency towards conju- gation of animals and plants without nerves cannot be identified with an appetency arising from any pleasure experienced in such conjugation. There are at first no provisions made for conjugation except such as the accident of contiguity of the conjugating elements as the germinating spores of Myxomycetes, the intracellular spores of Hydrodictyon, etc. When the process is so primitive as this, there is no evidence to show that it is anything more than the expression of the cessation of one order of things at the termination of one set of external conditions giving place to a new order of things under the stimulus of a new set of outward condi- tions more favorable to growth. ~Under this view of the case the incipi- ency of conjugative phenomena is simply the expréssion of a readjust- ment of the processes of growth under the influence of more or less favorable conditions of life. The physiological traits of that life are ex- pressed in the mode of molecular aggregation and constitution of the cel- lular unit or units composing the individual. Its tendencies are to increase the mass of the individual by processes of integration of new matter in the course of which such new matter becomes molecularly iden- tical with that of the organism engaged in such integration, a process commonly expressed by the term assimilation. The consequence of such newer integrations are that still other inte- grations are possible, under favorable conditions, on a much larger scale than the first ones. The increased power to make continuously more and more extensive and rapid integrations of identical molecules is possibly in some way due to the increase of mass and surface and the consequently increased capacity to liberate energy, or to perform work in a still more active integration and assimilation of molecules. The Malthusian principle therefore rests, in its last analysis, upon a PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 1382. R. PRINTED MAY 27, 1890. Ryder.] 138 [May 16, chemico-physical basis. It is probably, therefore, not an unjustified as- sumption to state that the acquisition of an increased mass in organic bodies leads to an increased capacity to integrate and assimilate still further additions to the original organized mass, and that if this process could go on indefinitely without the intervention of death and a necessity for oxy- gen, the earth might be gradually transformed, in so far as its available materials held out for such a purpose, into a few organized individuals. Such a supposition is, however, absurd, since such masses, even were their growth possible, would finally become helplessly immobile from theirown weight ; such a process would be self-destructive and incapable of indefi- nite maintenance. If, however, the principle that successive increments in the mass of or- ganized bodies, carries with it the implication that such increments imply their capacity to increase more and more rapidly, under favorable condi- tions, or as it may otherwise be expressed, are thus enabled to grow, in virtue of such an inherent property, far beyond the bulk of their original germinal mass, then this deduction must form the basis upon which the phenomena of growth, reproduction and sex must finally be interpreted. This principle affords also the physico-chemical or physiological reason for the foundation of the Malthusian principle that the. production of organ- isms would if unchecked outrun the available food production fora cer- tain section of such organisms, as an aggregate—namely, the animal world. ' ‘ The foundation of the principle of Malthus and of the Darwinian prin- ciple founded upon it, therefore lies within the domain of ultimate biologi- cal physics or the molecular dynamics of organized bodies. The main- spring of the principle of natural selection, upon final analysis is not itself a choice between two things but an inevitable consequence of the - innate molecular habit of living matter, if I may soexpress myself. It is physical in that the chemical and physiological laws under which growth or molecular integration can take place are themselves resolvable into physical laws which can be cotrdinated under the principle of the conser- vation of energy. This physical principle of continuous and continuously augmented inte- gration and the consequent increase of the mass of living bodies is the primary conditioning factor of growth by intussusception of similar mole- cules, It initiates the struggle for existence, as the struggle due to motion and the attraction of stellar bodies, maintains the latter in their harmo- nious relations in space. This principle must, however, be further qualified in that the properties of the molecular integrating factors of living organisms differ very widely. Some forms (vegetal) under one set of conditions can integrate new and more complex assimilable molecules by recombining binary compounds ; other forms—animals—can assimilate only such new ternary molecules or such as are very nearly similar to their own, while a third form, the sex- ual, is probably the highest expression of this integration of similar mole- etiam bem I eS ae 1890.] 4 139 | Ryder. cules in that here the molecular differences are zero or nearly so, and at most goes no further than molecular differences, having their origin in the individual traits of either of the two parents. The last or sexual form of integration or intussusception also occurs, en masse, and without any reciprocal sacrifice of molecular identity. This last form of organic molecular integration is therefore effected with the least expenditure of energy on the part of the sexual elements themselves which are involved. Sexuality according to this view as expressed primarily in conjugation is a sort of refined hunger, in which neither the ‘‘eating’’ nor the ‘‘ eaten ”’ expends but a minimum of energy in a process of reciprocal assimilation. It is a hunger in which the sense of “taste’’ in the vulgar, anthropo- morphic sense is unknown ; it isan affinity developed possibly through the attraction of identical molecular aggregates for each other. The principle of cumulative molecular integration is similar in some respects to the cumulative principle operative in organic structural evolu- tion, through which a superposition of adaptations results, not necessarily as the consequence of selection but as the result of the morphological and physiological necessity of conforming in the next step of morphological and physiological complication to that which had preceded it. Many in- stances in illustration might be cited, such as the annular placenta of the ovum necessarily. conforming to the easiest possibility of internal contact with a tubular uterine canal. This principle has been responsible for much that has happened in organic evolution, but it is again dependent in curious, circuitous ways upon the still more primary principle of cumu- lative integration, overgrowth of organisms, or their capacity to grow be- yond their own bulk at certain points, as implied by Haeckel. The highest form of cumulative integration ending in an overgrown and abortive spermatogonium, which is the equivalent of the egg, together with its further expression in the production of spermatozoa which have had their cytoplasmic field reduced, leads to a condition where the one becomes helpless without the other. It also presumably leads to the evo- lution of an appetency or affinity of the male for the female element in that the one possesses what the other does not, and in that they are pro- duced in similar organisms or those of the same species their idioplasmic constitution must be very nearly the same, except for the morphological differences which characterize them. These differences are again the pre- ponderance of nucleoplasm in the one or the element immediately con- cerned in growth and the physiological integrity of the living cell, and the preponderance of cytoplasm in the other, which is the medium in which free nuclear motion, karyokinesis, and consequent growth is possi- ble. The affinity so developed through cumulative integration by the divergent processes of ovogenesis and spermatogenesis ends in what I shall term reciprocal integration without loss of molecular identity, or in what is usually termed “ fertilization.’’ - The advantages offered by such a process is that it provides for the de- velopment of metazoan or multicellular embryo, which is without the Ryder.]} 1 40 [May 16, need of immediately feeding, but which is enabled to reach a certain self- helpful morphological complication before it begins the struggle for exist- ence for itself. It provides a large cytoplasmic field in which rapidly re- current successive and simultaneous karyokineses can take place under the guidance of the inherited tendencies resident in the nucleoplasm and cytoplasm of the combined germs. The one sex appears to supply the field for segmentational activity, the other the segmentational impulse itself. In other words, sexuality is the expression of the action of the principle of the physiological division of labor, extended so as to involve two kinds of individuals of the same species, or two different functionless parts of the same individual, as in hermaphrodites. There is no convincing evidence that the male induces variability. The argument from hybrids is of little value. The tendency to an equilibrium as the consequence.of close interbreeding or of continued promiscuous interbreeding is the same, and is to be interpreted as the result of the constancy of the mode of growth of the average individual which must finally result, following from the average of hereditary characters which are finally thus transmissibie. As soon as slightly differing forms are crossed the karyokinetic equilibrium is disturbed and variability ought on a priori grounds to ensue. To saddle the induction of variability upon the male does not seem to be demonstrated, as the factors involved are too numerous to enable us to decide what ones are important and what are unimportant. A view which has far more in its favor is that a large ojsperm, inter- preted as above, with a large cytoplasmic field, is inherently more liable to vary its karyokinetic processes through very slight variations in the ex- ternal influences than a small or a parthenogenetic one. That sexuality, taken in the widest sense, is responsible for variability is probably nearer the truth. That the ojsperm, with its large cytoplasmic field, is the real arena in which variability disports itself, may be taken for granted. It is aiso very evident that the evidence derived from the development of monsters is clearly in favor of such a view. Monsters are developed only when the early stages of development are karyokinetically disturbed, as is well known. Moreover, there is no hard and fast line between mon- strosities and variations of a less and less monstrous character until those of an almost imperceptible and unimportant character are encountered, That the tendency towards variability is more marked in the young than in the adult stages of fixed and slightly variable types of Metazoa may be regarded as a truism, and must be considered the foundation of these views. In that temperature affects the rate of karyokinetic processes, it is clear that inequalities of temperature simultaneously affecting different points on the surface of an egg would affect the rate of segmentation of the cells of such different points and thus induce variability, A single karyo- kinesis disturbed or impeded on one side of an embryo must disturb all subsequent ones, A mechanism so delicate as this of karyokinesis may — eee ee ee SS 1890 141 (Ryder, also be interfered with in other ways. It seems almost self-evident that where karyokineses become simultaneous and rapidly successive there must be a greater inherent probability that variations should be induced through disturbances of the karyokinetic processes. Latterly much discussion has taken place regarding rejuvenescence and the relation of the process of fertilization to a supposed renewal of the youth of the sexual cells. It may be suggested that the sexual cells prob- ably never grow old from the causes which act upon the other cells of the body to render them senile, and it may be that the real ground for a theory of rejuvenescence lies not in fertilization itself but in the fact that the sexual cells are functionless and have not been belabored with physiologi- cal duties in the parent body. Where they are produced annually, as in many animals and in all plants, they are also the youngest cells of the parent body, while the spermatozoa, produced in some animals at hourly intervals, are still younger, or more youthful. The male cell is therefore the most youthful, the least functional and the one most disposed to ex- hibit its activities of growth under favorable conditions with the greatest energy, though not necessarily in the sense that such a display of greater energy would be favorable towards provoking variability, except as pro- vided for by the cytoplasmic field of the ovum or female element. It has also been pointed out that the first cleavage of the ojsperm cor- responds to the future median plane of the embryo or to the line dividing the future hypoblast from the epiblast. But there are still other relations which connect these phenomena with the fore and aft disposition of the body of the parent. It is a matter of common knowledge that the Infu- soria When undergoing division divide either lengthwise or crosswise. In fixed forms— Vorticella—the division occurs lengthwise of the parent and in conformity to the mode in which the future individual is related to the colony by its base. In many free forms the division is crosswise, and it is a singular fact that the end of the hinder individual next to the posterior end of the anterior one becomes the future anterior end of the hindmost one. These two forms of division have been developed adaptively and in conformity with very different conditions in the two cases. Why should the end of the young Paramecium next the foremost or parent individual become its anterior extremity preferably to the other one? Does this not indicate that use and habit may have had an influence in giving the plas- ma of both a bias which extended to the soma of the posterior bud and which expresses itself in this peculiar polar conformity to that of the an- terior parent individual, which is more somatic in its character ? Numerous other forms, such as Volwoz, illustrate the same tendency of the axis of the young to conform to the axis of the parent. In Fishes the embryos of Batrachus tau, which are attached to a fixed substratum after the rupture of the egg-membrane, by the adhesion of the yolk sack to the latter, show that, at the time of deposit, the future avis of the whole brood of embryos was predetermined in the body of the parent. That this must be so may be concluded from the astonishing fact that the heads and tails Ryder.] 142 [May 16, of a whole brood conform in direction, within a degree or two, to a com- mon axial plane. How was such an astonishing conformity to a common axis brought about, if it was not developed in the ovary of the parent be- fore oviposition? If this is true then the axis of the parent and the polarity of her body, as expressed in its fore and aft extension, exerted such an influence upon the brood as to impress such a polar tendency, and transmit it directly to every egg matured in her body. If this is true, then the parent body does transmit characters directly to its offspring, Weismann, Lankester and other deluded skeptics to the contrary not- . withstanding. Here is a whole brood of young fishes, fixed to the surface upon which they were hatched, every one of which conforms, to within a degree or two, to lines running parallel to each other in a common direction. Does or does not either parent transmit this ; since one-or the other must do so, hew is it done, and why is this not proof that the soma of the parent transmits certain polarities, and those of the most important character, directly to the germ-plasma from which the embryos are devel- - oped? The case here is just as clear as in the case of Vorticella or Para- meecium ; they are in exact conformity, so that we have here once more direct evidence of the untenability and absolute falsity of some of Weis- mann’s deductions as to the non-transmissibility of acquired characters. In a similar way, how is the polar conformity of the chick in the egg to the axis of the parent bird to be accounted for? Though in this case the axis of the embryo lies constantly at right angles to that of the parent as the ovum descends through the oviduct. Equally striking are the constant relations of the embryo Rabbit, in the uterus up to the tenth or twelfth day, at right angles to the axis of the parent body. The same is true of the Cat, Dog, Mouse, Rat, and other forms. The same principle also holds in Arthropods, where egg-tubes are formed and where there are also con- stant anterior and posterior poles of the eggs developed, which bear a constant relation to those of the parent. Here are bodily habits directly transmitted which involve nothing like a change of structure ; dues the germ-plasma accomplish this, or does the direct influence of the mother's organism accomplish this remarkable result? For me the latter alterna- tive seems to be the only explanation. Similarly the phenomena of budding in Salpa, as worked out by Brooks and Seeliger, tend to establish the same conclusion, namely, that the polarities of the immediate parent influence those of the offspring directly. It looks as if the bodily functions of the parent either impressed them- selves as if from a distance, or through the pole of the germ most directly in a nutritive relation to the parent upon the still unconscious germinal matter giving it these tendencies to conform in these curious ways to the polarities of the parent organism. It is also tolerably clear that the so- called ‘‘ promorphology ’’ of the egg is preceded by a still earlier morpho- logical history, which has been scarcely more than touched by students of the Metazoa. The direct influence of the source of the nutriment sup- plied to the growing embryos is probably indicated in these singuiar ee ee eS eee ee 1890.] 143 [Ryder. examples, no less than in the fact that the polarity of young, viviparously developed aphides corresponds to the fore and aft polarities of the parents. Or, as in the case of the ovarian leaflets of the ovary of the lamprey, the micropyles are found to be invariably turned towards the vascular core of the leaflets, and consequently towards the sources of nutriment and oxygen. In this last case also, these factors have determined the position of the future germinal or animal pole, and consequently the point on the egg where development shall begin. ‘The points which have thus far been elaborated tend, in a general way, to support the conclusion that, in the production of ova and:spermatozoa, both have arisen from a common basis. The lowest forms, we certainly know, tend to multiply without attendant karyokinetic processes, prob- ably, as suggested, because a cytoplasmic field or arena in which nuclear movement is possible, is wanting. In the lowest Monads sporulation re- sults in the breaking up of the parent body into infinitesimally minute germs, which are, presumably, composed in the main of chromatin or nucleoplasm, a conclusion which comports with the fact now ascertained, that the chromatin or nucleoplasm of lower forms, if deprived of its envelope of cytoplasm, may regenerate it. Overgrowth of mass, so as to form a large cell-body composed of cytoplasm, is unknown amongst the very lowest forms, which are also flagellate. In the next step (Nostoc), the overgrowth of certain cells means that they are incapable of develop- ment. Inthe next step, the conjugation of overgrown cells, with those in which nucleoplasm preponderates, restores the power of growth or the power to integrate cytoplasm anew, or, as in Infusoria, conjugation stim- ulates the production of nucleoplasm through the constructive metabolism of the investing cytoplasm. All of this evidence tends to prove that maleness, or the condition of the flagellate spore, is the primitive one as already stated. Since the very lowest animal forms are likely to preserve some reminiscence of the primi- tive processes leading up to animal sexuality in its most generalized form, it will be desirable to appeal to the evidence offered by such forms. The Ameeba is undoubtedly animal in nature, but notwithstanding the persist- ence and frequency with which it has been studied, much still remains to be learned of its life history. Leidy has shown that, in certain forms of Ameeba, the nuclei t¢nd to multiply after reaching a certain size, and through a tripartite division without karyokinesis. One of these nuclei is then transported to near the surface, where it bursts and allows the balls of chromatin adherent to its walls to escape into the surrounding water, presumably as germs, but he did not trace their history.’ If this should prove to be a true case of sporulation, it would prove that in the Amceba there are conditions which ’ favor the production of chromatin, and that the germinal matter or nucleo- plasm is ‘‘set aside ’’ in the nucleus from which it is expelled. Mrs. Lillie Holman’s observations (1. c, supra) also tend to show that a conjugation may occur where one Amceba swallows another and then Ryder.] 144 [May 16, disgorges it. The disgorged one then comes to rest and becomes encysted ; it then discharges upwards of two hundred spores, since the further results of the development of the latter were observed the next day in the same ‘‘life-slide’’ as very minute young Amebe. Brass* has given a more circumstantial account. According to him th body of the Ameeba after encystment undergoes at least superficial sub- division into cells. The cyst then bursts or opens at one point and these superficial cells escape from the cyst as minute flagellate monads, which soon lose their flagella, becoming at the same time again amceboid and settle upon objects over which they creep about as did their parent, of which they are a fragment. They now also feed very actively, grow rapidly and soon become the counterparts of the parental organism, which gave rise to them by fragmentation. A somewhat similar history has been worked out by Haeckel for-Protomyxa, and Weldon has reported the detachment or escape of small germs from the body of Pelomyza. We have the spermatogonium typified in this peculiar method of frag- mentation of the Amceba, especially as described by Brass. It is an over- grown cell breaking down in part, but first elaborating more chromatin, just as a spermatogonium does. The overgrowth in mass of the parent cell is due to cumulative integration. The flagellate offspring represeats the spermatozoa produced by aspermatogonium in a multicellular form, but with this difference that a spermatozoéa cannot withdraw its flagellum and begin to feed. Such a flagellate germ of a higher multicellular form must then perish if it is not nourished in some other way. The only way in which it can be nourished is to blend with the cytoplasmic body of an- other abortive but hypertrophied spermatozoén—the ovum, as supposed above. In other cases, mammals and birds, it is known that the sperma- tozoa or flagellate germs of the male die if not kept at the same tempera- ture as the parent body. They are not adapted to continue to live in the cold medium in which the flagellate germs of an Ameeba would at once begin to feed and grow. The flagellate or wandering germs of the Ameeba are wandering in habit, probably because they inherit an organization favorable to vagranvy from still lower monad-like creatures. And this wandering habit is doubt- less advantageous to the young Ameeba, as they are thereby scattered so as to be placed where food is more plentiful, at any rate, the offspring of one parent Amceba do not, as a consequence, fall into a heap at one place so as to come into such close competition with one another for food. Such vagrant habits would be of advantage to the germs of almost any species and they are certainly of use in many cases in that they favor the distribution of a species. In the case of the male germs of higher, in fact, of all forms, this vagrant habit becomes useful in effecting their dis- tribution, and at last of aiding them to find the egg and the micropyle, if such is developed, through which they enter the ovum. So that here again we find that a habit which has at first thought apparently no preéminent * Die Zelle, das Element der Organischen Welt,” pp, 63-65, Thiéme, Leipzig, 1889, a eer eee = 1890,] 145 [Ryder. value or importance in the very highest forms, but which has such an importance in lower ones, may serve a very different purpose in higher types, that is, to find the female element so as to combine with it, which, of course, would be an advantage to the species. In this example, we find an illustration of change of function, or rather the use of an old function in a new way, illustrating also the principle that, any further advantageous step in evolution avails itself of the service of the next pre- ceding one in the order of time, or rather, the latter is apt to thus become a stepping-stone to farther progress, as is shown in this instance. The parallelism of the Ameeba before breaking up into flagellate germs, with a spermatogonium in a higher form is, however, complete, and it is from this basis that further criticisms and suggestions may now proceed. Geddes and Thomson, in their suggestive work on sex,* have attempted to identify the evolution of the female germ or ovum with a tendency to develop a leaning towards constructive metabolism or anabolism, while the Inale germ exhibits the reverse tendency or towards destructive metabolism ‘or katabolism. So far as the directly palpable facts are concerned which lie upon the surface, these conclusions of Geddes and Thomson would seem to be justified. There is apparently nothing in them which con- flicts, at first thought, with the fucts of morphology and physiology. Yet, I believe that the prime conclusion of these authors is capable of further analysis, and consequently that it is not as important as it appears to them, nor is it strictly and entirely true in a physiological sense. The growth of an egg we will admit requires constructive metabolism to extend over a longer period than if the germ were male. While it is true that growth represents the expenditure of a certain amount of energy in the form of metabolism, it is by no means clear that the energy ot growth required to produce a number of male elements equal in volume to an egg is any greater in the one case than in the other. It may be said that there must necessarily be more cell divisions or karyokineses in the case of a given volume of male elements than in the female, but this goes for nothing in that it cannot be shown that the metabolism or energy expended in building up and segmenting the one is any greater reckoning the additional and usual formation of an egg membrane in the egg (which is wanting in the other element), than in building up the large mass of plasmain the ovum. But in some eggs there is no egg membrane. Even then the process of spermatogenesis is not strictly to be compared with a disruptive metabolism or katabolism ; on the contrary, as an end pro- duct of cytoplasmic activity, the male cell is in the main the highest achievement of constructive metabolism as represented in its preponderant nucleoplasm., The lowest forms of life have apparently a greater capacity for the development of nucleoplasm or chromatin-like substance, than the cells of higher animals, but even there, as in higher forms, there is the best evidence that the cytoplasm is the real agent in the production of the nucleoplasm ; the latter grows, as we know, at the expense of the former. * “The Evolution of Sex,” New York, 1890. PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 1382. 5. PRINTED MAY 28, 1890. Ryder.] 146 [May 16, The processes of metabolism, it is true, are carried a stage further in the production of flagellate germs and male elements than in the female, but it is not towards a lower plane of molecular structure, but towards a higher one than in the female germ. It may be said that metabolism is controlled by the nucleoplasm or chromatin, in that the volume of the one increases with the volume of the other asin a growing Ameba. An in- sufficiency of nucleoplasm would render a cell inert and incapable of codrdinating its large cytoplasmic field, as experiment seems to demon- strate. The continuous processes of growth therefore ending in the ex- pulsion of the polar bodies bring about such astage of cytoplasmic inertia, in which the process of fertilization and the concomitant access of a highly complex and anabolic male element would restore the balance between the cytoplusm and the nucleoplasm, The ‘‘katabolic tendency ”’ of the male element is more apparent than real; it has a greater capacity for katabolic change than the female as measured by the relative volume of its nucleoplasm, but absolutely it has far less because of its small size as compared with the whole ovum. The question of the genesis of sex is” not to be disposed of in quite so simple a way as is done by Geddes and Thomson, or in asentence. These authors have missed the essence of the matter in that they have not noted the essential distinction which exists between the egg and the spermatazoén, nor the transcendant importance of the process of cumulative integration. The cytoplasm preponderates in the one, while the nucleoplasm preponderates in the other. Noreason for this has been assigned by these authors. Is not the evolution uf a larger amount of nucleoplasm than is contained in the egg, as must hap- pen were it to break up into spermatozoa expressive rather of preponder- ant anabolism than of preponderant katabolism? Is also the greater mobility of the male element an expression of a specially katabolic ten- dency? Is not its mobility due to an inherited tendency in part, derived from its most remote flagellate ancestor, and partly to its small size, form, mode of genesis and molecular structure ? The contrast between the modes of production of the male and female elements in Ostrea edulis is typical. The difference appears to lie solely in the fact that, in the case of the egg, the whole of the overgrown sper- matogonium is expelled, but is not a mature ovum until after the expul- sion of the polar bodies; in the expulsion of the male elements only a part of the spermatogonium is expelled, this process being accompanied beforehand by the elaboration of an excessive amount of chromatin by the mother nucleus of the spermatogonium, this chromatin serving to form, in the main, the nuclei of the multitudes of spermatozoa so set free. In that the chromatin used in the development of spermatozoa is formed at the expense of the cell body of the spermatogonium, there is an almost exact equivalence in the plasma that remains as the cell body of the ovum, 80 fur as the metabolism expended in its production is concerned, ‘The essentia) difference seems to me to lie not so much in any supposed diatheses which are more or less anabolic as in a difference in the func- SS SS Le ee 1890] 147 [Ryder. tional properties of the plasma of egg and sperm, developed as a conse- quence of the physiological division of labor in the cell between cytoplasm and chromatin. The former is the immediate agent of intussusception, the latter controls and coédrdinates the processes of the former. The one is produced in a confined place tending to repress segmentational activity or nearer abundant supplies of nutriment. The other is produced in open cavities which admit of the free escape of sex products, or in regions, or at times when the determination of pabulum is less abundant than in the case of ova. Looking over the arrangement of the reproductive organs and their relation and proximity to the nutritive system, in many forms these views will be found to have much evidence in their favor. Never- theless there is no evidence in favor of the one process being more kata- bolic than the other. They are equivalent, only that in the ovum there is a repressed segmentational tendency,in the spermatogonium an unre- pressed one. The tendencies are towards the male or primitive monadi- form condition in both, only that secondary physiological influences are repressive in the female and irrepressive in the case of the male element, Segmentation into spermatozoa is hindered in the egg, favored in the case of the spermatogonium. Yet despite this there is not the slightest evi- . dence that the results in the two cases are not equivalent so far as the expenditure of energy is concerned. The real difference in the result lies in this, that in the female element there is an enormous cytoplasmic field in which simultaneous and succes- sive nuclear movement can take place leading to the realization of a cohe- rent process of development instead of an incoherent one such as occurs in the breaking down of the spermatogonium into spermatozoa. The process in the one case is cohesive, in the other disruptive and self-de- structive, The tendency then in the female is towards morphological in- tegration, in the male towards morphological disintegration, but upon the common basis of the spermatogonium. The real gain of this is not in the absolute bulk of the embryo simply, but in that such an embryo may become self-mobile and self-helpful in spite of its size, Herein lies the true significance of sex and of the cumu- lative process initiated through the repression of the primitive segmenta- tional tendency of the spermatogonium. An embryo thus developed can go through an entire and elaborate cycle of embryonic development with- out requiring to take food at all and attain to a self-helpful, self-mobile condition, It is therefore obvious that in such a process of repression of segmenta- tion of the spermatogonium there has been a distinct advantage gained in the struggle for existence, in that such a spermatogonium could directly become the means by which a rapid or saltatory process of evolution could be accomplished, resulting in the evolution of larval forms. From such a stepping-stone the hypertrophied spermatogonium—ovum—other advances were possible, especially in the direction of variation, since such rapid simultaneous and successive segmentations would provide the most Ryder.] 148 [May 16, extensive possibilities for variation. This must be true upon the simple ground of the theory of permutations, since every cell added to the aggre- gate of a segmenting germ must increase its capacity to vary. This gives not simply a capacity to vary as if variation were fortuitous, but as a con- sequence a capacity of adaptation which is proportionately and demon- strably greater during their earlier stages, a circumstance again in con- formity with the fact that all living metazoan types have diverged directly from the ovum, as is proved by their ontogeny. The reproductive cells, as stated in a previous paper by the writer,* are functionless, so far as being of any service to the parent body producing them is concerned, The only function they have in relation to the parent body, is to lead a pseudo-parasitic existence at the expense of the surplus nutriment elaborated by the parent organism ; but these pseudo-parasitic generative cells are themselves the products of the continuation of the processes of cellular growth and fission of the parent plasma. Being functionless, the reproductive cells of both sexes also tend to revert to the most primitive form of reproduction, namely, to break down into spores, as illustrated by the bodily fragmentation of the majority of lower forms into spores, or the multiplication of the nuclei of some of these forms at the expense of their cytoplasm. In the male this reversion and breaking down into spores is most com- plete in the evolution of a spermatogonium, in the female it is incomplete in that the reproductive cells are in some way prevented from breaking down either by excess of nutriment or proximity to nutriment under en- closed or encysted conditions, which tends to be overcome at about the time the eggs are set free or after that time, as expressed in the expulsion of the polar bodies. The female individual may therefore be regarded in the light of a male organism in which the excessive tendency to sporu- lation has been repressed or retarded. The female state of all higher forms may be regarded as a suppressed or retarded male condition. This repression of the male condition within the parent body leads how- ever to a process of cumulative growth in the ovary or female gonad which expresses itself as the continued increase of the volume of the sper- matogonium, leading to the evolution of a large amount of cytoplasm. After detachment of the hypertrophied spermatogonium, as an ovum, the source of supply in the form of nutriment is cut off, and whatever karyo- kinesis now goes on must proceed at the cost of a small amount of nucle- oplasm, which soon exhausts itself so far as any exhibition of the energy of growth is concerned in the production of the polar bodies. After the expulsion of the polar bodies the egg is probably able merely to so adjust its internal forces so as to prevent the ovum from disintegrating. In this condition the egg is incapable of further growth and in that the spermatic body from a fully developed spermatogonium, developed in the male is alone capable of reinforcing the exhausted female nucleus, so as to let loose the potential energy, for the time being, stably locked up in * Origin and Meaning of Sex,'’ Amer. Nat,, 1889, pp. 501-508, 1890.] } 149 [Ryder. the cytoplasm or cytoplasm and yolk of the hypertrophied female sper- matogonium or ovum, it must have access to the latter. The egg before the expulsion of the polar bodies is a spermatogonium, after that and exclusive of the polar bodies it is the exact homologue of the spermatozoin in that its nucleoplasm is now reduced to the volume of the nucleoplasm of the male element of the same species. The male spore is however so specialized as an organism in nearly all forms that it is incapable of nourishing itself. Clearly, the only way it can do so is to find lodgment in a body whose molecular constitution is as nearly as possible similar to itself, otherwise its identity must perish in that it would either be digested or in some way absorbed, neither of which fates befall it in the egg, as we know from observation. That body in which it can find lodgment is the female spore or germ of its own species, in which it is not only not digested but is taken in as a partner literally, since it completely fuses with the female centre of control hitherto coér- dinating and maintaining the integrity of the cytoplasm. But as soon as this fusion of the starved spore—male element—and the overgrown female element happens, the further changes which now take place must proceed in the presence of the stimulus of abundant nutriment (represented by the cytoplasm of the egg) for the male; but this is not all, the egg is now detached and cannot be nourished for a time, and its career of development is now also profoundly influenced by such all im. portant new conditions as the surrounding oxygen affords for renewed metabolism, under the new free condition, all of which taken together makes for a tendency towards a new mode segmentation which tends to recapitulate the growth of the parent form. The process of fertilization is probably more like one in which there is a reciprocal blending of two living bodies in which there is no loss of identity of either in that their essential molecular constitution is exceed- ingly similar. Reciprocal digestion does not occur since the organization of both germs would be sacrificed if such a process were to occur. So far from that the organization of both germs is in a sense maintained, and we have in the blending of male and female elements the paradox of two cells becoming one without the sacrifice of organization in either during the process of fusion. It is therefore manifest that the application of the term mutual or reciprocal digestion as attempted by Rolph and maintained by Geddes is wide of the mark and not descriptive of the process at all. ‘* Fertilization ’’ is really the highest and most specialized form of molecular integration, and is itself the highest phase, and a consequence of the uni- versal principle of cumulative integration, which underlies all continuous growth which in turn must end, on accountof the requirements demanded by the surroundings, in discontinuous growth, the production of unlike germs by the same species, and consequently in sexuality.* __ * The theory of the polar bodies developed in this paper remains to be put to the test. I find that the nuclei of the spermatozoa of Ostrea edulis take up the methyl green while the nuclei of the spermatogonia take up the saffranin from a solution of those two dyes Ryder.] 150 [May 16, The causes of the ‘‘setting aside’’ of the ‘‘ germ-plasma have acted directly and in an adaptive manner.” . ‘‘Nature is no spendthrift but takes the shortest way to her ends.’’ Weismann assumes that the reproductive cells are ‘‘set aside’’ as the consequence of the action of the principle of the physiological division of labor. The cause of the physiological divi- sion of labor he attributes to the ‘ action”’ of ‘‘natural selection.’’ Is this true ? Taking one of the lowest forms of reproductive activity as illustrated in Volvox we find that the germ-cells are not yet constantly or definitely localized except that we may say that they arise in the posterior hemi- sphere of the colony. Examining Volvoz from the standpoint which recent knowledge has afforded, it is clear that the anterior pole is differentiated to a degree not attained by the posterior pole. This differentiation clearly stands in a definite relation to the greater action of the light on the anterior pole from the germinal condition onwards through life. It also stands in a definite relation to the differentiation of the anterior pole as the directive and phototaxic one in the course of the execution of the motions of the whole organism rotating on a definite axis. Furthermore, the organism when at rest, as it frequently i is at the sur- face of the water, has the upper pole turned towards the light, and under these circumstances is it not to be supposed that the lower pole, which is the heavier on account of the presence of the large germs, would gravi- tate into its inferior position? I do not see how such an admission is to be avoided. If this is so the tendency once begun would tend to be intensi- fied, since those peripheral cells which began to be receptive to the surplus nutriment elaborated by the whole organism would tend to maintain that tendency and the heavier they grew the more constantly they would tend to turn the anterior pole, where the largest ‘‘ eye spots ’’ are found upward towards the light. This would give the light an opportunity to maintain the specialization of the anterior pole as the photophilous one, and thus intensify its phototaxic tendencies, The anterior pole would then be most active in its reactions to light, the posterior one least so as is actually the case. The evolution of the physio- logical differentiation of Volvox can therefore be directly traced to the action of the principle of overgrowth or overnutrition reacting under the influence of gravity upon the equilibrium of the colony so to adjust it that the colony will be uniformly acted upon generation after generation in the sume way upon the upper pole. This would be an all-sufficient cause of the sx eee, een differentiation or the real cause of the physiological satiate together. Balbiant er obtained somewhat similar results with the testes of Elasmobranchs and Mammals, using picrocarmine and methyl green. Ifthe polar cells are abortive male elements they should have a greater affinity for methyl green than the female pronucleus. If such results were secured my hypothesis would obtain micro- chemical verification. Indeed, I am inclined to think that the fact which I haye observed, that the one pole of the dumb-bell-shaped chromatin mass in the nucleus of the immature egg of Ostrea stains with methyl green, while the other pole stains with saffranin is distinctly in favor of my interpretation. 1890.] 168: [Ryder. division of labor observed. This process of morphological specialization in Volvoz is therefore not necessarily due to natural selection alone. There are still other reasons why the physiological specializations in Volvoz have proceeded along the lines they have. It may be asked why the germ-cells tend to bulge inwards as they enlarge into the jelly which fills the cavity of the colonial sphere. Why do they not bulge outwards? To this it may be replied that light, oxygen and food react from the ex- terior of the colony. The mobile protoplasm through which supplies of nutriment come, must be most exterior. The katabolic running down of the accumulated nutriment matters into less mobile coarse granules which need and consume less oxygen, requires that these materials shall be pushed inwards where they will not obstruct respiration. In this way, upon the ground of physiological anatomy and the reaction of the incident surrounding forces, the process of the ‘‘setting aside of the germ-plasma”’ in Volvox can be fully accounted for without appealing for an instant to natural selection. There is clearly nothing further needed. It might be said that ‘‘ natural selection’’ would favor only those indi- viduals which did not have the germ-cells bulging outwards, because they could not so conveniently rotate or move forwards. Yes, but Volvox does not, in the first place, continuously rotate. In the next place, even if ‘‘natural selection ’’ did work the wonders claimed for it, it is clear that the explanation here suggested is one which involves no waste of the forces of growth or of individuals, but is operative in virtue of the con- tinuity of the processes of growth, besides it meets the requirements equally well with the hypothesis of natural selection. The natural selectionist will next appeal to the morphology of Volvoz in some other direction and ask, How was the hollow sphere evolved? This, in its turn, is clearly and purely adaptive. The growth of the original colonies, which were doubtless evolved from such as broke down into planogametes, grew directly into larger multicellular aggregates which would directly arrange their cells so as to derive the greatest advantage from the surroundings and in attaining that adjustment, the globular form was assumed, in that it offered the maximum opportunity for oxygen, food, etc., in the form of a hollow sphere with the gametes joined by pro- toplasmic bonds. The selection of the pattern of the form of the whole organism is thus traced to internal forces acting in direct response to outer conditions and not as the result of a murderous process of ‘‘selection”’ and “ survival of the fittest.’’ * But this is not all, if the argument applied to the driving inward of the *The method of segmentation itself must be regarded as a necessary adjustment of the cleavage planes in such wise, as to divide the large globular ovi-cells into approxi- mately equal parts continuously. An adjustment of this sort effects the equal reduction of all the cells resulting from segmentation, and keeps them below a dimension or mass which outruns the surface to an extreme degree, since according to the Leuckart-Spencer principle beyond a dimension of six, mass begins to rapidly exceed surface and bring about conditions unfavorable for respiration and metabolism. Ryder.] f ; 152 [May 16, accumulated products of assimilation in order to avoid the peripheral ob- struction of respiration the same argument can be applied to the localiza- tion of the germinal matter at the posterior pole. Suppose an ancestral Volvocine form still in a condition when it had not yet began to perma- nently cohere into a spherical colony. Suppose further; that when its maximum dimensions of growth had been nearly attained all its cells were so nearly alike that the differences would be extremely slight between them. But suppose them to be even very slightly different enough in size to respond to an equilibration of the colony by gravity at the surface of a still pool on a quiet sunny day. The upper cells would undoubtedly be stimulated into a slightly greater assimilative activity than the lower ones away from the light and shaded by the upper ones. The assimilated ma- ’ terials would not only be repelled towards the lower pole by this activity of the protoplasm of the upper pole, but would actually gravitate towards that pole. We thus see that, analyze the physiological data in whatever manner we please, there finally remains no warrant for the hypo- thesis that the germ-plasma is set aside in special cells for the express ob- ject of maintaining the continuity of the processes of reproduction. This apparent setting aside of germinal matter is itself the consequence of the necessary mode of the correlated action of physical agencies, ending in cumulative integration through continuous growth, and is clearly not the result of any elaborate selective process, The running down katabolically of some of the assimilated or stored germinal matter is proof of its loss of function and uselessness to the par- ent organism except in so far as such cells are a repository for such ma-. terials. There is therefore no conclusion open to us but that one which assumes that the motive force of all these elaborate correlations in such a simple multicellular organism * are the results of the indirect action under cosmical conditions, of the principle that living matter tends to increase in bulk beyond the actual physiological requirements of its secular exis- tence. SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS. 1, Cumulative integration or assimilation beyond the current needs of the parent organism seems to have arisen as a consequence of the physical properties of ‘‘living’’ matter, as manifested in metabolism or the char- acteristic continuous disintegration and integration of such matter. It is a property of “‘living’’ matter which is a consequence of its molecular constitution ; if so, ‘living’? and the continuity of molecular change through metabolism is a physical process, differing only from ordinary chemical processes in its complexity, continuity and capability of self- maintenance under certain conditions; its most important consequence is continuous growth. ; *The researches of Overton and myself have proved beyond doubt that Volvox is not & protozobn or protophyte as erroneously supposed by Lankester and Butschli. 1890.] 153 [Ryder. 2. The law pointed out by Leuckart and Spencer that beyond the sixth dimension above unity mass outruns surface, may be regarded as in some way operative in hindering the growth of cells, through cumulative inte- gration, beyond certain dimensions, in order that they may carry on res- piration, nutrition, in a word, metabolism, most efficiently, under ordi- nary cosmical conditions. The average of cellular dimensions varies in different forms. So does the molecular constitution of living matter, giv- ing rise to idioplasms. 8. The continuity of growth is maintained-through cumulative integra- tion, the continuous reduction in mass of ‘‘living’’ matter is effected through segmentation in some self-regulated way, presumably according to the Leuckart-Spencer principle. 4, The growth of the lowest forms of living”beings is effected in the main or ends principally in the production of a single kind of living matter. In higher forms, in which the cells are also generally much larger, two kirds of living matter are developed in very unequal proportions, In the first case when division oecurs, due to growth, there is little or no reaction between the two kinds of living cellular substance and division is direct or without karyokinesis. In the second case there is a reaction between the two kinds of living matter which is expressed most strongly as kary- okinesis, or nuclear motion on the one hand and the development of fibres on the other radiating from or converging upon the nucleus. 5. The effect of cumulative growth of the cell-mass has been to finally produce a preponderating quantity of plasma which invests the primitive nuclear plasma or chromatin with a thick envelope ; this envelope is known as the cell-body or cytoplasm, and also provides a field or space in which the action and reaction of the two kinds of living matter found in the cells of higher forms may display itself as karyokinesis, The plasmic space in which this occurs may be called a cytoplasmic field. 6. The action and reaction between the two kinds of plasma controls the order and direction in which the phenomena of growth take place, but in conformity to certain dimensions and earlier relations of the cyto- plasmic field to its sources of nourishment. %. The effect of the forces at work in cumulative integration is to aug- ment mass, the effect of the action of segmentation so as to effect a read- justment according to the Leuckart-Spencer principle, is to bring about discontinuity of growth or reproduction through fission. _ 8. The asexual method of reproduction seems to have been purely a consequence of the operation of forces under the laws of cumulative inte- gration and the law of Leuckart and Spencer, under varying conditions, and to have led to a continuously repeated division of living matter, as fast as it was formed into small masses, through direct processes of fission, composed at first almost wholly of nucleoplasm or chromatin. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C, XXVIII. 182. T. PRINTED MAY 28, 1890. Ryder. ] 154 [May 16, 9. As cytoplasm began to be developed more abundantly there seems to have been developed a tendency for the products of segmentation to cohere. We may therefore distinguish very sharply these two kinds of segmentation as disruptive and coherent. But the greater development of cytoplasm was itself a consequence of cumulative inte- gration, which proceeded so fast that its products could not be converted into nucleoplasm or chromatin with sufficient rapidity so as to be in a con- dition to full apart as small cells as a consequence of the action of the direct process of fission. The evidence for this is the fact that the nucleo- plasm or chromatin, in higher forms, is derived by constructive metabol- ism from cytoplasm and is the end-product of the latter. 10. The secondary evolution of a cytoplasmic field led to a process of divergent evolution or in tlie production of two kinds of cells, the most primitive or ancestral of which was poorly provided with cytoplasm, while the secondary form was provided with a thick cytoplasmic en- velope. 11. The primitive minute form of cell is to be identified as the asexual one, which afterwards became ‘‘male,” while the large overgrown type of cell, loaded with cytoplasm and its secondary products, is to be identified as ‘‘female’’ or as a cell on the way towards disruption into male cells, which tendency it still betrays in the process of extrusion of polar bodies. The arrest of this process of fragmentation in the case of such large cells loaded with cytoplasm, led to the evolution of the ovum from the sper- matogonium or such a cell as was primarily destined to produce male cells as a result of its further fission. 12. The male state is therefore the primitive one, and in the prodigious — fertility of the male represents the primordial, asexual, flagellate types. The female cell is a secondary and derived form developed after a cyto- plasmic field has been evolved and after cell-aggregates began to become coherent. 13. This differentiation was primarily due to cumulative integration, or assimilation beyond the current needs of the organism ; the female cells to which this overgrowth was diverted have tended to grow far beyond the average dimensions of the other cells of the body of the parent, and this excessive size is proof that they have in some way lost the power to undergo spontaneous segmentation, except in the case of parthenogenesis, Cumulative integration is consequently responsible for the evolution of the asexual, sexual and parthenogenetic modes of reproduction, 14. Ovarian egg and spermatozoiin are not homologous ; ova after ex- trusion of polar bodies are the homologues of spermatozoa. Ovarian ova and spermatogonia are, in many cases, exactly homologous, 15. The expulsion of the polar bodies and detachment of the egg from the parent exhaust its power of continued spontaneous growth except in case of parthenogenesis. 1890. ] 155 [ Ryder. 16. The male cell as a consequence of the reduction of its cytoplasmic field at last became incapable of further independent development. 17. The male and female elements became reciprocally attractive to one another (sometimes through the production of certain chemical substances in the vicinity, Pfeffer), and in that their idioplasm is less different from one another than that of other cells there is no bar to their fusion, which is also favored by the fact that in the male cell with its preponderant chromatin there is now an attraction or need developed for more cyto- plasm similar to its own diminished quantity, while conversely there is a similar need or attraction developed in the egg for additional chromatin in consequence of its preponderating cytoplasm. This leads to the highest form of cumulative integration through direct fusion of the male and female elements, or what I shall call reciprocal integration without loss of molecular identity, or as it is commonly called, to “ fertilization.’”’ ‘ Fer- tilization’’ is a reciprocal restoration of the equilibrium between the chromatin or nucleoplasm and the cytoplasm of both ovum and spermato- zon, this takes place not with accompanying molecular disintegration but by the actual fusion of both elements without the sacrifice of the molecular identity of either. Mutual digestion is not possible, for both elements are already composed of similar molecules. This molecular similarity constitutes the means through which the hereditary traits and tendencies of the male and female are transmitted. 18. The accumulation of cytoplasm in the egg through cumulative in- tegra‘ion has enlarged its cytoplasmic field beyond that of any cell of the parent body. The result is that when “fertilization’’ occurs or fusion with the male cell, a series of segmentations are set up in this mass which are independent, and under the influence of new conditions, lead to the continuation of growth as the development of an embryo. This develop- ment is rendered directly possible only in virtue of the fact that there is a large cytoplasmic field in which nuclear motion and growth can take place in three dimensions temporarily without access of nutriment, while the resulting segmentations are coherent and tend to take place in such order and relation as to produce a being similar to the parent. The aggre- gation of large masses of segmentable plasma through the operation of cumulative and reciprocal integration has enabled the products of such simultaneous and successive segmentations to cohere and remain a multi- cellular aggregate, and to lay the foundation and become the direct cause of all metazoan and metaphytic organization. 19. The augmentation of the mass of the egg through cumulative inte- gration and the development of the ojsperm through reciprocal integra- tion, has rendered possible the development of embryos without need of other nutriment during the preliminary or larval stages of ontogeny, thus leading also to the evolution of all larval forms, through processes of direct adaptation. 20. The achievement of the multicellular condition is probably to be Ryder.] 156 [May 16, traced to the secondary evolution of a cytoplasmic field, sexuality also having so arisen at about the same time. The multicellular or coherent condition produced new and more complex morphological relations lead- ing to the manifold differentiation of physiological functions in relation to diversification of surroundings, thus introducing a new and powerful cause or capacity for variations and adaptations under such diverse condi- tions. It is in the highest degree probable that the evolution of a cyto- plasmic field and of sexuality, which depends upon the former, first ren- dered variability possible. 21. Cumulative integration in the vegetable led to the process of cumu- lative integration in the animal world and to the overproduction of germs or young in both of these kingdoms of life. The rate of increase thus became augmented in a geometrical ratio, as supposed upon the Darwinian hypothesis, which on the basis of the theory of the struggle for existence and the process of natural selection so evoked, accounts for the preserva- tion through survival and inheritance of valuable or advantageous varia- tions which first arose as supposed above. Cumulative integration is regarded as the primary cause of morphological differentiation under the stress of diverse conditions, as well as of the geometrical ratio of increase of individuals and consequently of the struggle fur existence. The effects of the struggle for existence have however been modified through the already attained morphological differentiation of many forms in that the nature of further possible modifications have been in’ some cases very clearly determined by the character of those which have immediately preceded the last modification. This principle of cumulative adjustment through which superposition of adaptations occurs, is the law of cumula- tive morphological differentiation. 22, The only cells in multicellular forms which are absolutely otherwise functionless are the germ-cells. They alone, therefore, can become the vehicles for the transmission of all the traits of the parent in higher forms. They are the only cells of the body which, by any stretch of the imagina- tion, can be supposed to possess the recapitulative power manifested in ontogeny. 23. In that the germinal cells are never belabored with any physiologi- cal function in the parent body, except cumulative integration, they are also the only ones which lead the charmed life of a perpetual youth. Upon this peculiarity of germ-cells depends rejuvenescence through re- production, and the maintenance of the maximum vigor of the species. 24, In that maximum vigor of growth concentrated upon apical or nearly acropetal cells in plants determines their sex, and in that this seems to hold in great measure in Alge and Fungi, and in that the gradually deeper inclusion of germ-cells and germ-tracts in animals is clearly a con- sequence partly of further morphological development, as well as of the effect of the repulsion of the functionless germ-cells into positions where ae eae 1890.] 1 57 [Ryder. they are out of the way of interference with the exercise of the functions of the rest of the cellsof the body, we have some clews to the reason why germ-cells are ‘‘set aside,’’ not as the consequence of a foreseen (by the organism or natural selection) necessity for their isolation, a la Weismann, but as a consequence of the continuous action of cumulative integration ending in continuous growth, sexuality, morphological and physiological differentiation under the stress of surrounding conditions to which adap- tive responses must as continuously be made. 25. With the evolution of the multicellular condition and sexuality, through cumulative integration, sexual correlations and interdependences between plants, insects and air-currents were evolved, as supposed in the text, while in animals sexual] passion was evolved in the progress of sex- ual evolution. These factors became the motive forces which sustained the process of reciprocal integration or fertilization at its maximum of efficiency, and thus provided for the continuous rejuvenescence of living forms. 26. ‘Maternal ’’ and “ paternal’’ are relative terms. There was a time when asexual reproduction, through fission without karyokinesis, was effected by forms which were morphologically male. When individuals became developed in which the physiological functions of the individual were so adjusted automatically through a correlation of those functions as to impede the production of chromatin or nucleoplasm, presumably through the too rapid action of cumulative integration, cytoplasm was produced in a preponderating measure, the spermatogonia were hyper- trophied and discharged before complete maturation as ova. In this way femaleness arose, and as ‘‘sex”’ thus became reflected in the physiological tendencies of the individuals of a species, some became male and others female. This carried the principle of the physiological division of labor beyond organs and extended it to individuals of the same species. The female, let me repeat, is a repressed male state. 27. In the production of female germs (ova, ojspheres) there occurs a prolonged process of integration of plasma so as to increase the volume of the cell-body, under conditions different from those obtaining in the production of male elements. In the production of male elements (sper- matozvoa, antherozoids), on the contrary, an actual process of elimination of cytoplasm often occurs, so as to reduce the latter to a minimum, and leave little remaining except the nucleus and its chromatin. The modes of production of the male and female elements, therefore, stand in the most extreme contrast to each other. The mule state, on account of its ; prodigious fertility and the flagellate type of its products, is to be regarded as a reversion to the asexual method of reproduction as respects the phy- siological methods involved and the morphological character of the ele- ments produced. 28. Reciprocal integration or sexual conjugation, otherwise ‘‘fertiliza- Ryder. ] 158 [May 16, tion,’’ is an asexual method of reproduction superimposed or blended with another in which the last evolved sexual element has been hypertrophied asan ovum. The exhaustion of the ceutral controlling mass of nucleo- plasm or chromatin after expulsion of the polar bodies, together with the great size of the egg, has rendered it passive. The recurrence of the minute flagellate condition as ‘‘male’’ has rendered the male element active. 29. Male and female ‘‘sexual’’ products were at first and still continue to be dehisced as useless products of overassimilation or as a consequence of the cumulative action of integration, after further recapitulative growth in the form of new axes or individuals, growing in organic union, as in colonial organisms, became impossible, due to crowding, the culmi- nation of seasonal growth or the morphological speciulization leading to definite or constant formal individuality. 30. The ‘‘setting aside’’ of germ plasma must therefore be attributed to the direct action of cumulative integration, and cannot logically be considered as a ‘“‘device’’ through which the immortality-isolation of ger- minal matter was to be achieved as a purpose or end. “ 31. Continuity of growth as continuously maintained through the pbys- ical capacity for living matter to increase its mass, was the primary factor in divergent evolution. The first step which it effected in adaptation was the necessity for segmentation either with or without karyokinesis, accord- ing to the law of Leuckart and Spencer. - As soon as coherent, successive seymentations became possible, the first stage of which is seen in Volvoa, the first step of morphological differentiation also conformed directly to the requirements of external conditions in that a blastula form was assumed which gave the maximum of surface in combination with the simplest form of coherence which could be developed through successive and simultaneous coherent processes of cleavage. 82. Sexuality, parthenogenesis, the extrusion of the polar bodies, larval development and the direct divergence of all higher types from the odsperm, are some of the effects of continuous growth as caused by con- tinuous cumulative integration working under diverse conditions and the capacity to make direct adaptive responses, 33. The available evidence tends to show that sex is not predetermined in the egg, but is dependent upon internal conditions and correlations of metabolic activity within an embryo, so that sex may very often be influ- enced directly by the regulation of the food-supply long after Ritch. ment has begun. 84. The polar bodies are a phylogenetic reminiscence of the asexual or male flagellate state. There is not the slightest evidence to show that they are other than one of the manifold effects of continuous growth im- pelled to proceed as supposed above, They can certainly not be identified 1890.]- } 159 (Ryder. as a ‘‘ device ’’ intended to prevent parthenogenesis, as supposed by Bal- four, nor is it established that one of them is extruded ‘‘ ovogenetic”’ plasma, while the other is conveniently extruded to save Weismann’s an- cestral germ plasma from molecular disintegration ! 35. The divergence of type from the ojsperm was determined by varia- tions in the surrounding conditions, the effects of which could not be reflected upon the germinal matter set aside through the continuous action of cumulative integration, resulting in continuous growth, except through the action of the concurrent metabolism so affected. Metabolism under diverse conditions was therefore the only source through which the idio- plasms of species could be developed, through whicli the continuity of the phenomena of inheritance is maintained. 36. The principle of continuous growth through cumulative integration, its rhythmical interruption through the ‘‘setting aside ’’ and dehiscence of the useless sexual elements, the evolution of a cytoplasmic ficld, the direct adaptation to their surroundings of colonial aggregates of cells resulting from the coherent segmentation of musses of plasma resulting from recip- rocal integration, the necessarily cumulative superimposition of adapta- tions upon one another, have been, in the main, the materials upon which natural selection was dependent in order to become operative in biological evolution. 87. The view that the female is preponderatingly ‘‘anabolic’’ and the male ‘‘katabolic,’’ as held by Geddes and Thomson, cannot be sustained on the basis fact, since it is readily demonstrated that the male element rep- resents a higher product of’ constructive metabolism than the female. 38. The most important result of the evolution of sexuality is the phy- siological process of nuclear substitution through reciprocal integration or ‘‘ fertilization,’ thus blending and superposing matter and energy from two sources and causing the latter to be potentially stored. Hunger has brought about the material overflow, the divergence of the sexual ele- ments from a common basis has ended in the production of countless adaptive modifications and the evolution of ‘‘ species,’’ while the accessory devices favorable to conjugation which have been ,slowly and adaptively ‘evolved have led to a gradually intensified expression of passion and love, which have become important motive forces in the drama of evolution at large. Vol. XXVIII, No. 138. roceedings Amer. Philos. Soe. x a + OO —— —— — : 5 a ey re ee en ey © (= “Cm tg et a emma tac eo = Founpep May 25, 4743 INcORPORATED Marcu 15, 1780 First Occupation or Hartt Novemser 21, 1789 PROCEEDINGS COMMEMORATIVE OF THE CENTENNIAL ANNIVERSARY Death of Benjamin Franklin APRIL 17, 4890 CoMMITTEE OF ARRANGEMENTS CHARLES A OLIVER Chairman HENRY PHILLIPS JR WILLIAM JOHN Potts ARTHUR BIDDLE WILLIAM H GREENE 162 7, 1890, Dr. Oliver reported the following preamble and resolutions, which were adopted, and the same committee continued and requested to make all the arrangements necessary to carry out the same: The Committee to which was referred the following preamble and resolution : “ Deeming it both honorable and just that we, the present representatives of the American Philosophical Society, should show our affection and regard for our illustrious Founder and First President, Dr. Benjamin Franklin, who died on the 17th day of April, 1790, be it resolved that we commemorate his life, his wisdom, his labors and his achievements by proper and fitting ceremonies becoming such an occasion, on the 17th day of April, 1890; the form of the commemoration to be referred to a special committee of five members, who shall be empowered to take all necessary action,” presented by Dr. Oliver at the meeting of the Society on the 17th of January, 1890, begs respectfully to submit the following report : Resolved, That we commemorate in a becoming manner the approaching Cen- tennial Anniversary of the death of Benjamin Franklin. Resolved, That a series of short addresses upon his life, character and work be delivered before the Society upon this occasion. On the 17th day of April, 1890, at 8 p.m., the Society and its invited guests assembled at Association Hall, in the city of Philadelphia, and Mr. Talcott Williams, introducing the speakers, made the following remarks: Mr. President and Associates of the American Philosophical Society, Ladies and Gentlemen, and last, but most honored of all on this occasion, the descen- dants of Dr. Franklin: Few words of mineare needed to explain the occasion of our meeting or to refer to the men who are to address you. None are neces- sary to recall him or the memory of his death, We assemble not to widen his fame—an impossible task —but to deepen and display our loyalty to our founder and first head, This anniversary itself falls in a week 163 thick sown with memory. It was but two days since that there was commemorated in this city, the anni- versary which rounded out twenty-five years since the death of the first American of this century.* To-night we meet in recognition of one hundred years which have elapsed since the death of the first American of any century. For us all the death of Lincoln still brings senses of loss for a leader taken away with his work unfulfilled, his mission unaccomplished. For none in the genera- tion which stood by the open grave in which were buried the hopes of one section and the sorrow of both, can “the lilacs bloom with blossom of mastering odor” without thought that “the sweetest, wisest soul of all our days and lands” passed away when the task of retribution was over, and before the office of reconcilia- tion began. To-night, as a century ago, the death of Franklin can only remind men that he leftno task unac- complished and no aim unfulfilled. In the supreme prosperity of his life nothing became him like its leav- ing. Felix opportunitate mortts, not like the Roman of old, in death escaping evil to come, but leaving count- less and completed good behind. Death, for other men, lays the corner-stone of that fabric of appreciation and honor which posterity erects. For Franklin the hands of death set in place the cap-stone of the great struc- ture which noble deeds had raised in honor, whose fame we cherish and whose shadow the descending years of a century still lengthen and prolong. It is not our task to-night to magnify his deeds or add to his praises. In the presence of a career like his, eulogy is an impertinence and praise presumption. *The Twenty-fifth Anniversary of Abraham Lincoln’s death was celebrated in Phila- delphia by the delivery by Walt Whitman of his address on the subject, April 15, 1890, 164 We assemble but to ratify and record the final judg- ment of a century. One hundred years ago, when this Society called upon one of its members to com-— memorate his life among them and his labors for man, it was possible to ask of a single speaker* to express the world’s estimate of Benjamin Franklin. To-night that great monument of his achievements which death completed when no man’s effort could add aught to it, has cast so broad a shadow across one hundred years, that no one, however able, can compass its breadth within the circumference of his intellectual horizon. Along whichever of the many paths that Franklin traveled to greatness, lesser men may wearily plod to-day, each is still aware, however high he may ascend, that his experience is too narrow and his vision too short to know and survey all the field of Frank- lin’s achievements in the past or their fruits in the present. One hundred years ago, we heard one speaker ; to-night we listen to five. For this occasion this Society has summoned here the biographer of Franklin ; it has called upon the historian of the land in which he served his country abroad ; upon the man of science; upon one both the man of science and let- ters, and lastly, to represent the civic and associated acclivities in which Franklin was engaged, upon the President of this Society. From this jury, thus con- stituted, presenting the garner of all the manifold fields which Franklin sowed to rich fame for himself and richer harvest for others, we hear summed up to-night the verdict of the century. This finding, which but ratifies the earlier presentment made by that greater jury which includes the civilized world, * After the death of Franklin, Dr. William Smith was appointed by the American ’hilosophical Society to pronounce a eulogy upon the founder, 165 will have its full and ultimate record in the volume which this Society will transmit to learned societies through the world. It will give the acts and the char- acter which have placed Franklin alone in all history as the one man who inspired the enthusiasm of France and satisfied the sober judgment of the English-speak- ing race—the solitary and unique figure in our history or in any history whose work and fame and name is alike honored, cherished and loved by the two opposing streams whose conflict is the history of twenty human centuries—the Latin and the Teuton. Many biographers have emulated the record in which Franklin, all too briefly, told the story of his early life. We have to-night with us the only one of these biog- raphers who has set in life and light those dreary past Revolutionary years, when as in those now passing and passed the high tide of war had ebbed and uncov- ered endless corruption when, as to-day, the State must be served and saved, if served and saved at all, while the clash of party and the din of faction drowned the nobler voice of principle. In describing that period when the hands of Franklin guided to its last, its final, its eternal abiding place the corner-stone of constitutional liberty, and all the morning stars of heaven sang to- gether with joy as the pillars of organic law arose above the foundations of freedom, our historian has described the character and achievements of Franklin in a passage which will be cherished and remembered _ with the like utterances of Jeffrey and of Mackintosh; of Brougham and of Brancroft. He resumes to-night the task which he there began. I need not introduce, I need only present to you, the youngest and most widely read of American historians, John Bach McMaster, who will give you : 166 A Sort BIOGRAPHY OF BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. Benjamin Franklin began his career, at Boston, as the youngest son in a family of seventeen children. The day of his birth was January 6, 1706. But, long before he died, the Gregorian calendar came into use in the English colo- nies and changed the date of his birth to January 17. As the boy grew up his parents attempted to determine his career. His mother was anxious to see him a minister. The boy was resolved togo tosea. Thefather tried hard to make hima trades- man, took him round among the carpenters and bricklayers, the joiners and the tanners to see which trade he liked the best and ended by binding him over to an elder brother to learn the trade of a printer. The apprenticeship did ‘not long endure. The two made up an ill-mated pair. From disagreements they passed to insults. Insults led to quarrels. Quarrels to blows, and with blows they parted. The one to drag out an humble existence. The other to become the most illustrious American of his day. Unable to find any work in Boston, Benjamin took packet for New York. Faring no better there, he crossed the bay to Perth Amboy, made the journey from Amboy to Burlington on foot, and, early one Sunday morning in October, 1723, reached this city. Here he found work and, in time, fell in with William Keith who governed Pennsylvania for the children of Penn. Keith sent bim to Boston to urge his father to buy hima press and some type. The father refused, and Keith sent him ona yet more foolish errand to London. When he set sail he - believed he was to have letters of introduction and letters of credit, that he was to buy types, paper and a press and come back to America a master printer. When he reached London he found Keith a kyave and himself a dupe. 167 His life at London forms the crisis of his career. None of the wise maxims of “ Poor Richard,” none of the prudence displayed in his “ Advice to a Young Tradesman,” none of the just principles set forth in after years in his moral essays then served to guide him. He wasted his sub- stance. He kept bad company. He misused money entrusted to his care. He wandered from printing house to printing house, thought for one while of setting up a swimming school and for another while of wandering over Europe on foot. From this life he was turned by a merchant whose acquaintance he made on the long voyage to London, and who now gave him not advice but a situation. With him Franklin returned to Philadelphia, and at twenty began to keep books, sell goods and learn the secrets of mercantile affairs. He was indeed fast becoming a merchant when his employer died and he once more went back to the trade of printer. For a time he was foreman in the shop of Samuel Keimer. But the two soon quarreled and Franklin with the aid of a friend established the “New Printing Office in High Street near the Market.” From that hour prosperity never deserted him. At twenty-six he had bought out his partner, paid his debts, married a wife, and opened a shop that defies descrip- tion. There were to be had imported books and legal blanks, paper and parchment, Dutch quills and Alleppo ink, perfumed soap, Rhode Island cheese, live geese feathers, Pahia tea, cof- fee, very good stock, and cash for old rags. Before he was forty-two he had founded one of the best newspapers, pub- lished the most famous almanac, and owned the best paying printing house in the thirteen colonies, was postmaster-general and had written pieces which it is safe to say are the only pieces written by Americans in that age and read in ours. 168 And now this Yankee tallow-chandler’s son, having raised himself, by a strict adherence to the maxims of “ Poor Richard,” from poverty to wealth, from obscurity to power, proceeded to violate one of the most often inculeated. “ Shoemaker,” says “ Poor Richard,” “stick to your last.” “ A rolling stone gathers no moss.” “ Keep thy shop and thy shop will keep thee.” But Franklin now sold his shop, his newspaper, his almanac, and gave his time to the study of science. So well was the time spent that, before he was fifty, he had made discoveries and written papers that made him world-famous, secured for him membership in the Royal Society of London and won for him the Copley medal. While the whole scientific world were thus doing him honor, he suddenly abandoned his studies, went back to politics and was once more loaded with public duties. His townsmen elected him Assemblyman. The home government appointed him Postmaster-General of the colonies. The Assembly sent him with its Speaker to hold a conference with the Indians at Carlisle; then to the Albany conference where he presented his famous Plan of Union; and then to represent the pro- vince in England. The five years he now passed in England were the closing years of what is commonly known as the French and Indian War, but what might with more fitness be called the struggle for expansion. On his return to Philadelphia, in 1761, he seems for a time to have thought of quitting politics, living at his ease, building a fine house, studying electricity and writing a book on the “ Art of Virtue.” But the conspiracy of Pontiac, the massacre of the Conestoga Indians by the men of Donegal and Paxtang, and the bitter pamphlet war that followed drew him again into politics, Once more he entered the Assembly, be- ‘came the leader of the Antiproprietary party, and, having 169 lost his seat in the bitter contest that followed, was a second time sent to represent the colony at London. His business was to present a petition to the king asking that Pennsylvania be taken from the Penns and made a royal colony. But he had not been there many weeks when the Stamp Act passed, the contest for independence began, and, in the exciting times that followed, the petition went unheeded. Having little to do, Franklin now passed his time in writing pieces on American affairs for the English newspapers, and in defending in many ways the cause of the colonies. It was during these years that he republished a London edition of the “Farmer’s Letters,” that he brought out “The Votes and Pro- ceedings of the Freeholders and other Inhabitants of Boston,” that he sent over the “ Hutchinson Letters,” and underwent the memorable examination before the Privy Council. For the part he took in the Hutchinson affair he was deprived of his place in the post-office and was soundly abused by the English press. In the midst of this abuse parliament passed the Boston Port Bill, the Massachusetts Bill, the Trans- portation Bill and the Quebec Act; the first Continental Congress met and the revolution began in earnest. As the news of each act of resistance came over, the position of Frank- lin became daily more dangerous and unpleasant. Fora time his work seemed ended. He shunned the court, went no longer to the houses of the ministers and kept away from the office of Lord Dartmouth. Indeed, he was about to come home when news that Congress was to meet detained him. From that Congress came the Declaration of Rights, and, having presented this to Lord Dartmouth, Franklin set sail for Phila- delphia, March 21, 1775, and landed on the 5th of May at home. He had been abroad ten years and six months. During PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 183. V. PRINTED MAY 31, 1890. 170 these ten years many and great changes had taken place. Old friends were gone. New faces met him on every street. The growth of the city, the spirit, the prosperity of the people amazed him. But the greatest of all changes were in his own family. His wife was dead. His daughter was married. His son, a strong loyalist, was estranged by politics. Happily, no time was given him to feel these changes, for he was instantly involved in public affairs. The day after he landed he was chosen a member of the Continental Congress, took his seat four days later and served for fourteen months, was on eleven committees, was made Postmaster-General, was sent on one mission to Washington at Cambridge and on another to Arnold at Quebec; was dis- patched, after the disastrous battle of Long Island, to confer with Lord Howe; and, in September, 1776, was sent out to join Arthur Lee and Silas Deane in France. There he was received as no other man has ever been received. He became the sensation of the hour. Everything that he said, everything that he did, everything that he wrote was quoted and read all over France. His bust was set up in the royal library. Medallions of him appeared in the palace of the king. His face was to be seen on rings, on bracelets, on the covers of snuff boxes, hats, coats, canes were all “@ la Franklin.” Nor was his diplomatic success less noticeable. He concluded the treaty of alliance with France, the treaty of amity and commerce, negotiated loans for great sums of money, and, in 1783, signed the treaty of peace with Great Britain. In 1785, old and loaded with honors, he came back to Philadelphia. Yet his career was far from ended. The people made him a member of council and the council and assembly made him President of the State, and while Presi- dent, the people sent him to the convention that framed the 171 Constitution of the United States. He was now in his eighty- second year and at the height of his fame. Every ship brought him letters from the most renowned men Europe could pro- duce. Not a traveler came to America but he turned aside to see Dr. Franklin. Pamplhleteers did him honor in fullsome dedi- cations. ‘Towns were proud to bear his name. No newspapers ever mentioned him without some grateful remark. He was the venerable Dr. Franklin, “ our iliustrious countryman and friend of man,” “the Father of American independence.” To his house came regularly the Philosophical Society, the Abolition Society, the Society for Political Education. Thus surrounded by friends and admirers, the closing years of his life passed quietly away. He died on the 17th of April, 1790. To say that his life is the most interesting, the most uniformly successful yet lived by any American is bold. Yet it is strictly true. Our country has, indeed, produced many men who have gathered greater fortunes; who have been more successful as philanthropists; who have made greater discoveries in physics. But it has produced none who have acquired greatness in so many ways, or have made so lasting an impression on the mass of his countrymen. His face is known all over the world. His writings are to be read in every tongue. His maximsareinevery man’s mouth. His name is all over the United States bestowed on counties, on towns, on streets, on societies, on corporations. The lightning rod and the papers on electricity give him no mean place among men of science. The Autobiography, “The Way to Wealth,” the Bagatelles entitle him to a place among our men of letters. _ But his success was greatest as a statesman and his name is bound up with many of the most famous documents of our Revolutionary history. Indeed, it is the only one which appears alike at the foot of the Declaration of Independence, at the 172 foot of the treaty of alliance with France, at the foot of the treaty of peace with England and at the foot of the Consti- tution under. which we now live. In introducing Mr. Frederick Fraley, the President of the American Philosophical Society, Mr. Williams said: In all the long list of achievements which make the biography of Franklin read like the history of his country, nothing has proved more useful or lasting than the societies and associations which he estab- lished. Born in a land whose countrymen have a genius for organization, he had himself supreme apti- tude for this work and was equally at home in drafting the Constitution of a fire company or of a Nation, Transmitted to his descendants in one generation after another, the exercise of a like power has given this city institutions of the highest value, the last of which, of the utmost importance to a manufacturing city, owes its origin and success to one of his descendants, whom sex and sex alone debars from membership in our Society.* Of all the societies which Franklin organ- ized, the American Philosophical Society has proved the most conspicuous, the best known in the field of science and, we may modestly believe, the most useful - in the service of his and our country. I have the high honor of introducing its President, who will address you upon *Among other institutions in Philadelphia, the Philadelphia City High School was established, in 1831, by A. D. Bache, LL.D., a grandson of Dr, Franklin, and the Penn- sylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art owed its foundation in 1876 and its growth afterwards, principally to the efforts of Mrs, BE, D, Gillespie, a great-grand- daughter of the philosopher. 173 BENJAMIN FRANKLIN’S ASSOCIATION WITH THE SOCIETY. It is difficult for me to realize that I stand here to-night as the representative of the American Philosophical Society briefly to present to you Dr. Franklin as the founder of that Society, as the spirit which influenced its life, as the one who crowned its career with the scientific honors of the day in which he lived; the Society that has endeavored to perpetu- ate his memory by an adherence to the principles which he incorporated in its origin and which have been faithfully, I think, preserved by his successors. The origin of the American Philosophical Society may be traced to that junto which Franklin established in the city of Philadelphia when he was about twenty-two or twenty-three years of age, for the promotion of useful knowledge. His associates, with himself, prosecuted their studies and their delib- erations with such success that it influenced, no doubt, all of their careers, but especially the career of Benjamin Franklin. He never forgot his early introduction to the kingdom of knowl- edge and he went on year by year with the great idea in his mind and memory that a part of his life-work was to be found in the establishment of a great Society having for its object the promoting of useful knowledge. In the year 1740 he issued his proposals for the formation of such a Society and labored sedulously for its accomplishment, sketching out the ‘objects that it should pursue, the duties that its members should perform, their applications to science and to each other, | and, ‘aware that there must be a pilot to steer the ship and a man to keep the log, was not ambitious to be president of the Society, but took upon himself the humble office of its secre- tary. He performed the duties appertaining to that office with such fidelity and success that it reached a considerable point of 174 influence in its existence. Then the jealousy of the times and the jealousy of Franklin led to the establishment of another Society claiming part of the title of the American Philosophi- cal institution established by Franklin and the attempt to carry on an opposition society to his, with great damage to both, and with the result that about the year 1768, the gentlemen com- posing those institutions, finding that both could not survive, that there was not room enough in the city of Philadelphia for two institutions of the sort—happily coalesced, and on January 2, 1762, Benjamin Franklin was elected President of the associated institutions and continued to be reélected for twenty-one years, from 1769 to 1790, without any opposition on the part of any member of the institution, Our friend, Prof. McMaster, has given you a brief but admi- rable biography of Franklin’s life, telling the story of his birth, of his early education, of his trials, and of his triumphs. In his connection with the American Philosophical Society you will recognize all the traits we have seen so skillfully delineated and which have marked the institution that bears the stamp of his creative genius, which has been influenced throughout its existence by his spirit, and which to-day, as our friend, Mr. McMaster, has told you, has its correspondents throughout the whole of the world of science, has upon its list of mem- bers distinguished scientific men of every country, representa- tives of all the departments of science in cities of the United States, and is preparing still to go on, carrying forward the good work that Franklin founded, that has been so successful in the hands of his successors, and we are hoping that Frank- lin’s shadow will always be within view to guide the destinies of the Society to new honors and to new triumphs. The minutes of that early Society that he founded in 1742 are still in existence in the beautiful handwriting of the philoso- 175 pher, and its pages are turned over year by year by visitors to the halls of the Society; who tracing in the lines which he there wrote, realize to a certain extent the character of the man, the carefulness with which he did everything, and whether he turned his attention to the curing of smoky chim- neys, or to the invention of an improved fire-place, or to draw- ing the lightning from the heavens and demonstrating its identity with electricity, or in proposing new theories of light and heat, or in encouraging the manufacture of large sheets of paper, or in his correspondence with the distinguished mem- bers of the Society—in all these things his connection with the American Philosophical Society illustrates the character of the man and the institutions which he founded in Philadel- phia, cognating their purposes for the promotion of useful knowledge and which still remain and flourish among us in the types of the library company of Philadelphia, the old University of Pennsylvania, the Philadelphia Contribution- ship for the insurance of . houses against loss by fire, the establishment of the first fire engine company of Philadelphia. Whether we look for him in the fields of philosophy or in the walks of business, or in works such as the framing of declarations of independence, constitutions or treaties, the admirable character of Benjamin Franklin is impressed upon every one of these things to which I have referred. And espe- cially has his character been impressed upon the foundations, the traditions, the applications of the American Philosophical Society. That Society honors him as its founder and partici- pates in honoring him in all those illustrations of human character to which our historian, Mr. McMaster, has referred and which have crowned our country with so much honor, with so many blessings and with such useful instruction to rising generations. 176 In introducing Mr. G. Brown Goode, Mr. Williams said : American science owed its foundation and its first great discovery to a master of English style. The example of Franklin has never been forgotten by the scientific men of America. The record of their work has often become a part of the literature of their land. The clarity of their style has matched the brilliancy of their discoveries. It has been especially true of the Smithsonian Institution, which owes its endowment to the liberality of a private citizen, a liberality whose infectious example ought to attract new additions to his useful gift, that it has maintained in its registers of advancing knowledge, the dignity as well as the accu- racy of science. A Henry and a Langley both remind us that the ability to make great discoveries may well be joined with the capacity to give them adequate expression. Representing a scientific institution with these traditions, Mr. Goode has come to be naturally selected to speak of the attainments of a man of science in the field of letters. With much of Mr. Goode’s labors we are all familiar. The literature of our woods will never be complete without including the pages of Audubon, and the full record of our seas begins with the work of Goode. To this research, whose fruits are known to many, he has added labors in the field of early American literature whose results we hear to-night. As representing at once, organized science and literary research, I have the honor to introduce to you, Mr. G. Brown Goode, of the Smith- sonian Institution, who will speak upon 4 177 THe LirerARY LABORS OF BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. _ When the New World sent Franklin to Europe, England and France received him, without question, as the equal of their own greatest men. Lavoisier, Turgot and Raynal, Buffon, Rousseau and Condorcet were his admirers, Gibbon, Hume, and Adam Smith, Kames, Robertson, Bentham and Priestly, his friends, while to the poet Cowper praise by him atoned for all the carpings of the critics. When he first met Voltaire, in the hall of the French Academy of Sciences, the two old men saluted affectionately, amid the tears and the applause of the spectators, and it was proclaimed through Europe that Sophocles and Solon had embraced. His colleague, John Adams, by no means the most ardent of his admirers, said of him: “ His reputation was more universal than that of Leibnitz or Newton, Frederick the Great or Voltaire, and his character more beloved and esteemed than any or all of them. Newton had astonished, perhaps, forty or fifty men in Europe; for - not more than that number, probably, at any one time had read him and understood him, and these being held in admi- ration in their respective countries, at the head of the philos- ophers, had spread among scientific people a mysterious won- der at the genius of this, perhaps the greatest man that ever lived. But his fame was confined to men of letters. The common people cared nothing about such a recluse philosopher. Leibnitz’s name was still more confined. Frederick was hated by one-half Europeans much as Napoleon is. Voltaire was considered as a vain and profligate wit, and not esteemed by anybody, though admired by all who knew his works. But Franklin’s fame was universal. His name was familiar to PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 80C. XXVIII. 183. W. PRINTED JUNE 2, 1890. 178 government and people; to kings, courtiers, nobility, clergy, and philosophers, as well as to plebeians, to such a degree that there was scarcely a peasant or a citizen, coachman or footman, a lady’s chambermaid or a scullion in the kitchen who was not familiar with his name, and who did not consider him as a friend of human kind. When they spoke of him, they seemed to think he was to restore the golden age.” In a nation of three millions, he was first in every field of action, as printer, publisher, editor, and humorist—in political economy, administration and statesmanship, in science, philoso- phy, diplomacy, and in literature. He stands to-day a colossal figure in the world’s memory, his popularity in no wise les- sened by lapse of time, and Americans ‘still wonder at: his stature, seemingly unable to measure the extent of his great- ness. In Europe he is still thought the first of Americans, the most perfect embodiment of the spirit and genius of his coun- try, and its one great writer who lived before the days of Irving. . His easy-going freedom of speech, his liberal views on theo- logical questions and his irreverence, coupled with a certain coarseness, almost Rabelaisian, in his early writings, have lessened his popularity among educated Americans, Then, too, the subjects of which he wrote—the current political issues, the manners and morals of every-day people, common abuses and how to do away with them, passing events and their lessons, household economies, and the like—although they gave him a great popular audience, were not of the kind best fitted to call forth the admiration of his literary contemporaries. His choice of subjects was, nevertheless, the best evidence of his preéminence. “Great men are more distinguished by range and extent than by originality. A great man does not wake up on some fine morning and say, ‘I am full of life, I 179 will go to sea, and find an Antarctic continent; to-day I will square the circle; I will ransack botany, and find a new food for man; I have a new architecture in my mind; I foresee a new mechanic power.’ No; but he finds himself in the river of thoughts and events, forced onward by the ideas and neces- sities of his contemporaries. He stands where all the eyes of man look one way, and their hands all point in the direction in which he should go. The church has reared him amidst rites and pomps, and he carries out the advice which her music¢ gave him, and builds a cathedral needed by her chants and processions. He finds a war raging; it educates him by trumpet, in barracks, and he betters the instruction. He finds two counties groping to bring coal, or flour, or fish, from the place of production to the place of consumption, and he hits on a railroad. Every master has found his materials collected, and his power lay in his sympathy with his people, and in his love of the materials he wrought in.” * The spirit of the hour was Franklin’s constant inspiration, and his writings were a legitimate result, the natural outgrowth of his activity in all matters of public concern. Admirable in themselves, their chief interest is nevertheless due to the fact that they form so complete a record of the deeds and the personal character of their author. “Though he was a voluminous writer and one of the great masters of English expression, Franklin wrote habitu- ally with a single eye to immediate practical results. He never posed for posterity. Of all the writings to which he mainly owes his present fame, it would be difficult to name one which he gave to the press himself or of which he saw the proof. Yet he never wrote a dull line nor many which the century of time has robbed of their interest or value. What- * Emerson, 180 ever he wrote seems to have been conceived upon a scale which embraced the whole human race, as well as the individual or class to whom it was specifically addressed, the one evidence of true greatness which never deceives nor misleads. If he wrote to his wife, it was, more or less, a letter from every husband to his wife; if to his daughter, it was a letter that any daughter would be pleased to receive from her father; if to a philoso- pher or statesman, there was always that in the manner or matter of it which time cannot stale, and which will be read by every statesman and philosopher with the sort of interest they would have felt had it been addressed personally to them.” * The gathering of “Frankliniana” has become of late years a favorite pursuit of book lovers, and there are many excellent private collections besides the magnificent assemblages of his printed books, manuscripts and imprints in the public libraries of Boston, New. York, Philadelphia, and Washington. The pioneer in this movement was Prof. Justin Winsor, who, in 1869, established a Franklin Alcove in the Boston Public Library, for the reason, as he said at the time, “that Franklin is to Boston what Shakespeare is to England.” A complete library of Frankliniana, including not only the books by him and about him, but also the products of his press, would embrace nearly two thousand separate units. Such a collection would possess a very great value in money. t+ Several bibliographies of Franklin have been printed. One * Bigelow’s Preface to Franklin’s Works, + One of his imprints, the translation of Cicero’s ‘‘ Cato Major,” in good condition, has sold for $200. A complete series of ‘' Poor Richard "’ would be almost priceless, Of the twenty-six numbers, the Pennsylvania Historical Society had, when Ford's book was printed, only sixteen ; the Lenox Library, seventeen ; the Library Company of Philadel- phia, twenty-one; the Congressional Library, thirteen; and the American Philosophical Society, one, which, however, is the first. Of the issues of 1734 and 1735 none are in the possession of any of these libraries, 181 of the most serviceable is that of Sparks in the latter part of his tenth volume. Another is the admirable one of Lindsay Swift, printed seven years ago by the Boston Public Library. The latest and fullest is the “ Franklin Bibliography,” of Paul Lei- cester Ford, a very stout octavo volume of nearly five hundred pages, Which is intended mainly for the collector and is a minute and exhaustive catalogue of the variations of every possible bibliographical unit. In this are cited nine hundred and ninety-seven titles, ar- ranged as follows: I. Books and pamphlets wholly or partly written by Franklin. 1-600 II. Periodicals and serials containing writings of Franklin.... 601-618 III. State Papers and Treaties, in forming which Franklin aided. 619-633 IV. Works containing letters of Franklin.............+.+0++-+- 689-709 VY. Pseudonyms used by Franklin. ...... osensvanatee cued gads 710-784 Works relating to, written to, or dedicated to Franklin. ....'790-1002 In addition to these there are named in the accompanying Reference List other publications, relating in part to Frank- lin, to the number of..... bi} claweeeviees eosecccece sie de edene 508 Of the six hundred titles given by Ford in his list of books wholly or partly written by Franklin, there are only about ninety which represent distinct efforts of authorship, even though prefaces, notes in books written by others, and broad- sides be counted. The remaining titles relate to reprints, advertisements, and hypothetical publications of which no copies are known to exist. Franklin’s literary remains may be classified as follows: 1. The Autobiography—from 1706 to 1757. 2. Poor Richard’s Almanac, in twenty-six annual issues, 1732-58, culmi- nating in ‘‘ Father Abraham’s Speech at the Auction.” 8. Essays upon Manners, Morals and the Science of Life, including the so-called Bagatelles, in all sixty titles or more. 4, Tracts and Papers upon Political Economy, Finance, and the Science of Government ; in all about forty titles. 182 5. Essays and Tracts, Historical and Political, concerning the American Revolution and the events which immediately preceded and fol- lowed—1747-1790. 6. Scientific Papers—from 1737-1790; in all 221 titles and nearly 900 pages, octavo. 7. Correspondence, Diplomatic, Domestic and Literary—1724-90 ; in all, some twelve hundred letters, while many still remain unpublished. THE AUTOBIOGRAPHY. The autobiography, prepared between the ages of sixty-five and eighty-three, is one of the most remarkable books ever written. It was intended for his son, and certain intimate friends, and was not published until after the death of its author, and was never printed as it had been written until a few years ago, when, in 1874, Mr. John Bigelow issued a cor- rect version from the original manuscript, which by marvelous good fortune had fallen into his hands, while Minister at the Court of France. The autobiography has passed through at least one hundred and seventy editions, and has been translated into German, French, Danish, and Spanish. To understand it properly, the reader should use Bigelow’s edition and none other—for its editor, with admirable skill, has supplemented Franklin’s own narrative, complete in itself up to 1757, by a series of extracts from his letters and other writings, so that it is told in the philosopher’s own words, and is complete almost to the day of his death. During the twenty-eight years of his residence abroad, from 1758 to 1785, he was in constant correspondence with the governments he represented, and with his friends, who were numerous and to whom he wrote at length and with great freedom. “To his protracted expatriation,” writes Bigelow, “we owe ee a a Se 183 this fact, that there is scarcely an important incident in Frank- lin’s life which is not described by himself in his memoirs, or in his correspondence; and it is to this vast treasury of ster- _ ling English, which seems to have been almost miraculously preserved from incalculable perils by sea and by land, that the legion of his biographers have been indebted for what has most contributed to render their writing attractive. “Tam not aware that any other eminent man has left so complete a record of his own life. The part of which, from the nature of things, could not be preserved in correspondence —his youth and early manhood; his years of discipline and - preparation—has been made as familiar as household words to at least three generations, in those imperishable pages which, in the full maturity of his faculties and experiences he pre- pared at the special in-tance of his friends, Le Veillard, Roche- foucault, and Vaughan. From the period when that fragment closes until his death, we have a continuous, I might almost say, a daily record of. his life, his labors, his anxieties, and his triumphs, from his own pen, and written when all the incidents and emotions they awakened were most fresh and distinct in his mind,* THE ALMANAC, Franklin’s Almanac is interesting in itself, but far more so in its effects on the history of American letters and American life. It was the beginning of our Americah periodical litera- ture, the first successful serial, the pioneer of the great army of magazines and reviews which, even now, stand in the place of public libraries to the great majority of our people. Franklin’s was not a monthly, oreven a quarterly ; it was an annual magazine of instructive and entertaining literature. * “Life,” p. 6. 184 He was the most experienced of American journalists, the editor and principal contributor of the New England Courant, when, in 1723, it threw Boston into tumult, and, in 1729, founder of the Pennsylvania Gazette, for more than half a century the leading newspaper in the New World. He fully appreciated the possibilities of periodical literature in America and established, in 1741, a monthly called “The General Magazine and Historical Chronicle for all the British Prov- inces in America,” * an effort which failed because the country was not yet ready. The Almanac was to the people of that day, what the week- lies and monthlies have become to their great-grandchildren. . Franklin began to print it in 1782, and it soon became a neces- sity in every household from New England to the Carolinas, and made the name of “ Poor Richard” famous all over the world. Within twenty-five years, at least a quarter of a mil- lion copies of this treasury of homely wisdom had been dis- tributed throughout the colonies, Franklin wished that his Almanac should be a vehicle for conveying instruction among the common people, who bought scarcely any other books. He, therefore, filled all the little spaces between the remarkable days in the calendar with prov- erbial sentences, chiefly such as inculcated industry and frugal- ity as the means of procuring wealth and thereby securing virtue; “it being,” as he said,“ more difficult for a man in want to act always honestly than it is hard for an empty sack to stand upright.” Finally he brought together in a connected fabric, all the best of the sayings of Poor Richard for twenty- five years, in the form of the harangue of a wise old man to the people attending an auction, “ Father Abraham’s Speech,” “The Way to Wealth,” or “La Science du Bonhomme * Six numbers of this periodical were printed, 4 | : x 185 Richard,” as this composition was variously called, touched by its simple wisdom, responsive chords in the hearts of all simple-minded people. | Its influence was amazingly great. No one was better able than Franklin to judge of its extent, no one less likely to exaggerate it. Writing about it, in 1788, he said: “ The piece, being universally approved, was copied in all the newspapers of the continent; reprinted in Britain on broadsides, to be stuck up in houses; two translations were made of it in French, and great numbers bought by the clergy and gentry to distribute gratis among their poor parishioners and tenants. In Pennsylvania, as it discouraged useless expense in foreign superfluities, some thought it had its share in producing that growing plenty of money which was observ- able for several years after its publication.” * Ford’s bibliography shows that since it was written, one hundred and twenty-three years ago, “Father Abraham’s Speech ” has been reprinted about three times for each year. Seventy or more separate editions in English have appeared, fifty-six in French, eleven in German, andsome in Italian. It was printed in Danish at Copenhagen (1801, 1820); in Catalan at Montroulez (1820) and Morlais (1832); in Greek in Paris (18238) ; in Dutch at The Hague (1828) ; in Portuguese in Paris (1828) ; in Bohemian at Teshen (1838); in Welsh in London (1839); in Spanish at Caracas in Venezuela (1858); in Rus- sian at St. Petersburg (1809), and in Chinese at Peking (in 1884), as well asin Polish and the phonetic characters, Ford is quite justified in saying that it has been oftener printed and translated than any other book from an American pen. * Autobiography, Bigelow edition, i, 250. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 183. X. PRINTED JUNE 2, 1890. 186 THE ESSAYS. Franklin’s essays represented his most finished work. Among them indeed are the only compositions written with a dis- tinctly artistic purpose. Many years after his death a small, thin portfolio was found among his papers. On its cover was written “ BAGATELLKS,” and within were fifteen or more of his own favorite essays. These were prepared for the enter- tainment of that brilliant circle of friends in Paris, in whose meetings the venerable author took so much delight. Among them were many of his most graceful and witty productions —such as “The Morals of Chess,” “The Dialogue between Franklin and the Gout” and “ The Ephemera,” The Bagatelles were written when he was over seventy. In some of his satires, half a century earlier in date, as for instance “The Speech of Mistress Polly Baker,” he exhibited equal force and skill, though a wit less mellow and refined and a style less polished through familiarity with French literature. His essay writing began when he contributed to his brother’s newspaper in Boston a series of satirical letters signed “ Silence Dogood”—which are highly praised by those who have read them. “So well,” says McMaster, “did the lad catch the spirit, the peculiar diction, the humor of his model, the Spectator, that he seems to have written with a copy of Addison open before him.” Seven years later he prepared for a Philadelphia newspaper, The Mercury, a series of essays under the title of “ The Busy Body.” This was his first effort in a strictly literary direction. Some admirer has described them as being written “ after the manner of the Spectator, but more readable.” Although the critie of to-day may not fully agree with this judgment, he cannot fail to be pleased with the graceful, easy Send 187 flow of the words, and at the same time, interested in the evi- dences of the young printer’s extensive and intelligent ac- quaintance with the best of English books. After he became owner of the Pennsylvania Gazette he wrote for it essays in the same vein, many of which have been reprinted in recent editions of his writings. Some of the essays were humorous or satirical, others re- lated to religious and moral subjects and the economy of life, others still to the current events of the day. Among them was an admirable exposition of what was then known about earth- quakes; and this, published in 1737, was his first contribution to scientific literature. When he was living in England he constantly wrote for the press, and among his productions at this time were a number of papers, which although an essential part of his. political writings, should also be included in that carefully-edited col- lection of Franklin’s essays for which the werld has been expectantly waiting for a hundred years. Among the best are the “Receipt for Diminishing a Great Empire,” and the “ Remarks Concerning the Savages of. North America,” writ- ten in Paris a few years later, which rank among the most brilliant of political satires. HIS DOMESTIC AND LITERARY CORRESPONDENCE, Franklin was the brightest and most charming of corre- spondents, and there is not one of his letters which is in the least degree dull or formal. Over 1200 are printed by Bigelow, and they make up at least nine-tenths of the bulk of his literary remains. Many of them are little essays, and should be included in every edition of his short papers. In no connection are they more 188 readable than as arranged by Mr. Bigelow* to form a part of the autobiography. “To be fully understood and appreciated,” writes Bigelow, “they (as well as all the rest of his writings) should be read in chronological order and by the light of cur- rent events, for every one of them was as much the product of its time and circumstances as the fruits and flowers of a garden are of their respective seasons.” Though the signature is always “B. Franklin,” the writer is sometimes the statesman, sometimes the shrewd, practical tradesman, sometimes the philosopher, sometimes the inventor concerned with mechanical details—now the philanthropist, now the wily diplomat, again the loving husband and parent, interested above all things in the affairs of his own little fam- ily, again the brilliant man of the world, gossiping with Madame Helvetius or the Abbé Morellet. “ His letters,” said John Foster, “ abound in tokens of benev- olence, sparkling not unfrequently with satiric pleasantry, but of a bland, good-natured kind, arising in the most easy, natu- ral manner, and thrown off with admirable simplicity and brevity of expression. ‘There are short discussions relating to various arts and conveniences of life, plain instructions for persons deficient in cultivation, and the means for it; condo- lences on the death of friends, and frequent references, in an advanced stage of the correspondence, to his old age and approaching death. Moral principles and questions are some- times considered and simplified; and American affairs are often brought in view, though not set forth in the diplomatic style.” It would seem impossible that the man who wrote at times so seriously and devoutly could have been also the author of the so-called “Suppressed Letters.” Between the ages of fifteen * Bigelow’s “ Franklin,”’ 4, p. 21. 189 and eighty-five, however, a human character has time for many transformations. TREATISES UPON POLITICAL ECONOMY. At the age of twenty-three, in 1729, Franklin published his “Modest Enquiry into the Nature and Necessity of Paper Money ”—perhaps the earliest treatise on finance and currency written in America. This pamphlet was written at a time of public crisis, and for a definite purpose, which was successful. It was the first of a series of political essays, published from time to time in the sixty-two years of life which remained to its author—each with some useful end in view, and each without exception productive of some definite result. Edmond Burke was wont to say that when Franklin ap- peared before the British Parliament, he was like “a master examined before a parcel of school-boys,” and Charles Fox declared that the ministry on that occasion “ were mere dwarfs in the hand of a master.” Persuasive and convincing as were his spoken words, the power of the man was even more evident when he took up his pen to write upon topics of public interest. His political papers, however, have little meaning at the present time except to students familiar with the history of the days to which they belong, though read in connection with the story of his life they have a very great interest of their own. | In 1751 appeared “ Observations Concerning the Increase of Mankind and the Peopling of Countries”—to which it would appear that Adam Smith in later years was indebted for sug- gestions, and which led Malthus to write his great “ Essay on Population.” Franklin wrote other useful treatises, “On the Laboring 190 Poor,” on “The Principles of Trade,” on “Luxury, Idleness and Industry,” on war, privateering and the Court of the Peers, and many kindred topics. None of his economical treatises were so original or so influential as the two which were first written. The last in the list, however, “On the Slave Trade,” although finished only twenty-four days before his death and at the age of eighty-five, is as full of vigor and fire as his best efforts of a quarter of a century previous. It con- tains the speech of Mehemet Ibrahim in the Divan of Algiers, which Lord Jeffrey declared was not surpassed by any of the pleasantries of Arbuthnot or Swift. POLITICAL WRITINGS. Franklin’s first political treatise was written in 1747. The war between Great Britain and France, which was at that time in progress, was thought to have brought the Amer- ican colonies into great danger, and the governor of Pennsyl- vania anxiously labored to’prevail upon the Quaker Assembly to pass a militia law and to make other provisions for the security of the province. To further this project, Franklin wrote and published a pamphlet, entitled “Plain Truth,” which had a sudden and surprising effect, and resulted in a few weeks in the organization of a colonial militia of over ten thousand — men. This was the beginning of the conversion of the inhabi- tants of Pennsylvania from the Quaker doctrine of submission to that of defensive warfare, and had a most important influ- ence upon the future of America.* * Bigelow says of this pamphlet: “ Substituting the words ‘United States’ for Pennsylvania, it is as timely to-day as when it was written. Though we are at peace with all nations, we have many times as many lives and many times as much property exposed, while our defenses are relatively inferior to those which Franklin denounced nearly a century and a half ago as unpar- donably deficient” (Bigelow’s “ Franklin,” Vol. ii, p, 39), 191 “Plain Truth” was followed by several other tracts in re- lation to the struggle between Pennsylvania and the Propri- etary Government in the hands of the Penn family. The most influential was that called “Cool Thoughts on the Present Situation of our Public Affairs,” printed in 1764, which was a masterly argument in favor of a change from Proprietary to a Royal Government. During his residence in England before the Revolution, and in France during its continuance and afterwards, Franklin wrote much. One of the most important of his early papers was that printed in London in 1760, entitled “The Interest of Great Britain in Regard to Her Colonies,” a protest against the proposal that Great Britain should give up Canada to the French, and receive instead the Island of Guadaloupe in the West Indies. So strong a paper was this that Burke, in replying to it, said of its author: “ He is clearly the ablest, the most ingenuous, and the most dexterous of those who have written upon the question, and we may therefore conclude that he has said everything in the best manner that the case would bear.” These, however, together with his more extensive treatises upon the condition of affairs in the new Republic, belong to the statesman Franklin, rather than to Franklin the man of letters. Together with his diplomatic correspondence they make up fully half of his published works, SCIENTIFIC WRITINGS. Franklin’s scientific writings were voluminous. Sparks re- printed 63 papers on electricity, filling 802 pages, and 157 on philosophical subjects, making 578 pages—in all 220 letters and 880 pages—which is a remarkable showing for a man so constantly occupied with private and public business. 192 His scientific papers are written in a style peculiar to their author—lucid, convincing, never wearisome. “A singular feli- city of induction guided all his researches, and by very small means he established very grand truths. The style and manner of his publications on electricity are almost as worthy of admi- ration as the doctrine they contain. He has endeavored to re- move all mystery and obscurity from the subject. He has written equally for the uninitiated and for the philosopher ; and he has rendered his details amusing and perspicuous, elegant as well as simple. Science appears, in his language, in a dress wonderfully decorous, best adapted to display her native love- liness. He has in no instance exhibited that false dignity by which philosophy is kept aloof from common applications; and he has sought rather to make her a useful inmate and ser- vant in the common habitations of man, than to preserve her merely as an object of admiration in temples and palaces.” * Perhaps the most judicious estimate of Franklin’s qualities as a man of letters is that by John Foster in the Zelectic Review for 1818. , “Tt is unnecessary to remark,” he writes, “that Franklin was not so much a man of books as of affairs; but he was not the less for that a speculative man. Every concern became an intellectual subject to a mind so acutely and perpetually atten- tive to the relation of cause and effect. For enlargement of his sphere of speculation, his deficiency of literature, in the usual sense of the term, was excellently compensated by so wide an acquaintance with the world and with distinguished individuals of all ranks, professions and attainments. It may be, however, that a more bookish and contemplative employment of some portion of his life would have left one deficiency of his mental character less palpable. There appears * Sir Humphrey Davy. 193 to have been but little in that character of the element of sub- limity. We do not meet with many bright elevations of thought, or powerful, enchanting impulses of sentiment, or brilliant, transient glimpses of ideal worlds. Strong, indepen- dent, comprehensive, never remitting intelligence, proceeding on the plain ground of things, and acting in a manner always equal to, and never appearing at moments to surpass itself, constituted his mental power. In its operation it has no ris- ings and fallings, no disturbance into eloquence or poetry, no cloudiness of smoke indeed, but no darting flames. A conse- quence of this perfect uniformity is, that all subjects treated appear to be on a level, the loftiest and most insignificant being commented on in the same unalterable strain of calm, plain sense, which brings all things to its own standard, inso- much that a great subject shall sometimes seem to become less while it is elucidated and less commanding while it is enforced, In discoursing of serious subjects, Franklin imposes gravity on the reader, but does not excite solemnity, and on grand ones he never displays or inspires enthusiasm.” Although his works fill ten stately volumes, Franklin never wrote a book for publication. The “Autobiography ” was intended solely for the pleasure of his intimate friends. The sayings of Poor Richard were prepared for his yearly Almanac, with purely utilitarian ends in view. His scientific discoveries were announced, with few exceptions, in letters to his friends, who printed them without his knowledge or consent. His political papers appeared in the newspapers and reviews, in letters, or prefaces, and in occasional pamphlets. Some of his brightest and most finished essays were set up and printed by his own hand, as broadsides, on a little printing-press which he had in his apartments while Minister to France. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 138. Y. PRINTED JUNE 2, 1890. 194 The matter-of-fact character of his early writings was largely due to his surroundings and to the people for whom he wrote. When at leisure in the society of cultivated people he soon yielded to their influence. His famous essay on the “Way to Wealth,” for example, was written soon after his visit to Virginia and a somewhat intimate association with General Braddock and his staff. The first, and incomparably the best, part of his “Autobiography” was written at the time of his most intimate connection with English literary society and while visiting at the country home of the Bishop of St. Asaph. The witty Bagatelles were produced in the midst of a brilliant Parisian circle. His contributions to science were the result of a period of voluntary seclusion and temporary respite from business cares which he had learned by his frugality and industry while printer and publisher. After he had acquired literary fame, he made use of it to promote the welfare of his country. A French writer, de- scribing, in 1872, the events of nearly a century before, said: “The coming of the famous American to Paris caused a profound sensation. Everybody wanted to see the author of the ‘Almanach du Bonhomme Richard;’ his mind was com- pared to that of Cato, and his character to that of Socrates, Franklin knew full well how to take advantage of the impres- sion which he had produced upon a nation so impressionable as were the French, always ready to place their lives and their wealth at the service of a noble principle, and, following the example of Lacretelle, he decided to serve as ambassador not to a court but to a free and generous people.” He was by instinct ascholar and by inclination an author. He loved books for themselves. He became a vegetarian at the age of sixteen that he might buy them. 195 Some one has called attention to his “remarkable affinity - for superior people.” His affinity for the best of books was also remarkable, and no one was ever more sensitive to their influence. In the “ Autobiography” he mentions the books which, as a boy, he liked to read, and it is easy to trace the effects of each upon his subsequent life. His literary style, though founded principally upon a tho- rough study of the Spectator, gave evidence at a very early day, of intimate acquaintance with Bunyan, Defoe, Plutarch, ‘Rabelais and Xenophon. His philanthropic tendencies were shaped and strengthened by Cotton Mather’s “Essays to do Good,” and his administrative faculties by Defoe’s “ Essay upon Projects.” Shaftesbury and Collins strongly influenced his theological opinions. Locke’s “ Essay on the Human Un- derstanding” moulded his habits of thought, as did also the “Memorabilia ” of Xenophon. Franklin has been called the founder of modern utilitarian- ism, but it is unjust and ungenerous to place this estimate upon his character. He knew the world in which he lived, and the people for whom he wrote. His aim was to produce immediate and practical results. His precepts were written for the unthinking, the inexperienced and the selfish. Poor Richard was a kindergarten teacher. In his advice in regard to the treatment of the aged, for ) example, he reminded his readers that they would themselves _ in their own last years need care and indulgence, but he also first appealed to motives the loftiest and tenderest. Whoever studies Franklin in a generous spirit, will find no lack of gen- erous thought and principle. Like Socrates, Franklin estimated the value of every action by its utility. Moral utility was to him, however, the high- est test of value. He believed that the promotion of universal 196 happiness, by the prevention or mitigation of evil, was man’s highest function. ‘He seems,” says Weems, “to have been all eye, all ear, all touch, to every thing that affected human happiness,” and he died with his eyes fixed upon “the picture of Him who came into the world to teach men to love one another. On his death-bed he often returned thanks to God for having so kindly cast his lot of life in the very time of all others when he would have chosen to live for the great pur- poses of usefulness and pleasure.” Is there in history a more touching memory than that of Franklin awaiting the coming of death, the venerable sage, the pride and glory of his own land, the admiration of Hu- rope, making excuses for the moanings which were occasion- ally forced from him by the severity of his pains—afraid that he did not bear them as he ought, while he observed his grateful sense of the many blessings he had received from the Supreme Being, who had raised him from small and low beginnings to such high rank and consideration among men. I have already said that nothing was further from his thoughts than to obtain for himself literary fame. He took no care of his own writings, and made no effort to secure the pub- lication of them. And still, a century after his death, he stands prominently forth as the only great literary man of America in colonial days and in the first fifty years of the Republic. No one who has held in his hand a copy of Franklin’s edi- tion of Cicero's “Cato Major” can doubt that the man who made it had the soul of an artist. No one who has read his tender and exquisitely graceful preface to this beautiful edi- tion can question that he had the heart of a poet, and the touch of a master of letters. When twenty-five he founded a great public library, the earliest in America, that others as well as he might enjoy the companionship of books, 197 Books were always in his mind and by his side. He com- pared his own life toa book. At the age of eighty-three he wrote: “ Hitherto this long life has been tolerably happy; so that, if I were allowed to live it over again, I should make no ob- jection, only wishing for leave to do, what others do in a sec- ond edition of their works—correct some of my errata.” His “ Autubiography,” written in the same spirit, noted the “errata” in its author’s career with true printer’s interest, as if he were scanning a bundle of proof sheets. He did not con- ceal them, but marked them so that all could see, frankly con- fessed his errors, and did what he could in atonement. Jefferson desired that his monument should declare that he was the author of the Declaration of Independence and the founder of a great university. Franklin, in his will, sought no higher title than that of printer. A maker of books he had been for three-quarters of a ceutury, and a friend and lover of literature even longer. The epitaph, written by his own hand for his tomb, which can never become trite by repe- tition, is full of the spirit of the great printer. ‘*THE BODY OF BENJAMIN FRANKLIN, PRINTER, (LIKE THE COVER OF AN OLD BOOK, ITS CONTENTS TORN OUT, AND STRIPT OF ITS LETTERING AND GILDING, ) LIES HERE FOOD FOR WORMS, YET THE WORK ITSELF SHALL NOT BE LOST, FOR IT WILL, AS HE BELIEVED, APPEAR ONCE MORE, IN A NEW AND MORE BEAUTIFUL EDITION, CORRECTED AND AMENDED BY THE AUTHOR.”’ 198 In introducing Dr. J. W. Holland, Mr. Williams said : It is sometimes forgotten in Philadelphia, and it is never remembered in Boston, that while Franklin became a Bostonian without being consulted, he employed the first exercise of his mature judgment to become a Philadelphian, and remained so to the end of his days. It is a happy coincidence that in commem- orating the scientific labors of the man who, like another Prometheus, stole from heaven the vital spark which has given light to man and life to modern science, this Society has selected one of the many representatives of science in this city-which it owes to the attractions it offers for a career rather than to the opportunities it furnishes as a birthplace. Dr. J. W. Holland represents an institution which has. given to him, as it had before to a distinguished predecessor, the field for displaying in the East a learning and skill attained and acquired in the West. Like Dr. Gross, he has added one more to those men of mark in medi- cine whose work began in Kentucky, but the knowledge of whose labors is bounded by no one State, In deal- ing with the scientific work of Franklin, the physician is as much at home as the electrician. His great dis- covery in the field of the latter was more conspicuous, illuminating the ignorance of ages by a single flash of lightning. His discoveries in hygiene were numerous, useful and remain to-day serviceable. I take pleasure in introducing to you Dr, J. W. Holland, of Jefferson Medical College, who speaks upon 199 THe ScIENTIFIC WorRK OF BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. The scientific labors of Franklin were not limited to any particular period nor any special field. Various branches of natural philosophy, in almost every year of his middle life, were illuminated by his discoveries, inventions and specula- tions. As an editor and man of business, science occupied part of his leisure, and in later life, when engrossed with public affairs, he sighed for opportunity to follow these favorite pursuits. In presenting a sketch of these varied and fruitful labors, chronological arrangement will not serve so well as one based upon their general character. Looked at in this way his prin- cipal works are seen to fall into a few groups such as labors in sanitary science, in the art of navigation, in meteorology, and in electricity. It will be readily conceded that in the limits allotted this subject, it would be vain to attempt an extended analysis of all the philosophical productions of his fertile genius. It is possible, however, to give some impression of their variety and utility. The science of maintaining health is rightly regarded as of very modern growth and even now its importance though constantly insisted on by its votaries is far from being generally recognized. The sound judgment of Franklin led him to con- sider it asa weighty matter whether it involved smoky chim- neys or the water supply of a great city. His sanitary labors pertain to the person, to the house, and to the city. About that very common disturbance of health usually called “ catch- ing a cold,” many fallacies still linger though Franklin did some forcible writing to remove the popular errors. He per- ceived what doctors nowadays all recognize that while among the causes of acute catarrh, exposure to cold was one, the most 200 important was a predisposition due to impaired strength from any cause whatever. Too little exposure to fresh air inducing depressed vitality might thus figure as a cause. His essay on this topic with some alterations would make a good sanitary tract, even after the lapse of more than a century. It was his constant habit to try to see all things little and great just as they are, and when he spoke of them to give a truthful report. When the time came for him to resort to spectacles to correct old sight, he found that the glass which served for society would not answer for reading. Naught that interested him was he content to look upon as if in a fog. But many things must be outlined dimly unless he carried two pairs of spectacles and changed them as the occasion demanded. To obviate this difficulty, he invented what is known as the bifocal or Franklin lens, the upper half of which was adjusted to distant objects and the lower for near view, as in reading. By changing the direction of vision through this one pair of glasses an elderly artist can see equally well the landscape one moment and his canvas the next. Franklin asserted that he understood French better by their help as they enabled him, while at table to see distinctly what he had on his plate and at the same time to note the expressive facial movements of persons who sat opposite. In the hundred years no change was made from the original form until recently. Now, instead — of dividing the lens in equal halves by a horizontal line, two perfectly centred lenses of different sizes are cemented together. The larger, having two-thirds the size of the entire glass, is devoted to objects beyond arm’s reach, and the smaller at the bottom suffices for reading. Thisinvention must be considered as something better than a convenience; it takes rank with devices for maintaining health. When the imperfect eye makes frequent effort to see things without properly adjusted 201 glasses, in sensitive persons eye-fatigue may induce various reflex nervous symptoms. To those allied departments of domestic hygiene, ventilation and warming, he was the first one to give anything like ade- quate heed. On many occasions he urged the need for ven- tilation to prevent that personal vitiation of air indoors which depresses the energies and causes stupor and dull headache. Mr. Small, a London surgeon, credits him with being the first who observed that respiration communicated to the air a quality resembling the mephitic gases of caves, and further, that a noxious character was imparted by the volatile effluvia of persons enclosed in rooms. Franklin attached considerable importance to the use of open chimneys for the extraction of the vitiated air by the upward draught. While in London he was consulted on the ventilation of the House of Commons and recommended that the personal atmosphere surrounding the members might be carried off direct by having outlets in a part of the benches on which they sat connected with ex- ~ haust flues. The merit of the suggestion is shown by the fact that a similar provision has been introduced into the new- Johns Hopkins Hospital which embodies the most approved methods of sanitary construction. Connected with the benches in the waiting rooms, and beneath each bed in the wards are grates through which the personal atmosphere passes out to the draught of a chimney. Inseparable from the requirement of ventilation and sub- servient to it is that of the heating arrangements. In this matter he made a great stride by the invention of the stove that bears his name. This stove was invented to economize fuel by regulating the air supply to it and by providing large metallic surfaces for warming the air of the room. Ina hun- dred years, from Franklin’s idea many shapes have been evolved, PROC, AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XXVIII. 1383. Z. PRINTED JUNE 2, 1890. 202 all traceable to the original. His name is usually given the variety provided with open grates, but there can be no doubt that the original embodied also the principles of the now widely used “ air-tight” stoves to which his directions are per- fectly applicable. One of the advantages claimed for the stove was that it was a refuge from the nuisance of smoky chimneys. At that time the true principles of chimney construction had not been worked out so that a perfect chimney was the exception and open fire-places not an unmixed luxury. To beguile the tedium and discomfort of a seven weeks’ voyage across the Atlantic, Franklin set down his observations and recommenda- tions and gave them to a suffering world as his famous pam- phlet on the “ Causes and Cure of Smoky Chimneys.” Having applied his accurate eye and judgment to these common-place things and having made ‘scientific publications of mark con- cerning them, he had the satisfaction of knowing that by his plans for perfecting chimneys, for getting the most heat from fuel and for securing wholesome currents of air in close apart- ments, he had dispelled much ignorance and enhanced the sum of human comfort. That Franklin was foremost in all public measures, for found- ing a hospital, advancing popular education, lighting and paving streets, and organizing fire companies, is generally appre- ciated, but it is not so widely known that he took steps in his will to improve the water supply of this city. Having noticed the tendency of well water in old cities to grow gradually un- -. fit for use, he foresaw that in time a change to a better pro- tected source would be necessary to the public health. In his last will he provided that at the end of a hundred years, if not done before, the corporation of this city should employ a bequest in bringing by pipes the water of Wissakickon creek to the town, After a hundred years, his beloved city is con- ——————— ss eC SC el eee 203 fronted with the same difficulty in another shape. The wells having fulfilled his prophecy have been abolished and the waters of the Wissahickon many years ago brought into ser- vice have in turn come under suspicion. What an imperial gift, if some millionaire, emulous of Franklin’s example, with far greater means, should see fit to dedicate his money to pro- vide for the people a purer drinking water, when the unfitness of the present source shall be duly recognized! Having made eight voyages across the Atlantic at a time when it took at least a month, he had opportunities for studying the art of navigation. What he saw joined to what he learned from experienced seamen and his own wide reading lead him to inferences that have helped to master the difficulties and perils of the sea. Although early Spanish navigators were aware of the existence of the Gulf stream, so little detailed knowledge was available that up to Franklin’s time the cur- rents of the Atlantic were looked upon as hindrances rather than helps to transatlantic commerce. Franklin noticed the higher temperature marking out the Gulf stream, took many thermometric observations, and made a chart of it with a view to guide navigators in the route between England and America. He first advised that systematic use be made of the trade- winds and the ocean currents, ands showed how it could be done, From the Chinese he got an idea which he was the first to urge upon the western ship-owners. He worked out the crude hint to its best form—that of dividing a ship into sepa- rate chambers by water-tight partitions so that a leak in one would not affect the others. It was not until quite recent years that this device has been put in practice with the de- sired results. A demonstration of its utility was seen lately in the accident that happened to the steamer City of Paris. Even when two of her compartments were flooded, she bore *- 204 up for four days and a half, bringing her ship's company of more than a thousand souls safely into port. The recorded experiences of ships during the last few years have fully established the efficacy of another notion of Franklin’s. Thanks to his emphatic endorsement the previ- ously known power of oil to still troubled waters is now gene- rally employed to smooth the breaking waves when they threaten the safety of a vessel. The occurrence of a north-east storm of unusual violence provoked those inquiries which led to his discovery of the backward course of storms and to a theory which had a marked influence on the development of meteorology. His explanation of the Aurora Borealis as a phenomenon of atmos- pheric electricity was at once accepted as adequate, though in its details it has since been modified to meet the demands of advancing knowledge. In one of his charming letters to a lady correspondent he first made note of the remarkable variation in the absorptive power for the sun’s heat shown by cloths of different colors. According to his suggestions, the prineiple has been applied to agriculture and to the clothing of armies. Under the foster- ing hand of the national government during this century there has been developed from ‘his initial inquiry in navigation the admirable work of the hydrographic office. Its pilot charts are the lineal descendants of the one Franklin drew. Itis not claiming too much to say that his observations on the north- east storm were the first noteworthy contribution to the science upon which is based the predictions of the weather bureau. The present time has been called “the Age of Electricity.” To estimate fairly the significance of Franklin’s electrical researches in this day of the telephone, the dynamo-engines, the electric light, and the electric railway, it must be remem- 205 bered that one hundred and fifty years ago not only was there no telegraph, but the magnetic, chemical and motor powers of electricity were not even dreamt of. It was fifty years before Galvani published his account of the convulsions produced in a frog’s leg by the contact of dissimilar metals. Volta was just five years old. To what is now an open book full of wonders which every school-boy can read without obscurity or hesita- tion, naught but the preface had appeared. That preface dates from three centuries before Christ, when Thales of Miletus drew attention to the curious property of attraction developed on rubbing amber. The Greeks explained this by the theory that friction evoked the animating soul of the amber which seized upon light particles near it. For nearly two thousand years there was no substantial addition to knowledge until | Gilbert discovered that glass, sealing wax, sulphur, and other substances could also be electrified. Then fifty years elapsed before a rude machine was made from which vivid sparks. could be drawn. After another fifty years the resemblance between these zigzag sparks and the lightning flash was com- mented on. The first chapter was fairly opened when the discovery of the Leyden jar enabled the experimenter to im- prison the fiery spirit and perform many remarkable tricks with it. At this time Franklin had reached middle life and retired from business with an independent fortune. He gave his scientific enthusiasm a free rein with the Leyden jar and the frictional machine. With the aid of his Philadelphia col- laborators many ingenious experiments were devised. Their joint study proved so fruitful that in the course of six years they advanced the science of frictional electricity more than the rest of the world had done in two thousand. It was this chapter which, according to Goethe, had been handled better than any other in modern times. For illustra- 206 tion of an admirable scientific method, let us glance at the steps of Franklin’s research. First, his attention was taken with the marvels of the rubbed glass tube. These were en- hanced by the storage properties of the Leyden jar. With three friends who had the same infection, he formed a coterie for mutual suggestions and encouragement. They constructed their own machines and with them made new demonstrations of attraction and repulsion, and of the power of electricity to produce light, heat, mechanical violence, nervous shock, and even death. The brilliancy of these experiments depended mainly on Franklin’s discovery that the electricity of the Ley- den jar was stored up on the glass, and that by increasing the extent of excited surface the energy was proportionately mul- tiplied. The power thus obtained made it appear highly probable that the difference between the spark and the light- ning flash was one of degree. Having discovered the property of pointed conductors to cause a silent and harmless discharge he next charged an artificial thunder-cloud made of Leyden jars, and with a small pointed rod conducted away its energy without noise or violence. From the truth thus established, he deduced the conjecture that sharp metallic rods fixed at the highest point of buildings would draw away quietly the charge of an approaching thunder-storm. A similar contrivance brought the atmospheric electricity within the reach of his experiments, and, its identity with frictional electricity was fully demonstrated. His conjectures put to the test gave to the service of humanity the lightning-rod, accounted the most brilliant application of science that had been known up to that time. . In a hundred years, but little has been added to what Franklin revealed concerning the electricity of friction. Volta’s electrophorus with his condenser and Holtz’ induction 207 machine are the only important additions to electrostatics that have since been made. The marvelous progress of this century in the adaptation of electricity as a useful agent are developments of chemical and magnetic electricity forms un- known until after Franklin’s death. His apt and simple theory of an electric fluid, the excess or lack of which caused positive and negative action, held sway for so many years that to this day its nomenclature is retained in spite of defects re- vealed by recent advances in knowledge. The splendid re- sults of investigations made in our time call for a broader ‘conception which shall include Franklinism, Galvanism, and Faradism, with those manifestations of energy at a distance which seem to place electro-magnetic induction in the same category with light and other radiant forces. But Franklin’s fame as a philosopher who worked for the improvement of man’s estate shall remain amid all the theo- retical changes of the future. It shall remain because it rests upon the enduring truths he first laid bare; because it was builded with sound inductive methods; because it is guarded by the grateful memories of mankind. Cheerfully then let us commemorate the day of his death. It was the day when his intelligence should at last be released from “its muddy vest- ure,” when, as he expressed it, he should be free to roam through some of the systems Herschel has explored, free to satisfy his curiosity concerning worlds he did not know. In introducing Dr. Henry M. Baird, Mr. Williams said: The connection of Franklin with France lay deeper than the accident of events or the needs of his native land. Of all our greater men in the last century or in 208 this, the expression and cast of his genius alone was Gallic. He shared with Voltaire the capacity for using the highest literary form to enlighten the humblest reader or confute the keenest partisan. In his jour- nalism, he prefigured the homely familiarity and the fami- liar humor which is alike the might and the weakness, the strong tower and the open pitfall of the American newspaper inthis century. But in all he wrote and in much that he did, he foreshadowed that apprehension and appreciation of form for wit’s sake which yearly draws us as a nation nearer to the critical standards of France in art and in letters. The historian of France therefore approaches the diplomatic career of Frank- lin acquainted not only with the environment in which he discharged his great services, but aware of the men and the models, the method and habit of thought which profoundly influenced the conscious and uncon- scious development of Franklin from the man of busi- ness into the man of science, and from the man of science into the man of affairs. To the historian of the Hugue- nots, the chronicler of the great Cardinals, the deep and unsparing student of the causes which prepared in France the field in which Franklin won his last and closing triumphs, these triumphs have a meaning and interpretation lost on other men. I need not remind you that our next speaker ascends this platform with this special equipment for his work in treating of the diplomatic services of Franklin, and I feel equal honor and good fortune in introducing to you, as the last speaker of the evening, Dr. Henry M. Baird, of the University of the City of New York, who will speak upon 209 THE DIPLOMATIC SERVICES OF BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. I have been asked to address you on the subject of Dr. Franklin’s diplomatic services—a department of activity in which our great compatriot, and the founder of this Society, conferred upon his country and upon humanity benefits not inferior to those by which, as a scientific discoverer, he brought the whole world into his debt. In the address of welcome made to Benjamin Franklin, upon his return from his last mission to Europe, the Assembly of this Commonwealth, by the mouth of its Speaker, the Hon. John Bayard, greeted him with these words: “ We are | confident, sir, that we speak the sentiments of this whole country, when we say that your services in the public councils and negotiations have not only merited the thanks of the present generation, but will be recorded in the pages of history to your immortal honor.” * We are here, Mr. President, to set the seal of the conclud- ing years of this nineteenth century to the fulfillment of the prophecy made over one hundred years ago, by the enthusi- astic voice of Franklin’s contemporaries. j The diplomatic services of Benjamin Franklin are naturally to be referred to two periods; and the dividing line is the out- break of the American Revolution. In the first period, his efforts were directed towards England, and his aim was to ob- tain for his countrymen, as citizens of the great British empire, ‘the acknowledgment of rights inalienably theirs by reason of their birth. , In the second period, the claims of the colonists of North America having been practically denied, the energies of his * “The Complete Works of Benjamin Franklin.” Edited by John Bigelow (New York, 1887). ix, 248. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 183, 2A. -PRINTED JUNE 3, 1890. 210 mind were turned in the direction of France, and his heroic and persistent exertions were put forth to secure, first, the recognition and help of that land, and then, with that help, the complete independence of the United States and their ad- mission into the sisterhood of nations. Both departments of his activity, both fields of labor, elicited strenuous, concentrated, conscientious exercise of all his prodigious intellectual powers, and both were worthy of them. Yet viewing his diplomatic ser- vices as a whole, the latter part stands out prominent, as indeed the consummation of a life of singular utility to the public. The English mission laid the foundation, broad and firm, of Franklin’s fame as an able negotiator; his mission to the Con- tinent reared on this abiding substructure a stately edifice adorned with imposing columns and entablature—in which, if I may be permitted to carry out the same figure, the aged phil- osopher’s warm and enthusiastic attempt, in the name of humanity, to mitigate the horrors of all future wars, consti- tuted the graceful cornice—a supreme and enduring tribute to the kindly instincts of his nature, of which it may truthfully be said: “ Finis coronat opus.” The richest and best fruits of man’s intellectual and moral growth are found in the autumn of life, when the.warm and mellowing rays of the sun have done their work, and nature gathers to itself the combined results of the entire year. Frank- lin’s noble achievements as a diplomatist were accomplished in his later manhood and in his old age. He was past his fifty- first birthday when he sailed for England upon his first mis- sion; he lacked less than six months of being four-score years old when he returned from his mission to France. The inter- vening twenty-eight years had been spent abroad in the service of his country, with the exception of two short intervals, the one of less than two years, the other of about eighteen months, 211 And what had he accomplished, when, with hair blanched by age, he at last returned to his native land and to the city of his choice, after so long an expatriation ? It is not with diplomacy, especially with services of the kind that Dr. Franklin rendered, as it is with the career of the military hero. If the great negotiator also has his triumphs, it is not always easy to lay the finger upon all the particular movements by means of which his bloodless victories are won. None the less do all his carefully laid but unobtrusive plans tend unerringly to the great result. The first mission to England, though extending over not less than five years, is of subordinate interest to us now; because of the complete change that has since obliterated the political issues then regarded as momentous. As agent for the colony of Pennsylvania, Dr. Franklin was sent to endeavor to obtain redress of wrongs sustained at the hands of the proprietaries. Subsequently appointed agent by other colonies—Massachusetts, Maryland, Georgia—his duty included vigilance respecting their interests also. The negoti- ation was long, tedious, dreary. We cannot tell how an ob- scure and unknown American, acting as a commissioner of distant provinces, would have fared at London in those times. Even Dr. Franklin, with all the great prestige of his scientific renown, did not find his position a bed of roses. The British government had evidently no very exalted opinion of the importance, present or prospective, of his gracious majesty’s transatlantic plantations. Procrastination, proverbial vice of courts, had fullsway. The months that Franklin was kept waiting for an answer to his petitions, were, doubtless, not alto- gether wasted by one who had mastered the rare art of putting the fragments, the very crumbs of time, to profitable use in the study of nature’s hidden mysteries; and an abode in the 212 midst of the most learned and appreciative scholars England could boast, was not altogether destitute of attractions. Yet the diplomatic gain—the admission in particular of the right of the colonists to tax the lands of the proprietaries, soon to be proprietaries no more—seems trifling in view of the great events shortly to happen. And still the shrewd negotiator had gained something valuable. He had gained an insight into the cardinal dectrine of the current creed of the court. For had he not heard a minister of state, Lord Granville, propound the tenet that the king’s instructions to his governors in America were the law of the land, and that the king himself must be regarded as “ the legislator of the colonies?” This was a strange view to. Dr. Franklin, who had always supposed that the right tc make the laws was vested in the provincial assemblies, with the king’s approval. - And he significantly tells us: “His lordship’s conversation having a little alarmed me as to what might be the sentiments of the court concerning us, I wrote it down as soon as I re. turned to my lodgings.”’* It was not many years before it was the turn of others tc take alarm at the practical assertion of the same dangerous heresy. Respecting Franklin’s second period of residence in Londor as a negotiator, it is not too much to say, that it brings intc the clearest relief the rare capacity of the great American statesman. ‘True, he did not attain the goal of his hopes. He was not successful in bringing the crown and people of Great Britain to a better mind, in settling the relations of the colonies to the mother country upon a lasting basis of justice and equality ; in obviating the necessity of that sundering of ties which Dr. Franklin himself was reluctant to admit to be * Autoblography (continuation) in Works, i, 296. 213 unavoidable, and in averting the dreadful resort to war between men of the same blood. But he did succeed in the next best thing, for he brought into the clear light of God’s sunshine the righteousness of the struggle that was forced upon the colonies, by demonstrating the impossibility of obtaining redress for their wrongs from an obstinate king, from an unreasonable and prejudiced parliament, from a people that because they inhabited the mother country had fallen into the strange mis- take of imagining themselves to be not subjects but govern- ors.* For, as Dr. Franklin wrote to Lord Kames, “every man in England seems to consider himself as a piece of a sovereign over America; seems to jostle himself into the throne with the king and talks of owr subjects in the colonies.” + : Two scenes of dramatic interest illustrate this mission— both almost too familiar to students of history to need more than a passing notice, both, however, too characteristic and too essential to a clear understanding of the marked personal- ity of the man who was their hero, to be left altogether with- out mention. The first of these is that remarkable examina- tion before the House of Commons, so often described, so often the subject of unconcealed wonder on the part of historical writers, when for hours Dr. Franklin answered the various questions addressed to him both by friends and by political opponents, with a readiness, a calmness, an aptness, that have rarely been equaled, perhaps never excelled. While it seems too much to say that his replies to the interrogatories of his friends were altogether unpremeditated, the admirable prompt- ness and skill with which he met the inquiries sprung upon him by adversaries, afford conclusive evidence of the breadth of his information upon American topics, and, not less, of the * Works, iii, 486, 487. t Ib., iv, 2, 3. 214 singular equipoise of a mind so nicely balanced as to respond instantly to the demands of the moment, yet so firmly settled as to be proof against every attempt to disturb or disconcert. If this famous episode was well calculated to exalt Dr. Franklin to the highest pinnacle of political reputation as yet attained by any American subject of the king of England, it scarcely surpassed in interest another occasion of the same eventful period. It was in February, 1766, that Dr. Franklin appeared before the Commons to submit to the long but respectful examination of which I have just spoken. It was nearly eight years later (in Jannary, 1774) that the venerable sage, the man whom the world of letters and the world of science delighted to honor, was subjected, in the presence of the Privy Council, to an attack as scurrilous as it was indecent. There is no need that I rehearse the familiar tale of the Hutchinson Letters and the storm their publication aroused. That Dr. Franklin’s part in the transaction was fully justifiable, can scarcely fail, I think, to be the unanimous verdict of impartial men. But the fury of the party whose secrets were unmasked so unexpectedly, can scarcely be imagined. Of that fury the scandalous occur- rence in the Cockpit of Westminster (on the 29th of January, 1774) was the direct and disgraceful consequence. The gov- ernment’s very purpose in summoning Dr. Franklin was to insult him; and had it been in the power of malice to affix ignominy to a great and virtuous man, the vituperative address of the solicitor-general, Mr. Wedderburn, might have com- passed that end. As it was, during the whole time that this unseemly flood of abuse was poured upon his devoted head, Dr. Franklin, to use the account of an eye-witness (Dr, Ban- croft), “stood conspicuously erect, without the smallest move- ment of any part of his body. The muscles of his face had 215 been previously composed, so as to afford a placid, tran- - quil expression of countenance, and he did not suffer the slightest alteration of it to appear during the continuance of the speech, in which he was so harshly and improperly treated.” * A man conscious of the integrity of his purpose ee the innocence of his actions can well afford to wait for vindication. And Dr. Franklin had not very long to wait. Not quite a year had elapsed—it was Wednesday, the 1st of February, 1775—when Lord Sandwich, in opposing in the Upper House the conciliatory measure introduced by the Earl] of Chatham, seeing Dr. Franklin a few feet distant leaning upon the bar, went out of his way to express his belief that the plan under consideration was not that of any British peer, but of a person whom he saw before him, one of the bitterest and most mis- chievous enemies the country had ever had. In reply to whom Lord Chatham, not content with accepting the sole respon- sibility for the authorship of the project, proceeded to eulogize the great philosopher in these memorable words: “I make no scruple to declare that, were I the first minister of this coun- try, and had I the care of settling this momentous business, I should not be ashamed of publicly calling to my assistance a person so perfectly acquainted with the whole of American affairs as the gentleman alluded to, and'so injuriously reflected on; one whom all Europe holds in high estimation for his _ knowledge and wisdom, and ranks with our Boyles and New- tons; who is an honor, not to the English nation only, but to human nature !” “T found it harder,” modestly remarks Dr. Franklin in re- porting the incident, “I found it harder to stand this extravagant compliment than the preceding equally extravagant abuse, but * Works, v, 311, 216 kept as well as I could an unconcerned countenance, as not con- ceiving it to relate to me.” * And what shall I say of the importance of the services of Benjamin Franklin at the court of Versailles ? . His good American friends had contented themselves with a brief enjoyment of his society at home. Little more than a year after his return from London, they voted, in Congress assembled, his dispatch to Europe, this time to France, show- ing scant consideration for his three-score years and ten, or for any natural desire he might have for a longer furlough from the diplomatic service. Barely had he, as a representative of Pennsylvania, affixed his name to the Declaration of Independ- ence, before he was chosen to discharge his new and responsi- ble functions. He reached Nantes early in December, 1776. Before Christmas he was in Paris. He came at a critical moment. It cannot be affirmed that, without the help of France, the thirteen American colonies would not ultimately have achieved their great purpose. There is much in a courage that will admit into its vocabulary no such word as failure. Stout hearts convinced of the righteousness of the cause for which they battle, possess a great reserve of power. Unflinching resolve has learned the secret of enlist- ing time and opportunity as allies, and when most prostrate rises, with Heaven's help, to renew a strife which in the end must be crowned with victory. But the American contest would have been longer, more painful, more enduring in the injuries inflicted, had it not been for the kindly intervention of France. And that intervention Benjamin Franklin secured. Humanly speaking, there was no one else that could have secured it. He was the foremost American of his time; in fact, he was the only * Works, v, 498, 217 American that could claim a world-wide reputation. Even Washington was little known in Europe. Younger than Franklin by twenty-six years, he had as yet accomplished little to bring to the notice of foreigners those transcendant qualities, that commanding personal character, which years of arduous war amid trials, discouragement, and even occasional defeat, were to put to the proof. But Franklin, the man of science, the brilliant discoverer in a new and attractive realm of inves- tigation, was known by all. His name was upon all lips. The very fact that he had come to France to advocate the cause of the new American republic conciliated for that cause the favor of great and small. And with the favor came a conviction that the side Franklin espoused would be certain to win. For, changing somewhat Turgot’s celebrated line, was it not self- evident that the hand that “snatched the thunderbolt from heaven” would prove competent to wrest “the sceptre from tyrants?” Thus it came to pass that soon, according to M. Lacretelle, “no one any longer conceived it possible to refuse fleets and an army to the countrymen of Franklin.”* Or, as M. Mignet, most terse and philosophical of modern French historians, has put it, “The sight of Franklin, the severe sim- plicity of his dress, the refined kindliness of his manners, the alluring spell of his wit, his venerable appearance, his modest assurance, and his resplendent fame, brought the American cause altogether into fashion.” + But it was not solely, nor chiefly, the reputation already gained by Dr. Franklin, that made his mission to France so productive of good to his native land. There was a wide field for the exercise of his ingenuity, for the display of his shrewd * “ Histoire de la France pendant le dix-huitiéme siécle,” v, 86. ¢ “ Vie de Franklin, Mémoires de l’Académie des Sciences Morales et Politiques de l’In- stitut de France,’’ vii (1850), 396, PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XXVIII. 133. 28. PRINTED JUNE 3, 1890. 218 common sense, and of both dexterity and tact, in those dark days when nothing reached Europe but reports of losses, re- treats, disasters to the patriots. Money was to be obtained, and that from the coffers of a monarch himself well-nigh bankrupt. A great state must be induced to enter the strife upon the seas with the most formidable of maritime powers. A friendly shelter must be found in hospitable ports for Ameri- can vessels that scoured the shores of Great Britain and brought in the prizes taken to be condemned and sold. With the joyful news of the surrender of General Burgoyne eame the first rays of sunshine, presage of the complete dis- persion of the thick clouds hitherto enveloping the political skies. Then it was that the king of France definitely consented to enter upon a treaty of alliance with the United States. That was indeed, as M. Guizot justly styles it, “a triumph of Franklin’s diplomatic ability.’* Henceforth, if the great American envoy’s labors did not diminish, if instead they rather increased as the slow years of the contest dragged along, at least the firm conviction of approaching triumph made tolerable even that enormous load of ‘responsibility which rested upon his shoulders. Others, it is true, were associated with him, at the Hague, in Madrid, and elsewhere—John Adams, John Jay, and others, whose services are deserving of everlasting remembrance. They, too, displayed true patriot- ism, whole-souled devotion to the cause of liberty, and rare skill in negotiation. They might not have enjoyed the oppor- tunities for training in the school of diplomacy which had fallen to the lot of the British envoys with whom they were called upon to deal, but they proved themselves adepts in the science of persuasion and generally discomfited their rivals. As Dr. Franklin somewhat quaintly states it, not without a tinge of * *' Histoire de France,"’ vy, 346, 219 raillery, when writing to his English correspondent, William Strahan, once more his friend, after the conclusion of the war: “Your contempt of our understandings, in comparison with your own, appeared to be not much better founded than that of our courage, if we may judge by this circumstance, that, in whatever court of Europe, a Yankee negotiator appeared, the wise British minister was routed, put in a passion, picked a quarrel with your friends, and was sent home with a flea in his ear.”* And if good Jonathan Shipley, Bishop of St: Asaph, had primary reference to the ability of Franklin himself in dealing with the French and English ministers, the remark held good also of his worthy associates: “The event has shown that, in their own arts, you were not inferior to the ablest of them.” + Yet, while others were associated with him in the honor- able work, and right nobly discharged their part, it was after all, Dr. Franklin that was chiefly looked to to represent the United States in Europe entire, as it was he alone that could sustain the credit of the country when Congress in its despera- tion was issuing drafts which it provided the envoys with no means. of honoring, and when the advances of money im- peratively needed for the maintenance of the American cause must be wrung by judicious insistance from a government, not so much reluctant, as unable to meet all the demands upon its purse made by its impecunious ally. At last perseverance met with its reward. The king of England was compelled to acknowledge the autonomy of his revolted colonies, and, on the 30th of November, 1782, in con- junction with John Adams, John Jay, and Henry Laurens, Dr. Franklin signed the provisional articles. Ten months later, he * Letter from Passy, 19 August, 1784, Works, ix, 53. + Letter from Twyford, 27 November, 1784, Works, ix, 280. 220 was associated with Adams and Jay in concluding the defini- tive treaty. To theconsummation of the hopes of all patriotic Americans, the wise efforts of Franklin and his fellow-diplomatists had contributed as truly, perhaps as substantially, as had the mar- tial exploits of Washington and his companions in arms. And it is as honorable to the wisdom as it is to the reverent spirit _ of those great men, that both Franklin and Washington ascribed their success to the favor of God who is the friend and avenger of the oppressed. I quoted, a moment ago, the somewhat boastful terms in which Dr. Franklin was pleased to describe to William Strahan the triumphs of American diplo- macy at European courts. I must be permitted here to repro- duce these sentences by which he next proceeds to qualify what might well otherwise be viewed as too arrogant a claim. “ But, after all, my dear friend,” he says, “ do not imagine that I am vain enough to ascribe our success to any superiority in any of those points. I am too well acquainted with all the springs and levers of our machine, not to see that our human means were unequal to our undertaking, and that, if it had not been for the justice of our cause and the consequent interposi- tion of Providence, in which we had faith, we must have been ruined. If I had ever before been an atheist, I should now have been convinced of the being and government of a Deity! It is He who abases the proud and favors the humble. May we never forget His goodness to us, and may our future con- duct manifest our gratitude.” * It cannot but be regarded as an interesting circumstance, that Dr. Franklin’s last diplomatic service should have been rendered in the interest of our common humanity; that in the treaty with Prussia, which it was his last official duty to sign * Works, ix, 53. = See. As 221 on the eve of his departure from Paris, were embodied those philanthropic provisions that are destined, we hope, to mark the era of a higher and purer civilization. Much as Dr. Franklin had had to do with the prosecution of war, forced thereto by the circumstances of the hour, he was preéminently a man of peace. “I am of opinion,” he once wrote to the banker, Le Grand, “I am of opinion that there never was a bad peace, nor a good war.”* He hoped great things from the spread of intelligence and especially of mutual forbearance. Hence he rejoiced when Louis XVI, by his edict of toleration (1787), took the first step toward undo- ing the mischief wrought by Louis XIV’s gigantic blunder in revoking the Edict of Nantes. “The arrét in favor of the non catholiques,” he wrote from Philadelphia, “gives great pleasure here, not only from its present advantages, but as it is a good step towards general toleration, and to the abolish- ing, in time, all party spirit among Christians, and the mis- chiefs that have so long attended it. Thank God, the world is growing wiser and wiser, and as by degrees men are con- vinced of the folly of wars for religion, for dominion or for commerce, they will be happier and happier.” + Meanwhile, as the prospect of the entire abolition of war was yet very dim and shadowy, Dr. Franklin regarded it an end well worth laboring for to reduce as much as possible the attendant horrors. Two of these—privateering and the cruel treatment of prisoners of war—he set himself to remove. He had written frequently and decidedly in condemnation of privateering, which he stigmatized as a remnant of the ancient piracy, and argued that though accidentally beneficial to particular persons, it was far from profitable to the nation * Works, ix, 298. ; Letter to M. Le Veillard, Philadelphia, 8 June, 1788. Works, ix, 481. 222 that authorized it. It was a lottery in which some might draw prizes, but the whole expense exceeded by much the aggregate of individual gains. Besides, in addition to the national loss of so many men during the time they have been engaged in robbing, the agents in the nefarious work become unfit for any sober business after a peace, and “serve only to increase the number of highwaymen and _ housebreakers.” The financial disaster that sooner or later overtakes even the most prosperous of those taking part in it, Franklin regarded as “a just punishment for their having wantonly and unfeelingly ruined many honest, innocent traders and their families, whose subsistence was employed in serving the common interests of mankind.”* In accordance with these humane views, Dr. Franklin de- sired to insert in the treaty of peace with Great Britain an article abolishing privateering in all future wars. To thisend he drew up a proposal, which he enclosed to his old friend, Rich- ard Oswald, the British commissioner, shortly after they had signed the “provisional articles.” In the accompanying letter he wrote: “I send you also another paper which I once read to you separately. It contains a proposition for improving the law of nations, by prohibiting the plundering of unarmed and usefully employed people. I rather wish than eapect that it will be adopted. But I think it may be offered with a better grace by a country that is likely to suffer least and gain most by continuing the ancient practice, which is our case, as the American ships, laden only with the gross productions of the earth, cannot be so valuable as yours, filled with sugars or manufactures. It has not yet been considered by my col- leagues, but if you should think or find that it might be *Propositions relative to privateering communicated to Mr. Oswald, Passy, 14 January, 1783, Works, vill, 246. See also, @., ix, 88, 89, 223 acceptable on your side, I would try to get it inserted in the general treaty. J think tt will do honor to the nations that establish it.” * Dr. Franklin was right, but, finding no favor with the gov- ernment of Great Britain, the proposal was declined. Its author, however, did not despair. A few years later he had the satisfaction of being able to write to M. Leroy: “I rejoice to hear that the difference between the emperor and your country [France] is accommodated, for I love peace. You will see in the treaty we have made with Prussia some marks of my endeavors to lessen the calamities of future wars.” Accord- ingly we find near the close of that document, signed as I have said by Dr. Franklin, as one of the three commissioners appointed by Congress, just before his return, an article—it is the twenty-third—almost identical in its phraseology with that which he had, two years before, offered to Mr. Oswald for consideration. In it occur these memorable words: “And all merchant and trading vessels employed in exchanging the © products of different places and thereby rendering the neces- saries, conveniences and comforts of human life more easy to be obtained and more general, shall be allowed to pass free and unmolested; and neither of the contracting powers shall grant or issue any commissions to any private armed vessels, empowering them to take or destroy such trading vessels or interrupt such commerce.” + Not only so, but, in a succeeding article, the attempt is made further to mitigate the sufferings entailed by war by provisions of the most kindly character, stipulating in great detail what shall be the treatment of prisoners. They shall not be sent * Works, viii, 245: + Text in ‘“‘ Treaties and Conventions concluded between the United States of America and other powers since July 4, 1776” (Washington, 1889), 905, 906. 224 to distant and inclement countries, to the Hast Indies or to any other parts of Asia or Africa, nor confined in dangerous prison-ships or prisons, nor put into irons, nor bound, nor otherwise restrained in the use of their limbs. Both officers and common soldiers shall be furnished with daily rations equal in quality and quantity to the rations given to soldiers and officers of the same rank in the army of the cap- tors; and their quarters and barracks shall be not less roomy and comfortable than those enjoyed by the troops of the party in whose power-they are. Still further to invest these new improvements in interna- tional jurisprudence with all possible sanctity, the following clear statement is made, every line of which bears the marks of Dr. Franklin’s clear and judicious pen: “ And it is declared, that neither the pretense that war dissolves all treaties, nor any other whatever, shall be considered as annulling or sus- pending this and the next preceding article; but, on the con- trary, that the state of war is precisely that for which they are provided, and during which they are to be as sacredly observed as the most acknowledged articles in the law of nature or nations,” * This was an appropriate ending of Dr. Franklin’s diplomatic services, a real gain for humanity achieved by a philosopher in whose eyes no acquisition, either of his own or of others, was so precious as that by means of which the common store of comfort and happiness was enhanced. Again it had been the great fame of the founder of this Society that insured him success in the field of international negotiation. For with such a man the States and monarchs of the Old World deemed it an honor to treat. The ambassador of Gustavus III, of Sweden, was not only directed to make advances for a treaty * Treaties and Conventions, 906, 225 with the United States—Sweden being the first power in Europe which voluntarily offered its friendship without being solicited—but was charged to tell Dr. Franklin that the king had so great esteem for him that it would be a particular satis- faction to his majesty to have such a transaction with him. Dr. Franklin is himself our informant, nor does he conceal the pardonable gratification which he felt at hearing the flattering assurance, adding: “I have perhaps some vanity in repeating this; but I think, too, that it is right that Congress should know it, and judge if any use may be made of the reputation of a citizen for the public service.” * The diplomatic career of Dr. Franklin closes with the year 1785, when he went home not indeed to enjoy rest, as he had fondly hoped, but to a change of scene and of employment. And here, in the city of his adoption, death overtook him rich in years, in honors, and, what he prized more, in the memory of valuable benefits conferred upon his country and upon mankind. Such men are few in any age; their number is not great in all the combined centuries that together make up the short life of our race upon this planet. “Tt is only meet that we should cherish their names with respect, and gratefully hand down to posterity the story of their honorable and meritorious deeds. Upon the close of the last speech, Mr. Williams said : I'am instructed by the Committee, which I represent in closing this commemoration, publicly to express the appreciation of the Society for the attendance of its * Franklin to Secretary Livingston, Passy, 25 June, 1782, Works, viii, 109. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 133. 2c. PRINTED JUNE 3, 1890. 226 guests and for the words of its invited speakers. A hundred years ago, the honor and commemoration of Franklin at the end of a century was confidently expected by our predecessors, whose example we fol- low to-night with this tribute in memory of his death. With increasing confidence, with enlarging hope for the future, in abiding certainty that whatever another century may bring it can add only increasing fame to his memory, we commit our discharge of this duty to our successors.a century hence, in the complete and comfortable assurance, that their commemoration, like our own, will find assembled again the descendants of Franklin, this Society, its members, its invited guests, and eloquent voices to commemorate his memory and again record his fame. ae ane ee eC er! CSC Nov. 7, 1890.] 227 [Merrick. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vou. XXVIII. JuLy TO DECEMBER, 1890. No. 134. Obituary Notice of Daniel Raynes Goodwin, D.D., LL.D. By J. Vaughan Merrick. . (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 7, 1890.) - It is impossible within the limited compass of a memoir like this, to pre- sent a complete picture of the lifé and character of a man so pure, so strong, so gifted, so impressive in his influence upon the world in which he lived, as those of the subject of this sketch. Many of the circumstances which moulded his earlier years have sunk into oblivion, and through the passing away of his contemporaries cannot be revived. We must be content therefore to gather up the fragments which remain, and to fill out the outlines with the more abundant records of later years. Daniel Raynes Goodwin was born, April 12, 1811, in North Berwick, Maine. His father, Samuel Goodwin, was a farmer who also owned and worked two mills at the Falls of Negutaquis, on the outskirts of the town. He was a sensible and good man, who, after rearing a family of nine chil- dren, died in 1855 at the age of ninety-two. His mother was Anna Gerrish, who survived her husband about one year. On both sides Mr. Goodwin inherited sterling qualities ; on the father’s side had been men of mark for integrity, courage and patriotism, and on the maternal side, college-bred men for generations. The homestead was so situated as to present meagre advantages for school education. The nearest neighbor lived nearly a mile distant, and the nearest school-house, which was opened only about ten weeks each year, was still farther off. In those days, in New Eng- land, sparsely settled and poor, except in the cities and towns, school ad- vantages were few, and were pursued under many drawbacks and hard- ships. Wherever possible they were supplemented by home teaching. Fortunately in this case, the eldest sister performed this office during the winter evenings. When fifteen years of age, he was sent to the Academy at South Berwick, and later on to Limerick Academy. In 1828, then PROC. AMER, PHILOS, SOC, XXVIII, 134. 2D. PRINTED JAN. 12, 1891. Merrick.] 228 [Nov. 7, severiteen years old, he entered Bowdoin College, at Brunswick, Me., and notwithstanding his limited preparation, he speedily took and maintained throughout his college course, the first place for scholarship, as well as for natural powers. Itis stated by Rev. Dr. John Lord, one of his schoolmates at Berwick Academy, that his class were ull older than himself, yet that he at once took the lead, and being ahead of his teacher in classics, really taught himself Greek and Latin. He adds that he (Mr. G.) had great pre- cocity of talent in every study to which his attention was turned, and was regarded as a sort of intellectual prodigy by teachers and scholars alike. — He graduated at the head of his class at Bowdoin, in 1832, and was ap- pointed master of the Academy at Hallowell, Me.; soon after which, in 1834, he became a member of the Theological Seminary at Andover. In 1835, he was called from Andover to Bowdoin, his Alma Mater, as tutor under the late Henry W. Longfellow, professor of modern languages. Soon after assuming the duties of this position he was elected to succeed that eminent man, who had resigned the chair. Some faint conception of his abilities and attainments can be drawn from the fact, that such a choice should have fallen upon a man of only twenty-four years ofage. Difiident of his own powers, however, and resolved to fit himself more thoroughly for his post, he at once proceeded to Europe and spent nearly two years, study- ing the structure of the language and the literature of Spain, France, Italy and Germany, and maturing his knowledge of philology, which then and always was with him a favorite study, and one in which his intel- lectual powers were strengthened and polished. In 1837, he returned and became an active member of the Faculty of Bowdoin. Ivis the testimony of Mr. Nehemiah Cleaveland, in his history of that institution, that ‘Asa teacher and governor, he was assiduous, fearless and most efficient, incul- cating by example as well as precept a liberal culture. Possessing a mind singularly active, clear and comprehensive, with great acumen and power of analysis, it is not strange that metaphysical and moral science largely attracted his regard.’”’ Nor were his sympathies and abilities confined in their exercise to his merely professional affairs. It is the remark of Prof. Egbert C. Smyth, the son of a brother professor, who lived near and was a boyish admirer of Prof. Goodwin, that the two colleagues were asso- ciated in many objects of public concern outside of college duties; and the same authority mentions his admirable conversational powers, the memory so unfailing and inexhaustible in its resources, the crystal clear- ness of his thought, the aptness of his words, h’s cheerful and spirited manner. He speaks also of the engaging gifts of his wife (Mary Ran- dall, daughter of Samuel and Hannah Merrick) to whom he had been mar- ried in January, 1838, With her, his delightful home had been established ; and from it the two professors would ‘habitually walk together to their eleven o'clock recitations; or from time to time plant together elms and maples which with their own hands had been dug up in the forests.’”’ In this charming home, a perpetual fountain of knowledge and life, Prof. and Mrs. Goodwin lived for many years, subsequently transferring it to 1890,} 229 (Merrick. another house in Brunswick ; rearing there a family of children, the oldest of whom, Anna Harriet, now the wife of Benjamin Vaughan, of Cam- bridge, was born in November, 1838. Subsequently were born three daughters: Julia, and Lucy, who died in infancy, and Mary, now the widow of the late Dr. William Canfield Spencer, U. 8. A. (grandson of the late Chief Justice Spencer, of New York), and two sons: Henry, who died in 1861, and Harold, at present an attorney-at-law, residing in Phila- delphia. . Another witness of this home life at Bowdoin describes it as ‘‘simple, unconventional, orderly, refined, and Christian.” Mr. Goodwin, besides his professorship at Bowdoin, held, for fifteen years, the post of Librarian to the College; doubtless a most congenial odice, bringing him into close companionship with the books he loved so well; and tothe College students, who profited by his learning, and by his enlightened power of guidance in their reading and research, offering a priceless boon. Nor were the students the only ones who benefited by “his presence in this capacity. He was making at this time a strong mark in literature by contributions to various reviews, articles upon subjects germane to his chair, or upon the results of his studies in philology and history. That these labors were not exhausting, was due to his power of intense and active exercise of mind without special effort. To his trained powers such writings were recreation. The play of his fancy, the lucidity of his style, and the fullness of his knowledge, which were displayed in these and subsequent papers (a list of which is appended), make one regret that, from the pressure of other avocations, he could not contribute to literature more extensive works. One of his contemporaries in Berwick Academy, who followed his subse- quent career with the deepest interest, and is well qualified to express an opinion on such a subject, says that if he had devoted his attention to philosophical and metaphysical inquiries he would probably have at- tained a fame unexcelled, perhaps unequaled, by any living scholar. The services he rendered in Brunswick to the public schools were con- spicuous. Before the introduction of the graded system in the town, he was a member of the School Board ; and by his efforts the strong opposition to the change from the old methods, involving legal embarrassments, as well as a modification of public opinion, was in great measure overcome, The contest was carried to the Supreme Court, and proving successful there, the issue resulted in great advantage to public education in the State. One who is familiar with this period of his life speaks in terms of hearty admiration of ‘‘his generous and self-sacrificing labors in this cause,”’ During his residence at Brunswick, it was the custom of the members of the Faculty to sally out when a disturbance among the students oc- curred, and personally to arrest offenders. On one of these occasions, Prof. Goodwin was severely injured by a student who threw oil of vitriol into his face, occasioning great suffering, and marking him for life; Merrick. ] 230 [Noy. 7, although, happily, he escaped without permanent injury to his sight. This was not the result of any special animosity against him, but the deal- ing of a blow to the Faculty as a body, against whom the resentment of the attacked students was aimed. The result of this untoward event was an abandonment of the old, undignified method of quelling disturbances, as well as a widespread sympathy for the sufferer, and indignation against the offender. His connection with the Protestant Episcopal Church, of which he after- wards became so distinguished a member, began during this period of his life. He was confirmed in 1842, at Gardiner, Me. ; and this circumstance, coupled with his prominent position in the college at Brunswick, was probably one of the considerations which induced Bishop Henshaw, at that time acting Bishop of Maine, to send there, in 1843, a missionary to establish a church. Mr. Goodwin at once took up the duty assigned him of aiding this missionary in forming a nucleus for a parish ; although, in so doing, he placed himself in apparent antagonism to other religious in- fluences then prominent in the college, and ran counter to the traditions of the place, as well as to correspondingly strong convictions of at least some of his colleagues. They feared the effect upon the-college, of intro- ducing the services of a communion, which was at that time the object of considerable prejudice in the State, and, indeed, in New England. Mr. Goodwin’s character and influence, however, made his advocacy of the new enterprise a tower of strength ; for he was universally loved and respected by Faculty and students. No event of his life displays more clearly the fortitude, the calm and steady principle with which he gave himself to the support of an unpopular movement, and of what seemed at the time a forlorn hope ; and these characteristics are visible throughout his life. In 1847, he was ordained Deacon, and in the following year a Priest of the Church. At length his career at Bowdoin closed, when, in 1853, he was called to become President of Trinity College, at Hartford; acting, also, as one of the Professors, at first, that of Modern Languages, and, subsequently, of Moral and Intellectual Philosophy. His presidency occurred during a difficult crisis in the affairs of the col- lege, the history of which will, perhaps, be hereafter produced. It may, however, be said, that his influence was successfully exerted to raise the standard of its requirements and of its discipline, and to promote clear and honest work among its students. One who was under him in those days (Bishop Niles), referring to the singular majesty of his character and his power of interesting his pupils, says that ‘the has known bright but indolent men look forward with eagerness to the President's recitation hour, in Butler’s Analogy and Whately’s Logic; from which far more was learned than by the study of formal logic under any other man,’’ There was, however, as we are told by the same authority, another side of his character, not less strongly marked, which gave a brilliant lustre to his memory; that ‘ mirthfulness 1890.] 231 [ Merrick. and general enjoyment of what was really bright and clever in literature, in persons, in social and domestic life,’? which made him, in hisown home, the centre of a group of young people, delighting himself and them with witty things of all kinds. With such characteristics, it is easy to believe, that when called to a more prominent position, he carried with him the general and earnest re- grets of Faculty and students at the severance of the tie. While still at Hartford, he was in 1855 honored by his Alma Mater with the degree of D.D. In 1860, he was elected by the Trustees of the University of Pennsyl- vania to be Provost of that Institution, and immediately moved to Phila- delphia, in which city, in West Philadelphia, he resided till his death. The University was at that time housed at Ninth and Chestnut streets, now the site of the post-office, and although venerable in age, was but the germ of its present self. As yet it had only the Collegiate, Medical and Law Department and a very limited staff of professors. Here also his duties were of a mixed character, including besides the government of the Col- lege, a professorship (Intellectual and Moral Philosophy) which brought him into close contact with the students. . Immediately prior to his election, the University had been for some months subsequent to the resignation of Provost Vethake, in temporary charge of the Vice-Provost, the late Prof. John F. Frazer. It had, however, been among the traditions of the University until Pro- vost Vethake’s incumbency, that it should be in charge of a clergyman, and the Trustees, in pursuance of this policy, selected Dr. Goodwin as his successor. His inaugural address marked a new era in the history of the University, and he at once assumed a commanding position in the Faculty and among the undergraduates. The favorable impression then produced, was con- firmed and strengthened, as the daily intercourse of College life showed him to be at once rigorous in the performance of his duty and in exacting the same qualities from the young men under his charge, while they found him kind and genial upon personal contact within and without the College walls. When, in the judgment of the Trustees, it became expedient to enlarge the scope of instruction, by adding to the liberal and classical courses, a scientific department, Dr. Goodwin feared that the change would not prove successful under the conditions then existing ; and this feeling, it is . supposed, influenced him in retiring from his office in 1868, when called upon, to become Dean of the Philadelphia Divinity School. It is the testimony of all who were conversant with the history of the Institution during his eight years’ incumbency, that he produced a lasting and most valuable impression upon the characters of the students, leading them to habits of concentration of mind and of exactness of expression, the influence of which has been of the highest value in their subsequent career. Upon his retirement the University testified its sense of his abilities and learning, by conferring the honorary degree of LL.D. * Merrick.) : 232 [Noy. 7, In 1862, Doctor Goodwin became Professor of Apologetics in the Philadelphia Divinity School, which was organized that year. The title of this chair was changed to Systematic Divinity, in 1865, and so remained, he holding the office till his death. In 1868, upon leaving the University of Pennsylvania, he was made Dean of the Divinity School and retained that position till 1883, when advancing years and somewhat impaired health, coupled with the removal of the Institution to a distance from his home, compelled his withdrawal. For these duties he was preéminently fitted. A record of the events of his life would be most incomplete, without particular mention of his labors in the Church of his love, rendered es- pecially in her councils, both Diocesan and General. Except in one in- stance, St. Gabriel’s, Windsor, Ct., where he remained some three or four years, he never assumed a permanent Rectorship, but was, at intervals, temporarily (sometimes for months together) in charge of parishes. This fact, and his long connection with educational interests, together with his great ecclesiastical learning and power as a debater, were undoubtedly prime factors in making him, for so long a period, a leader in the govern- ing bodies of the Church. As early as 1853, he was sent by the Diocese of Maine to the Triennial General Convention meeting that year. From Pennsylvania he was sent in 1862, to the first Convention held after his removal to that Diocese, and continuously thereafter until that of 1889, the last one previous to his decease ; thus being a member of that august assembly for ten successive sessions. At the same time he was a member of every Annual Diocesan Convention for thirty years. He promptly attained and kept throughout this period in both, a commanding position and leadership in that school of Churchmanship to which his sympathies tended (the Low Church or Evangelical party). And apart from this, his manifest qualifications for the post, caused his election or appointment in both bodies on the ‘‘Committee on Canons,”’ and for many years past, to the chairmanship thereof. As this Committee shapes all legislation, and suppresses a multitude of proposals for revision or change, its chairman- ship demands not only great learning and clearness of conception, with aptitude in debate, but also great conservatism. Al) these qualifications found their realization in Dr. Goodwin. Independently of the duties arising out of these positions, it is probable that few, if any, important measures brought forward in either House, failed to receive his close attention and criticism. Indeed, he suffered no resolution presented to the House to pass, without a close analysis of its phraseology and of its possible results, His support or opposition was always of weight, and in” the Convention of the Diocese it was apt to be decisive. His influence in the Diocese was further conspicuously shown by his long service as Chairman of the Standing Committee, a body which acts as constitutional advisor of the Bishop, and, in his absence, as a substitute, so far as concerns his administrative powers, To attempt an analysis of the character of so remarkable a man, isa OO a es 1890.] 233 (Merrick. task peculiarly difficult ; his qualities were of so varied a nature, and pre- sented strength in such apparently opposite dizections. Irradiating his whole life, was the power of Christian faith. This was, undoubtedly, its dominating influence, the keynote of his nature. Gentle and courteous to a high degree, sympathizing and consolatory to those who were suffer- ing from trial and loss, a lover of children, his heart was womanly in its tenderness. Butin the defense of right, in the attack upon vice, in the public debate upon policy, in the attempt to redress evil, whether in Church or State, he was strong and uncompromising. When measures involving ecclesiastical opinion were under discussion, he was thoroughly alert, quick to point out what he conceived to be weak points in the armor of his opponents, sharp and decisive in piercing them, unwilling to surrender the slightest advantage or to adopt any compromise. In debate ‘‘ he thought upon his feet,’’ and it was wonderful to hear him touch upon some point in a speech or a resolution, to which his attention had just been directed, dilate upon it, unfold all its possibilities, pursue its results to their legitimate end (and sometimes, perhaps, beyond it), until nothing was left of his antagonist or of the obnoxious measure. All this time there would be no hesitation ; every word would be the exact expression of his thought ; the logical process was perfect, the effect over- whelming. Such self-command is rarely seen combined with such learn- ing and logical power. Familiar with many languages, ancient and mod- ern, a close student of their structure and the derivation of their words, these words were his weapons ; the exact scope and weight of each being carefully appraised, their relation to each other as carefully measured. He used them with telling effect, and was quick to point out where others failed to appreciate their true intent. In conversation, this power of his was displayed in quite a different way. A keen humorist, he delighted in word-play, and heartily enjoyed the sallies which resulted from an en- counter of wits. But a perfect knowledge of the qualities of different weapons would be worse than useless, were it not for an enlightened power of selecting and employing them. So the philologist is not necessarily a wise reasoner. Herein, then, lay Dr. Goodwin’s great power in moulding legislation, that possessing such knowledge, his clear and highly trained reasoning powers made him a logician of the highest order. In his speeches there was a singular freedom from an attempt at eloquence or at display. He was not intent on moving the imagination of his hearers, or persuading them to his side; rather to drag them with him by the irresistible force of his reasoning. As an educator, which, after all, was the vocation in which most of his life was passed, one of his former pupils—himself now well advanced in years, and qualified by his own well-earned standing to judge fairly— Rev. ©. C. Everett, says that he possessed in those days two distinctions which contributed to his success. One was that ‘“‘he taught; that was something more rare in those days, in all colleges, than now. His hour Merrick.] 234 [Nov. 7, was crammed full of information. This was chiefly in regard to the deri- vation and affinity of words ; though the beauties and the meaning of the work studied had their place.’? The other distinction was ‘his habit of inviting the students to his house to tea.’’ By this means, adopted in ad- vance of his times, but now happily imitated, he became familiarly known to those committed to his charge, and gave them the advantage of social intercourse. Apropos of this latter custom, it is related of him that, shortly after reaching Hartford, a friend visiting at their house witnessed the following characteristic scene. The door-bell rang about tea-time, and some half- dozen college students arrived. Doctor Goodwin and his wife welcomed them without any sign of surprise. After some delay a hospitable meal appeared and was discussed, followed by a pleasant evening ; both host and hostess exerting themselves to entertain their uninvited visitors. After their departure each looked at the other, but neither was able to explain the visit. The next day the mystery was solved by a call from a delegation of students, who found they had been hoaxed by some of their fellows, and who desired to apologize for the intrusion. Needless to say, the young men were ever after strong friends of the president and his wife. The next invitation given to a set of students, however, was not accepted, they fearing the repetition of the joke upon themselves. In personal appearance, Dr. Goodwin was tall and dignified, with finely- cut features and piercing eyes. The musical tones of his voice linger in one’s memory. In late years, when time had crowned him with silver locks, and the deliberate step of age characterized his movements, his figure was one to command, as it received, the highest reverence. But he never lost a certain vivacity, which awakened at the meeting with his friends. It has been said that Christian faith was the dominating keynote of his nature. None who knew him could fail to recognize the truth of this statement. He was a man of strong piety, in the noblest meaning of that word. Always grave and matured beyond his years, his religious life awakened during the later years of his college days, and steadily ex- panded during all the remaining years of his life, coloring and subduing all of his faculties, consecrating all his ‘attainments to the service of his divine Master. His light shone more brightly as the darkness of waning years gathered around his earthly path. And his memory must remain, like a beacon, to those who knew him, an evidence of the profound truth and power of Christianity. An examination of the list of his writings, to which allusion has been made, will show the versatility of his attainments, as well as the active interest he always took in those questions of the day, which, in his view, would affect injuriously the cause of Christian truth. This list covers only those speeches which were reprinted separately. To appreciate his activity in this respect, one must look through the journals of the Eccle- siastical Conventions of which he was a member, the pages of which are —— i 1890.] 235 . [Merrick. crowded with evidences of his incessant participation in debate. Other articles and works are upon questions of ethics, religion, history, ethnol- ogy, philology, politics, science, statesmanship, etc., besides numerous addresses before Church congresses, college alumni, and discussions of questions relating to the polity and services of the Church, and, in addi- tion to all these, a great body of sermons. Dr. Goodwin suffered greatly at times, during the latter part of his life, from insomnia. From this, however, he measurably recovered, and his death, after a brief attack of partial paralysis, came most unexpectedly. On the fifteenth day of March, 1890, he passed away, leaving a gap which, in society and in the Church, cannot soon be filled, and an _enduring and grateful memory in the community, for his eminent services in the cause of religion, and good learning. His epitaph may fitly be written in words of his own choice : ‘*A servant of Jesus Christ, and for Him a teacher of men.”’ He was laid to rest in Woodlands Cemetery by the side-of his beloved wife, whose death a few years earlier had closed upon earth a companion- ship which had endured for forty-six years; and was followed to the grave by the Bishop of the Diocese and a large body of his fellow-clergy, as well as by a multitude of friends and others distinguished in every walk in life. The resolutions of affectionate regard which were adopted by the former, are appended, together with those of the Standing Commit- tee of Pennsylvania. Besides his membership in the American Philosophical Society, to which he was elected early in 1861, he was a member of the Historical Societies of Maine and Pennsylvania, the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, and the American Oriental Society ; and the first President of the Society of Biblical Literature and Exegesis. APPENDIX A. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE REV. D. R. GOODWIN, D.D., LL.D. 1. “‘On the Nature and Effects of Emulation ;’’ Am. Quart. Register, Aug., 1832 (see bound vols. of Register); pp. 7. 2. ‘On the Worth and Care of the Soul ;’’ Abbott’s Rel. Magazine, Dec., 1833 ; pp. 4. 3. ‘‘Review of Upham on the Will;’’ Biblical Repository, April, 1836; pp. 33. 4. ‘‘On Radical Opinions ;’’ Literary and Theol. Review, June, 1836 (3 and 4 bound in a volume of pamphlets labelled ‘Theol. Review, Vol. I’’). 5. ‘On Religious Ultraism ;’’ Literary and Theol. Review, March, 1836; pp. 10. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XXVIII. 184, 2k. PRINTED JAN. 12, 1891. Merrick.] 236 [Nov. 7, 6. 27. . Memoir of John Merrick, Esq.; for the Maine Hist. Soc., with Appen- 29. **On the Philosophy of History ;’”’ Methodist Quarterly Review, July, 1842; pp. 38. . **The Times, Character and Political System of Machiavelli ;’’ Bibli- oth. Sac., Feb., 1846; pp. 44. . “Civilization, American and European ;’’ Am. Whig Review, June and July, 1846 ; (in columns) pp. 60. . On Capital Punishment ;’’ Bibliotheca Sacra, May and Aug., 1847; pp. 90. . ‘*Fowler’s Grammar ;’’ N. Am. Review, Oct., 1851; pp. 37. . ‘Unity of Language and of Man ;’”’ N. Am. Review, July, 1851; pp. 28. . **Harrison’s English Language ;’’ Bib. Sac., Oct., 1851; pp. 22. . ‘Resurrection of the Body ;’”’ Bib. Sac., J 1852; pp. 26. . Latham’s English Language ;’’ N. Am. Review, Jan., 1852; pp. 23. . ‘*Mackay’s Progress of the Intellect;’’ N. Am. Review, July, 1852; pp. 48. . **Ethnology and the Scriptures;’’ Prot. Epis. Quarterly, July and Oct., 1855; pp. 58. . “Nott and Gliddon, Types of Mankind;’’ Church Review, Jan. and April, 1855; pp. 60. . “Sawyer’s New Testament ;’’ Am. Theol. Review, May, 1859; pp. 9. . ‘‘Sawyer’s New Testament ;’’ Church Review, April, 1859; pp. 28. . “Cabell’s Unity of Mankind;’? Am. Theol. Review, May, 1859; pp. 10. . ‘*Grant’s Ethics of Aristotle ;’?’ Am. Theol. Review, Feb., 1860 (for copy, see Series of the Review). . Address at the Dedication of the Free Academy at Norwich, Conn., 1856; pp. 6. . Sermon at New Haven: ‘Christianity neither Ascetic nor Fanatic ;” 1858; pp. 15. . Sermon at Middletown: ‘The Christian Ministry,’’ and an extract from the same; May, 1860; pp. 21. . “Darwin on Species ;’ Am. Theol. Review, May, 1860; pp. 18. . Inaugural Address as Provost of the University of Pennsylvania ; Sept., 1860; pp. 22. ‘Powell on the Evidences ;’’ Am. Theol. Review, July, 1861; pp. 19. dix, Jan., 1862; pp. 40. ‘Religious Education in Colleges ;’’ Ani. Theol. Review, April, 1862; pp. 10. . Speech in the Prot. Epis, General Convention, in reply to Dr. Hawks, Dr. Mahan and others, Oct, 14, 1862; pp. 85. 31. 82, 33. 34. 85. 1890.] 237 (Merrick. *‘Review of Bp. Colenso’s Part I on the Pentateuch, and of Dr. Mahan’s Answer ;’’ Am. Presb. Theol. Review, April, 1863; pp. 36. ‘‘Review of Bp. Colenso’s Part II;’’ Am. Presb. Theol. Review, July, 1863; pp. 15. “The Antiquity of Man. Review of Lyell’s Geol. Evidences of, etc. ; Am. Presb. Theol. Review, April, 1864; pp. 26. Obituary Notice of Pres’t Hitchcock for Am. Phil. Soc., Nov., 1864 ; pp. 7. **Southern Slavery in its Present Aspects :’’ containing a Reply to a late work of the Bishop of Vermont on Slavery ; Oct., 1864; Lip- pincott and Co., 12mo, pp. 343. . Discourse Commemorative of Rev. Dr. John A. Vaughan, Oct., 1865; pp. 38. . ‘Hints on Historical Reading ;’’ N. Y. Ledger, June 8, 1867; pp. 5. . Sermon on “‘Perpetuity of the Sabbath,” 1867 ; pp. 64. Sermon on Ritualism: ‘‘Shall we Return to Rome?” 1867 ; pp. 33. . Tract on ‘‘The Division of Dioceses, by a Presbyter,’’ 1868 ; pp. 16. . Article on ‘Spiritualism os. Christianity ;’’ Penn Monthly, March, 1870; pp. 7. . Article on ‘‘The Supreme Court of the United States;’’ Penn Monthly, May, 1870; pp. 12. . Article on ‘‘ Resurrection,” in Smith’s Bib. Dictionary, Am. Ed., 1867- 70 (written in 1869); 23 cols. 44. ‘‘Memoir of 8. V. Merrick,” read before the Am. Phil. Soc., Dec. 16, 1870; pp. 13. . Letter on ‘‘Italian Unity,’’ read at the New York Meeting, Jan. 12, 1871 (see Vol. Report); pp. 6. . ‘‘Huxley’s Writings’’ (Lay Sermons, etc.); Am. Presb. and Theol. Re- view, April, 1871; pp. 32. . An Anonymous Article, Dec., 1871; pp. 26. . “Archbishop Laud,’’’ ‘‘Leo the Isaurian’’ and ‘‘ Lactantius,’”’ in Me- Clintock and Strong’s Cyclopedia of Theol. and Eccles. Lit., 1872; 20 cols. . An Anonymous Article, Dec., 1872; pp. 69. . ‘The Cosmical Effects of Adam’s Fall ;’’ Penn Monthly for March, 1873 ; pp. 18. . Address before the Alumni of Bowdoin College, July 8, 1873; pp. 26. . An Anonymous Article, Sept., 1873; pp. 13. . Deposition in the Calkins vs. Cheney Case, Oct., 1873; pp. 75. . Paper presented to the Evangelical Alliance, New York, Oct., 1873 ; 10 cols. Merrick.] 238 LNov. 7, 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 71. 72. 77. An Anonymous Article, Nov., 1873; pp. 103. Articles in Hvening Bulletin on ‘‘The New Constitution of Pennsyl- vania,’’ Dec., 1873; pp. 10. Another Anonymous Article, Jan. 24, 1874; pp. 9. Another Anonymous Article, 1874. (Printed, not published) ‘‘Apologetics or Evidences of Christianity,’’ a Syllabus of Lectures, May, 1874; pp. 56. (Printed, not published) ‘‘Canon, Inspiration and Sufficiency of Holy Scriptures,” a syllabus, May, 1874; pp. 43. (Printed, not published) Syllabus of Lectures on ‘‘Systematic Divin- ity,’’ Feb., 1875; pp. 190. . Speech before the Second Church Congress, Nov., 1875 ; pp. 5. . ‘Reciprocal Influence of Christianity and Liberty’? (No. 54 com- pleted), Ch. Rev., July, 1876; pp. 16. . Prepared Anonymously, a volume of Essays, May, 1877; pp. 448. . “The Church and Common Schools,’’ (a tract) Nov., 1877 ; pp. 4. . Speech before the Fifth Church Congress, Oct., 1878 ; 2 cols. . Paper read before Fifth Church Congress, Oct., 1878 ; 20 cols. . ‘*Dogmatic Standards,”’ article in Ch. Rev., Oct., 1878; pp. 20. . Review of Dr. Shield’s ‘‘ Final Philosophy”’ in The Churchman, Jan. 12, 1878; 6 cols. . “The New Ritualistic Divinity neither the Religion of the Bible and Prayer Book nor of the Holy Catholic Church; being a Defense of - the Protestant Episcopal Church in Pennsylvania against the attack of Henry Flanders, Esq., of the Philadelphia Bar,’’ Jan. 6, 1879; pp. 101; ditto Second Edition, April 25, 1879, with an Appendix of 35 pp. «‘The Presbyter’s Reply to the Priest’s Letter,’’ Feb, 14, 1879; pp. 10. Notes of the Investigation by the Bishop and Standing Committee in reference to certain practices at St. Clement’s Church, May, 1880; pp. 47, . Address at Seventh Church Congress on ‘‘The New Revision of the New Testament,’* Oct., 1881 ; pp. 4. . Address at Seventh Church Congress on ‘The Relation of Parishes | to the Diocese and of the Dioceses to the General Convention,’’ etc., Oct., 1881; pp. 3. . “The Ministry We Need,’’ An Address, etc., Nov., 1881; pp. 11. 76. “On the use of 39 and kapdta and of guy7 and xyfvza and connected words, in the Sacred Writings ;'’ Journal of Soc. of Bib. Lit. and Exegesis, June and Dec., 1881; pp. 20. : ‘*Memorial Discourse on Henry W. Longfellow before the Alumni of Bowdoin College,’’ July 12, 1882; pp. 30, 1890,] 239 (Merrick, 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95 . 96. **In Memoriam, John Cotton Smith ;’ Bowdoin Orient, May, 1882; 8 cols. ° «““Notes on the Late Revision of the New Testament Version ;’’ Whit- taker, N. Y., Sept., 1883; 8vo, pp. 212. ‘Reminiscences of Longfellow ;’’ Bowdoin Orient, Feb. 27, 1885; p. 1. ‘Christian Eschatology ’’ Phila., Easter-tide, 1885; pp. 79. Two Articles in The Church, in defense of do., April, 1885; 8 cols. Letter to Washington Bowdoin Alumni; Bowdoin Orient, March, 1886 ; 2 cols. Eight Articles in The Church on ‘‘The Atonement,’’ Nov. 29, 1885, to Jan, 16, 1886. ‘“‘Some Thoughts on the ‘Atonement,”” Pamphlet Pub. by Ev. Ed. Soc. Phila., 1887 (A second edition and enlargement of the ‘‘ Eight Articles’’ above); pp. 59. ‘A Lenten Meditation,’’ in the Church Magazine, April, 1886. . “Note on the use of dz¢p in the New Testament ;’’ Exeg. Soc. Journal, 1885 ; pp. 2. . ‘Note on the use of «a/ in Heb. x. 38 ;’’ Exeg. Soc. Journal, 1885; pp. 2. . Notes on Zay py Gal. ii. 16; tponis dxoakiacya Jas. i. 17; and Oedv vids Matt, xxvii. 54 and Mark xv. 39; Journal Exeg. Soc., June, 1886 ; pp. 8. ‘‘Notes on the Revised Translation of Matt. xvii. 9, compared with Mark ix. 9; Luke ii. 2; xix. 14; John xii, 4; Acts i. 25; ii. 2; ii, 47; Journal Exeg. Soc., June, 1887; pp. 2. ‘Note on the Polarity of Prepositions ;’’ Journal of the Exegetical Society, Dec., 1887; pp. 3. “Note on mdvteg dv and 7yyit¢ in I Cor. xv. 51 and 52;”’ Journal Exe- getical Society, 1888. “On ‘Again’ in the Apostles’ Creed ;’’ in The Church, March 26, 1887 ; 8 cols. Article on “Separate Missionary Jurisdictions for Colored People in Certain Dioceses,’”’ in Southern Churchman, Sept. 20, 1888 ; 24 cols. Article on “This Church’’ and ‘‘other Denominations’’ in the Canons; Standard of the Cross and the Church, Jan. 5, 1889; 14 col. Four articles on the ‘‘Change of Name”’ of our Church in The Stand- ard and The Church, Jan. 19, Feb. 2, 9, 16, 1889. Ditto, in a Pamphlet entitled ‘‘Shall the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States of America cease to exist?’’ published by the Evangelical Ed. Society, 5000 copies, May, 1889; pp. 36. Speech in the General Convention, Oct., 1889, on ‘‘ Proportional Rep- resentation in the House of Deputies,’’ with a note appended, in The Standard of the Cross and the Church, Nov. 16, 1889; 4 cols., == 12 pp. Merrick.] 240 [Nov. 7; APPENDIX B. MEMORIAL ADOPTED BY THE CLERGY. The Clergy of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the Diocese of Penn- sylvania, called together by the recent death of the Reverend Doctor Daniel R. Goodwin, desire to place on record the following minute con- cerning their departed brother : Dr. Goodwin’s long and faithful service here made him, perhaps, the most conspicuous figure among us. His great ability, his ripe scholarship, the wide extent, indeed, and the minute accuracy of his knowledge, his quick perception, his readiness in debate, the power of his reasoning, and his unflinching courage in the maintenance of his own conscientious con- victions were readily recognized by all who knew him. There were, how- ever, other traits of his character which, possibly, more than his vigorous intellect, his rare learning, and his logical power, endeared him to his friends. For, in union with these qualities, there was in him a wonderful degree of gentleness and tenderness. No one had a keener sympathy with those in sorrow ; no one a more wonderful power of adapting him- self to their spiritual needs. His words to the sick and suffering, always happily chosen, were full of grace and consolation. They who were recipients of his ministry of mercy can never forget it. His rare judgment was never better tested than when he came into the seclusion of the sick- room to bring the comforts of religion. His fine mental powers, cultivated by long years of faithful and earnest study, shone at their brightest where the world is too apt least to esteem them. They whose privilege it is to have known him in his home-life—to have witnessed his affection for his friends, his gentle kindliness to little chil- dren, his fine courtesy, his deep love for those bound to him by tenderest ties, and his genuine humility—well know how large an element in his true greatness was found there. As his days drew towards their close (and, thank God, with unabated intellectual power on his part), it may without exaggeration be said of him that his spiritual nature seemed to be ripening more and more for the peaceful rest of the blessed. True to his friends, true to his country—grandly so in her years of peril —valiant for the truth as it presented itself to his mind and his heart, long must his memory be cherished by all who have learned from him to prize what is best and noblest in the pursuits of life. APPENDIX O, MEMORIAL ADOPTED BY THE STANDING COMMITTEE OF PENNSYLVANIA. Ata meeting of the Standing Committee, held April 1, 1890, the follow- ing minute was adopted : In the death of the Rey. Dr. Goodwin the Church has lost one of her 1890.] 241 [Merrick, brightest ornaments, Theological Learning one of its most efficient up- holders, and Religion one of its ablest defenders. Were this the opportu- nity, we might expatiate on each of these relations in which our departed friend and brother held so conspicuous a place. It will fall to the lot of others to do him justice in these particulars. It is ours rather to speak of him in connection with his membership for so many years in this body, and for most of the time its presiding officer. To say that he presided with uniform courtesy and intelligence would be saying but little. He was our authority in all matters pertaining to ecclesiastical law, and his was the acute mind which was ever ready to untie knotty questions. The adequacy of his learning was but rarely, if ever, at fault, and the lucid- ness and cogency of his reasonings in almost all instances, if not in all, admitted as conclusive. We shall greatly miss him here, as elsewhere in the Church. He was always, in her deliberative assemblies, a master of sentences, a mine of learning, a logical force that elicited the admiration ofall. Long will he be remembered for all these high qualities by those who, in such assemblies, listened to his voice, the voice that, alas, for us, is now hushed in death. We, too, will remember him for all that ; and not less, for his devoutness in worship, his genialness in social converse, his consistency of Christian living, his honor for his high calling, and his untiring industry and inex- haustible patience in the discharge of every duty devolving on him in the various departments of effort in which he was called to exercise his emi- nent abilities. We thank God for all that He made him to be, and for all that, being‘what he was, he did for the cause of religion in the Church, and of good learning and right thinking and acting in the world. He will take his place assuredly for long continuance in the memory of the Church, and especially the Church in this Diocese, of which he was so able and devoted a minister. Brinton. 249 eka Note on the Puquina Language of Peru. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 21, 1890.) When the monarchy of ancient Peru, extending nearly two thousand miles along the Pacific coast, succumbed to the Spanish soldiery, it was found to be peopled by diverse tribes, speaking many dialects. ‘These, however, belonged to but a few linguistic stocks, and both the missionaries and civil functionaries soon came to recognize three or four tongues, as ‘‘ general-languages,’’ /enguas generales, throughout this wide area. In an official report dated in 1582, these were spoken of as three in number, the Kechua, the Aymara, and the Puguina.* The learned missionary, Father Gero- nimo de Ore, writing a few years later, makes the number four, adding the Yunca to the three already given. We havea very fair knowledge, by means of grammars and vo- cabularies, of the Kechua, the Aymara, and the Yunca; but up to the present time have had practically no information about the Pu- quina. The only specimen of it in modern treatises is the Lord’s Prayer, printed by Hervas, in his Saggéo Pratico, and copied by Adelung in the AZthridates.| On this specimen Hervas based the opinion that the Puquina was radically different from any other known American tongue. Mr. Clement L. Markham, on the other hand, denied this, and pronounced the Puquina ‘‘a very rude dia- lect of the Lupaca,’’ and a member of the same linguistic stock as the Kechua.{ The editors of the A@ithridates seemed to incline to this view, as they laid stress on some similarities to the Aymara dia- lects (of which the Lupaca is one). Von Tschudi also adopts it in his learned work on the Kechua.§ None of these authorities had any other material to go upon than the Pater Noster referred to. They speak of it as the only known specimen of the tongue. Hervas credits it to a work of Geronimo de Ore, the missionary already mentioned, which it is evident that neither he nor any other of the writers named had ever seen. This work is the Rituale seu Manuale Peruanum, published at Naples in * Relaciones Geograficas de Indias, Peru, Tome 1, p. 82 (Madrid, 1881). + Mithricates, Theil ili, Abth, 11, 8, 548-550, { Markham, ln Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, 1871, p. 805. iJ. J. von Tschudi, Organtemus der Kelechua Sprache, 8. 76 (Leipzig, 1884). 1890.] 248 [Brinton. 1607. It is indeed rare, but there is a copy in the BidHothéque Nationale at Paris, which I recently consulted. It contains not only the Pater Woster, but thirty odd pages in the Puquina tongue, and presents a veritable mine of texts for any one to work out a satisfactory presentation of the idiom. That is not my intention, but merely to call attention to this valuable source of knowledge in the hope that some of the many able French students of linguistics will give us such an analysis of these texts as, for instance, M. Raoul de la Grasserie has accomplished for the Timucua. The source of De Ore’s information appears to be the remarkable work of Father Alonso de Barcena, Lexica et precepta grammatica tn quingue Indorum linguis quarum usus per Americam australem, said to have been printed at Lima in 1590, but of which not a sin- gle copy is known as extant. Ore expressly states that the Puquina version of the Doctrina Christiana which he publishes is according to the translation of *‘ P. Alonso de Barzana, jesuita.’’ In addition to the Docirina, he inserts a Puquina translation of the Sacraments of Baptism, the Eucharist, the Creed, various exhortations, etc. These are accompanied by renderings in Spanish or Latin, and also into the Kechua and Aymara, so that the similarities and differences of the three tongues are clearly shown. At the time of Barcena’s mission, the Puquina was spoken on various islands in Lake Titicaca, in the neighborhood of Pucarani and in several villages of the diocese of Lima. Bastian quotes Oliva as averring that it was also current on the Pacific coast, in the extreme north-west of Peru, near Lambayeque; but I should hesi- tate to credit this without better evidence. ‘Ihe Titicacan tribe who made use of it was called Uros or Ochozomas. According to the authorities they were extremely low in culture, shy and dull. Acosta says of them that they were so brutish that they did not even claim to be men, but only animals.* Garcilasso de la Vega calls them rude and stupid.t Alcedo, writing in the latter half of the last century, calls them Aunos, and adds that formerly they lived in great misery and degradation on’ the islands in the lake, but had against their will been removed to the mainland, where they dwelt * * “Son estos Uros tan brutales que ellos mismos no se tienen por hombres. Cuentase dellos que preguntadolos que gente eran, respondieron que ellos no eran hombres sino Uros, como si fuera otro genero de animales’’ (Acosta, Hist. de las Indias, p. 62), +“ Los Indios Puquinas * * * que son rudosy torpes” (Comentarios Reales de los » Incas, Lib. vii, cap. iv). PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XXVIII. 134. 2F. PRINTED JAN. 14, 1891. Brinton J 244 [Nov. 21, in dark caves and holes in the ground, covered with reeds, and gain- ing a subsistence by fishing.* They are described as very jealous about their language and un- willing that any foreigner should learn it. As they all spoke more or less Kechua, their religious exercises and necessary communica- tions with the authorities were carried on in that tongue—which will explain the presence of a number of words appropriate to such relations in their own idiom. The entire dissimilarity of the Puquina to both Kechua and Aymara is forcibly shown by a comparison of the numerals. Kechua. Aymara. Puquina. Tt. pac: mayni pesc 2. iscay pani so 3. quimsa quimsa capa 4. tahua pusi sper 5. pichka pisca “ tacpa 6. soccta chocta chichun 7. canchis pa-callco stu 8. pusace quimsa-callco quina g. iscon Nalla-tunca checa 1o. chunca- tunca scata In these lists, three of the Aymara numerals, 1, 2, and 4, are in- dependent ; four of them, 3, 5, 6, and ro, are taken from the Ke- chua; and the remaining three are compounds, fa-cadlco being z+53 guimsa callce,3+5, and dalla tunca meaning “ next to ten’’ or ‘‘less than ten.’’ Ca//co is derived from the word for ‘* foot,’’ the counting being with the toes. On the other hand, there is nota single numeral of the Puquina which can be taken from either Kechua or Aymara, and, what is more singular, there is apparently not one which is compounded. To illustrate the general appearance of the language, I shall give some extracts from De Ore’s work, presenting the versions in the other /enguas generales for the sake of comparison. The Sacrament of Baptism. P. Quid fertes ad ecclesiam, virum aut mulierem ? kh. Virum, P. Quid petit ab Ecclesia Dei? * Alcedo, Dicctonarlo Geograficc-Historico de las Indias, 8. ¥. Chucuito, 1 1890.) 245 [Brinton. R. Fidem. P. Fides quid ei praestabit ? k. Vitam aeternam. Aymara: P. Cuna huahuapi yglesiaro apanita ; yocallati, ymillacha ? Rk. Yocallahua. P. Diosna yglesiapata cunapi maysi ? kk. Fé Diossaro yassafiassa. P. Fé Diossaro yassafiassa cunapi churani ? k. Vifiaya hacafiahua, Puquina: P. Quifi toopi, raago ayay, ynque atagoy ayay ? R. Raago. P. Quifi hatai Diosn Yglesia huananac ? Rk. Fé Dioshua cu hanchano. P. Fé Dioshua cuhans anosc, quifi hi yegue ? kk. Vifiaya cumano (p. 63). [Vita eterna is given in Quichua as Vittay caugaytam, so the Vinaya of the Aymara and Puquina is probably Kechua. } Jn Puquina: Quid petit ?—quifi hatai? Quid petunt ?—quifi hatanuy ? From the Sacrament of the Eucharist. In Puquina: Span. Jesu Cristo, hijo de Dios. Pug. Jesu Cristo, Dios chuscu. Sp. Quien es Jesu Christo ? Puq. Nuy Iesu Christox ? Sp. Es verdadero Dios y verdadero hombre. (?) ° Puq. Iesu Christo, checa Dios, checa miifi. (Kech. Iesu Christo, checan Dios, checan runam.) Puq. uses the expression Capac Iesu Cristé = Kechua, Capac, sefior. P. Porque no reciben este Sacramento todos los Indios ? RK. Porque muchos dellos, auque estan ya Baptizados, adoran las huacas, y Idolos, como en tiempo de su gentilidad; y - Brinton.] 246 [Nov. 21, no queriendo saber la ley de Dios, viven como gentiles, y be- viendo con destemplanza, se emleriagan muchas vezes, y tienen enemistad los unos con los otros, y no estan en paz, usurpan la hazienda agena, sin quererla restituir, y por otros muchos vicios que tienen, les prohiben que no comul- guen, y assi no reciben la Communion. Kechua : R. Huaquin cunaca, naupahinatac (fia baptizasca caspapas) hu- accancunacta, inti, quillacta, coyllorcunacta, orcocunac- tapas muchascanmanta: Diospa simintapas, mana chay cama yachayta munaspa, pampa caucascan mantahuan, hu- achuc cascanmanta, runa macintin checninacuc, mana allipi purictac ; hucpa yma haycanta harcapuc, hiticapuc, mana copuyta munaspa; yma haycca huchactapas huc_hallicus- canmanta, ama comulgancachu, fiiscam, mana chazquin- cuchu. Aymara: Rk. Yacapanacaca, baptizata cancassinsa, huaccanaca, inti, pacsi, huara huara, collonacasa, nayra hama hampathiri cancata- pata ; Diosna aropasa hani uca cama yatifia munasina, pam- pa hacata pampi, huatuca cancatapata, haque macipampi checnissiri, yancana ¢ariri. maynina cunacauquisa harquiri, huaccaychasiri, hani ucaniro cutiyana munasina ; cuna cau- qui huchampisa huchallissitapata, hani comulganiti, satapi, hani catupisquiti. Puquina: R. Huaquin a mifis ehe peogunha baptizaso samp, chu ufia co acoa, inti, uque, chinacuna, chatallata hamp upallisoch, Dios hors hamp, apa cogama siscano hatarahua, pampaca quichcasochin, chu ufi atago roguesach ; chu ufi mih mati- pura checniscanunch, entot quichgueno ; mifi quifi harqueno vatiqueno ; apaeheguina, eno hatarava; quifi hinanti hu- challicuscaso hamp, ama comulgascaquinch, a sos apa ytinunch, Spanish: Creeis en Dios Padre, todd poderoso, creador del cielo, y de la tierra, de las cosas visibles y invisibles ? R. Yocreo, - 1890.] 247 [Brinton. Kechua: P. Y, fiin quichu Dios yaya, llapa atipacman, hanac pachap, cay pachap, ricuricpa, mana ricuricpa, ruraquenman ? R. Y fiinim. Aymara: P. Ya, stati, mayni capaqui Dios Auqui, taque atipiriro, harac pachana, aca pachana, ufiatanacana, hani ufiatanacansa lu- ririparo? Rk. Ya satapi. Puquina: P. Cuhafiapi Dios yqui vin atipeno guttac, hanigo pacas, hopa- cas, co hanquench, appa cohanquench, callaquenoguta ? R. Cuhafiequench. Spanish : As adorado huacas, villcas, cerros, rios, el Sol, y otra cora? Kechua: Huacacta, villcacta, orcocunacta, mayucta, ymaymana cunacta huampas muchacchu canqui ? Aymara: Huaccanaca, villcanaca, collonaca, hauirinaca, inti, pacsi, yac- capa cuna cauquisa hampa thiritati ? Puquina: Vpallinoui chatallata, coa, chacar, cachia, paragara, pachamama, inti, vin quifieno hamp ? I add the Pater Noster, as the copies in Hervas and the M/thri- dates are defective in accurracy of proof-reading. Pater Noster in Puquina. Sefi yqui, hanigo pacas cunana ascheno, po mana vpallisuhanta ; po capaca aschano sefi guta huachunta, po hatano callacaso _ hanta, quiguri hanigopa casna ehe cahu cohuacasna hamp ; Kaa gamenque ehehesuma. Sefi guta camen sefi tanta, sefi hochaghe, pampaehe sumao, quiguri sefi, sefi guta hucha- chasqueno gata pampachanganch cagu. Ama éhe acro- suma huchaguta sefi hotonsua enahata entonana quespina sumau. Amen. 248 [Nov. 7, It is obvious on a superficial examination that there are a number of verbal analogies, probably loan-words, to both Aymara and Kechua. Such are inf, sun; mocna, pl., moccon, hand, allied to Kechua magut, etc. The negative is ama, as: Thou shalt not kill; ama hallanagueuanch. Thou shalt not commit adultery ; ama suaguepanch. This is also a negative adverb in Kechua. The plural is formed by various changes of the termination, as: Man (homo), mini, pl., mits ; as ‘*many men,” hoaguina mins ; ‘all men,’ Ainantin mifis ; ‘‘ your mother,’’ pom; ‘ your moth- ers,’’ pomig. os There seems a greater tendency to monosyllabism in the Pu- quina than in either of the other two tongues. Such words as raago, man (vir.); afago, woman; seem to be built up from the roots va and af. ey But as the object of this note is merely to call attention to the material for the study of this language, I shall not pursue these re- flections. ? Norr.—A bout the beginning of June, the Society tempora- rily removed, and stored its collections, library, etc., ete., and vacated its building to enable alterations to be made that would render the same more commodious and fire-proof. The interior was remodeled, the two (southern) meeting rooms thrown into one, as also were the two northern rooms, and a new third story, to contain the books and MSS. of the Society, was added. No meeting was held until November 7, 1890. The Society came together in the new meeting room. Present, 31 members. President, Mr. Frauey, in the Chair. Mr. Robert Patterson Field, a newly elected member, was presented to the Chair, and took his seat. 1890.] 249 Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters accepting membership in the Society from Messrs. George S. Fullerton, Robert P. Field, Heman L. Wayland, Philadelphia; Charles G. Leland, London, Eng. A circular from Mr. A. Strauch, announcing his successor- ship to Mr. C. Vessilosski, as Secretary of the Académie Im- périale des Sciences, St. Petersburg. Circulars from the K, Zoologisch Genootschap Natura Artis Magistra, Amsterdam, announcing the death of Dr. G. F. Wes- terman, and the election of Dr. C. Kerbert as his successor. A circular from the K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Géttingen, requesting Transactions, xiii, 3. A circular from the Société Botanique Bavaroise, Munich, requesting exchanges, A circular from M. Miguel Perez, announcing his successor- ship to Prof. Mariano Barcena, as Directeur of the Observa- torio Meteorolégico Magnético Central, Mexico. Letters from societies responding to the request of the American Philosophical Society for exchanges, were as fol- lows: The Royal Asiatic Society (Straits Branch), Singapore; K. Danske Geografiske Selskab, Copenhagen; Observatorium der K. K. Nautischen Akademie, Triest; K. K. Militiir-Geo- graphische Institut, Wien; Geodiitische Institut, Hydrograph- ische Amt des Reichs-Marine-Amt, Berlin; Verein fiir Erd- kunde, Cassel; K. Siichs. Meteorologische Institut, Chemnitz ; Siebeubergische Verein fiir Naturwissenschaften, Hermann- stadt; Naturwissenschaftliche Verein, Osnabriick; Wiirtem- bergische Verein fiir Handelsgeographie, Stuttgart; Etat In- dépendant du Congo, Bruxelles; Société Neuchateloise de Géographie, Neuchatel; Union Géographique du Nord de la France, Douai; Société de Geographie, Lille; Ministero di Agr. e Commercio Direzione Generale della Statistica, Rome ; Manchester Geographical Society; Belfast Natural History and Philosophical Soqety ; Instituto Meteorologico Nacional de Costa Rica; Direccién General de Estadistica, La Plata. Letters of envoy were received from the Secretary of Mines, 250 [Nov. 7, Melbourne, Australia; Royal Asiatic Society (Straits Branch), Singapore ; Société de Géographie de Finlande, Helsingfors; Université Royale, Lund; Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst, Harlem; Osservatorio Marittimo dell’ i. k. Accademia di Nautica, Trieste; K.Geologische Landesanstalt und Berg- akademie, Prof. F. Reuleaux, Berlin; Wiirtembergische Vier- teljabrshefte fiir Landesgeschichte, Stuttgart; Société de Géog- raphie de Lille; Royal Statistical Society, Meteorological Office, London; Mr. W. Sinclair, Glasgow; Boston Society of Nat- ural History; Department of State, United States Geological Survey, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C.; Public Ledger Family, Philadelphia; Observatorio Nacional, Oficina Meteorolégica Argentina, Cordoba, S. A. Letters of acknowledgment (Transactions, xvi, 3) were re- ceived from the Société Royale de Zoologie,; Amsterdam ; Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst, Harlem; Bataafsch Genootschap der Proefondervendelijke Wijsbegeerte, Rotter- dam; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome; K. Bibliothek, Berlin; Philosophical Society, Cambridge; Royal Society, Royal In- stitution, Royal Astronomical Society, Society of Antiquaries, London; Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford; Royal Society of Edinburgh; Boston Society of Natural History. Letters of acknowledgment were received from Dr. Julius Platamann, Leipzig (127); R. Academia de la Historia, Mad- rid (128, 129, 130); University Library, Cambridge. Eng. - (183); Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford, Eng. (127-183); Uni- versity of Toronto, Canada (99-133, Catalogue, Pts. i-iv, etc.) ; Dr. John M. Maisch, Mrs. Helen Abbott Michael, Philadel- phia (128, 129, ete.); University of Iowa, Iowa City (125, 128, 129); Messrs. Lyman B. Hall (133), John A. Ryder, Ben- jamin Sharp, Philadelphia (128, 129, 182, 183), Acknowledgmeuts (129) were received from Mr. Samuel Davenport, Adelaide, S. Australia; Imperial Academy of Scei- ence, St. Petersburg; Prof. Paul Hunfalvy, Buda-Pesth, Hun- gary; Université Royale, Lund; South African Philosophi- cal Society, Cape Town; Centralblatt fiir Physiologie, Berlin ; Dr. Otto Béhttingk, Leipzig; Academie Royale des Sciences, Lisbon, Portugal. 1890. ] 251 Acknowledgments (130) were received from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; Tokyo Library, Tokyo, Japan; Royal Society of New South Wales, Sydney; Imperial Acad- emy of Science, St. Petersburg; Université Royale, Lund ; Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst, Harlem, Netherlands ; Société Entomologique de Belgique, Bruxelles; Profs. Mat- theus Much, Josef Szombathy, Vienna, Austria; Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft, K. Preuss. Akademie der Wissen- schaften, Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde, Physiologische Gesell- schaft, Berlin; Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Bremen; Ver- ein fiir Thiiringische Geschichte und Altertumskunde, Jena ; Dr. Otto Béhtlingk, Leipzig; K.Sternwarte, Miinchen; Verein fiir Naturkunde, Offenbach a. Main; Dr. C. A. Dohrn, Stettin ; Marquis Antonio De Gregorio, Palermo, Sicily; R. Accademia di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti, Padova; R. Accademia dei Lincei, R. Comitato Geologico d'Italia, Prof. Giuseppe Sergi, Rome, R. Osservatorio, Turin; Prof. Claudio Jannet, Prof. Lucien Adam, Rennes, France; Royal Society, Royal Observatory, Mr. James Geikie, Edinburgh, Scotland; Prof. J. P. Postgate, Cambridge, Eng.; Society of Arts, Juhlin Dannfelt, London; Natural History Society, Newcastle-upon-Tyne; Boston So- ciety of Natural History; Messrs. H. D. Gregory, Inman Horner, Philadelphia; Myr. Everard F. im Thurn, British - Guiana; South African Philosophical Society, Cape Town. Letters of acknowledgment (131, 132, 183) were received from the Musée Royale d’Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Bruxelles; K. K. Central-Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und Erd- magnetismus, Drs. Aristides Brezina, Friedrich S. Krauss, Wien; Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes, Alten- burg; Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde, K. Geol. Landesanst. u. Berg- akademie, Berlin; Verein fiir. Erdkunde, Dresden; K. Siichs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Dr. Julius Platzmann, Leip- zig; Verein fiir Geographie und Statistik, Frankfurt a. M.; Verein fiir Naturkunde, Offenbach a. M.; Société d’ Anthro. pologie, Musée Guimet, Messrs. A. Del Cloizeaux, Abel Ho- velacque, Claudio Jannet, E. Levasseur, Paris; Prof. Lucien Adam, Rennes, France; Philosophical Society, Prof. J. P. Post- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxvilr. 184. 2G. PRINTED JAN, 14, 1891. 252 [Nov. 7, gate, Cambridge, Eng.; Mr. Samuel Timmins, Coventry, Eng.; Yorkshire Geological and Paleontological Society, Halifax, Eng.; Society of Antiquaries, Royal Society, Royal Astro- nomical, Statistical, Linnean, Geographical Societies, Royal Institution, Local Government Board, Dr. J. D. Hooker, Lon- don; Natural History Society of Northumberland, ete., New- castle-upon-Tyne ;. Royal Society, Royal Observatory, Prof. J. Geikie, Edinburgh ; Royal Dublin Society ; Nova Scotia In- stitute of Natural Science, Halifax, N.S.; Natural History Society, Montreal, Canada; Mr. Horatio Hale, Clinton, Onta- rio; Geological and Natural History Survey, Ottawa, Canada ; Hon. J. M. Le Moine, Quebec ; Canadian Institute, University of Toronto, Sir Daniel Wilson, Toronto, Canada; Maine His- torical Society, Portland Society of Natural History, Portland, Me.; New Hampshire Historical Society, Concord; Prof. C. H. Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H.; Amherst College Library, Amherst, Mass.; American Staiistical Association, Boston Athenzeum, Massachusetts Historical Society, Public Library, Boston Society of Natural History, State Library of Massa- chusetts, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Dr. Oliver Wendel! Holmes, Hon. Robert C. Winthrop, Boston; Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Harvard College Library, Messrs. Robert N. Toppan, Joseph Lovering, J. D. Whitney, Cam- bridge; Mr. James B. Francis, Lowell, Mass.; Dr. Pliny Earle, Northampton, Mass.; Rev. Edward EK. Hale, Roxbury, Mass. ; Essex Institute, Salem; American Antiquarian Society, Wor- cester, Mass.; Rhode Island Historical Society, Providence ; Franklin Society, Providence, R. I.; Connecticut Historical Society, Hartford; New Haven Colony Historical Society ; New York State Library, Mr. James Hall, Albany; Prof. Walter Le Conte Stevens, Brooklyn; Buffalo Library ; Prof. C.H.F. Peters, Clinton, N. Y.; Profs. J. M. Hart, T, F. Crane, B. G. Wilder, Ithaca, N. Y.; Astor Library, Columbia College, University of the City of New York, New York Hospital, New York Historical Society, Editors of “ The Critic,” Messrs. H, L. Abbot, Joel A. Allen, Daniel Draper, James Douglas, J.S. Newberry, J. J. Stevenson, New York; Oneida Histori- 1890.] 253 cal Society, Utica; Vassar Brothers Institute, Poughkeepsie ; United States Military Academy, West Point; Prof. Henry M. Baird, Yonkers, N. Y.; Messrs. J. F. Garrison, I. C. Mar- tindale, Camden, N. J.; New Jersey Historical Society, New- ark; Profs. C. F. Brackett, C. A. Young, Princeton, N. J.; Dr. Charles B. Dudley, Altoona, Pa.; Mr. M. I. Boyé, Coop- ersburg; Mr. Eckley B. Coxe, Drifton; Drs. Traill Green, J. M. Moore, Thomas C. Porter, Easton; State Library of Pennsylvania, Mr. Andrew 8. McCreath, Harrisburg; Prof. Lyman B. Hall, Haverford; Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown; Linnean Society, Lancaster; Mr. P. F. Rothermel, Linfield ; Franklin Institute, College of Physicians, Pennsylvania Hos- pital, Wagner Free Institute of Science, Messrs. John Ash- hurst, Jr.. W.S. Baker, Cadwalader Biddle, Andrew A. Blair, D. G. Brinton, J. H. Brinton, C. H. Clark, Thomas M. Cleemann, J. Solis Cohen, E. D. Cope, C. 8. Dolley, Patterson Du Bois, Robert Patterson Field, Frederick Fraley, J. C. Fraley, Per- sifor Frazer, George Friebis, Philip OC. Garrett, F. A. Genth, F. A. Genth, Jr., J.S. Harris, Lewis M. Haupt, H. V. Hil- precht, William A. Ingham, Francis Jordan, Jr., G. de B. Keim, J. P. Lesley, A. S. Letchworth, John M. Maisch, Jobn Marshall, James T’. Mitchell, George R. Morehouse, Isaac Norris, Jr., Charles A. Oliver, C. Stuart Patterson, Robert Pat- terson, John S. Packard, C. N. Peirce, William Pepper, Henry Phillips, Jr., Franklin Platt, F. Prime, Theo. D. Rand, T. B. Reed, Robert W. Rogers, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, John A. Ryder, L. A. Scott, Aubrey H. Smith, Albert I. Smyth, George Stuart, W. P. Tatham, I. Clay Trumbull, D. K. Tuttle, William H. Wahl, H. L. Wayland, Talcott Williams, Theo. G. Wormley, Ellis Yarnall, Mrs. Helen Abbott Michael, Phila- delphia; Mr. John F. Carll, Pleasantville; Messrs. P. W.Sheafer, Ileber S. Thompson, Pottsville; Rev. F. A. Miihlenberg, Reading; Mr. M. Fisher Longstreth, Sharon Hill; Philosophi- cal Society, Messrs. Philip Sharples, Washington Townsend, West Chester, Pa.; United States Naval Institute, Annapolis, Md.; Maryland Historical Soviety, Peabody Institute, Mary- land Institute for the Promotion of the Mechanic Arts, Prof. 254 [Nov. 7, William Osler, Baltimore, Md.; Smithsonian Institution, Sur- geon-General’s Office, United States Geological Survey, United States Naval Observatory, Anthropological Society, Messrs. Alexander Graham Bell, A. S. Gatschet, W. J. Hoffman, Thomas Jefferson Lee, Garrick Mallery, M.C. Meigs, C. V. Riley, ' Charles A. Schott, William B. Taylor, Lester F. Ward, Wash- ington, D: C.; West Virginia University, Morgantown, W. Va.; Virginia Historical Society, Richmond; Prof. John W. Mallet, University of Virginia; Dr. Robert Peter, Lexington, Ky.; Georgia Historical Society, Savannah; Prof. Alexander Winchell, Ann Arbor, Mich.; Prof. E. W. Claypole, Akron, O.; Society of Natural History, Cincinnati Observatory, Cin- cinnati,O.; Rev. H. Stafford Osborn, Oxford, O.; Prof. John L. Campbell, Crawfordsville, Ind.; Chicago Historical Society, Chicago, Ill.; State Historical Society of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.; University of lowa, Iowa City; Academy of Natural Sciences, Davenport, Iowa; Kansas Academy of Science, Wash- burn College, Kansas Ilistorical Society, Topeka; Colorado Scientific Society, Denver; University of California, Profs. John Le Conte, Joseph Le Conte, Berkeley; Mr. George R. Babcock, Oakland, Cal.; Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, Riverside, Cal.; Free Public Library, Mr. George Dadidson, San Fran- cisco, Cal.; Sociedad Cientifica “Antonio Alzate,” Mexico; ° Observatorio Astronomico Nacional Mexicano, Tacubaya; Museo Michoacamo, Morelia, Mexico; Bishop Crescencio Car- rillo, Merida, Yucatan; Mr. E. F. im Thurn, British Guiana, Accessions to the Library were received from the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Singapore; Royal So- ciety of South Australia, Adelaide; Royal Geographical Society of Australasia, Secretary of Mines, Melbourne; New Zealand Institute, Wellington; Royal Society of New South Wales; Technical Museum, Sydney; Royal Society of Tasmania; In- stitut Egyptien, Cairo; Société Impériale de Geographie, St. Petersburg; Académi des Sciences, Cracow, Austria; K. Nau- tische Akademie, Triest, Austria; K. K. Geographische Ge- sellschaft, Vienna; Geographische-Commercielle Gesellschaft, Aarau, Switzerland; Geographische Gesellschaft, Naturfor- 1890] 255 schende Gesellschaft, Bern; K. Universitetet, Lund; Physio- logische Gesellschaft, Prof. F. Reuleaux, Berlin; K. Siichs. Al- terthums- Verein, Dresden; Mr. Emile Schwoerer, Colmar, Alsace; Geographische Gesellschaft, Hamburg; Geograph- ische Gesellschaft, Hanover; Deutsche Gesellschaft fiir An- thropologie, etc., Mr. J. E. Weiss, Munich; Mr. W. Grosseteste, Miilhausen, Alsace; Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Osna- bruck; Wiirtembergische Vierteljahrsheft fiir Landesge- schichte, Stuttgart; Société de Geographie, Neuchatel ; So- cieta Africana d'Italia, Naples; Ministero di Agricoltura, In- dustria e Commercio, Rome; Mr. L. M. Billia, Turin; Union Géographique du Nord de la France, Douay, France; Société de Géographie, Lille; Société Languedocienne de Géographie, . Montpellier; Société d’Emulation des Cdtes-du-Nord, St. Brieuc; Instituto y Observatorio de Marina de San Fernando; Royal Geological Society of Cornwall, Eng.; Meteorological Council and Office, Royal Society, Editors of “ Nature,” London; University College, Nottingham, Eng.; Penzance Natural History and Antiquarian Society, Boston Society of Natural History, Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston ; Rhode Island Historical Society, Providence; Wesleyan Uni- versity, Middletown, Conn.; American Chemical Society, ’ New York; New Jersey Historical Society, Newark; Alumni Association of the College of Pharmacy, Publishers of “The Medical News,” Franklin Institute, Library Company of Phila- delphia, Dr. Charles W. Dulles, Philadelphia; War Depart- ment, United States Naval Observatory, Department of Agri- culture, Washington, D. C.; Denison University, Granville, O.; Washington University, St. Louis; Kansas State Libra- rian, Kansas State Historical Society, Topeka; Colorado Col- lege Scientific Society, Colorado Springs; Historical Society of Southern California, Los Angelos; California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco; Bishop Crescencio Carrillo, Merida, Yucatan. An obituary notice of Rev. Daniel R. Goodwin, D.D., was read by J. Vaughan Merrick. The death of Dr, Richard J. Levis, November 11, 1899, zt. 63, was announced. 256 [Nov. 7, The following papers were presented: “ Notes and Descrip- tions of Palzozoic Fishes,” by Dr. E. D. Cope; “On Extinct Genera of Testudinata,” by Dr. George Baur; “On the Mam- malian Genus Palzeosyops,” by Charles Earle. Prof. Harrison Allen made an oral communication on the subject of the affinity of the teeth of rats with those of Eocene mamunals. Dr. J. Cheston Morris referred to a Jate publication by Dr. McLaughlin, of Texas, regarding immunity from disease by carrying out the law of interference, and dilated upon the great prospective aud revolutionary value of the so-claimed discovery, if the same should be verified. New nominations, Nos, 1218, 1214, and 1215, were read. Mr. J. Sergeant Price presented the following report from — the Committee on the Michaux Legacy, with accompanying resolution, which was unanimously adopted : To THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY : The Michaux Committee respectfully reports that at a meeting of the Committee, held on October 28, a note was received from Prof. Heilprin, towards whose expedition to Mexico and Yucatan the Society last Jan- uary appropriated from the Michaux Fund the sum of $200, stating that the officers of the expedition had not been as yet able to complete their report, but it was in progress, and as soon as they had fully determined tle names of the trees and plants from the regions visited by them, and never before reported upun by botanist, a complete report would be made to the Society. A letter was also received from Prof. Rothrock, stating that, owing to the fact that he was about to take a party of scientists to the West Indies in his yacht and spend the winter there, and in the lands to the westward, in making scientific collections, it would be impossible for him to deliver his usual course of lectures under the auspices of the Society, but suggested that itshould appropriate to him out of the Michaux Fund the sum of $300 (the amount given to him each season for said lec- tures) for the purpose of obtaining fresh forestry data and new knowl- edge of forest products and lantern illustrations for future lectures, The Committee fully approved of the suggestion of Prof, Rothrock, and its Chairman, Mr. Meehan, in written endorsement of the application, stated that it is only by the accumulation of facts of a general character bearing on special subjects, that the special subjects themselves can be well un- derstood. That at present we are very much in the dark on the arboreal features and peculiarities of the portions of the Western Continent, outside of the United States, and that he was sure that Prof. Rothrock’s labors -1890.} 257 would greatly enlighten us on the subject, and he was confirmed in his opinion by a letter just received by him from Prof. Krug, of Berlin, call- ‘ing attention to the desirability of more knowledge of West India forestry and vegetation. Announcement was also made to us that Prof. Rothrock had been awarded a medal by the Paris Exhibition for his exhibits of pho- tographs of American forestry, he having been enabled to make a portion of said exhibit by the appropriation of our Society, and in sending them copies of our photographic lantern slides. The Committee submits the following resolution, which it desires shall be passed by the Society : Resolved, That the sum of $300 be appropriated to Prof. Rothrock out of the Michaux fund for the purpose of obtaining fresh forestry data and new photographic lantern slides in his expedition to the West Indies for _ the use in future lectures under the auspices of the Society. By order of the Committee, % J. SERGEANT Price, Secretary. Mr. Price, having read to the Society a letter* from Prof. * Paris, 11 RuE Las Cases, 16th October, 1890. TO THE PRESIDENT OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY OF PHILADELPHIA : Mr. President :—I sent to your address about two months ago, through the Smithsonian Institution, a copy of the last work of our regretted colleague, the late Mr. Auguste Car- lier, entitled ‘‘The American Republic,” in four volumes in octavo, to be offered to the American Philosophical Society. I shall be very much obliged to you if, when this work reaches you, you will acknowl- edge its receipt. I send you, enclosed in this letter, a photograph of Mr. Carlier, in case you do not possess it in your collection. I take advantage of this occasion to send you mine also, I have had the negligence not to send it at the time when the Secretary requested this of the members; but it is time enough to repair that error and also to testify to you the high value I attach to the honor done me by the American Philosophical Society in admitting me in its midst on the presentation of the excellent Mr, Moncure Robinson. You have already been notified by Mr. P. Massion, notary, in Paris, 58 Boulevard Haussmann, and testamentary executor of the late Mr. Carlier, that our regretted friend had left a legacy of twenty thousand franes to the American Philosophical Society. The legacy was entrusted to me, for he named me as his universal legatee, and it should be paid one year after his death by the terms of his will, that is, on the 16th of March, 1891, without interest until then. All the rights of succession payable to the French Treasury are to my expense. The American Philosophical Society, then, will not have to pay any expenses but those of the power of attorney, that it should give to the person whom it will charge to receive this sum in Paris. This power of attorney, made before a notary public in Philadelphia, should be legalized by the French Consul in Philadelphia, and the signature of the said Consul will be in turn certified by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs in Paris. So far as concerns me, I see no other legal steps to ask of the Society. (Of course, it is understood that the first document to produce is a resolution of the Society, at a regular meeting held in conformity with its rules, by which it shall expressly accept the legacy of Mr, Carlier, and give a power of attorney to some one to accept the same in its name in Paris, and at the same time to receive for it this sum.) But as Mr. P. Massion, the testamentary executor, who does not know, asI do, American legislation, migh; 258 [Noy. 7, Claudio Jannet to the President of the American Philosophical Society, stating that our late fellow-member, Auguste Carlier, of Paris, had, by his last will and testament, of which he was the universal legatee, bequeathed to the Society the sum of twenty thousand francs, submitted the following resolutions, which were unanimously adopted : Resolved, That the American Philosophical Society hereby accepts the legacy of twenty thousand francs given to it by the last will and testa- ment of Mr. Auguste Carlier, late of Paris, France. Resolved, That a power of attorney be executed by the President, under the corporate seal of the Society, attested by the Secretary, appointing: —— ——,, of Paris, as its attorney in fact, and authorizing and empower- - ing him, in its name, in Paris, to accept for it the legacy of twenty thou- sand francs given to it by the last will and testament of Auguste Carlier, of Paris, and to give to P. Massion, notary in Paris, 58 Boulevard Hauss- mann, his testamentary executor, or to any one else authorized to pay said legacy, a full and complete receipt and discharge therefor as fully as if given by the Society itself. The President called to the attention of the Society the pro- visions of the will of the late Col. F. M. Etting, under which the Society has certain interests, and stated that during its recess he had requested Mr. Price, a member of the Philadel- phia bar, to represent the Society in the matter. Mr. Price explained the legal status of the case, and stated no bond was necessary to indemnify the executors; that an issue was now pending to determine the validity of the will, and that the Society had no real concern with the same. Mr. Tatham moved that the action of the Treasurer, in de- clining to give any security to indemnify the executors, be approved, Dr. Morris offered as an amendment that “the action of the President in employing Mr. Price as counsel for the Society be have some difficulty, I advise you to put in relation with him the person you will charge with receiving this sum about a couple of months before the 15th of March, 1891, so that, if it became necessary, Mr, Massion would be able to correspond with you, and you could furnish him with such document as he would judge useful, So that the execution of the legacy that Mr. Carlier has made you, will not be retarded, In waiting for another occasion to correspond with you, believe me, Mr, President, Your very devoted, CLAUDIO JANNET, Professor of Political Economy at the Catholic University of Paris. 1800.) 259 approved, and that he be requested to continue to represent the Society.” The amendment was carried, and the question being put on the motion as amended, was carried. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, November 21, 1890. Present, 18 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Hon. James T. Mitchell, a lately elected member, was pre- sented to the Chair, and took his seat. The resignations of Rev. George Dana Boardman and Mr. George B. Roberts were accepted. Dr. Daniel G. Brinton presented “Notes on the Puquina Language of Peru.” The minutes of the Board of Officers and Council were sub- mitted. Pending nominations, Nos. 1213, 1214, and 1215, and new nomination, No. 1216, were read. | The Committee on Increased Accommodations reported progress. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, December 5, 1890. Present, 14 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters of acknowledgment (131, 1382, 133) were received from the Imperial Academy of Science, Imperial Russian Geo- PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XXVIII. 1384, 2H. PRINTED JAN.14, 1891. 260 [D graphical Society, Comité Geologique de la Russie, Prof. Serge Nikitin, St. Petersburg; K. Zoologisch Genootschap, Natura Artis Magistra, Amsterdam; K. Zoologisch-Botanisch Ge- , nootschap, The Hague, Holland; Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst, Harlem; Prof. C. Leemans, Leiden, Holland; Dr. Friederich Krauss, Vienna; Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Frei- burg, i. B. (131, 183); Verein fiir Thiiringische Geschichte und Alterthumskunde, Jena; “ Le Cosmos,” Marquis de Nadaillac, Paris; Mr. Hamilton A. Hill, Boston, Mass.; Mr. G. F. Dun- ning, Farmington, Conn.; Dr. H. C. Chapman, Philadelphia; — Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires (1380). Société Royale de Géographie d’Anvers, Antwerp, Belgium, was placed on the Society’s exchange list to receive Proceed- ings. A circular was received from the American Chemical So- ciety, New York, announcing the holding of their Second General Meeting, December 30 and 31, 1890. | A communication was received from George Reiter, Cincin- nati, O., announcing a supposed new discovery that water can be raised by suction or atmospheric pressure higher than thirty-four feet, which the Secretaries were instructed to an- swer. A letter from Mr. Robert Patterson, in reference to the Peale collection of stone implements, was referred to the Curators. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Depart- ment of Mines, etc., Wellington, New Zealand; Geographical So- ciety, Tokio; Deutsche Seewarte, Hamburg; Verein fiir Kunst und Alterthum in Oberschwaben, Ulm; Geographische Ge- sellschaft, Miinchen ; Société Royale de Géographie d’ Anvers ; Académie Royale de Belgique, Bruxelles; Prof. L. Riitimeyer, Basel, Switzerland; Ostschweizerische Geogr.-Commere. Ge- sellschaft, St. Gall; Direzione Generale della Statistica, Rome ; Société de Geographie de Lisboa; University of the State of - New York, Albany; Bureau of Statistics of New Jersey ; Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Carlisle, Pa.; Franklin Institute, Dr. Per- sifor Frazer, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Depart- ses 261 ment of State, Washington, D.C.; Academy of Science of St. Louis, Mo.; Colorado Scientific Society, Denver; Sociedad Cientifica “ Antonio Alzate,” Observatorio Astronomico Na- cional de Tacubaya, Mexico. The report of the Treasurer was presented. Pending nominations, Nos. 1213, 1214, 1215, and 1216, were read. Prof. Cope offered the following resolution: Resolved, That the resolution of the Society which requires that papers presented for publication by the Society shall be completed for publica- tion, shall not be construed to require completed drawings for the illustra- tion of such papers. A vote being taken, the resolution was not agreed to. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, December 19, 1890. Present; 19 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. A letter was received from the Rochester Academy of Science requesting exchanges, which was granted. A letter of resignation was received from Mr. Herbert Welsh, Philadelphia, dated December 17, 1890, and the resig- nation accepted. A plaster bust-portrait of Jefferson, for the Society’s Cab- inet, was received from Miss Emily Phillips, Philadelphia. Photographs of the old Bartram Place (mansion, garden, etc.) were received from Dr. J. F. Holt, Philadelphia. Letters of envoy were received from the Deutsche Seewarte, Hamburg; Bureau of Statistics of Labor and Industries, Trenton, N. J.; Rochester Academy of Science, Rochester, ae Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal 262 (Dec. 19, Society of Victoria, Melbourne (128, 180); Institut Egyptien, Cairo (131, 182, 1383); Societas pro Fauna et Flora, Fennica, Helsingfors (131, 152, 183); Prof. Peter R. v. Tunner, Leoben, Styria (131, 182, 183); Profs. Friedrich Miiller, Dionys Stur, Edward Suess, Vienna (130, 181, 182, 133); Deutsche Geolo- gische Gesellschaft, Berlin (181, 182, 133); Geographische Gesellschaft, Hannover, Prussia (181, 182, 183); Prof. Dr. Diimischen, Strassburg, Alsace (180, 181, 182, 188); Prof. Dr. C. L. Riitimeyer, Basle, Switzerland (181, 182, 183); Schweiz. Naturforsch. Gesellschaft, Bern, Switzerland (131, 182, 188); Prof. Carl Vogt, Geneva, Switzerland (131, 182, 138); Uni- versity of Tennessee, Knoxville (131, 132, 138). Accessions to the Library were rote ved from M. Theodor Gottleib, Leipzig; R. Universita, Turin; Royal Society, Edin- burgh; Geological Society, Manchester; Prof. George M. Dawson, Montreal; Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College, Cambrian Academy of Science, Rochester, N. Y.; Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Bureau of Education, Dr. Walter J. Hoffman, Washington, D. C.; University of Cali- fornia. A letter was read from the Rittenhouse Memorial Associa- tion, requesting the Society to join in a petition to the Legis- lature, requesting the erection of a suitable monument to com- memorate the services of David Rittenhouse to the State and the county. After discussion and debate, the Society, on motion of Mr. Prime, Resolved, That while the members of the American Philosophical So- ciety individually sympathize with the proposed memorial requesting the Legislature to erect a monument to David Rittenhouse ; yet, as a society, they consider it inexpedient to join in a petition so to do, Pending nominations Nos, 1213, 1214, 1215, and 1216 were read, spoken to and balloted for. The Committee on Finance presented its recommendations for appropriation for the ensuing year. Mr. Prime moved to reduce the salary of the Librarian by $250, 1890.] ‘3 263 Dr. Greene moved to raise the same to $1000. The motion and amendment were subsequently withdrawn, and the appropriations passed, as reported. Dr. Cope offered the following resolution: Resolved, That a Committee, consisting of five members, be appointed by the President of the Society to consider and propose to a future meet- ing such measures as they may deem necessary for the well being and - improvement of the Proceedings. The resolution was adopted. The President subsequently appointed as such Committee, Dr. Cope, George F. Barker, Admiral Macauley, Dr. Jayne and Dr. Brinton. Mr, Arthur Biddle moved that a Committee of five be ap- pointed by the President at his leisure to consult with the His- torical Society regarding the desirability of accepting the Etting bequest, and to report at the next meeting. Dr. Morris moved to lay on the table, and a tie vote result- ing on the motion, it was withdrawn, and the original motion being voted upon was carried. The President subsequently appointed as such Committee, Mr. Arthur Biddle, Dr. Hampanberger, Messrs. W ood, Pres and Joseph C. Fraley. Dr. Horn, from the Committee to aban for the Society the Portrait of S. F. Baird, by Ulke, reported that it had been purchased and was now on the walls of the meeting room, and read a list of the donors for its purchase. On motion, the thanks of the Society were tendered to the Committee for its services, and the Committee was discharged. The ballots being counted, the following were reported duly elected members of the Society : 2183. Theodore Turrettini, Geneva. 2184. EH. Mascart, Paris. 2185. William C. Unwin, London. 2186. Louis Vossion, Philadelphia. And the Society was adjourned by the President. INDEX TO VOL. XXVIII. Meetings Held. Page. Page. ShO0) January Boe 6 os oe) coke a's 08s BO. |: 18900, April Bian ee ee whe eo 3s PRMEES, UVb etatenplolicce eo ada ee MSY Diode 56 6.828 Waele as oe wee BORTOGly Tigo 6! aie <0 21010-9106. Oe May 16. 6. oe aie an oS tae he WOproery Ol. ec) so) ake els 6 ee November 7. os. ee) sca. a'ets 268 DAOPC Ts c' oh a Rog Ge ecenWae ale OO November Sh ooi ain siate ack ew oee , BARTON (Dh coat as 6 a bes aah ole eee December 6.0.0 10.5 0 s..scee tere eee UMTL Ion eta ala)-e tava, anesaten ® eee? December 19 ... 6 0:4 ee es. «20k IND AG 6 wile bh iw eb ere a lero Me New Members Elected. February 21, 1890. MG OITG, Henry: WIG: eo so ee ea 0 0 0) eres 16.4): elfen) 4 phere. 8ee eee N77. ODGTG W. RORGOLE. 6s 6.0: 620) 0h ew 0 0, m 00s ee eye lam 6). 9 ens ete 2176, Samuel Timmins .............-.. Arley, near Coventry, England. CITE TRON Ty MICHEL . Src, é 0 «0 0.000.600 4 6 4 ene oe & ote SRUOCIIeN May 16, 1890. NO, 2162, Cuaries Godtrey, Laland: ) o\<6.0.s0s\0. 6-300 «6 sw 0 eletale » soe Rime 9181. Heman Ti; Wayland. sie. eisic.s 0 cee <'e 0 6 «one oo os nadelphia, 9180. Robert Pattereon Field... sect cw eee wee cw « 6s Eniledelphia. S170; Goorge &. Fullerton: (30°: oie 2 ss 0 es 0 ee 0 0 6 6 es © oR RRMA, December 19, 1890. WO: 2186, Lowle Voesion , i626 se acc wc wre ere wee wes « + ep enedelnhia. ai em OC) CTI WEYL... 5. 5a oe 80d eee 6) ek wee 0 6a tp at es ecw eo ies WUMean Tieethhhl coc cca n 6 0 o% 6 0 Ue 0le 0b bh an Decease of Members. Martin B. Anderson. ......-... 91 | Gustav Adolph Hirn.......... 36 Charles A. Ashburner ......... 27 | JamesH. Hutchinson......... 27 George H. Boker.....+...+.-.-. 27 | William D. Kelley. . See Par Tinta A 0 Carel ce sa es ce sw ced) Richard J. Levis . . 00-0 bs 0s 6 Oe er AM at cee a ss aa 3 | Semmes MoClune: . cons sen te wl wee aa Te, GOORW f55.5 ect lsc ccu'« OO}. GUMAV. WELL so 5 0-6 ehetavaca co enete ee Frederick Graff... 4-222. 100 Resignations of Members. Amer AUR TIORNOMIANY Gogh arc) Gf 4's ais. ss: a\0 6.000: @- 0. al 86) er hue abe woe ee NOM BANNIG oo8 Ure sw bcd see os eee ees acl t NMI en Lely iss di x vs 0s ane ne eee eae 266 Oral Communications. _ Page. Dr. HARRISON ALLEN. ‘ On the Affinity of the Teeth of Rats with those of Eocene Mammals..... . 256 On the Variations of the Forms of Human Teeth. . .-.....02002+2+-+ 80 Pror. BARKER. Exhibits four Stellar Photographs taken by Prof. Pickering... ......... 91 Pror. E. D. Cops. On the Gigantic Chinchilla of North America... . 2... 2.2.2 + 2 eee eee 89 On the Dinosauria of the Laramie Formation... .....2.ees ee 1s 6 2106 Dr. J. CoEeston Morris. On a late Publication by Dr. McLaughlin, of Texas, regarding Immunity from Disease by carrying out the Law of Interference . ...+ «2... .6 eee + + 2 200 Written Communications. ALLEN, HaRRIsoN. Description of a New Species of Pteropus. . . 2. 2 2. ee eee ee ww 0 wo 10, 95 Description of a New Species of Macrotus.. . 2... e+e we 8 eo oo U2, 9 Description of a New Species of Caroilia, and Remarks on Carollia brevicauda. 19 BarrpD, Henry M. se AGarea WH Ss de 6s SORE are tie Nee (eke cos hos pe ib) res bie cain ae Brinton, Danret G. On Etruscan and Libyan Names : A Comparative Study .......... . 86,39 Note on the Puquina Language of Peru... 1.02 2 ee we ween ew ww « he Corr, Dr. E. D. Notes and Descriptions of Paleozoic Fishes .. 2... 2 wee ee ee we ee 2 200 FRALEY, FREDERICK. AGArOME DY bic sien. 6 eb OR, STEALS te os Tb oe eles ye ee Sais) hibtans eee GaATSCHET, ALBERT 8. The Beothuk Indians. Article Third os. 0 ose sie Siwinne Wale elev evel p capes Gooprz, G. Brown. AGEN DY. soo boos ce oe ere eae Ta FO eee Weck ce 8-6 .0:.0 a) eee eae a cess Seen Ho.Luanp, J. W. AGGreas DY... nw 0 0 wo 060.0 & eee e ere. eS ele -9 Aielhwinerh sie aseceln kee Hovston, Epwin J. On Muscular Contractions following Death by Electricity... ....... .36, 37 MoMaster, Jonn Bacu. AGArTOES DY! <0 0 Sos. 8 ore) wie) chee ale: Sas wHONEL 6bi elle loud. pmo hele ene epee Ryper, Joun A. The Origin of Sex through Cumulative Integration, and the Relation of Sexu- ality to the Genesis of Species .°. 05 owe et we we we th ww we ow © 106, 109 The Eye, Ocular Muscles, and Lachrymal Glands of the Shrew Mole (Blarina Satiobed. CRY) 6 oe: 6) aso ata! 0B ino whens. 10: v0.9 o7.6., 0.0 10) preahe eRlcn g cene naan Strokes, ALFRED C. Notices of New Fresh-water Infusoria (with a plate)... ... +. + e+.» «74, 100 Wake, C. STANILAND. The Asiatic Affinities of the Malay Language. . © 8 © 6 016) 0 16 8 82 6%0:°8 . 81, 100 Witirams, TALcorr. : Remarks by. occ s ccc eccccceccce ee « 16%, 172 176, 198,207, 225 267 Obituary Notices. Page. CHARLES ALBERT ASHBURNER. Bye: Peer ey See ara ee eae a ate « 88 HENRY Simmons FRIEZE. POPS TINGE MIC ATIOOL 0 sai go 6 5.6, oda nee BE Ree Riel WC dR D Ee peeeeeee ee 8 OW DANIEL RAYNES GOODWIN. By J. Vaughan Merrick ....... De eC he LP Ge ye ea Ly FRANKLIN B. GowEN. Me Y POAT MAE? a aia oo a) 8h gid cg te swap TOES ee A eRe ee) 4-32 OE FREDERICK GRAFF. Spey i eisenth A PRUPATIN = 2 oko listing oct abe Gos bing SOR Ces hale Samael Lro LESQUEREUX. eae Agee Van abo sling no ae ok Wb a. Oe TOO RL Awe Se REE eee eh ena eee Oe >. . 104 Letters Accepting Membership. pte ADOON T6850 ek 6 ee Eee eae se PVOMEON, Nl ar aha cela ate what 60) ae Ae TOO UII GIO 46 fers eta ekki te tale PRM OIPH IS oo. etalon te a othe oe Wornando Crus Fe s5 ose ace 6s oe oo Washington) D.C... 6 ae eee Sein sar Robert P. Field. ..... € elton ae ow I Olnig cars. ele ere le Lace wie» aee ACQERE DPIODIN 6 ai 3ls aig se 6 wee ba) re) oe OMOIDRGE 6 oo 555 ols Owe lawl woe ee George S. Fullerton. ....... aa AOU Gia a oso eka ta ela wes at eb eee SOLE DANE oye gale eee ee Se es Wasbanmton, Det eS eevee bie. ein ae Friederich 8. Krauss... . REA) on Pia ee aN hata ae or eee Onariog G. Leland, 23 5203. 2ee soi e es BONGON, Eng. 40s e's Sle eels seve me weee Pri) SU AONE: wa 8b ph we) ete 0s He AQUOS, CANAAN 67.5520 cles s\eceisre pee RE a BETO Seah aT in i quof, is lost to Western languages, except so fur as represented by g, to which we add a u to make itvocabletous. The letters D, samech, and ty, shin, are represented by the Greek o, sigma, and &, zi, but are found in an inverted order in the alpha- bet. [The confusion between these letters goes back to a far earlier period when we find two of the Hebrew tribes disputing over Shibboleth or Sibboleth.] But the very first letter is a vocable which in all other alphabets is con: sidered a pure vowel sound, 2; the fifth, he, is another, é ; the sixth, chayt, is 6, or ch; the tenth, yod, is i, tota; and, as above, vau = ou, or u (or sometimes for v), and ngain =0. We have thusall our usual vowel sounds except y, which we know in French as ygrec, and substitute usually for the Greek upsilon. In Hebrew we have two sibilants, zain and tsaddi, the latter of which occupies the alphabetical position in Greek of upsilon. If we now try to substitute in Hebrew, as ordinarily written, the above values for the letters, we shall find we have a perfectly vocable language. The names of men and places are given not very differently from our modern pronunciation of them as elucidated by the pointed Hebrew, when allow- ance is made for the diflerence due, as above stated, to racial intonation. 1691.35" 9 [ Morris. In some instances, two or three consonants are found together, but these may be regarded as familiar abbreviations for well-known words, just as D. L. W. means for us Delaware, Lackawanna and Western R. R., etc. In this way we may find that the Hebrew is really no exception as regards the presence of characters indicating pure vowel sounds ; and, indeed, we have the authority of Josephus for the statement that it does. Chief among the words whose pronunciation was to be hidden was the name of the Deity—it was forbidden—and many, long, and bitter have been the controversies as to the true pronunciation of p\pPq, yod, hay, vau, hay. Josephus says it was composed of four vowels.* He was a priest, and also well versed in Greek and Roman literature, and we may well accept his statement as reflecting the best learning of his times on Jewish matters. It seems to me that this ought to settle the question. As tothe consequences which would follow from such a view, I must leave them to those more competent to follow them out. It seems, how- ever, to me that we would thus have better opportunities of comparing the Hebrew sacred records with those of all other ancient nations, and of clearing up much obscurity in ancient history and geography. I would therefore suggest the following phonetic values : x =a =a by ond oe] 3 =f=b ).Ddfnl=»~=m p| =y=g J] final =y=> 7 =ét= dD =co=s ry =e=6 y =o=0 ) =f=for vow or ou 9,¢) final= z= p oru ¥.ffinal=v=y t eal Soak, pP 4 fo nM =7=torzy=ch? 7” =p=r a) = %=th vy =f>=x ’ =: =i n =r=t mF J final = « : =k And illustrate by AN ATTEMPTED TRANSLITERATION OF GENESIS X ch 1. Vv ale tuldt bni- ne xm em v ie v iuldu lem bnim sat embul Noah Shem Ham Jap 2. bni ipt gmr vmgug vmdi v jun vtbl vmxk v tirs Japheth Gomer Magog Madai Javan Tubal Meschech Tiras * See Josephus, ‘“‘ Wars of the Jews,’’ Book v, Ch. v, 7. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xx1x. 1385. B. PRINTED APRIL 10, 1891. Morris.] 10 [March 6, 3. _ ww —— - ow. . Vbniiun alixe v trxix ktim v ddnim v bnigmer axknz vript v tgrme omer Ashkenaz Riphath ‘Togarmah Javan Elisha Tarshish Kittim Dodanim ch - male nprdu aii eguim barytm aix Ilxnu lmxpétm bguiem ch z? . ¥ bani ém kux v myrim v puth v knon Ham Cush Mizraim Phut Canaan ch . vbnikux sba vévile vsbte vrome vsbtka vbni rome xba vddn Cush Sheba Havilah gre Raamah Sabtechah Raamah Sheba Dedan . v kux ild at-nmrd eva eal leiut gbr bary Cush Nimrod . eva-eie gbr-yid Ipni ieve ol-kn iamr knmrd gbur yid sae jeve Jehovah Nimrod ehovah . vtei raxit mmiktu bbl vark vakd y kine bary xnor Babel Erech Accad mera wsht Shinar ch . Imn-eary eevaiya axur vibn at-ninve v at- rebt oir v at-klé Asshur Nineveh Rehoboth Calah ch . V at-rsn bin ninve v bin Bate eva eoir egdle lah Resen Nineveh ch v myrim ild at-ludim v at-onmim v at-lebim v at-nptéim Mizraim Ludim Anamim Lehabim Naphtuhim : ch . Vat-ptrsim v at-ksléim axr iyav mxm eee v at-kptrim Pathrusim Casluhim hilistim Caphtorim . v knon ild wi Sas bkru v at st Canaan Sidon . Vat-eibusi v at-eamri v at- pa ebusite Amorite Girgashite ch Vv at-eévi v at-eorqi v at-esini Hivite Arkite Sinite ch ch ch v at-earudi v at-eymri v at-eémti v aér npyu mxpéut eknoni Arvadite Zemarite Hamathite Canaanites . viei gbul eknoni myidn bake grre od-oze bake sdme v omre v adme Canaanite Sidon Gerar Gaza Sodom Gomorrah Admah vy bim od-lxo errs Lasha ch . ale bai-eim Imxpétm lixatm barytm bgviem i Linge ild gm-eva abi kl -bni obr aéi ipt egdul Eber = Japheth Rath xm oilm vaxur varpkxd vlud v arm Shem Elam Asshur Arphaxad Lud Aram ch . v boi arm ouy véul v gtr vmx Aram Uz a net Mash . varpkxd ild at-xié wie ild at-obr Arphaxad : . 1891.) 2 11 [Lesley » 25. vi oor ild xni bnim xm ened pis. ki bimiv nplee cary V xm aéiv iqthn eleg Joktan ch 26. v iqthn ild at-almudd v at-xlp vat-eyrmut v at-iré Joktan Almodad Sheleph Hazarmaveth Jerah 27. vat-edurm vat-auzl v at-dqle : Hadoram Uzal Diklah 28. vat-oubl v at-abimal v at-xba Obal yg Sheba 29, saga 8 eal-avile vat-iubb kl-ale bni foe Havilah Jobab . 30. v iei nuxbm m-mxa bake spre er eqdm Mesha Sephar 31. ale afin Imxpétm Ilxgtm barytm Iguiem em ch ch 32. ale mxpét hal-ne Juldem bguiem umale nprdu eguim bary aér embul ‘ oa ALSO OF JUDGES XII, 6. ch v iamru lu amr-na 2b/t viamr sdl¢t v la ikin 1 dbr bn v iaézu autu v ix- Shibboleth Sibboleth ethuéu al mobrut ¢irden v ip] bot eeia maprim arboim v xnim alp. On the Grapeville Gas-wells. By J. P. Lesley. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 6, 1891.) Mr. John Fulton, General Manager of the Cambria Iron Works, at Johnstown, Cambria county, Pa., has kindly furnished me with the fol- lowing particulars of one of the most important and significant episodes in the strange story of Petroleum in Pennsylvania : 1. A report to him made October 12, 1888, by Edgar G. Tuttle, then Mining Engineer of the Company. This gives :—(a) the number of wells (27 or more) around Grapeville, in Westmoreland county, up to that date sunk and piped by different companies ;—(b) the length and ‘sizes of the pipe line to Johnstown ;—(c) the pressures of gas at the well, at the 4th, 8th, 12th, 16th, 20ih, 24th, 28th, 32d, 36th and 39th mile, and at the Cambria Works terminus. 2. A second report made to him two years later, February 25, 1891, by M. G. Moore, now Mining Engineer of the Company. This gives :—(«) the titles of eleven companies owning 85 gas-wells in the Grapeville dis- trict ;—(0) an account of the drilling especially of the Agnew well ;—(c) a table showing the decline of pressure at the Westmoreland and Cambria Companies’ wells, from 386 lbs. on April 29, 1889, to 65 lbs. on February 2, 1891 ;—(d) a full table of the Co.’s thirteen wells, depths, dates of striking gas, the initial pressure of each, subsequently observed pressure at April 29, 1889, December 15, May 26, November 3, December 1, 180, » Lesley. ] 12 [March 6, January 5 and February 2, 1891, the first six wells starting with 460 lbs. , and ending with 70 and 65 lbs. ;—(e) a diagram of the mode of piping the Agnew well ;—(f) a map of the country between Pittsburgh and Johns- town, showing location of groups of wells. Mr. Fulton was prompted to sending me the data described above by his remembrance of my address, some years ago, at Pittsburgh, before the American Institute of Mining Engineers, in which I reiterated my belief on geological grounds in the comparatively speedy extinction of the rock gas industry of the country. He adds: ‘‘ You will notice that recently one of the wells [at Grapeville] has been deepened to reach the ‘Gordon sand,’ and that a small supply of gas was found in this second and lower horizon of natural gas, but not enough to warrant any hopefulness of its maintaining the supply. A part of our works are being supplied yet with the natural gas from Grapeville, but it is weakening so fast that we have got to supplement it with artificial gases’’ (February 26, 1891). - My warrant for publishing in the Proceedings of this Society these most important geological and historical data is found in Mr. Fulton’s words : **T do not think that there is anything in this report that is so private or confidential that it should not be made known; and.you can therefore use the matter in these reports as you think wise. At the Cambria works we are using the Archer oil gas to take the place of the natural gas, and we are finding this to be a very good substitute. As you know, the Archer process consists in vaporizing fuel oil, and mixing at a very high heat steam with the oil. We have also opened our mines again here and are using coal in a great many sections of the works’ (March 18, 1891). October 12, 1888, the Westmoreland and Cambria Natural Oil Company owned seven (7) wells, located principally along Brush Creek, northeast of Grapeville, Westmoreland county, Pa. Three wells were connected with the pipe line; the others were held in reserve, two of them being drilled toa thin crust of hard rock (silica) just overlying the gas sand, which served as a hermetical cover to prevent the escape of the gas, even at its high pressure in the gravel-sand rock beneath it. This fact is important as explanatory of the retention of the gas in the rock for past ages. The wells are 1100 to 1400 feet deep, according to their locality in the valley or on the hill, the gas rock lying nearly horizontal. The pipe in the well is of 5 inch diameter. The two wells, A, A', on the map, were turned on full for the pipe to Johnstown, the well R being turned on more or less as a regulator of the supply at the Cambria works. The pressure at top of well was 335 Ibs., as the 10-inch main to Johns- town would not stand a much higher pressure, There seemed no difference in strength or volume of gas per minute blown off (free) by one of these wells, in Mr, Tuttle’s presence, compared with that which he saw two years before ata free blow trom a well just north of Grapeville Station. 1891.] pate 13 [Lesley. The gauges were noted often, so as not to permit the pressure to rise much above 335 lbs. ; and when this seemed likely to occur well R was shut sufficiently to reduce it again to 335. Formerly a weighted safety- valve, allowing a free blow, was used. Saturday evenings wells A, A‘ were closed, and only R used. ‘‘ The gas in this field is not being wasted as formerly, or as greatly as it has been in the Murraysville field ; and the prospects are that the Grapeville field will last the longer of the two.” “T understand that the flowing pressure in the Murraysville field is now [October 12, 1888] 250 lbs. The Grapeville wells have great volume. When one is blowing off in the air and then is shut quickly, the gauge runs up in fifteen or twenty seconds to 525 lbs. In some districts the wells — require a minute, and even longer, to reach their normal of 500 lbs. The weaker or low-pressure wells require days to reach their normal pressure.”’ As it is impossible to store or tank gas, wells are now drilled to within a few feet of the gas horizon and ‘‘held’’ there. When the supply from other wells weakens, these wells are sunk into the gas rock, one after the other, to keep up the supply. ‘Wells that have broke through to the gas are restrained by a ‘‘packer,”’ a thick, heavy rubber cylinder, 20 inches long, outside diameter $ inch less than bore of well, fustened at the ends to the pipe going into the well (see cuts). . The end of this pipe fits into the end of another pipe, making a ‘‘slip joint ;’’ rubber flush with the outer diameter of the pipe ; lower joint generally perforated to admit the gas ; pipe A lowered into the well (and, if necessary, pressed down) to slip into pipe B, bulging the rubber packer against the sides of the well, and effectually stopping the rise of the gas outside the pipes. It can then be controlled by a valve at the top of pipe A, at the well mouth. Before this invention the gas could be held only below a certain pressure, above which it would force its way between the pipe and the sides of the well and blow the whole casing into the air. The economy to a district of the new ‘“‘ packer’’ is evident. ‘* At present (October 12, 1888) there appears to be no weakening of the supply, except when unusual and sudden demands are made on the gas. If the supply weakens, ora greater supply is needed, more wells may be added to the line. This may require the laying of more pipe, or the replacing of the present 10-inch main by a larger one. The W. & C. Company own about 20,000 acres, controlling a large part of the gas field.”’ The companies and wells around Grapeville in 1888 were as follows : Westmoreland and Cambria, 7 wells, drilled between 1885 and 1888, three of them pipéd to Johnstown. Carnegie, 6 wells. Southwest, 2 or more, piped to Connellsville, etc. (drilling also on . Brush Creek). Greensburg Fuel, 2 wells, piped to Greensburg. Jeanette Glass Works, 2, piped one mile west to the works. Lesley.] 14 f [March 6, Philadelphia Co., drilling near New Salem. Owners unknown, 8 or more wells. The W. & C. Co. have also seven wells (about 1400’ deep), three miles northwest of Latrobe, on a northeast and southwest line 24 miles long. The northern three have a 6 inch pipe to Latrobe. The other four have a 10 inch pipe running east by Derry Station, P. R. R., to Laurel Hill, where it feeds into the Grapeville-Johnstown main about ten miles from Johnstown. The flowing pressure of the wells supplying Johnstown is 200 to 275 lbs. per square inch. That of those suppiying Latrobe, 90 lbs. Trial wells east of this field have been unsuccessful, very little gas being found. Salt water flowed from some of the Latrobe group of wells. The first and most northern well, the Fowler, was drilled in 1885, the last and southernmost, Miller, No. 3, in 1887. Their volume of gus does not equal that of the Grapeville wells, and requires a much longer time to gauge up to the same normal of 500 Ibs. The proposition at first made to land owners, to pay $40 or $50 for a 50 lb. well, and $1.00 extra for each additional pound, was not generally accepted. Pressures along the main at every four miles (taken in 1886 and 1887) show — the loss of pressure by friction in a pipe of 10’’, increasing to 12/’, 16’ and 20/’, thus: : For first 20 miles 3250’, ten inch pipe of 3 in. wrought iron. For next 12 miles, twelve inch pipe of } inch af 8 For next 7} miles, sixteen inch pipe of y; in. cast ag For last 13 miles, twenty inch pipe of (?) "4 aes In the first column of the following table H. S. means High side. At the 39th mile, the gauge is at ‘‘ Reducer low side.’”’ C. W. means the Cambria Works at Johnstown. oP “Table of Pressures to Show Loss by Friction. Distance Size. 1886. 1886. 1887. 1887. from well. of pipe. —— Nov. 13. March. March 15. 0 10 in. 155 lbs. 2001bs. 820 Ibs. 333 Ibs. 4 s 149 182 818 820 8 ee 182 170 285 295 12 as 120 148 255 261. 16 ee 112 129 208 212 20 “ 84 100 166 168 24 12 in, % 65 ot ogee 180 28 re 68 50 95° 95 82 16 in, 55 58 75 6 86 8 538 51 . 54 87 H.8. “ 52 60 . 63 86 39 us 20 as 25 25. C.W. 20 in. 20 _ 25 25 1891.] 15 [Lesley Table of Wells and Ownerships, February 25, 1891. Greensburg Fuel GasCompany .......+++++ scpacbonae: Wells. Southwest Natural Gas Company ...... aS) Wik wane a Versailles Natural Gas Company ....+..++eeeeeeeeees Be Youghiogheny Gas Company ........seeseeeeceeeees ett Jeanette Glass Works. 5.66.0. es ow set encovctveeeecss as Manor and Irwin Gas Company ........ vice ges roe eee: Westmoreland Specialty Company......--++seeeeeeeee at Westmoreland and Cambria Natural Gas Company ...13 “ Carnegie Brothers & Company .......... «+ Eevee ou eae e/0! Philadelphia Natural Gas Company ........ tehweeiastee ce National Tube Works..... Np pase deine sents areckahnete 530% Total number reported by M. G. Moore ..........85 The W. & C. Company’s 13 wells are all piped to Johnstown. Their depths and pressures at various dates muy be found on a fullowing table. The deeper are on the hilltops.. They all get their gas in the Gants sand rock of Washington county. Well No. 12 was deepened with the design to reach a lower gas sand horizon; but the rope was cut by the sharp sand driven up by the gas issuing from the Gants sand. Lefore the tools could get through it they were lost, and fishing tools also afterwards ; so the well was abandoned, and No. 13 (Agnew well) was drilled a short distance south of No, 12. This new Agnew well reached the Gants sand January 15, 1891, went through it, and was cased with 8-inch pipe ; packed just above the top of the sand; supplied with another inner 6-inch pipe ; packed again at the bottom of the sand ; and the Gants sand gas between the pipes laid into the Johnstown main, Drilling was resumed through the 6-inch pipe, and stopped, February 21, 1891, at 2700 feet. The ‘‘Gordon sand’’ was found at 175 feet be- neath the Gants sand, was 35 feet thick, and gave gas at only 30 lbs. pres- sure, which, however, in twenty minutes rose to 175 lbs., ‘‘ when it was necessary to discontinue the test ;’’ why’is not explained. ‘‘ While the pressure in the Gordon is now (February 23) very much greater than in the Gants, the volume is much less, as is clearly shown by comparing the minute pressures; that of the Gants being 65, and of the Gordon only 30 lbs.” [A diagram of the pipe and packing arrangement for passing through the Gants sand, and drawing off its gas toJohnstown, is appended to Mr. Moore’s report. ] Below the Gordon sand, for 1070 feet to the bottom of the well, not a sign of gas or gas rock was observable. [This only bears out al] Mr. J. F. Carll’s observations, published in his reports on the oi] regions, especi. ally his Seventh Report, 15, just published by the Geological Survey of Pennsylvania.] The failure of the Agnew well to get a good supply from the Gordon sand does not-necessarily condemn it over the whole Grape- Lesley.] 16 [March 6, ville field, as it may be found in better condition in the central and north- ern parts of the field. Carnegie Bros. have begun drilling two or three wells to test the Gordon sand a little north of the centre of the Gants field, a mile from No. 10 (Sylvis well). None of the Latrobe wells are piped to Johnstown. Grapeville.— Table of Minute Pressures at Various Dates. als ‘ > 5 cies dé $\2/8\s\eigis s _ rm m @ Dim @®D és) Pe) a i: a re mr mir Name. ee “4 STR | SR Sl alle ; e 3 Aol Oey a ee ead ea ge Co o a oo. {2 Se ee [aes ® | &|@ Z a DB alaiAlalizialdiea 1 Klingensmith | 1100/ | Feb. 13, ’86 | 460) 390, 250, 180) 100) 95) 75) 65 2} Henry....... 71183’ | June, 1886) ‘| 380, 260) 170) 105) 100) ‘| 70 8 | Moore....... 1149’ xe + «| 390) “* | 17H} 100} 93) ** | 65 4) Welker...... 1144’ | Oct., Ne +) 380) ** | 170) 105! 100 5 | Brown ...... 1224’! May, 1887| ‘| 390) ‘ | 180) 100) 95) 75) 65 6 | Ferree....... 1812’ | Aug., ‘ «* | 880) 240) 170) ** |, 100} ** | 70 7 | Minsinger ... | 1466’ | Nov. 21,“ | 410) 390) ‘* | ‘| 95) 85] 55) 40 8 | Shutts....... 1468’ | Feb. 13, ’89 | 880) ‘| 250). 165) 106; ‘| 70 60 9 | Ripple ...... 1360’ | Nov. 30, ’89 | 260 260) “| “*| 95) 75) 65 10 | Sylvis ...... | 1357’ | Jan. 18, ’90 | 235 70! 105) 100! «* 7 PY | Teaxe?t oti 1267/ | Feb. 20, °90 | 225 180] 100} 95} **| * 12 | Byers ....... 1350’ | Oct., 1890 | 125 60 13 | Agnew’..... 1420’ | Jan., 1891} 7% 65, 65 The steady decline in minute pressure from 386 lbs. on April 20, 1889, to 65 lbs. on February 2, 1891, predicts a speedy extinction of the use of natural gas at the Cambria Works. Calculating the average rate per day of the observed decrease we find it to be as follows: From April 29, 1889, 646 days,’ 321 lbs. 2 lbs. per day. From Dec. 16, 1889, 418 ‘* 188 ‘* 2.200 ‘5 From May 26, 1890, 252 “ 107 ‘* 2355 “ From Nov, 3, 1890, 91 ‘ 86. 66 S.B85i ($8 From Dec, 1, 1890, 63 * $0... B100-3.88 From Jan. 5, 1891, 28 ‘ To - Atha I take this opportunity to suggest that we have in the decline of gas pressure in all wells of all gas regions the most cogent of arguments against the theory that gas pressure is produced by the hydrostatic pres- sure of the locality. For, it is self-evident that the hydrostatic pressure must remain always the same, and therefore cannot be the vis @ lergo of a variable oil or gas pressure ; otherwise this last should also remain constant to the last drop of oil and the last cubic foot of gas coming from the well. The gradual decline of gas pressure in every well and all wells is proof positive that it represents the gradual exhaustion of an ér- herent force of self-expansion not dependent upon any hydraulic vis a tergo. SS ST ee 1891.} 17 [ Lesley. Notes on Hebrew Etymologies from the Egyptian ANX. Enoch; Anoki ; Enos. By J. P. Lesley. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 6, 1891.) Forty years ago, in my Lowell lectures on the ‘‘Origin of Man,’’ I gave my views of the Arkite symbolism embodied in the crux ansata, or ANX symbol of life. They were not accepted; but I still regard that line of investigation as one entirely germane to modern scientific research, and capable of bearing good fruit, although my application of it to the crux ansata is much less probable than I then thought it ; for the latest arche- ological results are rather in favor of regarding that symbol as a rude drawing of the human figure. My present purpose is to direct attention to the influence which the universal use of this symbol in all ages of ancient Egyptian history must have exercised over the philology of surrounding races. Its name, ANX, the living, the alive, life, etc., was certainly the most sacred word in the Egyptian language ; in general and constant use in their religious litera- ture ; on the lips of all their thinkers, and, in fact,-of all classes of the population of the valley of the Nile, in all generations ; and was em- bodied as an element in the personal names of pharaohs, nobles, priests, and common people ; the evidence of which pervades the monuments and papyri. Every royal cartouche had the anz scrupulously written after it, usually with the tat, to mean the ever-living, the immortal. Pa anz is an instance of the designation of a pharaoh (Pierret). The use of the anv inside the cartouche was later; for example, in the Ethiopian kingdom, and by Psammeticus II and III. The granddaughter of Pianchi IL was named Anz-shap-n-ap; the daughter of Takelot II, Any-karama-t; a princess of the family of Psammeticus II, Anz-ra-nefer-het. Two places or cities in Egypt are known called Xafra-anz and Aseska-any, evidently dedicated to the memory of the Kas, or spirits, of those monarchs, one of whom built the second great pyramid of Gizeh, A quarter of the oldest capital of Egypt, Memphis, was known as Anj-taui, the life (or heart) of the two lands, Upper and Lower Egypt. The word was popularly used, like our word ‘‘viands,’’ for food of any kind that supports life. Anz-am was the name of a tree, used as we use the word ‘‘live-oak ;’’ and Lepsius quotes a curious sentence of great interest to Hebrew scholars: ‘Ra, the sun, who makes the tree of life (am n-anz) green, producing things which issue from it,’’ suggesting the ‘*tree of life’ (O77 {y more properly the tree of living things) of the garden of Eden. The Egyptians seem to have used anZu, also, as the genera] plural name for all flowers, the plainly living parts of plants, The Egyptians called a mirror anz, because it represented the living object presented to it. They called the two eyes anz-ti, because the life of an animal is best seen in his eyes. But they gave, curiously enough, PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC, xxIx. 185. C. PRINTED May 14, 1891. Lesley.] 18 [March 6, the same name to the two ears, and only distinguished the terms apart in writing, by drawing the ideograph of eyes in the one case and of. ears in the other. The pharaohs had two high officials, one called ‘‘his eyes in the south,’’ and the other called “his ears in the north.” But anz not only meant to live, to be alive, but had another deriva- tive meaning, with a very remarkable application to the story of Enoch, viz., to lift oneself, to rise up and stand, reswrrection and ascension. This meaning it retains in modern Coptic, as ONK, eztulit, ussurexit. An in- scription at Edfu uses it for ‘‘the sun rising in the east.’’ At Denderah is a picture of a sacred boat, in which stands a lotus flower, from which a snake is rising into the air, with the legend: ‘‘The snake ascends (anz) from the lotus of the ship.’’ On the sarcophagus of Besmut, at Luxor, is read, anz-f, etc. : ‘‘He ascends like the ten stars.’’ Another inscription reads: ‘‘ The stars ascend (anzu) in heaven.’’ And at Esne: «The stars ascend (anZu) to do their duty in the night.”” At Abydos, an inscription to King Seti I, of the nineteenth dynasty (before the date of the Exodus), addresses him thus: ‘*Thou goest up (Za-k) above the earth like the bark of Orion in its season; thou arisest (anZ-ta) like the Star Sothis’’ (see Brugsch’s Dict., pp. 198, 199). The Hebrew tradition that the Hebrews came out of Egypt agrees with the fact that Moses, Aaron, Hur (named together, Exod. xvii, 10), Miriam, Achsaph (Caleb’s daughter), Manassah (Joseph’s son), and other early legendary personal names, are purely Egyptian. The intercourse of the two peoples was always intimate. The kings Asa, Amon and Manas- seh had Egyptian names. Before the exile, the Hebrew colonies in the Delta were important. The Book of Genesis was not necessarily com- piled at Jerusalem. The story of Joseph and Potipher’s wife was based _ on the D’Orbigny papyrus. Adam and Seth seem to be the names of the two chief Delta deities Atum and Set. Noah and. his wife seem to repre- sent the Egyptian divine duad Nun and Nunt. There is nothing startling, therefore, in finding the any in the name Enoch, whose legend forms an episode in the antediluvian list. The occupation of Southern Syria by the Egyptians dates back to the most remote times. The cartouche of Snefru, first king of the fourth dynasty, builder of one of the great pyramids, is cut on the rocks of the Sinaitic peninsula, at the turquoise and copper mines. The Hebrew legend of the Anakim of the Hebron country gives Anak three sons with Egyptian names, Ahiman, Sesai, Tolmai, fathers of the three tribes of the Anakim. Whether there was any philologica! connection or not, the com- pilers of Exodus seem to have seen the anz in the name Anak, and de- scribed therefore the people as a giant race, analogous to the ghostly or demoniac Rephidim. Remembering the large Greek element in the Delta far back in the cen- turies before Christ, and the Greek tradition that as Cadmus came from Pheenicia and settled Beotia, so Cecrops came from Sais in Egypt and settled Attica, bringing with him the goddess Neith (Pallas Athéné), we 1891, 19 [Lesley. might confidently expect many Egyptian words and names in Greece. Of these I will only allude to Jnachos (anch), son of Oceanus and Tethys, who founded the Kingdom of Argos; and the sacred rivers Jnachos, one in Argolis, the other flowing from Mount Pindus. But to return to proper names in Hebrew ; perbaps the most interesting of them all, in an etymological way,.is that of Hnos, the legendary grand- son of Adam, in the second account of the creation in the fifth chapter of Genesis, the chapter which contains the name of Enoch. The word Enos is written, whether rightly or wrongly, Z)§N, and pointed so as to be pronounced 4nosh. The same word, written and pointed in the same way, occurs in the 55th Psalm and Job v, 17, with the meaning a man, but usually appears in the Hebrew books with a collective meaning as mankind. It occurs in Sonof Man, Ps. exliv, 3. Isaiah viii, 1 is directed to write with a man’s stylus, that is, in the vulgar or common or demotic scrip, so that everybody could comprehend. Like Adam (man) it had no plural. But in later days, as when the Book of Daniel was written, the third letter had been dropped and the word became ansh, or emphatically anshd, meaning man, mankind, man as man ; and this gave the common plural anshim, men. It repeatedly occurs in this book in the phrase ‘‘ Son of man.’’ A still further contraction of it gave the popular form AISA, UN, man, with its feminine aishé, woman (as the Greek fy-, one, was contracted into 颢, with a closer connection between the two languages than Gesenius here suspected). In the pronunciation of words we must keep in mind that until the age of printing spelling has always been optional, and pronunciation local. Words passed from ear to ear, not from eye to eye. The same word was pronounced gutturally or dentally or lingually by different races and individuals, and written accordingly. Words were clipped, and written accordingly. Every Egyptian, Hebrew or Greek scholar knows this. Whether the Anch was spelled with an aleph, heth or dyen, it remained the same word. In one part of Egypt it was pronounced anz, in another part ansh ; just as the East Germans say ich, the North Germans ik, and the West Germans ésh, for the English J which the Greeks and Romans pro- nounced eg-o, the Hebrews anoki, the old Egyptians nuk, and the Copts anuk. By reference to Admiral McCauley’s Dictionary, published in our Transactions in 1882, you will see at the top of the first column, on page 22, ‘‘ Any, life ;’’ followed by ‘‘ Ansh, to exist, to subsist.’’ Other proofs ‘it is unnecessary to adduce to show the practical identity of the Egyptian Anz, life, and the Hebrew Anosh, Ish, man, Enos. As to the genetic connection of Anz and the Hebrew Anoki, J, the first personal pronoun, I would approach the subject with all possible caution. It is a fact that the pronoun was written Ani, without the &, especially in what Gesenius calls the ‘‘ silver age of the Hebrew,” Eccles. ii, 1, 11, 12, 15, 18, 20 ; iii, 17; iv, 1,2, 4, 7; vii, 25. In Gen. xv, 7, and xxiv, 24, it stands alone (including the substantive verb) for Tam. Schwartze, in his ‘“* Coptic Grammar,’’ pp. 340, etc., seems to quite settle the fact that the final Lesley.] 20 [April 8, guttural was not a characteristic element of the first personal pronoun. And yet Gesenius seems to feel no hesitation in saying that the Hebrew Anoki (ANKD ‘‘is the primary and fuller form of Ani,’’ being more fre- quent in the Pentateuch (but in general more rare) than the shorter form Ani; and in some of the later books, as the Chronicles and Ecclesiastes, wholly disappearing, just as the guttural of the Saxon has been lost in mod- ern English, and that of the Franks in modern French. He notices that the form Anoki occurs on the Pheenician monuments and in the Chinese NGO. The Sanskrit used only the guttural aha, like the Greek, Latin, German, etc., while the Aramaic, Arabic, Abyssinian have lost it, and use the shorter nasal form of the pronoun. It seems hardly possible, therefore, to avoid the conclusion that ANK was the primitive form of the first personal pronoun, and that it stood in genetic relationship to the Egyptian symbol of life, the any. Whether the symbol was constructed from the ideograph for J (a man with his arm bent pointing to his mouth) or not, I leave to the judgment of others. But Gesenius remarks somewhere that Anoki is used in some Hebrew passages as an emphatic J myself. ‘This would point to the constitution of the pronoun as a dissyllable, with a final K A, the well-known hieroglyph for the dead man’s spirit. I should like to draw attention to the identity of anz, the pronoun, and ant, the Hebrew (and generally Shemitic) word for vessel, not only a vase, urn, bucket, etc., for holding water especially, but also a ship. The human frame was called a vessel (of wrath or righteousness, of mercy, etc., etc.), and may easily have been originally regarded as the vessel of life par excellence. Were this idea feasible, it might return us to my for- mer arkite (ship-mountain-water) interpretation of the cruz ansata. On an Important Boring Through 2000 Feet of Trias, in Eastern Pennsyl- vania. By J. P. Lesley. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 8, 1891.) The Eastern Oi! Company’s trial bore-hole on the Stern farm at Revere (Rufe's Corner), Bucks county, Pa., is 18 miles south of Easton, 16 miles north of Doylestown, 7 miles west of Riegelsville, 5 miles from Kintners- ville, 8 miles from Munroe, 10 miles from Durham furnace, 1} miles from Bucksville, 24 miles from Ottsville, 4 miles from Ervina, and about 2 miles east of Haycock trap hill. The following record was written from dictation of Mr, E. C, Rosenzi, 8414 Smedley street, Tioga, Philadelphia, February 25, 1891, Superinten- dent of the Company. This is the first deep boring in the Mesozoic belt of Pennsylvania, 1891.] 21 [Lesley. known to me. Had my advice been asked I should have dissuaded from a costly attempt to find oil or gas in this formation. The record of the boring, however, is valuable to the geological student as the hole descends through 2076 feet of nearly horizontal strata of gray and brown mostly soft sandstone and shale, with some dark (‘‘ black’") slate, one stratum of which (called ‘‘ anthracite coal’’) produced an excitement in the district, and was extensively published by the newspapers. Tt is almost needless to say that a bed of anthracite coal in undisturbed strata of Mesozoic age, and at a distance from trap, would be an incredi- ble occurrence. The trap of the Richmond, Va., field only turns the bitu- minous coal bed to coke. It is also hardly necessary to explain that a ‘‘nine-foot bed of anthracite coal’’ anywhere in the brownstone belt of Bucks and Montgomery coun - ties could hardly conceal itself underground. All the strata crop out to the surface ; and such a stratum could not well escape exposure. Even smaller lenticular bituminous coal seams like those on Deep and Dan rivers in North Carolina, ranging in thickness from four feet downto one foot, show somewhere at their outcrops. Even if the well record at this point of it were clearer than it is, the fact of the existence of any con- siderable coal bed (especially an anthracite bed) would have to be care- fully verified, either by several additional trial holes, or by a shaft, before being believed by any geologist versed in the characteristic features of this formation. Riegelsville is 166’ above tide, and the Revere well mouth is supposed to be about 200 A. T. Its record is as follows: 8’ Alluvion.................-From the surface down to 8’ 102 Sandstone, brown......... PAR RtRee bes hbase Downto 118 15 Shale, red.......... owRNeweRN ss ccudse atk d eb aie. saint d,cie 133 5 Shale, bluish, soft. -.......... Pes aha ececscecces 138 i ne, RRO ne oineh abet ine aeaas hohe cccecese - 148 56 Sandstone, dark brown ; with coaly specks...... wetore 204 7 Sandstone, brown, very fine grained .........-+++.06- 211 Di OR MIOEE.” BOE tans as ean ceases se secenC@iabecocee 213 AP ER, DEMO, OTR sec vtucense secetacccea PRE - 217 223 Sandstone, red, very hard ..... Sea weeedawpete ca eens 440 Slate, purplish, very gritty, here. 4 Sandstone, brown, fine grained.............eeeeeeees 444 81 Sandstone, gray, very micaceous ...............ee00. 475 10 Sandstone, gray, hard rock............. esisvedeenss’ 485 100 Sandstone, reddish brown ............+++. cache dccee’ OBS 5 Sandstone and shale, gray ......scee-eessees eseeeee 590 G' ‘* Black slate;’" soft... ceo Sas eee TT eee esebews: 505 82 Shale, reddish blue, very hard ........00..seseeesees 627 44 Sandstone, reddish brown ..... Pi wind COR SiGe ST2 21 Sandstone, brown, and blue shale, coarse and fine.... 692 oye Lesley. ] 22 [April 3, 53 Sandstone, brown, coarse and fine ...........ecece ee 745 GS. SHAE, DEOW Me se oe ois ws Sag se Cain Wels ame are urninets 800 77 Sandstone, bluish red, hard ; with white clay veins .. 877 63 Sandstone, brown, fine grained...........seee0. wee O40 40 Shale, brown, soft. ‘‘ Show of petroleum” ..... evees 7000 30 Sandstone, brown, hard. ‘‘ Show of petroleum’’...... 1010 15 Shale, grayish black ..... © is Row eh RN eee ane 1025 Shale, blue, here. 55° Sandstone, red-brown, hard 26. oceans cewssrecsisesewne 1080 70 Sandstone, red-brown, hard ...... Gideuaint Vga smas 1150 _ Here cased off the fresh surface water. 5 No record of this interval......ccceceseeeseees S Addie ae Lee Si: Shale, pink:.5e.seeep.08. 4 Giambi el Scaiboneee wily 6 Cera 6057 188 64 Shale, pink....... Cee eeh awa ues See Ry RY re be 10 ‘‘ Black slate, hard’’..... Succ bau ah atedinn ieee eisfe a 3 ceBO 90 Sandstone, red, ‘‘ like the mass at 1150’’ ............ 1350 4O* ** Bigs slate) ROG ag Cok: sa wa wouiewe was Pe Perris Bl, Here, gray sandstone. 16 Sandstone, gray, hard ; with very minute white pebbles as large as pins’ heads............--eeeee eseee 1406 3 ‘‘ Sand perfectly black and gritty ; boring easy’’ ...... 1409 Si Shale, Tight pray, gritty oo sc ws scacvcqeas Cetus ant -. 1440 T° BRIG, TOOGISN ces sacs sce Seela bee Daas Oale ona etre Siete 6 Bhale, Garvk DOG. 6h en nas n Mouees cae cey ees : 42 Shale, light gray ..... SSavss Vasneieae> conbiag aes 12 Shale, reddish, hard and gritty...... cekee ere ch wanes . 1506 89 Shale, reddish........... Reseach ewenen Gores. Net eCR Oe 15 Sandstone, bluish gray, fine grained 106k ceean dean sine 1560 9 “Coat, ANTHRACITE”’..... ans cir eaves +4 wikGee enna Here, in answer to my verbal objections to the notes in his well-book, Mr. Rosenzi explained that the thickness might be incorrect, owing to the churning of the tools, but that it was in his opinion ‘‘ certainly 5} feet ;”’ and that the ‘‘coal’’ came up in fine specks (no larger than the head of a pin) like all the other crushed and ground-up sand pumpings from the well, from top to bottom. No larger pieces were obtained ; and no analyses were made. The well was worked in brackish water, which afterwards became salt water. See below at 1616, where salt was first no- ticed on the board walls of the derrick, 10’ ** Black slate rock, very hard’”’ eee ee ee ew ee ee eee eer ee 1579/ 25 Sandstone, gray, fine, softer ...........ceeeesens sees 1604 6 Sandstone, brown, hard rock............-. «nese eee RO 6 Sandstone, gray, fine, softer ..... Pose vssecusepeencew LOL Here cased off the ‘‘ salt water,’’ 8 Sandstone, first dark, then light gray ...........0.+++ 1624 ‘* Here salt water again and plenty of it.’’ 1891.] 23 [Lesley. I could get no clear idea of this from Mr. Rosenzi’s description. He first noticed the salt as a deposit from water splashed on the derrick. The salt taste was decided. He could say nothing about the flow, as the well was always full of water, but I could not learn that any stream issued from the mouth of the well. 16/ ‘‘ Black slate, coarse, mixed with minute specks of COAL, and minute light gray pebbles .......... 1640/ 9 Sandstone, coffee-colored........ MPP PP Dy ere es oy 5 Sandstone, brown, very fine .........+.6. anaes ie be Looe 9 Sandstone, brown, very fine ............. dean ha edes 1663 21 Sandstone, brown, very fine ....... oeiicectsabevweee . 1684 5 Sandstone, brown, dark ....... yee ee oa Veiwe'ed E689 10 Sandstone, gray, dark, hard ..............4+ Vakieth .. 1699 5 Sandstone, gray, light, sharp..........sssesceseeeeees 1704 17 Sandstone, brownish red, of usual character ........ 1721 15“ Biaek slate” .cceccaces Peeleecshtes éveean at gel bts 1736 “* Oased well against salt water in black slate, at 1736.’’ ‘‘The driller remarks that here came in genuine soft black slate, which he recognized as the overlayer of the Oil Sand in Allegheny county, in the Wild Wood district where he worked.’’ Nothing could more forcibly illustrate the ignorance of the well drillers as a class than this astounding statement ; which is only exceeded by the ignorance of oil and gas specu- lators as a class, and the stockholders of the companies which they form, in giving ready credence to such statements from men whuse only inter- est is that of obtaining their daily pay for boring wells. 2’ Sandstone, gray, fine, like 1604.........eceeeeeee++++ 1738! 14 Sandstone, brown, fine, hard...........+..55- wadsade 1709 28 Sandstone, brown, Coarser.......ssccresecsescreeces 1780 Cased off salt water successfully at 1782. 5 Sandstone, brown, fine ..........e0.ee- iaanis bias 1785 Oe, OOS. WANG od due ccnenchsawead Rear NEE Se AEM 1790 80 Shale, grayish black............. DAAChe oR RGSS eRe neces LEGO 9 Shale, light gray, bluish, hard .......,...e.0sseeeees 1829 8 ‘‘Blue Monday,’’ (a term used by the drillers in West. ern Pennsylvania) ..ce.cccccscesscessercrecces 1882 26 Sandstone, bluish gray..... Be Sr nee stems ueneoenes 1858 2 Shale, gray, hard .........ceeseseee Fi vicesbaedeakse 2500 10 Shale, brown, soft.............. ile ssabaeas Wehaeleees 1870 . 8 Sandstone, gray, sharp ...........-. IPSS. MIE PAS 1878 82 Sandstone, brown (orred), hard ........... Teele 1960 85 Shale, pink (or red), soft ............. Sead Dede dwie 1995 89 Sandstone, brown, coarse (February 21, 1891)........ 2084 I suppose that the boring is to be carried on to greater depth. Lesley.] 24 [April 8, Mr. Benjamin Smith Lyman, Assistant on the Geological Survey of the State, whose Report on the Trias Brown Sandstone Belt of Bucks, Mont- gomery and Chester counties, Pa., is not yet quite ready for publication, informs me that the place assigned to coal in the above well record would come about 11,000’ below the top, or 10,000’ above the bottom of his gen- eral section of the formation ; the coal-bearing shales of Pheenixville be- ing say 3500/ or 4000’ above the conglomerate base. His long and exhaustive survey of the district has resulted in giving a combined thickness of more than 21,000 feet to these Mesozoic strata ; in a demonstration of the duplication of its measures along the Delaware river ; and in the discovery of both longitudinal and transverse anticlinal and synclinal flexures of considerable size. _The latter system of folds is a very remarkable phenomenon, seeing that the folds lie with their north- ern ends abutting against (or riding over) the Durham hills, that range of Azoic highlands which extends from Reading into Northern New Jersey. Mr. B. 8. Lyman said: Although the precise, position of the Revere, or Rufe’s Corner, well- boring has not been indicated within several hundred feet, it appears that the so-called coal bed is part of a 600 or 800 feet thick series of generally hard green and dark-red shales at something like 11,000 feet below the top of the Mesozoic rocks, mainly red shales, of Bucks and Montgomery counties, and 10,000 feet above the bottom of them, and 6000 feet above the hard blackish shales of the Pheenixville tunnel. With a sketch he showed the course of the outcrop, a mile or so in width, of the green and dark-red shales, including the so-called coal bed and one or two other blackish shale layers, with generally a gentle north- westerly dip, from the Delaware river near Milford, N.J., along the east, south and west sides of a basin to Rufe’s Corner ; thence northwestward, westward and southeastward, round Stony Point and Bucksville, in sad- dle form, east of the Haycock mountain, nearly to Ottsville; then in almost a straight line southwestward for a dozen miles, past Perkasie and Sellersville; and five or six miles further southwest, though bending slightly northward at Tylersport upon the southeastern disappearing end of a rock saddle ; but near Sumneytown bending sharply round a more im- portant saddle so as to reach Harleysville, half a dozen miles to the south- east; and there with a like decided bend in the opposite direction, but with a wider sweep, turning southwest and then nearly west, passing a little more than a mile south of Shwenksville, and so in a straight course to the Schuylkill, between Linfield and Sanatoga and some three miles below Pottstown. The course of these comparatively hard beds is marked nearly every- where by a decided ridge, particularly well defined between Ottsville and Sumneytown, and tunneled through at Perkasie, As the beds are partly green, their course is also indicated by the yellowish or greenish gray — os 1891.] 25 (Lesley. color of the surface of the ground contrasted with the red on either side from the several thousand feet of red shales above and below, except where trap replaces them above for a long distance from the Haycock southwestward. The geological structure is also well shown by very nu- merous observed dips and strikes. Here and there among the harder beds, exposures have been observed of a couple of blackish shale layers some three feet thick, perhaps identi- cal with those of the boring. One was seen by the roadside near Rufe’s Corner; two in a ravine a mile and a half north of Ottsville, where some digging was done half a dozen years ago in a vain search for coal of any economical value, though small traces of it appear to have been found ; another exposure of blackish shales was seen half a mile west of Perkasie ; and still another about a mile east of Harleysville. It is, of course, extremely improbable that the beds with a known out- crop of about sixty miles in length, cut across by numerous streams and roads and by severa] railroads and even in great part by a tunnel, and fa- miliar throughout every foot of its surface to the highly observant inhabi- tants of the country, could have a coal bed of any value that should never, until this well, have been discovered through any complete natural exposure or through an occasional] very noticeable outcropping or blos- som. Indeed, facts observable on the surface, such as measured rock ex- posures, combined with proper regard to their dips, strikes and relative position and elevation, could no doubt give a very complete section of all the beds pierced by the well ; and perhaps that will prove to be possible even with the somewhat rough collection of materials already made. From such observations on the surface, the character and thickness of each bed is to be known far more precisely and thoroughly than could be possible from any boring however careful, and beyond all comparison with the results of an ordinary one. The difficulty of accurate informa- tion from such wells is shown by the doubt in the present case whether the so-called coal bed was nine feet in thickness or five and a half. The well record, in spite of all the imperfections that must be expected, has value as giving for a great thickness of rock beds a connected view that may serve in some degree as a check upon the not very essential er- rors that might arise in combining surface observations, especially those rough ones hitherto obtained. But the chief importance of the record is perhaps as an illustration of how ready men are to lay out thousands of dollars for such explorations where the same number of hundreds would by a surface survey give fuller and more accurate information. PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XxIx. 1385. D. PRINTED May 14, 1891. Bache. ] 26 [April 17, Possible Sterilization of City Water. By R. Meade Bache. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 17, 1891.) It is an open question whether the characteristic acidity of the digestive fluids is or is not efficacious in destroying patho- genic germs entering the stomach. But it ought to be evident on both sides that neither extreme can represent the truth, even if the digestive fluids possess that general property. It is cer- tainly, on one side, too much to assume that, not even in a per- fectly healthy stomach, are those fluids sometimes capable of elim- inating such germs from the system, and, on the other, that they are always, in sickness or in health, capable of performing that task. So little vitalized are micro-organisms in their resting-stages, that it is easily conceivable that, when masked by food and water, and when the human system is in a weak condition, many escape the possibly destructive action of the healthiest digestive secretions. It would, additionally, be an unwarrantable assumption, even if the healthy stomach were proved to be able always to neutral- ize the morbific action of pathogenic germs, that they find their inevitable path and exit, with or without vitality impaired or destroyed, dead or alive, through the alimentary canal; for in point of fact we know that one kind, at least partially, takes its disastrous course directly into the lungs. When the infinitesimal size of micro-organisms is considered, and when also is consid- ered how varied is the character of the parts with which they must come into contact upon passing the csophagus, it will readily be perceived that, even if they escape the sometimes assumed destructiveness of the digestive fluids, they must often be absorbed into the blood by other tissues as well as by those of the lungs. If so believing, we should perceive at the same time that it is hopeless to contend, except by palliative sanitary measures, against the invasion of pathogenic germs through inhalation ; but that, on the other hand, especially as our food cannot be sterilized wholesale, we should deeply consider the possibility of contending with them by means of the wholesale sterilization of water, which enters alone, or as the largest constituent, into our = —<—— eS ee ee ee 1891.] 27 [Bache. drink. That this has heretofore not been attempted is all the more remarkable, because it is believed by many persons that some of the worst forms of pathogenic germs reach us through the medium of drinking water. Inasmuch, therefore, as success in sterilizing the drinking water of a large city might be of un- told benefit to it, it would be well that certain experiments were tried to that intent, upon the assumption that, be the pathogenic germs in a particular water many or few, they become, when re- ceived into the alimentary canal, whether or not large numbers of them are successfully dealt with by the stomach, injurious to the human economy. Inherent in the Anderson iron process for the purification of water is a danger which, therefore, cannot be eliminated. In all processes there is a danger line which human foresight seeks to avoid by a safety-margin, which, in the long run, and in the na- ture of things, is a substantial guarantee against harm. But there are processes such, from their character, combined with the chapter of exigencies and the chapter of accidents, that they have but a small margin of safety. I place the Anderson process in this category, as an experience at Berlin, showing the danger that may result from the overworking and freezing, or both, of open filter beds, even if so acted upon and cleansed as they are intended to be by the Anderson process, fully warrants me in doing. Moreover, it should be incidentally mentioned that the process is not applicable to the constitution of all waters, or adapted to climates that have always, or are liable to, severe winter cold. It is said, however, upon excellent authority, based upon the indisputable evidence of microscopic examina- tion, that by the process micro-organisms have, under the limit- ing conditions hereby implied, been neutralized in the proportion of 50,000 to about 20, virtually in the proportion of 50,000 to 0. But, coincidently with this result, which must obtain under favoring circumstances, there also always exists danger in the process through carelessness and neglect in filter cleansing, and necessity without law of overworking the capacity of a filter. As a finality in the process the ferric hydrate generated, blended ‘with organic matter, is precipitated in a flaky, coagulated condi- tion to the bottom of the water, the sand filter-bed of the settling reservoir, where, resting chiefly on the surface, the filter is there- fore more readily than usual cleansed. The process therefore Bache.] 28 {April 17, makes no pretense to destroy the micro-organisms, but merely to neutralize as much as possible their injurious action in the human economy, simply by entrapping them. What I contend, however, is that the best process of sterilization is that which does not seek to entrap micro-organisms, with the inseparable danger of their partial or almost entire escape alive, but that which, with abstention from their purposive arrest, kills, and allows them as free passage as possible to the stomachs of city dwellers. It will probably be thought at this point, with a very usual misconception, as that which we have in the Anderson process has proved quite efficacious, whereas that of which I speak is but an ideal, perhaps impossible of attainment, that I am proposing to accept a shadow for the substance of athing. I would grant the cogency of the thought, had I ever intended to make denial of the excellence of the Anderson process, and pro- posed to offer a possibility in exchange for a reality. But, having taken neither of these positions, I do but state the case in the abstract, and the truth of it in that form being admitted (and I do not see how it can be denied), I have but to add before proceeding that, excellent as is the Anderson process, within its acknowledged lines, it would still be well to consider if the ideal one is not capable of accomplishment by the means which I am about to suggest. About two years ago it occurred to me that before experiment- ing with bacteria, with reference to killing bacilli established in the human body, and with reference to the sterilization of city drinking water by electricity, I would pass a current through some water containing protozoa, and observe how much is re- quired to kill them. With this purpose in view I took a-glass tube of four inches in length and five thirty-seconds of an inch in calibre, and partially filled it with water teeming with protozoa from hay-infusion, which had previously been examined by me under the high power of a one-tenth microscopical objective, commanding a large field with an immersion lens, and depending upon which of two eyepieces was used, magnifying from five hundred and fifty to six hundred and fifty diameters. When both ends of the tube had been plugged up with brass eye-screws wrapped with paper, leaving their ends exposed in the tube, the volume of infusion intervening between the ends of the poles thus formed was only two-thirds of a cubic centimeter, and the 1891.] 29 [Bache. distance between the poles’only three inches.. The electro-motive force at my disposal in my galvanic battery—only about thirty volts—was too small, and the resistance too high under these conditions for me long to hope to affect the protozoa in the tube by means of the current. The smallness of the volume of fluid in which the electricity could find play, and the liberation of hydrogen which could not escape or recombine, were together the cause of this ; the resistance from the latter cause proceeding by great leaps when a higher current was eventually employed. With the infusion the resistance was far less than with pure water, but still far too great to allow of much current, owing in sum to the small volume of liquid and to the increased liberation of gas in it as compared with that liberated in water. The cur- rent was so slight that at this point of time I was satisfied that if I were not able thus to destroy the vitality of the protozoa— and that was proved by microscopical examination—a fortiori it was not to be imagined that the vitality of schizomycetes in water could be arrested, because I had assumed that they would be more difficult than the other organisms to destroy, a conclusion which I do not now think warranted by my final investigation upon the basis of experiment. I therefore desisted from experi- menting, and did not resume it until the work of Dr. Griffiths on micro-organisms came under my eye, from which I learned that he had killed bacteria with a very small current in media of a fluid character. I then resumed my experiments upon the basis of my previously enlarged experience, that a considerable volume of water is needed for the play of electricity, and that even a slowly increasing bubble of hydrogen in a closed tube, although far from effecting embolism, nevertheless produces rapidly cumu- lative resistance. Every one who deals with batteries or who is well-read in electricity knows in a general way of these pheno- mena; I am merely referring to the exaggerated degree in which they manifest themselves under the specified conditions. I was well aware that for a given amperage, a given electro-motive _ force, a given character of liquid, a given temperature, and 4 _ given distance between poles, the resistance to a line of force ot _ electricity is an absolutely fixed quantity. But as my final ob- ject, as will eventually be seen, was to charge a large volume of water so that upon being charged the electricity would concen- trate with intense energy towards the opposite pole, it became Bache.] 30 [April 17, necessary, even in laboratory experiments, to avoid action where the phenomena appear in an exaggerated adverse form. I there- fore next proceeded to deal with small but unconfined volumes of liquid. With the Wheatstone Bridge, with an electro-motive force of one hundred and ten volts, and one ampére of current, I found the resistance at two inches between the poles, placed vertically in a hay-infusion, in a round glass dish about five inches in dia- meter, to be 1560 ohms. Making the liquid a little shallower, the other conditions remaining the same, the resistance rose to 2120 ohms. In a very narrow, rectangular receptacle, the other conditions remaining virtually the same, the resistance rose to 3000 ohms. The poles being then placed in water, not in the in- fusion, in the round glass dish, the other conditions being the same as those in the first experiment, the resistance became 18,400. Slightly increasing the depth of water in the dish, the resistance sank to 13,000 ohms. These rude experiments were followed by a series conducted with two beautifully finished wooden, shellaced boxes, of exactly the same length and depth in the clear, but one of them of only half the width in the clear of the other. Thus was obtained with precision in the larger of the two (but, of course, the same consequence would have ensued with the smaller), by alternately making it exactly one-half full, . and. then full to the brim, the result that the volume thereby ver- tically obtained reduces by one-half the resistance of the lesser volume. Thus, also, by filling both boxes to the brim was ob- tained with precision the result that double the volume of liquid horizontally obtained reduces by one-half the resistance of the lesser volume. Therefore it was demonstrated that resistance in water, as well as in metal, is inversely proportional to volume as determining cross-sectional area, whether increased by vertical or horizontal extension; that is, is inversely proportional to cross-section, as dependent upon volume; and that in whichever of these two directions volume is gained, it introduces, propor- tionally, freedom of propagation of the electric force in and about the imaginary right-line joining the poles. The result of a series of experiments, with the poles placed apart at 2,4, 6,8, up to 12 inches, showed that the resistance, whatever it may be, varies directly as the distance between the poles, a result identical with that in electrically charged wire, 1891.) 31 j; [Bache. illustrating a law which should have been expected to hold good whatever figure and volume the lines of force between the poles might assume and occupy. The experiments clearly proved, too, . that the resistance of water is very much greater than that of an infusion not seemingly dense. There seems to be with some persons a belief that water is a good conductor, because current electricity so readily discharges itself by means of moistened surfaces. But current electricity so discharges itself through a film of water covering non-con- ducting surfaces in default of any other conductor whatever ; and static electricity, for the same reason, readily vanishes through aqueous vapor, because of the fact that the vapor impairs the re- sistance of dry air as a dielectric. Yet electricity, in these two manifestations, acts thus, of course, not from choice but from necessity, taking, however imperfect, a path of conduction when there is no other, and the better of two paths when they differ, in proportion to their relative conductivity. Other persons imagine that water is a worse conductor than it really is. Any one who uses a hydro-rheostat well knows the highly resistant property of water to the electric current; but as free and in large volume it is not practically so resistant as it is sometimes thought to be,as any one may prove for himself by the rude ex- periment of plunging in an ample basin of water the sponge of one reophore of a medical galvanic battery, yielding from thirty to forty volts, while the sponge of the other reophore is placed on the back of the hand submerged in the water at the distance of four or five inches. The hand, the most callous part of the body except the heel, feels the current distinctly in every part, and if it has but the smallest abrasions of the skin in places re- — mote from each other, the electric current makes them sting, finally condensing strongly at the pole on the hand. After trying the experiments described, I flashed one hundred and ten volts through a glass tube, with half of a cubic centi- meter of hay-infusion containing protozoa, with the poles half an inch apart; and also flashed one hundred and ten volts through a looped wire going from top to bottom of a small bottle con- taining four centimeters of the infusion. In neither case could subsequent microscopical examination detect that the organisms had been affected in the least. The whole of the current, of course, passed through the organisms in the tube. In the case Bache. ]} 32 | [April 17, of those treated with the looped wire it was only the residual force, which the wire did not carry, that they encountered. That , under these conditions the wire does not carry all the electricity is shown in the forthcoming description of experiments, in which the work of killing bacteria was successfully accomplished with looped wire passing through fluid media, and carrying only a very small force, but for a considerable time. With so much electro-motive force as I used—one hundred and ten volts—I could not allow the discharge through the micro-organisms to be more than momentary, else they would have been destroyed for certain by the concentrated products of electrolysis. Two main conclusions seemed to me from the beginning of my experiments to be justifiable. The first of these was that, inas- much as protozoa have no nervous system, and do not seem to be injuriously affectible by the electric current (barring its action under conditions such as generate heat almost exclusively), we are accustomed to think erroneously of the current as capable of affecting and endangering all sensation and life, solely because of our own possession, and knowledge of the possession among other animals, of a nervous organization upon which stress may be put by the current. It seemed to me that the last experiment proves what is currently believed, that an animal protoplasmic organism has, tpso facto of its being protoplasmic, no nervous system. The second conclusion at which I arrived was that, if protozoa of the kind with which I had dealt are not easily killed by the electric current, it would be hopeless to think of destroy- ing schizomycetes, except by a force which, for the practical pur- poses that I had in view, it is impossible to apply to them, espe- cially as, in the pleomorphic forms assumed by some of them, it is notorious that they possess latent vitality difficult to extirpate. I am still inclined to hold to the first conclusion, as justifiable from my experiments as far as they have even now gone, that animal micro-organisms, submerged in water or any other liquid, are not susceptible to injury from electric current approaching in force the highest that I used (which may be regarded as pro- digious when the minuteness of the organisms attacked by it is taken into consideration), and that perhaps they are not suscept- ible to injury under those conditions from any current, however high. But, as to my first conclusion, I have since found myself, upon reading the work of Dr. Griffiths, egregiously in error 1891.] 33 [Bache. through the false inference that I had drawn that, because the electric current did not destroy protozoa of the kind with which I was dealing, therefore bacteria would not be destroyed by it, at least within the bounds compatible with human life or well- being. It seems, however, that vegetable protoplasm, at least of the fungus kind, acts differently from animal protoplasm under the influence of the electric current. After reading the results of Dr. Griffiths, I gladly reverted to the intention with which I had set out in my experiments, of being able to suggest means by which bacilli forming a nidus in the human body could be destroyed and water supplied to cities could be sterilized for drinking purposes. The author to whom I have referred is Dr. A. B. Griffiths, Fel- _low of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. He remarks that the full details of his experiments with electricity on bacteria are to be found in Volume xv of the Proceedings of the Society. In making the experiments he seems to have had no ulterior object _ in view but the gaining of information as to what amount of cur- rent would destroy certain micro-organisms. The wood-cut which he gives at page 177 of his work, Micro-organisms, represents a faradaic, not a galvanic battery, as the generator of the electro- motive force used in his experiments. At the beginning of mine I used both the galvanic and the faradaic battery. The recep- tacles in which Dr. Griffiths placed pure cultures of different bacteria were simple, broad-based, short bottles, in which were fitted from top to bottom of each bottle a single loop of wire in free electric liquid communication with the micro-organisms. He does not in any case give the resistance in ohms of the media employed in the cultures. The bacillus tuberculosis was killed by 2.16 volts, the bacterium lactis by 2.26 volts, and the bacterium aceti by 3.24 volts. The electric current was allowed to pass for ten minutes, and the temperature of the laboratory during the experiments was 16 C. _ (60.8 Fah.). In another series of experiments, bacillus tuber- culosis was killed by 2.16 volts, bacillus subtilis by 2.72 volts, and bacterium allii by 3.3 volts. The current, as before, was allowed to pass for ten minutes, and the temperature of the labor- - atory was 17 C. (62.6 Fah.). In the first series of experiments no growths appeared from inoculation in fresh nutritive media, after an incubation of twenty-five days, with the thermometer at PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIX. 1385. E. PRINTED JUNE 1, 1891. Bache.] 3 £ [April 17, 38 C. (100.4 Fah.); and in the second series, similarly treated, no growths appeared after an incubation of twenty days, with the thermometer at 35 C.(95 Fah.). As before incidentally men- tioned, all of these experiments were made with wire looped in glass bottles. Consequently all the electricity that attacked the microbes away from the wires was the residuum which the wires did not conduct, necessarily by far the lesser portion ; and as the minimum of force was not sought or obtained, what is needed may be a mere fraction of the time and force actually employed, With so small a current as that used, and with the considerable volume of the respective liquids employed—which latter point the wood-cut shows—detriment to the organisms from products of electrolysis may be deemed inappreciable. It has therefore been demonstrated that certain schizomycetes can be killed in a short time by a low current. Presumably all others can be killed in an equally short time by an equally low current; which was the assumption with which I had set out at the beginning of my own experiments, looking primarily to | destroying pathogenic germs in the human body, and secondarily, to rendering them innocuous through the sterilization of water for drinking purposes. I therefore ask myself why, if avery low current, passing for a few minutes, can destroy bacteria in a bottle, should not a much higher one, administered repeatedly for the same time, be sure to destroy them in the human body? Daily, in the course of electro-therapeutic treatment, ten, twenty, twenty-five, and many more volts are administered to patients, avoiding only strong or continuous application of the current to the pneumogastric nerve, on account of the inhibitory action of the heart thereby provoked. But I will not pause just at this moment to speak more fully to this point, but will here confine myself to the main subject of this paper, clearly set forth by its title and the tenor of the preceding remarks. Reverting to the question of the sterilization of water for the use of cities, and with the new light upon the subject, which, as it appears, I might have gained for myself, but for having been diverted from my course by a false inference, I am constrained to ask my hearers, as I have asked myself in this case also, why the attempt should not be made to destroy bacteria wholesale in the drinking water of large cities by the method previously foreshadowed. The means at our command seem to me ample, It is true that 1891.] 35 [Bache. we cannot electrolize successfully a large reservoir of water, for in that the electricity would be too diffused to be effective. Itis true that, in pipes from which water is flowing into or out of the reser- voir, its germs would not be subjected to attack for more than a second. It is true that the resistance that we should have to over- _ come in water would be large. But,on the other hand, it is also true that the electric current that we have at our command is capable of indefinite increase. The electro-motive force of a few thousand volts (there are dynamos that generate ten thousand) thrown athwart a pipe of proper dimensions, would probably paralyze every bacterium in its path, more than compensating by force for slight duration in time as compared with the ten min- utes adopted in the experiments of Dr. Griffiths, as to which it is imperative to remember that they did not determine either the amount of current, or of time required, for the destruction of the bacteria experimented upon; and, consequently, it will be observed, both force and time needed are probably very much less than his experiments on their face apparently demonstrate. If lines of water-delivery as well as those of water-supply _ were subjected to the attack of the electric current, the severity of it would be more than doubled for the organisms. It would be immeasurably increased in severity; for experiments at the _ very beginning of bacteriological investigation clearly showed that the best mode of destroying bacteria involves the principle of repeating relatively moderate attacks upon them at intervals such as find them partially recuperated, and assail them in this the period of their least resistant vitality. The method to which T allude is that of repeated boiling of slight duration at moderate intervals of time. That they can bear this apparently severe process at all shows the protective influence for them of any fluid immersion within the chemical character that does not wholly ignore the difference of habits among their different species, and water seems to be a medium inclusive of them all. The principle involved in the mode of attack mentioned is the _ same as that involved in the mode of destroying bacteria here suggested. Taking it in connection with the facts that a reser- voir represents a large volume of water, only a part or a few _ parts of which are being momently drawn upon.for supply, and _ that many germs are constantly passing through natural phases _ of relatively less vitality, infinitely below that in which they, if Bache. ] 36 [April 17, pathogenic, being received into a favoring host, so vigorously form ptomaines, to their self-destruction as well as that of the host, it would seem that, if upon issuing from as well as upon entering a reservoir, the water were attacked in pipes from poles all but encircling them, with an electro-motive force of a few thousand volts, all germs must reach the denizens of cities sup- plied from such a source, wholly innocuous, because they would ; be dead. It need hardly be said that, if the poles were placed opposite to each other on a heayy metal pipe conveying water, the elec- tricity, seeking lines of least resistance, would not pass through the water at all, but around it, through the great mass of the pipe. But it should be obvious that it is easy to adapt to the place of electrical attack of a pipe a simple contrivance consist- ing of a section of the same diameter as that of the pipe, insu- lating the poles from each other, and both from the general line of the pipe. A plan that might at the first blush appear to some persons better, as not entailing thus radically breaking the con- tinuity of the main pipe, would be to have two series of metallic insulated screws, representing by position two opposing arcs, the individual screws of which should enter and pass through corresponding holes in the pipe, the ends of the screws being uninsulated. But this plan would not do at all. The experi- ments described have proved the resistance of water to be so great that a large volume of it is required for electricity to pass easily through it. Consequently, in overcoming the resistance of water in a metal pipe with poles attached, in the form of in- sulated perforating screws, part of the electricity would, in making large excursions, be received and conducted to the poles by the metal of the pipe, instead of reaching them entirely through the water. But, if the pipe were interrupted by a non- conducting section, of length to be determined by the diameter of the pipe and the electro-motive force to be used, then those excursive lines of force would eventually fall into the determinate direction of the poles entirely through the water. We see this action clearly illustrated in the previous experiment, where, in open vessels, resistance to the current rapidly diminishes as we increase the volume of the liquid. We see the same thing also clearly illustrated in the case of the hand submerged in the ample basin of water, where the remotest abrasions of the skin 1891.] 37 [Bache. sting from the current, finally emerging with condensed force at the pole resting on the submerged hand. In a pipe with a prop- erly calculated non-conducting section, the lines of force would play freely inside of the pipe, occupying and limiting there a rounding imaginary space, varying in figure with every change of force, but always, of course, having its apices at the poles, approaching which, and especially at which, would be concen- trated their intensest energy. If the full significance and legitimate outcome in conclusion from the experiments that have been detailed have been per- ceived, it will have been realized that, although water acts like wire with reference to conductivity, through length, cross-sec- tional area, and temperature—exemplifying the law of conduc- tion by and resistance to the electric current, with reference to volume, however disposed—the difference between wire and water, notwithstanding that metal has great conductivity and water very little, is enormous with reference to difference of capacity. We have but to determine, first of all, what electro- motive force is needed for the purpose of destroying germs in water, assuming that they are thus destructible, and then, upon _that basis, determine what the length and cross-section of non- conducting pipe should be to accumulate and discharge the force required. One could charge a constant stream of water in an insulated pipe as never wire nor any congeries of wires nor any metallic deposit on earth could be charged with electricity ; for whereas all these would soon reach their utmost capacity for localized energy, an insulated flowing pipe has back of it all earth ready to receive and effectively return the force transmitted. We, however, need for our purpose at most only a small area of that vast space. But yet it is true, and a striking exemplifica- tion of the stated fact that, given a dynamo of far less than in- finite power, with poles astride an estuary’s living stream, so wide, so deep, that the earth there would not fuse before a fiery blast engendered by resistance, and connected as those waters _ are with every drop in every brook, the encircling oceans, and the interlying land, it would send its impulse thence over the _ whole uninsulated globe, and backward, in myriad lines of force, _ with all but synchronous and omnipresent thrill. I stated at the beginning of my discourse that it is an open - question whether or not the stomach is capable of destroying Bache.] 38 [April 17, pathogenic germs. In that, of course, is involved the other open question, whether or not ordinary drinking-water is the source of disease. I have properly spoken of the questions as open ones, because so many persons are enlisted on opposite sides that I cannot venture without arrogance to decide them authoritatively. The tenor of the preceding remarks, however, must indicate that, personally, I believe drinking-water supply to be ordinarily one of the largest factors in the causation of some zymotic diseases; but lest I may have left it in doubt that I hold that view, I here state it explicitly. I have,I confidently believe, pointed out one way in which the evil may be abated, and perhaps neutralized; and this without disparagement of the efficiency of subsidence basins in their adverse influence upon bacterial dissemination. As to this (with the exception of treat- ment with iron) the last remaining factor in the production of pure drinking-water, I shall be glad to take amore opportune time than the present occasion, when I have so long engaged the attention of the Society, to prove directly, from my still later experiments and observations, what seems directly proved by the statistics of prevalence of typhoid fever in Philadelphia and elsewhere with reference to areas of different water-supply, that subsidence basins are also an important factor in the health of a city, not only relieving water of impurities in it, represented by alluvial and effete matter in suspension, but also relieving it in a measure of the impurity due to simultaneous deposition of the bacterial bearers of poison to our homes. As to our ability to destroy the bacillus tuberculosis in the human body, by means of percutaneous administration of the electric current, I hope that I may be allowed to say a final word. I cannot see,as I have already remarked, why, if it can be killed in a bottle with a mere fraction of two volts (as I have shown by the experiments of Dr. Griffiths that it must have been killed), it cannot be killed in the patient suffering from tuberculosis, by the enormously greater electro-motive force that the body is capable of receiving without detriment in a con- centrated form, This statement, however, is not intended to imply that the current would be capable of curing a case of tuber- culosis which had involved caseous degeneration of the parts. If it did, it would also imply that to my mind electricity is creative. Electricity, however, although not creative, includes : 1891. | 39 [| Lesley. among its manifold and marvelous properties not only dynamic power,but attributes regenerative of vitality, and with these two it is capable, if the experiments of Dr. Griffiths are to be relied upon, of killing the bacillus tuberculosis in the living human body, in case the lesions of the disease have not seriously im- paired electric conductivity in the parts morbidly invaded; and capable also of contributing to restore healthy function to them, and thence normal structure. It remains for physicians to make the essay here indicated at no expense or risk whatever. If the treatment prove to have any virtue in it,it would apply to other bacterial diseases besides tuberculosis. In regard to the essay with reference to the sterilization of drinking-water, experiments could be made at no great labor and expense compared with the vast interests at stake in a large city. Through microscopic tests would soon be set at rest the question as to whether to any, and if to any, to what extent germs could, by the means described, be destroyed in city water, and scrutiny of the health of the city, within the lines especially of certain diseases, through comparison of present with past records, would in successive years have its own independent and conclusive tale to tell. I pledge Philadelphia prospectively in a bumper of pure water more worthy of celebration than the best Falernian wine. Obituary Notice of P. W. Sheafer. By J. P. Lesley. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 3, 1891.) Peter Wenrich Sheafer was born at Wiconisco, in Dauphin county, Pa., March 1, 1819. His father, Henry Sheafer, was afterwards President of _the Lykens Valley Railroad Company, and Superintendent of the Lykens Valley Coal Company, mining the finest quality of anthracite coal, at the west end of the Southern Anthracite Coal field. The discovery of the Lykens valley coal bed in the body of the Pottsville Conglomerate was one of the astonishing incidents of Pennsylvania geology, and enabled the Sheafers, father and son, to establish a great trade in anthracite coal upon the line of the Susquehanna river as far as Baltimore. Peter Sheafer was engaged at various times in his long professional life in following the outcrop of this interconglomerate coal around the edges Lesley.] 40 [April 3, of the Southern and Middle fields, but without finding it in an equally good condition in any other parts of the region. He often expressed to me his hopes and his disappointments regarding it. It was but an episode in his career, for his large fortune was chiefly accumulated by the pur- chase and exploitation of the Mammoth and ee large beds overlying the Conglomerate. After leaving school, Peter took a full course at Oxford Academy, New York. with the object of a better geological acquaintance with coal and coal mining. But at that early date, the science of geology could hardly be said to exist. In 1835, the New Jersey and Virginia State surveys, and in 1836 the Pennsylvania survey, were begun. Prof. H. D. Rogers’ first assistants were Mr. Booth, afterwards the chemist of the United States Mint, and Mr. Frazer, afterwards Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. The following year, Mr. Trego, Mr. Mc- Kinney, Dr. Whelpley, and others were appointed assistants on the sur- vey. In 1838, Peter W. Sheafer received his. commission, while Dr. Whelpley had charge of the Southern and Middle field, and Mr. McKin- ley of the Northern field. Henderson and I were the next year Whelp- ley’s aids, and I saw little or nothing at that time of Peter Sheafer, who was busy with his own part of the field work, and was laying the founda- tion of that accurate knowledge of the order and quality of each coal bed which enabled him afterwards to make himself easily the principal practi- cal mining engineer of the anthracite region. His mind and the training of it was just suited to this work of his life. He had good judgment, in- exhaustible liking and ability for work, a retentive memory, a quick eye for money values, a peaceable disposition, great caution in undertaking, and pertinacity in accomplishing the exploitation of properties. He made himself personally acquainted with everybody and everything that hap- pened or was likely to happen in the anthracite world, and kept himself in constant intercourse with owners, investors, speculators, mining pros- pectors, engineers, and railroad companies ; and, what was the key to his fortune, never rode hobbies, or allowed himself to be turned aside into other pursuits; although at various times in his life he traveled far to examine and report upon distant coal fields for those who employed him as a professional adviser. I have known, also, of his reports on iron-ore properties and oil and gas lands. He was also a great collector of statis- tics, and was the first to conceive the idea of a statistical coal pagoda, with lines drawn across it at regular intervals to represent successive years, the old legendary 365 tons of anthracite sent to market the first year forming the apex of the pagoda, and its successive stories, bulging or being over- hung according as the anthracite market received a greater or less addi- tion to its ever-swelling volume of trade. He was for many years the recognized authority for the statistics of the region. In 1848, he married Miss Harriet Whitcomb, of New England, and set up his home and office in Pottsville, the capital of the anthracite country, For forty-three years this has been his happy, hospitable, and elegant 1891.] 41 [Lesley. residence, and here his children, Louise, Arthur, William, and Harry were born and educated, his sons becoming partners in his enterprises, sharing the toils, the responsibilities, and the wealth of their father, and fitted well to maintain the honor of his name. In 1850 Peter Sheafer took an active and influential part in the effort inaugurated by William Parker Foulke of Philadelphia and other gen- tlemen to obtain an appropriation from the Legislature for publishing Prof. H. D. Rogers’ Final Report on the Geology of the State. Half of the appropriation was tobe spent in field work, to bring the Report up to date, especially that part of it which related to the anthracite coal fields. Mr. Rogers formed a corps, consisting of Peter Sheafer and his cousin, John Sheafer, for underground surveys ; myself for surface topography ; Edward Desor, of Neuchatel, for the study of the surface deposits, and Leo Lesquereux, of Columbus, O., for the study of the coal plants. This work only lasted one year, and this corps was disbanded, but a good deal of special work was done in the following year or two in other parts of the State ; and the Report did not appear until 1858. _ At the organization of the Second Survey of the State, in 1874, Peter Sheafer’s business interests were too exacting and important to permit of his taking an active personal hand in it, but he did all that he could to ‘ further the interests of the survey at Harrisburg and elsewhere through the following fifteen years of the continuance of the survey ; and lam happy to say that the intimate friendship which he and I formed in 1851 was confirmed and continued with unabated cordiality to the present time. His son Arthur was commissioned as Mr. Ashburner’s assistant in the long and difficult survey of McKean, Elk, Cameron, and Forest counties, where he exhibited great abilities for field and office work in- herited from his father; and the greatest part of the ‘‘ Report on Elk County,’’ with its illustrations, is from Arthur Sheafer’s own pen. Peter Sheafer was a genial and lovable man, a religious man, and, what always struck me as very interesting, a man of poetical temperament, and a reader of the poets. But he was never properly trained to express his thoughts in a style of elegant composition. His business writings were unexceptionable. His statements of business facts and contracts were sat- isfactory, but he was unused to a logical, consecutive, well-systematized and picturesque presentation of a subject. This is, of course, to be as- cribed to his lack of youthful classical training. I have often thought of him as that one of my friends whose life career best illustrated the advan- tages and disadvantages of college discipline. For by not going to college he gained more than he lost, and enjoyed great worldly and soci:l pros- perity at the very small cost of missing literary facility. I even doubt that the lack of technical school training in his profession as civil and mining engineer was at any time an obstacle in his path of life. He learned enough to join his experienced father in earlier enterprises; and in after ones his intercourse with business men and technical books and PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XXIX. 135. F. PRINTED JUNE 1, 1891. Lesley.] 42 : [April 8. professional experts supplemented his own experiments and kept his in- tellectual ability abreast of the public needs of each succeeding year. My friend Sheafer was a silent man, I should say reticent, always smiling and cheery in conversation, but seldom or never allowing even to his enthu- siasm more than a momentary flash of expression. He had the confirmed habits of a good listener; and what he himself had to say was said in the fewest words the theme permitted or the occasion demanded. He was ~ intently sympathetic, and loved to hear others talk ; his own contributions being chiefly made in the shape of facts. No ‘man better appreciated those whom he loved or respected, and this he owed to his ead tem- perament. One of the best instances of his ingenuity is his successful: device for gobbing up a mine by boring down to its heading from the surface and causing a stream of water to carry down the bore-hole the fine slack or braize coal from a neighboring dust-hill. The coal-mud thus introduced into the abandoned workings is banked back behind loose brattices which let the water flow through but retain the mud, which in some months becomes solid and firm enough to hold up the roof; and then the work- ings are reopened and the mine is robbed of its pillars. The coal usually lost by the crushing of the pillars is thus saved without danger to the miners ; and the country is also saved from caving and settling ; which en-- tails a further profit, inasmuch as the coal beds above the one worked out are preserved intact for future mining. Schuylkill county ought to erect a statue to Peter W. Sheafer for this invention alone. He became a member of the American Philosophical Society, July 17, 1863. He wasa member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia, of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, of the American Insti- tute of Mining Engineers, and of the American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science. His philanthropic feelings induced him to become a member of the American Colonization Society. His death took place at Brown’s Mills, Burlington, N. J., to which he had been taken from Atlantic City in the hope of saving his life, and he was buried at Pottsville, March 31, 1891. He was six months my senior in age ; and now I remain the last one of that old set of the first geological survey of our State. They are all gone—H., D. Rogers, Booth, Frazer, McKinney, Trego, Holl, Boyé, R. E. Rogers, Haldeman, Whelpley, Hodge, Jackson, Henderson, McKinley, Sheafer— not one lives to tell the adventures of those early days of our science, when the very foundation principles of it had to be laid, and the physical constitution of Pennsylvania had to be discovered, without experience and without instruction, The bare outlines of the story have been told ; but the individual life of that story will never be told ; is, in fact, un- tellable. 1891.] 43 [Carter and Lesley. Artesian Wellin Lowest Trias at Norristown. Notes by Prof. 0. C. 8. Carter. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 1, 1891.) Drilled in the Trias of Norristown, near Stony creek, for water for steam boilers. We NOGO SIGUE Sic ic cs ui swies ctccateedaccceeteaesss to 15/ 23 Sandstone, light colored, coarse grained, i tencugmy fragments of orthoclase feldspar..... pesabeatsoee 38 33 Sandstone, dull red, fine grained, with specks of mus- covite. Color due to iron oxide........ Srdsdvese UE 81 Sandstone, light pink (produced by pink orthoclase), fine grained; quartz grains transparent; fine specks of muscovite mica............++0+. scenen Tae Water was struck every ten feet down to 70; none thence to 90 ; abun- dance of water between 70 and 102 (located by the driller at 95, 100 and 102); cased at 18 with 6 inch pipe (5 inside). Steam pump furnished 1008 gallons per hour. After pumping 4000 gallons, the level of water in well fell 12 feet ; after 7500 gallons, it fell 16 feet and stood. Analysis of well water gave 11.8 degrees of hardness, as compared with 6 degrees for Schuylkill river water ; 14 degrees for English surface New Red water (Wanklyn); and 17 degrees for English deep well, New Red water. The lime exists mostly as carbonate, with some sulphate, and probably comes from the cement between the sandstone grains. Another artesian well, situated within a hundred feet of this one, gave water which precipitated in the boilers a fine white powder of carbonate of lime, which did not cake and was easily blown out. This well water is therefore as useful in steam boilers as is Schuylkill river water; and is better, because it holds no mud or sand in suspension. A little soda neu- tralizes the sulphate of lime. The water also becomes perceptibly softer after continued pumping. Artesian Well in Lowest Trias, at Norristown. Well drilled about half a mile from the Trenton limestone, which out- crops at Mogee’s Station, on the Schuylkill river, to obtain water for the manufacture of artificial ice. Cased at 28 feet with 6 inch pipe. 80’ Sandstone, very white and fine graincd, containing a little pink orthoclase . ......ceeeeeeeees dske ee to 30’ Carter and Lesley. ] 44 [May 1, 5/ Sandstone, white, containing coarse. fragments of orthoclase. ...... vida ercdes Frere ee 35/ 6 Shale, dark red. ...... pases Nees (gee SEIO ATS 41 14 Sandstone, white, containing muscovite mica........ 55 10 Sandstone, lighter color, more feldspathic. .......... 65 3 Sandstone, very white, fine grained..............2 68 6 Sandstone, dark red, coarse, containing much iron oxide and a little mica:....... S ebeweseeeeneuee as 74 4 Shale red tins aia sees SPiPesr peer roy hig seu bee rwers 78 18 Sandstone, red, fine, micaceous. ......... Re ee ar se 96 ET POUMIOG TOU. oes kicks watt Sraleiore salen neta ERAS BEG 100 Water was first struck between 35 and 40. More than ten ‘‘crevices’’ [probably water cracks] passed between 35 and 100. The water now rises to within 16 feet of surface. Steam pump delivers 1500 gallons per hour. After ten hours’ pumping the water falls only 10 feet in well, the whole fall occurring, however, in the first 45 minutes. With an im- proved pump 3000 gallons per hour were obtained. Water Well in Lowest Trias, at Washington Square, Montgomery County. 22’ Sandstone, red, MiCACCOUS. ..cceccscecccesecseceies to, 22/ 12 Clay, stiff, red seer er reee eeeereresr eeeeeereererenereee 84 1 Shale, red (Zrias). .....seeeee Sane eesinmahaies Wsske des 85 Water first struck at 16 feet ; a crevice every 3 or 4 feet; stands at 11 feet from the surface, and never falls lower, no matter how much is pumped, at the rate of 1500 gallons per hour. Artesian Well in Trias, in Worcester Township, Montgomery County, Pa. Drilled on the Duffield farm, on the north bank of Stony creek, at the crossing of the Stony Creek Railroad, between Custer and Belfry, through New Red (Trias) red shale and clay slates, some of them blackened with coaly matter. 20’ Clay slate, gray, hard ; little mica....... ope cb aves vO Coe 5 Clay slate, blackened with coaly matter........++.+++ 25 OD RUBIS, FO. cbc ss.05sn0005 eases papa neame cote o sakeweniente 5 Clay slate, dark, fine grained....... § big es nik i¥e's aibi oin' ae 5 Clay slate, very black, hard, compact...... 9 Vecens ocean MO 8 Shale, red,..... Sens vaatn vente ok euG caren Keleaenaunn 43 D * Quartetta” «coc scan vicveen stone ses 66eews sivwtee wivis silk Me 8 Clay slate, gray...... sebeerercocevesscsese ehaes dee . 48 17 Clay slate, compact, hard. ......... oo sebnvepee setae. ee The quarteite was said by the driller to be so hard that he could only drill six inches of it in ten hours. 1891.] 45 (Carter and Lesley. Water was first struck at 88 ; again at 65; nowhere else. Water stands at 15 feet of the surface ; yields 60 gallons per hour; drops 25 feet after pumping 6 hours. Evidently the Stony creek water soaks slowly through the bed planes between the clay slates. Artesian Well in Lower Silurian Limestone, in Montgomery County, Pa. Drilled on Charles Kunkle’s farm, south side of the Valley Green road, east of the Bethlehem pike, north-northeast of Flourtown. 40’ Limestone, not micaceous. .....-+--+++-++e. sited to 40/ 20 Limestone, micaceous..........++.+- a ES Water first struck at 40’; depth of well 60’; several small ‘‘ crevices ;’ water stood at 35 feet beneath the surface, and was not lowered by steam pumping 500 gallons per hour. Artesian Well in Lower Silurian Limestone, at Parkesburg, Pa. By Prof. J. P. Lesley. Mr. P. H. Gibbons, Vice-President of the Parkesburg Iron Co., at Parkesburg, Chester county, Pa., was good enough to furnish me by letters dated January 1, February 9 and February 11, 1886, with fragmentary notes of the boring, and forty-five samples for examination, which I have in bottles, the depth in feet recorded on the corks, and finely powdered specimens on glass slides for microscopic use. Soil, first passed through........cseccerecseccecceceses 18/ Limestone struck............- GELS IW caver deste at 20 Quicksand encountered..... crcmaaie Sepucccccesbisn ae BO Cased quicksand Out. .......-+ceeeseeeeeeeees cosccee Bt 24 Limestone (‘‘ bastard ’’), more dense and solid. ......to 42 Quicksand again. ............ Gueevantebsduacéescssc Be 6B Limestone...... pe een apres Seesebeeens sued dbase to 53 Quicksand, with flow of water. errr Teree esate Bt: 58 Limestone, Ppurer......eecccccceccess ReKcaah es ¢aseeeGat Om Sandstone, yellow, fine grained, 7 thick.......se00..t0 99 Limestone, of varying qualities, sometimes sandy, ‘‘ then mica, then lime or marble ;’’ no water. ........ to 174 Limestone, of varying nature.......ss.eeeeees see ee est 522 Specimens examined under the lens, at the following depths: 27’ Resembles a sandstone, light gray, with white fracture, some quartz crystals and a show of mica. _ 82 Same as above, with a trace of iron oxide. Carter and Lesley.] 46 ; [May 1 84’ Same as above, with an increase of mica. 37 48 60 69 79 90 472 486 502 Same as above. : Same material, but blackish gray. More carbonate of lime, and some mica ; reddish crystals, peroxide of iron. Large percentage of carbonate of lime. Limestone. Limestone. Quicksand, yellowish white. Same as last. Limestone ; mica and quartz in quantity. Limestone, reddish. Limestone, bluish light gray, mica. Limestone, with yellowish red crystals. Limestone, white, fine grained. Same as last. Same as last. Limestone, grayish white. Same as last. Same as last. Same as last. Same as last. Same as last. Limestone, hard, and fine grained, light gray, white. Same, increasing in hardness. Same as last. Same, gray and white ; show of mica. Same, darker gray ; more mica. Same as last. Same, bluish gray ; coarse granules, Same as last. Same as last. Same, granules finer ; show of mica. Same, grayish white, still finer; less mica. Same as last. : Same, dark gray, mica, iron. Same, more crystalline (rhombohedral); more mica. Same, crystalline, dark gray. Same, crystalline, gray and white. Same, fine crystals, light gray. Same, finer granules, very hard; with mica. Same, perfectly crystalline ; more mica and feldspar. One slide prepared to show crystalline forms. The occasional dissemination of minute flakes of mica and fine grains ot feldspar through the limestone is better evidence of the deep-sea lt ha i 1891.] 47 [Carter and Lesley. deposition of these Ordovician or Lower Silurian limestone beds than is the silica in quartz form which they contain. The beds are highly tilted to the south ; therefore the vertical hole ex- aggerates the thickness. The formation is probably ‘‘Calciferous’’ Wo. IIa, but no fossils have been found just here. .No record of water ob- tained. Artesian Well in Potsdam Sandstone, in Montgomery County, Pa. Notes by O. C. 8. Carter. Drilled on William Janeas’ property, near Williams Station, at the crossroads, south of Lancasterville, and east of Spring Mill, the Plymouth Railroad sweeping around it on the southwest. 64’ Sandstone (Potsdam No. I), coarse ...... PP RP RES to 64’ 6 Sandstone, fawn colored, micaceous......... aoe ane aie 70 10 Sandstone, light brown, fine........ piecavenseawune -. 80 10 Sandstone, coarse, micaceous, transparent quartz. .... 90 22 Sandstone, fine, micaceous............sceseseesseces 112 6 Sandstone, very coarse, larger fragments of quartz, En TOG ITOMMEOING. % cnc ics ccd envcdsccwecnauerces 118 4 Sandstone, coarse .......sesccaccees Neacaee a te ceteaa) ae 4 Sandstone, fine, grayish brown.............- aseccecs, 100 4 Sandstone, coarse, fawn colored. .......... wie piper dee o.) 2 Sandstone, fine, resembling ground ginger. .......... 132 No conglomerate like that of the Willow Grove Potsdam outcrop passed through ; beds tightly laid so that water crevices were few and insignifi- cant. No water struck until the drill reached 80. Water rose and stood at 70. Steam pump delivered only 300 gallons per hour ; water falling 10 feet after pumping 10 hours. Artesian Well of Chalybeate Water, in Chester Vulley Clays, near King of Prussia, Montgomery County, Pa Notes (condensed) of Prof. Oscar C. 8. Carter. Drilled on William Thomas’ land ; 90 feet deep; water, deep brown (cider) color, even after 30,000 gallons had been drawn by a steam pump in three days ; bubbles of carbonic acid gas constantly escaping ; water not clear after standing several days; precipitate, analyzed, was car- bonate of iron; precipitation not complete after a week. 85’ Yellow clay...... CRD On) bGaiold ble.cintae 2 elahe tis S05 > OAs Grams. Grams. C.c. Hours. ~-em.' (1) .1974 -0133 700 1 1.58 6 Velcade .0106 Be 23 3.16 3 Rog .0093 re ny 4,75 ib ea -0084 e ay 6.33 G3 Be .0078 Ss * nee 7.91 (oy >=" .0073 ss i 9.50 i Dai .0064 oh = 12.66 The area of the electrodes was (3.8 cm. x 3.48 cm.) X 2, free acid pres- ent10c.c. (1) was slightly spongy. (7) was very close to the edge of the dish. The diminution was (1-2) .0027 grams, (2-3) .0013 grams, (3-4) .0009 grams, (4-5) .0006 grams, (5-6) 0005 grams. The current gave 1.75 c.c. OH gas per minute. The foregoing experiments were performed in a crystallizing dish 15.2 cm. by 7.6 cm., with a capacity of 900 c.c. In the following series the determinations took place in a beaker 10cm. in height by 7.6 cm. in diameter, ‘cho dapensal. H,0. Time. peer Grams, Grams. €.c, Hours. em. (1) .1434 .0302 200 1 1.58 (@) * .0248 woe * 8.16 cay." .0208 = 5: 4.75 @* ™ .O172 ae os 6.33 The current gave 1.75 ¢.c. oxyhydrogen gas per minute, area of electrodes (3.8 cm. x 3.16 em.) x 2, free acid present 5 c.c. The diminu- tion was (1-2) .0054 grams, (2-3) .0040 grams, (3-4) .0036 grams. In both series the rate of diminution rapidly lessened as the distance between the electrodes increased, Experiments male under conditions similar to the above, except that no free acid was present, were failures, the deposits being exceedingly spongy. LSS See eer er 1891.] 1 1 1 (Warwick. I. INFLUENCE OF DILUTION UPON THE PRECIPITATION OF CADMIUM. sat ig peer H.O. Freeacid. Time. Mgt on) af Grams. Grams, ¢.c. C.C. Hours, c.c. (1) .0994 sees 100 none 3 1.75 (2) .0497 tee a6 s 4 ‘6 (3) .0994 re 5 4 ‘ (4) “ .0218 rg 5 1 AS (5) .0497 0109’ + 5 ee “ (6) .0248 .0053 “ 5 zt “ (7) .0124 .0026 ee 5 “ “ (8) .0062 0011 we +s “ “ In (1) and (2) no free acid was added, and in (3) only .5 c.c. was pres- ent ; all three were failures. The amount of acid was then increased to 5 c.c., and the experiment repeated, all the other conditions remaining the same. The deposit was adherent and compact. The poles were 3.16 cm. apart, and had an area of (2.85 cm. X 3.8 cm.) x 2. Il. INFLUENCE oF TEMPERATURE UPON THE PRECIPITATION OF CapDMIUM. DRI) Casale wo: ° wregdeit, MO,enaper . Terpergtnry in Grams. Grams. 6.c. t.¢. C.c. (1) .1281 .0240 150 10 1.75 20° (2) se cagtahe “e se “ec 40° (3) .0497 .0088 ¢ 145 25 by 20° (4) “ce 9 0110 “ec “e “ 49° (5) “ee .0210 “ “ sé 60° (6) ‘e 0257 F “é “e “e 80° (2) was very spongy and was covered with a white gelatinous deposit resembling cadmium hydrate. The amount of cadmium was then dimin- ished more than half, while the amount of formic acid present was in- creased to 25 c.c. (5) and (6) were somewhat spongy but adherent. The increase was (20°-40°) 0022 grams, (40°-60°) .0100 grams, (609-80) .0047 grams. The amount of metal deposited increased with rise of temperature, being greatest at 80°, but the greatest ratio of increase was at 60°, being ulmost five times greater than at 40°, and more than twice as great as at 80°. These results were so different from those obtained with copper that a second series of determinations was made, in which the amount of cadmium in the solution was reduced still more in order to insure a com- pact deposit at the higher temperatures, The results which. were in close accord with those above are as follows : Cadmium Cadmium H,0. Free acid. OH per Temperature in taken. deposited. minute. degrees Cent. Grams. Grams. c.c. c.c. C.c. (1) .0198 .0022 135. 15 1.25 20° (2) “eé 00381 “ se “é 40° (3) “cc 0078 “ce ce “ee 60° Oa. .0102 e “ “ sce Warwi IIT. ck] 112 [Nov. 6, INFLUENCE OF POLE SEPARATION UPON THE PRECIPITATION OF CADMIUM. presente to] dsp H20 Grams. Grams. ce. (1) .099. ee 700 (3). 388 .0059 =a (ayo .0023 ne CC SE de .0009 ee 4st Po field .0002 $5 {5)= 0285 eiecertk = OH gas per minute. Cc 2.2 1.25 8 Separation of electrodes. cm. 1.58 “e “ec 3.16. 6.33 12.66 Although 20 c.c. of free formic acid was present in (1) and (2) both were failures, the latter, though it was weighed, being merely approxi- mate, some particles having been washed off. The current was then reduced to .8 c.c. HO gas per minute. Adherent deposits were obtained, but in such small quantity that (5) yielded only a trace. The ratio of diminution was (3-4) .0014 grams, (4-5) .0007 grams. Area of electrodes (3.8 cm. X 8.48 em.) X 2, time 1 hour, free acid present 10 ¢.c. I. INFLUENCE OF DILUTION UPON THE PRECIPITATION OF ZINC. present. Grams. .1250 -0625 -1250 -0625 0313 -0156 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Zine Zine deposited. Grams. -0300 .0155 .OLT3 .0083 .0043 .0028 H20. C.c. 100 Free acid. c.c. 5 25 5. t 3 (1), (2), () and (6) were spongy, especially the last. the poles 3.16 cm. Area (2.85 cm. x 3.8 cm.) X 2, time one hour, OF gas per minute. c.c. 1.75 ce Distance between Il. Inrivence or TEMPERATURE UPON THE PRECIPITATION OF ZINC. (1) (2) (3) (4) . (5) (6) (7) (¥) (9) (10) (11) (12) * Zine taken. Grams. 1539 .1026 .1026 aepanied: H0. Grams. c.c, Jane 150 0145 a8 .0029 145 0019 es -0010 oe Free acid. c.c, 10 OH per Temperature in minute. degrees Cent, 200 400 _ 1891.] 11 3 (Warwick. (1), (3), ) and (6) were very spongy. In (4), (10) and (11) no deposition of metal took place, (12) was spongy and was covered with a white coat- ing of zinc hydrate. At 80° no metal was deposited in the presence of free.acid provided the current was not too strong. The ratio of decrease with rise of temperature was (20°-40°) 10 grams, (40°-60°) 9 grams, (60°- 80°) no deposit. The distance between the poles was 2.85 cm. Area of electrodes (3.8 cm. x 3.16 cm.) xX 2. Duration of experiment, one hour. Ill. INFLUENCE oF POLE SEPARATION UPON THE PRECIPITATION OF Zinc. SUD he Benceteddl::'Vaeide> Aas SREP Time.» Pee aie Grams. Grams. €.C. €.c. c.c, Hours. em. (1) .0102 -0046 10 700 1.9 3 1.58 re ia .0023 af af os 3.16 (3) “ce 0015 “e se se ce 6.33 (4) ‘a 0003 “ce “ce se ‘é 12.66 Area of electrodes (3.8 em. x 8.48 cm.) X 2. The deposit was firm and — compact. Compared with the results obtained with copper and cadmium, the result in (4) is too low. T LEAD (DETERMINED ELECTROLYTICALLY). On account of tendency of lead and manganese to separate in the form of peroxide at the positive pole, it was deemed advisable to make a series of experiments on the metals themselves before attempting to effect their separation. The results were as follows : ee Sbond. ean, ae ER ree ES. Grams. Grams. C:¢. c.c. c.c. Hours. (1) .1153 eetace 5 100 i, 16 wees (a) Wa 20 “ 1.2 48 wee ii tet 5 a 2.8 3 waa CAS) 7 #8 Ver 20 mz as 16 ways 50 c.c. of a lead formate solution were used in each of the above experi- ments. In all of them, the lead was deposited in a spongy state at the kathode with more or less peroxide on the positive pole. As the moist metal deposited on the kathode rapidly oxidizes, even when adherent and compact, the results obtained are invariably too high ~ aud in practice it is customary to estimate lead as peroxide on the anode securing its deposition in that form by the addition of nitric acid to the solution. The results obtained with free formic acid, as given above, were not such as to justify attempting its separation from either copper, cadmium or zine. - Warwick.] 1 14 [Nov. 6, MANGANESE (DETERMINED ELECTROLYTICALLY). Manganese Manganese Free HO. OH gas Time. Difference taken. found. acid. per min. from theory. Grams. Grams. 6.c. CC: C.¢. Hours. Percentage. (1) .0554 -0552 5 100 2.2 17 —.36 (2). .0556 ‘e es 2.7 18 +.36 (3) .1108 -1101 20 % 2.8 24 —.63 (4) .0554: Aas 30 ay 1.6 16 Gite The platinum dish was made the anode, the wire spiral serving as the negative pole. With small quantities of free acid, (1) and (2), consider- able peroxide of manganese, separated on both poles, with larger quan- tities, (3) (4), only very slight traces were found on the kathode. The deposition in (4) was not complete. The peroxide formed a black, lus- trous coating on the dish, adherent while moist, but scaling off upon being heated. ; The manganese which separated on the kathode was removed by means of a small piece of filter paper, which was ignited and the ash added to the contents of the dish, which was then raised to an intense heat in order to convert the peroxide of manganese into Mn,0,, in which form it was finally weighed. Traces of Mn were found in solution (3). ELECTROLYTIC SEPARATIONS. CADMIUM FROM MANGANESE. OO aeEene = found.” acta: “BO! er yeae lm eee Grams. Grams, Grams. cc. C.6. C.c. Hours. Percentage. (1) .0497 .0554 .0425 85 5 8 16 inion = _ .0440 ve ee 1 a wean 2" = .0498 25 - 2.7 17 +.20 (4) .0511 “ 0509 200i ** = Bk 19 —.39 6) patent si .0697 5 150 2.7 18 sie (6) .1022 -1108 .1098 20 75 2.5 17 one Cay") #8 si cece 40 150 2.8 45 eee (8) .O511 0554 0514 80 75 2.7 18 +.58 In the preliminary experiments on manganese alone, it was found that the presence of 20 c.c. of free acid was sufficient to prevent the deposition of any peroxide on the kathode, except in the very slightest traces; but the presence of cadmium in the solution seemingly had a contrary effect, as the presence of even 40 c.c. of acid failed to prevent the separation of traces of manganese on the negative pole (7). In (5), to which 5 c.c, of free acid had been added, the deposit of peroxide of manganese upon the negative pole was almost five times greater than in a solution of manga- nese to which no cadmium had been added, all the other conditions being the same, In all the above experiments the platinum dish was used as 115 (Warwick. 1891.} the anode, the platinum crucible serving as the negative electrode. In (1) and (2) the cadmium was not completely deposited. Traces of cad- mium were found in (6) and (7). More or less manganese was found in all the deposits, but only in traces in the presence of more than 20 c.c. of free acid ; (4) and (7) were very spongy ; the others were slightly so at the periphery of the crucible, but adherent. The best results were obtained by fulfilling the conditions described in (3), (4) and (8); but to obtain a compact deposit of cadmium free from all traces of manganese, it is evident that the amount of frec acid must be increased and the poles separated. Under these conditions, a stronger current must be employed than that furnished by the battery of ‘‘crowfoot”’ cells, with which my experiments were carried on. ZINC FROM MANGANESE. Zine Free H.0: OH gas Time. Difference M Zinc taken. “te a found. acid. per min. from theory. Grams, Grams. 5: 6.8. €.c, c.c. Hours. Percentage. (1) .0562 0554 aaa 30 90 2.9 17 (2) “ “ ee 16ee | « 16 ae The dish served as anode, the crucible as kathode. Both were failures; the zinc being spongy and containing MnO, and not entirely precipitated. CoPpPpER FROM ZINC. Copper Zinc taken. Copper Free H.0 OH gas Time. Difference taken, found, acid. * per min. from theory. Grams. Grams. Grams. ©.¢. cc. ec. Hours. Percentage, (1) .1074 0818 vate 5 100 1.8 46 3 roy. ¢ s eee 3 ES 1.2 17 ase (3) « £1124 3h “ “ 8 16 wi: i ae .0818 1072 15 ee “ Ke —.18 oe: os 10738 20 A * 17 — .09 (6) 0987 “ce .0990 “cc “e “e se + BO (7) se “e 0984 “e “e 6 16 sa (8) .1057 1006 1052 15 bie 8 ue — .47 (9) se “ec 1061 “e “e “e 18 + .B7 (10) “é “6 .1058 “é 150 “é “é + 5 ar i 1059 20 * a eg +.18 (12) “e “ce .1053 “< “e “ee 21 Eee | (18) “e “ee .1060 “< ae “e 16 + .28 As will be seen from the above, it was possible to separate copper free from zinc, except the slightest traces, by using a weak current in solutions to which 15-20 c.c. of free formic acid had been added. By employing stronger currents, or diminishing the amount of free acid, the copper was deposited admixed with considerable quantities of zinc. If the necessary precautions are observed no zinc will be deposited, and the copper will _ be compact and adherent. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIX. 186. P. PRINTED DEC. 21, 1891. Warwick. } 1 1 6 [Novy. 6, CADMIUM FROM ZINC. Caggen.” Zinetaken, *OTnG™ geld. 520: permin, Time. som theory. Grams. Grams. Grams. c.c. 6.6, e.c. Hours. Percentage. (1) .1231 .0818 1 eg ee a ee i Ne QQ). * ‘6 oS es Bail — 16 (3) “e “e 1234 se “ee “ec 43 + 24 feet es .1426 35 ~ 1.25 16 + 15.83 1) Sa . 1288 «80 A + .16 (6) .0492 .0409 Seb e “ « eye Mm “ a 0842 «e 1.96 ee (8) .0984 .1026 .0322 35 re 8 19 ates (9) .0492 .0409 .0494 15 us <. AL + .40 (10) .0984 1026 1735 35 75 1.25 17 se vie (11) as 0722“ « 8 « ee em)... "8 = -0982 25 125 - 18 — .20 cis) ** “2 OGRE: CS He Ni htt x. 16 + .10 (i4) .1004 .1006 -1001 ee « 4; 48 — .29 (a5) “ “s 0993 “ ae Wy —1.09 (16) ‘e “e .1000 «e ee “e “ce eR ay as 1001 iy Ss a 18. —.29 8) .* as 1008 LA 20 + .39 (19) e ae 0999 ec e ai 16 —.49 The first seven determinations were made in a platinum dish weighing about 67 grams; the remainder in a much larger dish weighing 117 grams. The results obtained with the latter were not as satisfactory as with the.smaller dish (2) (3) (5), although a qualitative examination of the deposit and solution proved that the separation was complete (9) (12- 19). The distance between the poles materially influences the results. In (6) the positive pole was in close contact with the dish; the cadmium contained zinc. In (9) the conditions were similar in all respects to the preceding, except that the distance between the poles was 2.5 cm. ; the deposit was free from zinc. With .2c.c. OH gas per minute, only a small quantity of the cadmium was separated (1), the greater portion re- maining in solution. With 1.25 c.c., on the other hand, the zinc was deposited us a dark-gray coating upon the cadmium (7), even in the pres- ence of 35 c.c. of free acid (10). In solutions containing .10 grams of each metal a current of .8-1 c.c. HO gas per minute sufficed to secure a satisfactory deposit in the presence of 25 c.c. formic acid (12-19), With smaller quantities of metal (9) 15 ¢c.c. of free acid was sufficient. The deposits in the above experiments were adherent and compact, There was no tendency to sponginess even in deposits containing large quantities of — zinc, ree ee 1891.] 1 1 7 {Warwick. . CoprPpER FROM CADMIUM. Copper Cadmium Metal Free OH gas Difference i taken. deposited. acid. 129 per mig, TO: Yom theory. Grams. Grams. Grams, c.c. ¢.c, c.c. Hours.’ Percentage. 1074 .0984 2061 10 100 8 17 eas This result was not unexpected, considering what we have already learned in regard to the behavior of these metals. The deposit was very dark and spongy. Both metals were completely precipitated. Two sub- sequent experiments were equally unsatisfactory ; in one the current was reduced to .3 c.c. OH gas per minute; in the other, 25 c.c. of formic acid was added. No separation was effected. CoprER FROM IRON. ee Piles eeea, amas MeO. OM STO trims, an teary. Grams. Grams, Grams. cc. C.e. c.c. Hours. Percentage. (1) .1057 -1248 -1035 25 125 8 20 Gy! - pe “¢ 150 42 cow (8) “ 1019. “s “ 19 ee hye tt, “ 0v99 ‘6 « 17 ae Bye fs ef .1014 ‘s «§ sy 18 see Although free acid was present in considerable quantity (25 c.c.), the formate of iron in the solution was decomposed with the formation of ferric hydrate, which separated as a light yellow froth on the surface of the solution. It also formed crusts at the edge of the copper deposit, which adhered to the dish with such tenacity that all attempts at removal by mechanical means were failures. Mere washing was without avail, and more energetic measures resulted in a loss of copper, (1) and (4). Dilute hydrochloric acid was added to (2) ; but, while it dissolved traces of copper, it failed to remove the deposit of iron hydrate. Dilute sul- phuric acid was also tried without success (3). In the final determina. . tion 20 c.c, of concentrated oxalic acid was added at the end of seventeen hours and the current allowed to act one hour longer. The froth floating on the surface was dissolved, but the deposit on the copper was not appreciably affected. Except at the periphery the copper had a bright metallic lustre and was firm and adherent. CADMIUM FROM IRON, Cadmi I Cadmiu Free OH ac, taken found. acid. 920- permmin, > Time. Grams. Grams. Grams. €.c. c.c. ec. Hours. (1) .0984 .1248 .0996 25 150 8 23 (2) “ec : “ce 1021 “ “ce “eé 45 The same trouble was experienced here. Similar attempts were made to remove the iron, but without success. In the first of the above deter- minations 10 c.c. of oxalic acid solution was added before the conclusion of the experiment ; in the latter, 20 cc. of the same solution. Warwick. ] : 1 18 [Novy. 6, The hydrate of iron in the solution disappeared, but adherent crusts still remained on the surface of the cadmium. Zinc FROM IRON. Several tentative experiments were made, but as the iron showed the same tendency to separate on the sides of the dish, asin the preceding determinations, they were not continued. CorpPER FROM COBALT. Copper Cobalt Copper Free HO. OH gas Time. Difference taken. taken. found. acid. per min. from theory. Grams. Grams. Grams. c.c. C.c. Cc, Hours. Percentage. (ft) 2101 1080-1108 208 Ie 1 21 +.36 Q) « - 1095.“ se 17 —.54 (3) “ec “é 1097 “e “e ce, “e —.36 ()> 34 : 10T eAeare 18 +.54 3 ds 9 .1098 ‘ 1.2 17 —.27 (6) “ “ MOOT: iss sis Beko —.36 Op attempting to prepare a solution of cobaltous formate for the above determinations, it was found that the salt made according to the method already described was not readily soluble in water. The solution was _ therefore prepared by double decomposition as follows : 500 c.c. of water containing 6.563 grams of sodium formate was mixed with an equal amount of water in which 8.728 grains of cobalt chloride had been dis- . solved. Of this solution 50 c.c. was taken, containing .1080 grams of cobalt. The distance between the poles was 3.8 cm. except (1) and (4) in which it was 2.8cm. Both of the latter were spongy ; the others slightly so. As the conditions, otherwise, were similar, the difference in the character of the deposits was apparently due to the separation of the poles. Traces of cobalt were found in all the copper deposits. The copper was all out except in (3), (5) and (6), in which the solutions were colored yellow- ish brown on the addition of hydrogen sulphide. The copper deposit was dark in color and adherent, although not very compact on the bottom of the dish. CorrEeR FROM NICKEL. Copper Nickel Copper Free H.0. OH gas Time. Difference taken, taken, found. acid, per min, from theory, Grams. Grams. Grams, c.c, 6.0, €.c, Hours, Percentage. (1) , 1101 1028 .1095 75 175 1 20 — .54 (2) “ “ 1097 100 #6 by 17 — 36 (3) “ “ “e “ “e “ee 18 ans BS @-s dy -1098 + rig 1,2 17 —.27 (5) “ “ 1006 “ 1 “e — 46 (6) “ “ , 1098 “ “ “ me OT 1891.] 1 1 9 (Warwick. The same trouble was experienced in preparing a satisfactory solution of pure nickel formate as with cobalt and it was found advisable to pre- pare the solution by double decomposition in the same way as the latter salt, 500 c.c. of this solution contained 8.3077 grams of nickel chloride and 6.2469 grams of sodium formate. In both cases a slight excess of sodium formate was used. The copper contained traces of nickel and slightly colored the solution when tested with hydrogen sulphide. The condi- tions were similar to those given under cobalt and the results were quite as satisfactory. The copper was bright and compact. CADMIUM FROM COBALT. Cadmium. Cobalt. Cadmium Free H.O OH gas Time Difference taken. taken. found. acid, * per min. * from theory. Grams. Grams. Grams. C:¢; c.c. c.c. Hours. Percentage. (1) .0984 1080 coee 25 100 5 22 eeiee tae 2 eons o> 150 8 45 ome | 9 Nii lad id nee 50 - 1.5 18 ey It was naturally expected that cadmium would be completely precipi- tated from cobalt and nickel by employing a weak current, but from an examination of the above results, it will be seen that a separation was not » accomplished. Even with a current of 1.5 c.c. OH gas per minute, the cadmium failed to deposit completely and was contaminated with cobalt (3). (1) was very spongy and the solution still contained cadmium at the expiration of 22 hours. The current was then increased and allowed to act for 45 hours (2). Cadmium was found in the solution, cobalt in the deposit. The dis- tance between the electrodes was 2.8 cm. CapMium FRom NICKEL. Cadmium Nickel Cadmium Free yy 20. OH gas Time. Difference taken. taken. found. acid. per min. from theory. Grams. Grams. Grams. c.c, ec. cc. Hours. Percentage. (1) .0984 1028 .0758 35 150 5 19 see < ) oti as 1045 ‘ ” 1.5 21 eke (3) “ 1848 50 125 1.5 17 The results were quite as unsatisfactory as with cobalt. Cadmium was found in all three solutions, and more or less nickel was found in the deposits. In (3) the nickel came out as a gray deposit on the cadmium. The deposit was firm and adherent, although dark in color. The distance between the electrodes was 2.5 cm., except (3), in which the pole separation was 2.8 cm. “i Zinc From CoBALT. Zine Cobalt Zine Free OH gas Difference present. present. found. acid. 120 permin. Ti™*- from theory. Grams, Grams. Grams. ¢.¢, €.c. e.c. Hours. Percentage. (1) .1006 -1080 agin 50 175 3 17 seve 1 ee 95 cooe 100 s 5 18 ah Ka Warwick.] 120 [Nov. 6, ZtInc FROM NICKEL. Zine Nickel Zine Free OH gas Difference present. present! found. acid. 120 permin. Ti™e- from theory. Grams. Grams. Grams. GG. Cy €.c. Hours. Percentage, ~ (3) .1006 .1028 bia'sis 50 175 2.7 18 apts (4). ae pealirattiae | batee rt: Ee « ee (2) and (4) were performed under similar conditions. The distance between the poles was 2.2cm. The current was generated by a battery of Bunsen cells. Even with a current of 5 c.c. gas per minute zine was found in the solution in traces, while considerable quantities of cobalt and nickel separated as a coating upon the cadmium. (1) and (3) were also failures. A separation was not obtained even approximately. SuMMARY. Asa result of the foregoing experiments, it was found that the amount of copper, cadmium or zinc deposited in a given time was proportional to the strength of the solution, and that the presence of free acid in moderate quantity did not materially affect the result. 7, Increasing the distance between the poles resulted in diminishing the amount of metal deposited, but the rate of decrease diminished as the distance between the electrodes increased. Elevation of temperature caused an increase in the amount of metal deposited, the rate of increase being greatest at 80° in neutral and acid copper solutions, and at 60° in cadmium solutions containing free acid. On the other hand, the amount of zinc deposited in solutions, to which free acid had been added, diminished as the temperature rose, nothing being deposited at 80°. Attempts to secure compact and adherent deposits of cadmium and zine in neutral solutions were failures. ‘ In acid solution copper and cadmium separated completely and satis- factorily. The zinc deposits were spongy, but the precipitation was com. plete. Lead was mainly deposited on the negative pole, both in neutral and acid solutions. Manganese was precipitated on both poles, but the amount of peroxide separating on the kathode was reduced to mere traces by the presence of free acid. The following separations were satisfactorily accomplished : copper from zinc, cobalt and nickel and cadinium from zinc and manganese, Attempts to deposit copper in the presence of iron and cadmium, and zinc in the presence of iron, cobalt and nickel, were successful, Nor was it possible in the presence of the last three metals named to estimate cadmium, In conclusion, I wish to express my obligations to Prof. Edgar F. Smith, at whose suggestion the work was undertaken, To his super- vision and advice is largely due whatever value may attach to these results, 1891. } 121 Stated Meeting, September 4, 1891. Present, 8 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Letters of acceptance of membership were received from Dr. Caspar René Gregory, Leipzig, Germany; Dr. E. T. Hamy, Prof. E. Maseart, Dr. Julius Oppert, Prof. A. De Quatrefages, - Paris, France; Prof. W. Cawthorne Unwin, Kensington, England; Rt. Rev. William Stubbs, D.D., LL.D., Bishop of Oxford, England; Sir Robert S. Ball, Dublin, Ireland; Prof. Charles E. Monroe, Newport, R. 1.; Prof. Henry W. Spang- ler, University of Pennsylvania. Dr. Harrison Allen, of Philadelphia, resigned by letter from membership in the Society. On motion, the resignation was accepted. Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; Académie Royale des Sciences, Amster- dam; Société Royale des Sciences, Upsal; Naturforschende Verein, Briinn, Austria; K. Geodiitische Institut, Berlin ; Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir Viiterlandische Cultur, Breslau ; Verein fiir Naturkunde, Cassel; K. Siichs. Meteorologische Institut, Chemnitz; Siebenbiirgische Verein fiir Naturwissen, Hermanstadt; Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Akadémie, Halle ; Societa Italiana Delle Scienze, Rome; Société des Antiquaires de Picardie, Amiens; Académie des Sciences, Arts et Belles- Lettres, Caen; Musée Guimet, Ecole Polytechnique, Bureau des Longitudes, Paris; Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society ; Meteorological Office, London; Royal Irish Academy, Dublin; Smithsonian Institution, Washington. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Geolog- ical Survey of India, Calcutta (184); Tokyo Library, An- thropological Society, Asiatic Society of Japan, Tokyo (134); Comité Geologique de la Russie, St. Petersburg (134); Dr. Otto Donner, Helsingfors, Finland (134); Royal Danish Geo- graphical Society (131-134), Prof. J. S. Steinstrup (134), 122 (sept. 4, Copenhagen; K. K. Central-Anstalt fiir Meteorologie, ete., Drs. A. Brezina, E. Suess, Friederich Miiller, Vienna (134); Hungarian Academy of Sciences (128-131), Prof. Paul Hun- falvy, Budapest (130-133); Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes, Altenberg (134); Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde (184), K. Geodiitische Institut, Berlin (181-134); Naturhistorische Verein, Bonn (129); Naturwissenschaftliche Verein, Bremen (134); K. Siichsische Meteorologische Institut, Chemnitz (131-184); Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Emden (18+); Natur- wissenschaftliche Verein des Reg.-Bez., Frankfurt (130); Dr. A. Weisbach, Freiberg (184); K. Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Akademie, Halle a, S. (109, 180-183, and Trans., xiv, 3); Geographische Gesellschaft (131), Deutsche Seewarte (131-1384), Hamburg; Prof. Hermann Kopp, Heidelberg (131-134); Naturhistorische Gesellschaft, Hannover (134); “K. Sichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Dr. Julius Platzman, Prof. J. Victor Carus, Dr. Otto Béhtlingk, Leipzig (1384); Natur- wissenschaftliche Verein, Osnabriick (181-1384); K. Stern- warte, Miinchen (134); Verein fiir Vaterlindische Naturkunde, Wiirtemberg (129, 130). Accessions to the Library were announced from the Institut Egyptien, Cairo; Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; Gov- ernment Astronomer, Madras; Norwegische Meteorologische Institut, Christiania; Société Roumaine de Geographie, Bu- charest; Nederlandsche Botanische Vereeniging, Nijmegen; Friessch Genootschap voor Geschied, etc., Leuwarden; Aca- démie Royale des Sciences, Prof. Ad. De Ceuleneer, Bruxelles; Augustus R. Grote, Bremen; Tudominyos Akademia, Buda- pest; Ostschweizerische Geogr.-Commerc. Gesellschaft, St. Gall; M. Ferdinando Borsari, Naples; M. A. Del Bon, Padua; Profs. Léon de Rosny, Emile Schwarer, Edward Pepper, Paris; Le Comte de Charencey, St. Maurice; Mr. Samuel Tim- mins, Coventry, England; Philosophical and Literary Society, Leeds; Mr. James L. Bowes, Liverpool; Meteorological Coun- cil, Society for Psychical Research, Profs. Joseph Prestwich, Thomas E, Pickett, London; Nova Scotian Institute of Nat- ural Science, Halifax; Hemenway Expedition, Mr. Robert T. 1991 ] 123 Swan, Boston ; Scientific Alliance, American Museum of Nat- ural History, Prof. Edward V. D’Invilliers, New York; Em- pire State Association of Deaf-mutes, Rome, N. Y.; Mr. Wil- liam HE. Griffis, Schenectady; Mr. Charles Earle, Princeton ; Mr. Samuel F. Bigelow, Newark; Geological Survey of New Jersey, Trenton; Academy of Natural Sciences, Hon. Charles O’Neill, Messrs. R. Meade Bache, Henry Phillips, Jr., Drs. J. C. Morris, Charles A. Oliver, Persifor Frazer, J. E. Ives, Ed- mund J. James, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, Miss Emily Phillips, Philadelphia; Wyoming Historical and Geological Society, Wilkesbarre; Historical Society of Delaware, Wilmington ; Department of the Interior, Smithsonian Institution, Col. Garrick Mallery, Messrs. A. C. Peale, W. H. Seaman, Lester F. Ward, Washington, D. C. } A photograph of the Mansion and Graves of the Penn family, in England, was received from Mr. F. Gutekunst, Phila- delphia. Photographs for the Society's Album were received from Mr. Samuel Timmins, Coventry, England; Mr. Louis Vossion, Philadelphia, and Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Carlisle, Pa. The death of James Russell Lowell (Boston, Mass., August 12, 1891, wet. 72) was announced. Pending nominations 1230 and 1231 were read. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, September 18, 1891. Present, 2 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Letters of envoy were received from the Colonial Museum of New Zealand, Wellington; Observatoire Physique Central, St. Petersburg; Université Royale de Norvége, Christiania; Musée Teyler, Harlem, Holland; K. Preussische Meteorolo- PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XXIx. 136. Q. PRINTED DEC. 21, 1891. 1 24. [Sept. 18, gische Institut, Berlin; Musée Guimet, Paris; Royal Observa- tory, Greenwich; Zodlogical and Royal Statistical Societies, London; Bureau of Statistics of Labor, Boston; U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Natur- forschende Gesellschaft, Bern (184); University, Basle (134) ; Société Royale de Zoologie Natura Artis Magistra (134), Academie Royale des Sciences (127-130, and Trans., xvi, 2, 3), Amsterdam; Royal Library, (134); K. Zoologische-Botan- ische Genootschap, ’S Gravenhage (134); Royal Netherland Museum of Antiquities, Leiden (134); K. Danske Videnska- bernes Selskab, Copenhagen (130, 131, and Trans. xvi, 3); Société Royale des Sciences, Upsal (125-129); Bibliothéque Royale de Belgique, Bruxelles (181-133); Marquis Antonio de Gregorio, Palermo (184); R. Accademia di Scienze, etc., Modena (125-129 and Trans. xvi, 2); Universita, Pisa (184); R. Comitato Geologico, Rome (184); R. Bibliotica N. C., Firenze (134); R. Osservatorio, Turin (134); Société Lin- néene, Bordeaux (134); Prof. Lucien Adam, Rennes, France (134); Bureau Centrale Météorologique (181-134), Société D' Anthropologie, “Cosmos,” Marquis de Nadaillac, M. A. Des Cloizeaux, Paris (134‘; Sir Henry Thompson, London (134); Mr. Samuel Timmins, Coventry, England (134); Philosophical Society, Prof. Dr. J. P. Postgate, Cambridge, England (134); Royal Institution, Victoria Institute, Royal Astronomical Society, Linnean Society, Royal Society, Society of Antiquaries, London (134); Geographical Society, Man- chester (131-134); Natural History Society of Northumber- land, Durham and Newcastle-upon-Tyne (134); Royal Dublin Society (134); Prof. James Geikie, Royal Observatory, Royal Society, Royal Scottish Geographical Society, Edinburgh (181-183); Free Public Library, Jersey City (131-184); Prof. Thomas Chase, Providence (131-133); Drs, E. D. Cope, W. G. A. Bonwill, J. M. Maisch (134), “ National Baptist,” Phila- delphia; University of California, Prof. Joseph Le Conte, Berkeley, Cal. (184); Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, Riverside, Cal. (184); Free Public Library, Mr, George Davidson, San Fran- cisco (184), ae hl ee eee 125 Letters of acknowledgment (135) were received from the Canadian Institute, Toronto; Geological Survey, Ottawa; Mr. Horatio Hale, Clinton; Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science; Maine Historical Society, Society of Natural His- tory, Portland; Vermont Historical Society, Montpelier; Prof. C. H. Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H.; Massachusetts His- torical Society, State Library of Massachusetts, Hon. Robert Winthrop, Mr. Hamilton A. Hill, Boston; Museum of Com- parative Zodlogy, Mr. Robert N. Toppan, Prof. J. D. Whit- ney, Cambridge, Mass.; Essex Institute, Salem; Free Public Library, New Bedford; Dr. Pliny Earle, Northampton; - American Antiquarian Society, Worcester; Rhode Island Ilistorical Society, Providence Franklin Society, Providence ; Prof. Charles E. Monroe, Newport; New Ifaven Colony His- torical Society; Connecticut Listorical Society, Hartford; Buffalo Library; Prof. E. North, Clinton, N. Y.; Profs. T. F. Crane, J. M. Hart, B. G. Wilder, Ithaca; Vassar Brothers Institute, Poughkeepsie; Oneida Historical Society, Utica; U.S. Military Academy, West Point; Prof. Henry M. Baird, Columbia College, Astor Library, American Museum of Nat- ural History, New York Hospital, Academy of Medicine, University of the City of New York, Historical Society, Me- teorological Observatory, Prof. J. J. Stephenson, Capt. R. S. Hayes, New York; Rev. Joseph F. Garrison, Mr. Isaac C. Martindale, Camden; Free Public Library, Jersey City ; New Jersey Historical Society, Newark; Nassau Hall Library, Prof. C. A. Young, Princeton; Dr. R. H. Alison, Ardmore; Prof. Martin H. Boyé, Coopersburg; Hon. Eckley B. Coxe, Drifton; Dr. Traill Green, Profs. J. N. Moore, Thomas C. Por- ter, Kaston; Mr. Andrew S. McCreath, Harrisburg; Mr. Ario Pardee, Hazleton; Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown; Linnean Society, Lancaster; Mr. Peter F. Rothermel, Linfield; Prof. John F. Carll, Pleasantville; Mr. Heber S. Thompson, Potts- ville; Rev. F. A. Miihlenberg, Reading; Mr. M. Fisher Long- streth, Sharon Hill; Philosophical Society, Messrs. Wil- _ liam Butler, Philip P. Sharples, West Chester; Mr. Thomas _ Meehan, Germantown; Wagner Free Institute of Science, 126 [Sept. 18, Academy of Natural Sciences, Zodlogical Society, Pennsyl- vania Hospital, Library Company of Philadelphia, Messrs. R. L. Ashhurst, John Ashhurst, Jr., R. Meade Bache, W.G. A. Bonwill, Charles Bullock, Cadwalader Biddle, 8S. Castner, E. D. Cope, J. Solis Cohen, Thomas M. Cleeman, Paterson Du Bois, Robert P. Field, Persifor Frazer, George Freebis, Fred- erick A. Genth, Frederick A.Genth, Jr., H. D. Gregory, Joseph S. Harris, Lewis M. Haupt, William A. Ingham,W. W. Jefferis, John Marshall, J. W. Maisch, James T. Mitchell, Charles A. Oliver, Franklin Platt, Robert Patterson, C. Stuart Patterson, C. N. Peirce, Henry Phillips, Jr., William Pepper, Frederick Prime, Theodore D. Rand, W. S.W. Ruschenberger, L. A. Scott, Coleman Sellers, Carl Seiler, Albert H. Smyth, H. W. Spangler, ’ H. C. Trumbull, W. P. Tatham, D. K. Tuttle, Talcott Wil- liams, Joseph Wharton, Louis Vossion, Philadelphia; Mary- land Historical Society, Peabody Institute, Institute for the Promotion of the Mechanic Arts, Baltimore; U. S. Naval Institute, Annapolis; Smithsonian Institution, Weather Bu- reau, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, U.S. Geological Sar- vey, U.S. Naval Observatory, Anthropological Society, Mr. W. B. Taylor, Surgeon-General’s Office, Dr. A. 8. Gatschet, Major J. W. Powell, Prof. Herman Haupt, Capt. Thomas Jefferson Lee, Washington, D.C.; University of Virginia; Leander McCormick Observatory, Charlottesville; Virginia Historical Society, Richmond; Mr. Jed. Hotchkiss, Staunton ; Georgia Historical Society, Savannah; Cincinnati Society of Natural History; Cincinnati Observatory; Prof. E. W. Clay- pole, Akron, O.; Dr. Robert Peter, Lexington, Ky.; Athe- neam, Columbia, Tenn.; Geological Survey of Missouri, Jef- ferson City; Prof. J. C. Branner, Little Rock, Ark.; Col. William Ludlow, Detroit; Wisconsin State Historical Society, Madison; Davenport Academy of Sciences; Kansas State Historical Society, Topeka; Colorado Scientific Society, Den- ver; University of California, Prof. Joseph Le Conte, Berke- ley; Lick Observatory, Mt. Hamilton, Cal.; Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, Riverside, Cal.; Mr. George Davidson, San Fran- cisco; Observatorio Astronomico Nacional Mexicano, Tacu- 199i.] 127 baya ; Sociedad Cientifica, “ Antonio Alzate,” Mexico; Bishop Crescencio Carrillo, Merida, Yucatan. Accessions to the Library were announced from the Comité de Conservation des Monuments de L’Art Arabe, Cairo, Egypt; Royal Society of Tasmania; Secretary of Mines, Melbourne, Victoria; New Zealand Institute, Wellington ; Tokyo Library; K. Akademie der Wissenschaften, St. Peters- burg; M. O. A. L. Pihl, Christiania; Naturforschende Gesell- schaft, Bamberg; K. P. Geodiitische Institut, Association Géodésique Internationale, Berlin; Naturforschende Gesell- schaft, Emden; Verein fiir die Geschichte und Altertums- kunde, Erfurt; Naturwissenschaftliche Verein des Reg.-Bez., _ Frankfurt a. O.; K. Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher, Halle a. 8.; Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Bern; Société de Physique et _ dHistoire Naturelle, Geneva; Biblioteca N. C. di Firenze; Direzione Générale della Statistica, Rome; Ministére de 1|'In- _ struction Publique et des Beaux Arts, Société Americaine de France, Paris; Dr. John Evans, Hemel Hempstead; Natural History and Antiquarian Society, Penzance; Royal Society, Edinburgh; Bureau of Statistics of Labor, Boston; Dr. J. 5. Newberry, New York; Departments of Labor, State, War, Smithsonian Institution, Mr. Sanford Fleming, Washington, D. C.; Col. Charles C. Jones, Augusta, Ga.; Mr. William Harden, Savannah; Dennison University, Granville, O. Pending nominations Nos. 1230 and 1231 were read. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meetiny, October 2, 1891. Present, 9 members, Vice-President, Dr. RuscHENBERGER, in the Chair. Letters of envoy were received from the Naturforschende Verein, Briinn; K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin ; 128 [Oct. 2, K. Sazhsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig; Ge- sellschaft zur Beforderung der gesammten Noetupwinseneshafien: Marburg; Verein fiir Vaterliindische Naturkunde in Wiir- temberg, Stuttgart; Museo Nacional de Buenos Aires; Oficina Meteorolégica Argentina, Cordoba. . Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Imperial Academy of Science, Prof. Serge Nikitin, St. Petersburg (184) ; Societatea Geografica Romana, Bucharest (181-134); K. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Copenhagen (184); Université R. | de Norvége, Christiania (128-134); Société Entomologique de Belgique, Bruxelles (184); Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst, Harlem (184); Naturforschende Verein in Briinn (128- 133); Académie des Sciences, Cracow, Austria (134); Osser- vatorio Marittimo, Trieste (181-134); Section fiir Naturkunde des O. T. C., Vienna (134); K. Geodiitische Institut (135), K P. Meteorologische Institut (134), Deutsche Geologische Ge- sellschaft (135), Berlin; K. Siichsische Altertums Verein, Dresden (134); Naturwissenschaftliche Verein des Reg.-Bez., Frankfurt a. O. (134); Gr. Hess. Univ. Bibliothek, Giessen (129); K. Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Akademie, Halle a. S. (184); Verein fiir Thiiringische Geschichte und Altertums- kunde, Jena (134); Verein fiir Erdkunde, Metz (131-1384); Dr. C. A. Dobrn, Stettin (184); Verein fiir Vaterlindische Naturkunde in Wiirtemberg, Stuttgart (181-184 and Trans, xvi, 8); Prof. Jobannes Diimichen, Strasbourg (134); Prof. Guido Cora, Turin (184); R. Accademia di Scienze, etce., Mo- dena (184); Societa Africana D’Italia, Naples (131-184); R Accademia di Scienze, ete, Padua (131-134); M. A. Des Cloizeaux, Dr. E. T. Hamy, Paris (185); Cte. de Charencey, St. Maurice Jes Charencey (18+); Institution of Civil Engi- neers (129, 130), Sir James Paget (134), London; Mr. Alfred R. Wallace, Parkstone, England (131-134); Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Carlisle (135); Col. Garrick Mallery (185), Prof. 0, V. Riley (184), Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C.; Museo Nacional, Dr. H. Burmeister, Buenos Aires (184); Instituto Fisico-Geografico Nacional, San José de Costa Rica (181-184); South African Philosophical Society, Cape Town (181-1838), 1891.) 129: Accessions to the Library were reported from the Tokyo Library ; R. Accademia Degli Agiati, Rovereto, Austria; Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft “Isis,” Dresden; Société des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles, Bordeaux; Bureau des Longitudes, Paris; Société de Geographie, Toulouse; M. Nicholas Ball, Block Island, R. I.; New York Forest Com- mission, Albany; American Museum of Natural History, Prof, J. S. Newberry, New York; M. J. A. Udden, Rock Island, Il].; Academy of Sciences, St. Louis; University of California, Sacramento; Observatorio Meteorologico-Magnet- ico Central, Mexico; Commissio Geographica e Geologica, San Paulo, Brazil; Museo Nacional Oficina Meteorologica . Argentina, Buenos Aires; Direccion Central de Estadistica, Guatemala, C. A. The death of D. Humphrey Storer, M.D., Boston, Sep- tember 10, 1891, aged 87, was announced. Prof. Cope offered a paper for the Transactions on the “Ophidians of North America,” which was referred to Drs. Horn, Ryder and Heilprin. Dr. Horn made a communication on the genus Calospaste. Dr. Franz Boaz, of Worcester, Mass., presented through the Secretaries a paper entitled, “ Vocabularies of the Tlingit, Haida, etc., Languages.” Prof. Cope made some remarks on the results of a late expedition to the Gallapagos islands. Pending nominations Nos. 1280 and 1231 were read. And the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. Stated Meeting, October 16, 1891. Present, 17 members. Vice-President, Dr. RUSCHENBERGER in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: A circular was received from the Local Committee on _ Organization of Pan-Republic Congress and Human Freedom 130 [Oct. 16, League, inviting the Society to its reunion on October 12 and 13, 1891, at the State House and Academy of Music. A circular from the Naturhistorische Gesellschaft zu Niirn- berg, announcing the celebration of its ninetieth year. A circular from the Académie Royale des Sciences de Lis- bonne, announcing the death of its Secretary, José Maria Latino Coelho, on August 29, 1891. Mr. Paul Leicester Ford requested by letter the permission to consult the draft of the Declaration of Independence, now stored away with other valuable papers of the Society. Letters from the President and Mr. W.S. Baker were read in support of the request. On motion, the Curators were authorized to restore to a place in the fireproof building of the Society its manu- script of the Declaration of Independence in the autograph of Thomas Jefferson. Dr. Hays moved as an amendment “that it be kept in a fireproof safe.” The amendment, being put to a vote, was not agreed to, and the original motion was adopted by the Society. On motion, it was resolved that Mr. Ford be permitted to have access to the document in question in the presence of one of the Curators of the Society. Letters of envoy were received from the Académie Royale des Sciences, ete., de Belgique, Bruxelles; Société des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles, Bordeaux; Bureau des Longitudes, Keole Polytechnique, Musée Guimet, Ministére des Travaux Publiques, Paris. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Sydney, Australia (184); Accademia degli Agiati, Rovereto, Austria (184); K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmuseum, Dr, Aristides Brezina, Vienna (135); Dr. Caspar René Gregory, Leipzig (185); Académie des Sciences, Belles Lettres et Arts, Bordeaux (1384); Société de Geographie, Lille, France (135); Ecole d’Agriculture, Montpellier (135) ; Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle (128); M. Victor Duruy, Prof. A. de Quatrefages, Paris (185); Natural History and Philo- 1891.] 131 sophical Society, Belfast (134); College of Pharmacy, Phila- delphia (135); Central Meteorological Observatory, Mexico (185); Mr. Everard F. im Thurn, British Guiana (1385). Accessions to the Library were reported from the Société Royale de Géographie d’Anvers; Académie Royale des Sci- ences, Bruxelles; Geographische Gesellschaft, Bern; Naturhis- torische Gesellschaft, Niirnberg; Accademia delle Scienze, Torino; Ministére des Travaux Publiques, Paris; Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society, Halifax, England; Geo- logical and Natural History Survey of Canada, Montreal Geo- logical Society of America, Rochester, N. Y.; Free Public Library of Jersey City; Messrs. J. E. Ives, Henry Phillips, Jr., Pennsylvania Prison Society, Philadelphia; U.S. Depart- ment of Agriculture, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D.C.; Mr. W. Curtis Taylor, Tacoma, Wash. A photograph was received for the Album from Dr. Caspar René Gregory, Leipzig. The Committee appointed to examine Prof. Cope’s paper, offered at the last meeting for the Transactions, reported that he desired to withdraw the same and recommended that the request be granted. On motion, the Society permitted the paper to be withdrawn, The stated business of the meeting was then taken up, and pending nominations Nos, 1230 and 1231 were read, spoken to and balloted for. The following minute was read from the Library Committee: Sratep Meetine, Octrosper 10, 1891. The Chairman was authorized to report to the Society the suggestion that the fireproof for the valuable books and papers heretofore ordered by a vote of the Society, which order was not executed because of the absence of any sufficient foundation for the fireproof, be now carried into effect, as the walls of the building appear to be entirely sufficient for that pur- pose. On motion, the Library Committee respectfully requested the Curators to indicate to the Committee what cases they will need for the purposes mentioned by Dr. Morris to the Committee for the display of antiquities, ete. ® PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxrx. 136. R. PRINTED DEC. 28, 1891. 182 (Oct. 16, Dr. Morris, on behalf of the Curators, stated the reasons why at present the Curators could not designate exactly how much was wanted; that much of the collections of the Society was as yet unpacked and temporarily inaccessible; that until the Curators knew how much space would be needed they could not designate it. Mr. McKean moved that the Committee on Hall be requested to carry into effect the order of the Society, made several years ago, to procure a fireproof safe for the safe custody of the valuable books and papers of the Society, or to inform the Society, if they find such to be the fact, that the walls of the Society’s building are not yet deemed strong enough to support such a safe. Mr. DuBois inquired as to whether any limit had been placed as to the size and price of such-a safe. . The Secretaries replied that in the original motion there was no limitation. Dr. Cope suggested that a new base might have to be built - to support so great a weight. | Dr. Greene suggested that several small safes might better serve the purpose than one large one. Prof. Barker suggested that a vault could be erected in the basement of the Society’s building as a receptacle for its documents. : On motion of Mr. McKean, the motion was referred to the Hall Committee. All other business of the meeting having been disposed of, the Tellers reported the result of the voting for candidates to the Presiding Member, who declared that 2197. Prof. George Forbes, F.R.S., London, 2198. Mr. Joseph G, Rosengarten, Philadelphia, had been duly elected members of the Society. And the Society was adjourned by the President, —————— = 1391.] 133 Stated Meeting, November 6, 1891. Present, 31 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Mr. Joseph G. Rosengarten, a newly elected member, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Correspondence was submitted as follows: A letter of acceptance of membership from Mr. Joseph G. Rosengarten, Philadelphia. A letter from Mr. William Curtis Taylor, requesting ex- changes on behalf of the Tacoma Academy of Science, Ta- coma, Wash. On motion, the Academy was ordered to re- ceive Proceedings from No. 96 and Catalog. A letter from Mr. Joseph G, Rosengarten, in behalf of various persons, requesting the Society to accept their gift of a marble relief portrait of the late Mrs. Emma Seiler, and to fix a time for its formal presentation. On motion of Mr. Dudley, the gift was accepted and the 20th of November was ‘selected. Letters of envoy were received from the Société Imp. Russe de Géographie, St. Petersburg; Institut Méteorologique de Roumanie, Bucharest; Meteorological Office, Royal Statis- tical Society, London; Royal Dublin Society, Royal Irish Academy, Dublin; Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, Har- risburg; Theological Seminary, Hartford, Conn. Letters of acknowledgment (135) were received from Prof. Serge Nikitin, St. Petersburg; Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Vienna; Prof. Peter Ritter von Tunner, Leoben, Austria; Prof. Abel Hovelacque, Paris; Mr. Samuel Timmins, Arley, England; Philosophical Society, University Library, Cam- bridge, England; Victoria Institute, Linnean Society, Royal Society, Royal Meteorological Society, Messrs. C. Juhlin Dann- feld, P. L. Sclater, London; Manchester Geographical Society, Philosophical Society, Glasgow; Prof. Andrew A. Blair, Mr. 134 [ Nov. 6, Joseph G. Rosengarten, Philadelphia; Kansas Academy of Science, Topeka. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Société Imp. Russe de Géographie, St. Petersburg; Institut Météoro- logique de Roumanie, Bucharest; Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen, Batavia; K. Akademie van Wetenschappen, Amsterdam; Instituto y Observatorio de Marina, San Fernandu; Philological Suciety, Cambridge, Eng- land; Meteorological Council, London; Mr. Samuel Timmins, Arley, near Coventry, England; Mr. James B. Francis, Lowell, Mass.; Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston; Hartford Theological Seminary, Mr. J. A. Spalding, Iartford; Geologi- cal Survey of Penrsylvania, Harrisburg; American Society for Extension of University Teaching, University Marine Bio- logical Association, Prof. Edwin J. Houston, MacCalla & Com- pany, Philadelphia; Commissioner of Pensions, Bureau of Education, U. S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries, Dr, Albert S. Gatschet, Washington, D. C. The death of Hon. William Morris Davis at Philadelphia, was announced as having occurred in October, 1891. On motion of Secretary Brinton, the paper of Dr. Boaz, on “ Indian Languages,” was ordered to be printed in the Proceed- ings. A communication on “The Electrolysis of Metallic For- mates,” by Hill Sloane Warwick, was presented by Secretary Barker. Curator Patterson Du Bois presented the following report on the examination, by Mr. Paul Leicester Furd, of the auto- graph copy of the Declaration of Independence owned by the Society. Notes on the Various Copies of the Declaration of Independence in Jeffer- son's Handwriting. According to order the Society's copy of the Declaration of Independ- ence was examined by Mr. Paul Leicester Ford, in the meeting room of the Society, on Wednesday, October 21, 1891, in my presence as Curator. The following facts were obtained from Mr, Ford. aS Oe 1991.) 135 There were nine known MS. copies of the Declaration : 1. Jefferson’s original first draft is now in the possession of the Depart- ment of State at Washington. It contains five emendations by Franklin and two by John Adams. 2. On the 28th of June, 1776, a fair copy was submitted to Congress. It was discussed on the 3d and 4th of July, and passed late in the day of the 4th of July. There is no evidence that this copy, or any other, was signed, except by the regular official attests, on the 4th of July. All traces of this copy have been lost for many years. The engrossed copy now in the Department of State at Washington, which is, of course, not in Jefferson’s handwriting, was signed on ‘the 2d of August following— some of the signers not having been in or members of the Congress on the 4th of July, while others who were there and voted for the Declara- tion were not among the signers. Between July 4th and 8th, Jefferson wrote copies as fullows : 3. One for John Page. ; 4. One for George Wythe. 5. One for Edmund Pendleton. 6. One for Richard Henry Lee, the copy now in the possession of the American Philosophical Society, to which it was presented by Lee’s grandson. 7. In 1825, Jefferson wrote that he had given a copy to Mazzei, who had subsequently given it toa French countess. Of this we know nothing further. 8. A fair copy was written fur Madison, perhaps fifteen years or so after the copies made in 1776 were written. This is now in the possession of the Department of State. 9. In 1821, Jefferson wrote a copy which he inserted in his autobiog- raphy. This Society has in its possession the letter, dated July 8, 1776, in which Jefferson presents to Richird Henry Lee the copy above num- bered 6. Jefferson writes: ‘‘I enclose you a copy of the Declaration of Independence as agreed to by the House, and also as originally framed ; you will judge whether it is the better or worse for the critices.’”” On July 21, Lee acknowledged it, and said: ‘‘I wish sincerely, as well for the honor of Congress as for that of the States, that the manuscript had not been mangled as it is.”’ On this Mr. Ford observes: ‘In 1825, when this manuscript came into the possession of your Society, John Vaughan, who, I believe, was then your Secretary, wrote to Jefferson, asking him ‘if it was the original draft.’ To this Jefferson replied, stating it was not, but added: ‘ Whenever in the course of the composition, a copy became overcharged and difficult to be read with amendments, I copied it fuir, and when that also was crowded with other amend- ments, another fair copy was made, etc. These rough drafis I sent to distant friends who were anxious to know what was passing. ... . Whether the paper sent to R. H. Lee was one of these, or whether, after 1 36 [Nov. 6 the passage of the instrument, I made a copy for him with the amend- ments of Congress, may, I think, be known from the face of the paper.’ An examination of the paper proves conclusively that it is the latter, to which has been added an endorsement in the handwriting of Richard Henry Lee, and marginal notes in the handwriting of Arthur Lee, both of which are attested by Richard Henry Lee, the grandson of the former, on the document itself. As Arthur Lee was absent from this country in 1776, and did not return to it till 1779, his notes must have been made subsequent to the latter date.’’ The underscoring and bracketing in the copies 3, 4, 5, 6 signify, then, that Congress either struck out or altered the phraseology of those pas- sages. Mr. Ford desires me to return his hearty thanks to the Society for the privilege of examining the manuscript. It seems to me that the Society is sath ise indebted to Mr. Ford for the foregoing valuable information. Patterson Du Bois, Curator. The Treasurer, Mr. Price, presented a report from the Mi- chaux Committee, as follows: To THe AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY : The Michanx Committee respectfully reports that at a meeting of the Committee, held on November 5, 1891, a letter was received from Dr. J. T. Rothrock, enclosing the following list of the subjects proposed for the Thirteenth Course of Lectures given under the auspices of the American Philosophical Society : 1. Vegetation of the Bahamas and Jamaica (illustrated). 2. Vegetation ot the Bahamas and Jamaica (illustrated). 3. Physical Geography of the Bahamas and Jamaica (illustrated). 4. Some Problems for the Future, neieing from Forest Growth, Surface Drainage and State Lines. 5. Forestry in Pennsylvania. 6. Relation of Forests to the Surface of the Earth. 7. Some Points in Practical Forestry. It is expected that the Lectures will be delivered in the Hall of the Academy of Natural Sciences, which has been kindly tendered to him by «he Academy for that purpose. The Committee approved of the proposition and requests the Society to_ make an appropriation of $255 out of the income of the Michaux fund to meet the expenses of the Lectures, In January, 1890, the Society made an appropriation of $200, out of the income of the Michaux fund, to Prof. Heilprin, towards the expenses of his expedition to Mexico-and Yucatan, and your Committee has just received from him a paperentitled ‘ Observations on the Flora of Northern Yucatan,’’ in the nature of a report to it of his botanical work in that 1891.] 137 [Heilprin. country, which is herewith submitted as part of its report to be printed in the Proceedings of the Society. The Committee submits the following resolutions, which it desires shall be passed by the Society. Resolwed, That the sum of two hundred and fifty-five dollars be appro- priated out of the income of the Michaux fund towards the expenses of the Thirteenth Course of the ‘‘ Michaux Forestry Lectures,’ by Dr. J. T. Rothrock. Resolved, That the paper of Prof. Heilprin, entitled ‘‘Observations on the Flora of Yucatan,” as well as the paper presented by Dr. Rothrock entitled ‘‘Some Observations on the Bahamas and Jamaica,’’ in the nature of report to the Michaux Committee of his visit to these Islands in 1891, be printed in full in the Proceedings of the Society as part of the report of the Michaux Comniittee. By order of the Board, J. SERGEANT Price, Secretary. The resolutions, as reported, were adopted by the Society. Observations on the Flora of Northern Yucatan. By Prof. Angelo Heilprin. It is not a little singular that while the Mexican region as a whole has from the beginning of the century to the present day attracted the atten- tion of botanists of all nations, and contributed more largely to the initial understanding of geographical botany than perhaps any other region of the globe, the Province or State of Yucatan should not have drawn to it x single botanist of note. Indeed, it is only in the last few years that any systematic effort has been made towards the determination of its flora, even the relationship of which has not yet been precisely ascertained. Grisebach, in his Vegetation der Erde (1884, Vol. ii, p. 801), dismisses the region with the bare statement that unfavorable climatic and physical conditions prevent luxuriance of vegetable development, and Hemsley, in his report upon the botany of Mexico and Central America, prepared for Godman and Salvin’s Biologia Centrali-Americana (Botany, iv, p. 151, 1888), merely asserts our ignorance in the following words : ‘‘ Before con- cluding this part, we may add that little is known of the details of the botany of Yucatan, except that it is very poor and scanty, and largely composed of plants that still bear long droughts without injury. The poverty of the flora is ascribed to the fact that the copious rains rapidly filter away through the porous limestone substratum.” Drude, in his Handbuch der Pflanzengeographie (1890), ignores the region entirely. In view of this very limited knowledge of the flora of a country so interesting Heilprin.] 138 : { Novy. 6, as is Yucatan, I venture to submit a few general observations which were hastily picked up during a field reconnaissance made in the early part of 1890 (Inte February and March), principally in the interests of geological and 2v6logical research. The collection of plants, which serves as a basis for some of the determinations referred to in this paper, was made by Mr. Witmer Stone, one of my associates in exploration, to whom I am indebted for notes and remarks on distribution, ete. I desire in this place also to acknowledge my indebtedness for various favors to D. Emilio MacKin- ney, of Merida, Yucatan, the author of the now progressing Nuevo Judio,* who has kindly assisted me in the determination of species not in flower, and of which specimens could not readily be obtained for our collections, and also furnished the local or Maya names. Perhaps the traveler’s first surprise on landing in Yucatan is that his eyes do not immediately fall upon a line of lofty primeval forest ; secondly, he may be distressed by the utter barrenness which at times distinguishes much of the region that is covered by the bush or ‘‘jungle.’’ This is the condition throughout much of the dry season when the trees and bushes, instead of being buried in dense and brilliant verdure, are as bare as though they had just passed through the tail end of one of our northern winters. The more striking does this condition appear when it is recollec- ted that the region under consideration is well within the tropics, but little elevated above the level of the sea, and seemingly well fitted for the devel- opment of a rich and luxuriant flora. In the region first visited by us—the flat limestone tract included between the seaboard and the capital city— the vegetation is monotonous to a high degree. There is little of that variety of form which we are accustomed to associate with the vegetation of the south—little or nothing of the life which astonishes by its exuber- ance. By far the greater number of the arboreal elements of the scrub— for it is more nearly scrub than either jungle or forest—belong to the group of the Leguminose, among which the yaxhabin} (a species of Cassia) and the dog-acacia or subinché ( Acacia cornigera), with their abatis of thorns, stand out as prominent members. Beyond the presence here and there of one or more species of cactus (Cereus Peruvianus, C. flagelli- Sormis, Cactus opuntia) and the vision of distant cocoa-palms and oranges, there is little to remind the stranger from the north that he is not traveling in his own country. There are no large foresters swinging garlands of evergreens to the breeze, no canopy of flowers to waft perfume to the air, All about are tree-like bushes, fifteen to twenty-five feet in height, thin and so spare in their foliage as to permit of but indifferent shade, and most of them stocked with a wonderful armor of hooks and thorns. There are few flowers on the interground, and what appear on the branches above are almost wholly ofa yellow color—the flowers of the Cassia and of the numer- * El Nuevo Judio ; Apuntes que serviran para la formacion de La Flora Yucateca, Merida, 1849, * Pronounced with the German pronuneiation of the vowels, yashabin, The x which appears in many of the Maya or Yucatecan words, as in Uxmal, has the sound of sh, ee ee 1891.] 139 [Heilprin. ous associated Acacias. These may be taken to represent the white blos- soms ofour cherry and dogwood. Here and there the eyqcatches a glimpse ofasolitary screw-pine, the gipil* of the Mayas (Pundanus candelabrum), a plant which seems to have pretty firmly engrafted itself upon the Yucatan flora. Withal that is lacking to indicite a tropica! flora there is equally little that is really distinctive of the northern woods ; there are no oaks, maples, beeches, poplars, junipers, cedars or pines. Excepting the Acacias we failed to detect a single genus of northern forest trees.t Yet the total impression produced by the vegetation was one immediately suggestive of the north, and not of a flora intermediate in character between that of the north and that of the south. The largely denuded condition of the trees undoubt- edly conduced towards this impression. This is the picture of the limestone flats between Progreso and Merida, and of much of the region lying to the east, south and west of the capital city; it is the picture as we found it in the dry season, in the month of March, before nature had yet begun to respond to those refreshing influences which are the offering of the rainy season.t It was the tropical winter, But even at this season of the year there were pieces of landscape that were fragrant in their verdure. Wherever the hand of man had transformed the native scrub into the fertile, but ever dreary and monot- onous, hennequen country, with its countless aloes (Agave riyida? var. A. Sisalana) planted in avenues of geometrical precision, the eye is sure to rest upon a number of scattered garden spots. They are the groves of the haciendas, and it is difficult to conceive of anything more brilliant or refreshing than these oases in what might be termed a fertile desert. The dense masses of foliage of the orange, ramon (Brossimum alicastrum), and one or more species of Ficus (F. longifolia), with their deepest tints of green, and the overarching plumes of the cocoanut, offer a sharp contrast to the bleak expanse of hennequen, and a picture of loveliness not soon to be forgotten. Along the roadways and in the gardens of Merida numerous examples of the true arboreal vegetation of the tropics are to be met with. Con- spicuous among these are the silk-cotton tree (Bombax ceibu) and the bonete or kumehé (Jacaratia Mexicana), both of which assume the stately proportions of forest trees, At the time of our visit they were already in full fruit, although they as yet showed scarcely a vestige of leaf. .This peculiarity, so novel to the stranger, was also true of most of the larger trees, such as the sapote (Sapota achras), pochote (Hriodendron anfractu- osumy, the so-called native cedar or cedro (Cedrela odorata), etc. The * The Maya 0, or reversed C, is pronounced as a short lingual tz. +So many of the bushes and trees being destitute of leaf, and therefore largely unrec- ognizable, it is possible that more of the temperate forms are actually represented than appeared to us to be the case, t Returning to Progreso in the early part of June, I found that the vegetation, although considerably advanced, was still backward as compared with that of the eastern low- land plains of major Mexico, and in every way much less luxuriant. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SUC. XXIX. 136. 8. PRINTED DEC. 28, 1891. Heilprin:] 140 | Nov. 6, plum or siruela (Spondias) was also bearing heavily, but it still bore traces of flowering. One of the most ornamental trees of the roadside is the **southern pine’’ or Casuarina, which also thrives extensively in the open and windy sand spots of Progreso. The tree which at the time of our visit gave the tone of luxuriance to the vegetation was the ramon (Brossimum alicastrum), the dense masses of whose foliage are a refreshing object in the street scenery of almost every town in northern Yucatan. It is extensively cultivated for horse and mule fodder, and thus frequently appears for cause stripped of its leaves for a height of thirty to forty feet. It then shows to advantage the brilliant contrast between its pale gray, almost white, trunk and the dark green of itscrown. Plants with showy flowers were not numerous, and the flowers where occurring were not specially remarkable either for beauty or for fragrance. There were, however, one or two notable exceptions, which went far to redeem the reputation of the tropics. One of these was the tree known in the Maya language as xkuiché, which comprises the two species familiar to botanists as Pachira alba and P. fastuosa. Both forms were completely naked, except for the large tufts of red_and white blossoms - which were scattered over the branches. The tree is a favorite with the natives, and we met with it at numerous places along the open roadside ; but its true home is the village garden. Scarcely less attractive in its dis- play of flowers is the siricote (Cordia Sebestana), with its large and bril- liant cups of scarlet, the abiding place of several spegies of humming-bird. The picture of Merida and its surroundings, so far as the vegetation is concerned, is also the picture of much of the outlying region where settle- ments have effected a lodgment. The approach to every village is heralded by a growth of sabal or cocoanut, the former of which attains the dimen- sions approximately of the Florida palmetto, rising in graceful shafts sixty to eighty feet in height. Its most picturesque garb is seen when the tree is enclosed by the trunk and cable masses of the copé (Ficus rubiginosa), whose close embrace makes it appear as though the same trunk and roots were nourishing and supporting the lives of two very distinct organisms. The fig, of later growth, had wrapped its massive descending roots about the shaft of the palm, and in such a manner as to leave little or nothing of its fellow visible except the tufts of leaves. Manifestly the pseudo-para- site had started life from above, possibly from seeds deposited by a bird, gathering sustenance from the atmosphere and its contained impurities. I could find neither here nor in Mexico proper, where I subsequently had frequent opportunity of observing this growth, evidence of strangulation of the host. Inasmuch as the trunk of the palmetto does not materially increase in bulk after it first rises from the ground, I doubt much if this closing around causes any real injury to the plant attacked, contrary to the general belief of the natives. The finest specimens of the cocoa-palm were met with by us at a locality on the north coast known as the Serrito, a few miles to the east of the Puerto de gilam, The tree does not in this place grow to any great height, perhaps forty to fifty feet, but it appears 1891.] - 141 {Heilprin. in full vigor, and many of the trees of the large grove, which is here bathed by the ocean breezes, were laden with fruits. Compared with the cocoa-palms which I subsequently met with in the Mexican region west and northwest of Vera Cruz, these appeared to be of a much more healthy type, and altogether their general aspect was much fresher. In the same region is also found the dwarf cocoanut (Cocos coyol). In the mountain region forty to sixty miles south of Merida, or beyond Ticul, certain new elements are introduced into the vegetation, which impart to it a somewhat distinctive character ; but, broadly speaking, the flora is still that of the northern limestone flats, with its acacias as the dominating feature. Atseveral points on the northern flank of the Sierra, as between the hacienda of San Juan and Uxmal, and again between Ticu) and the hacienda of Tabi, there are extensive growths of the red gum, the chakah of the Mayas (Bursera gummifera), the tree which yields much of the chewing gum of commerce. Like most of the larger for- esters it was destitute of leaves, and in its peculiarly dichotomizing branches and copper-colored trunk, it could not fail to attract the attention of the traveler. The tree grows to a height of some forty to sixty feet, and in such close association as to form woods of its own. I met with it in con- siderable abundance along the line connecting Vera Cruz and Jalapa, not far from the village of San Juan. Along the roadways and in the thinner jungle the lesser pineapple or pitiuela (Bromelia pinguin) was very abun- dant, its long and rigid saw-like leaves, tipped with bright crimson, form- ing an effective foreground to the more delicate types of vegetation beyond, Especially beautiful is the effect produced by these plants at the approaches to the famous ruins of Uxmal; great tufted masses, five to seven feet in height, line the roadway on either side—a natural stockade alike impassable to man and beast. Only along a comparatively short stretch of roadway between Izamal and Tunkas, on the Camino Real to Valladolid, did we meet with that phase of vegetable development which the mind popularly associates with a southern flora—a flora which is tropically luxuriant, and where luxuri- ance is dependent not upon the special growth of plants of a single order, but upon an assortment of largely heterogeneous elements. The begin- nings of such a vegetation we found a few miles to the southeast of Sitil- pech. The limestone has here undergone deep decay, liberating a rich deposit of red earth, which has attracted a profuse and varied flora. The trees are very much larger than we had heretofore seen in the bush and some of them almost noble in their proportions. Manifestly they are the remains of a forest which was at one time far more majestic than it is to-day, and which dates its primal destruction probabiy to the period of the early colonization of the country by the Spaniards. The overarching boughs, decked with a profusion of dog-jessamine ( Tubernemontana amyg- dalifolia), orchids and air plants, especially the latter, help to form a dainty bit of ruad scenery which it would be difficult to match. Of the orchids, the Cattleya was especially abundant, forming by its large bunches great unsightly scars in the axils of the forest trees. We col- Heilprin ] 142 [Noy. 6, lected also a number of Oncidia, etc. The epiphytes were mainly Tilland- sias or Bromelias, which in places literally covered some of the large for- esters, especially the pich (Inga xilocarpa). Among other components of the vegetation are the Spanish bayonet (Yucca) and Fourcroya, rising thirty to forty feet, and several species of cactus (Cereus grandiflora, C. fligelliformis, Melocactus). The first of these, the far- famed night-blooming Cereus, occurs in great sprawling masses, dependent from the lower branches of the bush. Here and there it is closely associated with the organ or giant cactus (Cereus Peruviana) and with other species to form dense and impenetrable thickets. Many of the plants were in flower at the time of our visit. Three large cenotes, or, more properly, aguadas, those of Shkashek and Balantun, open up within a short distance of one another on this road, and their deep basins are largely encircled by a luxuriant growth of forest. Over the surface of two of these, great lily pads had encroached upon the water, recalling a picture from our own far north. In a second well a brake or cane, together with the puh (Pundanus utilis), had largely usurped the place of the lily. I observed here also a number of calabash bushes or trees ( Crescentia cujete). On the northern coast of the peninsula, adjoining the luxuriant sapo- tales of the Serrito, is a vast mangrove maze, Unlike the mangroves of the Southern United States, such as I had observed in profuse develop- ment on the western coast of Florida, or of Bermuda, the Yucatan man- grove is a noble forester, rising a hundred feet or more in height. The great air-shoots or roots descend from an elevation of fifty to seventy-five feet, and in their massiveness recall the giant cables of some of the Ficacea. In its general aspect the mangrove forest is most impressive—a wilder- ness of roots, stems and foliage, into which but little sunlight penetrates. Attention has already been directed to the scanty character of the Yuca- tan sylva; this is, indeed, the nature of the ‘“jungle,’’ which is referred to by nearly all travelers since the days of Stephens and which encom- passes the sites of many of the larger ruins of the interior. The true forest jungle, such as is to be met with in the State of Tubasco or in the low Mexican region west of the Gulf, is wanting over the greater part of the extensive limestone plain of the north, nor does it show itself in the mountain tracts either. This condition has led botanists to assume that the northern half of the peninsula was climatically and physically un- suited to the development of the protuse and healthy vegetation which elsewhere distinguishes tropical Spanish America, Indeed, Grisebach goes so far as to assume that the deficiency of forms is mainly due toan absence of rainfall, which is, however, as well marked fn Yucatan as it is in most non-mountainous tropical countries, The fallacy of this view has already been pointed out by Woeikof.* ‘The scraps of luxuriant growth that appear here and there, taken in conjunction with the giant dimen- sions of some of the scattered foresters, seem to me to point rather to * Relae durch Yukatan und die siidbstlichen Provinzen von Mexiko, 1874, Petermann's Mittheilungen, 1879, p, 202. 1891.] 143 {Heilprin- favorable than to unfavorable conditions and to an explanation of the existing sparseness of the vegetation which hus no connection with cli- matic or physical influences. I think it all but certain that an extensive forest at one time covered the land, and that successive devastations in one form or another have brought the surface to the condition in which we now find it. That the Spaniards here, as in Mexico proper, caused wanton destruction of the native forests is positive ; but how often the destruction has been continued since the period of the conquest has not yet been determined. The following brief notes on some of the plants observed by us may serve in a measure to elucidate the vegetation of northern Yucatan ; most of the determinations have been made by Mr. MacKinney, who has also supplied the Maya names (the second name which occasionally appears in parentheses is the one in common use). Cassia sp.? (Yaxhabin).—Tree, 15-20 feet, very abundant in the open scrub between the seaboard and Merida. Flowers bright yellow. Acacia cornigera (Subinché).—Very abundant in the bush. _ Acacin odoratissima ? (Baalch?). Inga xilocarpa (Pich).—One of the largest of the roadside trees, 70-100 feet or more in height. This tree appears to be specially selected for decoration by the Tillandsia, Bombax ceiba ( Yaxrché).—The silk-cotton tree is one of the giants of the Yucatan flora, of which it constitutes one of the distinctive features ; 70-100 feet; very abundant. Specially noble examples of this tree, one of them measuring not less than eight feet in diameter, are found in the region about Ticul. Destitute of leaf at the time of our visit, but bearing an ample supply of pods. Eriodendron anfractuosum ( Puchote).—An abundant tree, mostly of smaller size than the ceiba; flowering. Pachira alba, Pachira fastuosa (Xeuyché—Amapola).—Cultivated as orna- mental trees ; 15-25 feet ; flowering, but devoid of leaves. Brossimum alicastrum (Ox—Ramon).—Very abundant in all the village gardens ; cultivated for fodder. Tree, 60-80 feet. Ficus grandifolia (Aktim).—Large and abundant tree. Ficus rubiyinosa (Copé).—Very abundant as a pseudo-parasite on Sabal. Ficus laurifolia —Shade tree in the park of Merida. Jucaratia Mexicana (Kumehé—Bonete).— Large and abundant tree—in fruit. The conspicuous triangular fruit is prepared in a variety of ways as an article of food. Carica papaya ( Put—Papaya).—The papaw; very abundant in gardens. Bursera gummifera (Chacah).—Tree (destitute of leaf at the time of our visit) very abundant in the hill region south of Ticul ; 50-60 feet. Spondius lutea ( Abal—Xkinim-hobo—Siruela).—One of the forms of Yuca- tan plum ; extensively cultivated. Spondias microcarpa (Aac-abal). Spondius rubra (Xkis-abal). Cordia Sebestana ( Kopté—Siricote).--Abundant in gardens. Heilprin.] 144 [Nov. 6, Cedrela odorata (Kulché).—Abundant in gardens in Merida and in nearly all villages. Casuarina.—Abundant in gardens and in open places ; 30-60 feet. Anona squamosa (9 almui—Saramayo).—The custard apple. Anona muricata ( Guandoano). Anona glabra (Op). Sapote achras.—Much cultivated for its delicious fruit ; tree 50-80 feet. Lucuma mamosa ( Chacalhas).—The mamey. Mamea Americana.—The San Domingo mamey ; extensively cultivated. Persea gratissima ( On—Aguacate).—Alligator-pear. Plumeria alba (Nicté—Flor de Mayo).—Cultivated for its beautiful and highly aromatic flowers. f é Tabernemontana amygd4lifolia (Uoupek — Jazmin de perro).—Dog-jessa- mine. Very abundant along some of the roadways, as on the Camino Real between Izamal and Tekant6 ; flowering. Crescentia cujete (Luch—Jicara).—Calabash tree ; observed at the aguada of Shkashek. Tecoma equinoctialis (Sac-ak—Bejuco de Chiquiuite).. Cucurbita pepo (Kuim—Calabassa).—Calabash. Rhizophora mangle (Tupché).—Forming extensive forests on the north shore, east of the Puerto de Dilam. Cereus Peruvianus (Nun—Organo).—The organ cactus, forming ‘dense and almost impenetrable thickets; 20-30 feet. Very abundant near the hacienda of Tabi, southeast of Ticul. A smaller species is known as Nuutsutsui. Cereus grandiflora ( Pitaya).—Abundant in the thickets, where its great depending masses impede penetration. Cereus flagelliformis (Canchoh).—Common on rocks, Cereus lanatus (Tsacdn). Cactus opuntia (Pakaém).—The common nopal. Melocactus communis ( Polanik—Bisnaga).—Abundant in places. Bromelia pinguin (Chom—Jiiuela).—Abundant, and forming dense thick- ets, Musa sapientia (Sac-haas).—The common banana; extensively culti- vated, Musa paradisiaca (Box-haas).—Plantain ; also common. Cocos nucifera.—Abundantly cultivated, and forming along the northern shore beautiful groves ; 50-70 feet. Cocos coyol.—Dwarf cocoanut. Sabal Mexicana (Bayal-xaon).—I am not certain that this is the common species of palmetto of Yucatan; the tree attains a height of some 7-80 feet, Thrinaz otomale (Bon-raan). Thrinaz parvifolia (also Bayal-vaan?), ° Pandanus candelabrum (Cipil).—Stray specimens appearing here and there in the bush, between Progreso and Merida. Pandanus utilis (Pah).—Lo the waters of the cenote of Balantun. 1891. | 145 (Rothrock. Some Observations on the Bahamas and Jamaica. By Dr. J. T, Rothrock. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 6, 1891, as part of the Report of the Michaux Committee.) The American Philosophical Society having last season set apart from the Michaux legacy the sum of three hundred dollars towards defraying the expenses of my West Indian exploring and collecting trip, I desire to offer the following : The object of the appropriation was the collecting of photographs and . information which could be utilized in the preparation and delivery of the annual lectures, popularly known as ‘‘The Michaux Forestry Course.’’ Towards accomplishing this, the islands of New Providence, Eleuthera, San Salvador, Watling and Inagua, all of the Bahama group, were visited, as well also as Jamaica and its lesser political dependency, the Grand Cayman, which is situated one hundred and ninety nautical miles, nearly W.N.W., from the western end of Jamaica. As the time allowed for my entire trip was but three months, it is evi- dent that no prolonged stay could be made in any one place. We de- voted by far the greater portion of our time to the island of Jamaica, and found everywhere, but especially on its greatest altitudes of 7000 feet, ample returns for our search, In all, about one hundred and fifty good negatives were obtained. As - duplicates were usually made, it is fuir to say there are about seventy-five satisfactory illustrations of trees, physical geography and topography of the islands visited. How rich a field the island of Jamaica offers may readily be inferred from the following facts : 1. If reduced to a square, the island would be about sixty-five miles long by as many wide. 2. Its population is only about 600,000 souls. 8. Only twenty-five per cent. of its area is under cultivation. 4. The agricultural methods are very primitive and fertilizers are sparingly used. 5. Notwithstanding these facts, this small area, after retaining enough for home uses, sends into the markets of the world nearly $9,000,000 worth of products each year.: These are mainly from the vegetable king- dom. _ It is well, also, to call attention to the fact that, of these exports, prob- ably about fifty per cent. are shipped to the United States as against thirty-seven per cent. to Great Britain. Of iruit alone, we received in 1889 not less than $1,580,000 worth, as rated by the exports there. Of course, its value here was vastly greater. There has been during the past five years a decided increase in the trade with the United States, and some also with Canada. — Rothrock.] 146 ‘ [Nov. 6, In spite of the relative proximity of the Bahamas and Jamaica, the con- trast between these islands is exceedingly marked. The Bahamas are low and show no considerable elevations. Jamaica reaches a maximum altitude of 7360 feet above the sea level. The soil of the Bahamas is scanty, and consequently cultivation entails fertilization. That of Jamaica is of great depth, and its continued productiveness is evidence of a vast natural fertility. The flora of the Bahamas-shows marked resemblance to that of Florida. The flora of Jamaica is essentially tropical, save at such altitudes as suit plants of cooler regions. In such places we found the common chickweed (Stellaria media), the white clover (T7rifolium repens), associated with plants from the cooler parts of southern regions. The mangrove (Rhizophora mangle), common to the tropical seas around the globe, attains in Jamaica (compared with that in Florida and in the Bahamas) a surprising height. Near Port Morant are large jungles, where the trees attain a height of at least sixty feet. This is the proper place to call attention to possible tannin production, which the mangrove suggests. No tree that we have here, at all approaches it in the now so Important to Jamaica, has been introduced there. Of the original forest but little remains in Jamaica, though reproduction has again covered the steeper slopes with a luxuriant growth of timber. Jamaica is not wanting in hard woods. Some of these are of great value, It is claimed that of these they need none from us. Though, on the other hand, it is equally sure that for white and yellow pine the island draws very largely upon our resources, The United States fur- nished Jamaica in 1889 nearly $200,000 worth of building material, of which the major part was probably lumber. It is not probable that the economic resources of the vegetable kingdom in Jamaica are properly recognized, or that we derive from them now anything like what we shall in the future, ‘ Attention should also here be called to the fact that, years ago, attempts were made to introduce the Sisul hemp from Yucatan into the islands on the southern coast of Florida, It appears to have been aban- doned (probably from want of proper machinery to extricate the fibre), The plants are now growing wild in these Florida islands, and have been — - 1891.] 147 [Rothrock. introduced, under the intelligent and earnest direction of Gov. Sir Ambrose Shea, into the Bahamas, where they promise soon to furnish large quanti- ties of fibre which will rival manila in the markets of the world. From Publication No. 86, of the U.S. Hydrographic Office for the Year 1888, page 1, I quote the following: ‘‘ The sea breeze generally sets in about 9 a.m., and, blowing either directly on shore, or, according to the trend of the coast line, at an angle to it, continues till about sunset, when a calm interval is succeeded by a light off-shore air, attaining its greatest strength about day dawn, and being succeeded by an oppressive calm, to be again followed by the sea breeze. On the coasts of Cuba, Santo Do- mingo, Puerto Rico and Jamaica, the regular sequence of land and sea breezes is seldom interrupted.’’, So far as our observation could go in so brief a period, we can entirely confirm this general statement. These local breezes must not, however, be confounded with the trade winds which, from latitude 28° N., come normally from the N.E. or E.N.E. and sweep Over the ocean areas in which these islands lie. Neither must we lose sight of the fact that, at Kingston, in Jamaica, the wind comes the year through almost constantly from the 8. E. Observation has shown that during the months of November, Decem- ber and January frequent rains full upon the northern side of the island of Jamaica. It would appear as if the direction of these trade winds and the position of the island of Cuba might explain some notable differences in the distribution of this winter rain upon the northern shore of Jamaica. From Cape Maysi, on the eastern end of Cuba, to Morant Point, the east- ern end of Jamaica, the direction is N.E. 4 N. or about N. 39° E. The dis- tance is about 180 nautical miles. Port Antonio bears by the compass from Cape Maysi about 8° more to the westward than Morant Point. Both of these places are, however, fairly in the line of the N.E. trade winds, which may reach them without sweeping over the mountainous, fog-enveloped eastern end of Cuba. It is important to bear in mind that these mountains on the eastern end of Cuba attain a height of 7000 feet and must, have a temperature considerably below that, of the sea level. A line drawn from Lucea, on the northwestern end of Jamaica, would cut the mountains of Cuba about 100 miles from the eastern end. In other words, the trade winds from the N.E., to strike Lucea, must first cross the mountains of Cuba, where, by the lower temperature, the mois- ture is precipitated. Whereas, the normal N.E. trade wind can reach Port Antonio without having to cross the Cuban mountains. The latter reach the Jamaica coast as wet winds, whose moistu re is precipitated on the northern side of Eastern Jamaica ; but the winds which reach Lucea - come as dry winds. The facts, as observed by us, were, first, the large aqueous precipitation of Port Antonio and the smal! precipitation at Lucea. The whole fact is briefly expressed by the saying of the sailors, that to find Port An- tonio you had but to enter the blackest, rainiest port on the northern side of Jamaica. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XxIx. 1386. T. PRINTED DEC. 31, 1891. 148 (Nov. 6, The practical bearing of this is not hard to see from a sanitary stand- point. The high ground on the western end of Jamaica is the climate most suitable for the invalid. The beautiful little town of Lucea, if it possessed a large, well-kept hotel, would be an ideal winter resort for our northern invalids. Whether considered from the standpoint of climate, scenery or pro- ductiveness, Lucea could be made a more desirable winter resort than the Bahamas. Indeed, I am so strongly impressed by the possibilities of Northwestern Jamaica for the invalids of the future that I cannot refrain from making these statements as positive as I have. There is one more factor to be considered in the climate of Lucea. It is that the trade winds from the N.E. tend, on striking the northern coast of Jamaica, to be deflected into E.N.E. winds. This would place Lucea somewhat under the protection of the parishes to the east of it; so far, at | least, as the rainfall is concerned. We lay in the harbor of Port Morant, on the southern side of Jamaica, whilst a furious north wind was blowing on the northern side of Jamaica and deluging the region near Port Antonio with the rainfall. Yet we re- ceived a very moderate share of the rain, which was drained from the clouds by the mountains north of us. Dr. Morris read a note from Mr. Patterson, Trustee under the will of the late Franklin Peale, suggesting the removal of the stone-age collection of relics, and» moved that the Curators be instructed and authorized to withdraw from the custody of the Academy of Natural Sciences the Peale stone- age collections. A discussion ensued, in which Dr. Brinton, Dr. Morris, De: Cope, Mr. Dudley, Mr. Martindale and Mr. Du Bois took part. The President stated the manner in which the Society had become the owner of the collection referred to. On motion of Mr. Dudley, the further consideration of the whole matter was postponed until the next regular meeting of the Society, and the Curators were requested in the mean- time to examine into the facts and report upon the same. At the call of deferred business, the report from the Com- mittee of which Prof, E. D. Cope was Chairman, postponed from May 1, 1891, was taken up and considered, Prof. Cope requested that the same might be postponed until next meeting, which, on motion, was agreed to. And the Society was adjourned by the President. 1891.) 149 Stated Meeting, November 20, 1891. Present, 26 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. On motion of Mr. Dudley, it we Resolved, nem. con., That the ordinary business of the Society should be suspended, and that such matters as were set for this evening should be postponed until the next regular meeting, and that the only business that should be attended to to-night, should be the reading of a paper by Mr. Henry C. Baird, on ‘‘Carey and Two of His Recent Critics—Behm- Bawerk and Marshall,’’ and the presentation of the portrait of Mrs. Seiler. Mr. Henry Carey Baird read a paper on “Carey and His Recent Critics.” Mr. Rosengarten read the following letter : FREDERICK FRALEY, EsqQ., President American Philosophical Society. Dear Sir :—Some of the friends of the late Mrs. Emma Seiler, includ- ing many of her pupils, desire to present to the Philosophical Society, of which Mrs. Seiler was a member, a marble relief portrait of that lady, to be placed in your Hall, as a memorial of her scientific labors and of her success in elevating musical education, and of her contributions to a bet- ter knowledge of the voice in speaking and singing. You are respect- . fully asked to request the Philosophical Society at its next meeting to accept this gift, and to fix a time when it can be presented, and a memoir of Mrs. Seiler, be read, to be preserved and printed in the record of the Transactions of the Society. We are very respectfully, etc., Mrs. Caspar Wister, Mrs. 8. I. Lesley, Mrs. Brinton Coxe, Mrs. Marriott C. Smythe, Miss Rosengarten, _ Miss Maria Moss, Miss Bradford, Mrs. John W. Field, Miss Maria Hopper, Miss Ella C. White, Mrs. Messcliert, Miss Mary A. Burnham, Miss Messchert, Miss Kate 8. Gillespie, Miss Bennett, Miss B. M. Randolph, Miss Eliza B. Chase, Mrs. George McClellan, Mrs. Agnes G. E. Shipley, Rev. Dr. T. K. Conrad, Mr. William Ellis Scull, Mr. William Platt Pepper, Mr. M. H. Messchert, Mr. Edward H. Coates, Mr. Charles Platt, Mr. J. G. Rosengarten. Philadelphia, November 4, 1891. 150 [Nov. 20, Mr. Rosengarten, presenting the portrait of Mrs. Seiler, spoke as follows: Mr. PREsIDENT :—At the last meeting, the American Philosophical Society agreed to accept a marble relief portrait of the late Madame Seiler, presented by a few of her friends and pupils. I now have the pleasure, on behalf of the subscribers, to present it to you and through you to the Society. Madame Seiler was a member of this Society, one of the six women who have thus far been enrolled on its list. The others were Princess Dashkoff, Mrs. Somerville, Mrs. Agassiz, Miss Maria Mitchell and Miss Helen Abbott. Her works on ‘‘The Voice in Singing”’ and ‘‘ The Voice in Speaking ’’ were not her only claims to this distinction. In Germany, her native country, Madame Seiler was a pupil of the famous teachers of the University of Berlin, and it is to her that is attributed the first use of the laryngoscope in studying the organs of the throat, while her discovery and description of some of the parts of the throat were of great value. She brought letters of introduction from well-known German savans to the late Dr. George B. Wood, for many years President of this Society, and through him was enabled to make the acquaintance of the Rev. Dr. Furness, among its oldest members. This venerable member of the Philosophical Society helped her in all of her literary work, and was her kind and steadfast friend through all her life; his last act of kindness was officiating at her funeral, when his tender sympathy aud earnest words assuaged the grief of her family and her friends. But no patronage and no help would have availed without the talent, energy and ability which won for Madame Seiler hosts of friends here. Her success was shown in the establishment of a singing academy, where many pupils were trained in her methods, and her little leisure was spent in scientific and literary work. Much still remains in manuscript, but her printed books have been freely used and commended by the later writers on the subjects specially her own. As a mark of respect and affection, her friends and pupils have secured this admirable marble relief portrait. It is the work of Mr, Henry K. Bush Brown, a young American , artist, and it is now presented to the Philosophical Society, with the request that it may find a suitable place on the walls of its hall, where there are portraits and busts of many of the distinguished men who have been members. What Madame Seiler did to entitle her to this honor will be set forth in detail in a biographical sketch to be read this evening, and that memoir will no doubt be preserved in the growing list of necrological notices in the printed papers of the Society. On behalf of the subscribers this marble relief portrait is presented to the Society as an expression of the affection and admiration felt for Madame Seiler in her lifetime and in the hope of thus perpetuating her name and memory as those of a woman who did much for a scientific knowledge of music and whose general cul- ture, broad sympathies and earnest labors endeared her to all who knew her. Coming to this city almost an entire stranger—not even a master of 1891.) 151 the language spoken here—it was the kindness shown to her by members of the Philosophical Society that enabled her to find employment and to show her mastery of her art and to carry on her scientific work and to write her books. It is eminently fitting, therefore, that this memorial portrait should find its final resting place on the walls of your hall, and that her name and services should be perpetuated in your records. I now, in the name and on behalf of the subscribers, hand over to you and through you to the keeping of the Society, the portrait of Madame Seiler, a member of the Society, a woman of many virtues and talents and be- loved by a large circle of friends, who have joined in thus testifying their sense of the honor conferred on her by this Society and of her eminent right to it. The President accepted the portrait in a few appropriate remarks, Mrs. J. P. Lesley then read the following sketch of Madame Seiler : Mrs. Emma Seiler was born on the 23d of February, 1821, at Wurtz- berg, in the kingdom of Bavaria. Her maiden name was Diruff, and her father was court physician to Ludwig, King of Bavaria, and also Surgeon- General to the kingdom, Emma Diruff had two brothers and two sisters, One of her sisters afterwards married Dr. Canstadt, a celebrated physician and professor at Jena, who also started a medical journal, which is still in existence. Her other sister married Dr. Demme, professor of surgery at Berne, and brother of a distinguished Lutheran clergyman of that name, formerly settled in Philadelphia. The children of Dr. Diruff were on familiar terms with the young princes and princesses at the court of King Ludwig, and occasionally shared their lessons with the same tutors and professors, and Emma grew up in close intimacy and friendship with the princesses, and with the young Maximilian, and Otto, King of Greece. She lived in the atmos- phere of court life, was early presented, and the king and queen valued highly their intercourse with the family of the court physician. To our American ideas these are trifles, but unless we understand all the early in- fluences of a young life, we cannot realize what one must have to over- come in later years when living among people to whom all such distinc- tions are purely artificial. _ Her early youth was a very happy one, devoted to her education, in the’ east of a family circle of sufficient wealth to be free from serious anxie- ties and cares, and their home in the midst of beautiful scenery, for which she had allher life a deep appreciation. In the year 1841 Emma Diruff was married to Dr. Seiler, a young phy- sician whose family like her own was one of the oldest and most aristo- cratic in Bavaria. The estate of her husband, to which she at once re- moved with him, was situated in Langenthal in Switzerland, not far from 152 [Nov. 20, Berne. She was then twenty years old. For some years she lived in outward comfort, not called on for serious exertions beyond the cares for her children and the guidance of her family affairs. But in 1846 some speculations in which her husband had engaged failed; all his property except the estate on which they lived was lost, and from this time forth she lived a life of deep and constant anxiety, and under the necessity for unremitting exertion. They both thought that their home on the estate might be made remunerative by turning it into a private asylum for insane patients, and into this work Mrs. Seiler threw herself with the energy and ardor of her nature, making herself the sympathetic friend of those whose mental maladies were of the milder type, and having great in- fluence over the violent. At one time, after watching successfully for some months a case of suicidal mania, the patient escaped her and was found to have hung herself. Mrs. Seiler, after an hour of heroic effort, succeeded in restoring the life that was apparently extinct. At another — time, she was badly injured by lifting an insane woman, and carried that injury and the suffering it occasioned to her dying day. But she was never one to dwell upon personal sorrows and pains, or talk about them; nor could she help away her griefs by personal resentment, a poor way for any of us to be helped. But she went on courageously with the work appointed to her, only finding her eyes and her heart more open and sym- pathetic with her sufferers, and her hands more active. _ In the year 1847 a famine came upon Switzerland, not due to failure of crops, but to political causes. The French invaded Switzerland in prep- aration for the Franco-Austrian War, blockaded all the outlets, and the price of provisions became so high that the very poor had no means to supply their wants. At Langenthal and in many other places, they fell dead in the streets from starvation. Mrs. Seiler’s heart ached well-nigh to bursting with the miseries she saw around her—the dead and dying in the streets, the wretchedness of those who survived. Night and day she pondered on their distresses and thought.over plans for their relief. But all her plans required money and she had none. One night in her agony she prayed, ‘‘Ob, my God, send me power to help my poor dying people ! Oh, my God, show me the way!’’ ‘I prayed all night upon my knees,’’ she said, ‘‘and by daylight my mind was clear.”’ She rose early, and having attended to her family and her patients, she went to the clergyman of the village, to ask for his sympathy and ap- proval. When she had finished an ardent appeal to him, he said to her in a deep and solemn tone which she was fond of imitating, ‘Read the Bible to those dying people.’’ And when she said, ‘‘ But they are starv- ing to death; they must have food,”’ he only repeated mechanically, ‘ Read the Bible to those dying people, every one.’’ When she declined to do this, and rose impatiently to go, he said, in the same sepulchral tone, ‘* When that great day comes when the Judge shall separate the sheep from the goats, where willyou be?’’ ‘That does not concern me at all,’’ said Mrs. Seiler, ‘‘ whether I shall go with sheeps or goats. I was thinking of some- a Na i A i neal lll 1891.] 153 thing very different. But you, sir, how shall it be with you in that day ? Will you go to sheeps or goats?’ There was no answer to this question, and she hurried away to carry out her vision of the night without the aid of the clergyman. ‘‘I walked toevery comfortable house that I could reach on foot,’’ she said, ‘‘and besought them to give me whatever they could spare in food or money.’’ Her eloquence brought a generous response. Then she went through the wretched streets, and invited three hundred to come to her house the next day. She bought materials, and herself prepared large kettles of nourishing broth, and bought huge loaves of bread. Then she lodged and fed them through the day on her own prem- ises. Many lives were saved by this timely aid, but this was but one part of Mrs. Seiler’s midnight planning. As soon as the poor lives were enough restored for work she induced them to learn some little handicraft by which to help themselves. She herself understood all the beautiful methods of embroidery and exquisite darning and crocheting, aud to these she added braiding of hats and baskets and mats, that she might teach them. The hands so awkward and unskillful at first, soon became expert under her instruction, and even very little children in the end did exquisite work. And now she had a real manufactory of salable articles. Then she sent to many rich persons at a greater distance to come and see. ‘‘I was a very handsome woman then’”’ she said with naive simplicity, ‘‘and I thought to myself, I will now make my beauty of some use. So I did send toall my courtiers [she meant admirers] to come and see me, and I made it very agreeable for them, and they did buy all my poor people’s work, and that did give me much money, to take in and feed and teach more starving people, and then many young ladies of fine families came to me and said, ‘Mrs. Seiler, we will learn all your arts, and then we will come and help you to teach-the poor people ;’ and they did. And so the circle of blessing was extended.’’* I cannot close this little history of one brief period of Mrs. Seiler’s life without telling you that her methods in this time of her country’s needs "were so successful and far reaching that the Swiss government and after- wards the Swedish and Danish governments sent emissaries to see them ; and so convinced were they of their goodness and practicability that they copied them in their own administration. Her versatility and energy and physical strength were at this time very great, and her resources unfailing. During the whole period of the famine she had to plan carefully and keep the strictest account of expenses and also arrange new plans to replenish an ever-lessening treasury. So, while teaching the handicrafts, she set about discovering the fine natural voices which she knew must exist among the poor peasants who flocked daily to her estate. Having found fifty or more capable of it, she devoted * Mrs. Seiler’s daughter writes me: ‘ When I was iw Germany, I made it a point to ask my mother’s brother and sister as well as old friends about her youth, and all agreed that she was not only the handsomest girl in Wurtzburg, and called ‘The Rose of Wurtzburg,’ but was also beloved by all who knew her.” 154 (Noy. 20, © herself with ardor to the training of a band of choristers, who in time sang the most beautiful music all over the neighborhood ; she gave lovely concerts, and the proceeds enabled her to carry on her pious charity a much longer time. Much of all this I learned from her own lips, told so incidentally and naturally, one could see that she did not herself appreciate its admirable character. But it was strikingly confirmed to me by a lady from this city who with her husband traveled through that region only a few years ago. In the mountains she met a peasant whom she asked if he had ever known a Mrs. Emma Seiler who once lived there. His face brightened all over as he assured her that he remembered her well, and then he told with enthusiasm the story of her saving the lives of so many of his com- rades and the good she had done in many ways to all the people. Late in August of 1851, the home at Lagenthal was broken up, the pri- vate asylum came to an end, and Mrs. Seiler found it necessary to sup- port herself and her children by her talent for music, and she left Swit- zerland never to return to it as a home. She went first to Dresden, and there took lessons of Wiek, the father of Clara Schumann, with whom she became intimate. She supported her- selfand her children by giving piano lessons while she was cultivating her voice. But while in training there she lost her voice, a bitter disap- pointment to her, because she could earn much more by teaching vocal than instrumental music. She remained in Dresden three years, during which time her house was the rendezvous of the principal musical celeb- rities. She worked hard at her piano lessons, but she did not recover her voice. Then she went to her sister Mrs. Canstadt at Breslau and passed a year giving lessons, and then to Heidelberg. Here she found piano lessons poorly paid; every one wanted singing, and this inspired her to study with zeal the laws of vocal physiology, and the causes of the overstrain which had destroyed her own voice and that of so many others. Here at Heidelberg she became intimate with the two Bunsens, the chemist and the statesman, and also with Kirchoff, professor of physics. Bunsen the chemist and Kirchoff together discovered the spec- troscope while she was there, which excited all her enthusiasm. In December, 1856, she met Helmholtz, who was made professor extra- ordinary of music. He was then engaged in writing his great work on “ Sensation in Sound,”’ and went to Mrs, Seiler almost daily for several months for advice and for verification of his calculations by her ex- periments. After living in Heidelberg nearly six years she went in 1856 to Leipsic to study herself, and to give her children a musical education at the conservatory. Here she knew well Moschelles, Drysholk, and David the violinist, and also the professor of physiology Ernest Heinrich Weber, and with his aid she studied the anatomy and physiology of the voice and published her first book ‘‘ Old and New in the Art of Singing,”’ which created a profound sensation in musical circles. From Leipsic she went to Berlin. By the care and training she had given herself after she ———— 1891] 155 had discovered the cause of her tronble she recovered her voice, and was now once more able to give lessonsin singing. She had the first laryngo- scope, invented by Manuel Garcia, constructed after her own directions, and by it she discovered the verification of her theories with regard to the head notes of the female voice. In Berlin too she found herself in a de- lightful society, meeting often Du Bois Reymond, the egyptologist Lep- sius and many other distinguished companions. In 1866, finding her means of earning a livelihood almost at an end through the straightened means of the German people during the war, which did not permit many to indulge in the luxury of music, she left Germany and came to Philadelphia. Every movement of her life seems to have been made under the stress of stern necessity. She loved a perma- nent home, but she accepted these changes, the parting from old friends, the barriers of language, the unaccustomed ways of a new world, with the same sweet patience and simplicity that characterized her life. I am not competent to speak of her musical career in this city and must leave it to abler minds to do it justice. She brought letters from wise and good men in Europe which at once placed her cause inthe best hands. The extracts from the valuable sketches of Charlotte Mulligan and Har- riet Hare McClellan, former pupils and friends, which follow my imper- fect record, will supply the information I cannot give. From Dr. Fur- ness she had the highest service that devoted friendship could give, since he gave time and personal labor and much care in translating her manu- scripts into exquisite English. Her work on ‘The Voice in Singing” is entirely her own. In the ‘‘ Voice in Speaking”’ she had much assistance from her son, Dr. Carl Seiler, in the physiological parts. In establishing her school of vocal music she had the personal assistance and generous backing of many devoted friends. 1 may mention here that within two years of her residence in Philadel- phia Mrs. Seiler was made a member of the American Philosophical Society, an honor accorded to but six women since its foundation : the Princess Catherine Romanowa d’Aschkow, Mrs. Somerville, Miss Maria Mitchell, Mrs. Emma Seiler, Mrs. Louis Agassiz and Miss Helen Abbot. I have heard that she was not a good business woman, and I can well believe it. No one has all the gifts. Her monumental work consists in the voices she trained, and in the noble principles of art she inculcated. I am told that the principal strength of her teaching lay-in cultivating purity of tone and truthfulness of expression. Those who think that she overdid the value of technique, would do well to read her fine chapter on ‘‘The Esthetic View ”’ in ‘‘ The Voice in Singing.” It was one of her strongest and deepest principles, differing greatly from some modern ideas, that art and genius cannot do the best if divorced from morality. So she despised Wagner’s music, and would say indignantly, ‘‘He is a man of immoral life ; we must not allow that the music of the future can be furnished from such a source.’? As one of her dear friends said of her to me, ‘‘ No, Mrs. Seiler could never believe PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xx1x. 186. U. PRINTED DEC. 31, 1891. 156 SA es that a bitter spring could bring forth sweet waters. It was the same with her innocent pure mind in all art,’’ said this same discerning friend. «‘She could walk about a room full of nude figures with real enjoyment of the exquisite outlines, but let her see a fully veiled figure whose attitude or expression denoted meanness or low tastes and a shudder went through her.” I had not a close intimacy with Mrs. Seiler ; she was too much occupied for me to have been willing to take up much of her time ; but those who knew her better can easily fill out and correct the only portrait of her that my warm personal friendship allows. She came at intervals an uninvited but most welcome guest to take tea and pass the evening with us ; those evenings will never be forgotten. Her conversation had a rare charm, and was by no means confined to those subjects she would have been supposed to be most interested in. She had an appreciative interest in what each friend had most at heart. The young artist in painting was surprised to encounter in her such sympathy with the humblest efforts, and was charmed with her accounts of the various schools of art in the Old World, and her stories of wonder- ful paintings and their effects. The scholar and’ the student found her a delighted and receptive listener to his researches in Archeology or Egyptology ; and her personal stories of distinguished scholars whom she had known intimately in Europe lighted up the moments she gave them. Often most amusing in its dramatic characterization of persons and events her conversation was always kindly and could not wound. I must make one exception. There were occasions where she was carried out of herself by her indignation at what she knew or believed to be wicked- ness. But these occasions were rare. She had in the main a sweet and patient temper as surely as she had a warm and loving heart and a sunny spirit. One remembers far oftener the delicious humor, the inno- cent childlike mirthfulness with which she would tell of her own adven- tures and escapades. I recall how, after her first visit to Europe, after she had made a home among us, she came to spend an evening with us, and the glee with which she told us one little incident of her travels. She was in Italy, and I think on the train between Rome and Naples, when some ladies who were attracted by something she said about music to her companion joined in the conversation. In the course of it they mentioned that the Italian government had directed that the works of Mrs. Emma Seiler on the ‘ Voice’’ (an American lady they called her) should be introduced into all the schools. Do you know her, they asked? She looked reflective. ‘‘ Yes, I do know that woman quite well indeed,’ said Mrs. Seiler; ‘‘she is a good woman and she knows quite well about the voice; she has studied it long. Ladies, your gouvairn- ment [so she pronounced it] has done a very good thing indeed to direct that the books of Mrs, Seilershall be taught in the schools, I will myself tell her just so soon as I return to America.’’ And she bade them fare- well without disclosing her identity, 157 1891.] There is no doubt that she was impulsive and impetuous; those quali- ties could not have existed apart from the divine energy that accom- plished such results. The sources of our virtues are also the sources of our faults. Let it be said that she was sometimes undisciplined in speech, and sometimes misunderstood her friends. We will remember that she came to us Puritans, Quakers, self-restrained people, from a demonstrative and enthusiastic nation of Europe, and that we are quite as likely to have misunderstood her. Let us remember, too, the constant strain and stress of her hard-working life in a profession of all others trying to nerves and spirits. Andif she demanded much of others she was harder on herself. After toilsome days she ‘often studied into the small hours of the night to keep herself at the high-water mark of knowledge which she conscientiously exacted of herself. In 1883 her children induced her to give up a life of such incessant exertion, to close her school of vocal art, to take a trip to Europe for relaxation, and on her return to take only private pupils. Her visit to Europe at this time illuminated the remaining years of her life; every- where she met with warm friendship and cordial admiration, When she returned, it was to a peaceful home, where loved children and grand- children could often come to see her, where she received pupils through the day, and lived alone with one faithful, loving German servant to whom she was both friend and mother. It was a quiet, retired but peace- ful life. She had always been simple and unworldly, full of humanity and taking delight in small pleasures, such as lie within the reach of all. The companion of princes, the fiiend of the first statesmen and philoso- phers, poets and musicians of Europe, the beloved of Clara Schumann and ourown Anna Jackson, found joy in making one poor German girl happy and in being made happy by her. ‘‘ We go tothe Park in the hot sum- mer days, Paulina and I; we sit down by the water, and under the trees and hear the birds sing ; we look at the children on the flying-horses and we visit the Zoo. In the winter if we are tired or lonesome Paulina and I will go to the opera. Sometimes we do go to see Buffalo Bill, and we laugh and shake all over, and that rests us.” Mrs. Seiler left us on the morning of December 21, 1886, at two o’clock. She had been ill for nearly two weeks, but few persons had known of it, and it was a surprise to nearly every one. She had often said she hoped she might not live beyond the age of sixty-five, and her wish was granted. Her disease was spinal meningitis, and she was unconscious from the begin- ning of her illness to its close. For her we could ask nothing better. She escaped the languors and disabilities of old age ; she never tasted death. At the brief funeral service, I longed to hear some voices of those who had loved her and whom she had trained sing the beautiful hymn, ‘‘Oh Spirit freed from Earth.” After her hard-working, self-denying life, crowded with services to her fellow-men, and faithful to the end, she has entered into immortality. For, what Dr. Furness said of her in beautiful words (which I must not . ; 1 58 [Noy. 20, try to quote accurately, but I amsure I caught his idea) is the great truth : What she thought or believed about immortality is of less consequence, than that she lived a life which must keep the soul near to God, here and hereafter. EXTRACTS FROM A BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF MADAME Emma SEILER, BY CHARLOTTE MULLIGAN. “‘The death of Madame Seiler, which occurred in Philadelphia recently, deprives the world of one of the most remarkable women of the century. Every teacher of the voice in America, every student who has made a specialty of the throat and vocal apparatus, knows the value of Madame Seiler’s discoveries and her books upon these subjects are the standard authority. ‘Not one of us has improved upon her work, with all our efforts,’ said Dr. Lennox Browne to us, three years ago, in London, ‘and she stands still the peer of the greatest of us all.’ In this testimony hundreds of other physicians would agree, and the world of science has long known the importance of her researches, and accorded her an honor- able position among its savans. Garcia was the discoverer of the laryn- goscope, but Madame Seiler applied it, and followed out a course of study that, when presented to the world, greatly facilitated the efforts of those who were endeavoring to understand the vocal action. ‘The greatest living authorily upon the voice,’ Garcia himself, styled her his friend and colaborer, and the encomium was rightly hers. x x * * * * * * x x ‘«During her early life Madame Seiler became deeply interested in the study of medicine, her father being at that time physician to the court of Bavaria. It was considered almost a sin in that age for a woman to learn anything about the structure of the human frame, and every tendency towards the acquisition of such knowledge was promptly checked. These restrictions greatly hampered the young girl, but she found opportunity | to read books from her father’s library, and before her marriage had acquired an extensive knowledge. The voice appears always to have interested her particularly, and she was first attracted to the subject by the song of a pet bird. Her own description of the way in which she arranged to see the throat of a human being after death, illustrates the persistency with which she prosecuted her studies. Going to spend some time with an aunt, she made friends with a medical student in the town, and to him confided her desire. He, at the risk of being discovered, pro- cured a throat and took it to the house late one night, when the old aunt had retired. ‘Two weeks we worked together,’ she said, ‘examining the muscles, dissecting them with the greatest care and studying every detail.’ This study was always done at night, but the time Madame Seiler counted as most precious to her, for it developed her understanding of a subject that was of the greatest importance, yet not at all familiar even to"professional men, For several weeks after this experience her work | md 1891 ] 159 was constantly interrupted, and she struggled with many bitter trials. Her mind was not inactive, however, and she formed theories then that later on she demonstrated to be facts. Acoustics to her became a science that offered the greatest possible interest, and she studied the inflections in the cries in birds and beasts until they became a perfect language to her. Falling water, the different sounds in the atmosphere, and the myriad tones from the insect world, all had for her their harmonies or lacked the essentials of perfect tones. She heard in nature what is shut off from ears that are duller than hers, and she lived in a world upon the border of which we can only stand. The human voice, according to Madame Seiler’s view, had never yet been developed to accomplish even half of which it was capable. Some of her theories were exemplified in her own case, and up to the last year of her life, she could produce superb tones, that rang and vibrated with wonderful power and beauty. The production of such tones required constant work, but once they were acquired they were well worth the labor and discouragement that attended the study. We have never yet heard a pupil, who had studied with this famous woman, who did not show either in the speaking or singing voice, some of the remarkable qualities that she knew the voice could be made to possess. One of these was richness of tone, a peculiar concentration that demanded attention, and an effect of power combined with sweetness. Madame Seiler possessed it to a remarkable degree, and impurted it to all those who had the intelligence to study with confidence in her great ability. The voice in speech was second only to the voice in song, and she laid great stress upon the care that young children should have when they are be- ginning to discriminate between sound and noise. No great singer ever came directly from Madame Seiler’s care, because she paid most attention to those qualities which tend to make a voice retain its beauty and fresh- ness. When those were acquired, then the accessories were undertaken, but many a pupil tired of the preparation, and other masters built upon her enduring foundation, reaping a glory that never could have been theirs but for her conscientious work. Madame Seiler was also a woman who had lived all her early life among scientific men in Europe who appreciated her mind and made much of her. Her life in this country was one of comparative isolation. She could not understand the lack of reverence and respect with which she came in contact, especially: in younger people, and she sought her chief happiness among her books. The end came peacefully, and the bright, gifted woman fell quietly asleep. Her death falls heavily upon many throughout the country, for she had been a great benefactor to hundreds, who, through her instrumentality, have learned the true use of the voice. It is difficult to believe that her work is completed, to realize that all is over, that she is removed forever from this world. As one of the many who knew her value, who appreci- ated her true nature and wonderful knowledge, we pay a parting tribute as friend and pupil.’’ 160 [Nov. 20, Ex?rrRactTs FROM A BlOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF MADAME SEILER, By Harriet Hare McCnheuan. ‘Tn passing from the highest tones of the falsetto register, still higher to the head tones, she was the first to observe a change in the motions of the organ of singing, which she discovered to be due to a sudden closing to- gether of the vocal ligaments to their middle, ‘ with their fine edges one over the other, leaving free only a third part of the whole glottis imme- diately under the epiglottis, to the front wall of the larynx.’ The fore- most part of the glottis furmed an oval orifice which with each higher tone seemed to contract more and more, and so became smaller and rounder. It was objected to this result of her observation that such a contraction of the glottis was only possible by means of ‘cartilages and muscles,’ but that such cartilages.and muscles as could render an action of that kind possible were not known. Madame Seiler fully admitted the soundness of this objection, while she was, after repeated trials, more and more con- vinced of the correctness of her own observation; so she began anew to study the anatomy of the larynx in dissected subjects and was rewarded by finding within the membranes of the vocal ligaments certain fibres of muscle which she called the aryteno-thyroid interna, and which have also been found by other observers. They consist of muscular fibres, some- times finer, sometimes thicker, and are often described in recent works on laryngoscopy as continuations or parts of one of the principal muscles of the larynx, but her chief discovery was of certain small cuniform carti- lages within the membranes of the vocal ligaments, and reaching from their junction with the arytenoid cartilages to the middle of the ligaments. She states that she found these always in the female larynx, and that they undeniably work the shutting part of the glottis, but as they are only now and then fully formed in the male larynx, it follows plainly that only afew male voices are capable of producing the head tones. She adds that observation in the microscope revealed in those larynxes in-which the cuniform cartilages were wanting, parts of a cartilaginous mass or the rudiments of a cartilage in the place indicated, and accounts for the car- tilages not having been discovered earlier, by the fact that the male lar- ynx was most commonly used by anatomists for investigation, as its mus- cles are more powerful and its cartilages firmer than in the female larynx. ‘*Thus she proved her point, and better still she succeeded, by patient effort and persevering practice, of which she was unsparing now that she had discovered the cause of her inability to sing [the attempt to carry up- ward the throat tones beyond their proper limit} in once more recovering her voice, Certainly if proof were demanded of the truth of her theory, or the practical value of her method, it need be sought no further than in the fact of her having succeeded so completely in the restoration of her own voice, a task recognized by all singing teachers as infinitely more difficalt than the original training of an untried organ, At last she who understood the art of singing could sing again—and a glad song she sang ! 1891.] 161 ‘«She has spoken for herself as to this portion of her experience and it seems most appropriate to quote her own words: ‘**As I had had for many years the best teaching, both German and Italian, in the art of singing, and had often sung with favor in concerts, I was led to believe myself qualified to become a teacher of this art, but I had hardly undertaken the office before I felt that while I was able to teach my pupils to execute pieces of music with tolerable accuracy and with the appropriate expression, I was wanting in the knowledge of any sure starting point, any sound principle from which to proceed in the special culture of any individual voice. In order to obtain the knowl- edge which thus appeared to be requisite in a teacher of vocal music, I examined the best schools of singing, and when I learned nothing from them that I did not already know, I sought the most celebrated teachers of singing, to learn what was wanting ; but what one teacher announced to me as a rule was usually rejected by another. Every teacher had his own peculiar system of instruction. No one could give me any definite © reason therefor, and the best assured me that so exact a method as I sought did not exist, and that every teacher must find his own way through his own experience. In such a state of darkness and uncertainty to undertake to instruct others appeared to me a manifest wrong, for in no branch of instruction can the ignorance of the teacher do greater injury than in the teaching of vocal music. This I unhappily learned from my own personal experience when under the tuition of a most eminent teacher I entirely lost my voice, whereby the embarrassment I was under, so far from being diminished, was only increased. After this misfortune, I studied under Frederick Wiek, in Dresden (the father and in- structor of Clara Schumann), in order to become a teacher on the piano, but while I thus devoted myself to this branch of teaching exclusively, it became from that time the aim and the effort of my life to obtain such a knowledge of the human voice as is indispensable to a natural and healthy development of its beautiful powers. ‘«*T availed myself of every opportunity to hear Jenny Lind, who was then dwelling in Dresden, and to learn all that I could from her, [ like- wise hoped from a protracted abode in Italy, the land of song, to obtain the fulfillment of my wishes, but beyond certain practical advantages, I gathered there no sure or radical knowledge. “*In the French method of instruction, now so popular (1868), I found the same superficiality and uncertainty that existed everywhere else. But the more deeply I was impressed with this state of things, and the more fully I became aware of the injurious and trying consequences of the method of teaching followed at the present day, the more earnestly was I impelled to press onward in search of light and clearness in this dim domain. “««Convinced that only by the way of scientific investigation the desired end could be reached, I sought the counsel of Prof. Helmholtz, in Heidelberg. This distinguished man was then engaged in a scientific 162 (Dee. 4, inquiry into the natural laws lying at the basis of musical sounds. Prof. Helmholtz permitted me to take part in his investigations, and at his kind suggestion I attempted by myself, by means of the laryngoscope, to observe the physiological processes that go on in the larynx during the pro- duction of different tones. My special thanks are due to him that now, with a more thorough knowledge of the human voice, I can give instruc- tion in singing without the fear of doing any injury.’ ”’ Mr. Rosengarten presented to the Society the laryngoscope used by Mrs. Seiler, which was stated to be the first ever used in America. At the conclusion of the memoir, the President invited those present to a light collation that had been pre- pared. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, December 4, 1891. Present, 11 members. Mr. RicHarD Vavx in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: A letter of acceptance of membership from Prof. George Forbes, London, November 1, 1891. A letter from the Coast and Geodetic Survey Office, Wash- ington, D.C., asking for exchanges, which request was granted. The following were ordered to be placed on the Proceed- ings Exchange List: Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst, Mass.; Agri- cultural Experiment Station, New Haven, Conn.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Lincoln, Neb.; Agricultural Experiment Station, College Park, Md.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Raleigh, N. C.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Auburn; Ala.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Starkville, Miss. ; Agricultural Experiment Station, Fayetteville, Ark.; Agri- cultural Experiment Station, Laramie, Wyo.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Providence, R. I.; Agricultural Experi- ment Station, Tucson, Ariz.; Agricultural Experiment Sta- 1891.] 163 tion, Experiment, Ga.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Ames, Iowa; Agricultural Experiment Station, Fort Collins, Colo.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Auburn, Ala.; Agri- cultural Experiment Station, Brockings, S. Dak.; Agricul- tural Experiment Station, Corvallis, Oreg.; Botanische Ver- ein, Provinz Brandenburg, Berlin, Prussia; Bowdoin College Library, Brunswick, Me.; Library of the University of Lyons, France; Museo Oaxaquejio, Oaxaca, Mexico; American Mu- seum Natural History, New York City, N. Y.; New Jersey Natural History Society, Trenton, N. J. A circular from the American Chemical Society, New York, announcing a meeting to be held in New York city on December 29 and 30, 1891. Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; Académie des Sciences, Amsterdam ; Observatorium der K. K. Nautischen Akademie, - Triest ; Society of Natural Sciences, Buffalo; Secretary of State, Washington, D. C. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Comité Géologique de la Russie, Imperial Russian Geographical So- ciety, St. Petersburg (135); Prof. A. E. Nordenskiold, Stock- holm (134, 185); R. Danish Geographical Society, Copenhagen (135); Musée Royale d’Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Brux- elles (129-134); Académie R. des Sciences, Amsterdam (131- 134 and Transactions, xvi, 8); K. K. Militiir-Geographische Institut, Wien (131-1384); K. K. Sternwarte (135); K. K. Astron, Meteorolog. Observatorium, Triest (131-133, 135); Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes, Allenburg (135); Prof. F. Reuleaux, Berlin (1384); Naturwissenschaft- liche Verein, Bremen (135); K. Siichsisches Meteorologisches Institut, Chemnitz (135); Verein fiir Erdkunde, Dresden (135); Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Freiburg i. B. (135); Natur- historische Gesellschaft, Hanover (135); Verein fiir Thiirin- gische Geschichte und Altertumskunde, Jena (135); Dr. Julius Platzmann, Leipzig (185); R. Accademia di Scienze Lettere ed Arti, Modena (135); R. Comitato Geologico d'Italia, Prof. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIxX. 136. V. PRINTED JAN. 6, 1892. 164 [Dec. 4, Guiseppe Sergi, Rome (135); Prof. Gaston Maspero, Paris (135); Société des Sciences Naturelles et Archzologiques de la Creuse, Guéret, France (138+); Prof. E. Mascart, Bureau Central Météorologique de France (185); Sir Henry W. Acland, Oxford, Eng. (185); Prof. J. P. Postgate, Cambridge, Eng. (135); Department of Science and Arts Royal Astro- nomical Society (135), Mr. Charles Leland, London (134, 1385) ; Royal Dublin Society (185); Royal Society of Edinburgh, Royal Observatory, Mr. James Geikie, Edinburgh (185); Ver- mont Historical Society, Montpelier (134); Prof. Elihu Thomson, Swampscott, Mass. (135); Prof. James Hall, Albany, N. Y. (134); Rochester Academy of Science (135); Mr. Henry Carey Baird, Philadelphia (181-135); Wyoming Historical and Geological ‘Society, Wilkes-Barré (135); California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco (1381-185). * Accessions to the Library were announced from the Natur- forscher Verein, Riga, Russia; K. K. Sternwarte, Prag; Osservatorio Marittimo, Trieste ; Bayerische Botanische Gesell- scbaft, Miinchen; Société Neuchateloise de Géographie, Neu- chatel; Direzione Générale della Statistica, Prof. Guiseppe Sergi, Rome; Prof. Paul Topinard, Paris; R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid; Philosophical Society, Cambridge, Eng.; Geological Society, Mr. Henry Wilde, London; Hon. George E. Foster, Halifax, N.S.; American Oriental Society, New Haven; Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn.; Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences; College of Pharmacy, Philadel- phia; U.S. Bureau of Education, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C.; Historical Society, Mr. C. S. Wake, Chicago; California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco; Geological Survey of Arkansas, Little Rock; Observatorio Astronomico Nacional de Tacubaya, Mexico. A photograph for the Society’s Album was received from Mr. Samuel Wagner. The decease of the following members was announced ; J. H. B. Latrobe, Baltimore, Angust, 1891. Dr. D, Humphreys Storer, Boston, September 10, 1891, wet. 87. 1891.] 165 Moncure Robinson, Philadelphia, November 10, 1891, zt. 89. Rev.. Thomas Hill, Portland, Me., November 21, 1891, zt. 73. The Curators presented the following report: HALL .OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, 104 soUTH FIFTH STREET. PHILADELPHIA, November 28, 1891. The Curators, having fully considered the matter of the Peale Stone Age Collection now on deposit at the Academy of Natural Sciences, and all the facts relating thereto, as requested by resolution of November 6, are of opinion that a resolution should be passed requesting the return of said deposit to the custody of the Society in accordance with the terms of the bequest of the late Mrs. Peale, Parrerson Du Bors. J. Coeston Morris, R. MEADE Bacue. On motion, the Society Resolved, That the return of the Peale Stone Age Collection from its temporary place of deposit, the Academy of Natural Sciences, be now requested. ‘The Annual Report of the Treasurer was presented and referred to the Committee on Finance. Mr. Price moved that the consideration of the report from Dr. Cope’s Committee be deferred until the next stated meeting. Dr. Cope read the report. ' The subject was discussed and Mr. Price’s motion was then carried. On motion of Dr. Hayes, it was Resolwed, That the Secretaries present at the next meeting a report in writing of the cost of issuing the Proceedings quarterly and of such extra number not including the text and report a form to meet postal laws. And the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. Baird.] 166 [Nov. 20, Carey and Two of His Recent Critics, Hugen V. Bohm-Bawerk and Alfred Marshall. By Henry Carey Baird. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 20, 1891.) Permit me, this evening, to ask your attention to a brief examination of the recent criticisms of Carey by two economists—the one an Austrian, the other an Englishman. Although these two writers treat the economic — problem, each from an entirely different standpoint, one is as remote from an appreciation of the truth as the other; and further, neither recognizing what constitutes the great fundamental principle in Carey’s system, they have both left his position unassailed, as indeed it is unassailable. The Austrian is BGhm-Bawerk, Honorary Professor of Political Economy at the University of Vienna; the Englishman, Alfred Marshall, Professor of Political Economy at the University of Cambridge. Prof. Bihm-Bawerk has published two ponderous treatises, the first intended to be destructive of other men’s reasonings and theories, and is entitled, ‘‘ Capital and Interest, a Critical History of Economical Theory;’’ the second, designed to be constructive of theories of his own, is entitled, ‘«The Positive Theory of Capital’’—whatever a ‘positive theory’? may mean, seeing that man’s vision, mental as well as ocular, being limited, and thus short of the capacity to take in the whole situation, he can have no absolute or positive knowledge—nothing more than his poor faculties permit of. Mr. Béhm-Bawerk’s first book, as translated by Prof. Smart of Glasgow, makes of text, 8vo, 428 pages; the second, as translated, 8vo, 426 pages, while a distinguished professor of political economy, who thinks well of the author's labors, has recently assured me that the mar- row of these 854 pages might have been put into forty pages. Such is the thoroughness of this Austrian savant that he inflicts upon the student of economics twenty-one times as many words as the ideas he possesses are worthy of in the presentation. As for myself, I can say that I have care- fully and critically read the whole of these dreary pages—dreary because of un ever-recurring sense of the unsoundness of the author’s premises, as well as of his conclusions. The net result of Dr. Béhm-Bawerk's ‘Capital and Interest,’’ wherein he charges Carey, in what he says of interest, of being guilty of ‘‘a tissue of incredibly clumsy and wanton mistakes,’’ is that ‘‘Present goods possess a greater value than future goods ;”’ that a “ loan is a real exchange of pres- ent goods against future goods ;"’ and ‘*‘ Present goods possess an agio in Suture goods. This agio is interest.”’ Such is the actual product of 428 pages of the most complex, confusing, narrow, hair-splitting, and arrogant criticism, criticism, too, by a man who has himself built up a superstructure which rests upon a fallacy, This fallacy consists in the fact that the writer has included in and treated ————K—— se CC 1991.] 167 [Baird. under ‘‘Interest ’’ things that are not interest at all. Interest is the com- pensation paid for the use of the instrument called money, and its substi- tute, credit, always expressed in a money of account, and for them alone. This instrument, money, is the greatinstrument of association—that one thing, the possession of which, with its quality of universal acceptability, in highly organized—civilized—society, commands all other things to which we attach the idea of value. To talk of the rent of a house, a farm, ora garden, the freight or passage paid to a railroad, or a steamship, or a steamboat company, or proprietor, or the porterage in a cart, or a wheel- barrow, as interest, is to add a new and most vicious element of confusion to that despair of thoughtful men, that fruitful parent of misery to man- kind, the ‘‘ Dismal Science.’? The very word agio, which Dr. Béhm- _ Bawerk would apply to all manner of goods, wares and merchandise, had its origin with reference to a money of account, and to this hour it can be applied to or qualify no manner or form of thing not expressed in a money of account. Further, Dr. B6hm-Bawerk has jumbled up the profit that a capitalist can make out of his own business ventures over and above the profit im- agined to be properly due to his own time and labor, with the interest problem. Thus does he further and hopelessly bemuddle the subject of interest. He calls this profit, which is not interest at all, interest, and which it is impossible to separate from the results of the personal exertions, sagacity, experience, and risks of the capitalist—‘‘ natural interest.’’ Where, in nature, will he find interest, where trade, money, credit, houses, ships, railroads, tools, wagons, wheelbarrows, textile fabrics—where, I , would ask, without the application of human labor, any single commodity _ to which we attach the idea of value? Are not civilized society and all its appliances for forwarding trade, commerce, production and consump- tion, purely the work of man, and hence artificial? Is not this natural interest a collocation without meaning? Is not this doctrine of Dr. Béhm- . Bawerk’s, to use his own words, as applied to Carey, ‘‘ one of those theo- ries which cast discredit, not only on their authors, but on the science that lets itself be seduced into credulous acceptance of them, not so much that it errs, as for the unpardonably blundering way in which it errs?’’ For one, not only do I think that it is so, but to me it is a source of wonder and amazement, that the perpetrator of such blundering can criticise others in the severe and arrogant terms in which Dr. B6hm-Bawerk has done. But what is to be thought of his treatment of Carey? Why, tbat it is simply infamous, for the reason that the necessary preliminary to refuting and denouncing him as guilty of a ‘‘tissue of incredibly clumsy and wanton mistakes’”* has been his misrepresentation. In order to refute him, he has been forced to attempt to make it appear that Carey was guilty of the stupidity of treating distribution, as Dr. Bbhm-Bawerk has done, as interest, not distribution. What Carey himself calls ‘‘ the law of distribution,’’ he calls ‘Carey’s interest theory.’’ After quoting what Carey distinctly states regarding distribution, and which he calls such, he Baird.] 168 [Noy. 20, comments as follows: ‘‘On these preliminary facts, then, Carey builds his great law of interest; that, with advancing economical civilization, the rate of profit on capital—that is, the rate of interest—falls, while the abso- lute quantity of profit rises’’ (the interjected words, ‘‘that is, the rate of interest,’’ being Dr. Béhm-Bawerk’s, not Carey’s). Carey distinctly and emphatically says: ‘‘Jnterest ts the compensation paid for the use of the in- strument called money, and for that alone.’’ And again: ‘When a man negotiates a loan, he obtains money for which he pays interest; when he borrows the use of a house, he pays rent; when he hires a ship he pays freight.” ; This dictum of Carey’s is not merely clear and to the point, but it is in accordance with the common understanding of mankind. To change it as Dr. Béhm-Bawerk has attempted to do, is to bemuddle and confuse the subject. Before he and his translator obtain the right to arraign Carey as **a confused and blundering writer,’ it is incumbent on them both to show that his definition is wrong, and that Dr. B6hm-Bawerk’s definition is correct, and the only correct one. Until they have done so, their de- nunciations obviously prove their own incapacity properly to criticise a man of Carey’s originality, lucidity, power, and far-reaching influence upon mankind. Of the numerous economists whose doctrines Dr. Béhm-Bawerk has attempted to criticise, none has he denounced in terms so opprobrious as - those applied to Carey and his distinguished disciple, E. Peshine Smith, and yet of all these men, the philosophy of none but Carey and Smith is . capable of explaining the real cause of interest, or of clearing up the con- fusion into which Dr. Béhm-Bawerk has become involved regarding value. Interest owes its existence to precisely the same cause and conditions as does money—the necessity under which man stands for association and combination with his fellow-men. But for this necessity there would be no interest, no money, indeed no political economy. Any system, or pretended system, of political economy which is not grounded on this great principle of association, this overmastering condition of man’s nature, is false and misleading, a delusion and a snare—a system of con- fusion leading not only to further confusion, but to the wreck of the hopes, the rights, the civilization of mankind. The system of Dr. Bbhm- Bawerk does not even remotely recognize it; he has not even the faintest glimmer of it, although all political economy is and must be concerned about it. He has dropped out of his system the great fundamental law, the great dominating fact as to the existence of man in. society.. His system is therefore of necessity not only useless, but worse than use- less. The second treatise of Dr. Béhm-Bawerk, ‘‘The Positive Theory of Capital,’ gives us, as a net result, the old and exploded wage-fund theory of the economists, with, as an annex and as a result of his interest theory of present goods possessing an agio in future goods, the effects of extension 1891.] 169 [Baird. of processes of production and the number of producers to be provided for during all these imaginary proccsses—extended or non-extended, though they.be. In fact, he has added to, not decreased, the complication which arose out of the unsound and even absurd ‘wage-fund theory, involving, as it did, a fixed ‘‘ national subsistence fund.’’ Attempting to bolster up the theory of saving as a source of capital, Dr. Béhm-Bawerk has no real conception of the actual source of capital. His whole theory is antagonistic to the truth that wealth consists in the power of man to obtain mastery over nature; and that capital is the instrument by means of which that mastery is acquired; and further, that capital ac- cumulates in the exact ratio that consumption follows production, and that matter takes upon itself new and higher forms—what we term con- sumption and production being mere transformation of substance; in other words, the more continuous and rapid the motion of society, the greater the power to accumulate capital and to acquire wealth. An entire ‘‘book’’ is devoted to the discussion of “ Price,’’ in which even a definition of that vital word is wanting, the evidence being therein presented, in abundance, that the author is quite unaware of the fact that price is the expression of the power of a commodity to command money in exchange, and is always expressed in a money of account. While two entire volumes are filled with discussion looking towards the effort to establish the cause of interest and of the rate of interest, Dr. Béhm-Bawerk has not even the most crude conception of why it is that people are obliged to borrow money or credit, or goods, or rent houses, or factories, or why one man buys and another man selis labor power. If he had recognized association with his fellow-men as the most dominating | necessity of man’s nature, and that money, with its qualities of universal acceptability, and of almost perfect divisibility and aggregation, was the necessary instrument of association, he would not have inflicted upon mankind such a tissue of learned fallacy in reference to ‘‘ present goods’ and ‘‘future goods,’’ labor wages and the wage-fund theory. Above and beyond all, he would not have made those fundamental errors as to inter- est, which is paid only for the use of money or credit expressed in a money of account, but which he has jumbled up with the hire of all sorts and kinds of goods, wares and merchandise. He does not even know why ‘‘ present goods’’ possess what he calls an agio in ‘‘ future goods,’’ t. é., because of the necessity under which man stands for association and combination with his fellow-men. MARSHALL, Under the title of ‘Principles of Economics,’’ Prof. Marshall, of the University of Cambridge, has published the first volume, 754 pages, of a treatise in which no great broad principle is presented, in which no end of petty details are given, and in which nota single clear and valuable analysis of economic phenomena is to be found; and in which an entire absence of the true capacity for analysis is shown. The profundity of Baird.] 170 [Nov. 20, Prof. Marshall may be judged from the fact that he says: ‘‘It makes indeed little real difference to the life of a family whether its yearly income is £1000 or £5000.”” No one but an economist could enunciate such non- sense, and still retain his position as an authority in a high department of knowle ge. His book, largely accepting the doctrines of Ricardo, is full of apologies for him, and for hissinaccuracy of statement. For instance, he says: ‘‘His exposition is as confused as his thought is profound. He uses words in artificial senses which he does not explain, and to which he does not adhere, and he changes from one hypothesis to another without giv- ing notice. If, then, we desire to understand him, we must interpret him generously, more generously than he himself interpreted Adam Smith. When his words are ambiguous, we must give that interpretation which other passages in his writings indicate that he would have wished us to _ give them.’ It is quite proper that a teacher who can talk in this style shcait have no difficulty in deciding that Carey and others who have refuted Ricardo do not understand him. After myself reading ‘‘Ricardo"’ more than thirty years ago, I told Mr. Carey that I could not ‘understand what he was driving at. His reply was, ‘‘ Ricardo did not ! imself understand.”’ Nor do I think he did. Confusion in language involves confusion not merely in argument, but in thought; and in no other department of knowledge but that of political economy, would it be possible for one who needs such apologies, as those made for Ricardo by Prof. Marshall, to become the founder of a distinct school. : The blunders which Mr. Marshall has made wit reference to Carey and Frederick List, and especially as to the indebtedness of the former to the latter, are most remarkable. For instance, he says Carey was born in Ireland, when, had he taken the least trouble to examine any biographical notice of him, he would, at a glance, have seen that he was born in Philadelphia. Then he asserts that List’s ‘‘Outlines of a New System of Political Economy,” a tract published in Philadelphia, 1827, and its wide circulation were ‘‘the be- ginning of his fame, as it was of the systematic advocacy of protectionist doctrines in America,’’ whereas this movement was commenced in 1819, and Mathew Carey was one of the originators of it; and three years be- fore the appearance of List’s tract, or in 1824, the first really protective tariff enacted in the United States was passed. Then he says that this publication of List’s was made ten years before the publication of Carey's first important work, his ‘“‘ Principles of Politi- cal Economy,”’ and adds, “Carey owes many of his best thoughts on protection to List,’’ Now, Carey's attention to economic subjects commenced in 1835, when he published his ‘first important work,’’ the ‘‘ Essay on the Rate of Wages,"’ and there is not a particle of evidence that he ever read the in- significant little tract of Frederick List. If he ever did he wholly failed 1891 J 171 [Baird. to profit by it, as in all of his earlier books and papers he advocated the doctrine of laissez nous faire, never having publicly declared his adhesion to protection until the publication of ‘‘The Past, the Present, and the Future ’’ (1848). Nevertheless, in each of his early books will be found the germs of those vital and far-reaching principles which he so grandly developed in his ‘‘ Principles of Social Science,’ his progress from 1835 to 1860, and even to 1875, having been steadily onward. By the benefi- cent practical working of the tariff of 1842, he was, in 1844, induced by the logic of events to range himself on the side of protection as a necessary national policy. But it was not until 1847 that he was able to reconcile it to economic theory. In 1847, when he had outlined his law of the occupation of the earth, which has completely overthrown the basis upon which rested Ricardo’s theory of rent, he readily emerged from the last vestiges of a belief in so absurd a theory applied to an artificial society as laissez nous faire. Lying in bed one morning, picturing to himself the settlers on the sides of the hills, moving down into the valleys and approaching each other, as wealth, power and civilization grew, he realized the vital importance of bringing the consumer to the side of the producer, and, as he said to me, ‘‘I jumped out of bed, and, dressing myself, was a protectionist from that hour.”’ The fact is Carey, not having studied German until 1856, List’s ‘‘ Na- tional System of Political Economy,”’ published in Germany in 1841, was to him a sealed book until 1851, when a French translation by Richelot appeared in Paris. Carey’s copy of this book in the Library of the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania, with his pencil marks in it, showing passages which he considered striking, clearly proves that he made but little use of it. But the question of Carey’s position as a social philosopher is not to be determined by whether or not he picked out from some other investigator one idea here or another there, but by his philosophy as a whole. His great merit does not consist in the fact that he has demonstrated that asso- ciation and combination with his fellow-men is the greatest need of man, or that in the utilization of labor power—the most perishable of all com- modities—is 10 be found the measure of the growth of a people in wealth, power and civilization ; or that money, the instrument of association, by giving utility to billions of millions of minutes, which without it would be wasted, acts as a great saving fund for labor ; or that a necessary condition of advance in civilization is that man passes from the use of poor tools, in- cluding poor lands, to the use of good tools, including good lands; or that value is the measure of the power of nature over man, and is to be found in the cost of reproduction, while utilify is the measure of man’s power over nature ; or that, with the development of this last-named power, dis- tribution takes place under a law by virtue of which to labor goes a large proportion of a larger yiel4d—freedom thus growing with the growth of wealth and civilization, It is not by reason of the clear demonstration of any one of these great PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIX. 186. W. PRINTED JAN. 6, 1892. Baird.) 172 [Nov. 20, truths, or of all of them, but of their demonstration plus the interlocking and the interweaving of these vital truths into one great and harmonious whole. Thus and thus only is it that he has presented a system of social philosophy deeper and broader than that of any other economist from the days of Plato and Aristotle down to our own time. By this touchstone —fundamental truths with their relations to each other, worked out into a complete system—is it that Carey is to be judged, and judged rightly and justly, and not by mere verbal criticism, or by an attempt to prove that an idea here or another one there was previously promulgated by some other teacher. A great admirer of Frederick List, for what he had done in building up the German Empire—a work without which Bismarck, Von Moltke, and William I would never have been heard of in history—-Carey had but a poor opinion of List’s ‘‘ National System of Political Economy,’’ for the very good reason that it lacked just what he had aimed to present in his own books, and what are absent in Prof, Marshall’s volume, broad, deep and enduring fundamental prineiples, interlocked and interwoven into one grand and harmonious whole, like Carey’s own great and noble ‘**Principles of Social Science.’’ Indeed, no such voluminous writer on social subjects as Carey has ever lived and written who has paid so little heed to the writings of other economists. His own economic and statisti- cal library, now in the Library of the University of Pennsylvania, will bear me out in this statement. Colwell collected the writings of political economists ; Carey collected those of travelers, historians, statisticians and scientists ; and to these he went for the material out of which to demon- strate those great principles which will ever bear his honored name. How far Carey has been successful in impressing his philosophy upon the people of the United States, and upon the national policy, is well de- picted by a recent and far from friendly critic as follows: ‘‘ Measured by results,’’ says Prof. Levermore, ‘the Carey school, and not its opponent, has achieved success in the United States. For thirty years, the stone which the builders rejected has been the head of the corner. Carey and his friends never captured our colleges; but, for a generation, they had dominated five-sevenths of the newspaper offices, a pulpit far more influential than the professorial chair. The arguments to which Carey gave form and eloquence are in the mouths of more than half the business men and farmers of our country; and, in the last Presidential campaign, the Republican party reaffirmed the extremest principles of the Carey school, including even the rancor towards England, with a violence and absoluteness that would probably have surprised Carey himself’’ (‘‘ Po- litical Science Quarterly,’’ Dec., 1890, pp. 572, 578). The reason for this is not far to seek, Carey dealt in broad and endur- ing principles so interlocked and intertwined that any man of ordinary intellect, once captured by them, might ever after during his life bid adieu to the hope of freedom from their intellectual domination, Nihil est veritatis luce duleius. Indeed, nothing is sweeter, nothing 4 1891.] 173 = more delightful, than the light of truth ; and Carey has given to mankind a great body of truth, instinct with life and being, an organic whole demonstrating those principles which govern the well-being, the happi- ness and the civilization of the human race. The destruction of the foundations of this system demand men of greater power than Eugen V. Boéhm-Bawerk and Alfred Marshall. They have not even made a lodg- ment in the outworks. In the citadel all is calm and serene, without apprehension of successful attack by such incompetent leaders—leaders who lack at once a knowledge of even the elementary principles of eco- nomic truth, and the power to group and place in proper relation to each other those things which they do teach, if, indeed, their theories have any connected relations one to another. If they have such relations, these gentlemen have failed to show them. Vocabularies of the Tlingit, Haida and Tsimshian Languages. By Dr. Franz Boas. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 2, 1891.) The following vocabularies were collected by the author when studying the Indian tribes of British Columbia, under an appointment of the Com- mittee of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, ap- pointed for the purpose of investigating and publishing reports on the physical characters, languages, and industria! and social conditions of the Northwestern tribes of the Dominion of Canada. It was decided that in the report of the Committee a brief comparative vocabulary only should be printed. As, however, the languages of the North Pacific Coast of America are little known, the vocabularies may be found to possess some value. The following alphabet has been used : The vowels have their continental sounds, namely : a as in father ; é like ain mate ; ¢ as in machine; 6 as in note; uasin rule. In addition the following have been used: a, 6 as in German; d=aw in law; E=e in flower. Among the consonants the following additional letters have been used : g*, a very guttural g, similar to gr ; k*, a very guttural &, similar to kr ; g, the German ch in Bach ; u, the German cd in ich; Q, between g and H; c= sh in shore; ¢=th in thin; tl an explosive, dorso-apical 1; dla palatal, dorsal /. ‘ following a consonant designates the u position of the organs of articulation. Boas. ] : 1 4 [Oct. 2, I, ENGLISH-TLINGIT. A. above, on top of, ka. Acer tlra’tlré. adam’ s apple dlétu’q(1) kagu’/ntlé(2) = neck (1)? (2). afraid (aki ti) qéu. again détsd ahead 1an. Alnus ké’cic. always dj’étlu’k, yak-a, Anas béschas kindétcuné’t = mov- ing straight up. — clypeata k*in. —— histrionica ts’ utsk. ancestor acukua. angry k*’ant—wa nuk. ankle k*’ds t’aktl= foot knuckle. Anser t’a/wak’. apron, woman’s, cige’t’a. — dancing, sE/n(1)k’ét(2) =? (1) apparel (2). apparel, wearing, két. Arctostaphylus uva ursi tink. arm, hand, djin. armor, wooden, tlra’/tlré (= Alnus). — — of parallel sticks, s/n k'ét (see apron). —— held in mouth, k*’a(1)koé/t(2) = mouth (1). Arnica cordifolia an(1)ka(2)na’gu (3) =town (1) on (2) medicine (3). around, outside, da, Iwalk around house hit da ya qoa git. arrow tcuné/t = moving straight. —— double-pointed, teuné’t k’’avlé’- k é. ashes kan ité/ = fireplace, Astur atricapillus ky édju’k, STIKEEN DIALECT. Atlda, name of a place. aurora k*’an(1)yiq(2)k'U(3) wate (4) = fire (1) like (2) out of doors (8) color (4). —— gyits’6/k. axe CEnqQoa’ri. — stone, kyé’t’d. B. baby g’ata gua/tsgd (male and fe- male). back dik-. — of hand djin kat). bad tlét] wu c k’E = not good. badger nosk. . bark gan da= wood around. basket for blankets né/etl. Sor berries k'ak*. bat tsik’rédita/n. to bathe deciute. baton of shaman wi'sag'a’. beach tl’én’é/té = sand place. bear, black, ts’ék. —— grizzly, quts. —— white (polar), caq. ' beard k’’atatsa’ré. beaver ts’ikrédé/. bed yée/at = something to lay on (Chilkat). bedroom it. bee gandasa/dji. belly yura’. delt si’ yi. berry Uék‘. —— salmon, wutst’in tlék*, —— black, gawa’k* (Rubus). — dried, atka qok:. black, Vote Uék‘ = blackberry. Betula glandulosa véri’s. —— atta’ri. 1891.] bird 10/tli. — a species of, with red wings, kon. black V’dte (see soot). blanket t1’é. — cedur bark, tsatlk k*’6/a. — martin skin, k’dq k*’6/u. — Chilkat, 1a/géin. Blennius sp., dia’. blind tlk‘6ctén. blood ci. to blow (wind) Ad/wanuk to blow uq. blue ts’dyi/qaté (ts’6? yiqaté— colored). — jay k’eck*. board for drying salmon ganiré/t = smoke place. bone s’ak* (see tall, short). boom s’&'sa 10 s’A/gé=sail in oblique. bow of canoe cEKE’. bow sEk’s. bowstring sEk's ni/sé = bow guts. box két, tlak't. — large, tluk't tlén. > bracelet kis. Brachyrhampus marmorata te’ it. braid ca kEsi’t (ca= head), brains tlak’égi’. _ breakers \it ra 11’6k’ (tit = wave). breast wé’tk-a. breath dEsé/uk. brother, elder, unu’q. —— younger, kik‘. _ brother-in-law (wife’s brother) kan. — brush wi’v’a. _ — for clothing at k-a ni’t’a, — Budo virginianus tsisk*. — Buecinum tVitlk*. bucket k*‘8/ca. butterfly tléulu’. by and by ) idEetqE’iiga, tlits’a’. C, 4 calf of leg.ts’é/yu. ——«Caltha palustris atagué’k ‘é. 175 [Boas. cambium of Tsuga stk’. Cunace obscura nukt. canoe yak‘, — Tlingit, sit. — Haida, wutsdé’. Cardium Nutalli (cockle) g*’atl ka/tsk, : cariboo wulsi’H. carpet nétlritl’i1t. to carry in hand ran—teEn. cat dic (Chinook). cedar, yellow, qar. —— young, UEqrE'té. cedar bark tir. —— prepared for weaving mats rit. cedar (and spruce) root gat. hat qat 1s'q. Ceryle Haleyon tlaqanéts’é’. chair ka ra ki/djet=on top of which one sits. chatterboe ka tléyd’/s=mouth playing (see to lie). cheek wac. chief ank*i'd (see rich). child g'it’a’. chin tég-. Chiton Stelleri ci'u, —— tunicata kor. Circus Hudsonicus qéq. clear, tt is, weather, a ka wa qats. cloud giits (see heaven). cloudy ki tli gits=it is out of doors cloudy. club guts (see crabapple tree). coal t’dte (see black). cold sia’t. Oolymbus glacialis k*Eg’é’it, column, heraldic (totem post) k6té’ra. comb qédo’. common people ica’n (see poor). cone of Picea ts’dt:a’/ne. to cook (at—)saé’, copperplate tina’. cormorant y 6k’. corpse nari’. - 1 Boas.] cotton goods s’E’sa (see sail). Cottus sp. wek’. council atkaqtoa’k. country a’n(é). cousin (father’s sister’s child) at. —— (mother’s sister’s child) tlak‘ (see sister). crab s'a’u. crabapple tree g°’uts. crescent (see moon). cross (minded) k*’an—raG (see angry). crow ts’E’quétl. crown of head ca ki=head top. to ery g'aq. Cychrus longicollis as k’’160 yik ca’ = woman in the woods; as k’’t6 = woods, ca = woman. D. dagger tsa’gratl. to dance a—tl’éq. dance of shaman iqt daidé’de. dancing apparel 1)’éq ket. danger at sea katlege’ticEn. —— name of Yétl’s mother, K‘dts6 terip’t. daughter si (probably child, said by * mother). day yigeEri’ (see noon, to-day). daylight k-éwa’. dead (na) na. deaf tk-otl’Eqtec. deer k-oka’n. dentatia 1é'k*é. difficult Ui tsé. dish grease g’ekEné’. — of mountain goat horn Ui'nét ts’ik*, dishes nik‘. diver ts’ uts. to do si, yo—sine’. dog kyéu. doll si (see daughter). door kahit. dragon fly k‘acécqi/wu =no man head-hair. They are said to 6 [Oct. 2, sing : tlétl(1)qat(2)ca(3)caqawu (4) = not (1) I (2) on (8) head hair (4)=no hair is on my head. to dream a—djiin. to drink tana’. drum ga’u. dry wa qok. duck g’uts. dust te’én, k*es’é/dja. E. eagle te’ak‘. —— black, tc’ak‘(1)ié’s(2) = eagle (1) black (2). ear guk. earring djac. east wind nanage’t. —— tl’ak‘aka’q (Chilkat). easy tlétl tli tsé = not difficult. to eat (at—) qa. ebb tide renatlé/n. eggs of lice Hits. elbow t’ér. elk tsisk‘, Empetrum nigrum qitléwu’ts’e. empty aqu’ktle, end CE. ; Epilobium angustifolium k’d/kan na'k‘ = deer medicine. ermine da evening qa’na excrement ha/tlé, eye Wak’. eyebrow ts’é. eyelashes wak* gi qé’q’6. eyelid, lower, wak* tEri. —— upper, wak: k‘a/, F, Jace rE. Sar (na) tlé, Sar out into the sea dékyi. Jast rmsiyé/k, Sat, for greasing face, rp néts’e’, ee te a. ae See 1891.] Sather ic. Sather-in-law ri. fathom wit (see tall, probably length). —— (from elbow over breast to finger) k*at’é yiq ku wat. —— (from shoulder over breast to finger) gik cx gu/ntle yiq ku wat. ; — (shoulder to finger of same arm) qik ce yiq ku wat. —— (elbow to finger of same arm) tciké yiq ku wat. Seather k’’oa'tl. feather bed k:’oa’tlria’/t = feather place. to feel, I feel better, ag’a ctuq dénok. Sern tsats. to fight g’an. Singer ek: (see toe). — first, te’éq. ' —— second, tl’ék’(1)tlén(2) = finger (1) great (2). — third, tl’ék-(1)g’a’tsgo(2) = finger (1) small (2). — fourth, wun ka te’éq (see first finger). fire kan, fire drill toutlé’ (see round, and to turn round). Sireplace k’’an i/té = fire place. jish, fresh-water, in tak’a/té, —— a small species, kn’é’ta, fish line kyé/u. — — of kelp, tlera’né. fishotter nukcéya/n, flood tide dik-nrdé/n. Jlounder tsE/nt’é. to fly dé’ken. foot k*’ds. Sorehead kak‘. fox nag’ats’é’ (borrowed). Sriend qoné’. frog niqte. in front of k*’é'yé (Chilkat). Frost kaqua’n. Fucus vesiculosus taré’/dé. 177 fuel gan (k*’an ?= fire). Full cawahik. Sur seal q’on. G. Gallinago Willsont gitsré .touli = heaven bird. : gens tan. get up! cé/ndE ! girl catk*, to give djét—te. ——give me to drink / hahéa qa tana’ ! to go god, at. I go to town A&n(1)k’’é/yé(2)de (3)qoa(4)gat(5) = town (1) in front of (2) ?(3) I (4) go () (Chilkat). good (rR) k’E. good-natured (tli) an. grandfather, mother, leuk‘. grandson cqa’nke. grass s0/uk-. grease ege’. gull kyé/tEdi’. gutts nase’ Gutscetla, Chilkat name = horizon mother. H. Haida Dékyina’ = people far out seaward, hail kadp’ts. hair ca qi/wu = head hair. hairdress of shaman k'its.. half cu/rd. halibut tcatl. hand djin. Harelda glacialis yaau'né. Haricanr’/k6 = old woman under us, a mythical person. hat ts’aq. — war hat, shaman’s hat, wak'(1) k ét(2) = face (1) wearing ap- parel (2). to haul in si/yik-. Boas.] he hu, hodte, qsEté’. head ca. head ornament used in dances ca k-ét. to hear aq, aqtc heart tek-. heaven gutsEré’ = cloud place. heavy (re) dat), (tli) tse’. heels k’@tak‘. heron tlak*. herring ra’u. herring rake wi’tla (see brush). high water ran k’ Etwada’. his t0(—ti). hoof ague’ntle. hook, halibut, naq. —— round, t’éq. horizon kt gats. —— gutsce = sky end. horn cede. horse gyida’n (Chinook); dik ka ra kidjét (Sitka) = back upon sit. house hit. —— dug out part in centre of, \ak-. humming bird tag‘atg‘iya’. hungry, probably: ran: J am hungry qat ran owa ha; t makes us hun- gry haét ran & wu si ha; if J am hungry qat ran he/né, | a I qat, qate. ice Vék”’. icicle k’iri t'é’k'é = above ice. inside 10, ge. it is inside white a g’é ru. instrument rEré’t. island k’’ at. ivory cuqdu’k,. jaw, lower, q'nts. juat a short time ago, resi’. K. kelp gic. —— swimming apparatus of, kuilt'd’, 178 [Oct. 2, kelp cake tlak-a/sk. kettle, wooden, 0q’ aka’ gante. kidneys kaha’go. killer (Delphinus Orca) kyit. knee kyir. kneejoint sa're. kneepan ca k-unti’k’0. knife tita. —— large, wéks, gwa/tla. knothole in a board k-ats. to know aqtc = to hear often. —— cegok = to understand. knuckles (djin) kagu/ntl. Kyinastl’ac, name of a man. L. labret grak’. | — silver nail, k’anndq (k’'a= mouth). — large plug, k’’a nd“ak’’a’. ladder dzét. Lagobus albus k*’étsauwa’. lame tlek‘a/tck. languag2 yuq’atK’figi (see to speak). large tien, yek‘ tligeé/ (2). to laugh (at—) cd/uk, to leave k‘Owate/n. Ledum palustre ts’ike’ etldi’n. left hand, ts’EtnEqi (djia). leg k*'Os. — of animals atca’kari. —— above knee k-ats. leggings k-’Os k-ét = leg clothing. liar ka tlé’yé s’aieé = mouth play master. life tsén. light etl wu det] = not heavy. lightning nétl’é/gu=thunder bird opens his eyes. like yiq =similar to, Lina sp, tig 'n wé's' =su lice. lip, upper, k*'a 116 (k*’a== mouth), to listen (at—) si.’q (from aq = to hear). little ga’tsg6, 1891.] liver t]’0k’. long ku wa/t, ye—ku wat (see fathom). —— ku daré’t. long ago te’ otla’k. a long time (dé) te’ ak‘. loon cuw&/n. louse wes’, low water ran Owa tla. lungs kyégi’. Lupinus ka! ntak-. Lycopodium clavatum k'o/kan si/gi = deer belt. M. to make si. man ka, tléingi’t. many k*toq. ‘ — men ku ciri tihé/n. — things at ciri tihé/n. married, baptized, hin qErodéwaté’ = face put into water. martin k’ oq. mashed kaqn’k ‘tl. mask wuk* katadu’k = face not per- forated. mast sE/sa (t6) a/sé = sail in tree. master s’a/t6, —— of the upper world Tahi’t. mat, made of cedar bark, g’ate. match, rubbed cedar bark, gate. may be—gitl. meat dlir. medicine nak‘. Mergus sarrator hin yikag:u/ = water rim. ; midnight tateri/n (tat = night). mind tori’. mink tlénik’u’qi. — month dis. moon dis. — new, ka’ wakis=all out. —— first crescent, wutsik é/n.. — half, dis cu’rd. — full, dis ran ra/wawkt. 179 [Boas. ‘moon, last crescent, raré ka’nakis. morning ra k’é/naén; ts’O tat— blue night. mortar vék’a ria/ti= pounding place ; ka qe/guaret=rubbiog upon place. mother atli’. mother-in-law can. mould tlaq. mountain goat towée’. horn tliné’tl. mouse, shrew, kag’a’k-. —— kuts’i/n. mouth k*’a. much tléeq. mud ts’énH, k'utlk. mussels rik, my aq (—ri). N. nail qak-. naked ketidarn’k. ' navel ko/utl. neck dlétu’q. necklace s’ak*.sét = bone necklace. nephew (sister’s child) k-atlk‘. —— (brother’s child) g*it’a’= child. net g @/wil. news neg. night at. no tlék*. noon yigEri’. north wind is blowing qon do- wanu’/k. nose tlo. . —— ornament tl0 n nas. —— — of shaman, wak: k‘ét= face ornament. nostril 110 toru tli. not tlétl. nothing tlék‘. now hé’idEt, y4/ridrt. 0. oak duk-. oar aqa kdark’/t = long paddle. PROC. AMER, PHILOS. sOC. XXIX. 136. x. PRINTED JAN. 7, 1892. Boas.] oblique sa’ gé. esophagus Uékatcu’q’o. Oidemia perspicillata k-aq. —— sp. kitc ka ru= wing on white. Olachen sak. old man can. —— woman ca’wat can. on top of Ka. —— I put it on top of, akayiqa’o. . one eyed tlécauwa’ké. to open one’s eyes tl’ik*. to open a salmon tlag’E’ts. opposite kikr’. otter kucta. —— people kucta ka otter man. our ha (—ri). outside da. —— the house ki. owl, white, k‘ak*. \ Ps to paddle adlqa’. paddle aqa’. to paint néguod’tl; brush). painter négud’tl s’a/té = painting master. paint, black, for face, t’Otc = soot, —— red, for fuce, ek. palate ky’é’k'tlen. palm of hand djin Vak~ (see plant). Parmelia 8'é/qonée. Parus (titmouse), k-& tori’ = man's mind. perforation of nose tho to ri tli, pestle (ka)t’é/k‘a = (upon) pounder; (ka) qé/gua = (upon) rubber. Pica Hudsonica ts’ égé'né, to pick gik. pipe ts’ék: da két=smoke around box. place for something reré’t, rid’ ti, plant of foot k’'ds t'ak (see palm). plate k"'éyé/t = something in front of (Chilkat), keE—cEHI’t (see 180 [Oct. 2, plate made of slate tets’é’k. potnt tio. Polygonatum tlék‘wa hinté = water "berry. Polyporus as tak-a/di= tree biscuit. poor ica’n, k*’anickideé’q. porcupine qatla g’E/te = hair sharp. porpoise tcite. post gidz’. to pretend to be rich (te’E) ck’’a— tli nek‘. —— tobe hungry (tc’E) to—ran s ha. —— to bea Tsimshian Ts’ dtsqE/nqge —tlié’q. puffin qeik. quiver gue’tl. | a © rabbit g aq. racoon s’aq. rafter kaqrét. rain seu. rainbow kiteqanag’é/t = many col- ored wing. it is raining (dag) séte’n. raspberry lek* we/de. rattle, made of puffin beaks, djin kaqn/ta (djin== hand), dje kaq- B’ta, . —— shaped like a skull, cécd’q. raven yetl. razor k‘aréyi/qa. to recover from sickness (wu) 7 (see to save). red k’’an yiq até = fire-like color, reeds tlak:ridzé. rid ts'Ok’. Ribes qahéwu’. rich ank'a/6 (see chief), ridge of house s'érEto/. right hand cireneqi (djin). ring, finger, U’ék: kakis = finger on ring (see bracelet), ‘ 1891.] ring, foot k-’ds ka kis = foot on ring. rock (small island) no. roof zan, hit ka=house-top. rotten tl'ok-. round toutlcan (see to turn round). to rub with pestle ka—tleqEk‘t). 8. sail s’B/sa (see cotton goods). salmon gat. —— humpback, tcats. —— spring, g-at. — hooknose, tl’d'uk. —— dog, thitl. — white, t’a. —— dried, atk’’éci qdk (qdk = dry). salt 6t] qok = dry sea, sand 1)’6/u. satiated ciwa hik. "to save néq. Sazidromus s’6/uk? gatl. scraper Hi'ts’a. sea TEk‘a’k, étl. — heavy, igowata’n. seal isa, sea lion tan. sea otter yuqte. to see \én, sété/n, tli tén. - septum tld t’aka’. shaman iqt. shark tits’. sharp tlag’n’ts. sheep, big horn, djn’ni. sheets 3'B/sa ka ré/gsé. shell sp. ? ié/s. Cik’’a’ tlitd’, a point near Sitka, shoe itl. shore line hin k-’a’cé (hin = water). short ku watl. shoulder qikea’. sick nek‘. sinew, thread, tas. to sing (at—) ci. sister, elder, tlak. : skin douk. 181 _ south wind is blowing skull ca s’ak* = head bone. —— of a corpse ca k'Eqa’go. sky, clear, akawaqa’ts. —— gutsErE= cloud place. slave g0/uq. to sleep ta. sleepy (rE) ta owaha’. small ga/tsgo. to smell tsiné’ky. smoke ts’ék’. to smoke ska da_ ts'ék'=mouth around smoke. smoke hole gat, gan. roof of smoke hole gand/tle. snail tak’. snake tl’ut tla/k-. snow aléet. it is snowing ara kawa dan. _ son gvit’a’ (probably child, said by father). son-in-law kan, séq’u/q (?). song of shaman iqt k:’a ci/reé. soot t’dte. Sorbus keltcané’t. soup, made of berries, qu’ktlé. rE/ndéu d0/wanuk. sparrow-hawk gano’k. to speak yug’a—tefi, reka’. Spermophylus Parryt tsaulk‘. spider k-asést’a/n. spirit yék*. spoon cit). —— large bailer, cin. — short, cr’ca. sprout wuts. squid nak‘. —— used for bait neq nak‘. squirrel kanatltsa/k. —— a small species, tlk-Oqwé’tsa. to stand gya. stand up! gyida’n ! star k-utaq’a’/renaha. to steal ta’0. to steer yiiru tlaa/. steering-paddle rEdi’ga. Boas.] stern of canoe gyikka’. Sticta pulmonara acakaré’ci. stockings tl’éz’u’a. storm ara odete’. stone the. stout ku tla. straight, upright, kin de tcun. —— ahead ran de tcun. stomach yuru’. stop crying c’itlk’E’tl. storehouse in the woods tcEtl. - stranger t’auya’t. strawberry cak*. street dé. strong (rope, ete.) tli wu’s. —— (man) tli tsé’n (see life). summer k-uta/n. sun (ra) gan. the sun is shining (dag) gan. sunset ré anaHi’H. sunrise ky’é anaui’H. swan g’uk'tl. sweat t’ar. sweat-lodge qiar. sweet tli nukts. sweetheart tseri’. to swim randat’g’te. Tv; tail tl et. tall (yé)—s’ak* ku wat = bone long. temples wak'co’ (wak*= eye). then adaqai’o. their hast6 (—ti). they has, haste, thief ta/O s'a/té = stealing master. thin qun. thine i(—ri). to think of somebody su—s'ét’ B/n. thou woe', WO ‘ie. thumb ¢6'uc. thunder, thunderbird, nétl. tide hit, tired (wu ti) qué/tl. Tlagkaic, Chilkat name = perpet- ual man's father, 182 (Oct. 2, Tlingit tleingi’t. tobacco g’aute. to-day ia’ yigeri. toe k's tl’k = foot finger. together wuctén—ta. —— we lwgh, at to ta cdo/uk". to-morrow séré/nk-. day after, séré/nk* tliraakEté’n. tongue tl’ot. tooth oq. town an (see country). trap ié’q. tree k-ats. tribe na. —— the heavenly, k6' wa k ‘&/oqa! wo. Tringa ayahi’a. trout k’’oa’t. trunk k‘6/uk‘0k*.. Tsimshian Ts’ Otsqn’n. ‘ Tsuga ren. to turn round toutl (see round, jire- Zé drill). . to turn back, on foot, k*uq k-atudaa’t. — k‘aqudigu’t. — in canoe, k‘uqritla’. the tide turns ara kan dida’. twins wute kikre/dé = two together opposite. U. Ulva k*’ate. uncle (father’s brother)sa/ni. — (mother’s brother) kak. up dé ki. uoula nit’ari. Vie Vaccinium Vitis Idea négi'n. —— uliginosum ts’ik’a/qk*. — ovalifolium Kanat’ a’. Valeriana titcanisla/k‘, vein ts'ike, vertebra dik’ s'ak* = backbone. very .léq, site’. 4 1991.] Viburnum acerifolium k‘Eqwé’q. village, winter, tak’ané’/. —— summer, k°’ uta’n. voice sek. W. to walk god, at. wall gy’iri’. warm (TB) t’a’. warrior gan s’a/té = fighting mas- ter. water hin. wave tit. we ohn, oha/ne. weak tlét] wu tli tsén = not strong. west wind sa/naq. wet (ti) tl’Ek*. whale yar. whistle 16 uq sirét into plow place. white ru, tléd yiq até’ =snow-like color. widow, widower, hitltsatséca/ wat. willow te’ atl, wind ky’ étlea’. wing kite, 183 [ Boas. wing of nose tlogite. winter tik (see year). to wish sigo’, gacu’. wolf g°0'ute. woman ca! wat. — a man, who is in the habit of eloping with women, ca s’a/té = woman master. woodpecker gan da da giig‘== wood around (= bark) around pick. worms tl’uk-. wrist djin t’ak'tl. ¥ to yawn akyé’t. year tak (see winter). yellow kyétl ha/tlé yiq até = dog ex- crement-like color. yes a, | yesterday tatgE (see night). — day before, tatge tliraake’t. you riwa/n, riwa/ntc. young ga’tsgo. —— man rEdE'k*. your ri (—ri). II. ENGLISH-HAIDA. SKIDEGATE DIALECT. .. (Nore.—The words followed by a K. are Kaigani dialect.) A. above gi. —— it ts, ca 6/tsi. to accompany g°ak’ ait. Acer tik -atlk (borrowed from Tling- it) K. adam’s apple k‘age’n sku/tsé=lung bone. adze qot’a’. - afternoon sEn ta/tsera ga’ista. again i/sEn alive qai/ntiiya. ali tl6’qan. Alnus ka/ac (borrowed from Tling- it) K. always wa gye’na. Anas boschas tha K. —— clypeata uit. — histrionica k’’B/cg’ utk. ancestor tista dé tsi/nga = long ago my grandfather. ankle gy’atl t’amer/] = leg knuckle. another k-a'lro. Anser tigyitga’n. antlers naca/iré. Boas.] antlers, many pronged, g‘at g-oa/qa gig’’A/firai = deer’s manifold antlers. anus k’asé’. apparel, wearing, gy4a. apron of woman Algyitgyitlgya (dl t’a’/tsé). apron for dances k’antsétlqa’gya (gya= wearing apparel). Arctostaphylus uva ursi ding (bor- rowed from Tlingit) K. arm below elbow Hi, Hia’i. —— above elbow ui tri. armor, wooden, for breast, tcidlkit. — — for belly, k’ antsétlqa’/gya (see apron). — made of sea lion skin, k’ét’i't (k*’ét=sea-lion). armpits sk-ut. Arnica cordifolia uit haua’c. arrow, with bone or metal point, ts’1’- talEn. —— blunt, for birds, k-’u’iigal. ashes alte’ tigét. aunt (mother’s sister) 40 mother. —— (father’s sister) sk-aii. aurora g°Ot qalga da/nt’atl. aze gyétl dsad. B. baby k’ii’qa (see weak). back skua’é, gyi/figuta. — vertebra gyi'figuta sku’/tse = backbone. —— of house na stleii = house back. —— of hand s\'0’na. bad da(rafiga). bald head skaqii's. ball, to play at, git kitl k'a’tsu. —— played with seal meat, qdt at git kit! k'a/tsu, bark of Teuga ui; hii K, —— of other trees k"'d't8é, basket, small, for berries, k’’iVitas. —— large, for berries, ke’ gi, 184 [Oct. 2, basket qin. bat k’’atltsdqa/la, baton of shaman t’ask**. beach gyitl. bear, black, tan. —— grizzly, qo/ots (borrowed from Tlingit). —— polar, ha’l’un. beard sk-’é/oré(n). beaver ts’ EN. bed théida’/n = sleep instrument. beetle :hansk‘ea‘l K. = face dirt. before this ku/nrasta. belly tatl. delt (dl) dsga/wa K. berry gan(a); han(a) K. —— cranberries dla’é. —— dried, gan hi’l g:ata. —— boiled, g'an galE/nskl. birch atta’ri (borrowed from Tling- it) K. bird gét’é’t. — a bird with red wings s:ha’ltset K. black (tl)k-atl, (s)k-atl. black cod sk’il. bladder k‘Og‘e/n sk’an. blanket gy&/atk. ; — Chilkat, ni/nin (borrowed from Tlingit). Blennius sp. shaci/n K. blood g-ii/i. blue gO tlratl. blue jay tl'R/njit. body, the whole, téa’né. to boil, gan ; qoa/tlta. boiled food galz’ngEln. bone ski/tsé. bow tlk é’it, bowstring tlk'é/it t’a’tsé. bow g'ota, di/ota. bracelet, copper, Halslgya’. brain kas’ /ntsefi, k‘atle/nts’ Ei. to break down qu’ndata, the sea breaks (heavily) g'i/iu geu'ii- ge (yi’en). ee ee. _————————————L< ee Lk. ll ee ee =a 1891.] breast k‘an. brothers and sisters k*’a'tlqa. brother ta (said by sister). elder brother gua/i (said by brother). younger brother da/(OrEn) (said by brother). second brother giictnefi k-atleqa- gas(?). third brother gict \a’na(?). brother-in-law k-ei/= sister’s hus- band (said by man). —— tle/nara=sister’s husband (said by sister). Bubo Virginianus gutguné’st K. Buccinum ckxtsk‘ K. bucket g’a’na. bush tikyi/n(ra). butterfly stlak‘a’m. buttocks k*’atltso. button blanket gui la/igo gy@’atk. by and by k’oa’i. C, calf of leg gy’atl k-a’u = leg muscle. Caltha palustris ui) gi tlegeii = med- icine above swim. canoe tl0/u. Cardium Nutalli chilhié’i K. ' eat to’/us (Chinook). cedar, yellow, c:hatla’n K. — — young, ts’0 gyit 6. —— blanket 1a’ uial. —— bark, used for making mats, gyie’t. cedar root alé’it. Ceryle Halcyon k’ut’u'n K. cheek, lower part of, ts’i’ta. —— upper part of, k’’a’n ts’i’ta. chief (nEn)étlqagida’. —— head-chief, \a’na a/ora = town mother. child gyit’ (é). chin tlka’é. Chiton tunicata c:hé’it K. —— Stelleri t’a. 185 [Boas. Circus Hudsonica dd:hatlaga’ K.= catching bird(?). ctrrostratus k*ué/au. cirrus ia’n tsé/tla (a/n cloud). clams ska’/é, ky’i. clothing, to wash —, tada’n tsi’gyida. cloud ian. coat djit’i/sku. red cod skin. small codfish s'&/étaé. large codfish ska/énan. cold qui’, colored t\ratl. — many, aqa’i tha’tla. Colymbus glacialis tat. come! (used with the imperative) hala ! the winter is coming ta'da g‘i/lga. cone of pine ctl’ack’n/mal. to cook by means of heated stones sitl; gya/galafi. copper plate t’a’0. cormorant ky’a/lau. cotton wood t\’al. Cottus sp. k*’ al. —— —— t]’a/ma. cousin sk’afi= father’s sister’s and mother’s brother’s daughter. —— usqu/i mother’s __ brother’s child. —— lera’/n = father's sister's and mother’s bruther’s son. Mother’s sister’s child = brother. Father’s brother’s son = brother. Elder or younger brother are used according as cousin is elder or younger than self. erab k*uct’a’n, crabapple k°é'iq. —— tree k@’yintl. cranberry ta. crane, and Gallinage Wilssont, dEl (borrowed from Tlingit) K. crazy dladlgua (see land otter). Boas.] crow k’a’ItsEda. crown of head tl’E] k‘a’tsé. to cry sk-a/yétl. to cut off (neck) (qil)k-’é’tl. D. dagger k*’a/otl. to dance Hia’tl. (shaman’s) dance (sk’a’g-at) wikat- so. dancing leggins gy’atl gya = leg dancing ornament. danger at sea c:ha/noaken K, daughter-in-law dzirdna’n. dawn sEn gitlkiiga (nd‘kua). day sEnD. —— all day long sEn sg’a’sg’0. it is daylight k‘a/déga. dead g°’dt’utl. deer g”’at. Delphinus Orea sk‘a’g'a; chan K. (see shaman). dish k-a’/itla= wide open. — carved on both sides k-a/itla k’6/la—dish forehead. dogqa. dog fish k"'a’qata. dog salmon ck’ Ek. doll gyit; gedé’s (children’s lan- guage). dolphin sk-ul ; k’’an. door gy’t; stEn. —— in heraldic column gy’ti qa’/l= door hole. down (feathers) te’nrd; g'e/nrd. dragon fly dé/gua ta/ma/i=sun louse K, ; mé/mats’ikyé (bor- rowed from Tsimshian). to drink qui. drum gi/udjau. dry ga’ (ga). duck ga'qa. dusk aga’igua, dust, dirt, sk’ea’l. 186 [Oct. 2, E. eagle g'Ot; shot K. eagle black :hot tlratl K. eagle gens gyitena’(c). ear gyi. opening of ear ka'tlé. earth, ground, kui’ (see island) ; tiga. - earthquake tiga i/ldEn. east wind k’’a’/ratsg-a. to eat ta. to eat together ua’ras. ebb tide gyitlrani’tl: edge of box clEn. upper edge of blanket si/dr. egg k-a/u. lice eggs djac. elbow Hi tsEgui’ (Hi= arm). elk tci/cku. Empetrum nigrum :hacka’ wa. to enter k‘adl (see to walk). ermine tlpk’, tiqa. evening SED Hi. excrements kwa/rau. eye qa/ig(é). eyebrow skia’tsé. eyelashes qa’iga dlt’a gutcé. eyelid qa'iiga g &/al— eyelid, F. face qaiig(a). Salli wa/nut karat (see winter). to fall over ka, to fall from ésg'oe!. Sar dziiva. Jat Uk-d'na. Suther (said by man) kui. —— (said by woman) gat. Sather-in-law k’6'né (sve son-in-law). Jathom ui rodlagi’t (His=arm). — half, di ky’é/6ré dlég’é/ta= my median line of body fathom. —— (measure from left shoulder to top of finger of right hand) sk‘al dld (sk’al ==shoulder). a eh a ie 1891.] Feathers, pubis, g°a/u. Semale sexual organs ka‘u; (children’s language). a certain festival gya/ist. — — gag’ué’ta. to fight va’ nitla. — together gitg’an 14’Hitla. Jigure k”’éda. jinger 81 k’’a/ié = hand finger. — first, sli k’ua/ns (sli=hand). —— second, yak’’ola/na. — third, qéiga’us—= weak. — fourth, sli 26/uts (sli—hand). fire-drill thkia’k’ 6. Sireplace k'aé/qgét. Sirewood ts’a' nd. fish teitl. — fresh-water, tc’é'/na, — salt-water, sk*’a’/tlan’ fish knife ta/g-atad. fish line of kelp, tiygai. Jish otter ts’Owu lek‘. fish roe tca'é. fish trap, bottle-shaped, sk’a1a'd. Jish trap, large, gyi/rau. flat ga. jlesh gyéri’. fleshy gy@ia’ulgo’u. flood tide 2A’etlinit. Sly dé/iden. fog ia’n(ega). Sood ga ta’. Soot st’a’é. footprint st’a sel. Forehead kul. forenoon senga’é. Sow naga’tsé (borrowed from Tling- it). Srame tik’a. tso’/u my friend ta’qué. frost g‘aln/iigudatl. to fry citl. —— on stones citl g'uta’ = fry stone. Fucus vesiculosus t’al (borrowed from Tlingit) K. Sur seal k*’0a’n. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIX 187 [Boas. G. gambling sticks sEn. to give 6/ista. to go k-a, i/sk-as, gend’ani’t (2). let us go ha/la d’a/lED gend’ani’t s’ail. good ja. grandchild t’agyE’n. grandfather tcin. grandmother nan. grass kan. gravel sqat’B/ldaii. green gan tlratl=yellow ; g-dtlratl = blue. greenstone (jadeite) Alka tld/u. gull ck” in. gums ts’Eii k-’ul teeth skin. gun dzi/gi. Gyins: ha/noa (the wife of Nen- kyilstlas). H. Haida qa'eda. hair kas k’’é/t] = head hair. —— dress of shaman gyiétl. half ya’k6. —— moon k'uh géneroa’é. halibut qa’k6, :hak‘ K. halloh ! ai‘diiiga ! hand sii, sla’é. Havelda glacialis a'igaiigé. harpoon k:’A. — line k’’a t)'’tsé. point of salmon harpoon k’ ude/nkyil. hat da’/dzen. —— ring da/dzeii ski/lga. he la. head k*’a’tsé. —— ring of red cedar bark tentlgyi- k-a/Ide. to hear gi'dEii. heart ték’d/g6. her la. heels st’a kOsé’ (st’a = foot). 136. Y. PRINTED JAN. 7, 1892. Boas.] 188 [Oct. 2, to help etlwa. kidney tca’é. heraldic column gya/rai standing to kill té/aqan. upright. knee k*’uld’. herring i/nait. : — pan k’’ul6 karat. it is high water skua’ga (rilgEn). — joint gyal k- uld’/igd —leg hips k-atlu’] ski’tsé (ska/tsé—bone). joint. hook, for fishing halibut, ta’o. knife sqa’u. tron hook stil ta’o. — made of shell taqa’d. hole qal. to know u/nséda. hoof of deer gat st’a’/gun (st’a= J do not know a’ya. foot). knuckle @’amp’l. horizon k-uéudzi’nrau. Kushtaka (otter people) gegyii’t K. horn (see antlers). horse gyuda’n (Chinook). L. house nu. —— dug out part in centre of, da’a. lake si. — front na qaii— house face. La/nas— the town, place near Rose humming-bird qektgyia! (borrowed Point. from Tlingit) K. lance tcea’tl. hungry k-’0é’ta. land tiga. husband tial. land otter sdlgii. large yu/an. a: to laugh kA. leaf dlk:’a’figual. I dé(a), tla’(a). Ledum palustre hi'Ik-agen Ki=e ice g-al(ga). mouse neck. indeed ? dja? left hand s)a’négi sla’é. Indian of the interior ts'ak‘s. leg, above knee, thil. inside k-&/1lék, na’gust K. —— below knee, gy’atl. . instrument tan. dancing leggins gy’a'tlgya = leg interstices between fingers sli1atk‘asé’. wearing apparel. intestines k‘és. leg of table tiga. invitation to Guts Sestival Vid of bow ta/uta k-f’al = box lid. la/gyinem. to lie k*’ drat, kétlnida/n, tron ire’ts. liar k*’Orat la'era = lie master. island gua’é. lightning sqét g:Auldai. to like stat’R’1. K. Lina sp. djuwét’ama’é. line t)'a’tsé. K-atlensk‘u’/n, name of a place. lip, upper, h’d/tséqun. kelp tik’: ima, —— lower, k’d’uta. —— cake qi’eda gu’lra= Haida liver tétl’elkul. tobacco, lobe of ear gyi st'i’é = ear foot. kettle ck’ el. long sk"’a, dziti. —— wooden boiler, ck’) gan. —— ago tista. —— wooden, ti'utaqal ; sk’a/lgal. loose cuvii'c, 189 1891.] (Boas. lost ga’u. mosquito ts’era/ltEquan. louse t’am. mother a'6. low water ts@/qoa. mother-in-law dzir6na’n (see daugh- lungs k-a/genské/ga (see adam’s * ter-in-law). apple). Iupinus ge/ndo. ; Lycopodium clavatum g’’at didsga’- wa= deer belt. lyn tigyan da/udja/é (tlgyan = forest). M. to make da, gyifi, g’6tlra. man é'tlifiga, k-’ El. —— ga; for instance, k’’0&'la ga = raven gens man. many sk6'l (only referring to men). — k‘oa/n (referring to any thing including men). —— yi/an (referring to any thing including men). martin k*’O/u. mask nitca/igo. master lra/éra. ‘ mat |giic. meat gyéri’. median line of body ky’é0' re. ‘ medicine ail. midnight gal ya’ko. mind gi/dRi. mine téenk/iiga ; na/ra. ‘moceasin st’a tik’u/nkyé (st’a= foot). moon k*’uil. — new, kui ihai/légEn. —— first crescent, k’ ufi k-éqatlg'a == the moon opens his eyes.* —— last crescent, k*’unh ihailéda‘l- > gEn. —— begins to be full kui g’aisyo- gi’/lga. —— is shining k*’uiidlan. more i/sEil. morning sEn aé/qEn. mortar da’ro. mountain t’é'is ; tldéra’u. —— goat ky’i’/iiré. —— sheep mat’ (borrowed from Tsimshian). mouse ka/gan. —— tsigul 4/ora (a/ora = mother). mouth gétl’é’. mud tcan. muscle kau. Mytilus edulis shal K. N. Na éku/n, Rose Point. nail sli g’u/n = hand nail. naked k‘oona’n0. nape ts’é'kyé. navel sgil. near &’qan. neck qil. needle s\n. nephew (man calls his sister’s child) nad. —— (man calls his brother’s child) gyit. —— (woman calls her brother’s child) usqu/ii. —— (woman calls her sister’s child) gyit. net a/qat. night gal. — it is, g’a'lga. nipples tl’R/nwai. no gau/ano. Nontlem galéta’. noon SEN \a’tséra. north wind k’ auusté’ ga, qu’stega. nose kun. nostril kuntsqul. not gEm. notch of arrow stlqu’ tsé. now (a)iwia’t. Boas.] oak tea’/nan. oar Adi dzi’/nda= paddle long. ocean Sl. esophagus tl’E]q6'ts’ el. Oidemia perspiciliata c’i/ndetl K. Oidemia sp. ga'oq K. olachen ca/u. old k-’a’i. — clothing k-'u'lzu. —— man nEn k*‘a’ia. on gid. —— top of u'nsé, gi. one squn, sqa’/sg6, sqoa’/nsEn. open k-a. to open one’s eyes k’é/qatlg-a. another one gyina k’’a/Iro. outside :haddsi K. owl, white, k’ik‘ (borrowed from Tlingit) K. P. paddle adi. to paint k’Otla’no. red paint for fuce (qai) ma'tsa. black paint for face (qai) k*’a'tsa. palate sé’ifigatsé. palm of hand sli k‘a/ran (sli= hand). Parmelia k’altsdélé/dja. partridge, ptarmigan ; ck’a'u. Porus tatla/negyét. penis tsi/tsi. people qi’/édqa. perforation of nose kun qal = nose hole. — of ear gyi qal = ear hole. pestle di'rad ; dii/rad ts’ en. petticoat ci/ata lgyégyia’/qa = wo- man’s petticoat. pile of fuel ts’A/nd sqa. pillar, erected in commemoration of deceased, git. pipe gee gi/eudi’O6— mouth smoke box, 190 [Oct. 2, to piss tsé/gEn. plant of foot st’a k-ara’n (st? ‘= foot). poker kyitsqzla/igo. Polygonatum ct’a’u ha/na= witch- * craft berry. porcupine :hatlgnts (borrowed from Tlingit) K. porpoise sk-ul. to possess (tla) da, k*é/i, (dé) ran. post, in house, k*'Otg‘a/Ngo. _ potlatch wa’ tiqatl. pregnant, she ts, 1 tatl gyit’é’ (gyiv’é’ = child, 1 tatl=her belly). puffin k-oqe’n ; kroana’ K. pupil of eye qa’/igé | tan karé/i. A Qoia g‘a/ndla= Raven water, a river on Queen Charlotte Islands. _ quartz tik’a k’’a/tsé (tik’a =stone). quiver ts’itale’/i dara’6 = arrow box. R. rafter ts’ain sk’a/ get. rain dadl. rainbow ta’wel. rain wind (generally east) qé/u. raspberry han gyit’é/ = berry small. rattle, raven, sisa’. — shaman’s, dikum hitaga’iigs6. —— puffin beak’s, tle hitaga/igd. —— skull-shaped, k°’é| hitaga’iig6. raven qoia’; yétl (borrowed from *Tlingit) K. ~ —— gens k"’oa'la(e). to recover from sickness figi’istl ; Igila. red sqet. reed k"'in tl’akida’ == grass wide. rib qe/we, Ribes ii'iwa (borrowed from Tling- it) K. ; k’étgua/n K. 1891.] ridge of house, formed by a long board, i\gi'tlai. —- of upper part of ear gyu tik-un =ear ridge. — of nose kun tlk‘un —nose ridge. right, it is all right, te/mqEn. — hand sqdlgyila’na. river k‘a/ura, to roast fish digi. roof na i/na= top of house. —— inside of, na karan. rope of spruce roots k-u/ntla. — of cedarbark k’oa/é, around food box \aut iya/iigré. rotten s a/ga; gu/nraga. round gas, ge (see full moon). Rubus, Vaccinium uliginosum, han ha/ulas = berry sweet. to run k’a/ uit. saliva tl’an. salmon tein. “—— a small species, c:hoa/gank K. — hooknose, tai. —— humpback, ts’it’a'n. — white, \a/un. — smoke-house for, ta’na nai, —— weir, Hia’i (the centre occupied by the fish trap gyiraw). —— berry sk’a/uran. salt ta/figa g’a/ga — 5 Shelia Sas ecah-aich Doran ae eee Dr. Morris. On vital molecilar vibrations... 6 bk ee ew le wb els we ee OO Miners recently entombed at Jeanesville, Pa........-.2.... EASE Wes) HISvrOW PROUCHCH. bee win eee 8 eh ee ee $5. shainaeneme Vw SEE 86 fag oT: La ade ale 0 i aan Bb ern Pa eae Otns el ee Miscellaneous paecepsance Of Membership. ... 0.6 6 2 6 1 ee to we ot wo ow eo es boy Ody ISL, 162 Seagion, Dr. H.,POsignss s .. ) 60+: 8 6 3s ote po eC at athe alin 6) Sas terre Sel el abe v2 - Building Fund, Trustees’ Report nail 2 pie ie an Papen SSE A ae RAT Con - re PAMUGR, LOBACY.Of%, 6 0%s cn ee ee RTE, WE se DURE cake oat es Ge. UE ae ee ee ee - Committees; : Branding Committee... sic 4.6 8 0 te eee ee ee wee ee ee 8 8 Oe REI PEOD Rad ty Sg ag cy ie ke 0!) 4 wo lees ace ate ik te NERA ee Be SEO OT, Pe STAI hig) ale Sak bap ¥. 9 10 -a:ey'<).8 eyk oe ciguiveyaldcacarm . . 838 Improved Accommodations .........00% 22% “th Set Wir pana eae a 87, 95, 98 I NS MEO Leigh g ig tego. hie. 0: &) We 6 0 t.6 etme © Je), 9 Ha ye ee ee 131 EES heme Ang 6k ah a. ete a alee. 6 sae kee! eee ® chen 85, 96, 97, 98, 181 eer ETNIES CHG IO Rok cd pw se *l ote lg ee PP ear er ANT ease rey . 81, 83 RO Maal mies a's wie 8 alae Wwe ip PR rata A RP hy ee SEN ye Gy: 165 MN CM ear elt 8s Cire hw ig Neher) piece iecaca aha ao aie e eho, ania wwe 136 PE ODO Op ety! aie 6 Es 2010. JAMES, EDMUNDJ........ April 18, 1884, Philadelphia. 1933. JANNET, CLAUDIO. ....... April 15, 1881, Paris, France. 2049, JAYNE, HORACE...... - Oct. 16, 1885, Philadelphia. 1954, JEFFERIS, WILLIAM W.. . - Jan’y 20, 1882, 4a _ 1942, JONES, CHARLESC.,JR...... Oct. 21, 1881, Augusta, Ga. 2017. JORDAN, FRANCIS, JR... - April 18, 1884, Philadelphia. 1989, KANE, ELISHA KENT. ..... 2169. KEANE, JOHN J... see 0 es 1848. KEATING, WILLIAMV..... 2021. KEEN, WILLIAM W...... 1962. KEIM, GEO. DE BENNEVILLE. . 2118. KEIPERT, HENRI. ..... 1161. KENDALL, E. OTIS. .... - 1708. KING, CLARENCE . . . 1587. KirK, JOHN FosTeR. ... April 20, 1883, Kane, Pa. Dec. 20, 1889, Washington, D. C. April 21, 1854, Philadelphia. “oo April 21, 1882, 4 Dec. 17, 1886, Berlin, Prussia. Jan’y 21, 1842, Philadelphia. Oct, 18, 1872, New York, N. Y. July 15, 1864, Philadelphia. April 18, 1851, Riverside, Cal. Oct. 16, 1874, Philadelphia. Oct. 20, 1882, Heidelberg, Germany. Dec. 20, 1889, Vienna, Austria. 1767. K6NIG, GEORGE A. . 1971. Kopp, HERMANN. .. 2167. KRAUSS, FRIEDERICH S. 4284. KrrKwoop, DANIEL. . . 1026. Labouderie, J...... - 1694. LAMBERT, GUILLAUME, _ 1858. LANDRETH, BURNET. . 1781, LANGLEY, SAMUEL P. . - 1721, LA RocuHe, C. Percy . 1834. LATROBE, JOHN H. B. . +1711, Laura, Franz JoserH ... . _ 1974. LAWES, JOHN BENNETT, SIR. . _ 1595. Lea, HENRY CHARLES. .... foediee UE CONTE, JOHN. . . 2.2... | 1787. LE Conte, JOSEPH. ...... 1477, LEE, THOMAS JEFFERSON .. . | 2125. LEEMANS, CONRAD. ..... _ 1986. LEHMAN, AMBROSE E...... 1263. Lemy, JosePH. ........ _ 2182. LELAND, CHARLESG. ..... May 16, 1890, London, Eng. 2174, LE MoINE, J.M.......... Dec. 20, 1889, Quebec, Canada. _ 4882, Lestey, J. PeTreR........ July 13, 1856, Philadelphia. _ 1876. LETCcHWoRTH, ALBERTS. .... Jan’y 18, 1856, Le April 19, 1833, Paris, France. Jan’y 19, 1872, Louvain, Belgium. Jan’y 18, 1878, Bristol, Pa. April 16, 1775, Washington, D. C. Jan’y 17, 1873, Rome, Italy. Jan’y 20, 1854, Baltimore, Md. Oct. 18, 1872, Munich, Bavaria. Jan’y 19, 1883, Rothamstead, Herts, Eng. Philadelphia. April 18, 1873, Berkeley, Cal. “oe oe ie See, See Oct. 17, 1862, Washington, D. C. Dec. 17, 1885, Leyden, Holland. April 20, 1883, Philadelphia. ; 8 a. atiee Oates Name. 2085. LEVASSEUR, EMIL'......-+-. 1415. Lewis, FRANCIS W. .....-- 1953, Liwis, SAMUEL SAVAGE. .... 1883. Leyburn, John. ...+22+0e8 1756. LOCKYER, JOSEPH NORMAN... . 1728. LONGCHAMPS, SELYS DE... . « 1255. LONGSTRETH, MIERS FISHER . . 1872, LONGSTRETH, MORRIS. ..... 1015. Lorin, Theodore. ...++++-+ 1926. LOVERING, JOSEPH. .....-+-. 1977. LOWELL, JAMES RUSSEL... « 2019, LUBBOCK, JOHN. . ..-2 0 eee 2003. LUDLOW, WILLIAM. .. +--+... 1629. LYMAN, BENJAMIN SMITH... . 1058. Macedo, J. L. DaCosta ..... 1994, MaiscH, JOHN M....- eee 1970, MALLERY, GARRICK,JR..... 2042, MALLET, JOHN WM... ...-.-- 1847. MANSFIELD, IRA FRANKLIN... 1857. MARCH, FRANCIS ANDREW .. . 1861, MARKS, WILLIAM D....... 1604. MARSH, OTHNIELC ......--. 2078. MARSHALL, JOHN. . . 2 ee eo 1922, MARTINDALE, ISAACC...... 1018. Martinez, Juan Jose... .- +s 1885, MARTINS, CHARLES,. . . ++ «> St) MABOART, Fis. cee eee 1572. MASON, ANDREW ....---+. 1929, MAY, ADDISON... . 2. ++ eee. 1654. MAYER, ALFREDM ......-. 2107. MCALISTER, JAMES .....+- 1928. McCAULEY, EpwarRD Y..... 1685. McCosH, JAMES. .....+-+-+ 1888, McCREATH, ANDREWS...... 1821. MCKEAN, WILLIAM V......-. 2004. MCMASTER, JOHN BACH. ... . 1677, MEEHAN, THOMAS... . 2+ +e 1835, MEIGS, MONTGOMERY C..... 1908. MERRICK, JOHN VAUGHAN .. . 1947. MERRIMAN, MANSFIELD. .... 1744. MESSCHERT, MATHEW HUIZINGA. 2142, MICHAEL, HELEN ABBOTT. . . . 2175. MITCHELL, JAMES T.......-- 1461, MITCHELL, S. WEIR. .....--. 1735, MOMMSEN, THEODORE. ..... 2114, MONIER-WILLIAMS, MONIER.. . 1791, MoorE, GIDEONE......--- 2029. MOORE, JAMES W .. 2+ ee ee 1841. MOREHOUSE, GEORGER..... 1976. Morris, J. CHESTON. .- +. +s 1577. MORTON, HENRY ....- se 2121. MUCH, MATTHEUS. ..- +e ee 1866. MUHLENBERG, F.A.. 2... 2120, MUELLER, FRIEDERICH ....- Present Address. Paris, France. Philadelphia. Cambridge, England. Baltimore, Md. London, England. Liége, Belgium. Sharon Hill. Philadelphia. Paris, France. Cambridge, Mass. “o “ee London, England. U. 8. A. Philadelphia. Lisbon, Portugal. Philadelphia. Washington, D.C. University of Virginia, Va. Cannelton, Pa. Easton, Pa. Philadelphia. New Haven, Conn. Philadelphia. Camden, N. J. Spain. Montpellier, France. Paris, France. New York, N. Y. West Chester, Pa. Hoboken, N. J. Philadelphia. ’ oe Harrisburg, Pa. Philadelphia. “ Washington, D. C. Philadelphia. Bethlehem, Pa. Douglassville, Pa. Philadelphia. Berlin, Prussia. London, England. New York, N. Y. Easton, Pa. Philadelphia. Naples, Italy. Philadelphia. Hoboken N. J. Vienna, Austria. Philadelphia. Vienna, Austria. ee ee ea Name. 1486. MUELLER, F. Max... 1892. MUONI, DAMIANO. . . 2062. MuRDOCK, J. B.. 1937. MURRAY, JAMES A, H.... 2087. NADAILLAC, MARQUIS DE... . 1575. NEWBERRY, JOHN S...... 1852. NEWCoMB, SIMON . 1582. NEWTON, HUBERT ANSON... . o-. 1703. NICHOLS, STARR HoytT . 2060. NIKITIN, SERGE. ..... 1805. NORDENSKIOLD, ADOLF ERIc 1712. Norris, ISAAC, JR. 2106. NoRRIs, WILLIAM F, . 2046. NORTH, EDWARD... 2072, OLIVER, CHARLES A... . . 1715, OLIVER, JAMES E.. . » 2135. OSBORN, HENRY F. . . . 1581. OSBORN, HENRY 8... 2039, OsLER, WILLIAM . 1801. OWEN, P. CUNLIFFE, SIR . 1212. OWEN, RICHARD . 1868. PACKARD, A. S., JR... a-Ce.* 1578, PACKARD, JOHN H...... 1331. PAGET, JAMES, SIR. . . . 1984. PANCOAST, WILLIAM HENRY . 1593. PARDEE, ARIO,. . . 1673. PARIEU, ESQUIRON DE . 2036. PARVIN, THEOPHILUS 2056. PASTEUR, LOUIS... . 2035. PATTERSON, C. STUART. . 1282. PATTERSON, ROBERT. . 1820. Patterson, Thomas L.. . 1772. PEARSE, JOHN B.... . 1722. PEMBERTON, HENRY... 2104. PENAFIEL, ANTONIO. . 1777. PENINGTON, EDWARD . 2078. PENNYPACKER, SAMUEL W.. . 1518. PENROSE, R. A. F.... 2059. PEPPER, EDWARD . 1666. PEPPER, WILLIAM. ..... 951. Pereira, José Maria Dantes. ae PETER, ROBERT . 1824. PHILLips, HENRY, JR... . 1859. Prercre, C. NEWLIN.... 1760. PLATT, FRANKLIN... . 2127, PLATZMAN, JULIUS. . 2053. POMIALOWSKY, JOHN... 1589. PorTER, THOMAS CONRAD. 2044, Ports, WILLIAM JOHN .. 2007; POSIGATE, J.P i.e 1216. Poussin, William Tell... . 9 Date of Election. Jan’y 16, 1863, Jan’y 16, 1880, Feb’y 19, 1886, April 15, 1881, Nw May Jan’y Jan’y April July Feb’y 21, 1886, 18, 1867, 18, 1878, 19, 1869, 19, 1872, 19, 1866, 21, 1876, 18, 1872, 17, 1886, 16, 1885, 19, 1886, 17, 1873, 18, 1887, 18, 1867, 16, 1885, 21, 1876, 17, 1845, 20, 1878, 18, 1867, 20, 1854, 19, 1883, 18, 1867, 20, 1871, 16, 1885, 16, 1885, 16, 1885, 18, 1851, Present Address. Oxford, England. Milan, Italy. U.S. Navy. Oxford, England. Paris, France, New York, N. Y. Washington, D. C. New Haven, Conn. New York, N. Y. St. Petersburg, Russia. Stockholm, Sweden. Philadelphia. “e Clinton, N. Y. Philadelphia. Ithaca, N. Y. Princeton, N. J. Oxford, 0. Baltimore, Md. London, England. “ - Providence, R. I. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. Paris, France. Philadelphia. Cumberland, Md. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. Berlin, Prussia. Philadelphia. oe Paris. Philadelphia. Lisbon, Portugal. Lexington, Ky. Philadelphia. “ Philadelphia. Leipzig, Germany. St. Petersburg, Russia. Easton, Pa. Camden, N. J. Cambridge, England. Paris, France. EE ee OE Ee * Name. BOs TOWEL ds We 5 as co a 2's 1619. PRESTWICH, JOSEPH. .... 1592. Prick, J. SERGEANT. ..., 1780. PRIME, FREDERICK,JR.., 2088. PULZSKY, FRANCIS ...., 1758. - Quaranta, Barnardo. .... 1736. RAND, THEODORE D. . RANDALL, F. A... ., . RAWLINSON, GEORGE, .. . 1765. RAWSON, RAWSONW ... . . RAYLEIGH, LORD . . RAYNOLDS, WILLIAM F.. . . REED, THOMAS B . RENAN, ERNEST , RENARD, A . 1816. REULEAUX, FP, .. a? ate 2122, REVILLE, ALBERT. ..... 1500, RICHARDSON, BEN. WARD . 1808. RILEY, CHARLESV .... 1957. ROBINS, JAMEFSM ...... 1025. ROBINSON, MONCURE.... SPARE, DIEM eg ise chen we PUMPELLY, RAPHAEL...... . RAMSAY, ANDREWC. ..... . RAYMOND, ROSSITTER W .. . Pees OOS DG E jare. sik 6 acer a 1890. ROGERS, FAIRMAN. ..... 2177. RoGERS, ROBERT W.... . 1906. Rogers, WILLIAM B.,JR .. . 1462. Réurie, F. L. O. 2050. ROLLETT, HERMANN. .... 1907. Roop, OGDEN N . caps 1732. Rossi, GIOVANNI Barrera. 1718. ROTHERMEL, PETER F. .. . 1838. RoTHROCK, JOSEPH T..... 1264. RUSCHENBERGER, WM. S. W.. . 1620. RUTIMEYER, CARLL..... 2109, RyDER, JOHN A . 1766. SADTLER, SAMUEL PHILIP. . 2148. Sasous, CHARLES E, . 2108. SANCHEZ, JESUS. ...... 1563. SANDBERGER, FRIDOLIN.. . . 1033. Santarem, Viscount... ... 1958. SARGENT, CHARLES SPRAGUE 1730. SAUSSURE, HENRIDE..... Quadrada, Francisco de Paolo. . READ, JOHN. MEREDITH... . . SON EERIEES Wiig io 010: we) at's . RENARD, CHARLES ....... i SMU TMG. Fay) ne! 06d) 0 0) 0 1877. SCHORLEMMER, C.. . .. 2 ee 17, 1874, 16, 1829, 15, 1841, 17, 1862, 18, 1878, 18, 1878, 15, 1869, 16, 1874, 21, 1886, 16, 1875, 19, 1867, 19, 1867. 21, 1886, 20, 1877, Washington, D. C. Shoreham, England. Philadelphia. Buda-Pesth, Hungary. Newport, R. I. Madrid, Spain. Naples, Italy. London, England. Philadelphia. Warren, Pa. Oxford, England. London, “ Essex, England. New York, N. Y. Detroit, Mich. Philadelphia. Baltimore, Md. Paris, France. Brussels, Belgium. Moscow, Russia. Lausanne, Switzerland. Berlin, Prussia. Paris, France. London, England. Washington, D. C. Philadelphia. oe Newport, R. I. Carlisle, Pa. Philadelphia. Los Angeles, Cal. Vienna, Austria. New York, N. Y. Rome, Italy. Limerick P. O., Pa. Philadelphia. Basel, Switzerland. Philadelphia. Philadelphia. ae Mexico, Mexico. Wiirtzburg, Bavaria. Lisbon, Portugal. Brookline, Mass. Geneva, Switzerland. Manchester, England. Fae ee eS eee =F Name 1498, ScHoTT, CHARLES ANTHONY . 1864. SCHURZ, CARL ........ 1725. SCLATER, PHILLIP LUTLEY. 1919. Scott, LEwIsA...... ST12: BOOPT, Wiiikha se acdi ce es 1870. ScUDDER, SAMUEL HUBBARD. 1656. SEIDENSTICKER, OSWALD. ... 1888. SEILER, CARL. .....- 1704. SELLERS, COLEMAN ..... 1588, SELLERS, WILLIAM... .... 1770. SELWYN, ALFRED R.C. . . 1338. SEQUARD, E, BROWN... . 2057. SERGI, GIUSEPPE. .... 2076. SHARP, BENJAMIN. .... 1944, SHARPLES, PHILIP PRICE . 2002. SHARPLESS, ISAAC. .... 1792. SHEPPARD, FURMAN. . . . 1965. SEVE DE BAR, EDOUARD..... “ee 1960. SHARPLES, STEPHEN PASCHALL. . 1514, SHEAFER, PETER WENRICH . 1797. SHERWOOD, ANDREW... . 1822. SHIELDS, CHARLES W... . 1582, Shing, Carl. . 2 ss 6s es 2124. SIMEON, REMI. ....... 1414. Smrra, AUBREY H...... 2146, SMITH, EDGAR F...... 1544, SMITH, GOLDWIN...... 1789, SmirH, STEPHEN... :.. 2141. SMYTH, ALBERTH..... . 1742. SNOWDEN, A. LOUDON. ..... 2009. SNYDER, MONROE B........ S700 ‘BPOFPORD) (AS This cose 5 ess 1949, STALLO, JOHN B...... 1446. STEENSTRUP, J.J.S..... 1990, STEVENS, WALTER LECONTE . 1840. STEVENSON, JOHN JAMES. . 2168. STOKES, SIR GEORGE G. . . 1167. Storer, D. HUMPHREYS. . 1834, STRAWBRIDGE, GEORGE ... . 1559. STRONG, WILLIAM. .... 1820, STUART, GEORGE...... 1527. STUDER, BERNARD....... 2008. STUER, DIONYS. .....2. 2094. SuESs, EDWARD. ..... ee Se We ge eg at biten es 1844. SYLVESTER, J.J....... 2092, SZOMBATHY, JOSEF..... 1786. TATHAM, WILLIAM P. .. . 1846. TAYLOR, WILLIAMB. .. . 2098. TEMPLE, RICHARD CARNAC 2006. THOMAS, ALLENC....... 1807. THOMPSON, ‘ELIHU .... 1993. THOMPSON, HEBER S... . 1726. THOMPSON, HENRY... .. 18, 1873, 15, 1880, 17, 1886, 20, 1878, 21, 1870, 18, 1879, 19, 1872, 15, 1864, 16, 1874, 20, 1854, 18, 1884, 18, 1873, Present Address. Washington, D. C. London, England. Philadelphia. Princeton, N. J. Cambridge, Mass. Philadelphia. “ce o “ce Montreal, Canada. Paris, France. Rome, Italy. Brussels, Belgium. Philadelphia. West Chester Pa. Boston, Mass. Haverford, Pa. Pottsville, Pa. Philadelphia. Mansfield, Pa. Princeton, N. J. Strasburg, Germany. (?) Paris, France. Philadelphia. New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. Philadelphia. | Washington, D. C. Cincinnati, O. Copenhagen, Denmark. Brooklyn, N. Y. New York, N. Y. London, England. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. Washington, D. C. Philadelphia. Berne, Switzerland. Vienna, Austria. “ oe Philadelphia. Oxford, England. Vienna, Austria. Philadelphia. Washington, D. C. Upper Burmah, India. Haverford, Pa. Lynn, Mass. Pottsville, Pa. London, England. ©1748. WAHL, WILLIAM H. . Name. 1755. THOMPSON, ROBERT ELLIs. . 1754. THOMSON, FRANK.....+- +s 1723. THOMSON, WILLIAM. .... 1909. THOMSON, WILLIAM ROO PET AS os lose eats re kur ey ee | 1688. TILGHMAN, BENJAMIN C Re ae ber 1233, TILGHMAN, RICHARD A . 1657. TILGHMAN, WILLIAM M.. . 2176. TIMMINS, SAMUEL... 2123. TOPINARD, PAUL. - . 2065. TOPPAN, ROBERT NOXON.. . . - 1597. TOWNSEND, JOSEPH B.. . 1955. TOWNSEND, WASHINGTON . 1691. TROWBRIDGE, WILLIAM P . 2024. TRUMBULL, HENRY CLAY... . 1973. TSCHERMAK, GUSTAF = aie 2 #0 9183, TURRETTINI, THEODORE... . 2166. TUTTLE, DAVIDK. . 2168. TYLER, LYONG.... 1529. TUNNER, PETER... . 1602, TYNDALL, JOHN. ..-.-- 2188] TYSON, JAMES... . « 2185. UNWIN, WILLIAMC. . 2000. VAUX, RICHARD. ... 1475. ViRcHOW, RUDOLPH. 1646. VoGT, CARL. ..... 2115. VON MELTZEL, HuGo . . 1670. VosE, GEORGE LEONARD. 2186. VossIon, LovIs..... 2034. WAGNER, SAMUEL... 1724. WALLACE, ALFRED R . 2156. WARD, LESTER F.. . . 2179. WAYLAND, HEMAN L. . 2038. WEIL, EDWARD HENRY 2117, WEIL,G... 2028. WEISBACH, ALBIN. . . 1975, WESTWOOD, JOHNO.. 1639. WHARTON, JOSEPH. . . 1637. WHITE, ANDREW D.. . 1818. WHITE, I.C. . 1487: WHITNEY, JOSIAH DwicHt on ara 1502. WHITNEY, WILLIAM DWIGHT.. . 1659. WHITTIER, JOHN GREENLEAF. . 1863. WILDER, BURT GREEN... . 2151. WILLIAMS, TALCOTT. . 2178. WILLIS HENRY... . “1489, WILSON, DANIEL. ...... 2150, WILsoN, EpmMunD B...... 2041. WILSON, JAMESC... . 1747, WILSON, JOSEPH M. . . 16, 1874, Present Address. Philadelphia. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. Geneva, Switzerland. Philadelphia. “ce au“ Arley, near Coventry, Eng Paris, France. Cambridge, Mass. Philadelphia. West Chester, Pa. New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. Vienna, Austria. Geneva, Switzerland. Philadelphia. Williamsburg, Va. Leoben, Austria. London, England. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. Berlin, Prussia. Geneva, Switzerland Koloszvar, Hungary. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. Philadelphia. Croydon, England. Washington, D. C. Philadelphia, “ee Heidelberg, Germany. Freiburg, Saxony. Oxford, England. Philadelphia. Ithaca, N. Y. Morgantown, W. Va. Cambridge, Mass. New Haven, Conn. Amesbury, Mass. Ithaca, N. Y. Philadelphia. ae Toronto, Canada. Bryn Mawr, Pa. Philadelphia, “ Name. Date of Election. Present Address. 2137. WILSON, WILLIAM POWELL ... May 20, 1887, Philadelphia. 1545. WINCHELL, ALEXANDER. .... Jan’y 20, 1865, Ann Arbor, Mich. 1896. WINTHROP, ROBERT C. ..... Jan’y 16, 1880, Boston, Mass. 2140, WiREMAN, HENRY D....... May 20, 1887, Philadelphia. 1561. WISTER, OWEN JONES... .. - April 20, 1866, S 1884. Woop, RICHARD. ........ April 18, 1879, oe 1762. WOODWARD, HENRY. ...... July 17, 1874, London, England. 1751. WooTTEN, J, E..........- Jan’y 16, 1874, Reading, Pa. 1851. WORMLEY, THEODORE G. .... Jan’y 18, 1878, Philadelphia. 1932. WURTS, CHARLES STEWART... Jan’y 21, 1881, Philadelphia. 2061. WYCKOFF, A.B.......... Feb’y 19, 188, U.S. Navy. 1904, YARNALL, ELLIS......., April 16, 1880, Philadelphia. 1759. YOUNG, CHARLES AUGUSTUS... April 17, 1874, Princeton, N. J. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXX. JANUARY TO DECEMBER, 1892 PHILADELPHIA : PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY BY MAC CALLA & COMPANY. 1892. January 1, 1892.] 1 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USERUL KNOWLEDGE. VOL. XXX, JANUARY, 1892. No. 187. Stated Meeting, January 1, 1892. Present, 9 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters of acknowledgment from the Institut Egyptien, Cairo (134); Museum Teyler, Harlem, Holland (135). _ A photograph for the Society’s Album was received from _ Prof. Albert H. Smyth, Philadelphia. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Académie des Sciences, Cracow, Austria; Naturwissenschaftliche Verein des Reg.-Bez. Frankfurt, Germany; Hydrographische Amt des Reichs-Marine-Amts, Messrs. Friedliinder und Sohn, _ Berlin; Gartenbauverein, Darmstadt; Deutsche Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie, ete., Munich; Société Hol- landaise des Sciences, Harlem, Holland; Biblioteca N. C., Florence, Italy; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Biblioteca N. C. V.E., Rome; Société Americaine de France, Société de Geo- ' graphié, Rédaction “Cosmos,” Paris, France; Philological _ Society, Cambridge, England; Royal Astronomical, Meteoro- logical, Geographical Societies, Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty, “Nature,” London; Manchester Geographical " Society ; Theological Seminary, Andover, Mass.; American Statistical Association, Dr. William Elliot Griffis, Boston, -Mass.; Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Cambridge, Mass. ; PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXX. 137. A; PRINTED FEB. 25, 1892. 2 (Jan. 1, Newport Sanitary Protection Association; Hartford Theo- logical Seminary, Travellers. Insurance Co., Hartford, Conn. ; Yale University, Prof. H. A. Newton, New Haven, Conn. ; University of the State of New York, Albany; Cornell Uni- versity, Ithaca, N. Y.; American Chemical Society, Historical Society, Meteorological Observatory, New York; College of Pharmacy, Messrs. Lea Brothers & Co., Editor of the “ Medical and Surgical Reporter,” Editor of “ Pennsylvania County Court Reports,” Prof. E. D. Cope, Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University, Editor of the “ American Journal of Philology,” Baltimore, Md.; Department of.State, Washington, D. C.; Agricultural Experiment Stations, Morgantown, W. Va., Ex- periment, Ga., Auburn, Ala., Raleigh, N. C., Lafayette, Ind., Corvallis, Oreg., Ames, Ia., Fort Collins, Colo., Berkeley, Cal.; Observatorio, Rio de Janeiro. The following were reported .as duly elected Officers and Councilors of the Society : President. Frederick Fraley. Vice- Presidents. .E. Otis Kendall, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, J. P. Lesley. Secretaries, George I’. Barker, Daniel G. Brinton, Henry Phillips, Jr., George H. Horn. — Curators. Patterson Du Bois, J. Cheston Morris, R. Meade Bache. Treasurer. J. Sergeant Price. 1892.] 3 Councilors. Richard Wood, William V. McKean, Richard Vaux, Isaac C. Martindale. Councilor for two years, vice Aubrey H. Smith, deceased. William P. Tatham. The report of the Finance Committee was presented, and the appropriations for the year ending November 30, 1892, passed. Nominations for Librarian being in order, Dr. Morris re- nominated Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., and Prof. Cope nominated Mr. B. 8. Lyman, and the nominations were closed. Pending nomination for membership 1232 and new nomina- tion 1233 were read. Prof. Cope offered for the Transactions a paper entitled “ A Synopsis of the species Tied, genus Cnemidophorus.” On motion, the paper was referred to a Committee, to be appointed by the President at his leisure.* . Prof. Cope presented for the Proceedings a paper by Prof. George Baur (of Worcester, Mass.), on the “ Taxonomy of the genus Emys, C. Dumeril.” Curator Morris exhibited a variety of objects from the cabinets of the Society. Dr. Cope suggested that when a paper is presented through _ a member of the Society for publication, in case of its non- acceptance, it should be returned to the member offering the same, and not sent to its author. And the Society was adjourned by the President. *The President subsequently appointed as such Committee, Drs. Ryder, Jayne and Sharp. ; Heilprin.] 4 [Jan. 15, The Temperate and Alpine Floras of the Giant Volcanoes of Mexico. (Being a Report from the Committee on the Michaux Legacy.) : By Prof. Angelo Heilprin. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 15, 1892.) Hemfley, in the fourth volume of his report on the botany of Mexico nd Central America, enumerates 130 species of flowering plants, exclu- sive of sedges and grasses, which reach or pass beyond the 10,000-foot line on the slopes of the four principal volcanoes of the Mexican Republic— Orizaba, Popocatepetl, Ixtaccihuat] and the Nevado de Toluca.* This enumeration is based mainly upon the data found on the labels of the various collections illustrating the region, and omits passing citations; it is thus, necessarily, to an extent incomplete, but yet it is an admirable survey of the general features of this upper flora. 'l'o Hemsley’s list the following species enumerated by Liebmann as occurring on Orizaba can, I think, be safely added,}+ although possibly a few of the species require redetermination before their position or synonymy can be satisfactorily established. : FEET. Ranunculus: Hook eris cick os ss:aes . ssh etn ghee e eat 10,000 Ranunculus Us veanus cic sods i tieeieelis ees «ee 10,000 Cerastium sp.?..........- Cee avivcnd aside cate moeenen 14,000 Arenaria decussate... soos. secs cence ce es lboneceee 10,000 Arenaria Jeptophylla?.........-.e+. 6 0a s SUAS Os, ERA 12,000 Ouplie latifolia. siie iin cesses cn estes Van odading eseesee 10,000 Trifolinin Amabile, o.0-.0;c00 si0:0,6 0: ss:5. 000 salen eee eee Lupinus leptophyllus.............00. PR -» 10,000 Fragaria Mexicana...... KORA Voce vant ERE see» 10,000 Potentilla sp.?......: Ceeeecocens Peeve sd vee aae > NaS . 14,000 Alchemilla venusta........ «set caecaie ve We tuteemeael 10,000 Alchemilla vulecanica........ $ acelin 0dGie Bh eck ae .. 10,000 Alchemilla hirsuta........ ACT ee eR he ee 10,000 WOSVETM WMUCTONRE .. oo ok es ccccccecnnebevusaanes 10,000 BORG SW Auiivess tavcd eases OR ee | ar Wireeee «» 10,000 DpllodinM' FOPENS...c oov'scescadencsuwn hae oe opis nic able Ree PROBUS BIT. os cigs Scene 0 dee d0e0'e ae oun puw'e wee 10,000 IBDIA OPT esscevecveca vecexs $00 veetnsceaesehing sauce ’ eer rec kinase ohiseeditam -»» 10,000 Dauca montana........... aeecvoduadh Sua ante eoctie) SOG Hydrocotyle Mexicana. ......cccccccesesseesecesces 10,000 Eryngium 8p.?.oeseesseees coscccesvecsenceces snbe) Aagtee *"\ Specimen of the Mountain Flora of South Mexico and Central America— Biologia Centrall-Americana,” ‘ Botany," iv, pp. 282-298, 1887, + Vegetation des Piks von Orizaba,’’ Botanische Zeitung, 1844; also translated and abridged in Hemaley's Report, iv, pp. 145-150, 1892. ] 5 {Heilprin. FEET. MER chee aah wens hinatnans od eee canet's obs » 12,000 ls aes iiss aigo aees «0 scone sce 12,000 ee ibe aa wae’ won 9.00 bio bb eee o seh Xs 10,000 Cornus sp.?.......+ Pea w ela Pith ta tiie an vine Kes andowee - 10,000 RNR NEAR sa Siocn'g oS 4p biased 8p did aia as oaoee 12,000 Erigeron scaposus (Aster rivularis)..,..........+.... 10,000 pO? EC ae PERMA 654 cue dedaadic onve 10,000 NEE RMB oie ar eu Eid a-s's pike since vip ovbecee 10,000 Chrysanthemum (?) sagetum.............eseeeeeees 10,000 Cnicus Jorullensis...... Bee Oe Naso hubs weds és 10,000 PRIGVAGINE GDOCISBUUD: isle iced ee sos dees bec eeceees 10,000 MG IID 5 Selid'y cin ov. k5 8 chants ccd vecddece 10,000 AA ORRMN ds Sava pies edesesdecccevess 10,000 ae er eres Piaiys < We ice a tAwswes 10,000 CPATENGTIA MTDOUMDONE,., o.sodse cc cee este cces cece 10,000 Pernettya (Gaultheria) ciliata.............eees-eeu 14,000 SUMING Tein Gata wd Ae DAE Nod0 bisa SOee e ccevees 14,000 POIANA BCOLONIT OPI: ic vo dic bie dais cc's OS ces cee c deeds 10,000 Lamourouxia Jalapensis........... kia, surbas's'c 02a ed 9,500 Pinguicula sp.?...... Woae abate hee cid ae Ot pete ae'slacus 10,000 IMME ARIORTIIOUUD oi a'cdsick cies cv csvescenscvccene 10,000 Oastilles scorzonerifolla.......ceseccccncscevecscess 10,000 DIMER RD ea snigucakeeeasadesssccesis Seeks tinad 14,000 EMM MUIUQIUND Say oo kc pesatadeceecucvcsiveseve 10,000 PIE WOIMATIO (ss bao deen Cuasascces Teta s hae atae 10,000 ! PIB OOUMORUBDE edocs woansepecsescssavecsccccee 10,000 MUMMNMRNOEMONDO ci bid ic chewseiscesacccscsccsses 14,000 Govenia speciosa ............. ey eii dene ks abs cae 9,500 ; ES OES SEES OE a 10,000 2 Mee Anh GiMOn se bee'e teva dee ens s 10,000 A CD Don awae wath sudpestadeecessss 10,000 | (ARIS, » SEINE ey ae eRe 10,000 Oo ESS ISAO LOS GPU TR REE ES ES ee 10,000 UN irr re GPEC neh iwsGiuwenescSeeeeqseess 10,000 The approximate elevations as recorded by Liebmann are, with little _ doubt, given in French feet. This placing does not materially alter the positions of the plants in question. To Liebmann’s list I would add the following, obtained by myself and my associates during a recent explora- _ tion of the Mexican volcanoes (1890): ; FEET. Echeveria gibbiflora? (or E. secunda?) on Ixtaccihuatl 14,200 (Enothera tetraptera on Ixtaccihuatl and Popo- catepetl..... Pee ea CREP CET OCC eeeeeeee11,000-11,500 Symphoricarpus microphyllus on Popocatepetl...... 10,500 Lonicera filosa on Popccatepetl...........seeeeeeees 10,500 Heilprin.j 6 (Jan. 15 : FEET. Erigeron maximus on Popocatepetl........... Smile be 11,200 Baccharis concava on Popocatepetl........... ose nne 21,000 Gnaphalium oxyphyllum on Orizaba................ 13,500 Senecio salignus on Ixtaccihuatl.............+00. +e. 13,200 Arbutus spinulosus on Popocatepetl.............. -- 10,500 Alnus castanzefolia on Popocatepetl..............00. 10,500 Draba aretoides (?) on Ixtaccihuatl...............4.. 13,200 A number of other plants, such as Habenaria prasina, Platanthera nubigena, P. longifolia, Malaxis gracilis (among orchids), have been cited by Martens and Galeotti from the peak of Orizaba, so that the total list is brought close up to 200 species. I have in the table that follows appended the approximate elevations at which the plants occur, relying largely upon the data furnished by Hemsley. The letters that precede the names of the species have reference to the special mountain peak’ upon which the plants were found: O., Orizaba; P., Popocatepetl; L., Ixtaccihuatl, and T., Nevado de Toluca. The author wishes in this con- nection to express his indebtedness for various forms of assistance to Messrs. Thomas Meehan, John H. Redfield, Isaac Burk and Witmer Stone, members of the Academy of Natural Sciences. To 10,000 = 10-12,000 12-13,000 18-15,000 FEET. FEET, FEET, FEET, O. Ranunculus geoides...... 9-12,000 O, RB. ParQvisnuds ccc acess 12,500 OTR PROGR APE in tis sicisins sien 10,000 Oo RR TIBOR OG sock idea cece 10,000 O. Ru Bial vincece acces cxeses 14,000 ©. Nasturtium impatiens .... 11-12,000 0. ee Orizabe...... ~ 12,000 O. Draba myosotidioides .... 12-13,000 P. ‘ Popocatepetlensis.. 12,000 T. "Tolucensis ....... ‘ 8-14,000 i ** aretoides? (also O.) 13,200 O, Sisymbrium canescens.... 12,000 0. ff Galeottianum. 8-11,000 T. Erysimum macradenium. . 12-13, 000 CA WIOIR CLUBS o. cicsanccess - 10,000 Os) Mia GBR vawen. 0 ccen rete 14,000 T. Cerastium andinum...... 18,000 oO, “ orithales ...... 12,000 0. ae vuleanicum. .. 10-12,000 oO. “ HET cuntie $e 14,000 ©, Arenaria alsinoides....... 10-12,000 0, ee decussata....... 10,000 0. “ — bryoldes ....... 12,500 a _— OS eS Oe 1892.] Arenaria bryoides....... “eé “e ereeeee ‘* — leptophylla?... . Colobanthus Quitensis.... Oxalis latifolia ........... 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 13 Fr: O. O Oo. T. Geranium potentillefolium O. Trifolium amabile...... ez T. Lupinus bimaculatus ..... 0. cS ORES x cy vaes O. oS IRDONUB cee dives P. “e Mexicanus....... T; ne montanus..... “yf 0. APS SRRBAGS 0006.00 P. = Senne T. ie Pts wip vee i ee PEON ieee 04 O. op leptophyllus..... O. Fragaria Mexicana....... O. Spirsea discolor........... : O. Rubus trilobus........... O. Potentilla ranunculoides. . 0. “e Richardii ...... 0. - BOT ie vinwiakiteece'< O. Alchemilla orbiculata..... 0. a Sibbaldizfolia. 0. a venusta ...... 0. a tripartita ..... 0. ae vulcanica..... DO. ae hirsuta ......, O. Aceena elongata.......... O. Heuchera Orizabensis.... P. Ribes Jorullensis ........ a a vou mo, * Shr ess O. Echeveria mucronata..... ) 55 gibbiflora? (E. secunda?) ..... dieweecd ss O. Sedum sp.?......... aaa P. Gnothera tetraptera ..... Er - ER peak O. Epilobium repens........ O. Mentha sp.?........ sises P. Fuchsia microphylla...... 0. me MARR Scies oa css 10-12,000 FEET. 11,500 12,000 12,500 12,000 10-11,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 10-12,000 12,000 12,000 9-12,000 10-12,000 10-12,000 11-12,000 11-12,000 12-13,000 FEET. 12,500 11-12,500 [Heilprin. . 18-15,000 FEET. 14-15, 000 14,000 14,000 13,500 14,200 Heilprin.] , Gare spil scccenc oss oe oie Lopezia hirsuta........ ae Microsechium ruderale. .. Pimpinella sp.?....... vee Dancus montana........ . - Hydrocotyle Mexicana. .. Eryngium eymosum..... re proteflorum... Tauschia Coulteri....... ‘ Soesveli api? sgusi>cneas 2 (CEnanthe sp.? ....ccceee Ottoa cenanthoides...... ; BOMOWONMSOOOMSOS SOOOSOHWODOONW HWOSD0DDDH DD DD OOOO . Peucedanum Tolucense .. Viburnum sp.? ....e...-- Cornus 87.2. cvsetenwsess Abelia floribunda ...... ae Symphoricarpus micro- Galium gemmiflorum .... Didyma Mexicana...... . Ageratum adscendens.... at arbutifolium .. ce ce ** Stevia monardiefolia ..... ‘* arbutifolia ..... roe . Eupatorium adenochetum a grandidenta - es Orizabee..... . Haplopappus stoloniferus Chionolwna lavandulacea, oe ae Gnaphalium oxyphyllum. Sabazia sarmentosa ...... . Achillea millefolium...., Baccharis concava....... Erigeron scaposus........ + MAXIMUS ....00. . Benecio chrysactis........ a] “ . vee eeee ‘* cirsloides ........ ee Galeottii, eee ev eee 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 8-10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10-12,000 FEET. 12,000 10,500 12,000 12,000 12,000 10,500 10,500 10-11,500 11,000 8-12,000 12,000 10-11,000 8-12, 000 9-11,000 11,000 11,200 11,500 {Jan. 15, 12-13,000 13-15,000 FEET. FEET. 12,500 13,500 18,200 12,500-15,000 13,200 14,000 12-18, 000 18,200 14,000 9 1892,] (Heilprin. To 10,000 —10-12,000 12-13,000 — 13-15,000 FEET. FEET. FEET. FEET. O. Senecia Galeottii......... 12,000 Oz. ‘« gerbereefolius .... 10-15, 000 oO. Pe ROO BR pies a a5 Pe 11,500 0. ‘* multidentatus..., 9-12 ,500 oO. ‘« ~ Orizabensis ...... 10-12,500 oO. ‘¢ procumbens...... 12-15,000 ee ee « 10-11,000 , E. Of NIG i 6 60-0500 . 13,200 O. Bidens sp.?.........2. sapht 10,000 O. Dahlia variabilis......... 10-11,000 O. Chrysanthemum (?) sage- iS eae es eeedsneeas: 20,000 T. Cnicus nivalis............ 11,400 Sa sig We EE RET 14,000 oe) oe" Jorullensis: 2.6... 10,000 P. Hieracium Mexicanum... 10,000 O. ae abscissum .... 10,000 0. - niveopappum . 13,000 oO. $4 thyrsoideum .. 12,000 O. Tagetes clandestina...... 10,000 . TODelia NADA... 3 sccs cease 11-12,500 oO. as Orizabe ......... 9-10,000 O. Diodia sp.?......... eva 11,000 O. Gaultheria procumbens... 10,000 O. Arctostaphylos pungens.. 12-12,500 P. Arbutus spinulosus ...... 10,500 O. Pernettyia pilosa ........ 9-12,000 O. a ciliata........ 14,000 O. Pyrola Sartorii .......... 9-10,000 3 aad Secunda <5 oscse 8-10,000 O. Chimaphila umbellata.... 6-10,000 O. Buddleia lanceolata ...... 10,000 O. Halenia alata............ 9-10,000 0, ‘f nudicaulis ..... P 9-12, 000 Seo - Mutans..ecd.. --» 9-10,000 O. a paucifolia ....... 9-12,000 O. Polemonium grandiflora. . 9-12,000 O. Cobeea minor............ 10,000 P. Phacelia pimpinelloides .. 10,000 O. ri f ae 12,500 I. “is " a 13,200 O. Echinospermum Mexica- > Wis Gace aioe Ae ae 10,000 O. Lithospermum distichum. 11-12,000 PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXx. 137. B. PRINTED FEB. 25, 1892. Heilprin.] 10 Oo oO oO oO O oO oO oO oO oO oO oO oO we oO oO oO oO Oo oO oO oO oO oO Oo Oo Oo . . . . . . . . . . . . . ’ , 0 0 Oo 0 oO oO Oo oO 0 P 0 oO 0 0 0 To 10,000 FEET. Solanum verrucosum .... = stoloniferum?... 10,000 Saracha umbellata....... 10,000 Lamourouxia Jalapensis. . 9,500 Pinguicula sp.?.......--- 10,000 Calceolaria Mexicana .... 10,000 Pentstemon gentianoides . Mimulus glabratus..... oe 2 Orizabe ........ Veronica serpyllifolia .... Castilleja lithospermoides. 4 pectinata....... es Tolucensis..... *« — integrifolia ..... 10,000 x scorzonerifolia.. 10,000 Pedicularis Orizabe...... Verbena teucrifolia ...... 41 pulchella....... 10,000 Salvia biserrata ..... eet Scutellaria coerulea ...... 9-10,000 Stachys repens ......-+-- Prunella vulgaris ........ 10,000 Plantago Mexicana ...... 10,000 Peperomia Lindeniana.... 10,000 Persea Orizabe .......++ Arcenthobium campylopo- dum..... ae cryptopo- dum..... as oxycedri .. Euphorbia Orizabe ...... 8-10,000 Urtica chamedryoides.... 10,000 ¢ — aplralis.. .ccccccee - 10,000 Pilea vulcanica.......... 10,000 Parietaria Pennsylvanica. 10,000 Alnus acuminata ........ 7-10,000 “ Jorullensis........ ** castanifolia........ Quercus floccosa..../.... 8-10,000 - glabrescens. .... 8-10,000 “ Orizabw ........ 8-10,000 ee reticulata ....... 8-10,000 Salix camW...ecccsccesees 10-12,000 FEET. 10-12,000 9-12,000 10-12,000 12,000 10-12, 000 12,000 10,500 9-10,500 9-11,000 7-10,500 10-11,000 10-11,000 12,000 12,000 10,500 11-12,000 12-13,00) FEET. 12-12,500 [Jan. 15, 13-15,009 FEET. 14,000 13,200 14,200 C2999999999999999 S59 ONSNHOONO . Salix latifolia...... . Bomarea acutifolia .... . Allium glandulosum . Stenanthium frigidum.... paradoxa?.. . Juniperus tetragona...... “eé Mexicana...... “e “e Hartwegii......... Montezume (also ay Bh ae patula ce “é “e Dy Ree Govenia speciosa......... Habenaria vulcanica . a prasina.... Platanthera nubigena .... ps longifolia .... Malaxis gracilis... .... Spiranthes ochracea Serapias sp.?..... Tigridia pavonia........ Tillandsia sp.?........... Sisyrinchium scabrum.... ce MIvtOH Ms ow gi cc ok RETO BT a's bates nan 048 Echeandra terniflora ... 11 (Heilprin. To 10,000 10-12,0°0 12-13,000 13-15,000 FEET. FEET. FEET. FEET. 12,000 10,500 12-14,000 14,000 11,500 11-12,000 13,500 13-14,000 10-14,000 10-12,000 12,000 9,500 10-12,000 12,800 12,500 12,500 12,500 12,500 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 7-10,000 10,000 10,000 11,000 9-12,000 9-12,500 From the preceding it will appear that, exclusive of grasses and sedges, there are approximately : FEET. 5 species whi pass beyond..... SeleWpag'eehiecevenvae’s 14,000 > ete se ae Ws pace wewdseiweeces 13,000 a6; > ** ad se Mere Are Tee Galevens sean sent 12,000 ay “4 AS pei eee gulveaae we Saas seawes 11,000 $153.9 44 4 * St Based MWERESD GWelveeebicceed 10,000 10“ ‘* about reach or adh DOVONE Wiss Sis tc ves 10,000 By far the greater number of the species enumerated in the preceding list are cited from the Citlaltepetl (the ‘‘Star Mountain’’), or Peak of Orizaba, as it is commonly known, which, from the specially favorable conditions surrounding its position, has attracted the attention of botanists more than any other mountain of Mexico. With its base buried in the 12 (Jan. 15, Heilprin.] luxuriant forests of the eastern tierra caliente, it presents an unbroken botanical front to the line of perpetual snow, 15,000 feet above the sea, and thus exhibits in beautiful sequence the different vegetal zones which climate more particularly has marked out. There is probably no other mountain in the world which so thoroughly presents the essentials of a study of mountain floras as Orizaba; the luxuriance of growth at its base, the high level to which the forest zone attains, and the isolation, due to volcanic structure, of the peak itself, are the specially distinguishing fea- tures of this summit. So far as the temperate and alpine floras of the other giant mountains of Mexico are concerned—Popocatepetl, [xtaccihuatl and the Nevado de Toluca—there is no question that they are very closely related to the similar floras of the Star Mountain, as indeed it would naturally be expected they would be. Of this correspondence I have satisfied myself through a personal examination of the floras in situ ; un* fortunately, the conditions attending the ascent of these mountains were such as to prevent us from making more than ‘‘sample”’ collections, but they illustrate in a broad way the general features of the vegetation. All four summits rise from the table land through a zoné of pine forest. On the western slope of Orizaba, or towards the town of San Andres Chalchi- comula, we found the pines, with Pinus Montezume (var. macrophylla— the common long-leaved species), P. Teocote and P. pseudostrobus, to begin as a distinct zone, at an elevation of some 9000 feet, occupying nearly the same position on the western slopes of Popocatepetl and Toluca ; on Ixtaccihuatl the line descends approximately 500 feet lower. There can be little question, it appears to me, that the limitation down- ward in these special cases is not so much dependent upon climatic con- ditions as it is upon certain physical peculiarities of the surroundings and the artificial means that have been resorted to for the removal of the native growth. The vast accumulation of ash and dust-sand which to-day envelopes the plateau base of the mountain, deposited as a disinte- gration downwash from above or as a wind sediment from below, lends itself at best to the development of but a scant vegetation ; large areas are wholly barren, while others are redeemed only by a withered and scattered growth of grass and insignificant herbs. Over these lower areas trees are but distant ornaments. That this limitation of 9000 feet is not the actual or natural boundary of the pine zone is shown by the condition of the eastern face of the mountain, which descends from the plateau, or by the face of the plateau itself. Thus, on the hills about the town of Orizaba, at an elevation of some 4800 feet, we observed Pinus pseudostrobus—a form closely related to P. Montezuma, and also entering into the composition of the lower pine woods of the Citlaltepetl—growing in great profusion ; and on the steep southern face of the plateau descending to the volcano of Jorullo, we followed Pinus Montezuma or P. occidentalis to the level of 4000 feet, or perhaps even lower—far below the upper level which the palms attain in certain parts of Mexico.* * We olwerved a palmetto-like form, probably a Brahea, growing abundantly on the ee ae eT a Ce Sa ee ee 1892.] 13 [Heilprin. The extended vertical distribution of the pines is very remarkable, not less so than the abrupt limitation southwards of the genus. If the identi- fication of the common form of British Honduras and of Cuba (Pinus Cubensis) with P. Montezume (P. occidentalis) be considered correct—for which, however, there appears to be considerable doubt—and similarly, the identification of this last with the species (or one of the species) grow- ing in the upper vegetal zone of Orizaba, etc., then the range of a single species is made coincident with that of the entire genus—indeed, so far as the western hemisphere is concerned, with that of the entire family or tribe. Nor is there, probably, another instance known of a perennial having an equivalent range of 14,000 feet, or upwards of two and a half miles.* Humboldt places the lower limit of P. Montezume in Mexico at 4092 feet (at very nearly the position in which I found it below Buena Vista on the road connecting Ario de Rosales with the hacienda of La Playa, base of Jorullo), and its upper limit, as determined by him on the Cofre di Perote, at 12,936 feet.t Liebmann places the upper limit, on the northwestern side of the Peak of Orizaba, still higher, or at about 14,000 feet.t I am not certain that we observed, whether on Orizaba, Popo- catepetl, or Ixtaccihuatl, the common ‘“long-leaved Mexican pine”’ at anything like this elevation ; certain it is that while this species enters, with the P. Teocote and P. pseudostrobus, very largely into the formation of the lower pine woods of the mountains in question, at elevations of from 9000 to 11,000 feet or thereabouts, it is distinctly succeeded in the upper zone by the very common short-leaved form (Pinus Ayacahuite) and P. Hariwegii. That these various forms have been repeatedly interchanged by botanists and travelers is positive; nor, indeed, in the present uncertainty regarding the species of Mexican pines, would it be safe to assert that all these species are really distinct. We also found the upper limit of the pines on Orizaba to be close on the 14,000-foot line, but on the adjacent Sierra Negra, which faces the peak of Orizaba on the south, the tree line appears to rise fully two or three hundred feet higher. As Liebmann observes, the trees become in a measure dwarfed, though never shrubby or prostrate. At an elevation of 13,200 feet, where they limestone mountains west of Yautepec (on the ridge separating that town from Cuerna- vaca), at an altitude of 6500 feet ; the same species appears still higher, 7000-7500 feet, on the similar calcareous soil of the region about (north of) Tehuacan. At both localities the palm, together with the Viznaga ( Viznaya mammillaris), and the organ cactus, forms the predominant feature of the vegetation; the stem rises to some 30-35 feet. Liebmann states that Corypha and Chameerops are both found on the highlands of Mexico at an elevation of 8000 feet. Hemsley is probably correct in referring one of these forms to Brahea; the other may be a Chamzedorea, but it seems to me more likely to be a true Sabal. Drude has, perhaps, doubted the accuracy of Liebmann’s observations, since he makes no mention of any Mexican palm rising above 5v00 feet (‘‘ Die Geographische Verbreitung der Palmen,” in “ Petermann’s Mittheilungen,’’ 1878: ‘‘Handbuch der . Pflanzengeographie,” 1890). *The Oregon pine or Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga Douglasii) extends its habitat from the sea level on the Pacific coast to an elevation of nearly 10,000 feet in Colorado. +‘ Views of Nature,’’ Bohn’s edition, p. 315. t If French feet, then more nearly 15,000 feet. Heilprin.] 14 . (Jan. 15, still formed groves or thickets, they rose to a height of certainly not less than 30-40 feet. Roezl, as quoted by De Candolle (Parlatore, in the ‘‘ Pro- dromus,”’ xvi, ii, p. 400), and Hemsley give, it appears to me, too great an elevation for the pines on Popocatepetl and Ixtaccihuatl, 13-14,000 feet ; the first figure more nearly represents the true limitation. Felix and Lenk * delimit the zone on Popocatepetl at about 250 feet above the ranch of Tlamacas, or, according to their statement, at almost exactly 13,000 feet ; my own observations place the line somewhat higher, 13,160 feet t—or about 100 feet lower than the point where we met with the last pines on Ixtaccihuatl. At no other point on the earth’s surface do the pines attain such an extreme elevation as on the Mexican volcanoes ; indeed, if we except the Juniperus fetidissima found by Thomson in the Spiti Valley, Hima- layas, at an altitude of 15,000 feet, the entire group of the Conifer almost everywhere falls far below this line. Barring exceptional cases, the uppermost trees on the Himalaya, as in north temperate regions generally, are conifers, but these virtually cease at an elevation of some 12,000 feet, t although flowering plants continue for still 7000 feet higher. On Mt. Ararat, according to Drude, the uppermost trees are birches, poplars and willows, and not conifers, § the tree line on the northwestern face of that mountain being situated somewhat below 8400 feet. On the extinct volcanic summit of the San Francisco mountain (Northcentral Arizona, lat. 35° 20’), with an elevation of 12,794 feet, Hart Merriam found the timber line at approximately 11,500 feet, marked by the disap- pearance of the fox-tail pine (Pinus aristata) and Engelmann's spruce (Picea Engelmanni). A somewhat higher level is, perhaps, reached by the balsam (Abies subalpina) in Colorado—12,000 feet. | The point of most interest that suggests itself in connection with the distribution of the Mexican pines is the distinctness of the forms from those occurring in the region lying to the north. With barely an exception 4 all the species occurring on the lofty volcanoes are endemic to the Mexi- can (Centrali-American) region, and are consequently not found in the pine tracts of the Rocky Mountain system. In view of the longitudinal *** Reitriige zur Geologie and Paliiontologie der Republik Mexico,” p. 20, 1890. t It is interesting to note in this connection that Von Gerolt, who made the ascent of Popocatepet! in 1888, places the limit of vegetation on that mountain at 12,614 (English) feet, not including “a mossy plant, Arenaria bryowdes, which is occasionally found some hundred feet higher.’ Egloffstein, ‘‘ Geology and Physical Geography of Mexico,”’ 184, p. 25. 1 Schlagintwelt observed the last groups or *‘ woods" of these trees at an elevation of 11,800 feet, although cultivated specimens of Populus Euphratica, grown in the gardens of the monastery of Mangnang, were found nearly 2000 feet higher, at 13,460 feet (* Sitaangeber. Manch, Akad.,"” 1865, i, p. 258). This investigator places the limit of Phanecrogams on the Gunshaukar Peak (lat. 31° 23’, long. 80° 18’) at 19,287 feet (op. cit., 1867, p. 516; also in “ Results of a Scientific Mission to India and High Asia’’), 7? Handbuch der Pilanzengeographie,’' p. 402. } C. 8. Sargent, * The Woods of the United States,” p, 152, 1885, * Pinus combroidea ranges into the Santa Catalina mountains of Arizona (8800 feet elevation). a —— 1892.] 1 5 [Heilprin. direction of these mountains and the fact that they are continued by a plateau system of elevations of from 6000-8000 feet into the very heart of the volcanic area, this circumstance appears a little remarkable; its explanation is possibly to be sought in the same series of conditions which have determined the endemic character of the alpine flora generally of the Mexican and South American summits. In the case of such hardy perennials as the pines, however, it is more difficult to account for the anomaly than in that of the seemingly much more pliable herbaceous plants, which are commonly assumed to lend themselves more readily to changes or modifications as the result of alterations in the physical conditions of their surroundings. The comparatively recent origin of the Mexican volcanoes proves that the floras which they carry must be of equally recent date ; it follows, therefore, as a corollary that if the com- ponents of these floras are derivatives from preéxisting floras still extant, such modifications of structure as they have undergone must have been rapid in their formation—more rapid, probably, than is generally allowed for modifications of this kind. Can it, perhaps, be assumed that the special characteristics and conditions which belong to elevated volcanic cones are conducive to rapid change? It is true that not all the volcanic summits of Mexico are of equivalent age, and it can probably be assumed that some are of even considerably greater age than others (although possibly belonging to the same period of geological time); thus the worn-off and effaced summit of the Ixtaccihuatl, without doubt, long antedates such perfect cones as Orizaba and Popocatepetl; and the serrated ridges of the Ajusco, or their continuations, bear a similar rela- tion to the series of more or less perfect cones and bosses which are distributed over the plateau north of the line occupied by them. Vossibly the existing flora was first developed on such ancient slopes, whence by a gradual transference it gained the position which it now holds (largely modified and altered in form). lt must be admitted, however, that our knowledge on these points is still so limited that it can scarcely originate more than speculation or surmise ; it no more explains the present problem than it answers the question: Why are the pines limited to the northern hemisphere—or more definitely, why the North American pines cease so abruptly in Nicaragua? What are the special conditions which prevent them from spreading further southward, and why is the upper zone of the Andes destitute of these trees? Indeed, the endemic character of the Mexican conifers and the absence of their immediate representative in South America might suggest to some an origination wholly independent of a true North American stock—an origination suggestive of a former Atlantis. The presence of pines in some of the West Indian islands—Cuba, Jamaica, Santo Domingo, and again in the Canary Islands*—might, moreover, be taken in evidence of a trans-Atlantic land connection having actually * Pinus Canariensis, the last of the three-leayed pines from the western region of the Old World. > Heilprin.] 16 [Jan. 15, existed at a comparatively modern period. Botanists have, indeed, long since pointed out the relation existing between the modern coniferous flora of North America and the equivalent Miocene flora of Europe—a relationship which might almost be considered an equivalency—and have even hinted at the possible derivation of the one from the other.* The singular distribution of the pines makes it certain that neither their vertical nor their horizontal (or longitudinal) range is determined by con- ditions of temperature alone, or, perhaps, even primarily. Humboldt has plainly stated this fact: ‘‘ This absence from the southern hemisphere of the true Abietinex, of the Juniperinex, Cupressinez and all the Taxo- dine, as likewise of the Torreya, of the Salisburia adiantifolia, and of the Cephalotaxus among the Tuaxinex, vividly reminds us of the enig- matical and still ebscure conditions which determined the original distribution of vegetable forms. This distribution can by no means be satisfactorily explained, either by the similarity or diversity of the soil, by thermal relations, or by meteorological conditions.’’+ Mr. Thomas Meehan las repeatedly insisted that the timber line on mountains is not essentially a fixture determined by climate, but depending more par-. ticularly upon special topographic features of the surroundings—the character of the soil, amount of downwash, exposure to storms, etc. The critical comparison of different timber lines, taken in conjunction with ver- tical distribution, shows that this contention is at least largely true. The abrupt termination of the forest on some of our mountain heights, whether high or low—as for example on the Rocky Mountains or on Mt. Katahdin —and the continuance of trees of still noble proportions practically to the very limits of disappearance, point very strongly to this conclusion, a conclusion which is further supported by the reappearance in many places (of the same region) of the identical forest in positions considerably more elevated (and presumably much better adapted to a special devel- opment). The irregular height to which the ‘‘ Waldregion”’ attains on the Alps and on other mountains of Southcentral Europe is certainly attributable at least as much to topographic (physiographic) as to climatic conditions. Thus, on the main body of the Central Alps (469-479 N. Jat.), the limit of trees is found at approximately 6400 feet; in the Southern Alps of Dauphiné (45° N,. lat.), at 8200 feet (in places only 5550 feet); on the Illyrian Alps, of Karst, Austria (46° N. lat.), at 5000 feet, and on the Dinarie Alps of Bosnia (44° N. lat,), at 5300 feet. So, again, on the Jura mountains, in lat. 47°, this limit is reached at 4900 feet, whereas on the Altai, in lat. 50°, it rises nearly 1500 feet higher, or to 6400 feet. ¢ The limitation to height of herbaceous plants parallels the history presented by trees, It is generally assumed in their case that the line of * Hildebrand, “ Die Verbreitung der Coniferen,” “ Verhandl, ad, natur. Vereines der preus. Rheinlande und Westphalens,”’ xviii, p, 877, 1861, t ' Physiognomy of Plants,’ in “ Views of Nature,'’ p, 321, Bohn edition, 1850, t Grisebach, “ Vegetation der Erde," 1, pp. 180 et seq., 1884, i ti i 1892.] 17 {Heilprin. perpetual snow is the determinant of absolute or greatest elevation, but this is not strictly the case. Thus, it is well known that in the Swiss Alps phanerogamic plants are found nearly 2700 feet above the snow line ; the beautiful mountain pink (Silene acaulis) has been met with at an elevation of 11,382 feet,* and Androsace glacialis, a primulaceous plant, at 11,406 feet, on the Piz Linard (Grisons). Indeed, Heer has determined not less than a hundred species (or approximately that number) of flow- ering plants (representing twenty-three families) as growing on the Rhetic Alps above the snow line (9060 feet), and Martius has recorded twenty-four species from the Grands Mulets, Mont Blanc, on elevations ranging from 10,540 to 11,300 feet.+ So far as the Mexican summits are concerned, I think it may be safely asserted that the tree or timber line is not an absolute one; in other words it is not one which is determined by the natural conditions of growth of the plant itself, but rather it is dependent upon purely local causes. It is scarcely conceivable, for example, that on Orazaba, where at an eleva- tion of upwards of 13,200 feet the trees were still 30-40 feet in height, an additional 500-600 feet should so materially alter favorable (climatic) conditions of growth into unfavorable ones as to produce extermination ; indeed, we must assume that this change is even much more rapid, for at the very verge of the timber line the pines, although necessarily harboring a considerable number of small specimens, still easily measured 20-30 feet. This condition we found repeated on Popocatepetl and Ixtaccihuatl, most markedly, perhaps, on the latter mountain ; I am positive that some of the uppermost pines here, very close to the disappearing line, were not less than 40-50 feet high, if not higher. Again, on Popocatepetl, as has already been remarked, the timber line ceases a little above 13,100 feet, the trees themselves being of rather inconsiderable height. On an equiv- alent height on a spur of the Sierra Tlamacas,{ however, the pines are still noble foresters, and on the Sierra Tlamacas itself, off in the direction of Ixtaccihuatl, they rise to elevations several hundred feet higher. There is little doubt in my mind thatthe actual limitation on the summits here referred to is mainly determined by such physiographic conditions as steepness of slope, downwash of soil, exposure to the cold waters of - melting snows, storms, etc. How much higher, under more favorable conditions, the tree line might have attained, [ am unable to say ; but it is interesting to note that such as it is, it is virtually the most elevated tree line in the world. 2 * Humboldt, “ Views of Nature,’ p. 318. I met with this plaut (summer of 1891) in various parts of Greenland, between lat. 69° and 77° 40’, growing from the sea-level to _ an elevation of 1500-2000 feet. + Grisebach, op. cit., i, p. 167. } Crossed just before reaching the ranch of Tlamacas. § This statement, perhaps, requires modification. Péppig, from manuscript data sub- mitted to him by Engineer Benjamin Scott, asserts (“Reise in Chile, Peru and auf dem Amazonenstrome,” ii, p. 80) that on the Peruvian Andes, near the hamlets of Huaylillas _ de Potosiand Uchusuma, treelets of (?) Polylepis racemosa are found at elevations of 15,883 PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXX. 137. C. PRINTED MARCH 1, 1892. Heilprin.] 18 [Jan. 15, In the north temperate regions the timber line, where marked by the disappearance of conifers at all, seems to characterize indiscriminately the zone either of pines or firs (spruces); probably in the greater number of instances the latter are the most far-reaching trees. In the Harz mountains, the Riesengebirge, the BOhmerwald, the Jura mountains, and in many parts of the Alps, Carpathians and Pyrenees the firs are the delimiting zone of forest ; but again, in other parts of the Alps and Pyre- nees, in the Tatra (Central Carpathians), the Altai, and on many of the mountain crests of the Mediterranean region, the pines (notably Pinus cembra) considerably overtop the firs, even if they do not form that dis- tinct vegetal zone which is constituted by the latter. In North America, perhaps even more than in Eurasia, do the firs constitute the upper- most coniferal zone, a zone which is so eminently defined on the higher elevations cf the Appalachian system of mountains (White mountains, Black mountains of North Carolina). In the Rocky mountains the pines and firs both attain the timber line, but the latter predominate by far as a zone-making element; indeed, on many of the more elevated summits the pines only sporadically mingle in with firs. It isthe more interesting, therefore, to find that on the still higher summits of Mexico the reverse order obtains. The zone of firs (consisting of Abies religiosa), as I had occasion to observe on Orizaba, Popocatepetl, Ixtaccihuatl and the Nevado de Toluca, virtually ceases at about 11,500-12,000 feet,* or two thousand and 15,916 feet, or nearly 150-feet higher than the Sazifraga Boussingaulli, from the slopes of Chimborazo,which Humboldt considered to be “the highest growing phanerogamic plant in the world’”’ (“‘ Views of Nature,’’ p. 284). Again, Humboldt himself observed occasional specimens of tree-like Verbesina on Pichincha at an elevation of nearly 14,400 feet (‘‘ Kleinere Schriften,’ p.57). It seems likely that the measurements of altitude in both of these cases are given too high avalue; at any rate, the more recent surveys of the Andean summits have, in nearly all cases, tended to diminish rather than to increase the formerly accepted measurements. Raimondy reports Sambucus Peruviana and Polylepis racemosa from an elevation of 14,390 feet on the Peruvian Andes; Polylepis tomentella was observed by Weddell at 14,710 feet, and P. lanuginosa, by Jameson, on Chimborazo, at 18,965 feet. Most of these upper trees are dwarfed, scarcely attaining more than a few feet in height, and, indeed, the actual timber line falls considerably below the elevations here given. Humboldt makes the interesting observation that in the region about Quito trees 45-60 feet in height are rarely met with above some 8800 fect, At Chicla, on the Peruvian Andes (18° degrees south of the Equator), at an eleva- tion of 12,200 feet, Ball observed but a single tree, Sambucus Peruviana, a form closely _ related to the common black elder of Europe (‘‘ Notesof a Naturalist in South America,” p. 101, 1887), In remarkable contrast to these cases of special elevation is the condition of the forest vegetation on Kilima 'Njaro, on approximately the third degree of south latitude. According to Dr. Hans Meyer, the ‘average limit of the forest belt is about 0600, the extreme limit imposed by the climatic conditions being some six or seven hun- dred feet higher’ (“Across East African Glaciers,’’ p. 182, 1891); phanerogamic plants are, however, found on the same mountain up to 15,420 feet (op cit., p. 167). In the Sunda islands (Java, Sumatra, Borneo), which lie almost under the Equator, as is well known, the timber line also falls below 10,000 feet, although individual mountain summits rise 2000 and 8600 feet higher. * We met with the last spruces on Ixtaccihuatl at approximately 11,500 feet; the lowest were found at about 0200 feet, or very nearly 1000 feet lower than we observed them on the peak of Orizaba, I have no doubt that the species in question is found at EL 1892.] 1 9 [Heilprin. feet below the line of the pines, and yet more below that of the last junipers. * We observed the last specimens of this genus (Juniperus tetragona) covering the bare rocks of Orizaba at some little distance beyond the actual tree line. It is not always easy to determine just what are the causes which operate towards establishing and regulating the succession of special vegetal zones on mountain slopes any more than it is possible, in our present knowledge, to explain the anomalies of succession on the horizontal plain stretching towards the Pole. The law of parallelism in horizontal and vertical succession, which Humboldt first formulated, and which was founded on the perception of climatic influences almost alone, while it touches the broader aspects of the problem, does not essentially explain the detail ; nor can it be said that the modification of this law, defined by an excess or decrease of solar illumination, the horizon- tality or verticality of the solar rays, etc. (as elaborated by Wahlen- berg, Grisebach and others), any more explains the special contra- dictory features of this distribution. Preoccupation or first possession of a region by a special group of plants has doubtless much to do with the problem; it is an important factor towards determining supremacy, and must, therefore, largely regulate the outcome from a competitive struggle for existence. The oaks of the Mexican volcanoes occupy the lower pine belt, ranging to about 10,000 feet. We obtained three species on Orizaba—Quercus reticulata, Q. Orizabe, and a third form which we have not yet been able to identify. Above 8000 feet they are comparatively rare and no longer form forests, such as are to be met with in the lower region of 4000-6000 feet. In the more or less open dustcountry below the pines—dé. ¢., below where the pines appear on the western slope of Orizaba, about 9000 feet— they are still fairly abundant, forming groves and copses, but once enter- ing the pines they appear onlyas stragglers. The same condition prevails on Popocatepetl and Ixtaccihuatl. Associated with the ouks are one or more species of alder, Alnus Jorullensis and A. castanifolia ; we found the former a tree of some 15-20 feet height, extending up to 12,000 feet or more. The second form, which is now generally looked upon only as a variety of A. Jorullensis, and which we found on Popocatepetl at an elevation of about 11,000 feet, isa member of the flora of the Peruvian Andes—one of the very few plants which are common to the two regions. As regards the non-arboreal vegetation of the Mexican summits, the list of species given at the beginning of this paper sufficiently illustrates a very much lower altitude than where we actually observed it; indeed, it appears that Humboldt and Boupland met with it not far from the forest of Chilpanzingo, south of the Mexican plateau, at an elevation of barely more than 4000 feet. *TIt is true that Schiede mentions the tree as rising to the timber line on Orizaba (Parlatore, in De Candolle’s ‘‘ Prodromus’’), but I believe the statement to be erroneous. Galeotti’s observations, which accord almost exactly with my own, place its limit at some 12,200 feet. Hemsley, on the other hand, reduces the elevation to 10,500 feet, a figure which is 1500 feet too low. Heilprin.] 20 - [Jan. 15, its character. A few remarks from personal observation may not, how- ever, be amiss. We found the most varied flora—v. ¢., in the region above 8000 feet—on Popocatepetl, and it was here, too, that the vegetation presented itself in its most luxuriant aspect.* Taking the physiognomy of the four summits into one general consideration, it may be said that the most noticeable or distinctive plants are two or more species of Senecio and a lupine (Lupinus vaginatus). The yellow flowers of the former and the blue of the latter were an ornament to the vegetation almost every- where between 10,000 and 12,000 or 13,000 feet. Senecio chrysactis, a graceful plant 3-4 feet in height, reaches the limit of pines on all four of the loftiest summits, rising somewhat higher, seemingly, than S. Galeottii. These yellow ‘‘asters,’’ with the tall lupine, form a compact under- growth to the upland pines, especially where the latter have been in one way or another thinned into groves, leaving patches of open country in their midst. In such localities the vegetation is truly luxuriant, and the eye is charmed by the brilliancy of color which is everywhere manifest. The horseman traverses a flowering prairie with his animal buried to its flanks in the rank growth ; on Popocatepetl, more particularly, is this the case. Above 13,000 feet we found the greatest number of species in flower on Ixtaccihuatl Here, immediately about our night’s camping ground, at an elevation of approximately 13,200 feet, we found a veritable garden. The ground was decked with a profusion of the blood-red Castilleja Tolucensis, the carmine Echeverria gibbiflora (or H, secunda?) and the yellow Ageratum arbutifolium, while from the rock-fissures protruded tufts of Asplenium trichomanes (var. majus)—the only fern we were for- tunate enough to secure for our collections—and partially concealed masses of Chionolena lavandula, Phacelia pimpinelloides, etc. The mois- ture which here accumulates from the melting snows combines with a favorable position and exposure to sunlight towards a specially luxuriant growth. At the base of the boulder mass which marks the last stage in the ascent of the Nevado de Toluca —consequently atan altitude of 14,200 feet—we found the ground similarly carpeted with flowers, noticeably so with clumps of Custlleja Tolucensis, but at this elevation the general aspect of the region was fur less cheerful and inviting than on Ixtacci- huatl. There was little or no grass or moss, and the Castillejas and Echeverrias merely occupied sand spots between the lichen-covered rock débris. The last flowers to disappear on Orizaba, so far as our own obser- vations extended, were the Oastilleja, already mentioned, and a Draba (D. aretoides or D, Popocatepetlensis), both of which follow close to the snow line, or very nearly to 15,000 feet—possibly even above this point. The last-named plant was also found on Popocatepetl and Ixtaccihuatl, but at a somewhat lower level (13,000-13,200 feet), * I have no doubt that the eastern face of Orizaba—the side from which Liebmann and Galeotti made their ascents—is much more prolific in plant life than the one turned towards the dry and dusty table-land (the side of San Andres Chalchicomula), whence our party scaled the summit, Pee ——— eee ee 1892. | 21 [Heilprin. Among the more distinctive vegetal features of the lower volcanic slopes may be cited the dense bushes or thickets of Arbutus spinulosa and (the rigid) Symphoricarpus microphyllus, which border the rough mule-ways for long distances at (approximately) the 11,000. foot level, characterizing there a partial zone of their own. We found the ericaceous plants particularly abundant on Popocatepetl. With them is associated the magnificent red- flowering honeysuckle (Lonicera filosa), a stately plant 4-6 feet in height, which is certainly one of the most attractive growths of the region. To this zone succeeds a belt of composites, characterized by a special devel- opment of Baccharis concava and Hrigeron maximus. It need hardly be said that the zonal lines—if, indeed, they are really worthy of such char- acterization—are not well differentiated ; the plants of different belts mix in well with one another, so that everywhere there is considerable overlap. Nor do the same plants always occupy the same positions on the different mountains. Still, an approximation to zonal separation is to an extent manifest, especially where the maximal development of any series of plants is reached. One of the most beautiful plants of the roadside, most abundant, per- haps, between 11,000 and 12,000 feet, is a pink evening primrose (prob- ably Gnothera tetraptera) with flowers somewhat smaller than those of a rose; the plant can, indeed, be appropriately designated the ‘‘alpine rose’’ of the Mexican mountains, as it is not unlike in general appearance a wild rose, though provided with only four petals. Its showy blossoms constitute one of the glories of the mountain roadways, but it is not entirely absent from favored open spots of the lower regions. We met with the plant abundantly in the meadows about Patzcuaro, at an eleva- tion barely exceeding 7000 feet. Here it was. associated with Jussieua repens, Ouphea procumbens, Sisyrinchium micranthum (?), Baccharis con- Serta, etc. The preponderating element in the upper Mexican flora is made up of forms which distinctly represent the temperate and Arctic regions, and not of modifications (suited to a more rigorous climate) of the lower or basal floras of the same region. This is the condition which is found to characterize the high mountain floras of tropical regions generally, as distinguished from those of temperate climes, and for reasons which have been well pointed out by Engler in his exhaustive treatment on the devel- opment of the vegetable world.* Most of the Mexican plants occurring above 10,000 feet, while they are to a very great extent congeneric with the forms of temperate North America, are specifically almost wholly dis- tinct. Indeed, the relationship with the plants of the much more distant Andean summits, so far as the recurrence of identical specific forms is concerned, appears to be considerably more intimate than it is with the forms belonging to the north. The reason for this is to me at the present time entirely conjectural. *“ Versuch einer Entwickelungsgeschichte der Pflanzenwelt,’’ ii, 1882. Brinton.] 22 (Jan. 15, The following species are found on the Andean summits from New Grenada to Peru or Bolivia: Ranunculus Peruvianus. Sisymbrium canescens. Cerastium Andinum. Arenaria alsinoides. Colobanthus Quitensis. Trifolium amabile. Alchemilla orbiculata. Bs Sibbaldizefolia. « __ tripartita. “ hirsuta. Acena elongata. — Ottoa cenanthoides. Tauschia nudicaulis. Lobelia nana, Halenia elata. Saracha umbellata. Mimulus glabratus. Veronica serpyllifolia. Alnus acuminata. A « Jorullensis. Sisyrinchium scabrum. —about ten per cent. of the entire flora. In view of the distance which separates the two regions—some 900 to 2400 miles—this is, after all, not such a small number ; indeed, the wonder is rather that so many alpine forms should have found it possible, in the region of the tropics, to cross the depression of the Isthmus of Panama. Observations on the Chinantec Language of Mexico. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 15, 1892.) _ Name.—The folk-name Chinanteca, plural of chinantecatl, is a word in the Nahuatl language meaning, “inhabitants of Chinantla,”’ which latter signifies a spot enclosed by cane hedges or palisades. By extension, the common term for ‘village’? was chinamiti, as they were usually protected by such light defenses. ‘The Chinan- tecs, therefore, as a nation, are known to us only by the name applied by their neighbors, the Aztecs, to their chief town. 1892.] 23 [Brinton. The assertion of Orozco y Berra that they were also called Zenez arose from a misunderstanding of the letter of Hernando de Barri- entos to Hernando Cortes (1521). Barrientos was not among the ~ Chinantecs proper, but in another chinamit/ in Chiapas.* Still other Chinanteca are mentioned as resident in Nicaragua. This , Nahuatl word has absolutely no ethnographic significance. Several authors have confounded these Chinanteca with the “«Tzinacanteca,’’ or Bat-people, a Maya tribe in Tabasco and Chiapas. The two are nowise related. Location.—Their country was located in the mountains of the eastern portion of the State of Oaxaca and on the frontiers of the present State of Vera Cruz. Their neighbors on the north and east were Nahuatl-speaking tribes, on the south the Zapotecs and Mistecs, and on the west the Mazatecs and Cuicatecs, the latter supposed to be a distant branch of the Zapotec stock. Within these boundaries was a wide variety of climate, ranging from the torrid vales of the tierra caliente up to the chilly regions of the high sierra, where we find one of their villages with the significant name ‘‘ Holy Mary amid the Snows,’’ Santa Maria de las Nieves. The village of Chinantla itself is situated in a wild and mountainous district where the climate is cool and rainy. Orozco y Berra gives the names of thirty-four other towns inhabited by them. History.—The Chinantecs are an extremely ancient people who have resided on the spot where the Spaniards found them from the earliest period of the traditional history of Mexico. We first hear of them as having been conquered by Ahuitzotzin, ruler of Mexico. This event according to the chronology of Torquemada, who is our authority for it, took place in the year 1488. They were treated by their conquerors with the utmost severity and cruelty, of which the historian Herrera cites several instances.§ They were glad, therefore, on the appearance of the Spaniards to throw off the yoke of the Mexicans and lend their aid to the invad- ing strangers. ’ Culture.—The Chinantecs are described as a rude savage people, living in huts constructed of branches of trees, and devoid of the culture of their.neighbors on either hand, the Zapotecs or the +See the letter of Barrientos in the Cartas y Relaciones de Hernando Cortes. Edition of Don Pedro de Gayangos, Paris, 1866, pp. 204, 205 and notes. +E. Miihlenpfordt, Mexiko, Bd. ii, s. 214. tJuan de Torquemada, Monarquia Indiana, Lib. ii, cap. 1xiii. 2 Historia de las Indias, Dec. iii, Lib. iii, cap. xv. Brinton.] 24 . [Jan. 15, Nahuas. Their principal weapon is said to have been lances of un- usual length which they handled with singular dexterity. Literature.—The first to reduce the Chinantec language to writing was Brother Francisco Saravia. He wasa native of Seville, in Spain; by trade a cabinetmaker, in that capacity he emigrated to the City of Mexico, where he married and carried on a pros- perous business. The death of his wife, when he was about thirty-five years of age, led him to renounce the world, and in 1574 he joined the order of Dominicans. Having been assigned to the province of Oaxaca, he devoted himself to studying the language of the Chinantecs, and in collecting them from the caves and ravines ~ in which they lived into villages where they could cultivate the soil. His success was great, and the natives regarded him with equal love and reverence. For fifty years of his long life he labored among them, and when he died in 1630, at the ripe age of a nonagenarian, he left in the archives of his order a number of MSS. in and upon the language. Of these we have the titles of a Catecismo, an Arte,a Confestonario and Sermones. Probably the most important was his Gran Homilario Chinanteco, a copy of which he placed in every one of the parishes under his care, so that the native sacristan could read the homily when the priest should be prevented from attend- ing. More interesting to the historian doubtless was his autobio- graphical sketch of the tribe written under the title Wo¢icta de la Conversion de la Nacion Chinanteca y sucesos acaecidos en elia al Autor. I do not know of a single copy of any of Saravia’s writings; and what is more remarkable, Father Nicholas de la Barreda, who pre- cisely one hundred years after Saravia’s death printed in Mexico the only known book in the language, had never even heard of his predecessor’s labors, and states. specifically in his Prologue that he had not found so much as a word written or printed in this tongue. Barreda himself is said to have been a native of Oaxaca, and began his missionary work among the Chinantecs about 1708. For a score of years he had been cura of San Pedro de Yolos, when his book appeared—Doetrina Christiana en Lengua Chinanteca (4to, Mexico, 1730). Of this only two copies are known to be extant, from one of which I possess a careful MS. copy by the hand of the late Dr. C. Hermann Berendt. ‘This learned Ameri- canist had commenced a study of the tongue, and left a few notes ~~ 1892.] 25 [Brinton. upon it, which have also been of some service to me, although they are quite fragmentary. The tongue is not included in Pimentel’s Cuadro Descriptivo de las Lenguas Indigenas de Mexico, and there is no specimen of it accessible to students of linguistics. It appears, therefore, worth while to present a short description of its character ; the more so as this seems different from many American tongues on account of the singular simplicity of its construction. In fact, I entertain some doubts whether Barreda’s version represents correctly the idiom in its pure form. It certainly reveals no such difficulties as he speaks of, and resembles strongly a jargon in which inflections and syn- tactic relations have been reduced to their lowest terms. Several of the translations of the early missionaries have proved, on exami- nation, to be in a jargon or trade language of a tribe, and not in its real speech. This may be the case here. The Language.—The Chinantec tongue appears to have no affinity with any of its neighbors. It is described as guttural, rough in enunciation and difficult to learn. Barreda says in his Prologue that many of the priests assigned to parishes in the nation tried in vain to acquire it, and, failing in this, attempted to intro- duce the Nahuatl among the Chinantecs; and that this proving a failure, had asked for other fields of labor. He himself, after twenty years of study, had succeeded but moderately in mastering it, but adds that he had exercised the utmost care in translating the Doctrina, submitting every word in it to the most intelligent natives of his parish. The dialect he employed was that of Yolos, which differed, but not greatly, from that of other portions of the nation. The pronouns are but slightly developed—a fact in marked con- trast to most American tongues. The same form serves for both the personal and the possessive pronouns, and it is probable that there is no distinction between their singular and plural number, although a slight difference is sometimes indicated. PRONOMINAL FoRMS—PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE. i, na. We, nah, Thou, no. You, no. : He, quia. They, quiaha. It is noteworthy that the pronoun of the third person, gu¢a, may be used for either the second or the first in its possessive sense ; thus, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXX. 137. D. PRINTED MARCH 1, 1892. Brinton.] 26 [Jan. 15, vt chaagui guia, “for his sins,’’ instead of wf chaagui na, as a trans- lation of ‘‘ for my sins.’’ So again, a#imas guia, as a translation of ‘*our souls.’? This is analogous to the language of children, who do not clearly distinguish persons, and often refer to themselves in forms of the third person instead of the first. The interrogative is Ae, which also serves as a relative, and with the addition of the adverb of place, Za, here, forms the demonstra- tive, hela, this, as hela cna in, ‘‘ this first one.’? The demonstrative ‘«that’’ is usually given by da or nda. The indefinite pronoun cha, some, some one, somebody, is fre- quently prefixed, often apparently in a collective or distinctive sense, as chafiuh, ‘‘some man’’ or men, Z. é., people in general ; charuhno, ‘thy neighbor;’’ chazaguiun, ‘* somebody bad ’’—the devil; chayhian, ‘‘ somebody else.’’ In all cases the possessive pronouns are suffixed to the nouns, The verbal forms appear to vary considerably. A terminal ¢ or @ appears to mark the infinitive, as pane, to chastise; mgueihna, to kill. ‘The imperative is characterized by the pronoun, as Phua ha cala phua na, Say thou as say I. The reflexive has the pronoun before and after the verb: Na juanth na. Me bow I. (I bow myself.) The interrogative form is thus: Cale cuihno huh quiaha? Didst know thou man her? (Didst thou know her husband ?) Ca-cuim-ba-na. I did know him. In these sentences ca is the sign of the preterit, as again in the following sentence; Ma ca-mea testamento fiuh u? Did thy father make a will? Where the present form of the verb is mea, to make. PREPOSITIONS. The prepositions are properly such, being prefixed to the nouns, and separated from them. : 1893.] f 27 (Brinton. In, no; as, no toho, ‘in the belly ;’’ no caliz, ‘‘in the calix’’ (sacred t cup); no chaaqui, ‘in sin.”’ On, ni; as, ni altar, ‘on the altar ;’’ ni muicui la, “on this world.”’ Into, let; as hii let gotan tan vino lei muian, * (the) bread into flesh and (the) wine into blood.”’ Before, in the presence of, quiani ; as quiani jhian quecha, ‘‘ before other f persons.”’ Before, in time, gean. After, in time, guéin. i CONJUNCTIONS. . And, tan. . Also, jalabajna ; as, jalabajna na ina, ‘also I am poor.” NUMERALS. Cardinals. Ordinals. 1 ena, hela ena in. 2 tno, hela tnoin. 3 nne, Net, hela nne in. 4 quiu, hela quvu in. 5 ja, hela ha in. 6 Riu, hela niu in. 7 nyaa, hela nyaa tn. 8 jina, hela fina in. 9 nu, hela fiu in. 10 nya, hela nya in. 20 nyanya, 40 tno laa. 50 tno laa nya. 60 nne la. 70 nne la nya. 80 quiu la. 100 fia la. 200 nya la. TExtTs. The Lord’s Prayer. Phui fiuhu nah fiujui quinno, qualin cuid hela «ai-no; quehe Lord father our heaven itin, may blessed that name-thy; come nah hujui quiehe; quali heli haha muycuila, jalabajna Rujui; quehe '-us heaven thy; may that will earthon, also heaven; give hi nahchahdchahd, tan th-no chaaqui quiee nah, can jhiala in nah bread us all the time, and wilt-thou sins forgive us, just as we Brinton.] 28 (Jan. 15, eee chazaquiun quiani nah ; tan 2a ton-no nah ghehi vi chaaqui ; qui mi nah — sins pardon against us; and not thou us bring to phui Dios geila he zaquiu. Lord God all this evil from. sin ; take us ExTRACT FROM THE DOCTRINA OF BARREDA. Porque se hizo hombre el hijo de Dios? Por librarnos de los manos del Demonio, y por redimir nos del pecado. Que hizo Nuestro Sefior Jesu- Christo para librarnos? Padecié muchos tormentos, fué crucificado, murié y fué sepultado. Que hizo nuestro Sefior Jesu- Christo despues que murié? Al tercero dia despues que murid, rescascit6é, y 4 las quarenta dias despues que resuscit6 subié 4 los cielos y se senté & la mano diestra de Dios padre todo poderoso. ViendrA otra vez nuestro Sefior Jesu-Christo 4 este mundo? Otra vez hi de venir quando se acabe el mundo, 4 tomar cuenta 4 todos los vivos y muertos para dar- les el cielo para siempre 4 todos los que guardaron bien sus manda- mientos; y 4 los que no los guar- daron bien, les dar& para siempre penas en el inflerno. Como murié nuestro Sefior Jesu Christo? Murié como hombre; no murié como Dios; porque Dios no puede morir. Si Dios no puede morir, como murié nuestro Sefior Jesu Christo ? Aunque nuestro Sefior Jesu Christo era Dios, era tambien hombre, y asi pudé morir como hombre, y no pudé como Dios; porque Dios nunca puede morir. He vi caleftuhne Jna Dios? Vi caquinne nah quaacha lin, tan vi caquinne nah ni chaa qui. He camea phui nah Jesu Christo, vi caquinne nah? Cangfinne fiule Juahui, cajanqua ni cruce, cajone, can cahanne. He camea phuinah Jesu Christo, qua male jonne? Nne mui qua male jonne, cagnihi, tan tno la mui qua male cagnihi cangaa na flujui, tan cahuiad quaa cha Dios mii geilaha li mea. © Nijhea que tno phui nah Jesu Christo, mui cuila ? Cna que, nijhea mui cha in mui cui, jhea quia quenta geilan cha xan, tan cha jon, cha queh fiujui geila muiba geilan cha ca hah quiu man- damiento quiaha; tan hi chaza cahah quiu, queh geila muiba juahui nya jui. Thiala cajonne phui nah Jesu Christo ? Cajonne calan cha, aza cajonne calan Dios, chavi Dios aza li jonne. Ze Dios aza li jonne, ihiala ca jonne phui nah Jesu Christo? Gni cu jua phui nah Jesu Christo yha Dios, ja hala jna yba fiuhne; vihe jna le jonne calan chafiu, tan aza li jonne calan Dios; chavi Dios aza li jonne jua lei que. 1892 ] 29 Quando muere la gente en este mundo, tambien mueron sus almas ? No mueron sus almas, sind sola- _ mente el cuerpo muere; porque no _ puede morir el alma. ) -Y cuando muere el cuerpo, muere para siempre ? No puede morir para siempre, - porque el dia que se acabe el mundo, _resuscitaran todos lus cuerpos, y se juntaron con sus almas, ya para nunca mas morir. Adonde van las animas de los defuntos quando mueren sus cuer- pos? Las animas de los buenos van al cielo para siempre, porque guarda- ron bien lo que manda la ley de Dios; y Jas almas de los malos van al infierno, porque no guardaron bien lo que manda la ley de Dios. * * * * * Que es cielo? Cielo es un lugar lleno de mucho -y grande gloria; lleno de todo genero de bienes, y de todo genero de alegria, en donde est Dios nues- tro Sefior, la Santissima Virgen, todos los Angeles y todos los Santos. Alli van las almas de los buenos que sirvieron & Dios & descansar para siempre, que nunca se podré ~ acabar., q _ Alive, chazan. All, getla, geilan, laget ; geila hejna, ‘* all-powerful,” And, conj., tan. Bad, azaquiu, zaquiu, chaaquiu (= -- not good). Because, chavi. ‘Believe, to, changa. [Brinton. Ma jonnencha muicuila, jabala jna jon anima quiaha? Aza jon anima quiaha, ma jna la ha gotamba jonne ; vi aza li jon anima. Tan ma _ jonne cnaphue? Aza li jonne cnaphue geila muiba, vi quiaha mui cha in muicui, jna tno nigni cala geila gotan, tan nigni cnaha animas quiaha, vi aza jua cna li jonne. Jhia cha animas cha jon ma jonne gotan quiaha? gotan, jonne Animas chaqui vn cha fiu jui geila muiba, chavi hah quiu he quiu hu taju quiaha Dios; tan animas cha zaquiun cha nya jui, chavi za hah quiu he quiu huta ju quiaha Dios. He fiu jui? Nujui cna namba, canlé fiv phueli gloria, canlé cala geila juayanchij, thia nhuiaa phui nah Dios, xa fiujui, geilan angeles, tan geilan santos, Nda cha animas chaquiun, cha camea ta quiaha Dios, ma hine cala geila muiba, aza jua li chan. ENGLISH-CHINANTEC VOCABULARY. Belly, toho; ‘‘in the belly of the virgin,’’ 0 toho xa muinne. ‘‘all these things ;’’ geilabalimea, Bird, ta. Blood, muian, muien; ‘‘by the blood,’’ muien no (mui = water and woman). Body, gotan ; ‘‘ in body and soul,”’ gotan tan anima quiaha, Boy, quana. Brinton.] Bread, Aini. Breast, chij. Brother, run. Child, yun. Day, muiba. Dead, ma-jon, cha-jon. Devil, zaguiun (see ‘‘ bad’’); chalin (see ‘‘sick’’). Die, to, jon-ne. Drink, to, nguhu. Ear, (la)quaha. Earth, muycut. Eat, to, cwhu. Eye, manithi. False, a lie, azacha (= not true). Father, muh (= man); mit; Dios mii, **God the Father.”’ Fire, gét. Foot, tehi. Full, canlé. Girl, mui yun (= female child). Give, to, gue, que he. Good, quiu. Grandfather, nywh. Grandmother, nyaa. Great, phue ; superlative, iu phueli. Hand, quaha ; ‘‘open thy hands,”’ janquaha! ‘‘In thy hands I place my soul,’’ nquuha na animaquia. Head, gui; ‘‘throw water on the head of the child,”’ yaha mui nt gui yun. Heart, haha. Heaven, nhujui, nahui. Hell, nyajui. Herb, ha. House, nu. How, jhiala, cala; how long, ja mui, Husband, fiuquia (== consecrated man, #, ¢., by the Church). If, ze. Infant, chimina. Join, to, cun (= to marry). Know, to (saber), wih. 30 (Jan. 15, Know, to (conocer), cuth. Kill, to, nguethna. Live, to, van. Magician, gin. Make, to (Span. hacer), mea. Man, nuh, cha-nu Meat, flesh, gno. Money, cv. Month, zez. Moon, zez. Mother, wa, xaha. Mountain, hill, maa. Much, iu, rule. Name, ai; hi ai no? ‘‘ What (is) thy name?”’ Nephew, niece, nyaa. No, aza, 2a. ike Nothing, aza-he. Now, na. Or, qua. Pay, to, qui-hi, quet. Place, namba. _ Poor, rin, Rina. Pudenda femine, ywh. Pudenda viri, cnu. Relation, a, rwh, run (= brother). Shoulder, ca. Sick, chah. Sin, chaaqut. Small, little, miha. Son, jna. Soon, naba. Speak, to, phua. Steal, to, éehi. Stick, wood, ma. Stone, cn. Sun, manut. Tears, mui nit (= water, eyes). Town, jus. True, cha. Uncle, aunt, heaya. Virgin, muinne (v. woman), Water, mui. When, ma, Where, jhia. Wife, muiquia (see ‘ husband "’), 1892.] 31 | Brinton. With, enaha. Work, to, fa. Wizard, lan. Year, gni. ‘ Woman, mui, cha-mut, Yes, za, jna, ma (iba = it is). Word, ju; cna ju, ‘one word.”’ © On the Mazatec Language of Mexico and its Affinities. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 15, 1892.) In the northeastern corner of the State of Oaxaca lies a moun- tainous tract, watered by numerous streams, known from earliest times by its Aztec name Zeutitlan, the Divine Land, or The Land of the Gods, and officially now as the district Teutitlan del Camino. It has about 26,000 inhabitants, a large proportion of whom are of native blood. ‘These speak three radically different languages—the Cuicatec, which is probably a dialect of the Zapo- tecan stock ; the Chinantec, which stands alone, and the Mazatec, of which nothing whatever has been known, and which it is my aim to examine and, if possible, classify in the present study. The material I have for the purpose is an unpublished vocabulary, collected by a Danish officer, who was in the service of Maximilian, and which has been obligingly furnished me by Mr. Alphonse Pinart, whose extensive researches in American linguistics are well known. The only published materials in existence are two trans- lations of the Lord’s Prayer into different dialects of the tongue. These have been reprinted by Pimentel, Bancroft and other writers. Their precise provenance is unknown ; as for the vocabulary, it was obtained at Huantla, northeast of the town of Teutitlan. Names.—The name Mazatecatl—plural, Mazateca—means ‘‘ Deer People’’ in the Aztec or Nahuatl language. It may have been given them by their Nahuatl neighbors on account of their land abounding in deer; or, as some say, because they worshiped the figure of a deer—that is, had a deer totem among them. ‘There were other Mazatecas living in the present State of Tabasco, and yet others in the State of Guerrero; but we have no reason to sup- pose that those ‘‘ Deer Peoples’’ were at all related to these in Teutitlan. What they called themselves, if they had a collective tribal name, we do not know. Brinton.] 32 [Jan. 15, Nor is it certain why their country was referred to by the Aztecs as ‘*The Land of the Gods.’’ It seems likely that it was on account of the numerous temples that existed there, and the unusu- ally devotional character of the natives. The remains of these ancient religious structures and of the artificial mounds which sup- ported them still bear witness to this, and two of their villages yet bear the names San Antonio de los Cues and San Juan de los Cues, the term cues (a Haytian word) being applied by the Spaniards to artificial mounds. The former is situated in the valley of the Rio Salado; the latter in an adjacent valley. Unfortunately, no archeological exploration of them has been reported.* Their religious character is also referred to by the early Spanish writers. Sahagun describes them as performing remarkable tricks at certain festivals, such as swallowing live snakes and frogs.} Mendieta speaks of their rigid fasts and abstinence from marital relations for fifteen days after the nuptials. ‘The historian Herrera gives the following description of some of their rites: ‘*In the Province of Teutitlan, where the Mazatec language is spoken, which adjoined that of the Mistecs, they were accustomed to flay the sacrificial victims, and carried the skins to the neigh- boring villages, asking alms. On the day of a certain important festival, which took place annually, the priests ascended the temple and struck a war drum. At this signal all the Indians who were in the fields had to run to their houses and their town. Then those who had carried the skins of the victims sallied forth and ran about the country till midday, and whenever they caught a person they cut his hair so as.to form a sort of crown around his head, and such persons were destined to be sacrificed within one year.’’ t According to Aztec mythology—which is very rarely to be regarded as historical—the natives of Teutitlan were descended from Xelhua, the oldest of the six sons of Iztac Mixcohuatl and his wife, Ilancuey, the venerable pair who dwelt in and ruled the mysterious northern Land of the Seven Caves, called in Nahuatl Chicomoztoc.§ * Another Teotitlan—“ Teotitlan del Valle’”—is found in Oaxaca. It was so called from the temple of a famous divinity, which was erected on the summit of a high rock near by. This was the goal of numerous pilgrims, and, according to Sefior J. B. Car- riedo, “ fué uno de los santuarios de mas estima y de mas nombre en la gentilidad,” Extudios Historicos del Estado Oaxaquefio. Tom. 4, pp. 15, 16. t Historia de Nueva Espafla, Lib. ii, Apendice, } Historia de las Indias Oceidentales, Deo, iii, Lib, iii, cap. 15. i Mendieta, Misoria Kelesiastica Indiana, Lib, ii, cap, 83, 1892.] 33 [Brinton. This Xelhua was a mighty man—one of the ‘‘ Giants,’’—and was surnamed the Builder, for he it was who constructed the famous Pyramid of Cholula. Heis also referred to as chief of the Olmeca, an unknown, ancient people. We need attach little importance to these old stories, and will find it more profitable to turn to the language of the Mazatecas to discover their affiliations. In investigating its possible analogies with other ‘dive I have been somewhat surprised at the relationships which it certainly dis- closes. ‘These are not with the Zapotec-Mixtec stock, as I have (erroneously) stated in my work, Zhe American Race,* but with two quite remote and independent stocks. The one of these is the Chapanec,which was spoken in the present State of Chiapas, and also at the time of the conquest by many thousand natives, who occupied the shores of Lake Managua and Fonseca Bay, in Nicaragua, where they were known as Mangues and Orotinans. The dialects of this stock are closely akin to each - other. The second list of affinities point to a still more remote and unexpected relationship. ‘The Mangues had as neighbors beyond the Cordilleras, in Costa Rica, a group of related tribes—the Tala- mancas, Borucas, Bribris, Vizeitas, etc., whom I shall call, col- lectively, ‘‘ Costa Rican.’? ‘These have been satisfactorily shown — by Dr. Max Uhle, Dr. A. Ernst and other students to be not dis- tantly connected with the important Chibcha stem of New Granada, which, at the conquest, was widely extended over that Province, and is the only linguistic stock of South America whose presence in North America has been proved. t After presenting the vocabulary furnished me by Mr. Pinart and the texts offered by Pimentel I shall pursue the comparisons of the stock of terms thus supplied. ENGLISH-MAZATECAN VOCABULARY. Arm, chale. . Black, twna. Bad, minda. Blue, iso. Banana, nacha’. Boy, indidi (see ‘‘Son’’). Beans, nahma’. Bread, chu hi. Beard, tza’ 4. Breast (chest), animale. * The American Race: A Linguistic Classification and Ethnographic Description of the Native Tribes of North and South America, p. 142 (New York, 1891). Tt See The American Race, pp. 184-186. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOC. xxx. 187. E. PRINTED MARCH 5, 1892. Brinton.] Brown, schene’. Cactus, nan’ da. Cat, a, chito. Chief, chicunat. Church, tnat. Clothing, nikye. Clouds, #fi. Cow, ngchaha’'. Daughter, tzadi (see ‘‘ Girl’’): Day, guaichi. Dead, covtu. Die, to, cutyane. Dog, nanya. Door, chutoa. Ear, schical. Earth, nangi. Egg. cho’. Evening, gischo. Eye, schea. Eyebrows, tza txpan (?). Father, tata. Finger, noon-tza (see “ Hand’’). Fire, nit. Foot, tz6cd. Forehead, ten. Girl, tzadi. God, naina’. Gold, naleto. Good, dani. Green, tzare’. Hail, tzinayo. Hair, coshe’. Hand, tza. Hat, tzingye. Head, tku. Heaven, gami. Here, thndi. Hill, nindo. Iron, quicha. Large, tzea, Leaf, scheatiya (= ear-tree). Light, ase’. Lightning, kuata. Lungs, nyest. Maize, name’. Man, chii. 34 (Jan. 15, Meat, yoje. Money, to. Moon, sa. Morning, tanhya. Mouth, tzoa. Night, nhyu. Nose, nitu. Onion, tatzo. Palm, schahe’. Paper, schuhu’. Plantain, nacha’. Plaza, tétz?. Pretty, da. Rain, ¢z7. Red, ini. River, dahoe. Road, diya. Sea, dachicu. - Sheep, chitzanga. Sierra, gihya. Silver, tonschua. Small, tua. Snow, dundya. Son, indi (see ‘‘ Boy’’). Star, ningutzea, Stone, noyo. Summit, the, garonindo. Sun, sut. Teeth, nityu. There, hant. Thigh, chamila. Toe, noontzoco (see ‘‘ Foot"’). Tree, tya. Tobacco, nahnu. To-day, gandai, Tomato, chité. Town, naschananda, Turkey buzzard, nikye. Ugly, chiu. Water, nanda, White, chuhua. Wind, to. Woman, chu, Year, guno. Yellow, sine. Yesterday, gohta. iit ie > 1892.] , 35 [Brinton. The personal pronouns are: I, gaa’. We, gahi. Thou, gahye’. You, gahini. He, he. They, niahne’. Of the possessives I find the following : Mine, na. His, le’. Thine, li. Our, nahan. The numerals are given thus: 1 go’. 8 ni. 2 ho’. 9 nyaha’. 3 ha’. 10 * te. 4 nihu’. 11 tengo. 5 it. 15 chu. 6 hit’. 20 cung. 7 yato'. 30 kate. There are two versions of the Lord’s Prayer given in Pimentel’s Cuadro Descriplivo de las Lenguas de Mexico. They evidently have been made by different persons, and represent different dia- lects of the tongue, and apparently neither is in that of Huantla, where the vocabulary was obtained. Both, however, are clearly Mazatec, and the differences disappear considerably on analysis. They are as follows: A. ‘‘Nadmina naina ga tecni gahami; sandumi tlt gatirrubanayjin nanguilt ; cuaha catama janimalt, jacunit dic nangut cunit gahami ; nino rrajinna tey guitaha najin: gntedchatahanajin gadchidtonajin Jacunitgajin nedchata alejin chidtaga tedtunajin: guquimittacun- tuajin, tued tinajin cuacha catama.”’ B. ** Tata nahan, xt nacé nthaseno: chacua catoma fiiere: catichova rico manimajin: catcma cuazuare, donjara batod cornangut, bateco nihasen: niotisla najin ri ganethinixtin, tiuto najin dehi: ni canuht rt guitenajin donjara batoo, juirin ni canojin ri quitetsajin: quini- quenahi najin ri danjin quisanda nongo niqueste Meé.”” 36 [Jan. 15, Brinton.] Referring to the first as A and the second as B we may make the following comparisons with words in the Vocabulary : A. B. VOocaB. Our, naina, nahan, nahan. Father, nadmina, tata, nami (‘‘cura’’ ), Thou, ga, nacd, gahyé. Heaven, gahami, nihaseno, gamit, Earth, nangui, nangut, nangt. Kingdom (thy), janima-li, manima-jin. Give (thou), nino, nio-tisla. To-day, ganei, gandat. Us (—to us, of us), najin, najin. Turning nowto an investigation of the affinities of the Mazatecan, I present the following arrangement of a number of words, with their corresponding terms, in dialects either of the Chapanecan or Chibchan stock. It is noteworthy that very rarely do we find any word which is at all alike in the three. The Mazatecan terms seem to have been derived from two sources radically dissimilar. COMPARISON OF THE MAZATEC WITH THE CHAPANECAN AND CHIBCHAN STOCKS. CHIBCHAN. MAZATEC. CHAPANECAN. Costa RICAN, NEw GRANADIAN, Arm, chale, goloa, ghulua. Banana, nacha, noko-tona. Black, tuna, turinat, Sunza, Blue, 780, dsaihe, siona. Breast, animale, antermi, V. Cat, chito, txitu. Chief, chicunu, chiquy (priest). Dead, coviu, coijme. Die, to, cut-yane, hui. Dog, nanya, nombi. Ear, schical, sekuke, ikuaga, quhyca, Eye, schou, ocua, 8’ dovo, upoua. Fire, nii, nio. Flesh, yoe, nbohoui. Foot, tz0co, tsuku-nukue, V. Good, dani, pami, game. Hair, coshé, schd, quyhé, 1892. ] MAZATEC. Hand, tza, Head, tku, Here, thndi, Hill, nindo, Hilltop, garomindo, Lightning, kuata, Maize, nama, Man, chit, Money, to, Moon, a Mouth, tzoa, Mountain, gihya, Night, nhyu, Nose, nitu, Rain, tat, Red, ini, River, dahoe, Road, diya, Sea, dachicu, Small, tua, Star, ningutzea, Stone, noyo, Sun, suit, Teeth, niiyu, There, hani, Tree, tya, Turkey buzzard, nikye, Water, anda, (stream) White, chuhua, Wind, to, Woman, chu, Yellow, sine, oo gad, My, na, One, 96, Two, hé, Three, hd, BT CHAPANECAN. Ookua. jande. ndili. namando. kotta-pumene. (thunder) tiho. saho. nba. ti-ghé, ticad. had. haut. [ Brinton. CHIBCHAN. CosTA RICAN. hechiche. 80, sie, bets-ena, serir-ine. deche, dechequ-in. taoua-pa, T. chut, surunda, suat. soora, psi, shoin-ore. NEw GRANADIAN. yta. ea (night), situ. sue, git. I think that the above comparison will leave no doubt but that the Mazatec is affiliated with both these stocks. With regard to 38 [Jan. 15, Brinton.] the Chapanecan, no other supposition will explain the substantial identity of the words for: Fire, nit and nio. Water, nanda and nanda (stream). Maize, nama and name. Tree, iya and nya. Lightning, kuata and koita. Night, nhyu and nyu-fut. Teeth, niyu and ni. Stone, noyo and nyugu. Cat, chito and. twitu. Here, thndi and jande. One, gé and ticad. Two, hé and hd. Three, ha and hdut. Not less positive are the identities of the following words of the Mazatecan and Chibchan (Costa Rican) groups: Sun, gut with chut or sua. Moon, 8a with 986, sie (or 2a). Ear, schical with quhyca, sehuke. Eye, scheu with s’dcvo, dcua, Hair, coshé with schd, quyhé. Man, chi with he-chi-che. Woman, chu with swe, git. Rain, tzt with stu. Sea, dachicu with dechequ-in. Foot, tzoco with tsuku. The words for the colors white, black, blue, yellow and red show rather remote, but, perhaps, actual resemblances. They have no analogy whatever with the Chapanecan color terms. The ethnographic conclusion to which this comparison would lead is that the Mazatecas do not constitute an independent stock, but a branch of the Chapanec group, which was at some early date of its history largely infiltrated with blood of the Costa Rican tribes of South American descent. This may have arisen from the adoption of some large band, which had migrated across the moun- tains separating Costa Rica from Nicaragua, The Mangue branch of the Chapanecs lived in Nicaragua, in immediate proximity to these mountains, and must have been in frequent relations with the tribes beyond them, 1892.] 39 [Brinton. But how explain the extensive journey from Nicaragua to the northern limits of the State of Oaxaca? Here an ancient tradition of the Mangues comes to our aid. It was preserved by Father Remesal in his History of Chiapas, and runs to the effect that at a remote time a considerable number of the Mangues departed from the shores of Lake Managua and journeyed to the north, into the territory of the Zoques. Remesal construed this to explain the origin of the Chapanecs of Chiapas ; but the traditions of the latter do not acknowledge this derivation, and it is probable that the Mangues referred to some other division of their community. This may well have been that which conveyed a mixed dialect of Mangue and Costa Rican as far as the northern borders of Oaxaca. We have also early evidence that a band of the Mangues, num. bering about four hundred souls, occupied a town in the midst of the Costa Rican tribes, in the valley of Guaymi, fronting on the Golfo Dolce. There they were found by the Spanish explorers in 1563.* Doubtless they absorbed more or less of the language of their rulers, the Guaymis ; and the following identities between the Mazatecan and the Guaymi vocabularies (published by Mr. Pinart in the Revue d’ Ethnographie, 1887) seem conclusive. MAZATECAN, GUAYMI, Sun, sui, shui. Moon, 8a, 80. Head, tku, Gokua. Nose, nito, nido-it. If these identifications are correct, they enable us to trace the influence of a South American linguistic stock as far into North America as the northern border of Oaxaca—a discovery full of sig- nificance for the history of the aboriginal culture of the central portion of the continent. * Peralta, Costa Rica, Nicardgua y Panama en el Siglo XV/, p, 777 (Madrid, 1883). Baur. ] 40 [Jan. 1, On the Taxonomy of the Genus Emys, C. Duméril. By Dr. G. Baur, Clark University, Worcester, Mass. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 1, 1892.) [ have just read Prof. L. Vaillant’s paper, ‘‘Sur Ja Signification taxi- nomique du Genre Emys, C. Duméril”’ (‘‘Ann. Sc. Nat. Zool. et Pal.,’’ vii® série, Tome xii, No. 1, Paris, 1891, pp. 51-63). Prof. Vaillant attempts to show that the type of Emys is not Hmys orbicularis L., as nearly gener- ally admitted lately, but Zestudo picta Schneider, now generally known under the name of Chrysemys picta, and I think he is correct in this. I am, however, unable to follow him in ail his other conclusions. I should like to add first, that the name proposed by Brogniart in manuscript, before Duméril had used the French name, les Emydes, in 1804, had been ** Syrinz.’’ In Isidore Geoffroy-Saint-Hilair’s paper on Trionyx, pub- lished in 1809, in ‘‘Ann. du Mus. d’Hist. Nat., Paris,’’ Vol. xiv, Ifind the . following note on page 3: ‘‘On lisoit dans le manuscrit demeuré au se- crétariat de l'Institut jusqu’a la publication du volume des Savans étran- gers le nom de syrinz au lieu de celui d’émyde, mais M. Duméri] ayant depuis proposé ce dernier nom, M. Brogniart l’adopta lors de l’impression de son Mémoire.” Besides, I should liké to state that the original paper of Brogniart, ** Essai d’une classification naturelle des Reptiles,’’ appeared for the first time in 1799, in the ‘‘ Magazin encyclopédique, ou Journal des Sciences, des Lettres et des Arts,’’ rédigé par A. L. Millin, Vol. vi, pp. 184-201, An. viii, 1799, and was reprinted in the ‘‘ Bulletin des Sciences, par la Société Philomatique,’’ No. 35, pp. 81, 82, Paris, Pluviose, an 8 de la République, and No. 36, pp. 89-91, pl. vi, Ventose, an 8 de la Répub- lique (1800). It was Michael Oppel* who, for the first time, used the fact already noticed by Schipff, that in Hmys orbdicularis the front portion of the plastron is movable, to distinguish in the genus Emys three subdivisions, *Subdivisiones secundum scriptores recentissimos. **(a) Sterno antice mobili, ¢.g., Amys lutaria, **(b) Sterno cruciformi, ¢.g., 2. serpentina. **(e) Collo longissimo, sub testam arcuate reflexa, non retractili, ¢.g., E. longicoliis.”’ FE. serpentina was placed in a new genus, Chelydra, by Schweigger, in 1812 (‘‘Kénigsberger Archiv fiir Naturwissenschaft und Mathematic,”’ Vol. i, pp. 280, 292, 293, Kénigsberg, 1812), + and Z. longicollis in the new genus Chelodina, by Fitzinger, in 1826. * Oppel, Michael, “Die Ordnungen, Familien und Gattungen der Reptilien,” Miin- ehen, 1811, p. IL ¢ This is the original publication. } Fitzinger, L. T., Neue Classification der Reptilien,’’ Wien’, 1826, p. 6. 1892.1 41 [Baur. Brogniart, who proposed the Latin name ‘‘Emydes” in 1805 for Duméril’s French name ‘‘ les Emydes,’’ had given the following species as belonging to it: HZ. ferox, H. rostrata, H. matamata, LE. lutaria, LH. pensylwoanica, HE. clausa. | E. feroxz and LE. rostrata belong to Trionyx Geoffroy, 1809 ; H. matamata to Chelus Duméril, 1806 ; Chelys Oppel, 1811. It was Merrem * who divided the remaining species of Emys into two groups.+ (a) Emys-~ ‘* Digiti distincti, unguibus acutis. Rostrum corneum. Sternum immobile.’’ * Merrem, Blasius, ‘‘ Versuch eines Systems der Amphibien,’’ Marburg, 1820, pp. 22, 27. Merrem places the Testudo lutaria, with the following synonyms: Testudo lutaria L., T. orbicularis(?) L., T. ewropwa Schneid., T. caspica Gmel, among his Emys, not knowing that in this form the anterior part of the plastron is movable. + Ihave to say, however, that Rafinesque had already, five years before, reached the same conclusion in a book which is very rare, but of which my friend, Mr. S. Garman, has a copy. I have tothank Mr. Garman for copying for me the part relating to the Testudinata. The title of the book is “* Analyse de la Nature ou Tableau de l’Univers et des corps organisés,’’ Palerme, 1815. On page 75 we find : ** Oryptephia. Les Cryptephiens, ‘ “Carapace inférieure 41 0u 2 valves mobiles; enfermant les membres comme dans une boite. “G. 8. Cheliphus R. ; 4. Uronyx R.; 5. Didicla R.; 6. Monoclida R. “ Emydania. Les Emydiens. “Carapace ni coriace, ni a valves mobiles, pieds & doigts libres ou palmés, “G. 7. Emyda R., Emys Dum.; 8. Chemelys R.; 9. Chelopus R.; 10. Chelyda R., Chelys Dum.; 11. Cheliurus R.”’ Unfortunately Rafinesque did not give the names of any species with the new genera, nor did he give any characters. From a later paper, which was written in 1816, but not published before 1832, we receive some information by Rafinesque (Rafinesque, C. F., “ Description of Two New Genera of Soft-shell Turtles of North America,’ Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge, Vol. i, No. 2, Philadelphia, summer of 1832, pp. 64, 68. “ Cheliphus Raf. Water turtles with valved shells, 5 claws and toes to all the feet. “ Uronyx Raf. An anterior valve to the shell, toes and claws 5 and 4, tail with a claw. T. scorpioides, etc. ‘** Didicla Raf. Bivalve lower shell, toesiand4. Type 7. clausa, odorata, etc. “ Monoclida Raf. Lower shell valvular anteriorly, toes5and4. T. retziana, etc. “« Chemelys Raf. Warty scales, no valves, 4 toes to all the feet. T. verrucosa, etc. _“ Chelopvs Raf. No valve, toes not palmated 4 and 5. 7. punctata, etc. “ Cheliurus Raf. No valves, feet palmated, a long scaly tail. 7. serpentina, etc.’’ The group with movable valves, named Cryptephia by Rafinesque, contains, there- fore, the genera Sternotherus = Cheliphus; Cinosternum = Uronyx = Monoclida ; Cistudo = Didicla, part. ; The group in which the valves are not movable, named Emydania by Rafinesque, contains the genera Emys=Emyda; Clemmys=Chemelys=Chelopus; Chelydra= Cheliurus. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxx. 187. F. PRINTED MARCH 5, 1892. Baur.] 42 (Jan. 1, (6) Terrapene— ** Digiti distincti, unguibus acutis. Rostrum corneum. Sterni lobo anteriore, aut utroque mobili.”’ Two years later, in 1822, Fleming established the genus Cistuda* for the tortoises, in which the entrance to the cavity is formed by a lid. Cistuda is simply a synonym of Merrem’s Terrapene, and has to be aban- doned therefore. In 1825, Gray} follows Merrem, adopting the genera Emys and Terrapene (written Terraphene) ; ‘‘ Cistuda Say”’ is declared a synonym of Zerra- pene. In the same year Bell ¢ published an important paper not mentioned by Prof. Vaillant, in which he shows that 7. ewropea Schneid. (orbicularis L.) has to be included in ‘‘ Terrapene Merrem, Cistuda Say.’’ He says of T. orbicularis L. : ‘‘On examining sometime since a shell of this species, the first I had seen, which had lost the sternum, I was struck with the appearance of the articular surface from which that part had been re- moved, and immediately concluded that it must belong to the present group, having a movable breastplate, notwithstanding Merrem, to whom belongs the credit of having separated the ‘Box Tortoises’ under his subgeneric division Terrapene, retains this species amongst his Emydes, the character of which, on contradistinction to Terrapene, is that the sternum is entire and fixed. On consulting Schépff, I found ~ that, with his usual accuracy, that author had mentioned the movable structure of the sternum, and subsequent observations have established ' my first conjecture that it belongs to this genus.”’ Now this leaves no doubt whatever that from 1825 the name Emys could not be applied to T. orbicularis L., but that this species belonged to Terrapene ; and since Terrapene Merrem is the same as Oppel’'s subdivision, with Hmys lutaria as type, this species, which is now known as LE. orbicularis L., has to be considered the type of Terrapene. Gray § follows Bellin 1831, but uses now the name Cistwda of Fleming, which he calls Oistuda Gray, not Cistudo as remarked by Prof. Vaillant, * It is difficult to say whether this name Cistuda is a misprint or not. It could either stand for Cistula, from cista, the diminutivum of cista, which means a small box, or for . Cistudo, formed in the same way as Testudo trom testa. It seems that Duméril and Bib- ron Introduced the name Cistudo for the first time in 1835, + Gray, John Edward, “ A Synopsis of the Genera of Reptiles and Amphibia,’”’ ‘Ann. of Philos.,"" Vol. ix, pp. 210-212, London, 1825. t Bell, Thomas, “A Monograph of the Tortoises, having a Movable Sternum, with Remarks on their Arrangement and Affinities,” Zod/og. Journ., Vol. ii, pp. 299-310, London, 1825. i Gray, J. B., ‘A Synopsis of the Species of the Class Reptilia,” p. 7; published as Appendix to Vol. ix of Cuvier'’s “Animal Kingdom,” edited by Edward Griffith, London, 1831, In the same year appeared another separate edition, with additions: Gray, John Edward, “Synopsis Reptilium, or Short Descriptions of the Species of Reptiles,’ London, 1831, The original paper was written October, 1830; the second edition of it in January, 1831, ae erat 1892.] ° 43 [Baur. In 1828, Ritgen* subdivided the genus Hmys, in Hmys and Clemmys, and retained Terrapene Merrem. The following species are united with Clemmys: H punctata, planiceps, glutinata, centrata, subrufa, melanocephala. Of these #. punctata Schopft = T. guttata Schneider, has to be considered as type. As correctly stated by Prof. Vaillant, 7. picta Schn. has to be con- sidered as type of Emys, and Chrysemys Gray, 1844, becomes therefore a synonym of Emys. The first author who subdivided the Terrapene Merrem, as limited by Bell in 1825, was C, L. Bonaparte,} who separated the American box tortoises under Fleming’s name Cistuda in 1830 and 1831, from Emys, with 7. orbicularis as the type. In 1836, Fitzinger proposed a new name, Pyzidemys, to contain the fol- lowing species : 7’. carolina L. (T. scheideri Schweigg., T. virgulata Daud.), Sternotherus trifasciatus Bell, and 7. amboinensis Daud. If there would be an objection to the name Cistuda in the sense of Bonaparte, Fitzinger’s name Pyxidemys ought to be used with the 7. carolina L. as type. But I think it will be the best to use the name Cistuda in the correct form of Cistudo. As a result we have the following : Emys ©. Duméril, s. str. = Chrysemys (Gray), Type 7. picta Schneider. Terrapene Merrem = Emys (Boul.) “ T. orbicularis Lin. Cistudo Bonap. non Flem.= Cistudo (Boul. ) ‘« TT. carolina Lin. Cyclemys Bell ==Cyclemys (Boul.) ‘“* EH. Dhor Gray. Clemmys Ritgen == Clemmys part (Boul.) ‘* 7. guttata Schn. I have shown some time ago that in COistudo major Agassiz, the zygomatic arch is complete (Science, April 3,.1891, p. 190), asin 7. ambot- nensis Daud., notwithstanding I believe that the Asiatic and American forms are generically separate. I am unable to say whether 7. amboi- nensis Daud. belongs to the genus Cyclemys Bell, with #. Dhor Gray as type, or not. Prof. Vaillant is inclined to place 7. amboinensis in a genus distinct from Cyclemys Bell, for which he uses the name Terrapene. The correct name would be Quora Gray, introduced in 1855. . The whole question relating to the taxonomy of Emys Duméril may be developed in the following table : * “Ritgen,"F. A., Versuch einer natiirlichen Eintheilung der Amphibien,”’ ‘‘ Nova Acta Nat. Cur.,’’ Vol. xiv, pp. 257-284, Bonn, 1828. + Bonaparte, C. L., ‘‘Osservazioni sulla seconda ediziona del Regno Animale del Ba- rone Cuvier,’’ Bologna, 1830. And “ Saggio di una distribuzione metodica degli Animali Vertebrat Giornale Arcadico di Scienze,” etc., Roma, Vol. xlix, 1831. Baur.] 44 [Jan. 1, Emys C. Duméril, 1806. Ze Emys C. Duméril (Oppel, 1811). Hmys (subdivisio) A. Anterior part of plastron movable. Type 7. orbicularis L. Oppel, 1811. Emys C. Duméril (Merrem, 1820), Zerrapene Merrem, 1820. oe T. orbicularis L. | Emys C. fea (Gray, 1825). Terrapene Merrem (Bell, 1825), ; including the original type 7. St ann L., of Oppel. Emys C. Dum. Clemmys Ritgen, 1828. oe Merrem (Bell). Type 7. pictaSchn. Type 7. guttata Schn. via ae Oistuda Bonap., Terrapene Merr. 1830. Type Z. orbicu- Type 7. carolina L., laris L. Cistudo. Cyclemys Bell, 1834, Type 7. carolina L. Type 2. dhor Gray. I place now the views of Boulenger, Vaillant and myself together : Baur. Vaillant, Boulenger. Emys C. Dum., 8. str. Emys C. Dum., s. str. Chrysemys. Type 7. picta (Herrm. MSS.) Schn. Type Emys picta Schipff. Clemmys Ritgen. Clemmys. Type 7. guitata Schn. Terrapene Merrem. Cistudo Gray. Emys. Type 7. orbicularis L. Type Cistudo orbicularis L. : Cistudo (Cistuda Flem.) Bonap. Cistudo. . Type 7. carolina L. : Cyclemys Bell, Cyclemys Bell. ' Cyclemys, part. Type Bmys Dhor Gray. Type Cyclemys dhor Gray. Cuora Gray. Terrapene Merrem, Cyclemys, part. Type T. amboinensis Daud, Type Terrapene amboinensis Daud, The only modification in Boulenger’s catalogue necessary is to change his Chrysemys in Hmys, and his Zmys in Terrapene. 1892.] ‘ 45 (Brinton. Studies in South American Native Languages. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 5, 1892.) INTRODUCTORY. It is not too much to say that the languages of the native tribes of South America are the least known of any on the globe. The problems they present in their grammatical character and affinities remain the furthest from solution, and the materials to undertake such a task are the scantiest from any equal area on the earth’s surface. In spite of the labors of such earnest workers as Von den Steinen, Ehrenreich, Adam, Ernst, Darapsky, Middendorff and others, there are numerous tongues of which we know absolutely nothing, or have but bare and imperfect vocabularies. In the present series of studies I present a variety of material from either unpublished or rare works, accompanied by such sug- gestions as to its character and relations as have occurred to me in its preparation, and by some observations on the ethnography of the tribes mentioned. As I am convinced that the only ethno- graphic classification possible of the native tribes of America is that based on language, I do not hesitate to apply this whenever possible. i THE TACANA GROUP. In my work on Zhe American Race,* I offered the following classification of this group: TaAcANA LINGUISTIC STOCK. Araonas, Lsutamas, Pukapakaris, Tumupasas, Atenes, Lecos, Sapiboconas, Tuyumiris. . Cavinas, Maracanis, Tacanas, Equaris, Maropas, Toromonas, From this list we must strike out the Azenes or Atenianos and Lecos, as I shall show that these spoke a tongue nowise akin to the * The ilitiin Race: A Linguistic Classification and Ethnographic Description of the Native Tribes of North and South America. By Daniel G. Brinton. 1 vol., 8yo, pp. 392 (N. D. C. Hodges, New York, 1891). Brinton.) 46 (Feb. 5, Tacana, in spite of some assertions to the contrary by Spanish writers. Other tribes which should probably be added to this list, as they are located on old maps within Tacana territory and have Tacana names, are: Carangues, on left bank of Rio Tarabeni. Chumanos, north of Lake Roguaguado. Poromonas, on the lower Rio Beni (or Poro). Samachuanes, on Rio Coroico. Uchupiamonas, ou the Rio Uchupiamona. Yubamonas, on the Rio Yuba. The termination monas to several of these names is the Spanish plural form of the Tac. manu, river, the tribes being named from the streams along which they lived. In addition to the above I have found that the tribe known as ‘*Guarizas’’ is to be included among the Tacanas. A series of texts in their language, comprising the Pater, the Ave and the Credo, was found among the papers of Cardinal Mezzofanti, and has been published by Prof. Emilio Teza in his Sage? tneditt di Lingue Americane (Pisa, 1868). The leatned editor states that all his endeavors to identify this language, or to ascertain the location or affinities of the tribe, had been fruitless. A comparison of the Guariza Pater with that in the Tacana, both of which I give on < later page, will prove the very close relationship of the two tribes. D’Orbigny asserts that ‘‘ Tacana’’ is not the name of a tribe, but the name of the language. It is called by Spanish writers of the last century the ‘* Maracani,’’* which is apparently not the same as the Macarani of the mission of Santiago among the Chiquitos. The earliest missionary explorer of the Rio Beni, Fray Francisco de Rosario, wrote a report in 1677, in which he mentions a number of tribes, now extinct, among them the Hucumanos and the Torococyes, whose names indicate them to have belonged to the Tacana stock.t LOCATION AND NUMBER. The general location of the Tacana group may be described as along the eastern slope of the Cordillera, where it descends to the *See D'Orbigny, 1’ Homme Américain, Vol. i, p. 8745 Deserip. de las Misiones det Alto Peru (1771). t His report was printed in full in Melendez, Tesoro Verdadera de las Indias, Tomo ili, 1892.] 47 [Brinton. valley of the river Beni (otherwise called the Rio Poro, the Rio Pilcopata and the Rio Madre de Dios), and in the valley of the latter on both banks, between South lat. 12° and 15°. At present the Tacana dialect proper is spoken in the towns of Tumupasa and Isiamas; the Araona by the Araonas, who dwell on the banks of the Beni and on those of its western tributaries, known as the Manuripi, Tahuamanu and Uaicomanu ; the Cavinefio is confined to the mission of Cavinas; the Maropa to the Maropes, in and near the Pueblo de los Reyes, on the right bank of the Beni, about 12° 30’ S. lat., while the Sapis or Sapiboconas appear to have been the most eastern branch of the stock, as they were attached to the mission of the Moxos inthe province of that name on the Rio . _ Mamore. In 1831 the total number of persons speaking the dialects of this stock was about 6000 (D’Orbigny). The majority of these are nominally Christians and have fixed habitations; but the Toro- monas, who dwell between the rivers Madidi and Beni, in 12°—13° South lat., are still uncivilized and heathens; so, also, are the Araonas, who are stated to be cannibals and idol worshipers. Their idols are geometrically shaped pieces of polished wood and stone. Their chief deity is ‘‘ Baba Buada,’’ whom they identify with the wind, vutana, and whose home is in the air. He is said to live towards the south and to be the creator of heaven and earth. The general term for divinity is eduéz?, and there is a sta edutzit, god of maize; an agave edutzi, god of health, etc. Each edués? has his own yanacona, or priest, to superintend the proper rites,* Loan Worps. The Tacana-speaking tribes have for generations adjoined on the west the once powerful and cultivated Aymaras, and on the north the populous herds of the Panos. The consequences on their tongue have been quite marked. A number of words have been borrowed from both sources; but they are not so frequent nor of such a character as to authorize the supposition of an original unity with either of the stocks named. I give a list of some of these: IDENTITIES IN AYMARA AND TACANA. AYMARA, TACANA. Arm, ampara, embai, M. Body, amaya, eam, M. *E. Heath in Kansas City Review, April, 1888; Col. Labré in Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc., 1889 ; Nic. Armentia, Explor. del Madre de Dios. 48 [Feb. 6, Brinton.] AYMARA. TACANA. Boat, huampu, cuambd, M. Cold, tv’ aarata, bruada, T. Earth (patria), marca, mechi, S. Green, chojna, china, T. Heaven, alakhpacha, evacua pacha, T. House, uta, etait, M. Island, huatta, eda-pupu, T. Lightning, llipikh-lliptkh, jili-jili, M. Man, chacha, dreja, M. Meat (flesh, body), aycha, aicha, T. Morning (Span. mafiana), maylla, maita, M. Night, aruma, apume, M. Old, achachi, est, M. Star, huara, erujai, T. IDENTITIES IN PANO AND TACANA. PANO. ~ MTACANA, Blood, ami, amt. Child, abaque, ebacua. Flesh, nami, yam. Hill, matsy, emata. Moon, bari, bare. Small, hata, bata. Son, omibaque, qui embaque. Sun, uirtt (star), trett. Tongue, ana, eana, Uncle, cucu, cucu, juju. Water, jena, _ ena. The only two numerals which can be claimed for the Tacana evidently also belong to the Pano: TACANA. PANO, One, pea, atchou-pé, pa-jt. Two, beta, ta-be, ru-bi. The important words for maize, salt, tobacco and banana seem to be borrowed from other tongues: Maize, shije or dije.—Probably the Pano schequi, which in turn is un- doubtedly the Kechua cherchi, roasted maize. The grain evidently became known to the Panos as an article of food in this prepared form. Salt, banu.—Apparently a variation of the Arawak pamu, Tobacco, umasa or umarsi.—Doubtless, from the Tupi put-wma, Maypure tema. / PS ae PEs Bees 3 a ve 1892.] 49 [Brinton. Banana, bondare and naja.—The former is the Pano banara, panala, and naja is the same word with the first syllable omitted ; banara is but a corruption of banana, an Arawak word. The color names appear to me irreducible, except that for “« green,’’ which has been borrowed from the Aymara. White, pasand. Black, devena. Blue, danane. Red, derena. Yellow, tidnia. A few similarities to the Mosetefio, a language spoken by a . neighboring stock, may be noted : TACANA. MOSETENO, Fish, see, sen. Foot, euatsi, yu. God, edutzi, dogit. Water (river), ena, ogni. Woman, epuna, phen. But these have little significance. | PHONETICS. All the Tacanan dialects are facile and agreeable in their sounds, differing in this respect from the Aymara and Kechua, both of which are harsh to the European ear and almost unpronounceable to a foreigner. The Araona has no sound which is not capable of cor- rect expression by the Spanish alphabet; but the Tacana has the strong English ¢% (as in ¢hi's); a soft, scarcely audible aspirate, and a sound intermediate between /, @ and r (heard in dudu, brother ; tata, father, etc.), while the soft Spanish ¢/ (as in Span. ce, cé) is absent. ‘The /is not heard in any native Tacana word. The statement quoted by D’Orbigny, from a MS. of one of the missionaries, to the effect that the Tacana is one of the most gut- tural and harshest of languages, is quite incorrect and could not have been intended to apply to any of the dialects of this group. PRONOUNS. The paradigms of the Tacana pronouns are as follows: ps ema. We, ecuana. Of me or mine, quiema. Of us, our, ecuanasa. For me, quiemapuji. For us, ecuana pujt. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xxx. 187. G. PRINTED MARCH 8, 1892. 50 Brinton.] [Feb. 5, To me, ema. To us, ecuana. With me, ema neje. With us, ecuana neje. Thou, miada. You, micuanda. Thine, miqueda. Your, micuanasa. For thee, migue pujt. For you, micuanapuji. To thee, mida. To you, micuana. With thee, mi neje. With you, micuananeje. He or she, tueda. That, ichu. Those, tueda cuana. Those, tchu cuana. His or her, tuseda. This one, jida. This, yhe. These ones, jida cuana, These, yhecuana. Who? aydent. VERBAL FOorRMs. Of all the dialects the Tacana is richest in verbal forms, and its various subdialects are less variable than its neighbors. Further, Armentia states that all the dialects have a dual number in both verbs and pronouns, but his work does not furnish the means of analyzing the character of this dual. As is well known to grammarians, there are several very different conceptions of duality in language. The notion of action in the verbal theme undergoes modification by suffixes, thus: ha, to make, to do. . e-hatani, I am doing (e—=ema=1). e-hametani, I am ordering it to be done. aque, imperative, do ye. atique, go thou and do. Of such suffixes, 7a expresses desire or to wish, as: puti-ja, I wish to go. dia-ja, I wish to eat. idija, I wish to drink. The suffix 7/, appended to a noun, signifies possession, as chipi/o- ji, one having money; but reduplicated and suffixed to a verb, it conveys the sense of past time, as; puti-jiji, he has already gone. dia jiji, he has already eaten. RS SE hi Rae Ra es Lh ee eee * 1892.] 51 [Brinton. The termination ¢ appears to be that of the reflexive verb : dama, to cover. ja damati, to cover oneself. The neuter is changed to the active signification by the suffix me : manu, to die. manuame, to kill. ja manuamejiji, he who has killed another. Many verbs are compounded by simple juxtaposition, as: babe, to know ; quisa, to tell ; whence : babequisa, to teach, ¢. ¢., to tell what one knows. The word dade, to know, is itself a derivative from 4a, to see, which also appears in such compounds as dada (from dia, to eat), to eat, seeing, 7. ¢., to test or try a food (frobar la comida); and batsuatique (tsuati— above), to look upward. LITERATURE AND TEXTs. The literature of the Tacanan dialects—if I may apply this term to such meagre material—is widely scattered and difficult of access. Ludewig, in his Literature of American Aboriginal Languages (p. 206), speaks of it as a dialect of the Yurucare, with which it has not the slightest affinity. The same author gives the Sapi- bocona as a dialect of the Kechua (p. 168), and the Maropa as related to the Yuracare. Of the Tacana proper I have made use of three published vocabularies: 1. That given by H. A. Weddell, Voyage dans le ‘Nord de la Bolivie (Paris, 1859). He gives forty words and six numerals, obtained from a party of Tacanas from Ixiamas and Tumupasa, whom he met at Guanay. 2. A vocabulary of one hundred and fifty-seven words and six numerals, by Dr. E. R. Heath, contributed by him to the Kansas City Review, April, 1883. 3. A vocabulary of forty-eight words and ten numerals, accompanied by grammatical observations by the Rev. Nicholas Armentia, published in his 2xploracion del Rio Madre de Dios (La Paz, 1889). The only printed text I have found is a small octavo of forty-one pages, with the following title: ** Catecismo | de la | Doctrina Christiana | en Idioma Tacana | Brinton.) 52 [Feb. 5, por un Misionero del Colejio de | Propaganda—fide de la | Paz de Ayacucho | 1859. | Imprenta de Vapor.—Calle de la Aduana, No. 36. The text is entirely in Tacana, without the corresponding Spanish, and embraces the Pater, Credo, Salve, Smaller Catechism, Explanation of the Doctrine, the Via Sacra, etc. I have been unable to discover the author. Further, Armentia gives also vocabularies of the Araona and Cavinefio dialects, and Dr. Heath supplies one of the Maropa. For the Sapibocona, I have relied on that printed by Hervas in his Vocabulario Poliglotio. Dr. Heath refers to the great similarity between the Maropa and Tacana dialects, and adds the remark: ‘‘The Maropas have many words that have significations widely different ; e¢7a means bone and also hair; d¢ya means a louse, a wasp.and urine.’’ Prob- ably there is a difference in accent or inflection, which is not apparent to the European ear, but which to the native indicates which sense is intended. The version of the Lord’s Prayer given below, as well as that of the Creed, are taken from the Cavectsmo en Idioma Tacana, above referred to. I have added an interlinear translation of the former, and also a translation of the latter, as there is evidently some slight change of the customary phraseology. Lorp’s PRAYER IN TACANA. Eeuanasa tata evacuapachasu, mi canichanapajiji papu mique edani, Our father heavenin, thou sacred come thy name, mique evacuapacha ecuanasa papu, mique enime eni papu ye canasu, thy heaven (to)us come, thy wish come earth on, evacuapachasu epuani nime viame. Amen Jesus. Pamapa zinesu ecuanasa heaven in come (like to?), Amen Jesus. Every day our equita tucheji jeave ecuanatiaque. Heuanasa jucha cuana chenudaque, body food to us. Our sins forgive, cuaja bata ecuaneda eichenubania ecuanasa manu cuana, ba ecuana even as we forgive dajajameji mi juchasu, inasiguaque pamapa madada cuanasu. Amen remove all evil us from. Jesus, Alongside of this I quote the same in the Guariza dialect, from Prof. Teza's work, already mentioned ; era 53 1892.] (Brinton. Lorp’s PRAYER IN GUARIZA. Echeza tata evacuepachazu anigi mi, ibbubatagigicapapuini mige evani, echebe pezu papu eyucaini mi reyno, agigicapapuini mige enime eubbazu evacuepachazu batanja. Eeama geabe chinezu tiage echeza jana pugi: echebe jucha gigicuana ichenubage echeza jucha cetahu, tuevata ecama echeza majaycuana eichenubbaza: ecama tucheme age veca par’ ajaja juchazu, chuteme jubua ichenume cuanazu ecama viapenege. It is evident that this is a version by a different hand into a closely allied dialect. CREED IN TACANA. I believe in the Father God, of all things in heaven and on earth the maker ; I believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, His only Son ; who was con- ceived by the grace of the Holy Spirit, and was born of a virgin; he suffered under the power of Pilate ; he was crucified ; he died; he went down tolimbo; fromamong the dead he arose on the third day; he went up to heaven ; there he is seated on the right hand of the Father almighty; whence he shall come to judge the living and the dead ; I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy Catholic church, the com- ~ munion of all the saints, the pardon of sins, and that our bodies shall rise again, and that life shall not end. Eama jei eania tata Dios pamapa aji, evacuapachasu ye eausu segua- meji; jei eania tata Jesucristo tusa evacua peada quita; bataji puida Espiritu Santasa gracia eje putzu; etsesa cuara Virgen cuinaida; iche- nuda cuana vidinaida Pilatosa emesu; tatajiji puida crususu; dapia manujiji puida, limbosu buteida ; manujiji cuana dujusu nettianaida quimicha zinesu ; soatida evacuapa- cha, mesa tata pamapa aji bai eni bene cani, da jenettia epueicha eideni cuana, manujiji cuana equi- saba puji; eama jei eania Espiritu Santosa, santa Yglesia catolicasu, santo cuanasa aysaida jacti cuanasa jaditati, jucha cuanasa perdon, ecua- nasa equita quita eydeyo pupebe mave eide cani. VoOCcABULARY—ENGLISH—TACANA AND DIALECTs. T.=Tacana (T. W.=Tacana of Weddell); M.— Maropa; 8.=Sapibo- cona ; A.—=Araona; C.= Cavinefio. Alive, eicle'ja, T.; escheveve, M. All, pamapa, T.; huana’, M. Always, daja-pincha, T. Arm, ebu’e, T.; embui, M. (probably from ema, hand). Arrow, pisa, T.; pizi, M. Ascend, to, tsuati, T. Orthography Spanish ; j—= Eng. /; h scarcely perceptible; z= Eng. th. Ashes, etimu, T., A.; etiquimuru, C. Aunt, nene, T., A., C. Bad, mada’da, T.; emasa’, M. (= ma-saida, not good). Bark (of tree), eviti, T.; embditi, M. Beard, queda, T.; ettesa’, M. Belly, etu, T.; ese’, M.; edde,T. (W.) Brinton.] Bird, dia, T.; du’ni, M. Black, devena, T.; sebe’mt, M. Blood, ami, T. and M. Blue, danane, T.; savame’, M. Body, equita, T., ©.; ea’mi, ecuicha, A. Bone, e’tro, T.; etra’, M. Bow, a, pisatri, T.; pizatrue, M. (see Arrow). Boy, canane, edeave, T.; dreja’ve, M. (see Man); toro, A.; ebacuapt, C. (see Child ; ve is the diminu- tive suffix). Breasts (= mammee), atru,T. and M. Brother (my elder), quema-onict, T.; be’trt, M. Brother (my younger), quema-cou’, T.; chintri, M. Brother, zau, uitzecua, A.; jau, usi, C. Canoe, cua/bua,T.; cuamba’, M., A.; cuaba, C. (Aymara). Charcoal, etide, T.; any A.; etirut- seve, OC. Chest, the, etredu, T.; echentru, M. (breast bone? see Bone). Child, ebacua, T. Cold, bruada, T.; vinna’ma, M. Come, to, pue, T.; apueya, M.; papu, T. Cry, to, tsia-tsia, T.; jeiaje, M. (imitative). Dance, to, tiri-tiri, T. and M. (imi- tative). Daughter, my (by father and mother), onibaquapuna, T.; qui- embaqua, M,; ebacuepuna, A., C. (see Child and Woman). Day, tri/ne, T. and M.; chine, S. Dead, manujiji, T. and M. Deer, ba’que, T.; batru'nu, M. Die, to, manu, T. Dog, vehi, T.; pacu, M. Drink, a, ayeidi, T.; igi, ©. Drink, to, édé, eicli,T.; jaischitri, M. M.; eidi, A; 54 [Feb. 5, Duck, a, se’e, T.; 2u’2t, M. Ear, edaja, T.; eshacue’na, M. Earth (land), medi, edua, T.; metri, M.; mechi, C.,S.; ewa, mezi, A. Eat, to, dta-dia, T.; chancha, M. Egg, e’ja, T. and M. Evening, trineti/a, T.; trinequa, M. (see Day). Eye, etradru/ndru, T.; etachundru, M.; etuachtru, 8. (see Sister, Elder and Hair ; apparently ‘‘sis- ter hairs,’ 7%. ¢., eyebrows, eye- lashes). Face, embu, T. and M. Father, my (by son), rema-tata, T.; qui-tata, M.; tata, or checua, S.C. Father, my (by daughter), rema- tata, T.; qut-tata, M. Far, uqueda, T.; huazumi, M. Feathers, ena; enugua, M. (com- pare Hair). Fingers, ema, T.; emechuja, M, (=head of hand). Fire, qua/ti, T.; cwa’ti, M., S., A.; etiqui, C.; otro, T. (W.) (compare Ashes and Wood). ; Fish, sist, M.; see, T.; ja, A. Flesb (see Meat, Body). ’ Fly, a, vere-vere, T.; bebi, M. (imi- tative). Food, jana, T., A.; etduca, OC, Foot, eguatri,T.; evatri, M.; ebbachi, S.; ewatst, A.C. Forehead, emali, T.; emma’ta, M. and 8. Forest, ejitje, T.; hayjintru, M. Friend, apare’je, T.; epere’je, M. Girl, putu, epunave, T.; punave, M.; ebazacua, A.; ebacuna, C. (ve= diminutive ; see Child, Daughter and Woman). Give, to, tia, T.; tia/na, M. Go, to, pu’ti, T. and M.; pu, A; cua, C, God, eruchi, 8.; educhi, ©, edutet, T., A.; 1892.] Good, saida, saipiave,T.; jundra, M. Grass, nutxa, T.; ea/ji, M. Great, aida, T.; haymt, M. Green, china, T.; schepiéi, M. Hair, echu-ena, T.; etra, M.; echau, S. (see Head, Feather, Wing). Hand, e/ma, T.; eme, M., 8., A.; eme-tucu, C. He (pron. ), tu-eda, T.; tu-ve, M. Head, echu, T.; echuja, M. and §.; echua, A.; tyuca, O. Heart, masu'mo, T.; masumu', M.; emofobo, A.; eniju, C. Heaven, evacuepana, 8.; evacua- pacha, T.; buepo, T. (W.). Here, upi'/ca, T.; tezu’, M. Hill, a (or mountain), emata, T.; emina, M. (probably from ema, extremity, point, hand). Hot, sina/da, T.; zintri-trime, M. House, ejtej,T.; eta, M., A.; etare,C. Husband, my, qguemayavi, T.; qui- ave, M. I (pron.), ema (active form, ea/ma), T.; e/me, M. Ice, ea'na, T. Infant, canane-chidi, T. (see Boy); ejanana, M. Iron, peama’, M. Island, edapu’pu, T.; ischa/pupu, M. Jar (Sp. olla), jutu, T., A.; emari- caca, C, Kettle, co/to, T. Kill, to, manuame, emanuani, T.; mane’me, M. Knife, cwchilo, M. (Spanish). Know, to, babe, T. Lake, dai, T. and M.; eubdbihure, S. (see Water). Laugh, to, ydeba’ti, T.; yaschi-bati, M Leaf, a, equena’, M. Learn, babe-isua, T. Leg, etida/da, T.; eta’, M.; etta, ?. CW.) Lie, to, bidwmimi, T.; ea’na, M. 55 {Brinton. Lightning, tseru-tseru, T.; jili-jili, M.; dlapa, 8. Love, to, esbune’ba, nimbu, M. Maize, dije, T.; shije, M.; zia, A. Make, to (Sp. hacer), ha, T. Man, de’ja, T., C.; dreja, M.; reanct, 8.; deja, ecwicha, A. Many, yucua'da, T.; dru'je, M. Meat, aicha, T.; ea'mt, M.; yami, A.; erami, C. Money, chipilo, T. Moon, ba/di, T., A., C.; lantri’, M.; bari, 8. Morning, matachu, T.; mai/ta, M. Mother, my (by son or daughter), quema-qua'ra, T.; quicua, M.; cua, 8.; uaua-di, A.; cuaha’, C. Mouth, aquatri, T.; equa/tra, M.; ebbo, T. (W.). Musquito, sani or di, T.; dri, M. My, quema, T.; qui, M. Name, ebani, T.; embant, M. Nails, ema-tichi, T.; eme tichi, M. (see Hand). Near, narise, T.; drema’, M. Neck, eti’pi, T. and M. and 8. Never, niquietsunu. Night, liza, T.; apume’, M. No, ma/ve, T. and M. Nose, evi-eni, T.; evi, M. and 8. Old, ecti, T.; e’sz, M. Our, ecuanasa, T. People, endrani, T.; driani qua/na, M. Plantain (Sp. platano), nasa, T.; naja, A.; bondare, C. Prairie, nutsa/ni, T. Rain, nai, T. and M. Rattlesnake, bacua dada, T.; sum bacua, M. (see Snake). Red, derena, T.; utrume, M. River, ena, T.; manu, A.; exeperea- rida, O. (ena= water). Rivulet, enabague, T. water). T.; imbu- (= child. Brinton.] 56 : [Feb. 5, Road, edidi, T.; edist, A.; edigi, C. Think, to, piba, T., A.; adeba, C. Run, to, judu'du,T.; vandrundu, M. This, yhe, T.; tye, M. Salt, banu, T.; bano, M. Thorn, aquida, T.; acuwisa, A.; Say, to, guisa, T. acuija, C. See, to, ba, T.; jam-bati, M. Thou, mi-cla, T.; mi-ve, M. Silver, depe, T.; sepe, A. Thumb, ema-chuai, T.; eme-chuja, Sing, to, satsu, T.; zatru, M. M. (see Hand, Fingers, Head). Sister, zatna, A.; tatna, T.; nasi, Thunder, etiria’ni, T.; ti/ri, M. jane, C. Tobacco, wmar'si, T.; wmaza, M. Sister, my elder, guema-du'du, T.; To-day, jeave, T. and M. drundru, M. To-morrow, maita-piicha, T.; ban- Sister, my younger, guematona, T.; tra, M. (see Yesterday). la'na, M. (in M, eldest brother Toes, equatri-ritrana, T.; evatri- says cant to his youngest sister). ticht, M. (see Foot and Nails). Sit, to, aniu’tz, T.; animbotia, M. Tongue, eana, T., M. and 8. Skin, ebbai, T. (W.). Tortoise, dati, T.; dra’ti, M. Sky, bueyu'pa, T.; embaquapacha', - Town, eju'de,T.; ejuntre’, M.; erere, M. A.; epu, C. (see House). Sleep, to, tabi, T. and M. Tree, a/qui, T. and M.; acwi, A., C. Small, chicli, T.; batavi’chi, M. Uncle, juju, T., A.; cucu, C. (acele- Snake, bacua, T. and M. brated word, probably of Carib Son, my (by father or mother), origin, on which Martius founded quema-embami, T.; qui-embaqua, his classification of the ‘‘Guck’”’ M.; ena, A.; ebacua, T. C. (see nations). Child, Daughter). Walk, to, arease’, T.; aze, M. Soul, enidu, T.; ejiay, A.; yata- Warrior, jamaji tipuji (a quarrel- ecuana, C. some person), M. Speak, to, mimi, T. and M. Water, eavi, T.; yu/vi, M.; ewvi, S., Squash, a, je/nu, T.; je’mi, M. A.; ena, C.; ya'ni, T. (W.). Stand, to, enutsinejenetsi, T.; ne’ti, We, ecuana (dual form, etsea) T.; M. ecama', M. Star, erw/jai or etubay, T.; buana/vi, When, quietsunu, T. M.; etujay, A.; purari, C. White, pasana, T.; paza’me, M, Steal, to, tsi, T.; tri, M. Who, ayde’ni, T.; hayse, M. Stone, tumu, T., C., A. and 8.; Wife, guema-equant,T.; quievane, M. tuma, M. Wind, de’ni, T. and M. (from this Strong, tuche'da, T.; tretremi, M. comes the name of the Rio Beni= Sun, ére’téi or ideti, T.; tsjeti, M.; Wind river). igeti, OC. Wing, enabay, T.; ennambai, M. Teach, to, babe-quisa, T. (see Feathers). Teeth, etre, T. and M.; éche’, T. Wish, to, (Span. querer), tsada, T. (W.) (compare Bone). Woman, epuna, a/no, T.; a/nu, M. That, ychu, T.; tchu, M. and 8,; epuna, C., A, There, chupia, dapiavi, T.; tehueu, Wood, ei/na, T.; a/qui (==tree), M.; il cuati-manu, A.; cuati, ©. (see They, ychu-cuana, T.; tuna've, M. Fire). wer 1992.] 57 Brinton. Work, to, mudumudu, T.; mundru, Yes, ehe, T.; ee, M. M. Yesterday, maita piticha, T.; maita, Ye or you, micuana,T.; mica/ve, M. M. (see To-morrow). Year, mara, 8. Young, edea-ve, T.; dreja-veve, M. Yellow, tidnia, T.; zahwami’, M. (= young man). NUMERALS. pea, peada, peara, T.; pembive, M.; pebi, 8.; equene, Cat. beta, T., M. and 8. quimicha, T.; camischa, M. (Aymara). pusi, T. and M. (Aymara). pichica, T. and M. (Aymara). sucuta, T. and M. (Aymara). siete, T. (Spanish). ocho (Spanish). nueve (Spanish). 10, tunca, M. (Aymara); peara tunca, T. 20, beta tunca, M. (Aymara). ~ ~~ - - ~~ - CHRATAwWDH ~ TACANA—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Aicha, meat, flesh. Bueyupa, sky. Aida, great. Dudu, sister (elder). Ami, blood. Canane, a boy. _ Aniuti, to sit. A’no, woman, wife. Apareje, friend. Aquatri, mouth. ~ Aqui, tree. Aquida, thorn. Arease, to walk. Atru, mamme. Aydeni, who. Ba, to see. Babe, to know. Babe-quisa, to teach. Babe-tsua, to learn. Bacua, snake. Bacua-dada, rattlesuake. Badi, moon. Bai, lake. Banu, salt. Baque, a deer. Beni, wind. Beta, two. Bruada, cold. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 187. H. PRINTED MARCH 8, 1892. Cani, sister (by brother). Chiclt, small. China, green. Chipilo, money. Chupia, there. Cosi, younger brother. Coto, kettle. Juabua, canoe. Cuati, fire. Daja-piucha, always. Danane, blue. Dapiave, there. Dati, tortoise. Deja, man. Depe, silver. Derena, red. Devena, black. Dia, bird. Dia-dia, to eat. Dije, maize. Hana, tongue. Ea'na, ice. Brinton.] Eavi, water. Ebant, name. Ebbai, skin. Ebue, arm. Echu, head. Echuena, hair. Ecli, old. Ecuana, we. Eeuanasa, our. Edeave, young. — Edidi, road, path. Edaja, the ear. Edapupu, island. Edeave, a boy. Edua, earth, land. Ehe, yes. Eicleja, alive. Ei'na, wood. Eina, feathers. Eja, an egg. Ejije, forest. Ejtej, house. Ejude, town. Ema, or eama, I. E'ma, hand, fingers. E'ma-chuai, thumb. Emali, forehead. Emata, hill. E’ma-tichi, nails. Embami, son. Embu, the face. Ena, river. Enabay, wing. Enidu, soul. Epuna, woman, wife Equani, wife. Equatri, foot. Equatri-ritrana, toes. Equita, body. Eruchi, goa. Erujai, star. Eshuneba, to love. Etidada, the leg. Etide, charcoal. Etimu, ashes. Bilpi, neck. 58 Etiriani, thunder. Etra driendru, the eye. Etre, tooth. Etredu, the chest. Etro, bone. Htu, belly. Etubay, star. Evacuepacha, heaven. Fovient, nose. Eviti, bark of a tree. Ha, to do, to make. Idi, to drink. Tretti, sun. Jana, food. Jeave, to-day. Jenu, squash. Judu'du, to run. Juju, uncle. Jutu, jar. Liza, night. Madada, bad. terday. Manu, to die. Manuame, to kill. Manujiji, dead. Masumo, heart. Matachu, morning. Mave, no. Medi, earth, land. Micla, thou. Micuana, you. Mimi, to speak. Mudu mudu, to work. Nai, rain. Narise, near. Nasa, plantain. Nene, aunt. Niquietsuna, never. Nutsa, grass. Nutsani, prairie. Onibaquapuna, daughter. Onici, elder brother. Pamapa, all. Pea, one, Peama, iron. [Feb. . _ Macta puicha, to-morrow or yes- 1892.] Piba, to think. Pichica, five. Pisa, arrow. Pisatri, a bow. Pue, to come. Tusi, four. Puti, to go. Putu, girl. Quara, mother. Queda, beard. Quema, my. Quietsunu, when. — Quimicha, three. ' Quisa, to say, to tell. Saipiave, good. Sani, musquito. Satsu, to sing. Se’e, a duck. Sinada, hot. Sisi, fish. Sucuta, six. Tabi, to sleep. Tata, father. Tia, to give. Tidnia, yellow. Tiri-tiri, to dance. 59 (Brinton. Tona, sister (younger). Trine, day. Trinetia, evening. Tsada, to wish. Tseru-tseru, lightning. Tsi, to steal. Tsia-tsia, to cry. Tsuati, to ascend. Tucheda, strong. Tu-eda, he. Tumu, astone or rock. Uchi,a dog. | Uitzecua, brother. Umarsi, tobacco. Upica, here. Uqueda, far. Vere-vere, a fly. Yavi, husband, Yehu, that. Yehuewana, those, they. Ydedati, to laugh. Yhe, this. Yucuada, many. Zatna, sister. Zau, brother. Il. THE JIVARO LANGUAGE. The material which I have to present on this language is entirely from unpublished sources, and is the more valuable as, so far as I know, not even a vocabulary of this important idiom has ever been printed. The Jivaros (Givaros, Xivaros, Hibaros, Xeberos, etc.) are a numerous and powerful nation, mostly yet in a savage state, who dwell about the head waters of the rivers Paute, Morona, Santiago and other upper affluents of the Marafion, between 2° and 4° 30/ - South latitude, where they occupy the eastern slope of the Cordil- leras. I have described their general culture and history in my work on Zhe American Race, pp. 282-284. They are said to present the peculiarity of unusual lightness in color, and features of a decidedly Aryan type.* These traits have *“Aujour d’hui le type caucasique y domine,”’ says Father Joseph M. Magalli, in L’ Année Dominicaine, Paris, 1888. Brinton. ] 60 [Feb. 5, been usually explained by a supposed extensive infusion of Spanish blood when their ancestors captured the city of Logrofio in 1599 and carried off the white women as wives. More probably they share, with the Yurucares, Tacanas and other Andean nations, the peculiarity of a complexion several shades lighter than that of the Kechuas and Aymaras. They have been little influenced by European visitors. A recent authority states that there are scarcely a hundred and fifty Christian families in the whole of the immense province of Canolos, a part of which they inhabit, and the area of which is more than 8000 square leagues.* The sources which I have had at command are two MSS. in the British Museum, the name of the author not given, but from some remarks probably a German Jesuit, who was a missionary to the tribe towards the close of the last century. The titles are: ‘* Vocabulario en la Lengua Castellana, la del Ynga, y Xebera."’ Small 8vo, fol. 35. The vocabulary embraces about 1300 words, and is apparently complete. “‘Gramatica de la Lengua Xebera.’’ Same size. This MS. is imperfect, leaves being lacking both at the beginning and the end. From these MSS. I have prepared the following sketch of this tongue. PHONETICS. The sounds of the language are described as difficult to a European and fluctuating in character. The indistinct and alter- nating nature of certain phonetic elements appears in the Jivaro as in so many American tongues. In vowel sounds, the @ is often confounded with the z, the e with the 7, and the e with the @, which is like the German 6. The com- plex vowel sound represented by 6, as in pdung, fire, is especially difficult for a foreigner. The vowels a and a, when followed by ¢, are often elided. The consonants @, /, rand # are frequently alternated (that is, the one sound may be used at will for the other), or an indistinct sound is uttered, which may approach any one of them. . The z is * So saya Father Magalll, above quoted, but the knowledge of this writer falls far short of what ts requisite when he adds of the Jivaros and Japaros, “Ils parlent tous la méme langue, le Quichua ”’ (!). 1892.] 61 [Brinton. frequently omitted or uttered so slightly as to be scarcely audible. In the syllables guec and gued the final consonants are rarely clear, and both often have the sound g’”. In the vocabulary the 6 and sch should be pronounced as in German. Nouns. The relations of nouns are indicated by suffixes, ¢.g. : Tana, the forest. Tananquec, to the forest, or, in the forest. Tanancla, from the forest. Some words indicate the genitive relation by the termination gui. Nouns may be formed from verbals by the suffix m7 or 47, as timinlec, 1 die; timipi, the dead person, the corpse; also by the suffix asu, as dacotalec, | am ashamed ; dacofasu, one who is ashamed. ‘The infix cuda has the same effect. The instrumental sense is conveyed by the termination ¢, which is the abbreviation of guec or guecla. Seotic, knife. Seotic quec, with a knife. ‘* With,”’ in the sense of accompaniment, is expressed by /ec, as: Sadasulec, with a married man. Paparulec, with my father. Direction from is indicated by the termination guec/a; ‘‘ for’’ or ‘‘ instead of’’ by ma/eg, as: Natquimaleg, for or in place of another. PRONOUNS. The personal pronouns are: I, coa, gia. We, cuda, queiimoa, mapoa. Thou, guenma. You, quenima’ma, He or she, nana, They, nauba, nanalosa, nanadap’r- losa. This one, asu. Those, asudap’rlosa. The possessives are : Mine, quaqui, ru, ca. Our, cudaqgui, mapoa, Thine, guenmagui, palin, ma. Your, guenmamaqut, palenma. His, nanagui. Their, nanaqui. Brinton.) | 62 [Feb. 5, The second forms above given are suffixes or infixes, as: Sudaru, my husband. Sudapalin, thy husband. Loantacasu, my desire. Loantamasu, thy desire. Loantasu, his desire. As usual in American languages, there is no relative pronoun, its place being supplied by participial constructions. NUMBER AND GENDER. Names of inanimate objects usually undergo no change in the plural. For persons the plural is formed by adding the suffix /osa or zanlosa. In possessives the plural suffix is often za, as: Hucha, a sin. Huchaneng, his sin. Huchanengna, his sins. Saden, his wife. Sadena, his wives. f In verbals and verbs the plural termination may be dc, as: Huchapidoc, sinnings. Anulao, leave me. Anulaodéc, leave us. Infixes may be employed in place of these suffixes, especially in nouns derived from adjectives and participles. The most usual of these is a‘, as: Nambilec, I live. Nambiasu, he who lives, the living man. Nambia'casu, those who live, the living. The syllable ma, used either as infix or suffix, also conveys the plural sense, as: Palen, thine. Palenma, your. Feminines are distinguished by the suffix /v or Zu, as vila, boy; vilalu, girl; dus, man; /us/u, woman, Also apparently by a change of another vowel to the w, as we find, sadalec, married man ; sudalec, married woman. 1892, | 63 [Brinton. NUMERALS. The ancient cardinal and ordinal numbers of the Jivaros were as follows : 1; ala. 2, catu. 8, cala. 4, encatu. 5, alacotegladu (ala, one ; dtegla, hand; du, termination). 6, intimutu (the thumb, of the second hand). yf tannituna (the index finger, of the second hand). 8, tannituna cabiasu (=the finger next the index). 9, bitin dtegla cabiasu. 10, catogladu (—=two hands). This cumbrous plan has long been superseded by the adoption from the Kechua of the names of numbers above five, so that the present numeration is: x; ala. 5, alacotegladu. 9, iskon. 2, catu. 6, sokta. 10, chunka. 8, cala. t, ganchis. 100, pazat. 4, encatu, 8, pusac. PARTICLES. A marked feature of this tongue, which it shares with so many others on the American Continent, is the abounding use of particles to modify the meaning of roots and themes. Whether these are to be regarded as themselves the remnants of worn-down themes, or as primitive phonetic elements, is a yet unsettled question, though for myself I incline to the latter opinion. The MS. Iam quoting gives a long list of such significant particles, the most important of which are as follows : a or ha indicates causative action on another ; as wranlec, I eat ; awranlec, I cause another to eat. apa or pa denotes present action, as nambilec, I live ; nambiapalec, I am now living. ata or anda is a suffix denoting an interrogation. cun, as an infix, denotes action about to take place. ilala, as an infix, signifies that the action is of a permanent character. imbo, as an infix, conveys a negative sense, and is often employed with the regular negative, cola. Brinton.] 64 [Feb. 5, itu, inserted before the termination of verbs, indicates that the action is done for another. la, infixed, signifies that the action is for this one time only. misan, infixed, conveys the sense that the action is shared by all present. na@, as a suffix, indicates habit, as tntulina, he who is habitually in a bad temper. nunda, infixed in the present tense, denotes that the action takes slabs at some other time; as notonundalec, I do it (am accustomed to do it, but am not doing it now). pe or mba, an affirmatory suffix. qué, as an infix, denotes that the action takes Aras where the speaker is at the time. ti is a frequent euphonic suffix, which does not talter the meaning. van, as suffix or infix, denotes Lares aes-) as huchavanlosa, those who have sins. vanan, like itu, signifies action for another; as muchavananamasu, thou who asks for us. ya or nara, as a prefix, intimates a wish or desire; as palec, I see ; yapalee, I wish to see. yn, as a prefix, denotes reciprocal or mutual action ; as yainmali, they desire to take each other (in marriage). VERBS. The verbs have but two tenses, the present and the future. Occasionally the adverb e/a, now, is prefixed to define the present, and nuca, pl. naupa, to denote a past time. The formation of the future is frequently irregular, but the following examples will show its usual forms. It alone appears to present a dual number. PRESENT. FUTURE. FUTURE. FUTURE. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. I do, notolec, notetic, notoa, notoaua. I take, malee, matic, mad, mauua, I love, tandciilec, tandefietic, tandena, tandenaua, I speak, laonlee, laontic, laona, laonaua, I die, timinlec, timintic, timiantala, timiantalua. I pray, malealee, maleatic, maleaa, maleaua, The imperative is formed by the termination gued, often abbre- viated to g’r; as tecalec, L run; fecagued, run thou. Other termi- nations of an imperative character are fan, aner, dicaa and ma. The substantive verb is not found in the language, its place being supplied by terminations, especially the pronouns cu or sucu, etc., as Pedrocu, 1 am Pedro; Pedroguenma, thou art Pedro; moim- 1892.] 65 (Brinton. bosucu, 1am bad. Ina similar sense the verb molec or nilec, I do thus, I am thus, is often heard. There is no trace of a true passive voice, its place being supplied by the sense of the verb or by particles. At the conclusion of his MS. the author inserts two versions of the Lord’s Prayer—the one ‘‘in the Xebera language, as it was spoken in the earliest times of the mission,’’ the translation being that of Father Lucas de la Cueva (about 1655); the second in the language of the period of the writer, which I suppose to have been about one hundred and fifty years later. Of the second or later of these I have ventured an interlinear translation, while the former I insert without a rendering. Lorp’s PRAYER IN JIVARO—LATER VERSION. Papa mapoa, mosninanloguec napala ; linlinpalin nomisansu muchas ; Father our, heaven in art thou; name thy holy become; quenmaquinlosamasu cudaquee unadiai ; loantamasu nomisansu notot thy kingdom us to come; __ desire thy holy be maponsu mosninanloquec, nanaposu pilaasu lupaquec unda; uglilosa as heaven in, earth in; daily _ tandamapoa epala ugli encaodec ; cudaqui huchabidoe anuladoc, maponsu bread our now to-day give; our sins forgive, as quenmoa unda alapila dape’dlosaqui huchanengna anulalidéc; anerata we others their sins forgive ; quenmoa dentatutan, quenmoa cola Dios ayuaimbocaquec ; nanamengtu our our us moimbosuduegla atiegodac. evil from deliver. Lorp’s PRAYER IN JIVARO—EARLIER VERSION. Papa mapoa, mosenquec napalac linlinpalin ruchapalin ; quenma quilo. samasu cudaquec undiat. Loantacasu notetiuma mapolina mosninanloquec tnosupila asumincenloquec unda. Uglilosa tanda epala ugli encaoddc nulaodée cutaqui hudabidoc ; dengquina cuda anulalidoe aubaqui hucha nengna ; anerata apolata muchaquec amengdana ; moimbocasuquegla atiego. ENGLISH-JIVARO VOCABULARY. Above, mosengtiec. Ask, to, mucha. Ankle, tula. Bad, modimbosu, aperosu. Arm, da’mpa. Beard, amucuiola noteri, _ Arrow, na/mu. Belly, du’, metpi, oquiulec. _ Ashamed, to be, dacotalec. Below, vilenquec. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C, XXX. 137. I. PRINTED MARCH 16, 1892. Brinton.] Bird, tlans’r, tiperllu. Black, catli, cadladasu. Blind, dapina. Blood, uogladec. Blue, carcaso. Body, loqueglo, timipi. Bone, lansi. Born, to be, oclilec. Boy, vila. Branch, tatimec. Brave, nan'tapi. Breast, mudin, titot. Brother, yalli, yuyu!ue. Burn, to, téigedalec. Buy, to, ucolatolec. Calabash, pabi. Call, to, pdclolec. Child, babi. Clothing, capt. Come, to, undialec. Cold no/gtied, nog’r. Cotton, piterlu, botingpalo. Cover, to, patantulec. Dance, to, danzalec. Dawn, to, tigliti. Day, ’ugli. Dead, timiansu. Dear, llada, niinilu. Death, tominacaso. Deer, boro’. Dog, nini. Drink, a, huasu, tilec. Drink, to, upailacu. Drum, tundo. Dwell, to, nambilec. Ears, bitec. Earth, land, lu/pa. Eat, to, calec, uranlec. Egg, cado, Elbow, quég/da. Enemy, quegma. Enter, to, da‘lec. Eyes, ada, da’pila. Face, Uada (see Hyes). Feather, ambo'lu, Female, cuapr-. 66 Field, tig'n naua. Finish, to, tavantulec. Fire, poung. Fish, samer, lapisamed. Flesh, meat, canan. Flint, mosed. Flute, pi’leana. Flower, a, dancu. Food, ca/lo’. Foot, la’ndec. Forehead, teqieda’. Forest, tana. Girl, vilalu. Give, to, n/galec. Go, to, palec. Gold, wri. Good, mda, moali. Grandfather, papaiangu. Grandmother, ami’. Great, cunt, chi, halupi. Green, canin’rtia. Grow, to, zuzulec. Hair, hintic. Hammock, ta/la. Hand, dtegla. Have, to, nali, napali. Head, wma. Hear, to, la’oclec. Heart, cangan. Heaven, mosninanlo. Herb, puma, daubad. High, chi. Hill, mutopi. House, pi'dee. How? mapoli. Hot, ucasu. If, aa, n'tati. In, pa/lec. Indian, muda, cuapre, Iron, huana’. Kill, to, atiminiec. Knee, toto’pi. Knife, seotic. Know, to (things), nintitulec, (persons), loatulee. Lake, sangna. [Feb. 5, 1892.] Last, na’ pi. Learn, to, nintitanalec. Life, nambiacasu. Light, a, ugli, ocli. Light a fire, to, atengtulec. Lightning, yiimerlec. Lip, i/tec. Live, to, nambilec. Lizard, tuda, lili. Love, to, tan’ defilec. Maize, totrn, totrila. Man (vir), quenmopinen. Married man, sadalec. Married woman, sudalec. Medicine man, wizard, muda, Monkey, duda, isolo, lolo. Moon, ducat. More, hapia. Most, halupi, mointi. Mother, auaue, Mouth, lala’. Much, cupi, bapo. Name, linlin or lintin. Navel, mumu'la. Near, pa/ula. New, na‘lu. Night, dogpitli. No, cola. Nose, ne/tic. Now, epala. Old, tas’serpi. Old (man), tas’pitosu. Old (woman), tas‘serllu. Open, to, héguérlec. People, vapomuda. Pray, to, malealec. Raft, sudu’. Rain, to, dla”, olanii. Rainbow, podo’na. Red, pip’rasu, togua. Road, degaun. Root, dtecnin. Run, to, tecalec. Salt, lamuw’la. Say, to, tulec. See, to, lolec, loapalec. 67 Semen, miladoc. Send, to, piuglec. Shade, shadow, dachu/na. Sierra, obituna. Sin, a, hucha. Sing, to, peclalec. Silver, culiqued. Sister, chayauc, cadecuc. Sleep, ditilec. Small, hamecha. Smoke, cadlo or callo. Snake, daua,. Soul, vada, timipi. Spaniard, vadan. Speak, to, laonlec, lalalec. Star, tandola. Stick, na/la, unguna, Strong, nantapi. Sun, guo/qui. Sweet, yali. Take, to, malec. Tame, daiali. Tapir, pahuala. Teach, to, anintitulec. Throat, unqued. . Thumb, intimutu. To, giec. Tobacco, pinterlo, uhualec. Tongue, ninegla, Tooth, la’tec. Totem, clan, patun. Town, ninan’lo. Tree, nala, squig/uinti. Turtle, mado. Uncle, apreha, Valley, sa’ca”, Virgin, inilad. Wall, lupa, patenpi. Water, dée. White, dadapua’su. Who, deng. Wind, tanlo'a. Within, que'negla. Without, a/dipi. Woman, cuapr, sada, Wood, dedboe. Yellow, chapicaso. (Brinton. ius’ 68 [Feb. 5, III. THE CHOLONA LANGUAGE. Nothing has heretofore been printed of the language of the Cholonas. This tribe dwells on the left bank of the upper Hual- laga river, between 8°—9° 30’ South latitude. They were visited by Edward Pceppig in 1829, when he found them to number about 1000 souls, scattered in missions on the banks of the Monzon, Uchiza, Tocache and Pachiza, small streams flowing into the Huallaga. At the close of the last century they occupied a mission with the Hibitos or Xibitos, and together numbered about 5000.* Pceppig asserts that the Hibitos speak a wholly different tongue, but this is denied by my MS. authorities, who acknowledge only a dialectic difference ; but the German traveler is correct in his state- ment that some of the wild Chunchos of the Sierra belong to the same stock. My source of information in regard to this language is a MS. in the British Museum, entitled Arte de la Lengua Cholona. Its author was Fr. Pedro de la Mata, who wrote it in Truxillo in 1748, from which original the MS. in question is a copy made by Fr. Geronimo Clota, in San Buenaventura del Valle, in 1772. Itis a small octavo of 132 folios and is complete. Fathers José de Araujo and Francisco Gutierrez wrote also Artes of these dialects, but I have not discovered their manuscripts. There is also.a MS. Arte de la Lengua Cholona, apparently anonymous, mentioned by Ludewig, Lit. of Amer. Aborig. Langs., p. 162. The Cholona is a language extending over a small area, but it seems connected with no other, forming an independent stock. The only analogies worth mentioning which I have noted point towards dialects of the Arawak stock. For instance; Sun, muzac. This seems=kamu saache, ‘‘the shining sun,” of the Moxos. Moon, pel; allowing for r=, this is close to the puert of the Jucuna dialect. Eye, nache ; reminds one of the nuchii of the Canamirim ; the nacuque of the Uirina, ete, Tooth, alé ; again allowing r=, this is the ari of the Goajiro. Black, galuch or chaluch ; ghulek in Araicu. White, chech ; ghalik in Araicu. *B8ee my American Race, p, 288, 1892.] 69 [Brinton. | / Whether these analogies are sufficient to classify it with the Nu- Arawak groups of Von den Steinen is doubtful. The differences in the personal pronouns especially seem to isolate it from the dialects of that stem. PHONETICS. The letters 4, d, rand f are lacking in the Cholona alphabet. The soft ch (as in ‘‘ choose’’) alternates with the soft #2 ; the latter is represented in the Spanish alphabet by z, so that in the Arte, z and ch are interchangeable. Initial ¢ is hard before all vowels. The vowel represented by oa is stated to be between og and w, and is probably the neutral vowel (as win ‘‘but’’). The initial 7 seems to represent a slight aspiration, as zayw or hayu, man. The elements # and fig appear to be nasals. The accent always falls on the last syllable, except in some verbal forms, where it is found on the penult. Poeppig says that the sound of the spoken tongue is disagreeable to the European ear. \ Nouns. The relations of the nominal theme are indicated by suffixes, which may be arranged to appear like a declension, though not really such. Nom.—iayu or iayutup, the man. Gen.—iayuilou, of the man. Dat.—iayuhe or iayuge, to the man. Acc.—iayute or iayutu, the man. Voc.—iayuey or tayupey (fem.), O man. Abl.—iayute or tep, pat, nic, with or by the man. The plural is formed by the insertion of the particle /vé, before the case ending. nunlol, the men. nunlolloula, of the men. nunlolge, to the men. nuntolte, the men (accus.). nunloltep, with or by the men. The case endings are used only when required to render the meaning clear, as /uantup Pedro tlamt, Juan killed Pedro, where the accusative termination is omitted, that of the nominative suffi- ciently indicating the relation. Certain particles also give a plural Brinton. ] 70 [Feb. 5, sense, in which case /o/ is omitted. These are mec, all; jpullem, along with; comec, incomec and pemec, signifying quantity, and manmih, aS many as. Whenever the plural is indicated by the form of the attached pronoun, other plural signs may be omitted. There is no grammatical distinction of gender in nouns, differ- ence of sex being indicated by the terms mum, male; ¢/a, female, which may be either prefixed or suffixed, as: Man, nuniayu or tayunun.. Woman, tlatayu or iayuila. Boy, nunpullup. Girl, ilapullup. A neuter or epicene gender can be denoted by a suffixed 4, as nund, a person. Various suffixes are added to nouns to modify their meaning, as: / nic, signifying excess or abundance. zu, signifying absence or negation. camayoc, indicating knowledge of a subject or practice in it. This word is borrowed from the Kechua. PRONOUNS. The pronouns possess the prominence in this tongue which they so frequently show in American languages. All parts of speech can be grammatically inflected by their agency, and they generally suffice to indicate the plural without the insertion of the plural sign, dod. The primitive pronouns are: I, oc. We, quija. Thou, mi. You, minaja, He, sa. They, chija. The separable or independent possessives are formed by adding to the primitives the particle a/ou, with slight euphonic changes: Mine, ocalou. Ours, quihaguilou. Thine, mimilou. Yours, mimilouha, His, sailou. Theirs, chihaloula. The inseparable possessives are those prefixed to form the con- jugation of verbs, and attached to certain classes of nouns, They are as follows : My, @-. Our, qui. Thy, m- (mase.), p- (fem.). Your, m#- (both genders), His (none). Their, chi-, 1892.] 71 [Brinton. In the transitions of verbs the pronouns are abbreviated and cer- tain other forms used, as: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Ist. a. 1st. q; © 2d. m (masc.), p (fem.). 2d. Mm. 8d. Y, ¢, v. 8d. pa, po, mo, la. In adjective nouns the former class are used with euphonic changes, as: pallou, good, a good thing. amallou, my good or advantage. mimatlou, thy good or advantage. quimaliou, our good or advantage. mimallouha, your good or advantage. “ chimallou, their good or advantage. amallowven, it is to my advantage. The possessives, which form inseparable prefixes to nouns, are united by means of various ellipses and euphonic changes. Ex- ample : Yuca, el. My yuea, anel, Our yuca, quenel. Thy yuca, menel. Your yuca, menelha. His yuca, nel. Their yuca, enel. NUMERALS. The numerals are employed with the addition of particles indi- cating the nature of the objects counted. The most usual of these particles appears to be ze/ or chil. The absolute forms, without these suffixes, are as follows: i, an. 20, ip-lec. Aue. tp. 30, ix-lec. 8, a8. 40, minip-lec. 4, minip. 50, quioc-lec. 5, quioc. 60, tpzoc-lec. 6, tpzoe. 70, quili-lec. ot. quilip. 80, pac-lec, 8, pac. 90, ocon-lec. 9, ocon. 100, apichac. 10, alec. "These offer little resemblance to any other tongue, though the words for 8 and g remind one of the Chinchasuyu faz and Zskon. Brinton.] 72 [Feb. 5, VERBS. All active verbs are conjugated by transitions, formed by prefix- ing the pronoun of the person acting, and inserting immediately after it the pronoun of the person or thing acted upon. Example: amcollan, I thee love. mayian, thou me watchest. payian, he me watches. asac apuchihan, my food me they give. misac mapuchilan, thy food thee they give (masc. ). pisac papuchilan, thy food thee they give (fem.). sac hapuchilan, his food him they give. ysac apahapuchan, their food them I give. These are forms of the verb apuchan, to put before one, a derivative from amchan, to put, to place. Other examples : amcolecte amenan, I thee wish to love. macolecte mimenan, thou me wishest to love. Diosqui jigolecte quimenan, we wish to love God. Diostup iccolecte ymenan, God wishes to love us. The variation in the third person plural in the transitions appears to depend on the following conditions : mo is used when the transition is from the third person singular to the third person plural, as in the expression, ‘‘ he loves them.”’ po where the transition is from any of the other persons, singular or plural, to the third plural, as: apocollan, I love them. mipocollan, thou lovest them. quipocollan, we love them. mipocollan, you love them. chipocollan, they love them. pa where the verb implies another object besides the direct one, as: ' | ychac apahapuchan, I give them their food. ‘a is employed when the transition is from the third person plural to some other person than this, as: micollilatan, they love thee. ché is confined to transitions from third plurals to third plurals, as; chipocollan, they love them, 1892.] 73 | Brinton. SYNTAX. The construction of phrases will be seen from the following examples : Liman né yayu yeip pusimpat anantumila chectan. Sierra in men their houses straw with — covered are, «The houses of the Indians in the Sierra are covered with straw.’’ The noun 2/f and the verb anantuman have their pronouns in the third person plural, so the plural particle /o/ is omitted. The word chectan is an abbreviation of chi actan, the third person plural of the verb acfan, I stand, I am in a place. This verb is much used to signify a usual action with reference to a noun, as cot actan,1 bring water; 2if actan, I fix or arrange my house; ayllan actan, I make the bed, etc. Nanmac yayu izipte izoz —_ pachacotan. Each _ Indian his house in his idols keeps. ‘Every Indian keeps idols in his house.” ENGLISH-CHOLONA VOCABULARY. Armadillo, vax, tacla. Bad, evil, irivaj. Black, zaluch or chal. Boy, nun-pullup. Die, to, colhac. Drink, a, avitlam. Drink, to, axcan. Each, every, ranmac, Eyes, nache. Father, pa. Food, apuchan. Fox, sup. Girl, tla-pullup. Give, to, allan. Good, pallou. Green, Win. Hair, pe. Hands, nen. - Head, tech. House, zip, chip. Husband, muluch. Idols, izoz, ichoch. _ Lance or dart, ullue. Flesh, body, aycha (K.). PROC, AMER, PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 187. J. Louse, culla. Love, to, agollan. my love, agole. my lover, acoleuch. Maize, cach. Man (homo), ‘ayu or hayu. (male), nwn. (married), muluch. Moon, pel. Mother, pan. Mountain, sierra, liman. Nose, guexum. Not, nothing, ma. Place, to, amehan. Red, llaca. River, zocot. Road, path, pana. Rule, to, capac (Kechua). Sick, cama. Silver, checho. Son, pul. Soul, gall or chall. Spittle, ollé. Stars, henna. PRINTED MARCH 16, 1892. Brinton.] Straw, dry grass, pusim. Sun, muzac. Teeth, my, alé. Tongue, monzey. 74 Will, wish, men. my will, amen. I wish, amenan. Woman (female), dla. Town, putam. ilajayu. Water, cot. (married), zala. White, chech. Word, Ail. Wife, zala. Yucea, el. [Feb. 5, be THE LECA LANGUAGE. : The Lecos of the river Beni have been erroneously included in the Tacana stock by D’Orbigny and later writers (including myself). The only material I have anywhere found of their language is a short vocabulary given in Weddell’s Voyage dans le Nord de la Bolivia (Paris, 1859); but this is sufficient not only to’ take them entirely out of the Tacana group, but probably to place them in an inde- pendent position by themselves. As Weddell’s book is not to be found in many libraries, I shall translate and rearrange his list of words and precede it with some remarks on the tribe and its possible affinities. The Lecos are stated by Weddell to have resided originally on the Rio Tipuani and its affluent, the Rio Isuaya, whence they removed to the banks of the Rio Mapiri. On Arrowsmith’s map (1809) the ‘‘ Rio de Lecos’’ is located as a branch of the Rio Beni, between 13° and 14° South latitude, in a region assigned to the ‘‘ Samachuanes,’’ though I suspect these are the ‘‘ Muchanes”’ of other writers, and who, according to Weddell, are Mozotenos. The mission of Aten, in the valley of the Rio Beni, is distinctly stated by an official authority in the last century to have been peo- pled by the Lecos,* so we must include in them the ‘‘ Atenianos,’’ whom D’Orbigny classed with the Tacanas. A somewhat extended comparison has not furnished me with positive grounds for including the Lecos in any known linguistic group. Most of the analogies I have noted are with the Carib stock, and some of them are striking, but scarcely decisive. ** En Aten se hablan la Leca por ser este Pueblo de Indios Lecos.’’ Descripcion de las Misiones dal Allo Peru, 1771. 1892,] 75 (Brinton. Leca ANALOGIES. Sun, he/no ; compare bue/no (Opone, Carib stock). Moon, kurea ; comp. kede, siregu (Carib dialects). Water, dua; perhaps from Carib tuna. Arrow, uela; not far from Carib boule/oua. Arm, bepel ; close to Carib yapoule, japali. Tooth, bikiri ; nearly the same as the kxzier and yeri of Caribs. Heaven, kaut; almost identical with the Bakairi kraw and Carijona cahoue, both Carib dialects. Legs, boo/te ; comp. Carib debeti, beti. I think it is safe to infer from the above comparisons that there is an infusion of Carib elements in the tongue; but the material is too scanty to assign its true value. According to a count made by the missionaries in 1832 there were about two thousand natives at the mission of Aten, all of whom we may assume were Lecos. Dr. Edwin R. Heath, who spent two years in the valley of the Beni about 1880, does not men- tion them, at least under this name, and gives no specimen of their language. In personal appearance the Lecos are described (by Weddell) as of pleasant expression, with straight foreheads and horizontal eyes, the mouth of medium size. In temperament they were frank and cheerful. What is unusual, they seemed totally devoid of apprecia- tion or care for music, and had no dances or songs of any kind. The alphabet of the vocabulary is the Spanish ; # is the French u; jas ¢tscha in German. ENGLISH-LECO VOCABULARY. Arm, bepel. Flower, tutha. Arrow, uela. Forest, kanda. Belly, bawahobo. Hand, buew. Bird, katchu. Head, barua. Blood, bile. Heaven, kaut. Body, bonoéchco'ro. House, wan. Bow, tchava'ta. Leaf, wota. Child, yatchpaik. Legs, boo’te. Earth, lal. Man, yubasa. z Eyes, distri. Milk, buchuluro. Feet, desel. Moon, kurea. Fingers, biut. Mountain, wotha. Fire, moa. Mouth, bokdérua. Brinton.] 76 1 [Feb. 5, Nails (finger), biwita. Teeth, dckire. No, nai. Tree, ba’ta. Nose, bitchinua. Village, we's. Rain, essa. Water, dua. River, dua (water). Woman, tchusuaya. Salt, ti. ; Wood. hamon. Skin, busutche. Yes, 0-0. Sun, he’no’. NUMERALS. 4, ber. 2, tot. 3, tehar. 4, didai 5, ber-tcha. 10, ber-bivque. V. A TEXT IN THE MANAO DIALECT. Two hundred years ago the Manaos occupied an extensive tract near where the Rio Negro empties its dark waters into the Amazon. They were, indeed, the most numerous accolents of the Black river on its lower course, and were estimated at something like ten thousand souls. Their large and shapely canoes and plastered conical dwelling houses bespoke a certain advancement in the arts, and their repute as daring warriors extended far among the Tupi tribes, who adjoined them on the Amazon. They were not affined in blood or language to the Tupis, but belonged to what is now known as the Arawak or Nu-Arawak (or, as M. Adams prefers to call it, the Maipure) linguistic stock. In the - early history of the country, their name is connected with the legend of El Dorado and the land of the Amazons. Later they willingly received religious instruction from the Carmelite mission- aries, who gathered them in settlements. But the kidnapping Portuguese carried off many of the converts into slavery, and the remainder fled to the trackless forests, so that half a century ago scarcely a pure-blood representative of the tribe could be seen on the river. Of their language there are but two specimens known to me; the one, a vocabulary of about 150 words, collected by the traveler, a a 1892.] 77 [Brinton. Dr. Spix, and published in Martius’ Glossaria Linguarum Brasti- tensium ; the other, a short catechetical work, which forms the material of this study, and which has never been printed. ‘The original is in the British Museum, Manuscript Department, and bears the title : “* Doutrina christa’a pella Lingoa dos Manaos.”’ It has long been known to bibliographers, and is referred to by both Ludewig and Von Martius, but no one has copied or pub- lished any portion of it. Its authorship and precise date are un- known, but it has the appearance of a draft or copy of an older work, which it would seem was composed in 1740. ‘The orthog- raphy of the Portuguese words is somewhat irregular, and there also seems to be an uncertainty in the spelling of various native terms. The extract which I give is about one-half of the whole, and is sufficient to show the character of the tongue. A comparison of the words of the text with those collected by Spix about a century later shows little change in the dialect, especially when the difference in the method of transcription is allowed for, the writer of the text having employed the phonetics of the Portuguese tongue, while Spix followed that of the German. To illustrate this, and also to facilitate the examination of the text, I append a list of some of the words in the latter, the majority of which are also found in Spix’s vocabulary ; the latter I have placed in brackets and appended an S. ENGLISH-MANAO Worps. All, sabaque. Man, herenary (yrindly, 8.). Always, lyxadari. No, not, mehe (me’e, 8.). Be, to, sahi. Our, us, déne (huene, 8.). Believe, to, yaniqui. See, to, dabata (pipata, 8.). Belly, tuba (tula, 8.). Sins, barayda. Body, cacadyr (katy, 8.) Son, bauri, dayri (tany, S.). Day, samaco (tzamiko, 8.). Stone, kya (ghita, 8.). Die, to, mutica (uamatika, 8.). Teach, to, cayna. Earth, etudeo (ete’e, S.). Three, piaduqut (pialuky, 8.). Father, yracary (apakony, 8.). True, caura, God, Zupa (mauary, 8.). © Virgin, sabyra. Heaven, quinaucudeo (qhinauigota, Where? padeura. 8.). Why ? capeda. Hell, caman latyma. Most of these words are derived from roots extending through 78 Brinton.] [Feb. 5, many Arawak dialects, and are the property of that stem. Others, however, are borrowed from the Tupi. This is especially so with the word for God, Zufa, which is still in use in the Brazilian ‘* Lingoa Geral.” The personal pronouns as given by Spix are: I, no. Thou, pi. He, erouty. We, huene. You, yna. They, nela. The possessives, however, which are also employed in the con- jugations as inseparable prefixes, differ from these. Thus we have: 6é-mequer, our Lord. oé-naca, like us. od-yaniqut, we believe. - oa-batar, we shall see. p yoenigui, thou believest. ' ba-batare, they shall see (him). DouTRINA CHRISTA’A PELLA LINGOA DOS MANAOs. P. De q’. sorte se ha de haver o homem neste mundo querendosse livarsse do inferno, e querendo hir ao ceo? R. Crendo em Deos, fasendosse baptizar, i goardando sua ley. P. Ha Deos? R. Ha. P. Credes em Deos? R. Cremos. P. Quem he Deos? R. O que fez todas as couzas. P. Com que fez todas essas couzas? R. Com hua/ sua so’palavra. | P. Deos tem corpo como nos? R. Nam tem. P. Deos __ teue principio ? R. Nam teve principio. P, Sempre soy ? R. Sempre. P. Ha de ser para sempre? R. Para sempre, antiguamente P. Ca peda lyanaqui samaco anaqui camanna tyma gotia, diu- fiy-yapa que rey lyiié kynaucuda diche lyoay4 edaca téna? R. Tup& yaquer cayta ca lygara anaquyra. . Aufiyna ca Tupa? . Aufiynica. . Pyanyqui Tupa? . Odyaniqui. . Capagay Tupi? . Sabaqui bayqui tumaquer. . Capa tiyna pura’ Tupa tuma bayqué sabayque? R. Lygiara iiynapura. P. Cacadyra o@nica Tupa ? R. Mehé cacaliury. P. Catuquir ha quer rira bauy- | napu Tupai? . Mehé catuquinhaqueri. . Lyxadiri sahir? Lyxadéari, Bayrichip& sahi lideuri? . Bayriche. arava a") rd hd 1892.] P. Aonde esta Deos? R. No ceo, e na terra em todo o lugar aonde chamao por elle. P. Pode o homem ver aqui a Deos? . Nam pode ver., P. Porque? R. Porque nam tem corpo. P. R Es) Aonde o hemos de ver? . No ceo hindo nos la. P. Eos que sorem ao Inferno nam o hao de ver? R. Nam o hao de ver. P. Por que rezam? R. Em castigo desus culpas. PREGUNTAS SOBRE P. Quantos Deoses ha? R. Hu sé Deos verdadero. P. Sendo pessoas quantas so? R. Sam tres. P. Como se chamao essas tres pes- soas ? R. Deos Padre, Deos filho, Deos Espirito Santo. P. Aelle se chama santissima Trinidade? R. Aelle. P. Porque rezam ? R. Porque em hu so Deos estam tres pessoas. P. Esse Deos Padre, Deos Filho, Deos Espirito Santo he o mesmo _Deos ? R. He hu so eo mesmo Deos. P. Em quanto pessoas he a mes- ma pessoas ? R. Nao: em quanto pessoas Deos Padre he differente, Deus filho he differente, Deos Espiritu santo he differente. P. Qual dessos pessoas antigam'® 79 [Brinton. P. Padeura sahi Deos ? R. Quinancudeo, etedeo sabaqui panoquer deo, padeno ofcayta. P. Sabyra sahi ofbata caydéo Tupa? . Mehe sabi ofbatar. . Caypeda? Mehe cacasyr. . Padire Gibatar? . Guinacuda dixe guareda 6aba- HAW h . Bamane camanhatyma diche gareda babatare ? R. Mehe babatare. P. Capeda? R. Mehe bayaligara gata 6éney- ninique. A SS. TRINIDADE. P. Paquiby Tupa? R. Batrayma Tupa catra. P. Paquiby lideno paquiby. R, Pyaduqui baduqui. P. Capacapa mara qui-¥o piadu- qui baduqui-ya? R. Tupan yraciry, Tupan bauri, Tupan Espirito Santo. P. Lysciniqui oena ss. Trind*® ma- cfiy ? : R. Lyxiniqui. P. Capeda? R. Bafirayma Tupa lyanaqui pya- duqui baduqui lifiri. P. Batirayma lidari Tupa ly Tupa yraciry Tupa bayri Tupa Espirito Santo. R. Batirayma Tupa 6ary, P. Bafiraymara sahi lideo baura ? R. Maycadi ; bauraymarara Tupa yracari, 4yGnaca Tupa bauri idyna- ca, Tupa Espirito Santo aitjnaca. P. Padeuora lypa bauynapu lypa Brinton.]j soy pr®, Deos Padre soy pr°ou Deos filho ou Deos Espirito Santo? R. Nao soy pro nen hum todos sempre foram. P. Qual dessos pessoas antiguam' foy a q. se fez homem como nos? R. O mesmo filho de Deos. P. Como se chama 0 filho de Deos depoy de feyto homem? R. Nosso senhor Jesus Christo. P. Por isso he, que os Christ&os tomaram este nome? R. Por isso. P. Que quer dizer Christaos? R. O que he bapti zado, entre em Jesus Christo filho Deos. P. Deyxou antigamente N. §. Jesus Christo outra pessoa em suo lugar antez de hir ao ceo? R. Deyxou s. Pedro e todos os Papss seos successores p* gover- narem a santa madre [gresia Catolica de Roma assim chamada. P. Que couza he Santa Madre Igresja Catolica de Roma? R. Sao todos os que sao baptiza- dos, e estao pela palavra do summo Pontifex Papa de Roma, e agvardao e creem em Jesus Christo. P. Quem e nosso senhor Jesus Christo? R. Verdadeyro Deos, e verdadey- ro homem, como nos. P. Como he verdadeyro Deos? R. Sendo verdadeyro filho de seo Padre. P. Como e verdadeyro homem. R. Sendo verdadeyro filho da sempre virgem Maria. P. Deos filho tem corpo como nos? R. Tem corpo. P. Quem fez antigamente o corpo de nosso Senhor Jesus Christo? 80 [Feb. 5, Tupa yracary lypa odcaru Tupa bauri o’caru Tupa Espirito Santo? R. Mehe lyaquyra quariry. P. Capa bauynape qui-yo piadu- quy baduqui di lixir ; herenari cau- ray efanady oénike? R. Tupan bayri. P. Capagay Tupa bauyri-y here- nari caurary timinhane garéde? R. Oémequer Jesus Christo. P. Lygayqui ciyta Christaos? R. Ly gayqui. P. Capaciy caytica Christaosly ? R. Tupan bayri catyiica Jesus. Christo eyaquér. P. Neméda dipa baun&pe 6éme- quer Jesus Christo baura 66 cuni- apay quinaucuda lixyra gereda f ga- taya? R. Neméda 8. Pedro sabaque Pay abarepano mar Simani caydixi santa madre Igreyja catholica mequér-ey Papa de Roma 6aciyta. P. Capacay Santa Madre Iga Ca- tholica de Roma ? R. Sabaque caytica Jesus Christo eyaquer ligira abarepano mar Papa de Roma gara anaguyra. P. Capacay déémequér Jesus Christo ? R. Tupan caura, herenari caura, iiéniica. P. Capeda Tupa cauriyri? R. Tupa yracari biyrinyo. P. Capeda herenari caurayri ? R. Santa Maria ababycagoereyma dayri caurayri, P, Cacadyra jenaque Tupa dayri? R. Cacadyra. P, Capabativynaph Sémequer Jesus Christo carytumaquer? 1992.] R. Nen huma pessoa, o fez por graca o por obra do Espirito santo foy feyto. P. Aonde foy feyto? R. No ventre de hua donzella chamada Santa Maria. P. E essa Santa Maria ficou sem lezao assim como otra qualqer vir- gem que nunca parié? R. Nem mais nem menos. P. E depois de parir filou sem lezam ? R. Nao teve lezao ficou sempre virgem. P. De que sorte se houue N. 8S. Jesus Christo neste mundo de nas- cer de sua santissima may ? R. Padeceo fo mecede e canpaco e todos os malles de pena por amor de nos f por nosso amor. P. Ensinou antigamente N. 8. Jesus Christo dando entendimento 4 gente? R. Ensinou. P. Ao depoiz morreo na cruz por nos, em paga de nossos pecca- dos? R. Morreo. P. Por amor q.™ morreo? R. Por amor de nos, por amor de nossos peccados, ou satyfugum del- les, p*livarnos do Infierno, e levar- nos ao ceo. P. Por sua vontade? R. Por sua vontade morreo, P. Pois elle nio hera Deos? _R. Hera Deos. P. Pois esse morreo ? R. Nao: o corpo q*tomou de sua santissima may he q* morreo. P. Nao havia mos de hir ao ceo, se elle nam morrera ? R. Nao havia mos. 81 [Brinton. R. Mehe capatomar Tupan Espir- ito santo tuma quenda déo letumin- ha f graca tumaquenda déo letu- minha. P. Padéuora sahi lia6na? R. Lymaque sabyra Santa Maria cayra ababycago eréyma tubadéo. P. Lydeun-o Santa Maria enida- gareda sabyray ababy cagoeréyma mehé runida aguyra sayro? . R. Lyaquira dary, P. Lucadaniquy pure liy nidan garéda? R. Mehé rupiita. P. Capéda 6émequer Jesus Christo yma samaco anaquya lyra- cairo gatia lynidan gaié@da tayapa payni garéda? R, Pbaty ybiri metatyr pe le ly poyta sabaque bayque pura ly ta ba 6 & cady che. P. C ayna datir batynapfi & é mequer Jesus Christo Lita ecataya nitia herenari ychy ? R. Recaynada. P. Guayneypa remotica cruza quadia 6 imane bardyda déney ? R. Matica. P. Capeda rematica ? R. Oagayque 64mane barayda éénéy camanha tymagatia o a u giiy yApaquer quynauda lixira eda cay- day. P. Pananéy ? R. Pananéyra rematica. P. Mehé sayhe Tupaly ? R. Tupa. P. Lydéu-ora Tup4 matica ? R. Mehé ; tupa matica caca ryra liracaro lyxira ba gua lyéiri mati. cady. P. Mehé dima quynaucuda diche mehe 6 4 matica garéda? R. Mehé bima PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. Xxx. 187. K.. PRINTED MARCH 18, 1892. Brinton.] P. Quantos dias estenne N. &. Jesus Christo debayxo da terra no teo sepulcro de pedra? R. Tres dias. P. Era depois como passou ? R. Resuscitou. P. Depois de resuscitar como se houve? ; R. Subio ao ceo depois de 40 dias. P. De que sorte se ha, ou esta agourla? R. Esta asentado & mao direyta de Deos Padre tao honrado e esti- mado como elle. VI. 82 [Feb. 5, P. Paquyby samaco d6emequér Jesus Christo lideo rimaticani gar- éda eté iivn 4 pudéo kya anaquya. R. Pyaquibaqui samaco. P. Guayney padeura? R. Caydéu-o ociry. P. Caydéu-o ocary guaynéy pad- éury ? R. Lycuruca iquinaudadire 40 samaco burfitiquéy. P. Paquypa sahe cachadir lid- éury ? R. Tupan yracar sabydi libauray quidéu-o: subinha: aquidi caura yméeéta pyrama. Petr Ha f THE BONARI DIALECT OF THE CARIB STOCK. The last of the Bonaris died about 1870. At one time they were a tribe of considerable strength, having their homes in the thick forests along the river Uatuma, which empties into the Amazon from the north, not far below the mouth of the Rio Negro. They were, therefore, neighbors to the Manaos, whose location I have already described. They were a docile people, and readily collected around the mission Father Nuno Alvarez de Couto established at Sant’ Anna do Atuma. There, however, they fell victims to various diseases brought by the whites, and when Canon Francisco Bernardino de Louza visited them, of all the tribe only one old woman survived who was able to give him the words of its speech. These he pub- lished in his book, Para e Amazonas (three parts, 8vo, Rio Janeiro, 1874-5), which is scarce outside of Brazil, and from which Dr. A. Ernst, of Caracas, obligingly copied for me the vocabulary which I subjoin. The name of the tribe is taken from the Tupi language or Lingoa Geral of Brazil, and in its proper form Boa-n-vara means ‘ snake- men’’ or ‘‘serpent-people.’’ Other dcanari or snake-men are mentioned, one band on the river Uaupes (Von Martius) and another on the river Iganna (Natterer). It was a term probably derived from the totemic sign, or perhaps from some accidental or fancied peculiarity, and has no ethnic significance, 1892.] 83 (Brinton. Even a slight examination proves the Bonari a well-marked Carib dialect, and as such it is correctly assigned and located on Karl von den Steinen’s linguistic map inserted in his work, Durch Central Brasilien. The only word, however, which he gives from their dialect, er¢, moon, is not quite correct, according to this vocabulary. ENGLISH-BONARI VOCABULARY. Air, cabu, Infant, pitianhea. Arrow, purena’. Light, ataguice. Black, tapaiuna. Man, wquere’. Bow, urapa’. Moon, quecé. Brother, mimien. — Old, tapoucu’. Cold, tecominhoa’. ; Old woman, nafoucu’. Dance, timiara. Rain, cunoba. Ear, panare’. River, tuna’ (see Water). Earth, nono. Son, child, meco’. Eye, nuruba’. String, wbudiana. Fire, watu. Sun, wsiw’. Fish, wutu. Thunder, darara’. Girl, meacaba’. Tooth, joré. God, tupan. Uncle, wemi. Grandfather, tamunba. 5 Water, tuna. Head, iriopo’. White, tiada’. Heat, atupeua’. Wife, upuiten. Heaven, maica-paa. Wind, iriane’. House, abeno’. Woman, uauri. Husband, unhd. The influence of the neighboring Tupi tribes is seen in such words as fufan, God; ‘tamunhd, grandfather; urapa’, arrow (urapa'ra, Tupi) ; Hada, white (¢#, Tupi) ; ¢apatuna, black (tapan- huna, Tupi), and a few others more faintly. These are loan-words which do not affect the mass of the language. VII. THE HONGOTE LANGUAGE AND THE PATAGONIAN DIALECTS. Among the manuscripts in the British Museum there is one in Spanish (Add. MSS., No. 17,631), which was obtained in 1848 from the Venezuelan explorer, Michelena y Rojas (author of the Exploracion del America del Sur, published in 1867). It contains Brinton.] 84 [Feb. 5, several anonymous accounts, by different hands, of a voyage (or voyages) to the east coast of Patagonia, ‘‘ desde Cabo Blanco hasta las Virgines,’’ one of which is dated December, 1789. Neither the name of the ship nor that of the commander appears. Among the material are two vocabularies of the Tsoneca or Tehuelhet dialect, comprising about sixty words and ten numerals. These correspond closely with the various other lists of terms col- lected by travelers. At the close of the MS., however, there is a short vocabulary of an entirely different linguistic stock, without name of collector, date or place, ‘unless the last words, ‘‘a la Soleta,’’ refer to some locality. Elsewhere the same numerals are given, and a few words, evidently from some dialect more closely akin to the Tsoneca, and the name Hongore is applied to the tongue. This may be a corruption of ‘‘Choonke,’’ the name which Ramon Lista and other Spanish writers apply to the siren (Hongote = Chongote = Choonke = TsGnéca). The list which I copy below, however, does not seem closely allied to the Tehuelhet nor to any other tongue with which I have compared it. The MS. is generally legible, though to a few words I have placed an interrogation mark, indicating that the handwriting was uncertain. The sheet contains the following : DESCRIPCION DEL INDIO. Caveza, seyocup. Frente, eyssen. Ojos, can. Orejas, coana (qy. coaua) Narizes, bacsen, Cejas, suman. Boca, euzin. Dientes, idis. Pescuezo, saislan, Brazos, cheslan. Manos, cupa' ches. Dedos, gadyocoye. Barriga, coaa’, Muslos, cava’, Pierna, euxin. Pie, paxasen A las conchas, chavin (2), Cuchillos, chavi. 1392.] 85 (Brinton. i, pa. 2, 8a. 3, chalas. 4, bok. 5, ciechs. 6, tesan. 7, zohs. 8, tachs. 9, tews (2). 10, o/pen. No le he podido entender mas. Canoa, tasabay. Canalete, asaup. Toda clase de botones, coyocuy. Abalorios, jamts (2). A la Soleta. ‘The above list I translate and arrange in alphabetical order as follows : Arms, cheslan. Hands, cwpa’ches. Beads, jamts (?). Head, seyocup. Belly, coya’. Knives, chavi. Buttons, coyocuy. Leg, euxin. ‘Canoe, tasabay. Mouth, zuzin. Ears, coana (or coaua). Neck, saislan. Eyebrows, suman. Nose, bacsen. Eyes, can. Paddle, asaup. Fingers, gaayocoye. Teeth, idis. Foot, paxasen. Thighs, cava. Forehead, eyssen. The other vocabulary, although it presents the same numerals, differs widely in some of the words. It gives: Fire, kanikerk. Eyes, kavak. Water, cwk-hin. Ears, kakuk. Sun, kekar. Mouth, kakhe. Woman, becok. Tongue, kakshlit. These are more closely akin to other Patagonian dialects than the words of the former vocabulary. It must be acknowledged, however, that we are but poorly sup- plied with information about the tongues of Patagonia and Tierra del Fuego. In the latter country we have, indeed, sufficient ma- terial in the Yahgan, thanks to Brydges, Adam.-and others; but in Brinton.] 86 [Feb. 5, the Onas tongue there is practically nothing and but little of the Alikuluf. It is still uncertain whether the last mentioned is a branch of the Yakana-cunny, and whether these latter in turn differ from the true Patagonian or Tehuelhet.* D’Orbigny insists that the Puelches, who have for a century and a half occupied the plains between the Rio Negro and the Rio Col- orado (39° to 41° lat. South), are radically different in language both from their Aucanian neighbors to the north and the Patagonian tribes to the south.f For this reason they are called by the Arau- canians Quimnolu-che, ‘* People who cannot understand.’’{ D’Or- bigny’s short comparative vocabulary of the ‘‘ Patagon’’ and ** Puelche’’ certainly reveals a wide difference, but a comparison of the few words of ‘‘ southern Puelche”’ collected by Hale discloses unmistakable identities between the two idioms, as: 8. PUELCHE. TEHUEL-HET. Star, sZalela, tsdkalela. Tree, apa, opuk., Bone, ohatsk, ohit. Mr. Hale collected his vocabularies at Carmen, on the Rio Negro; and the influence of the northern tribes is distinctly visible in them. Especially the Guachi would seem to have percolated into them. The possessive pronoun of the first person singular, éa or ya, ‘‘ my,’’ is seen in both Hale’s vocabularies and also in D’Or- bigny’s Puelche. It is common to the Tsoneca or Tehuelhet and the Guachi. GUACHI. TEH. OR PUEPLCHE. Nose, ta-note, ta-nots. Water, euak, yagup. Mouth or lips, ia-pé, ta-pelk. Teeth, ia-va, ta-hat, Mountain, tegec-loan, atecq, yuilhuana, The Poyas or Pey-yus are stated in the Znforme of General Pietas, above quoted, to have dwelt (in 1729) from the river Lauquen-leufu one hundred leagues southward and quite to the Atlantic. Twenty- five years ago Guinnard found the ‘‘ Poyu-che,’’ as he calls them, wandering along both banks of the Rio Negro from Pacheco Island * The writers of the Miasion Scientifique au Cap Horn identify the Onas with the Yakana- cunny, and assert that they speak a closely related dialect of Patagonian. + L' Homme Américain, Tome ii, p. 71. 1 Informe of Don Geronimo Pietas, 1729, quoted by Dr. Darapsky in the Bull, del Insti- tule Geographico Argentino, Tomo x, p. 278, -1892.] 87 [Brinton. to the Cordilleras.* The words he gives from their tongue—if they can be depended upon—prove it to be an Araucanian dialect. Of the Chonos, who were a maritime people on the west coast, we have no linguistic material ; nor can we define the relationship of the Calen and Taijatef, who resided on the shore south of 48° and spoke one tongue. _ In the following table I present a comparison of a limited num- ber of common words in Patagonian vocabularies, beginning with the earliest—that collected by Magellan on his first visit to the straits that bear his name, in 1520. It is interesting to note how little the language has changed in the nearly four centuries which have passed since that period. ‘The list is found in Pigafetta’s nar- ration. DIALECT. AUTHOR. MAN. WoMAN. Sun. Moon. 1. Patagonian, 3. afetta, calexchem, 2. a . Br. Mus. I, | nuken, ache, kora, amania, 3. Ld MS. Br. Mus. II, | nuken, zunum, kokaua, amania, 4. ¥f . | Martius, nuken, zunum, shuim, amania, 5. $¢ D'Orbigny, nuca, nacuna, chuina, chuina, 6. Tsoneca, Hale, kina, iamo-kanika, | apiuxk, 7. Choonke or Tehuelche, or} Musters, ahonican, | karken, genornko, showan, > Tehuelhet, a enguenkin, sheguenon, 9. Puelche, kine, tamo-kanok, | tgiaxatoka, | apixok, 10. Dosbigny, chia, tam-kat, apiucue, pioo, 1L. Hongote, MS. Br. Mus I, 1 MS. Br. Mus. If, becok, kekar, eg Spee Brydg , AR ‘ pee or Yahgan), rydges, won, 3 um, é nuka, 14, Alikuluf, ackinish. ackhanash. lum. cuunequa, DIALECT. AUTHOR. FIRE. WATER. | HEAD. EYE. Ear. 1. Patagonian, | Pigafetta, gialeme, holi, her, oter, sané, 3. ic ” | MS. Br. Mus. z: ‘arra, guil, gosel, jené, 3. in MS. Br. Mus. II, | hamonaka, rra, guial, gotel, shené, 4, se Martius, hamonaka, | karra, guil, gottel, | shené, 5. at D’Orbigny, maja, ara, dil, quter, | jené, 6. Tsoneca, Hale, hauakok, |-iagup, | iagoha, | iatelk, 7. Choonke or 1 . Tehuelche, or; Musters, yaik, léy, kittar, bul, 8. Tehuelhet, Lista, yeike, lehe, otel, shaa, - Puelche, Hale, auixok, tagop, ia’ oe, iateteke, | iatsosk, a “ a D ‘Orbigny, a aquacake, | iagup, iacaa, iatitco, | taxyexke, 11, Hon i r. Mus. seyocup, | can, coana, i "° MS. Br. Mus. IT, | kauikok, kukhin, kavak, | kakuk, ris ioe Mahan) Bryd haky, sha lukabe dell ifkh ahgan), S, pusha mea, abe, a, ufkhea, M4. ‘Alikulut vad tétal. ' | chanash. | of’chocka. | telkh. | teldil. *A, Guinnard, Three Years among the Patagonians, p. 49 et al. (Eng. trans., London, 1871). The prayer he inserts in some dialect not clearly stated on p. 163 is almost pure Araucanian, as are the numerals on p. 261. It is doubtful if he was ever among the true Patagonians (the Tehuelhet). Brinton.] [Feb. 5, DIALECT. AUTHOR. MOUTH. NOSE. TONGUE. ToorTH. 1. Patagonian, Pigafetta, chia or, scial, ‘or, 2. “ MS. Br. Mus. I, " deol, iY kor, 3. “ MS. Br. Mus. II, 6, del, kur, 4. - Martius, 00, del, curr, 5. a D’Orbigny, thum, ho, jor, 6. Tsoneca, e, iapulk, ianots, iaxauta, 7. Choonke or Tehuelche, or| Musters, tehal, tal, oer, 8. Tehuelhet, Lista, shahan, or, ‘ orre, 9. Puelche, Hale, tapolk, ianit, tawonok, ta hai, 10. + D’Orbigny, 11. Hongote, MS. Br. Mus. I, zuzin, bacsen, idis, 12. “ MS Br. Mus. I, kakhe, kakshlut, 13. io vekeae) satin ; oe ne ne or Yahgan), rydges, cushi n, wun, 14. Alikuluf. : uffeare. | nohl. °' | luckin. cauwash. DIALECT. AUTHOR. HAND. Foor. HovsE ONE. 1. Patagonian, Pigafetta, chéné (cori, fingers), J 2. fr MS. Br. Mus. I, | jan, kel, cocha, | jauken, - 6 “ne oe Mus. I, re rei pe pease iS 4 artius, ore, Jan, a, equen 5. “ D’Orbigny, chémé, ti, j 6. Tsoneca, e, tgie, 7. Choonke_ or Tehuelche, or| Musters, tsice’r, shankence, | kou, chuche, 8. Tehuelhet, Lista, aj, choche, 9. Puelche, Hale, ia sk‘vp, iapgit, ahoike, | tei, Ht rongeen, | Meet z, | SEB | at . Hon . Br. Mus. I, | cu 8, sen pa rT Spe sae Witt | ; pa, 13. Tor Yabhgun) a joech a. or Ya j rydges sch, , ‘kral, 14. Alikuluf ‘ yuccaba. cutliculcul, | hit, towquidow. DIALECT. AUTHOR. Two. THREE Four FIve. 1. Pa nian, Pigafetta, s. en MS Br. Mus. I kear, kekaque, kaszen, 3. - MS. Br. Mus. LI, keukay, keash, kekagui, keitzun, -% . a. zo xeukay, keash, kekaguy, kegtzun, ¥ r 'Orbigny 6, Tsoneca, ae poetgi, gotsk, mala, tanka, 7. Choonke or Tehuelche, or, Musters, houke, ais, carge, ktsin, &, Tehuelhet, Lista, jauke, kaash, kague, tzen, 9. Puelche, Hale, pe tei, 4 mala, tanke, 10. as D'Orbigny, a a MB. Br Mus: it, | ea cae | ee Sen - . Br. Mus, sa, 8, " cy pee Brydges, mbabe tt carga, wr or Yahgan), ry * co mutta, ; cup/aspa, 14. Alikuluf. telkeow.' | cup’ed. | inadaba. ad NOTES ON THE VOCABULARY. Man.—The root in all the allied Tsoneca dialects is hen, Ain or kan, which is the generic term for the species homo. It is seen f 1892.) 89 [Brinton. with a feminine prefix in zamo-kan-ok, karken, ackhanash (=wa- kan-ash). The English form of this root becomes cunny, found as a suffix to various tribal names. Woman.—Zunum=woman, as zunum nakon, ugly woman ; sunum kekalun, girl, young woman; zama or yama means properly ‘« mother ;’’ ache or ysher (Musters) is a woman of the same gens, the masculine form of which is chen, brother; arken is a married woman. Sun and Moon.—The two prevailing roots are kar and shuén. They both appear in Pigafetta’s calexchem (= kare-shuin). The vocabulary No. 2 translates ora as ‘‘sun, heaven, God.’’ The generic term for both orbs is shuzn (chutna), which seems allied to the Araucanian cuyen of the same meaning. The Hongote ke-kar shows the radical Zar. Another radical for both orbs is the guttural sound variously represented by kok, cuc, yok, keng, geng, sheg. According to Brydges the Yahgans have two different words for sun, Jum and usteca, and two for moon, annuca and huntian. Fire.—The radical sound appears to be ’auay, spelled variously yatk, hauak, kautk, etc. The first syllable is visible in maya= ma-yay. Water.—The term jarra or karra means ‘drinking water,’’ from Jara, to drink; ¢agop is rain water (céagop, rain, Hale); the Zéy and dehe of Musters and Lista appear to be an abbreviation of the ho-d’ of Pigafetta. FTead.—Pigafetta’s her = hel, which is a variant of gui/, did, etc. Another radical for the idea is a guttural, ’ya, which is at the base of za’oe, the Hongote se-yocup, Yahgan /uka-be, etc. (comp. Araucanian /onco, head). Lye.—All the words are clearly related except the Hongote. Ear.—The term given by Pigafetta, sané, is repeated with slight variation in the various dialects including the Hongote, except the Puelche, where Hale and D’Orbigny give a different word. The verb choingué, to hear, seems related to shené, ear. Mouth.—Wide discrepancies appear in the terms for this organ. The words chian, shahan and ihum are probably forms of shum, which is the right word for mouth, while za fe/k, according to Hale, means ‘‘ my lips.”’ Nose.—The general root is a modification of 4, Lista’s 07 = 0d, which reappears in /ochal, ndhi, etc. Tongue.—Pigafetta’s scéa/7 reappears in Muster’s ¢a/, etc. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 1387. L. PRINTED MARCH 18, 1892. Bripton.] 90 [Feb. 5, Tooth.—The prevailing radical or may be related to Araucanian or, bone. Hand.—Two conceptions are conveyed by the words presented, che'mé, che'né, jan, fan, all forms of the same=upper extremity, arm and hand; while or, cori, tsic-c’r, ya-s'k‘cup all refer to the fingers. Foot.—The general root ke/ probably reappears in ’a/, and even in shan-kence (= chen-kels, lower extremity), cutlt-kulkul, etc. House.—The root’ is generally o’a. Numerals.—These display considerable diversity. Several are merely borrowed from the Araucanian, in which we have: 1, guéfe ; 2, epu; 3, cula; 4, melt; 5, kechu. From kechu, for instance, comes Hongote ciech, Tel. hettzun, tzen, etc. Hong. chalas prob- ably =Tel. 4a-ash ; Hong. sa= Tel. “i, etc. The general conclusion to which these comparisons lead is that the Patagonian dialects are probably more closely related than has hitherto been assumed. VIll. THE DIALECTS AND AFFINITIES OF THE KECHUA LANGUAGE. At the time of the discovery, and probably long before that date, the Kechua language was spoken along and near the Pacific coast from 3° North to 35° South latitude, that is from the Rio Ancasmayu in Ecuador to the Rio Maule in Chili. Of course, in this long extent of nearly twenty-five hundred miles of mountains and deserts, there was considerable variety in its dialects ; but, so far as I can learn, much less than might be expected at first sight. The Abbé Camafio, a learned Jesuit who traveled extensively in Peru about the middle of the last century, and whose Z/ementi della Lingua Quichua has never seen the light in print, classified the tongue under five dialects as follows : 1. The Chinchasuyo, spoken in the diocese of Lima. 2. The Lamafio, spoken about Lamas, in the diocese of Truxillo. 3. The Quitefio, current in and around the city of Quito, 4. The Calchaqui or Tucumafio or Catamarefio, which prevailed west of the Cordillera in the province of Tucuman. 5. The Cuzcuafio, in and around Cuzco. Of these the last mentioned is that which is considered the ————— a ae ee Pe ee ae 1892.] ; 91 . [Brinton, classical, and was adopted by the missionaries as representing the _ language in its purest and most ancient form. In it the drama of Ollanta was composed, which is justly regarded as one of the finest _ productions of American aboriginal literature. The identification of the Calchaqui dialect of Tucuman with a patois of the Kechua would settle a vexed question in American ethnography and archeology. The language and the nation of the Calchaquis have long since disappeared ; but their material relics, in the shape of well-constructed walls of dressed stones, tombs of the same material, ornaments and images in copper and gold, and handsomely decorated jars of earthenware, still remain in sufficient abundance to testify to a condition of culture among them rivaling that of the Kechuas of the western slope of the Cordilleras.* The learned traveler, Von Tschudi, imagined that their tongue was the modern Atacamefio, and that these sparse inhabitants of _ the desert were descendants of refugee Calchaquis.f But there is no actual evidence to this effect. Florentine Ameghino, who has done so much for our knowledge _of the Argentine Republic, claims the Calchaqui as a dialect of the Aymara tongue of Bolivia ;{ and the two latest writers on the sub- ject, S. A. Lafone Quevedo and Dr. H. von Ihering, are equally at issue in their opinions. The latter insists that the Calchaquis spoke an idiom wholly different from either Kechua or Aymara ;§ while the former argues that this extinct tongue was ‘‘ not exactly Kechuan, but not altogether distinct’’ from it, and was a mongrel dialect made up of Kechuan, Abiponian and Guaranian elernents. || When we turn to the old authorities the point is by no means cleared up. The first and best who states anything definite is the Jesuit missionary, Alonso de Barzana (sometimes written Barcena), whose letter from ‘‘ Asuncion del Paraguay,’’ dated September 8, 1594, gives some pertinent particulars. He writes: ‘‘The most widely extended languages (in Tucuman) are the Caca, the Tono- cote and the Sanavirona. The Caca is spoken by the Diaguitas and throughout the valley of Calchaqui, and that of Catamarca, and in most of the district of Nueva Rioja. Nearly all the towns * See authorities quoted in my work, The American Race, pp. 319 seq. + Reisen in Siid- Amerika, Vol. v, p. 84; Organismus der Khetsua-Sprache, p. 71. t Ameghino, quoted by Ihering. gIn Dus Ausland, 1891, p. 944. | ‘Notes in the Calchaqui Region,” in the American Anthropologist, October, 1891, p. 358, Brinton.] 92 [Feb. 5, about Santiago use it, as well as the natives along the Rio de Estero, and many more who live in the mountains. I have pre- pared a grammar and vocabulary of this language.’’* These statements assign a distribution of the language over an area about 450 miles from east to west, and 300 miles from north to south. It is highly unlikely that so widespread a tongue should utterly disappear while so many of the descendants of those who spoke it still survive. Yet the native population of Tucuman to- day speak only a corrupt Kechua dialect, when not Spanish. In fact, the name applied to the tongue by Barzana, aka, is the Kechua word for mountain, and signifies in this connection the dialect of the mountaineers. The grammar and vocabulary he prepared are lost, and we have no monuments of the language remaining, except the geographical and other names mentioned in the early writers or preserved on old maps. In examining these one is at once struck with the numerous names of villages ending in -gasta. These are found from the Rio Salado to the Cordillera, and from about 26° 30’ to 31° 30° South latitude; in other words, in just about the area assigned by Barzana to the Caca tongue. I quote some of them: Ambargasta, Guanagasta, Amingasta, Machigasta, Auguagasta, Paquilagasta, Cahgasta, Tinogasta, Calingasta, Tuquiligasta. Chiquiligasta, I do not think there can be any doubt but that this gas¢a isa corrupted form of the Kechua //acfa, town or village. In pure Kechua there is no g sound, and the ¢ isa guttural (German cA) ; so that a rough equivalent in the Spanish alphabet would be close to gasta. Moreover, many of the syllables preceding the termina- tion are evidently Kechua, as: Cahgasta = caja Uacta, cold town ; an appropriate name, as it lies high up the Cordillera on the Rio de Limari. Auguagasta = aueca acta, enemies’ town ; occupied by hostile people. Calingasta = ceali Uacta, healthy town ; probably from its salubrious site, * Barzana’s letter is printed in the Relaciones Geograficas de Indias, Peru, Tomo ti (Madrid, 1885), ee ny wee ee a ee ne a, ee ee 1892.] 93 [Brinton. Machigasta = macchiy llacta, washing town, place where large solid things are washed ; quite suitable to the village of the name on the eastern end of Lake Andalgala. The Kechua origin of these names is plain. But if the Caca or Catamarefio, as it is sometimes called, was merely a dialect of the Kechua, why did Barzana speak of it asa separate tongue? Pos- sibly because the differences in sound were so great as to render it unintelligible to a person familiar only with the dialect of Cuzco. For the present the evidence seems sufficient to consider the Calchaquis a more or less mixed branch of the Kechua family, and the supposition formerly advanced by myself and others that they constituted an independent stock seems unwarranted. The Quitefio dialect was held by Von Tschudi to present features of higher antiquity than that of Cuzco. So far as I know, there are few published specimens of it.* The Chinchasuyu or Chinchaya dialect, also one of the northern branches of the tongue, has been sufficiently analyzed by Von Tschudi in his work on the language, his materials being drawn from the Appendix to the second and third editions of Diego de Torres Rubio’s Arte de la lengua Quechua, and from the manu- scripts of the German engineer, Hermann Gohring.t He finds the pronunciation softer. Certain differences in the verbs appear, in part, to be neologisms. And there is a rather large number of words which are wholly diverse in the two dialects. - The Lamafio is said by Von Tschudi to be closely allied to the Quitefio, but he acknowledges that he was not personally familiar with it. Whether the Incas, that is, the gens from whom the war and peace chiefs were selected, had a language or dialect peculiar to themselves, as asserted by Garcilasso de la Vega—and by nobody else—has been again brought up for discussion lately by Dr. E. W. Middendorf. He maintains that they had, and that this secret language was the Aymara.{ This he does in the face of the fact that every one of the eleven words which Garcilasso quotes from this mysterious tongue turns out either to be pure Kechua or froma *An Arte, printed at Lima in 1753, of this dialect, is mentioned by Ludewig, Lit. of Amer. Aborig. Langs., p. 162. + Organismus der Ketchua Sprache, Einleitung, p. 65. {See the Introduction to his work, Das Runa Simi oder der Keshua-Sprache (Leipzig, 1890). Brinton.] 94 [Feb. 5, Kechua radical.* Dr. Middendorf holds his opinion not so much on the evidence, as to support his favorite theory that the Kechua civilization was derived from the Aymaras and that the Inca gens was of Aymara descent. Unfortunately, he has not acquainted himself with the real constitution of the Kechua social system. It » has been ably and satisfactorily analyzed by Dr. Gustav Briihl + and later by Heinrich Cunow.{ The precise relationship of the Aymara language to the Kechua | has received considerable further elucidation through Dr. Midden- dorf’s recent studies. He supplies a list of about five hundred and seventy words, which have approximately the same form and sense in the two tongues, and a second list of about one hundred words. which are alike in form but with more or less variation in sense. There is also a strong phonetic likeness between the tongues, and their gramniatical characteristics approach each other. His conelu- sion is that ‘‘ Aymara and Kechua are sister languages, but are like children of mixed marriages ; for while they agree in their essential nature (in ihrem Wesen) quite to the most trivial peculiarities, yet in external grammatical form, as well as in the larger part of their vocabulary, they are wholly asunder.’’ § This is substantially the conclusion reached by that master of linguistic science, Prof. H. Steinthal, who has ably explained the identities and diversities of these two tongues on principles of the general philosophy of language. || It is probable that further light would be thrown on this question, so interesting for the information its settlement would yield on the: origin of Peruvian civilization and the archeology of the region. around Lake Titicaca, were the comparison instituted between the oldest, and therefore purest, forms of the two tongues; and it is. partly to call attention to some rare or unpublished materials suit- able for this purpose that I have introduced the subject. * Von Tschudi, Organismus der Khelsua-Sprache, Einleitung, s, 65. Wilhelm von Hum- boldt was the first to identify the words adduced by Garcilasso as: members of the governs Brohl, Die Cullurvilker Alt-Amerikas (Cincinnati, 1887). 1 Das peruanische Verwandtschaftssystem und die Geschlechtsverbiinde der Inka,” in Das Ausland, 1991, As to the “ secret language,’’ Cunow says, after discussing what words of it we find In Garcilasso—'' Man sieht, von einer Geheimsprache kann keine Rede ~ "hee Dr. BE. W. Middendorf, Die Aimard-Sprache, s. 285, seq. (Leipzig, 1891), and Das Runa Simi oder der Keahua-Sprache, 8, 2 (Leipzig, 1890). 1 Das Verhiltuiss zwischen dem Ketschua und Aimard,” in the Compte Rendu of the Congrés dea Américaniates, 7eme Session (1888), p. 465, 1892.] 95 [Brinton. Assuming with most Kechuists that the trend of migration was from north to south, we should look towards the north for the oldest ' forms of the tongue. This, as I have said, Von Tschudi did ; but both he and Dr. Middendorf state that they had not seen the work on the Quitefio dialect printed at Lima in 1753, nor apparently any MS. on the structure of the northernmost branches of the tongue. A vocabulary is mentioned by Von Tschudi, dated in 1814, which gives words of the idiom as spoken in the dioceses of Maynas and Ucayali. This could be supplemented by a later MS. in my library, con- taining a Diccionario castellano-inga (y inga castellano) segun se habla en las montanas limitrofes del Ucayali and a Gramatica del idioma Inga acomodado al modo de hablar de los manottas y Maynas. It is dated 1868, and the author is given as Fr. Mariano Castellan- zuelo ; but it appears, in part at least, to be founded on some earlier work. A comparison of this MS. with the grammars of Von Tschudi and Middendorf shows that the dialect of Maynas, the most eastern of all the Kechua dialects, is more closely akin to the Cuzcefio than to the Quitefio, both in vocabulary and structure. It does not pre- sent the terminal mga to the verbal stem, common in the latter. In vocabulary it is nearer the classical Kechua than to the Chinchaya ; for example: . MAYNAS. KECHUA OF CUZCO. CHINCHAYA. Town, lacta, Uacta, marca. Head, uma, uma, peka, Water, yacu, unu, _ yacu. Small, uchucela, huchuccla, tkehiecla. Cold, chire, chiri, cahcha. For the Aymara, the comparison should. be made with its purest form. This was confessedly the Pacasa dialect and not the Lupaca, in which the Arte and Diccionario of Bertonio were composed. At present, although the distinction between the dialects has been in a measure erased by the facilities of modern intercourse, there remain extensive variations both in grammar and vocabulary.* The excel- lent work of Dr. Middendorf is founded on what purports to be the Pacasa; and in the Brown Library, at Providence, there is a modern folio MS. by D. B. de Merian, entitled Historia D. NV. *Dr. E. W. Middendorf, Die Aymara-Sprache, Einleitung (Leipzig, 1891). Brinton.] : 96 [Feb. 5, J. C. in Lingué Pacasé. It contains the original and an interlinear translation in Latin. I quote the following passage as an example; TExT IN THE PacasA DIALECT OF THE AYMARA LANGUAGE. Ancha hacha llaquisinapana kerisinapa vila humppiiapsa Summe afflictionis sue agone suo, sanguineo sudore suoque finito tacutatha collna Jesusa cintt carcta uraquetha divinus Jesus valdé fatigatus de _ terra surgens, sartussina yatichatanacparu cutinira. ad discipulos suos_ rediit. Verum eos valdé dormientes Maasca acanaca conti iquisquirt hacjatassina parajtayana deprehendens, eos excitavit, dicens: ‘Surgite! Jam enim venit sassina sartupjama niupilla purt aljirthaja venditor meus: quomodo vos dormitis? non videtis lamisaraqui humana ~ cuja iquisipjiquita — hanati quomodo inimicus meus non dormit, sed Judeorum in manus ulljapjta, camisa aucahaja hanthua iquiti, suas ad tradendum me jam adest?’’ Verum, divine Jesus, maasca Judiona cana amparanacparu catuyana hattaqui non solum de discipulis tuis conquerere, de hujus urbis incolis. niahua piori? Maasca collana dJesusay haniqui etiam conquerere, qui in omnibus et singulis animas yatichatanamatha quejastratt aca marca haquenacatha, suas salvandi rebus semper dormitant, semper otiosi sunt. (From the Historia D. N. J. C. in Lingua Pacasd, diocesis urbis de la Paz. Descripsit D. B. de Merian. MB. folio.) IX. AFFINITIES OF SOUTH AND NORTH AMERICAN LANGUAGES. The first scientific attempt to show a connection between South and North American languages was that read by Dr. Max Uhle before the Congrés des Américanistes at Berlin in 1888, and pub- lished in the Compte Rendu of that association. It was confined to demonstrating a relationship between the Chibcha dialects ot northwestern South America to the Costa Rican dialects, which have been so fruitfully studied by Gabb and Thiel.* * Ihave summarized the evidence in The American Race, pp. 184-186. I do not over- look the Rev. William Herzog's article in the Archiv fiir Anthrop., 1884, entitled, ‘‘ Ueber die Verwandtechaftabezichungen der costaricensischen Indianer-Sprachen mit denen von Central. und 80d-Amerika ;"’ but it does not take up the subject in a scientific man- ner, and hence its results are unsatisfying. 1892.] 97 (Brinton. Still more recently an effort has been made by Dr. A. Ernst, of Caracas, to establish a linguistic connection between the dialects of the Timote stock, who occupy the Cordillera in the district of Mérida (8° N. lat.), and the Costa Rican dialects, thus bringing the Timotes into the Chibcha stock, as he expressly claims. He goes yet further and seeks to discover verbal identities between the Timote and the Guatuso, spoken in Nicaragua on the Rio Frio. The latter is not supposed to be related to the Costa Rican dialects, which makes Dr. Ernst’s theory the more important could it be substantiated. He has published a list of forty-five words in an article in the Boletin del Ministerio de Obras Piublicas for April 8, ' 1891 (Caracas, Venezuela), on which he bases his claim. I trans- late and arrange these words, and shall exainine the alleged analogies. ; SUPPOSED AFFINITIES BETWEEN ‘TIMOTE, CosTA RICAN AND. Guatuso Worps. TIMOTE Stock. Costa RICAN STOCK. GUATUSO. Man, caac, caga, caca (father). ; Woman, cursum, ra cur, curiza (female). Wife, carigura, curijurit (woman). Mother, shugte, shu. Man, white, ticep, sudat, otshapa (sefior). Woman, white, téciura, sora. Child, timua, éstamura (little). Boy, sari, hara, tshaasoroj, araptshaura. Brother, cushis, ayt, tshi. Head, kitsham, kotshen (a point). Mouth, macabé, macokica. Tongue, shikivoi, — kerkuo. Foot, cujt, bukurd. Fire, shirup, yuc, tyuc, tshicra. Water, shimpue, divua (a torrent). Stone, tituup, t-tthu-wah, capi (hard). Wood, tisep, dshi-shiba. Salt, shapi, tsheba (pepper). Meat, shoroe, susturic (deer). Flesh, Skin, mishu, maiza. Anima], ticagtiai, — ogud. Dog, lisirki, shiti. Snake, sui, shuah. Flea, tkes, shiike. “PROC. AMER. PHILOS, 80C. XXX. 1387. M. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1892. Brinton.] 98 [Feb. 5, TIMOTE STOCK. CosTaA RICAN STOCK. GUATUSO. Scorpion, tkiyut, tktth. Hawk, kué, eué. Egg, shicapo, cup, icup. Pepper, sicas, shiboh, tsheba. Maize, shipyac, cupac (cornfield). Bread, suridipa, tp (maize). Town, musipuc, coc (place), sust (to dwell), nicona puca (to live). Night, kisi, shki. Thief, shisnugui, nruoéh. Morning, atk, seék, When, pena, ping. Sweet, shibo biuk. To go, guateque, ta toeh (I go). It rains, oki moi, tshokt, One, cart, krara. Two, ca-bé, burtk. On looking over this list it is obvious that the Guatuso affinities are too slight to justify the assumption of a relationship. The syllable cur in the words for woman, and shu for mother, are the only elements that offer a real similarity, and this is too scanty a supply to work on. In the Costa Rican analogies the sense is often too remote. It is scarcely fair to consider ‘‘ father’? and ‘‘man’”’ as identical ideas ; or ‘‘child’’ and “ little ;’’ ** head ’’ and ‘* point ;”’ ** meat ”’ and ‘‘ deer ;’’ ‘‘salt’’ and ‘pepper ;”’ ‘* maize ’’ and “ cornfield,”’ etc. Selecting words so asunder in meaning and choosing, from several dialects on both sides, apparent analogies can always be found. Other words present, in fact, no resemblance, as sud?¢ to licep, divua to shimpue, t-uhu-wah to tituup, etc. There remain a few actual similarities which may be linguistic identities ; but these should probably be explained by the fact that the Timote tribes lived near those of Chibcha lineage, and doubtless borrowed from them a number of terms. Such loan words are found in the tongues of all nations who reside in close proximity for a few generations. I conclude, therefore, that the Timote must still be regarded as an independent stock, and its connection with any in North America has not yet been demonstrated. On crossing the mountain chain which separates Costa Rica 1892.] 99 [Brinton. from Nicaragua, we enter a territory which was at the discovery occupied by nations whose traditions and linguistic affinities - pointed to the higher latitudes of North America. Such was the Nahuatl tribe, who occupied the islands and southern shores of Lake Nicaragua, and the Mangues, who peopled the borders of Lake Managua. The latter were closely related to the Chapanecs of Chiapas, speaking the same tongue with slight dialectic variations. One band of the Mangues, about four hundred in number, was found by the early explorers among the Guaymis, one of the Costa Rican tribes whose language has marked affinities to the Chibcha idioms of New Granada. The close relations thus established between the two stocks reappear in the Mazatec language, spoken in the district of Teutitlan del Camino, State of Oaxaca. Availing myself of a MS. vocabulary of this language, furnished me by M. A. Pinart, I have shown that it is essentially a Chapanecan dialect, but with a strong infusion of Costa Rican, and especially Guaymi, elements, and presents the most northern example of the influence of South American upon North American languages.* The following examples will illustrate the similarity : MAZATEC, Costa RICAN, Sun, 8ui, chut or sua, Moon, 8a, 86, sie (or 2a). Ear, schical, quhyca, sehuke. Eye, schcu, 8’dcvo, dcua. Hair, coshé, | schd, quyhé. Man, chi, he-chi-che. Woman, chu, sue, git. Rain, tei, siu. Sea, dachicu, dechequ-tn. Foot, tzoco, tsuku. Head, thu, Ookua, Nose, nito, nido-n. ‘The Mazatecs were a people of considerable culture, celebrated for their religious fervor, and for the important temples and sanctu- aries established in their country, prominent remains of which still exist. * See a paper by me in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, January, 1892, entitled ‘‘The Mazatec Language and its Affinities.’’ Brinton. ] 100 ’ [Feb. 5, X. ON THE DIALECTS OF THE BETOYAS AND TUCANOS. The most recent writer on the Tucanos of the Rio Negro and Upper Amazon, Dr. Franz Pfaff, observes: ‘‘ Ueber die Stammes- verwandtschaft der Tucanos kann mit einiger Sicherheit nichts be- hauptet werden.’?* Von Martius believed them a horde of the Tapuya (Gés, Botocudo) stock; but their language betrays no such relationship except in a few, doubtless borrowed, words. They are equally far from the great Tupi, Arawack and Carib stocks. But I believe I can show by conclusive evidence that this hitherto unidentified people speak a language akin to that of the Betoyas and Tamas, whose home is located on the eastern slope of the Cor- dillera, between the head waters of the rivers Apure and Meta. My further studies of the Betoya dialects have resulted in discov- ering for them a much wider extension than I assigned in Zhe American Race. They can be traced through about ten degrees of latitude (from 3° South latitude northeastward to 7° North Jatitude) in a large number of tribes resident on the rivers Napo, Putumayo, Caqueta, Uaupes, Negro, Meta and Apure. The affini- ties of many of these tribes are asserted by the early missionaries, whose testimony on such points was based on a study of the lan. guages. One of the most useful of these sources is the /Voficias Autenticas del Famoso Rio Marafion, composed by an anonymous Jesuit missionary, and recently published for the first time under the competent editorship of Jimenez de la Espada by the Geo- graphical Society of Madrid. Another Jesuit, Father Padilla, in a letter to the Abbé Hervas, stated from personal knowledge that the Straras, les, Airicos and Situjas all speak dialects of Betoya; while Gumilla names as other dialects the Luculia, Jabua, Arauca (probably for Atrica), Quéli- Jay, Anabali, Lalaca and Atabaca. The town Befoye itself is situated on a small affluent of the Cas- anare, in 6° North latitude, at the foot of the mountain chain known as the ‘* Paramo de Chisga,’’ inhabited by a wild tribe of unknown affinities, the Chifareros. The anonymous writer already referred to states that in 1730 the Jesuits had seven ‘‘ reductions’’ among the Icaguates (Piojes) of * Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesell. fiir Anthrop., etc., 1890, 8. 608, + Glomaria Linguarum Brasiliensium, p. 283. 1892. 101 (Brinton. the Napo, and their missions extended north to the banks of the Putumayo, on which stream were the Amaguages and the Qco- guages. Below the latter, and occupying most of the district be- tween the middle Putumayo on the north and the lower Napo and Amazon on the south, were a number of tribes collectively called Zeonas (Seones), comprising the Cungies, Parianas, Cenceguages and others. These spoke a tongue allied to that of the Icahuates (Piojes) ; while ‘‘ the Meguas, Seizos, Tamas, Acunejos and Atuaras are all of one tongue.’’ The editor, Jimenez de la Espada, speak- ing from personal knowledge gained on the spot, identifies the modern Piojes with the Zxcadbel/ados of the Spanish writers and the Icaguates of the Jesuits. It is greatly to be regretted that the ample material existing in manuscript for the study of the Zeona language has not been made accessible. Col. Joaquin Acosta had in his library a Diccionario y Doctrina en lengua Zeona of 416 pages and another MS. of 116 pages. He expected to present them to the public library of Bogota, but I have not been able to ascertain whether they are there. From these materials I present the following list of tribes who should be classed in this linguistic family : THE Beroya LinGuistTic STOCK. Acanejos, a branch of the Tamas. Aguaricos, a branch of the Tamas. Airicos (Ayricos), adjoin Betoyes to the south. Amaguages, on upper Caqueta. Anibalis, on Rio Apure. Atuaras, a branch of the Tamas. Avijiras, on Rio Napo. Becuaries, a branch of the Jeaguates. Betoyes, on and near R. Casanare. Cenceguages, on upper Putumayo south of the Correguages. Ceonas = Zeonas. Oobeus, north of the Tucanos. _Correguages, on head waters of Caqueta and Putumayo. Owngies (Kemgeioios), on R. Cungies, a branch of R. Putumayo. Curetus (Coretus), west of the Tucanos. Dacé = Tucanos. Eles, north of Betoyes, on Rio Casanare. Encabellados = Piojes. Ieahuates (Icaguates, Icayuages), former name of Piojes. Jamas, on Rio Manacacia, Jaunas, near River Uauper. 102 : [Feb. 5. Brinton.]} Jupuas, on Rio Apaporis. Lolacos, a branch of the Betoyas. Macaguages, on Rios Caucaya, Mecaya and Sensella. Magueias, a branch of the [cahuates. Malifilitos, a branch of the Betoyas. Neguas, a branch of the Tamas. Ocoguages, on R. Putumayo, near R. Pineya. Pararies, a branch of the Zeonas. Payaguas, a branch of the Jeahuates.. Pequeyas, a branch of the Piojes. Piojes, on Rios Putumayo, Napo and Cocaya. Pouzevaries, a branch of the Jcahuates, Quiiifayes, on Rio Apure. Seizos, a branch of the Tamas. Seones = Zeonas. Situfas (or Situjas), on Rio Casanare. Tamas, on Rio Yari and R. Cagua. 2 axe Tucanos, on the Rio Uaupes. Uaupes, on R. Uaupes. Yapuas, a branch of the Piojes. Yehebos, a branch of the Jcahuates. Yetes, a branch of the Piojes. Zenseies, a branch of the Zeonas. Zeonas, between lower Napo and Patumayo rivers. Several of these names are synonyms, or merely the same word with varying orthography. ‘The specific termination of nomina gentilia in the Betoya dialects would seem to be guage, which is perhaps the guce, house, household, people, of the Correguage. Thus, Oco-guage water people, this tribe, according to Markham, being remarkably skillful canoemen. Ye¢e is the Corr. for *‘ hands.”’ ‘* Pioje’’ is the negative ‘‘no,’’ with which these natives reply to — all inquiries addressed them by travelers. Other of the names be- long to the Lingoa Geral; as, Payagua— enemies ; Pararie ( para- uara), parti-colored, 7. ¢., painted men; A/wara=the basket (making) men; /ufua in the Jauna dialect means “tree’’ or **wood’’ men, while Javna means, in the /ingoa geral, ‘ water- men.’’ Dacé is the name of the Toucan bird in the Tucano dialect. **Curetu’’ in the 4ngoa gera/ is an opprobrious epithet, ‘ rascals.”’ It was applied to several tribes. Balbi, in his Aé/as Ethnographique, gives a short vocabulary of one of these ‘‘ rascal’’ tribes, who lived at Ega on the Amazon. It has no connection with the Curetu of the Rio Apaporis. 1892. ] 103 {Brinton. The Jupua and Curetu dialects are properly one and the same, the difference which appears in their vocabularies arising simply from inequality in the ears and the orthographies of observers. This is evident by the following comparison of the vocabularies of Martius (German orthography) and Wallace (English orthography) : JUPUA (MARTIUS). CURETU (WALLACE). Blood, thik, di. Bow, patopai, patuetper. Earth, thitta, ditla. Flesh, ga'hi', se'hea’. Finger, moh-asving, mu-etshu. Fire, pieri, piure. Flower, pagari, bagaria. Foot, goaphe, giapa. Hair, pod, plioa. Hand, moho, muhu, Head, co'ére, cuilri. House, wu't, wee. Mouth, thischith, dishi. Sun, — hauva, aouée: Tongue, toro, dolo. Tooth, gobackaa', ~ gophpecuh. Water, thiico, deco. Woman, nomoa, nomi. These two, the Jupua and Curetu, together with the Jauna’ and Cobeu, form with the Tucano a group of dialects closely related among themselves; and they are a branch of the same mother tongue as the Betoya, Tama, Pioje and Correguage, which, in turn, present also merely dialectic differences between each other.* In spite of the imperfect materials yet available to study this extended family, the relationship of its scattered members is de- monstrable. To illustrate it, I submit the following : COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY OF THE BETOYA AND TucANo DIALECTIC GROUPS. Betoya Group: B. =Betoi; C.—=Correguage; P.—Pioje; T. Tama. Tucano Group: Cob.==Cobeu; Cur.=Curetu; Jup.—Jupua; Tuc. = Tucano. *Dr. Pfaff (u. s. p. 603) has compared five words of the Tucano, Coretu and Cobeu, pre- senting similarities ; and Dr. Ernst (Zeitschrift fiir Ethnol., 1891) has shown similarities of six words in Tamas and Tucano ; but a general survey of the stock has not heretofore been offered. 104 Brinton. ] [Feb. 5, Man, umasot, B. ; emiud,C.; eum, imea, Tuc.; ermeu, Cob., Cur. Woman, domt, C.; romeo, T.; nomi, Cur.; nomio, Tuc. Fire, * to'a, P., T.; fu-tui, B toua, Cob. Water, oo. BO, oco, Tuc.; héggoa, Jup. Rain, oco-raime, C.; oco-ro, Tue. Tongue, chimenu, P.; chemeno, Tuc.; erimendo, Cob. Hand, © r’umocoso (my hand), umoca, Tuc. Foot, coapi, C.; goaphae, Jup.; giapa, Cur. Teeth, cojini, C.; coping, Cob. Nose, j inkepiu (thy), C.; enkenha, Tuc. Forehead, siapue, C.; jopue, T.; dipua, righpoah (head), Tue. Breast (mamma), ozecho, C.; ox-penno, Tuc. Meat, guai, C.; ga'hi, Jup. Maize, huka, P.; o-hoka, Tuc. Jaguar, ta't, P.; chat, C.; jih, Sup. Parrot, gueco, C.; wezki, Tue. Deer, nama, C.; tkama, Jup. Egg, tsta, C.; dia, Cur. Fowl, cura, C.; caru-hin, Cob. Monkey, tangue, C.; azke, Tuc. Stone, cata, C.; iztana (=+t-cata-na), Tuc. Star, manioco, C.; jocheo’, Jup.; ambiocowa, Cor. ; wa’coa, Tuc. Banana, ohoh, P., C.; ohoh, Tue. Son, sit, C.; si-mugt, Cur. Sky, quen-eme, O.; imina, J.; imi-se, Tue. Canoe, choque, C.; yuki, Tuc. Devil, guato, C.; ouatin, Tuc. Enemy, pat-name, C.; ua-pat, Tuc. Farewell, sayé, P.; uayé, Tue. In other words, although the identity of the radicals exists, it is not visible in the forms presented. Thus, in Wallace’s vocabulary both ‘*sun’’ and ‘‘ moon’’ are rendered by wifo, which is the Be- toya ubo, sky, heaven. Domi, nomio, *‘woman,"’ is really a compound of the Betoya feminine vo, female, and em/, or uma, “ man’’ (homo), as is easily seen in the Tama ro-mceo. Very few analogies are visible to the Tapuya (Gés) dialects, to which the Tucano has usually been assigned. The only one of importance is the word for fire, pekhami (Tuc.), page ( Jauna), which appears to be the Botocudo és, ” 1892.] 105 (Brinton. The conception of number is very slightly developed in this stock, and even the dialects most closely related show wide varia- tions ; for example: BETOYA. TAMA. PIOJE. 1, edoyoyot, teyo, mono (finger). 2, edoi, ca'yapa, tsamun-cua. 3, thutu, cho-teyo (2-4-1), tsamun-huente-cua. 4, thutu-edoyoyoi (3+-1), ca/yapa-ria (2again), tajeseca. 5, 7u-mocoso (hand), cia-jente (hand), teserapin. In the vocabularies both moko and jente ( fe) are given for hand, and both are used in the words for ‘ five.’ In the Tucano group the dialect which has iota inad the strongest affinities is the Curetu: CURETU One, tchudyu (= Betoya édyuyu). Two, ap-adyu (= ‘“ édyu). Three, arayu. Four, apaedydi (2 + 2). Five, tchumupa. I believe the evidence here briefly presented will be adequate to prove the extended affinities of this stock, and to vindicate its __ importance in South American ethnography. How far its analogies may be traced north and west I have not sufficient materials to determine. In Zhe American Race, p. 275, I pointed out a few similarities between Betoya and Choco roots; and I would particularly mention that the words for ‘‘man”’ and ‘‘ woman,”’ uma and ira, reported by early explorers (in 1515) as in use along the northern shore of Venezuela and the Isthmus of Panama, cer- tainly belong to the Betoya language.* * ‘En toda esta tierra llaman 4 los hombres omes, y 4 las mugeres iras.” See J. Acosta, Historia de Nueva Granada, p. 453. The tract referred to is from the Gulf of Uraba to the Punto del Nombre de Dios, along the shore of the Isthmus of Panama. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 137. N. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1892. 106 [Jan. 15, Stated Meeting, January 16, 1892. Present, 47 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows : A circular from the Observatoire National Astronomique et Météorologique d’Athénes, asking exchanges, which was agreed to. ee A circular from M. Julio N. Rosas, announcing his appoint- ment as Director Général de Statistique de la Provincia de Buenos Aires, La Plata. . A circular from the Royal Geographical Society, on the orthography of geographical names. Letters of envoy from the Observatory, Adelaide, 8. Aus- tralia; Biblioteca N. C. di Firenze; Musée Guimet, Paris; Meteorological Office, Zodlogical Society, London, Eng. Letters of acknowledgment from the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia, Melbourne, Victoria (131-134); Tokyo Library (135); Prof. Dr. Ludwig Riitimeyer, Basel, Switzer- land (135); Direccion General de Estadistica de la Provincia de Buenos Aires, La Plata (131, 182, 183, 184). Accessions to the Library were reported from the Observa- tory, Adelaide, Australia; Count R. d’Hulst, Alexandria, Egypt; Anthropological Society, Tokyo; Société Imp. des Naturalestes, Moscow; Physical Central-Observatoriums, Bibliotheque Geologique de la Russie, St. Petersburg; Acade- mie R. de Belgique, Bruxelles; K. Nordiske Oldskrift Selskab, Copenhagen; Physiologische Gesellschaft, Berlin; R. Ministero della Instruzione Publica, Firenze; R. Istituto Lombardo, Milan; Société des Antiquaires de Picardie, Amiens, France ; Société Historique, Littéraire, etc., Du Cher, Bourges; Société de Borda, Dax; Société des Sciences Naturelles, etc., de la Creuse, Guéret ; Société des Sciences Naturelles, La Rochelle; Ecole des Mines, Musée Guimet, Société Zoologique de France, Société D’ Anthropologie, Société N. des Antiquaires de France, LE PAR PRN NE NAME LEE ge 1892.] 107 Paris; Société de Géographie, Toulouse; Académie N. des Sciences, etc., Bordeaux; Société des Antiquaires de la Morinie, Saint Omer; Zodlogical Society, London; Geological Society, Manchester; Natural History Society, Montreal; Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba, Winnepeg; Harvard Uni-- versity, Cambridge, Mass.; Travelers’ Insurance Co., Hartford, Conn.; Editors of the “ American Journal of Science,” Agri- cultural Experiment Station, New Haven, Conn.; Agricul- tural Experiment Station, Storrs, Conn.; Mathematical So- ciety, New York; Engineers’ Club, College of Pharmacy, Franklin Institute, Hydrographic Office, Dr. Charles A. Oliver, Philadelphia; State Board of Health, Nashville; Experiment Station of Florida, Lake City; Editor of “ Journal of Compara- tive Neurology,” Cincinnati, O.; Sociedad Cientifica “ Antonio Alzate,” Mexico. The decease of the following members was announced : General Montgomery C. Meigs, Washington, D. C.; born May 3, 1816; died January 2, 1892. Mr. Addison May, West Chester, Pa.; died January 8, 1892, » wt. 80. . Mr. Edward Penington, Philadelphia; died December, 1891. Prof. Jean Louis Armand de Quatrefages, at Paris, January 12, 1892, st. 82. This being the evening for the selection of the Standing _ Committees of the Society, for the ensuing year, on motion the President was authorized to appoint the same, which he sub- sequently did as follows: 4 Finance. William B. Rogers, Philip C. Garrett, Charles S. Wurts. Hall. J. Sergeant Price, William A. Ingham, Charles A. Oliver. Publication. Daniel G. Brinton, George H. Horn, Samuel Wagner, Patterson Du Bois, Horace Jayne. 108 [Jan. 15, Library. Edwin J. Houston, William John Potts, Jesse Y. Burk, William H. Greene, William 8S. Baker. ‘ Michaux Legacy. Thomas Meehan, J. Sergeant Price, William M. Tilghman, Isaac Burk, Isaac C. Martindale. Henry M. Phillips’ Prize Essay Fund. Richard Vaux, Henry Phillips, Jr. William V. McKean, Furman Sheppard, Joseph C. Fraley, The President and the Treasurer of the Society, ex officio. This being the evening for the election of Librarian, a ballot was held and the tellers reported that Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., had received 28 votes and Mr. Benjamin Smith Lyman had received 12 votes; whereupon Mr. Phillips was declared duly elected Librarian for the ensuing year. [Secretary Phillips present and not voting.] Pending nominations Nos. 1232 and 123%, and new nomi- nations Nos. 1234, 1235, 1236, 1237, 1238, 1239 and 1240 were read, The Committee appointed to examine the paper of Prof. Cope, offered at the last meeting for the Transactions, reported progress and was continued. Dr. Brinton presented the following papers for the Proceed- ings: “On the Mazatecan Language of Mexico, and its A ffini- ties,” and “Observations on the Chinantec Language of Mex- ico.” The Committee on the Michaux Legacy presented a paper on “lhe Temperate and Alpine Floras of the Giant Volcanoes of Mexico,” by Prof. Angelo Heilprin, which was ordered to be printed as a part of its report. The report of the Committee, on the Publications of the Society, appointed December, 1890, was then taken up. The report was then read, signed by the Chairman and three I ee ey se, other members of the Committee, the Chairman stating in answer to inquiry that the signature of the other member was withheld on account of his not approving the second resolu- tion. The resolutions were then read as follows: ResolWwed, 1. That the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society be issued quarterly, and also at more frequent periods whenever an amount of matter is ready for press, which will make sixty-four pages of text, but so as not to interfere with the regularity of the quarterly issue, Resolved, 2. That in order to permit estimates of the cost of illustra- tions, authors shall submit either completed drawings or the specimens to be drawn ; and that the Secretaries shall accept either as sufficient basis for the publication of articles otherwise unobjectionable. On motion of Dr. Frazer, the Society proceeded to the con- sideration of report of the first resolution. A debate took place thereon, participated in by Messrs. Price, Morris, Hous- ton, Cope, Frazer, Barker, Vaux, Martindale and Horn. Mr. Martindale moved to strike out all after the word “quarterly ” and to insert thereafter the words “ provided suf- ficient material shall be furnished for that purpose.” The amendment being put to a vote was carried and a vote being taken on the resolution as amended it was adopted. The question then arising on the adoption of the second resolution, Dr: Brinton stated his reasons for declining to recommend the same, and offered as an amendment the substi- tution of the word “may” for “shall” in the third line, to read “the Secretaries may, etc.” The amendment was carried and the resolution as amended was adopted. On motion of Mr. Dudley, the Society adjourned. 110 [Feb. 5, Stated Meeting, February 5, 1892. Present, 8 members. Dr. Morris in the Chair. The following correspondence was submitted : A letter from Commander F. M. Green, U.S. A., giving suf- ficient reasons for declining the membership in the Society to which he had been elected. A circular from the Manchester Geographical Society, an- nouncing the decease of its President, the Duke of Devonshire. A letter from Gustav Fock, bookseller in Leipzig, offering for sale the library of the late Prof. Zarnke for 45,000 marks. Accessions to the Library were announced from the Royal Society of South Australia, Prof. H. Y. L. Brown, Adelaide ; Linnean Society of N.S. Wales, Sydney; Prof. H. H. Risley, Calcutta; Section fiir Naturkunde O. T. C., Vienna; K. danske Geografiske Selskab, Copenhagen; Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde, Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft, Horticultur- Gesellschaft, Messrs. Friedliinder & Sons, Berlin; K. Sichsische Meteorologische Institut, Chemnitz; Société des Sciences Naturelles, Fribourg; Verein fiir Erdkunde, Halle a. S.; Verein fiir Thiiringische Geschichte und Altertumskunde, Jena; K., Siichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig ; K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Munich; R. Societatas Scientiarum, Upsal; Etat Indépendant du Congo, Bruxelles ; Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles, Lausanne; Société de Géographie, Lille; Université de Lyon; Société de L’En- seignement Supérieur, Marquis de Nadaillac, Paris; R. Aca- demia de la Historia, R. Academia de Ciencias, ete., Madrid ; Meteorological Council, R, Statistical Society, Society of Arts, Royal Society, Editors of the “Geological Magazine,” Mr. Frederick Arthur Crisp, London; Agricultural Experiment Stations at Bangor, Me., Amherst, Mass., Kingston, R. I., Au- burn, Ala,, College Station, T’ex., Corvallis, Oreg., Laramie, Wyo.; National Civil Service Reform League, Boston ; 1892.) 3 111 Hon. Robert C. Winthrop, Prof. Eben Norton Horsford, Har- vard University, Cambridge; Essex Institute, Salem ; Brown University, Providence, R. I.; Prof. E. North, Clinton, N. Y.; Free Public Library, Jersey City ; Bureau of Statistics of New Jersey, Trenton; American Pharmaceutical Association, Drexel Institute, Drs. J. E. Ives, D. Jayne, J. C. Ayer, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia ; American Chemical Society, Baltimore; Anthropological Society, Bureau of Navigation, Mr. Lester F. Ward, Washington, D. C.; Oberlin College, Oberlin, O.; Colorado Scientific Society, Denver; Observatoire Météorologique Central, Observatorio Astronémico Nacional de Tacubaya, Mexico; Observatorio Nacional Argentino, Buenos Aires: Museo de La Plata; Prof. Ladislau Netto, Rio de Janeiro. | The Committee on Dr. Cope’s Paper for the Transactions reported the same to be worthy of publication and was dis- charged. — Photographs of the following members were presented for the Society’s Album : Dr. Thomas Chase, Providence, R. I. Dr. J. L. Campbell, Crawfordsville, Ind. Dr. W.G. A. Bonwill, Philadelphia. Mr. Charles Truscott presented a photograph from the por- trait of Franklin owned by the Society. Miss Emily Phillips presented a locket containing hair of General Andrew Jackson. The following announcements of the deaths of members were made : ) _. Paul Hunfalvy, Budapesth, December, 1891. Andrew C. Ramsay, London, December, 1891. Thomas Jefferson Lee, Baltimore, December, 1891. ' Rey. Joseph F. Garrison, Camden, N. J., January, 1892, eet. 70. The President appointed Mr. William John Potts to pre- pare the obituary notice of Dr. Garrison. Prof. Cope offered for the Transactions a paper by himself on “The Homologies of the Posterior Cranial Arches in the 112 [Feb. 19, teptilia,” which was referred to a Committee to be appointed by the President.* Dr. Cope offered for the Proceedings “A Contribution to the Vertebrate Palzontology of Texas.” Dr. Brinton presented for the Proceedings “ Studies in the South American Native Languages,” which was ordered to be printed. The paper by Dr. Bonwill, “Geometry and Mechanics Deny Evolution,” was made the special order for March 4, 1892. Pending nominations 1232 to 1240 (inclusive) were read. On motion of Dr. Brinton, it was resolved that a Committee of three should be appointed by the President to consider the advisability of taking concerted action in connection with other learned societies for the celebration of the/four-hundredth anniversary of the discovery of America. + And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, February 19, 1892. Present, 12 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Acknowledgments (136) were received from the Geological Survey, Ottawa; Canadian Institute, Toronto; N.S. Institute of Science, Halifax; Society of Natural History, Maine His- torical Society, Portland, Me.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Amherst; Prof. C. H. Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H.; Vermont Historical Society, Montpelier; State Library of Massachusetts, Historical Society, Boston Public Library, Society of Natural History, Mr. Robert C. Winthrop, Boston ; *The President subsequently appointed as such Committee, Drs. Ryder, Jayne and Sharp. t The President subsequently appointed as such Committee, Drs, Brinton, Cope and Fraser, ser i Ray ad i aa a pe Se ie oe ome pee BIT yas EY ap tree “seal 1892] 113 Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Profs. A. Agassiz, Charles W. Eliot, Robert N. Toppan, Cambridge, Mass.; Dr. Pliny Earle, Northampton, Mass.; Essex Institute, Salem; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester; Brown Univer- sity, R. I. Historical’ Society, Providence; Mr. George F. Dunning, Farmington, Conn.; Historical Society, Theological Seminary, Hartford; Yale University, N. H. Colony Histori- cal Society, Profs. O. C. Marsh, H. A. Newton, W. D. Whitney, New Haven; Prof. James Hall, Albany; Society of Natural Sciences, Buffalo Library, Buffalo, N. Y.; Prof. HK. North, Clinton, N. Y.; Profs. J. M. Hart, J. E. Oliver, Ithaca, N. Y.; American Mureum of Natural History, Mathematical Society, Meteorological Observatory, New York Historical Society, Hospital Library, University of the City of New York, General Henry L. Abbot, Mr. Joel A. Allen, Prof. J. J. Stevenson, New York; Vassar Brothers Institute, Poughkeepsie; Oneida Historical Society, Utica; U. S. Military Academy, West Point; Prof. Henry M. Baird, Yonkers; Mr. Isaac ©. Martindale, Camden, N. J.; Profs. W.H. Green, C. A. Young, Princeton; Dr. Robert H. Alli- son, Ardmore, Pa.; Mr. Burnet Landreth, Bristol; Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Carlisle; Prof. Martin H. Boyé, Coopers- burg; Hon. Eckley B. Coxe, Drifton; Rev. Thomas C. Porter, Prof. J. W. Moore, Dr. Traill Green, Easton; Prof. Lyman B. Hall, Haverford College P.O.; Mr. Ario Pardee, Hazleton ; Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown; Academy of Natural Sciences, Engineers’ Club, Wagner Free Institute, Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, Philadelphia Library, Drs. W. G. A. Bonwill, H. C. Chapman, George Friebis, W. W. Keene, George R. Morehouse, Isaac Norris, Charles A. Oliver, C. N. Peirce, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, H. Clay Trumbull, Profs. John Ashhurst, Jr, F. A. Genth, Jr, H. D. Gregory, J. P. Lesley, John Marshall, Samuel P. Sadtler, H. W Spangler, Messrs. Henry Carey Baird, William 8S. Baker _ §. Castner, Jr., Thomas M. Cleemann, Patterson Du Bois, J. 8S. Harris, Wiliam A. Ingham, W. W. Jefferis, G. de B. Keim, James ‘I’. Mitchell, C. Stuart Patterson, Henry Phillips, Jr., PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOc. xxx. 187. 0. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1892. ' 1 14 [Feb. 19, Franklin Platt, Theodore D. Rand, Samuel Wagner, Talcott Williams, Admiral E. Y. Macauley, Philadelphia; Mr. Heber S. Thompson, Pottsville; Rev. G. W. Anderson, Rosemont, Pa.; Philosophical Society, Messrs. William Butler, Philip P. Sharpless, W. Townsend, West Chester; Maryland Insti- tute, Baltimore; Agricultural Experiment Station, College Park; Leander McCormick Observatory, University of Vir- ginia, Prof. J. W. Mallet, Charlottesville, Va.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Prof. I. C. White, Morgantown, W. Va. ; N.C. Agricultural Experiment Station, Raleigh ; University of Alabama, University P. O.; Agricultural Experiment Station, College Station, Tex.; Prof. E. W. Claypole, Akron, O.; Cincinnati Observatory ; Editor of the “ Journal of Comp. Neurology,” Granville, O.; Columbia Athenzeum, Tenn.; Prof. J. L. Campbell, Crawfordsville, Ind.; Experiment Station, La Fayette, Ind.; Historical Society, Chicago; © Academy of Science, St. Louis; Geological Survey of Missouri, Jefferson City; General William F. Reynolds, Detroit, Mich. ; Kansas Academy of Science, Topeka ; State Historical Society, Madison, Wis.; University of California, Berkeley; Prof. George Davidson, San Francisco, Cal. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Tokyo Anthropological Society (185); Société de Geographie, Bucarest, Roumania (185); University Library, St. Peters- burg (135); Société de Géographie de Finlande, Helsingfors (131-135); Société R. des Sciences, Upsal, Sweden (134); Maatschappij de Nederlandsche Letterkunde, Leiden (135) ; Société Neuchateloise de Geographie, Neuchatel (185); Re- daction der “ Naturwissenschaftlichen Wochenschrift,” Berlin (185); Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Emden (185); Ober- hess. Gesellschaft f. Natur. u. Heilkunde, Giessen; M. Otto Bébtlingk, Leipzig (185); Société des Sciences Naturelles, etc., Guéret, France (185); Prof. Léon de Rosny, Paris (184, 135); Société des Antiquaires de la Morinie, St. Omer (181-134) ; R. Istituto di Studi Superiori, Florence, Italy (185); Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Me. (96-130, 132-136, and Catalogue, Parts i-iv); Mr. George F, Dunning, Farmington, Conn. (185) ; 1892, 115 Free Public Library, Jersey City (96-180, 136, and Catalogue, Parts i-iv). Letters of envoy were received from the Société de Géo- graphie de Finlande, Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors; Naturwissenschaftliche Verein fiir Schleswig- Holstein, Kiel, Prussia; K. Siichsische Gesellschaft. der Wis- senschaften, Leipzig; Société Royale des Sciences, Upsal, Sweden ; R. Academia de Ciencias y Artes, Barcelona, Spain ; Royal Statistical Society, Lowdon; Boudoin College, Bruns- wick, Me.; Messrs. J. C. Ayer & Co., Lowell, Mass.; Obser- vatoire Météorologique Central de Mexico. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; Magyar Tudomanyas Akadémia, Société Hongroise de Géographie, Budapesth ; Société de Geo- graphie de Finlande, Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors; Société Royale de Geographie, Antwerp; Gesell- schaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie, etc., Berlin; Natur- wissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Schleswig-Holstein, Kiel; Pub- lishers of the “ Revue Universetaire,” Paris; R. Academia de Ciencias y Artes, Barcelona, Spain; Royal Society, Royal Geological Society, London; Royal Society, Edinburgh ; Philosophical Society, Cambridge, Eng.; Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Me.; Harvard College, Cambridge, Mass.; Prof. William Dwight Whitney, New Haven; Astor Library, Academy of Sciences, American Museum of Natural History, Dr. T. Sterry Hunt, New York; Hon. Thomas H. Dudley, Camden; Mr. Albert S. Gatschet, Washington, D. C.; Public Library, Cincinnati; State Historical Society, Iowa City; Wyoming Agricultural College, Laramie; Missouri Geo- logical Survey, Jefferson City; Dr. John C. Branner, Little Rock, Ark.; Academy of Science, Tacoma, Wash.; Prof. J. de Mendizibel Tamborrel, Mexico. The Committee appointed at last meeting to examine Prof. Cope’s paper for the Transactions, reported it worthy of publi- cation, and was discharged. The deaths of Theodore Mommsen (February 3, 1892, et. 75) and T. Sterry Hunt (February 12, 1892, st. 66) were announced. 116 [Feb. 19, On motion, the Society appointed Mr. James Douglass, of New York city, to prepare the usual obituary notice of Dr. Hunt. The proceedings of the Board of Officers and Council were submitted. This being the stated evening for balloting for candidates for membership, pending nominations Nos, 1232, 1233, 1234, 1235, 1236, 1237, 1238, 1239 and 1240 were read, spoken to and voted upon. Prof. Cope made an oral communication on “ The Geology of © the Staked Plains of Texas.” The Committee on Extended Accommodations presented a final report, and stated that the total cost of alterations to the building had amounted to $41,449.72. On motion of Dr. Brinton, the report was : accepted and the Committee discharged, with the hearty thanks of the Society for its long, arduous and faithful labors. The Library Committee reported the following minute : Statep MEETING, FEBRUARY 12, 1892. The Librarian reported that owing to the advanced condition of the Library he had been able to dispense with the services of the assistants hitherto employed by the Committee, and pursuant to authority granted him by the Chairman he had discharged them, The action of the Librarian was approved, The Librarian was directed to purchase the New Century Dictionary: the Supplement to Allibone’s Dictionary, and U. 8. wall map. Dr. Morris, on behalf of the Curators, reported that the Peale collection of relics of the Stone Age had been placed in the Society’s museum, and that all expenses connected with the transfer of the same had been borne by Mr. Robert Patterson, to whom the thanks of the Society were tendered. The thanks of the Society were tendered to Miss Emily Phillips for a gift of a locket containing the hair of General Andrew Jackson, presented at the last meeting of the Society. All other business having been transacted, the tellers re- ported to the President the result of the ballot, who thereupon 1992,] 117 declared the following to have been duly elected members of the Society : 2199. Hon. George William Curtis, New York city, N. Y. 2200. Anthony J. Drexel, Esq., Philadelphia. _ 2201. Prof. Edward A. Leech, Ph.D., Director U.S. Mint, Washington, D. C. 2202. Hon. Seth Low, LL.D., President Columbia College, New York city, N. Y. Dr. EH. D. Cope offered the following amendment to Chapter ix, Section 1, of the Laws: The ordinary meetings of the Society shall be on the first and third Fridays of every month, from September to the third Friday in June in- clusive, at eight o’clock in the evening. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, March 4, 1892. Present, 27 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows : Acceptances of membership were read as follows: Mr. Anthony J. Drexel, Philadelphia. Hon. Seth Low, New York city, N. Y. Hon. George William Curtis, West New Brighton, Staten Tsland, N. Y. A circular was received from the Linnean Society of New South Wales, announcing the death of its President, Sir William Macleay. A letter from P. Steiner (Darmstadt) in reference to his language, Pasilengua. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Institut 118 [Maren 4, Kgyptien, Cairo (135); Académie R. Danoise des Sciences, etc., Copenhagen (135); K. Bibliothek, Berlin (185); Deutsche Seewarte, Hamburg (135); Verein fiir Erdkunde, Netz (135) ; R. Accademia di Scienze, etc., Padova (135); Natural History Society, Montreal (186); Mr. Hamilton A. Hill, Boston (136); Free Public Library, New Bedford, Mass. (136); Prof. Burt G. Wilder, Ithaca, N. Y. (136); American Museum of Natural History, New York city (97, 99, 100, 101, 127-135); New Jersey Historical Society, Newark (186); Messrs. Cadwalader Biddle, Samuel Dickson, Philadelphia (186); Maryland His- torical Society, Baltimore (136); U.S. Naval Observatory, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Anthropological Society, Patent Office, War Department (136), Department of Agri- culture (136), Dr. W. J. Hoffman, Rt. Rev. J. J. Keane, Capt. Thomas Jefferson Lee, Messrs. Charles A. Schott, Wil- liam B. Taylor, Washington, D. C. (186); University of Tennessee, Knoxville (186); Georgia Historical Society, Savannah (136); University of Cincinnati (99-130, and Cata- logue, Parts i-iv); Colonel William Ludlow, Detroit, Mich. (136); Indiana Society of Civil Engineers, Remington (136); Lick Observatory, Mount Hamilton, Cal. (96-180, 186, and Catalogue, Parts i-iv); Sociedad Cientifica “ Antonio Alzate,” Mexico (136); Academy of Science, Tacoma, Wash. (96-130, 136, and Catalogue, Parts i-iv); Wyoming Univer- sity Experiment Station, Laramie (136). Accessions to the Library were reported from the K. N, F. Universitetel, Christiania, Norway; Statistika Central Byran, Stockholm, Sweden; Académie R. Danoise des Sciences, etc., Copenhagen; Prof. P. Steiner, Darmstadt, Germany; Prof. Léon Douay, Nice, France; Academy of Arts, San Fernando, Spain; Société de Geographie, Lisbon, Portugal; Sir J. D. Hooker, London, Eng.; Theological Seminary, Andover, Mass.; Harvard College, Cambridge, Mass.; John M. Berry, Worcester, Mass.; Rochester Academy of Science; Free ' Public Library, Jersey City; Mr. W. J. Potts, Camden; Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Academy of Natural Sciences, Dr. Persifor Frazer, Messrs, MacCalla & Co,, Dr. Ve 1892.] 119 Charles A. Oliver, Philadelphia; U. S. Naval Observatory, War Department, Treasury Department, Washington, D. C.; Agricultural Experiment Stations, Virginia, Mississippi, Arkansas; Denison University, Granville, O.; State Historical _ Society of Wisconsin. The amendment to the Laws of the Society (Chap. i X:9:2) came up for action. Due proof of advertisement and notice of same having been first submitted, and a constitutional quorum being present, the Society then proceeded to consider the same. Dr. Cope moved that it be adopted. Mr. Vaux moved as an amendment that it be indefinitely postponed. A vote being taken, Mr. Vaux’s motion was carried, and the consideration of the amendment was indefinitely postponed. The Publication Committee reported that the papers by Dr. Cope had been placed in the printers’ hands, and that the illustrations to accompany them had been ordered to be pre- pared; and that Vol. xvii, Part i, had been ordered to be closed and distributed when printed. Dr. Bonwill read a paper entitled “Geometry and Mechanics Deny Evolution,” which he illustrated with diagrams and specimens. Dr. Cope spoke against some of the propositions set forth by Dr. Bonwill, and exhibited specimens of early dentition from Spuj, Belgium. Dr. Cope offered for the Proceedings a paper on “ Tiaporus, a New Genus of Teiide.” Mr. Price, Chairman of the Hall Committee, presented the following report : To THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SocIETY : The Hall Committee respectfully reports that they have carefully con- sidered the matter of a fireproof in the new building to preserve the valu- able books, papers and documents belonging to the Society, which was referred by it to them. They have called in consultation with them Messrs. Wilson & Bros., the architects of the building, who have prepared detailed drawings tor the construction of a fireproof 4 feet by 14 feet in 120 (March 18, the clear inside and reaching from the floor to the ceiling, and situate in the southeast corner of the northern room on second floor, which wil] afford ample room for many years to come for the protection from fire of valuable books, papers and documents and articles of various kinds, which may need such care and preservation. They have also received an estimate from Messrs. Stacy Reeves & Sons to construct and complete the same for the sum of $278. They therefore submit the following resolution : Resolved, That the report of the Committee be accepted, and they are directed to have said fireproof constructed under the direction of the architect, in accordance with the plans prepared by them. All of which is respectfully submitted. J. SERGEANT PRIcE, Chairman, On motion of Mr. Price, the report was accepted, and the resolution contained therein was adopted by the Society. Mr. Williams offered the following resolution, which after discussion was adopted by the Society : Resolved, That a Committee of three be appointed by the President, to consider and report to the Society upon the advisability of an annual grant for the purpose of aiding the publication or assuming the entire cost of publishing transcripts of the Babylonian tablets, on deposit in the Museum of the University of Pennsylvania.* And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, March 18, 1892. Present, 9 members. Mr. Woop in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: Letters of envoy were received from the Société de Litte- raire Finnoise, Helsingfors; K. Siichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig; Meteorological Office, London; Ma- seum of Comparative Zodlogy, Cambridge, Mass.; Department of State, Washington, D, C. * The President subsequently appointed Messrs. Williams, Du Bois and Price as such Committee, 1892.] 121 Letters of acknowledgment were received: from Marquis Antonio de Gregorio, Palermo, Sicily (185); Sir J. W. Daw- son, Montreal, Canada (136); Agricultural Experiment Sta- tion, Geneva, N. Y. (135, 136); Geological Society of America, Rochester, N. Y. (136); Prof. Henry Morton, Hoboken, NJ. (136); Dr. Charles B. Dudley, Altoona, Pa. (136); Mr. R. Meade Bache, Hon. Henry Reed, Philadelphia (136); Prof. Charles V. Riley, Washington, D.C. (136); State Experiment Station, Baton Rouge, La. (135, 136); Washburn College, Kahsas State Historical Society, Topeka, (136); Colorado Scientific Society, Denver, (136); Museo Oaxaqueiio, Oaxaca, Mex. (136); Observatorio Astronédmico Nacional, Mexicano, Tacubaya (136); Bishop Crescencio Carillo, Merida, Mex. (136). Accessions to the Library were reported from the Société Litteraire Finnoise, Helsingfors; Colonial Museum, Harlem, Holland; Académie des Sciences, Cracow, Austria; Zoolo- gisch-Botanische Gesellschaft, K. Geologische Reichsanstalt, Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Vienna, Austria; Instituto y Osservatorio de Marina, San Fernando, Spain; Rousdon Ob- servatory, Lyme Regis, Eng ; Society of Antiquaries, Meteor- ological Council, London; Editors of the Journal of Philology, Cambridge; American Institute of Electrical Engineers, Prof. J. A. Allen, New York; Mr. William Joho Potts, Camden ; College of Physicians, Mercantile Library, Superintendent of City Trusts, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Chief of Engineers U.S. Army, Lighthouse Board, Bureau of Ethnol- ogy, Washington, D.C.; Mr. William Harden, Savannah, Ga. ; Agricultural Experiment Stations, Burlington, Vt., Geneva, N. Y., State College, Centre County, Pa., Baton Rouge, La. The decease of the following members was announced : John Couch Adams, Cambridge, England, January 21, 1892, et. 73. Dr. Hermann Kopp, Heidelberg, February 20, 1892, set. 75. Thomas Hockley, Philadelphia, March 12, 1892, et. 54. Dr. Cope presented some additional matter for his paper in the Transactions, which was ordered to be printed. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xxx. 137. P. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1892. 122 {March 18, Mr. Phillips presented “ A Second Contribution to the Study of the Folk-Lore of Philadelphia and its Vicinity.” Pending nomination No. 1233 was read. Tue Library Committee reported a minute of its last meet- ing. Mr. Bache offered the following resolution: Resolved, That, if the funds of the Society permit, this room be now put in charge of a Committee, for the purpose of receiving such treatment to its walls, ceiling, and columns as accord with the character of the Society, and that the Society instruct the Curators to exclude from the cases everything but such printed mutter as is desirable for ready refer- ence, and from the floor any articles which are not conducive to the pri- mary purpose in this room of convenience of the members of the Society.’’ After some debate, the consideration of the resolution was postponed until the next stated meeting of the Society. Dr. Morris moved that the Secretaries be requested to ask from the Academy of Natural Sciences, the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society and the Historical Society the return of all the articles belonging to this Society that are now depos- ited with them. After discussion, on motion of Mr. Price, as an amendment, it was resolved to refer the resolution to the Curators for, the purpose of ascertaining and reporting to the Society exactly what these deposits consist of, where they are and the amount of space that will be required for their proper display in the building. i Mr. Williams offered the following resolution : Resolved, That the busts of Lafayette and Franklin, by Houdon, in the possession of this Suciety, be loaned to the University Lecture Associa- tion for its loan exhibition of French art, at the Academy of Fine Arts, provided that they be returned on or before April 1, under the usual stipu- lation by the Curators. And the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. 1892.] 123 [Cope. A Contribution to the Vertebrate Puleontology of Texas. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 5, 1892.) I. Fayerre Formation. In the First Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Texas (p. 47), Mr. R. A. F. Penrose, Jr., describes this formation as it occurs in South and East Texas. He places it at the summit of the Tertiary series and below the ‘‘ Posttertiary ;’’ that is, at the summit of the Neocene, just prior to the advent of the Plistocene. This location is justified by the only vertebrate fossils definitely traceable to these beds, which have been sent me for identification by Dr. E. T. Dumble, State Geologist of Texas. One of these consists of a well-preserved left ramus with symphysis and nearly complete dentition of the mandible of the large lama, Holomeniseus hesternus Leidy. This species is characteristic of the Equus beds of Ore- gon, California and Mexico, and indicates satisfactorily the age of the formation in which it occurs. It confirms fully the position assigned to the Fayette beds by Mr. Penrose. The only other identifiable fossil from this formation is several teeth of the Hqguus major Dekay. This species is most abundant in the Eastern States, where the Equus beds have not been certainly identified ; but it occurs also in the Equus bed of Nueces county, Texas, with other characteristic species of that epoch. The specimens of the two species named came from Wharton county. This is the first exact determination of the age of the Fayette formation from paleonto- logical data, and is therefore of much interest, as it enables us to corre- late a definite horizon of the East with the Equus bed of the Pacific re- gion. The determination of King and myself that the Equus bed is upper Pliocene is confirmed ; since besides Penrose, Chamberlin assures us that the Fayette formation (Appomattox or Orange sand) is pre-glacial. Il. Upper CENozoIc OF THE STAKED PLAINS. In some remains of vertebrata, obtained by Mr. W. T. Cummins, from Crosby county, Texas, and sent me for determination by Dr. E. T. Dum- ble, State Geologist, three genera may be identified, and several others are indicated. The three genera are Equus, Mastodon and Testudo. They are enclosed in a white siliceous friable chalk, which Mr. Louis Woolman finds on examination to be highly diatomaceous. Prof. C. Henry Kain had identified the following species : Compylodiscus bicostatus W. Smith ; Epithemia gibba Ehr.; H. zebra Ehr.; EH. gibberula var. producta Ehr.; Navicula major Ehr.; N. viridis Ehr.; N. rostrata Ehr.; NV. elliptica var. minutissima Green; Gomphonem clavatum Ehr.; Cymbella cistula, Hemp.; Fragiliaria virescens Raffs var, The formation has been named the Blanco Canyon bed by Mr. Cummins (First Annual Report of the Geol. Survey Cope.] 1 24 [Feb. 5, of Texas, 1890, p. 190) without exact determination of its position in the Cenozoics. The Mastodon is of the MZ. angustidens type, as indicated by the teeth, but there are not enough fragments preserved to render it clear whether they pertain to this species or to some allied one. The Equus is allied to the #. occidentalis of Leidy, but the enamel plates are more simple than in that species, being the most simple known in the genus. [ regard it as an undescribed species, and describe it below unler the name of Hquus simplicilens. A second species of horse is indicated, but an exact deter- mination cannot be made without additional material. The tortoise is a terrestrial form. A water bird of which a tarcometatarse is contained in, the collection, is kindly determined for me by Dr. Shufeldt as allied to the rails. EQUUS SIMPLICIDENS sp. nov. This species is represented by one nearly entire superior molar of an adult, and one of a young animal, with characteristic fragments of two other superior molars, and several fragments of inferior molars. The size of the teeth is about that of the # occidentalis and LZ. caballus. The internal column is of moderate anteroposterior extent, its posterior border marking the anterior third of the posterior lake. Its long diameter is con- siderably less than half that of the crown. A peculiarity found in two of the superior molars, but not in two others, is that the median dentinal connection between the external and median crescents is interrupted by the continuity of the enamel plates bordering the lakes from the one to the other. This arrangement is frequently seen in the large pm. 3, in the species of Equus, but does not occur in the other pre- | molars and molars. It is a reversion to the condition seen in Anchitherium. A principal character of the species is seen in the extreme simplicity of the enamel borders of the lakes. They are without inflection, except the usual loop on the posterior inner border of the ante- Fre. 1, Aquus simpli- rior lake, and this is simple and widely open ne ones, ceft side ‘at the base. At the point of junction of the natural size. ” median crescents (meta- and paraconules), the usual loop of the internal enamel border is seen. The external median rib is narrowed and not flattened; the anterior rib is more flattened, especially at the present grinding face. The species with which it is necessary to compare this species is the Equus occidentalis of Leidy. The enamel plates bordering the lakes in that species are always more complex, although they are simpler in it than in the other extinct species of North America. Even in the simplest forms (¢. g., that figured by Leidy in Vol. i, Report U. 8. Geol. Surv. Tens., 1873, Pl. xxxiii, Figs. 1, 2) the lakes have anterior and posterior Te - 1892.] 1 25 [Cope. emarginations on the inner border, which are wanting in the present species. * The species is probably the oldest member of the genus Equus known from North American beds, It is the only species which was contempo- rary with a Mastodon with the M. angustidens type of molars. The sim- _ plicity of the enamel foldings is appropriate to this primitive period, as it approximates to the condition seen in many of the three-toed horses and the supposed one-toed Hippilium spectans Cope.~ The size of the molars is about that of the modern horse, Z. caballus L. Observations. —The contemporaneity of this species of Equus with the Mastodon with molars of the M. angustidens type has considerable sig- nificance. The latter is characteristic of the Loup Fork horizon in North America, in which the genus Equus does not occur. The Equus beds, so named from the abundance of individuals of four species of Equus which they contain, have never produced a specimen of Mastodon allied to M. angustidens in North America.{ The fact that the Equus of the Staked Plains is different from those of the Equus beds, adds to the indication furnished by the Mastodon that these beds do not belong to the Equus horizon; but the presence of the genus Equus is equally conclusive that they do not pertain to the Loup Fork. It is probable that the age of the beds is intermediate. They thus offer an interesting field for further research, Pig aie Tae Page sa tre CRECCOIDES OSBORNII, Shufeldt, gen. et sp. nov. Char. gen.—Only a fragment of a left tarso-metatarsus represents this new genus and species of bird. It evidently belonged to some wader of about the proportions of a medium-sized heron, or to a form rather larger than the Floridan crane-like rail Aramus. The specimen consists of about the superior moiety of the tarso-meta- tarsus, and, in so fur as it goes, appears to be perfect, with the exception of slight marginal abrasions of the summit of the bone and the almost complete fracturing off of the hypotarsial process. Superiorly, the inter- condyloid prominence or tubercle is rounded and not especially conspicu- ous; the inner condyloid depression is more extensive than the outer one, and occupies a higher plane. In front the shaft is longitudinally excavated only above, the excavation gradually but soon disappearing as we pass down towards the distal extremity ; and at the midpart of its * The horse found in Florida by Mr. Wileox, which Dr. Leidy identified as his,quua Jralernus (Transac, Wagner Free Inst. Science, Philadelphia, 1889, p. 16), must be referred to a genus distinct from Equus, on account of the absence of cups of the incisors, by the loss of the internal wall. This is seen in both unworn and worn specimens, In some cases an internal cingulum remains to indicate its position. It appears to be a case of degeneracy. I have named the genus Tomolabis. + American Naturalist, 1887, p. 1072. tIt is probable that the Dibelodon shepardii Leidy, which has molars of this type, occurs in the Equus beds of the valley of Mexico. Cfr. Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philos, Soc., 1884, May. Cope.] 1 26 [Feb. 5, continuity it is subcylindrical upon section. A short distance below the head of the bone are seen the usual anteroposterior perforating foramina, here three in number, two being lateral and below, with a mid one just above them. Immediately below these isa single, somewhat prominent tubercle for the insertion of the tendon of the tibialis anticus muscle. It occupies nearly a median position upon the shaft. So far as can be ascer- tained from the imperfect hypotarsial process it would appear that it possessed originally a large, single, inner groove for tendons, with a plate- like projection to its outer side. Char. specif.—Proximally, the tarso-metatarsus is considerably exca- vated to the inner side of the hypotarsus at a point just below the summit. The outer muscular line is single and commences at the middle point of the margin of the outer condylar depression, passing from thence down the back of the shaft. The inner muscular line bifurcates proximally, then passes more obliquely backwards than the outer line, to finally pass parallel with the latter also down the back of the shaft. Measurements. MM. Greatest transverse width of proximal end...........eeeee0- 15 Greatest anteroposterior diameter of prox. end, not including hypotarsus ......:.... & oeagnic mya opteaes Lincs Quteaes ee oy > 2 Distance from apex of intercondyloid tubercle to the tubercle for tib. ant. muscle....cso.csess sss er re issn giawwune ae Vertical depth of hypotarsus............ Seencnehane PEP erry | Transverse diameter of shaft near its middle............e.02 6 Remarks.—This fragment has been compared with the corresponding part of the skeleton in a great many kinds of birds. It was found to differ entirely from all larine, gallinaceous and raptorial types, while on the other hand it seemed to combine the characters of several various species of existing waders and allied groups. The writer compared it with numerous species of the genera Guara, Plegadis, Aramus, Rallus, Crex, Porzana, Ajaja, Tantalus, Botaurus, Ardea, Nycticorax, Grus and the Gallinules, Storks, etc. For a skeleton of Orex pratensis I am indebted to Mr. F. E. Beddard, prosector of the Zodélogical Society of London, and for the loan of other material to the United States National Museum, as well as to Mr. F. A. Lucas, of that institution, for placing the same at my disposal. lu the specimen under consideration, the Ralline characters appear to predom- inate, while more remotely we may see Ibis in its general form and out- line. Apart from the question of size it, however, distinctly differs from the tarso-metatarsus in such a form as Aramus giganteus in that the shaft was more cylindrical as it approached its midportion, and, as has been said above, did not show the anterolongitudinal excavation in that part. Moreover, in Aramus the hypotarsus exhibits two grooves for the passage of tendons, and the tubercle for the insertion of the tébialis anticus muscle es 1892. } 12% [Cope. is double. Essentially, it agrees with Aramus in the general form of its hypotarsus and in the direction of its lateral muscular ridges. In other particulars it exhibited both some minor differences and agreements with the corresponding bone in the skeletons of Crex and Rallus. Upon the whole the specimen would appear to have belonged to some large rail- like wader, now extinct. The name of the genus I create to contain this form is composed of the two Greek words, xpé&, a crake, and erdog, resemblance. Its specific name is given it in honor of Prof. Henry F. Osborn, of Columbia College, New York, in recognition of his excellent work in paleontology for a number of years past. The specimen was collected by Mr. W. T. Cummins, and is at present in the possession of Prof. E. D. Cope, to whom the writer is indebted for the honor of having been permitted to describe it.—R. W. Shufeldt. TESTUDO TURGIDA sp. nov. This species is represented by the greater part of a chelonite of about the size of the Xerobates agassizii of Arizona. It is remarkable for the remarkable depth of the dermal sutures and sculpture lines, and for the swollen character of the interspaces which separate both. The general shape is a short, wide oval, with steep to vertical margins. The plastron is widely emarginate posteriorly, and the anal-femoral dermal sutures form a deep notch in the border. The anal scuta are oblique rhomboids, with equal and nearly parallel sides. The median longitudinal dermal suture is deep and wide, cutting half through the thickness of the plastron. It sends off a branch on each side bounding the gular plates in front. The part of the plastron enclosed in the latter forms two flattened cones appressed together, whose vertical diameter exceeds the transverse, and whose subconic apices are separated by a deep notch. The interclavicular bone is very large and is wide diamond- shaped, the anterior angle being larger than the posterior. The transverse humeropectoral suture is very deep, and is similar to the median longi- tudinal. The borders of the anterior lobe are strongly convex, with a chord only twice as long as the lateral border of the gular plates. The nuchal bone has a strongly concave-emarginate border. On the posterior vertebral bones is a seat-like concavity, which is surrounded by a ridge which forms the greater part of a circle. The costal bones are unequally divided by the costal dermal sutures, which are very deep. Each costal scutum is divided into two areas, one of which is marked with _ ribs parallel to the vertebral axis at one extremity and a seat-shaped plane with a bordering ridge at the other, which is in some of the costals smaller and more swollen. The other half or part of the costal scutal area is swollen in the longitudinal direction, but not for its entire length, The marginal bones are massive and have a subacute border between the bridge and the median points. They are much deeper than long, and are deeply divided by the sutures which separate the dermal marginals. 'I'hese Cope.] 128 . [Feb. 5, grooves cut the margin into deep notches at some points and into shal- lower ones at others. The areas between these sutures are all swollen in the same way as the alternate parts of the costal plates. Measurements. MM. Length of plastron anterior to posterior angle of inter- Clavicle,.sssa Bae: RS A, ). 7 z oul SS, % f 2. i igbes 2% Dieiity. Vary) J4 f79 poate ENT we Ps Sia Pet rasash eee eat} rs e { le FP agit April 1, 1892.] 135 [Ruschenberger. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USERUL KNOWLEDGE. Vou. XXX. APRIL, 1892. No. 188. A Sketch of the Life of Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D. By W. 8S. W. Ruschenberger, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 1, 1892.) The Academy of Natural Sciences, of Philadelphia, devoted the stated meeting of May 12, 1891, to commemorate its President, Dr. Joseph Leidy, who died April 30. The meeting was very large and impressive. Drs. William Hunt, Harrison Allen, Henry C. Chapman, James Dar- rach, Edward J. Nolan, Prof. Angelo Heilprin and Mr. Joseph Wil- cox, by appointment, delivered appropriate addresses ; and the Rey. Dr. H. C. McCook, Mr. Isaac C. Martindale, Dr. James J. Levick and others eulogized the dead President. A more affectionate tribute has seldom been paid in this city to the memory of a votary of science. Ample testimony was adduced that Dr. Leidy had attained distinction among scientific men at home and abroad, and that he had the warm sympathy and respectful regard of all those members of the Society with whom he had been in any degree associated. In the first hours, while a great bereavement is still fresh, love and admiration so obstruct perception that the extent of the loss sustained _ may be sometimes overstated. But let whoever may conjecture that in this instance some of the addresses were too fervid, consult the cold rec- ords of the Academy in which are faithfully set down his works since he entered the Society, and he will find that they justify the encomiums pronounced. Loyalty to truth and ingenuousness were shining features of Dr. Leidy’s nature. . The first paragraphs of Dr. William Hunt’s opening address on Dr. _ Leidy’s personal history are cited here in illustration : ‘It is fitting that we imagine the beloved subject of our discourses this evening to be with us in spirit, as he doubtless is in influence, and to let him introduce himself as I heard him do in Association Hall some years ago when he was about to give a popular lecture. I was unexpectedly called upon to introduce him. ‘What!’ said I, ‘Who is to introduce the introducer? Here’s a man more widely known to the city and to the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxx. 188. R. PRINTED APRIL 20, 1892. Ruschenberger.] 136 tApril 1, world than any of us.’ Dr. Leidy, hearing the conversation, said: ‘Oh! Dr. Hunt, keep your seat ; I don’t wish to be introduced ; I’ll introduce myself.’ And, stepping to the rostrum, he spoke in this way : ‘“««My name is Joseph Leidy, Doctor of Medicine. I was born in this city on the 9th of September, 1828, and I have lived here ever since. My father was Philip Leidy, the hatter, on Third street above Vine. My mother was Catherine Mellick, but she died a few months after my birth. My father married her sister, * Christiana Mellick, and she was the mother I have known, who was all in all to me, the one tu whom I owe all that Iam. At an early age I took great delight in natural history and in noticing all natural objects. I have reason to think that I know a little of natural history, and a little of that little I propose to teach you to-night.’ ”’ Dr. Leidy’s ingenuous introduction of himself suggests that a fuller account of his ancestors may be acceptable. Carl Leidy, the forefather of the American-born Leidys, came to Amer- ica from Rhenish Germany in the early part of the eighteenth century (about 1724), and settled in that part of Penn’s province which now includes Montgomery and Bucks counties, Pa.+ *Erroneous.—His mother died May 28, 1825 (soon after her son Thomas was born), twenty months after the Doctor’s birth. His father’s second wife was a cousin and not a sister of Dr. Leidy’s mother, as stated. See, The Story of an Old Farm, or Lifein New Jersey in eighteenth century. By Andrew D. Mellick, Jr., Somerville, New Jersey, 1889. +Genealogical Notes.—Carl Leidy’s son, Carl Ludwig, b. Dec. 30,1729, and his wife, Ursula Elizabeth, b. Feb. 8, 1734, had issue : (1) John Jacob, b. Nov. 7, 1753; (2) George Heinrich, b. Oct. 19, 1755; (3) Margaretta, b. Nov. 15, 1757; (4) Eva Christina, b. Dec. 25, 1759; (5) Anna, b. Oct. 1, 1761; (6) Magdalena, b. Dec. 18, 1763 ; (7) Carl, b. Aug. 20, 1765; (8) Anna Maria Elizabeth, b. Feb. 24, 1768; (9) George Ludwig, b. July 1, 1770; (10) Maria Cather- ine, b. May, 1772. Both parents and children were natives of Hilltown township, Bucks county, Pa. John Jacob Leidy, the first-born of this family, m. April 18, 1777, Catherine, b. March 16, 1757, a daughter of Christian Comfort. They had issue: (1) Charles Ludwig, b. Jan. 7, 1778; (2) Henry, b. Jan. 12, 1779; (3) Catherine, b. May 16, 1780; (4) Maria Margaretta, b. March 1, 1781; (5) Jacob, b. Jan. 10, 1782; (6) Christian, b. Jan. 3, 1784; (7) George, b. Oct. 7, 1786; (8) Conrad, b. Nov. 25, 1788; (9) Philip, b. Dec. 5, 1791, d. Oct. 9, 1862; (10) Emanuel, b. Dec. 22, 1794; (11) Frances Fanny, b. March 6, 1798. All were natives of Hilltown township, Bucks county, Pa. Philip Leidy, the ninth child of the preceding family, m. Oct. 6, 1818 (he was then settled in Philadelphia), Catherine, a daughter of Peter and Rachel Mellick. She was born in Bloom township, Columbia county, Pa., Jan. 27, 1790, and died in Philadelphia, May 28, 1825. They had issue: (1) Peter, b. Dec. 28, 1819, d. Aug. 29, 1820; (2) Catherine, b. Aug. 7, 1821, d. Nov. 20, 1822; (3) Joseph, b. Sept. 9, 1828, d. April 80, 1891; (4) Thomas, b. May 21, 1825, d. April 20, 1870. Philip Leidy m., May 25, 1826, Christiana Taliana, a cousin of his first wife. She was born In Philadelphia, July 29, 1797, and died Jan. 6, 1881. They had issue : (1) Christiana T., b. Feb, 22, 1827, m. June 4, 1839, James Cyrus Umberger, d. Oct. 24, 1878; (2) Francis, b. Dec. 14, 1828, d. June 3, 1856; (8) Asher, b. July 80, 1880, d. July 6, 1878; (4) Helen, b. Sept. 30, 1888, d. Dee. 3, 18389; (5) Catherine Mellick, b. March 28, 1887, d. Aug, 12, 1839; (6) Philip, b, Dee, 20, 1838, d. April 29, 1891, All born in Philadelphia. Peter, the forefather of the Mellick family, came to America from Rhenish Germany about the close of the sixteenth century (1695), German and English, it may be said, were vernacular languages to the members of the Leldy and Mellick families generally—the German came to them as a birthright, and English from their environment. 1892.] 137 {Ruschenberger. The name first appears in the City Directory for 1809—‘‘ Leidy, Jacob, shoemaker, 9 Summers’ Court.’’ Prior to that year the Leidys probably lived either in Bucks or Montgomery county. AJl of them who exchanged a country for a city residence were of the class called ‘‘ plain people,’’ composed of well-to-do and respectable workers—men whose individ- ual energies when united constitute the national strength and are almost exclusively the progenitors, in aftermaths, of millionaires, consequently of aristocratoid or ‘‘ first families ’’’ and gentry, often more boastful of an- cestry than of creditable achievement. The name of Philip Leidy, hatter, the father of our subject, first appears in the City Directory for 1817, and that of his brother, Conrad, bootmaker, in 1820. At those dates they were established in business. During several years before that time they resided in the city. Both volunteered in the War of 1812-15 against Great Britain and served with those at Camp DuPont. The Leidys named in the City Directories for 1809 and for several years thereafter were mostly mechanics, makers of hats, boots, chairs, etc., and probably had been apprentices and learned their trades in the city. One of their contempo- raries, now an influential citizen advanced in years, remembers that ‘all the Leidys were smart.’’ Philip Leidy, who was born in Montgomery county, Pa., December 5, 1791, is spoken of as a powerful man whose stature was rather more than six feet and in every way well proportioned. Though not conspicuous for mental force he was naturally endowed with practical good sense. His educational acquirements were limited ; but his industry, honesty and frank deportment secured him confidence and respect wherever he was known. He made and sold hats, did a good business, and had many cus- tomers from the adjoining counties as well as in the city. He was a mem- ber of the German Lutheran Church in New street, and with his family habitually attended its services. Dr. Leidy said in his self-introduction, every word in a halo of grateful love, my stepmother ‘‘ was the only mother I have known, who was all and all to me, the one to whom I owe all that I am.”’ Besides being notable in the management of domestic affairs, she pos- sessed a large share of tact and of good womanly qualities. She was in- tellectually the superior of the family, had literary taste, wrote verses sometimes, was ambitious, and desired that her children should be well educated and that her sons should study the professions. Through her influence Joseph, at the age of about ten years, was sent to the Classical Academy, a private day-school conducted by the Rev. William Mann, a Methodist clergyman. There he studied English and read Latin—Historia Sacra, Viri Rome and Virgil—the principal being scrupulously careful that his pupils should understand the grammar. Probably he began Greek also. Minerals and plants interested him at an early age. Mr. Mann encour- aged the cultivation of this taste. One day an itinerant lecturer from the so-called ‘‘ Universal Lyceum ”’ visited the school, and, »y permission, Ruschenberger.] 138 [April 1, discoursed about mineralogy, illustrating his lesson with specimens. Young Leidy was so much interested that soon after he procured books on mineralogy and botany and diligently studied them. At length he became so fascinated in the pursuit that he often absented himself from school without leave to seek specimens in the rural districts near the city. Parental chidings for delinquencies of this kind did not always restrain him. His self-will and eagerness to hunt for minerals and plants often caused him to forget those admonitions and follow the inclination of the hour. The conduct of the boy, his spontaneous ways, are in many instances forecasts, in outline, of the characteristic features of the man he will become; and therefore it is interesting to observe those surroundings which may influence their development. At the time Joseph entered the academy, Mrs. Burris, a respectable col- ored woman, a widow, lived near and did laundry work for support. Her son, Cyrus, a bright youth a few years older than Joseph, was errand boy in the hatter’s shop. His chief duty was to deliver hats at the homes of their purchasers, and for each errand of the kind he received six or twelve cents, according to the distance he had to walk. There were then three schools at no great distance apart. Mr. Collom and Mr. Livensetter charged three dollars a quarter for each pupil and Mr. Mann twelve dollars. The boys of the two schools were at war with those of the academy, and they had a fight whenever they met in the street. Apprehensive that her son might be assaulted by some of those ‘‘rowdy boys,’’ Mrs. Leidy engaged Cyrus to accompany him to school. These two became intimate friends and often went together botanizing. Cyrus Burris is now a well-preserved man, of pleasant deportment, and of more than seventy-five yearsofage. He is intelligent and has a reten- tive memory. In answer to questions, Cyrus related substantially that Mr. Leidy once took all his family for a picnic out where Fortieth and Baring streets are now, and he went with them to carry things and be useful. At that time plenty of weeds grew on the side of the hill. They at once attracted the young professor, who found that he did not know any of them, But Cyrus, who had been brought up in the country, near Burlington, N. J., had there learned to know and name the herbs and weeds in his neighbor- hood, was able to tell him the names of many of them. This show of superior information pleased him so much that afterwards Cyrus was his chosen companion on botanical excursions, His favorite hunting ground was along the banks of the Schuylkill and Wissahickon. On the way, on one of their early walks, they strolled into Mr. Henry Pratt’s famous grounds at Lemon Hill. The late Mr. Robert Kilvington, a practical and proficient botanist, then had charge of the hothouses and garden. He noticed Leidy, and kindly answered his os r Pn ee fegr wens, dee Gch paar MPP we aes i wee aa 1892.] 139 [Ruschenberger. questions, regarding him as a poor, intelligent boy who was striving to. instruct himself. This was the beginning of an enduring friendship. In _ ashort time Mr. Kilvington cheerfully assumed to be his systematic in- structor, and, after his pupil had become distinguished, complacently mentioned to friends that he had been Leidy’s botanical preceptor. On one occasion Cyrus and the young professor spent a whole day in Bartram’s garden, near Gray’s Ferry, and did not reach home till night. «The professor,’’ as Cyrus styled him, ‘‘ used to say that the valley of the Wissahickon was the best place in the neighborhood to find plants. He very soon knew more about them than I did. Sometimes we went all day with nothing to eat but raw turnips we got out of the fields, for the old man was stingy of spending-money to his boys, though he was always a bountiful provider of the very best things in the market for them at home. Once we went into Jersey, and that was the only time I ever cheated the professor. We saw in a thick bush a big snake, four or five feet long, with a white spot under his throat. The professor wanted to catch him, so he gave me a carpet bag to hold open on one side of the bush for the snake to run into, while he frightened him out from the other. The snake came hissing along towards me. I jumped aside—I couldn’t help it—and let him get away, but I never let on that I was scared.”’ 7 In the course of his schooldays the young naturalist, besides gathering stones and plants, caught butterflies and bugs, which he pinned in a box prepared for the purpose, to be arranged in his cabinets at home. Cyrus stated, among other things, that he sometimes acted as caterer and waiter for the lads on special occasions ; and that whenever the boys came into the hatter’s shop, their father always talked to them in German. He also said that Dr. Leidy had taught him a great deal about plants and their medicinal uses, adding, ‘‘ Through what I learned from him, I have been able through many years to make a decent living.” The offspring of almost constant companionship during their boyish days, at home or in the fields, was a personal sympathy, a friendship which, to the credit of both, was life-long, notwithstanding the extreme difference and distance between the social places each occupied in adult age. The professor gave him, at different times, several books on medi- cine, and among them his Hlementary Treatise on Anatomy, in which is written, ‘‘To Cyrus Burris, from his old friend, the author.’’ These are Cyrus’ treasures. He quietly but, no doubt, proudly shows them toa favored few. The future professor did not own shinny or hockey stick, kite, skates nor ball; never played marbles, nor whistled nor hummed a tune at any time. He was a good boy in school, always neat and tidy, and never joined his schoolmates in their out-of-door sports during the hour of daily “recess,’’ but sat the while at his desk, pencil in hand, portraying some natural object, as a snail shell, carefully and beautifully shading it, or drawing caricatures suggested by acts of his fellow-pupils. Ruschenberger. } 140 [April 1, He had no teaching to develop this talent. The high artistic skill which he acquired was exclusively due to self-cultivation. A small book of his portraits of shells, dated February, 1833, has been preserved, which show his skill with a pencil in his tenth year. According to his school champion, who, the boy always declared was the best Greek scholar in the academy, ‘‘ Joseph Leidy never sized up to the other boys.’’ His schooldays ended in his sixteenth year, probably about the last of July, 1839. His worldly condition required that he should now be taught some art ' by which to earn a livelihood. As he had manifested at an early age un- common aptitude in draughting and drawing, his father conjectured that he would best succeed as a sign painter. But the son, who had passed much of his leisure in the wholesale drug store of his cousin, Napoleon B. Leidy, M.D., ‘“‘physician and druggist,’’ as the City Directory styled him, fancied that he would rather be an apothecary. In compliance with his preference he was placed with an apothecary and in the course of a few months acquired such a degree of knowledge of drugs and the method of compounding them, that he was considered qualified to be left in temporary charge of the retail business. His loving stepmother, however, was not satisfied. She seemed sure that there was in him the making of a successful physician. Her argu- ments at last prevailed. With the consent of his father, rather reluctantly given, it was agreed that he should study medicine. In the autumn of 1840, he became a pupil of Dr. James McClintock, then a private teacher of anatomy in College avenue. His father’s prop- | osition to pay the preceptor’s fee in hats was accepted, but the settle- ments provoked dispute and at last estrangement of the parties. Parts of 1840 and 1841, more than a year, were devoted to practical anatomy under the able instruction of Dr. McClintock. During the first half of 1841 he parted from Dr. McClintock, who, having accepted the office of Professor of Anatomy in the Castleton Medical College, in Ver- mont, removed from Philadelphia in 1842. Leidy matriculated at the University, October 26, 1841, and was under the instruction of Dr. Paul B. Goddard, then Demonstrator of Anatomy in the University and Prof. Horner’s prosector. He was a promising surgeon, a man of bright qualities. In conjunction with Mr. Robert Cornelius he was the first in Philadelphia to make a daguerreotype. He devoted his leisure evenings in his office, with a few intimate friends, to microscopic studies, and there young Leidy received his first lessons in the use of the microscope. Having attended three courses of lectures and submitted a thesis on 7'he comparative anatomy of the eye of vertebrated animals, the degree of Doctor of Medicine was conferred upon him, April 4, 1844, by the University of Pennsylvania. | In the year after graduation, he was an assistant in the laboratory of Dr. 1892.] 141 [Ruschenberger. Robert Hare, Professor of Chemistry, during six weeks, and then entered that of Dr. James B. Rogers, lecturer on Chemistry in the Medical In- stitute of Philadelphia, from 1841, and remained there through the summer course. On the retirement of Dr. Hare, in 1847, Dr. Rogers succeeded him in the University.* He was now prepared to begin the practice of any branch of medicine he might prefer, but he had yet to learn how to make the profession of commercial value to himself. No plan of proceeding was immediately formed. In August, 1844, on foot with several companions, he visited Harvey’s lake, Bethlehem, Mauch Chunk ; also the Beaver Meadow and Hazleton coal mines. In a letter to a sister he wrote: ‘‘Pedestrianated to Wilkesbarre and arrived at Berwick yesterday, August 28, having walked from the lake to this place, thirty-five miles, the longest distance I __ have ever walked in one day.”’ In the autumn he opened an office, No. 211 North Sixth street, hoping to obtain employment as a general practitioner. But the business which came to him during two years’ trial did not promise a satisfactory living, and therefore he determined to devote himself exclusively to teaching. Possibly his failure to obtain practice was ascribable in some degree to lack of due attention to patients. Years after this time, to show how intently attractive comparative anatomy was to him, he related to his private class that on one occasion he was so absorbed in his office studying the anatomy of a worm that he totally forgot that he had been called to an obstetric case which he had engaged to attend. Later in life he would have felt that unbridled eagerness to learn the structure of a worm is an inadequate plea for forgetting a professional or other engagement. An unhappy experience, which occurred shortly after he began the practice, tended to disgust him with it and may have been one reason among others why he abandoned it. Ten years afterwards he narrated substantially that, called to a child suffering ‘‘ with all the symptoms of tubercular meningitis,’’ he informed the parents that medicine in such a ease is inefficacious. Nevertheless, they requested him to visit it. At the end of a week a much older practitioner was called, and attended the child till it died. He then ‘‘informed the parents that he could have saved the life of the patient had he been called at the time of Dr. Leidy’s first visit.’ ¢ . In 1845, on the resignation of Dr. Goddard and the appointment of Dr. -- John Neill, Demonstrator, in his place, the Professor of Anatomy, * Biographical Notice of Joseph Leidy, M.D. By the Editor. ‘‘The New Jersey Medical Reporter and Transactions of the New Jersey Medical Society.” Edited by Joseph Parrish, M.D., Burlington, N. J. Published by 8. W. Butler, M.D. Ninth month, September 30, 1853, Vol. vi, No.2. It is understood that this notice had the approval of Dr. Leidy. +See p. 16, Valedictory Address to the class of medical graduates of the University of Pennsylvania, delivered at the public commencement, March 27, 1858. By Joseph leidy, M.D., Professor of Anatomy. Published by the Graduating Class. Collins, Printer, Philadelphia, 1858. Ruschenberger.] 142 {April 1, Dr. Horner, appointed Dr. Leidy his prosector. In 1846 he was chosen Demonstrator of Anatomy in the Franklin Medical College, but resigned the office at the close of the session, in 1847, resumed his position with Dr. Horner and delivered to his students a private course of lectures on Human Anatomy. He indulged himself with a short vacation in July, 1846, and visited his friends, Messrs. Haldemann, at Chickies, Pa. While his kinsman, Dr. N. B. Leidy, was Coroner of the County of Philadelphia (1845-48), he acted as Coroner’s Physician and received fees for the autopsies he made. : In the spring of 1848, impaired health induced Prof. Horner to visit Europe. He invited his friend, Dr. Leidy, to be his travel- ing companion, They sailed in April and returned in September. In England, Germany and France they ‘‘ visited hospitals and anatomical museums, and sought out eminent anatomists and surgeons.’’ Dr. Leidy witnessed in Paris, June 20, some vivisection experiments by Magendie, in his physiological laboratory, which interested him. They “were in Vienna while the revolutionary movements were in progress: and ‘«were also in Paris during the fierce conflicts from 23d to 26th of June ; and during several days afterwards they ‘‘ witnessed in the hospitals, filled with wounded, every variety of gunshot wound and the modes of treatment pursued.’’* On his return from Europe, in the autumn, Dr. Leidy delivered a course of lectures on Microscopic Anatomy; and in the spring of 1849 began a course on Physiology in the Medical Institute of Philadelphia, which the condition of his health required him to abandon.+ He edited Qwain’s Human Anatomy, which was published June, 1849, by Lea & Blanchard. An interesting event enabled Dr. Leidy to go abroad again under very favorable circumstances. Dr..George B. Wood, who was elected May, 1850, Professor of the Practice of Medicine in place of Dr. Nathaniel Chapman, resigned, desired to collect in Europe models, casts, preparations, etc., suitable for objective illustration of his future courses of instruction, Aware of the artistic judgment of Dr. Leidy, and of his recently acquired knowledge of localities in which objects adapted to his purpose could be purchased, Dr, Wood easily persuaded him to be his companion and assistant in hunting and selecting desirable specimens. Dr. Wood had proved, while Professor of Materia Medica from October, 1835, till May, 1850, that placing before his class appropriate objects illus- trative of his subject is superior, more successful than the purely oral and *A discourse commemorative of William E. Horner, M.D., Professor of Anatomy, delivered before the Faculty and students of the University of Pennsylvania, October 10, 1893, By Samuel Jackson, M.D., Professor of the Institutes of Medicine, Published by the Class, Philadelphia, 1853, : +8ketch of Joseph Leidy. By Edward J, Nolan, The Popwar Science Monthly, September, 1480, Thissketch was read and approved by Dr, Leidy. SLE ET Ie ME nT Oe ene i> oe oe THE 1892,] 145 2 [Ruschenberger, didactic method of instruction. For this reason he was confident that it would be equally useful, though perhaps more difficult to accomplish, in teaching that to which materia medica is merely subservient. With special reference to his intended system of instruction, he visited the most cele- brated schools in Europe, and at a cost of many thousands of dollars, pur- chased models, castings and drawings of many pathological specimens. “ These formed a cabinet of morbid representations unique in this country, and supplied material for a course of medical tuition which was as instructive and satisfactory as it was interesting and novel.’’* Dr. Wood was the first to teach the practice of medicine in a series of “object lessons,’’ by placing before his class models, casts, etc., appro- priate to the illustration of each lecture. At the end of his holidays in Europe, Dr. Leidy resumed his routine work in the University. He was elected a Fellow of the College of Physi- cians of Philadelphia, August, 1851. He seemed to be not much interested in the pursuits of the Society; seldom attended its meetings, and was not a contributor to its Transactions.| He was Secretary of the Committee on Lectures, under the Miitter Trust, from January, 1864, and kept a neat record of its proceedings. In November, 1883, ‘‘on account of his: scien- tific achievements,” the College exempted him from future payment of annual contributions. He lectured on Physiology in the Medical Institute of Philadelphia in the summer courses of 1851 and 1852. He was appointed in 1852 Pathologist to St. Joseph’s Hospital, a purely nominal position. Failing health had disabled Prof. Horner. With approval of the Trus- tees and the Medical Faculty of the University, Dr. Leidy, as his substi- tute, delivered the course of lectures on Anatomy for 1852-53. Dr. Horner died March 18, 1858, and in May Dr. Leidy was elected Professor of Anatomy. He was yet in the thirtieth year of his age. His educational opportuni- ties and collateral advantages may have been less than those of his pre- decessor and friend, but from the hour he resolved to be a teacher he probably hoped some day to fill a Professor’s Chair. The unremitting exercise of his natural abilities, his ever eager quest of knowledge enabled him to publish, prior to this time, many works which won for him praise * Memoir of George B. Wood, M.D., LL.D. By 8S. Littell, M.D. (read October 1, 1879). Transactions of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, Vol, xii, 1881. +At a meeting of the College, May 5, 1886, he related that he had recently examined three nematoid worms, found in the intestines of young cats, sent to him from Chicago, and read a letter from Durango, Mexico, reporting the great prevalence of scorpions in that district. He also exhibited ‘‘ photographs of trichine in the flesh of the pig.” In answer to a remark by a Fellow of the College that it had been repeatedly stated in Berlin that the trichinz had been found there in the pig, prior to the time when Dr. Leidy announced his discovery of it, he said: “I believe mine was the first notice of the para- site occurring in the pig.’’ Transactions of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, third series, Vol. viii, 1886, pp. 41-43. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 138. 8. PRINTED APRIL 20, 1892. Ruschenberger. ] 144 [April 1, anda name, and proved him to be an eligible candidate, and, after an unusual trial of his aptitude for the office, fairly secured his preferment. A brief notice of his predecessors in the same Chairis submitted to show in what respects he resembled them. The medical department of the University of Pennsylvania has always been happy in selecting men of marked ability and acquirements to fill its professorships. At the start the Trustees elected (September, 1765) two professors. Dr. John Morgan, to whom the credit of founding the Medi- cal School of the University belongs, was appointed Professor of Medicine, which embraced the practice of physic, materia medica and pharma- ceutical chemistry, and Dr. William Shippen, Jr., Professor of Anatomy and Surgery, when-he was twenty-nine years of age. He also taught midwifery. Their first courses of lectures began in November, 1765. He was an eminent general practitioner of medicine and a surgeon of the Pennsylvania Hospital during nearly twelve years. Dr. Caspar Wistar, at the age of thirty-one years, was appointed, Janu- ary, 1792, adjunct, and after the death of Dr. Shippen, July 11, 1808, Professor of Anatomy. Desirous to improve the method of teaching anatomy; Dr. Wistar had made gigantic models, exactly proportioned, of several minute and intri- cate structures—of the internal ear, for instance—which he used as objec- tive illustrations of his lectures. His collection of numerous models and anatomical preparations was presented, after his death, by his family to the University, and by resolu- tion of the Trustees, styled ‘‘ The Wistar Museum.”’ Dr, Wistar published, in 1811, A System of Anatomy, which was a text- book during many years. He was versed in botany, mineralogy and chemistry. He was a surgeon of the Pennsylvania Hospital more than sixteen years, and always among the most eminent and beloved practi- tioners of medicine in the community. On the death of Dr. Wistar, January 22, 1818, Dr. John Syng Dorsey was appointed, but died November 13, 1818, a week after the delivery of his introductory lecture. The course on anatomy for 1818-19 was com- pleted by Dr. Physick, with the assistance of Dr. William E. Horner, Dr. Philip Syng Physick, an eminent surgeon, who had been Professor of Surgery from June 4, 1805, was elected Professor of Anatomy July 13, 1819, and resigned in 1831, He was a surgeon of the Pennsylvania Hos- pital for twenty-two years, and rendered important services to the public during the epidemics of yellow fever in 1793 and 1798. Dr. William BE. Horner was elected adjunct in 1820 and Professor of Anatomy in 1631. He, a native of Virginia, had been a surgeon’s mate in the Army of the United States from 1813 to March, 1815, and served on the Niagara frontier in the war of that period, Dr, Wistar appointed him, March, 1816, his prosector, at an annual salary of $500, From 1820 he was a surgeon of the Philadelphia Almshouse during = oe, ee ee ee apa ales a 1892.) 1 45 {Ruschenberger. twenty-four years. His private practice was large. In 1823 he published A Treatise on Practical Anatomy; in 1826, A Treatise on the Special Anatomy of the Human Body, in two octavo volumes, which passed through eight editions, and at different times contributed valuable papers to the medical] journals. The numerous pathological and anatomical preparations made by him- self, which were appraised at $10,000, he bequeathed to the Wistar Museum. In acknowledgment of this valuable bequest, the Trustees of the University decreed that it should be named thenceforward the Wistar and Horner Museum. The anatomical chair, under the lustre shed upon it by the professional skill and eminence of its occupants, had become notably conspicuous. They resembled each other so much in their works and ways that it seems not difficult to imagine that a kind of composite portrait of Shippen, Wistar, Physick and Horner may ever mark the Chair which they in suc- cession so admirably filled from 1765 to 1853, about eighty-seven years, defore Dr. Leidy was installed. The University of Pennsylvania appointed Dr. Leidy its delegate to the American Medical Association in 1854 at St. Louis, Mo., and in 1872 at Philadelphia, but he did not directly contribute to its Transactions at either meeting. The Committees of the Association on Medical Literature and on Medical Science cited with encomium his papers, On the Compara- tive Structure of the Liver ; On the Intimate Structure and History of the Articular Oartilages ; On the Intermavillary Bone in the Embryo of the Human Subject, published in the ‘‘American Journal of the Medical Sciences,’ for 1848 and 1849, and On Parasitic Life, printed in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Dr. Leidy was on the list of permanent members of the Association from 1854 to 1876. At the St. Louis meeting he was appointed Chairman ofa Committee on Diseases of Parasitic Origin, and member of a Committee on Prize Essays, but no report from either has been recorded. In 1861 he published An Hlementary Treatise on Human Anatomy, and in 1889, the work having been out of print many years, a second edition, rewritten and enlarged. The illustrations are largely from his own drawings of many recent dissections made by him in connection with this work. A peculiar feature of the volume is that English names of the parts are given in the text, and their old Latin names in footnotes, under a belief that the subject thus presented would be more readily understood by students. Philip Leidy, the father of the professor, died October 9, 1862, in the sixty-seventh year of his age. In 1862, when the ‘‘Satterlee,’’ a U. S. Army Hospital, was established in West Philadelphia, Surgeon I. I. Hayes, U.S. V., in charge, a num- - ber of leading teachers and medical practitioners of Philadelphia volun- teered their services as ward physicians, and received contracts as acting assistant surgeons. To Dr. Leidy was assigned the task of conducting Ruschenberger. ] 146 [April 1, the autopsies and reporting them, from time to time, to the Surgeon- General of the Army. A number of pathological specimens prepared by him accompanied his reports. They have been preserved in the Army Medical Museum in Washington. He made about sixty autopsies, of which his reports are published in ‘‘The Medical and Surgical History of the War of the Rebellion.’’* In this capacity he served from 1862 to 1865. His brother, Dr. Philip Leidy, was assistant surgeon of the 106th Pennsylvania Infantry from November 1, 1861, till September, 1862, when he was appointed surgeon of the 119th Regiment of Infantry, and served in the field till he was honorably discharged, June 19, 1865. He was present in nearly all the battles of the Army of the Potomac, evinc- ing courage and devotion to his duties ‘‘ with the rare qualities of a gifted man.’’ His official reports to the Surgeon-General are published in the history above named. Dr. Joseph Leidy was appointed a member of the Sanitary Commission Association, April 3, 1862; and September 11, “The State of Pennsyl- vania, Executive Office of the Military Department at Harrisburg,” appointed him Chief Surgeon within the old limits of the city of Phila- delphia. August, 1864, he married Anna, a daughter of Robert Harden, of Louisville, Ky. To compensate for the sterility of this union, they some years afterwards adopted the infant daughter of a deceased friend. Dr. Leidy told the writer that had this dear child been his own he could not have loved her more. He was fond of children. The crying or hilarious romping of the playmates of his young daughter in the study did not in the least degree disturb or divert him from his work. Since his reports to the Surgeon-General of the Army the only paper con- nected with the science of medicine from his pen found in print is an essay on Intestinal Worms, included in A System of Practical Medicine by Ameri- can Authors, edited by William Pepper, M.D., LL.D., etc., assisted by Louis Starr, M.D., etc., published by Lea, Brothers & Co., Philadelphia, 1888. This essay—largely derived from foreign publications—occupies thirty-five pages of the second volume. At the close of this paper, Dr. Leidy states that for much of his information he is indebted to the articles on ‘Intestinal Parasites’’ and ‘‘ Diseases from Migratory Parasites,’’ in Ziemssen’s Hncyclopadia of the Practice of Medicine. After he relinquished practice to devote himself exclusively to teaching, no branch of the healing art attracted or practically engaged his attention. From this circumstance his father, who unwillingly consented that he might study medicine, was probably led to say that ‘‘a first-class sign- painter had been spoiled to make a poor doctor.”’ Dr. Leidy delivered courses of lectures on comparative anatomy in the University, and on pure human anatomy as part of the medical curriculum, * Vol. 1, Part i, and Vol. ti, Parts i and Il. INT SE ne 8 eae eee ar yer Pes ra ro a " sf sind ‘pe 1892.] 147 {Ruschenberger. seldom adverting to its useful applications in surgery or the practice of medicine, but not merely for the sake of imparting knowledge of his sub- ject. He carefully taught human anatomy as a means of self-mainte- nance. And within his domain he zealously wrought to promote the welfare of the medical department of the University, the principal source of his livelihood. This was his serious occupation, his work, which to all concerned was always acceptably done, during thirty-eight years. In all that period he was absent from his post through in disposition in the aggregate only five days. His pastime, while not engaged in his appointed task, was somewhat different though not less laborious. To increase knowledge of natural things, animate or inanimate, gigantic or microscopic, seemed to be a ruling passion ; and, like a true huntsman, he cared less for the capture than for the pleasure of pursuing his game. It may be truly said that Dr. Leidy was born to be a naturalist. To his innate ability to perceive the minutest variations in the forms and color of things was united artistic aptitude ofa high order. These natural facul- ties, in continuous exercise almost from his infantile days, and his love of accuracy, enabled him to detect minute differences and resemblances of all objects, and to correctly describe and portray them. Besides, nothing, however small, that came within the scope of his vision, while walking or riding, escaped his notice. He says (p. 294) of his work on Fresh Water Rhizopods, 1879: ‘The study of natural history in the leisure of my life, since I was fourteen years ofage, has been to mea constant source of happiness, and my expe- rience of it is such that, independently of its higher merits, I warmly recommend it, than which, I believe, no other can excel it. At the same time, observing the modes of life of those around me, it has been a matter of unceasing regret that so few, so very few people give attention to intel- lectual pursuits of any kind.”’ His first important work in natural history was begun in the winter of 1844, at the instance of Mr. Amos Binney, President of the Boston Society of Natural History. It is entitled, Special Anatomy of the Terrestrial Gasteropoda of the United States. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., of Philadel- phia. Quarto, pp. 169 ; illustrated by 16 plates, containing 120 figures. This admirable essay is included in the first of the three handsome vol- umes of Mr. Binney’s work.* In the Preface Mr. Binney says: ‘‘ The author is gratified in announcing that the anatomical details of the species, together with the dissections and drawings, are exclusively due to the labors of Joseph Leidy, M.D., of Philadelphia. They constitute the most novel and important accessions to science contained in the work, and are * The Terrestrial Air-breathing Mollusks of the United States and the Adjacent Territories of North America; described and illustrated. By Amos Binney. Edited by Augustus A. Gould. Charles C. Little and James Brown, Boston, 1851. Quarto, Vol.i, pp. 366, 16 plates; Vol. ii, pp. 362, 74 plates; Vol. iii, pp. 183, 57 plates. Mr. Binney died February 18, 1847. Ruschenberger.] 148 {April 1, an honorable evidence of a skill and industry which entitle him to a high rank among philosophical zodlogists.”’ Dr. Leidy, in 1845, contributed three papers—anatomical descriptions of mollusks named—to the Boston Society of Natural History, which were published in its Journal and Proceedings. On nomination by Dr. Samuel George Morton and Messrs. John §. Phillips and John Cassin, Dr. Leidy was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, July 29, 1845, then at the northwest corner of Broad and Sansom streets. At that period natural history interested comparatively few persons in the community, and by those few was regarded chiefly as a-rational pastime. A brief retrospect of the subject, which is nearly associated with Dr. Leidy’s career, may be permitted to recall its ancient standing and prog- ress in public estimation. John Hyacinth de Magellan, of London, in 1786, gave to the American Philosophical Society (of which he was chosen a member January, 1784) two hundred guineas, to be a permanent fund, the interest thereof to be annually awarded by the Society in premiums ‘‘to the author of the best discovery or the most useful invention, relating to navigation, astronomy or natural philosophy (mere natural history only excepted).’’* This exception, though seemingly contemptuous, was wise. Had natu- ralists been eligible to receive those premiums, Dr. Leidy alone, who almost annually discovered many genera and species, might have earned the whole income of the fund. Magellan’s opinion, which was probably common in his day, seems to have been that to discover and describe natural species of any kind is comparatively so easy, requires so little inventive aptitude and intellectual force, and the discovery itself imports so little to the good of mankind that such work needs no encouragement. A century’s experience has modified this notion in many respects. Natural history attracted very little attention in Philadelphia during the first quarter of the present century. There were some botanists, but very few were interested in other branches of natural science. A halfdozen gentlemen who, at chance meetings, often discussed qu es- tions connected with the subject, formally assembled, January, 1812, at the residence of one of them, to form a natural history society. They styled themselves ‘‘Friends of science and rational disposal of leisure moments."’ After due consideration at several meetings they founded, March 21, 1812, ‘*The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.”’ * John Hyacinth de Magellan, a Portuguese physicist, was born in Lisbon in 1728. He claimed that Magellan, the first cireumnayvigator, was one of his ancestral kinsmen. He long sojourned in the convents of St. Augustin, of which he assumed the habit, and removed to England about 1764, to devote himself to the study of physical science, and died at Islington, near London, January 7, 1790, He was clected a member of the Royal Society of London, 1774, and was also a member of the Academies of Paris, Madrid and St, Petersburg. Nouvelle Biographie general depuis tea tempa lea plus reculés juaque noa jours, Firmin Didodt, Freres, Paris, 1860, 1892. 149 |Ruschenberger. To rationally dispose of leisure moments; to foster peaceful study of natural things, as a wholesome diversion of the mind from the mental weariness and waste incident to idlers, quite as harmless, and more useful than contending at a game of chess ; and to communicate freely to each other, as well as to the world, the results of their studies and spontaneous investigations were the chief motives which led its members to institute the Society and promote its progress. Many books of reference, to tell students what had been already ascer- tained, and collections of numerous natural objects, to compare with those supposed to be new, are indispensable implements of a naturalist, but no individual was able to obtain them. Immediately after founding the Society the members saw this urgent need, and together began to form a library and a museum for their common use. Looking forward to a time when the members of the Society would be numerous, and possibly might include zealous supporters of different relig- ious creeds and rival political parties, the founders were somewhat appre- hensive that a source of discord might arise in meetings of men holding conflicting opinions on these subjects, and for such reason agreed from the outset that, on entering the premises of the Society, every member should leave his religion and politics behind him at the door, and that debate of religious or political questions should be always out of order. This un- written By-Law, solely designed to preserve harmony, though well under- stood by the members, was misconstrued outside of the Society. Educated people, generally, then regarded the study of natural history to be in some vague way antagonistic to religion, and erroneously sup- posed that its votaries must be atheists or at best deists, and, therefore, to be avoided. The above unwritten By-Law, which, according to vulgar rumor, required members on joining the Society to give up religion, sustained the popular error. During the first quarter of a century of the Academy’s existence, natural history was not a part of the curriculum in any school or college in our country, because its economic value was not generally understood. Most of the Society’s members were self-taught. They met in the evening once a week and before the meeting was called to order, passed some time harmoniously conversing about their studies. Their aim was to encourage spontaneous investigations and to make the Academy a practical school of natural history. No one then imagined that knowledge of it would ever become, as it is now, marketable knowledge, a part of the stock in trade of the teacher’s beneficent vocation. At that time the chief incentive to the study was pure love of it, without hope of renown or emolument. When Dr. Leidy joined the Society its library contained about 12,000 volumes, and its museum representative collections of thousands of speci- mens in all departments of natural history, besides chemical and other apparatus. He had at once use of all these resources, and the encourage- — ment which flows from the fellow-feeling of many comrades working on the same line. He often said in after years that, without the facilities Ruschenberger.] 150 [April 1, found in the Academy, he could not have succeeded in many of his original researches. Dr. Leidy was elected Librarian December, 1845. He resigned at the end of the year, and the Academy voted him thanks for his efficient ser- vice. In December, 1846, he was elected a Curator, and was continuously Chairman of the Board till he died—more than forty-four years. During all that time he virtually directed and managed the affairs of the museum. To him it was a congenial occupation—helped him in the line of his pursuits. At the weekly stated meetings of the Academy the Chairman of the Curators usually invited attention to any notable addition to the museum. In this connection his verbal communications, which are recorded in the Proceedings, are very numerous, and were always seemingly delivered and heard with pleasure. An examplary specimen of them is, as follows : At a stated meeting of the Academy, October 6, 1846, Dr. Leidy announced substantially that he had lately detected an entozoon in the thigh of a hog, which ‘‘is a minute, coiled worm contained in a cyst. The cysts are numerous, white, oval in shape, of a gritty nature, and between the thirtieth and fortieth of an inch in length.’’ He supposed it ‘‘to be the Trichina spiralis heretofore considered as peculiar to the human species. He could perceive no distinction between it and the specimens of 7. spiralis which he had met with in several human subjects in the dissecting rooms, where it had been observed by others, since the attention of the scientific public had been directed to it by Mr. Hilton and Prof. Owen.’’* In an address, delivered May 1, 1886, he said: ‘‘I recall to mind an occasion upwards of forty years ago, while I was a student assisting my preceptor, Dr. Goddard, the Demonstrator of Anatomy in the University and Prosector to Prof. Horner. We were making preparations for a lecture on the muscles when Dr, Goddard, who was endowed with quick perception and sharp vision, observed an appearance in the flesh which led him to examine it with the microscope. In it he found a number of minute coiled worms to which he called the attention of Prof. Horner. The parasite had been discovered a short time previously by the English surgeon, Sir James Paget, and was described by Prof. Owen with the name Trichina spiralis. Several years later I found the same parasite in pork,’’+ It appears that the existence of trichine in the human subject was first noticed in England in 1832. On the 22d of January, 1833, Mr, John Hilton read a paper before the Medico-Chirurgical Society of London, entitled, ‘“ Notes on a peculiar * Proe, Acad, Nat, Se, of Phila., Vol. iil, pp. 107-8, 1846, + Au Address on Evolution and the Pathological Importance of the Lower Forms of Life.” By Prof. Joseph Leidy. Delivered before the graduating class of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania, May 1, 1886. Reprinted from the Therapeutic Gazette for June 15, 1886. George 8, Davis, Detroit, Mich., 1886, aay ina EO aA EELS SE Ee ere ee ne 1892,] ’ 1 5 1 [Ruschenberger. appearance observed in human muscles, probably depending upon the formation of very small cysticerci. By John Hilton, Demonstrator of Anatomy at Guy’s Hospital.” He states substantially that Procter, aged seventy, was admitted into the - hospital for a cancer, and died three months after. ‘‘ Between the [mus- cular] fibres, and having their long axis parallel to them, are situate several oval bodies, transparent in the middle and opaque at either end, altogether about one-twenty-fifth of an inch in length. No organization could be discovered with the aid of a microscope.’’* At a meeting of the Zoélogical Society of London, February 24, 1835, Mr. Owen read a description of a microscopic Hntozoon, infesting the mus- cles of the human body.t+ In the Transactions of the Zodlogical Society of London, Vol. i, pp. 315-28, is the same paper, “‘By Richard Owen, Assistant Conservator of the Royal College of Surgeons in London,’’ with a plate. In that paper Mr. Owen states in substance that Mr. Paget, an intelligent student at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, observed that muscles of the body of an Italian barometer-inaker, who died January 29, 1835, aged fifty, were beset with minute whitish specs,’’ and that Mr. Paget, aided by Mr. Brownand Mr. John Bennet, at the British Museum, at the same time satisfactorily determined the existence of the entozoon. Mr. Wormald, Demonstrator of Anatomy at St. Bartholomew’s Hos- pital, stated that he had noticed more than once the same condition during previous anatomical seasons, and at the request of Mr. Owen, soon fur- nished him ample materials for microscopic examination from the subject above mentioned. Mr. Owen at once described the entozoon, which he named Trichina spiralis, and reported the result of his investigation to the Zodlogical Society. Dr. Henry J. Bowditch, of Boston, was the first American who noticed the Trichina spiralis, t No one had ever suggested a source of or how this parasite found its way into the human subject until Dr. Leidy, while eating a piece of ham at his own breakfast table, discovered its existence in the hog. In an- nouncing his discovery, with his usual caution, he said that he supposed it to be the Trichina spiralis described by Owen. This may be a reason why it was not generally recognized at the time. The publication of it in the Proceedings of the Academy was copied in full in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. xix, p. 358, London, 1847; and Drs, F. Kiichenmeister and F. A. Ziirn state, in their work on the Parasites of Men, that ‘‘ Leidy found, in 1847, the parasite in the muscle of pigs.’’2 * The London Medical Gazette for February 2, 1883, Vol. xi, p. 605. +See Proceedings Zodl. Soc. t His observations are published in the Boston Med. and Surg. Jour. for 1842 and 1844, 2Dr. T. Spencer Cobbold, a chief English authority on the subject, in his work on Entozoa, published in 1864, cites Dr. Leidy in his bibliography, but does not mention him in his text in reference to Trichinz. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. s0C. Xxx. 138. T. PRINTED APRIL 23, 1892. 152 {April 1, Ruschenberger.] The discovery that Zrichina spiralis infests the hog is, in its economic relations, among the most important observations Dr. Leidy ever made. Very soon after Dr. Leidy’s discovery became generally known in Europe, the importation of American pork by Austria-Hungary, Ger- many, etc , was arrested, undera belief that American hogs are very often — infested by this parasite. Recently, however, relying upon the system of inspection established by American authority, American pork is no longer excluded from European countries in which immense quantities of pork are consumed in the form of smoked meat, imperfectly cooked, Whether the Germans suppose, as has been asserted, that one pound of raw pork contains as much nourishment as a pound and a quarter well cooked, or prefer the taste of it simply smoked, is an open question. Be this as it may, it is now known that thorough cooking renders trichinous pork harmless. Though the most ancient of lawgivers declared swine to be ‘‘ unclean,’’ unwholesome food, it does not seem supposable that he anticipated Leidy and knew that the pigs of his time were infested by this microscopic parasite. Sr : Trichine found now in man, it is believed, are derived from the hog, but whence the hog receives the parasite has not been demonstrated. Dr. Leidy was chosen a member of the American Philosophical Society October 19, 1849. Though not frequently present at its meetings, he con- tributed several papers to its Transactions and Proceedings. Need of very much more space to properly accommodate the rapidly growing library and museum of the Academy had been apparent for some time, and had become so pressing that, early in 1866, measures were adopted to supply the want. Forty members were appointed a com- mittee to solicit citizens generally to contribute to a Building Fund. Dr. Leidy was one of them, but it is believed that his modesty prevented him from actively participating in the work. A trust was created. The con- tributors were to elect thirteen members of the Academy Trustees of the Building Fund, with authority to purchase a site and erect thereon a. suitable edifice. They represented the contributors, to whose bounty alone the Academy would be indebted for the proposed new building.. When the subscriptions amounted to $100,000, the fund was placed in the custody of the Trustees. This method of procedure was designed to remove the subject from the meetings of the Academy, and to avoid delays in construction, which, it. was conjectured, might arise from officious meddling of non-contributing members, if the work were confided to a Committee of the Society. Dr. Leidy was elected a member of the first Board of Trustees of the See, On Potsoning by Diseased Pork, being an essay on trichinosis or flesh-worm disease, ite prevention and cure, By Julius Althaus, M,D.,M.R.C.P., London, Physician to the Royal Infirmary for Diseases of the Chest, 8vo,, pp. 34. John Churchill & Sons, London, 1844, Also, Animal Parasites and Mesamates. By P, J, Beneden, Professor at the University of Louvain ; correspondent of the Institute of France, with 88 illustrations. D. Appleton & Co., New York, 1876, ley (153 [Ruschenberger. Building Fund, January, 1867, and was regularly reélected till the close of his life. The work of the Board was not in harmony with his previous experience or taste. For this reason, perhaps, and because he unre- servedly confided in the business ability of his colleagues rather than on his own, he did not warmly participate in it, though none was more desirous of its satisfactory achievement. During his student days, and for years after graduation, Dr. Leidy was generally held to be poor; but he had already acquired a local reputation on account of his knowledge of natural history, and was re- garded to be a young scientist of unusual promise. He attracted the attention of some prominent citizens, among them Dr. James Rush, to whose beneficence the city is indebted for the Ridgeway branch of the Philadelphia Library, Mrs. Rush was frequently pleased to make him a _ lion at her evening parties. At that time many persons were pleased to | believe that he strongly resembled the conventional likeness of our Saviour. Both Dr. and Mrs. Rush were his friends and admirers during their lives. Mrs. Rush died October 23, 1857. After that event Dr. Leidy often dined téte-d-téte with Dr. Rush. Dr. Rush died May 26, 1869. Dr. Leidy was invited to be a pall- bearer at the funeral, and at the same time received an intimation that he should not fail to be present. He accepted the invitation. A few days afterwards he was greatly surprised by the receipt of a - bank cheque for $500. He learned that Dr. Rush had named those friends whom he desired to be his pallbearers, and that he had instructed the executor of his estate to give $500 to each of those who served in that capacity at his funeral. At its summer commencement of 1869, the Franklin and Marshall College, Lancaster, Pa., conferred upon him the honorary degree of Legum Doctor—LL.D. In the spring of 1871 he was appointed Professor of Natural History in Swarthmore College, eleven miles from the city, in Delaware county, and lectured there at 10 o’clock A.M., at first once in the week and subse- quently twice. He resigned the office in June, 1885, but continued his connection with the institution as emeritus or retired professor. The Secretary of War invited him, May 6, 1873, to be the senior mem- ber of the scientific corps during an exploration of the route of the Pacific Railroad. This invitation was declined. In December, 1874, he was offered the Hersey Professorship of Anatomy in the University of Harvard, at an annual salary of $4000. He passed the summer of 1875 in Europe, visiting museums in London, Paris, Berlin, and mingling socially with renowned professors and distin- _ guished votaries of natural science wherever he halted. ___-He spent the greater part of two seasons exploring the country around _ Fort Bridger, the Uinta mountains and Saltlake basin in search of - materials for his treatise on Fresh Water Rhizopods of North America, APNE To LEONI SEN, PEN Ce ee — Ruschenberger. ] 154 {April 1, under the auspices of the U. 8. Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, then directed by Dr. F. V. Hayden. The work was pub- lished in 1879. Dr. Leidy states, January 1, in his introduction to it, that during four years he had studied these Rhizopods as they occur in all the fresh waters of the country from the Atlantic border to an altitude of 10,000 feet in the Rocky mountains, and gratefully refers to the generous hospitality and aid received from Dr. J. Van A. Carter, formerly of Fort Bridger, who conducted his expeditions to the Uinta mountains and de- frayed their expenses. Various railroad companies granted him entirely free transportation, or at half fare, so that to the Survey the expenses of this admirable work, besides the charges incident to its publication, amounted to about $222. His friend, Mr. Joseph Wilcox, relates that while they were visiting the ‘‘bad lands’’ of Wyoming, he asked Dr. Leidy, ‘‘ What beauties do you see in this forbidding territory?’’ In reply he said, ‘‘ This is a most interesting place to see, where no living animal or plant exists. I enjoy the novelty of this anomalous locality. You will all agree with the man who appropriately compared this place to the infernal regions after the fires had been put out.”’ During many years Dr. Leidy habitually visited the Twelfth Street Market in search of specimens, and became quite intimate with Mr, R. M. Holbrook, who is a large dealer in fresh fish, etc., and is also Treasurer of the Market Company. Speaking of Dr. Leidy, Mr. Holbrook said, ‘‘He was a man of such simplicity of manner that he drew all classes of persons to him, even children would stop and listen to him. ** At one time a few years ago he got from me a specimen of some kind of fish and wrote an article about it, in which he gave me the credit of furnishing the specimen. The article was copied in a London journal, but by mistake gave my name as the author. As soon as he saw it Dr. Leidy came and asked me whether I had written much for the papers. He then told me of the mistake, laughed heartily, and seemed to enjoy it very much.* ‘‘And he told me about the publication of his book on Rhizopods. And on my expressing a hope that he was well paid for his work, he said that all he got for his labor was twenty copies of it and that he was satisfied. ‘At another time he told me that he had just received an unexpected remittance from Boston ; that he had written a paper for the Walker prize the year before and had not received anything, but this year in con- sideration that his papers were good both years the committee had awarded him a double prize. His childlike manner in telling me about it, without reference to the sum of money he had received, and without the least tinge of egotism or conceit, showed that he wished me to enjoy his success with him, * Atamated meeting of the Academy, May 10, 1870, Dr. Leidy ‘‘called attention to errors in published reprints of the Academy's Proceedings in foreign journals,” all all 1892.] 155 [Ruschenberger. ‘‘He usually came to market about six o’clock in the morning before the crowd began, and sat behind the stall a half hour or more talking and watching the men while they were cleaning fish. He was always pleased to carefully examine whatever might be found in the stomachs or intes- tines of the larger varieties. The entrails of very big ones were some- times sent to his house that he might inspect them at his leisure. And if anything strange came along—for whatever comes into the fisherman’s net is fish—it was sent to him. Sometimes he wrote the Latin name of an uncommon kind on a scrap of paper, which my men copied in large letters and, sticking it on the specimen, displayed it on the stall. For example, on one scrap he wrote, ‘ Horse Crevalle—Caraux hippus. Cape Cod to the West Indies. Belongs to the Pilot-fish family and related to the Mackerels;’ on another, ‘Pensacola black grouper—Trisopteris microlepis;’ and on a third, ‘The Massachusetts Tile Fish—Monacanthus Massachusettensis.’ ’’ The Boston Society of Natural History, January 22, 1880, ‘‘ Voted that the Walker Grand Honorary Prize for 1879 be awarded to Prof. Joseph Leidy for his prolonged investigations and discoveries in zodlogy and paleontology, and in consideration of their extraordinary merit the sum awarded be $1000.* In August, 1880, an invitation to lecture and supervise the scientific studies of the postgraduates of Princeton College, N. J., was declined. ‘In December, 1881, he was elected without competition President of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and continuously held the office till he died. About the year 1866 it was suggested that natural history should be taught in the University. The proposition was entertained and discussed from time to time, and lingered on without action. In 1882, under the propulsive and successful administration of Dr. William Pepper, the dis- tinguished Provost of the University of Pennsylvania (whose policy appar- ently is to enlarge the institution and foster within it every branch of * Dr. William J. Walker, a generous friend of science, who died at Newport, R.I., April 2, 1865, placed in trust of the Boston Society of Natural History means of awarding prizes for the best memoirs, written in English, on subjects proposed by a committee, appointed by the Council of the Society. The first and second prizes to be awarded annually, and the third once in five years, beginning 1870. First.—For the best memoir presented a prize of $60 may be awarded, which sum, at the discretion of the Committee, may be increased to $100, if the memoir be of marked merit. : Second.—For the next best memoir a prize of not exceeding $50 may be awarded, pro- vided it be of adequate merit in the opinion of the Committee. Third.—Grand Honorary Prize. The Council of the Society may award the sum of $500 for such scientific investigation or discovery in natural history as may be deserving thereof in itsjudgment, provided such investigation or discovery shall have first been made known and published in the United States of America; and at the time of said award shall have been made known and published at least one year. “If in conse- quence of the extraordinary merit of such investigation or discovery, the Council of the Society should see fit, they may award therefor the sum of $1000.” Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. x, p. 146, 1866. Ruschenberger.] 156 [April 1, human knowledge which may be profitably taught), a school of natural history was devised and instituted under the modern style of Department of Biology, and Dr. Leidy was appointed, for the current academic year, Professor of Biology (Zoélogy) in the Faculty of Philosophy. In 1884 the department was organized by the appointment of a Faculty of seven professors, including Dr. Leidy as Professor of Zodlogy and Comparative Anatomy, and he was elected, May 6, Director of the Biological Department.* It was proposed, March 16, 1885, that his salary should be $6000, on condition that he should resign his position in Swarthmore College, which he did, and give his time exclusively to the University. A laboratory, an herbarium and an appropriate museum were started. To the latter Dr. Leidy contributed many of his skillfully made prepara- tions, and bequeathed to it an herbarium of about 1400 vensies of plants, collected by himself. In this connection the University Marine Biological Association has been founded, with laboratories and aquaria located at Sea Isle City, N. J. The Geological Society—Burlington House, London, January 5, 1884— awarded to Dr. Leidy the Lyell Medal, with its accompanying purse of £25, in recognition of his important services to paleontology. About the close of the year 1883 the attention of Dr. Leidy was invited to a subject which he had not previously considered. Mr. Henry Seybert, a firm believer in modern spiritualism, who died March 8, 1883, aged eighty-two years, not long before his death gave to the University of Pennsylvania a sum of money sufficient to found a Professor- ship of Philosophy, on condition that the University should appoint a com- mission to investigate ‘‘all systems of morals, religion or philosophy, which assume to represent the truth, and particularly of modern spiritualism.” Ten gentlemen, most of them members of Faculties or of the Board of Trustees of the University, were constituted a commission to investigate modern spiritualism. Dr. Leidy, with one or more members of the com- mission, attended twelve sittings with reputed spiritualist mediums, from March, 1884, to April, 1887. The commission submitted a preliminary report of its proceedings May, 1887.+ The Trustees of the Wagner Free Institute of Science elected him, July 27, 1885, President of the Faculty and Professor of Biology, at an annual salary of $500, From that date the Trustees obtained his views before deciding any question relating to the scientific policy of the Institute, and appointed members of the Faculty subject to his approval. He lectured two or three times every season, and always attracted a large audience. In the spring of 1890, lectureships superseded the Faculty system, and * University of Pennsylvania, Handbook of Information, concerning the School of Biology, Philadelphia, 1889, t Preliminary Report of the Commission appointed by the University of Pennsylvania to Investigate Modern Spiritualism, in accordance with the Request of the late Henry Seybert, 12mo, pp. 100, J, KB, Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, 1887, —— —— —— a ee eT eee ee ee a aS ie = - 1892.] 157 | Ruschen berger, Dr. Leidy was elected Director of the Museum June 3, 1890, and spent some of his last days in planning a synoptical arrangement of it. He was authorized by the Trustees to expend $3000, while in Europe in 1889, in the purchase of specimens for the museum, and on his return $1000 more were placed in his hands to be spent in the United States for objects of the same kind. His interest in the growth of the museum and library was constant. He presented many books and specimens collected by himself. At its summer commencement of 1886, Harvard University conferred upon him its honorary degree of Legum Doctor—LL.D.; and the Insti- tute of France awarded to him, December 18, 1888, the Cuvier prize medal. He had now reached the sixty-fifth year of hisage. Unremitting routine and other labors, and the enjoyment of many social meetings with friends, had somewhat abated both his physical and mental energies. Rest was desirable. Accompanied by his wife and daughter he visited Europe in the summer of 1889, but his first letters from London indicate that the sojourn there was much less cheering to him than it ever had been. And then the serious illness of Mrs. Leidy, soon after reaching England, greatly augmented his depression, although the sym- pathy and attention of his English friends were unstinted. After her recovery the projected tour was completed, and in September all returned in better health and spirits than when they started on their trip to Europe. Soon after reaching home a rumor from the University was a source of much distress to Dr. Leidy. It was said that the professorships were to be rearranged, and to realize the plan he would be asked to relinquish the Chair of Anatomy and retain his position in the Biological Department. A city newspaper reported substantially that Dr. Leidy had been requested to resign. The statement was at once authoritatively contradicted. Nevertheless, subsequently he, who was pronounced by one of the Faculty to be the ‘‘ most consummate teacher that ever held the Chair of Anatomy,”’ Was requested to relinquish it, but he declined. During the year 1890, in compliance with the wish ofa valued friend, he visited several times the establishment of Mr. Keely, who claims that he had long ago discovered a new motor of extraordinary force. Diligent study during many years has failed to ascertain a practical method of applying this power to any use. With this aim Mr. Keely has con- structed costly and ingenious machinery which is set in motion by this occult power. Many prominent scientists, engineers and others have been invited at different times to inspect it, hoping probably that their - opinions would encourage his continuous research. It seems, however— if the public be rightly informed in the premises—that, in their judgment, the nature of this new force, whatever it may be in fact, is not yet appa- rent. But Dr. Leidy wrote, December 18, on his card to a friend, ‘‘Keely appeared to me to have command of some power previously unknown.”’ Ruschenberger.] 158 (April 1, This statement is not even presumptive testimony that a previously unknown natural force is now under command. Unsurpassed ability to ascertain the structure of organisms of every kind, as Dr. Leidy had, is not in itself sufficient to guarantee that the witness may not be deceived as to the motive force that operates complicated machinery, especially one who has never been interested in or studied any branch of physics. The judgment of a backwoodsman on the sea-worthiness and fighting qualities of the first battleship he ever visited would be as respectable. His membership in many societies at home and abroad is significant of his widespread reputation. A list of them is appended. Prof. Henry C. Chapman, of Jefferson Medical College, in his Memoir, printed in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphbia, for 1891, has noticed in a summary but admirable manner each of Dr. Leidy’s leading publications. Lists of all of them may be found in the Appendix. The general character of all his works is anatomical. They consist almost entirely of technical descriptions of genera and species of existing or extinct animals. Though highly creditable, to their author, they inte- rest very few persons besides votaries of natural history, because they are not applicable to any apparent industrial use. Such writing does not bring pecuniary reward. With the exception of his books on Anatomy and reports to the Surgeon-General of the Army, he received no sub- stantial compensation for any of his numerous essays. Inasmuch as botany and mineralogy were greatly preferred to other branches of natural history in his early life, it is notable that he published little, if anything of importance, in connection with either. Prof. Thomas C. Porter, of Lafayette College, among the foremost of our botanists, who was his intimate friend during many years, wrote in reply to inquiries : ‘‘To your other question I can give a definite answer. Of course, as a master of biology, he had a comprehensive knowledge of structural and physiological botany, but his interest in the plant world was only a side-interest. He had a fair acquaintance with our native flora, and his wonderful powers of observation were sometimes of great service to his friends who were engaged in its study. Had he turned his. mind from animals to plants he would, no doubt, have done the same kind of valuable work amongst the latter as he had done amongst the former. But I know of no thorough investigations of the sort made or published by him. Looking over his species of Panicum one day, he remarked to me that, if he could devote the time to it, he should like to produce & monograph of that difficult genus. He had a herbarium com- posed chiefly of specimens of his own collection. It is not large, but like everything else which passed through his hands, in excellent condition.”’ In his charming personal history of Dr, Leidy, Dr. William Hunt says: “T remember walking with him along the grassy path by the seaside at Bar Harbor one summer day. We were on our way to visit a Phila- delphia lady who was herself an amateur botanist, and particularly well | | OOF Fey fer a Le 1892.] 1 59 [Ruschenberger. acquainted with the region about us. Suddenly Dr. Leidy said, raising his hands, ‘Dear me! there is a plant which Gray says only grows high on the mountains, and here it is by the sea.’ He gathered a portion of it with great care and put it in his pocket. When he got to the house he spoke of his find, and showed Mrs. —— the specimen. ‘Why, Doctor,’ she said, ‘that is Hmpetrum.’ The doctor looked carefully at it and said, ‘Why, soitis; I thought it was Loiseleuria,’ and laughed heartily, receiving the correction as though it had come from Gray himself.’’* His deep interest in mineralogy was continuous from boyhood till the close of his life. To him it was a kind of Sunday afternoon or holiday recreation to visit friends who had cabinets, examine their newly acquired specimens, and talk about them in connection with those in rival collec- tions. Always seeking to obtain rare specimens, especially of gems, he bought and sold and exchanged minerals with his friends whenever oppor- tunity occurred. About the year 1870 he purchased a collection, said to be the finest ever brought from Europe to this country, and a year or two after sold it to a party in Boston for $2000, because he said he could not afford to keep it. He continually added to and improved his cabinet, which, at his death, was sold to the National Museum at Washington, D. C., for $2800. He was not practically interested in the chemical analysis of minerals. But through his life-long habit of examining, comparing and exchanging specimens, as well as of buying and selling them, he acquired the skill of an average lapidary in recognizing mineral forms, especially of gems, and among his friends became an authority for their market value. Yet more than once he mistook an artificial for a real stone, submitted to his inspec- tion by a dealer to test his knowledge. Dr. Leidy had a broad chest and strong limbs, was about five feet ten or eleven inches in height and 200 pounds in weight. Relatively to his stature, slightly stooping at the shoulders, his head was rather small; and it was ascertained after death that his brain weighed forty-five and a half ounces—somewhat less than the average. But deficiency of brain tissue was probably compensated for by the sustaining power of good blood- circulating and digestive apparatus, upon the normal functions of which mental activity in a degree depends. It is commonly known that a drink of tea or of any stimulant temporarily augments the activity of the mental machinery when it is moving slowly from fatigue or other cause. It is generally supposed, however, that intellectual energy is in proportion to the size of the brain, the prevailing weight of which in adult man is from forty-six to fifty-three ounces, according to an English authority, + and from forty-five to fifty-five ounces among our own people, and among all races from two to four pounds, according to an American authority. *In Memoriam. Dr. Joseph Leidy, b. Sept. 9, 1828, d. April 30, 1891. Personal History. By William Hunt, M.D. Read at the Academy of Natural Sciences, May 12, 1891. +Anatomy, Descriptive and Surgical. By Henry Gray, F.R.S. tAn Elementary Treatise on Human Anatomy. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D., ete. Second edition, 1889. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxx. 188. U. PRINTED APRIL 23, 1892. Ruschenberger.] 160 [April 1, ‘A little man with the same size of head as a big man will (other things being equal) possess more energy. In weight of brain, again, considerable differences exist among men of acknowledged power. The average weight of the male brain in civilized races is about 49 ounces. Cuvier’s brain weighed 64 ounces; Abercrombie’s and Schiller’s, 63; De Morgan and Gauss, the mathematicians, 523 and 52 respectively. But Grote, the his- torian, had a brain only three-quarters of an ounce above the average, while the brains of Tiedemann, the anatomist, and Hausmann, the min- eralogist, fell 5 and 6 ounces below it. * * * ‘«The heaviest known human brain belonged to a Sussex bricklayer, who died of consumption in University College Hospital in 1849. It ex- ceeded 67 ounces and was well proportioned ; while in physical size its owner was not greatly above the average, being 5 feet 9 inches in height and of robust frame. But the man could not read or write, though he was said to have a good memory and to be fond of politics.’’* According to these data size or weight of brain is not a measure of mental capability. it Dr. Leidy had a handsome forehead, though it was not remarkably high nor broad. Compared with the head, his face was perhaps large. Nearly horizontal, straight brows slightly overhung tranquilly pensive blue eyes, which were not widely separated by a full-sized, well-formed nose. His mouth, slightly drooping at the corners, contained a set of fine teeth. The lips were well proportioned and his chin was broad. He wore a full beard and was well crowned with fine hair. While conversing with friends the expression of his face was truly significant of his very amiable disposition. His utterance was distinct and the tone of his voice pursuasive and pleasant, though slightly nasal. A naturaland very modest demeanor made him welcome wherever he was. He loved the company of his friends. No member of either the Old Contributorship, of which he was a Director, or of the Biological Club, of which he was President, enjoyed more their stated dinners; on those occasions his cheerful and instructive conversation, almost always mentioning some fact new to them, gratified his companions.+ To him controversy and conflict were always repugnant. He preferred to yield at once, rather than contend. For him it was a task to say, No, This feature of his nature at times lessened his administrative efficiency in He says, p. 715: “All other conditions being equal, it is observed also to hold a relation in size to the degree of mental development; hence the more civilized races and more cultivated and Intelligent people are distinguished by a larger and heavier brain, while the opposite condition exists In the barbarous races and the least cultivated persons.” * The Insanity of Genius and the General Inequality of the Human Facully, Physiological, Coneldered, By J, F. Nisbet, author of Marriage and Heredity, Ward & Downey, 12 York street, Covent Garden, London, 1891, + The Biological Club, as a token of its appreciation of Dr. Leidy, had painted a very satisfactory portrait of him, which is in the library of Academy of Natural Sciences. The College of Physicians of Philadelphia has in its library a portrait, which is a lugubrious likeness, though artistically well painted, 192. ] 161 [Ruschenberger. the opinion of some of his warmest friends, and caused them on occasions to jocosely say: ‘‘Oh! he is an invertebrate.’’ While he was a bachelor his manner of living was properly economical, and his savings at different times amounted to considerable sums ; but his financiering ability or forecast seemed to be limited to this kind of hoard- ing. At the time when speculation in petroleum was imagined to be a sure road to fortune, he listened to a friend supposed to be knowing in the field, invested in a petroleum company and lost $4000. On another occa- sion he was lured by promises to invest in a silver mine and lost about twice as much. Next he purchased stock of a certain railroad which from that day never made a dividend, and sold it for about half its cost. During the first half of his life or more his attention was exclusively given to anatomical and natural history pursuits. General] literature or popular diversions did not interest. him in any considerable degree. His diary kept while in Europe in 1848 mentions that he once attended the Hay- market Theatre in London, and that he passed one evening in Paris at the Theatre du Palais Royal. But galleries of paintings and sculpture attracted his attention. Toa friend who presented him a poem years ago he said : “T never read poetry. It seems to me such a round-abound way of expressing ideas.’’ And to another he said he did not understand how anybody could read ‘“‘rhyming stuff.’’ But in the last decade of life, when age and experience had tamed his energies, and egoism was less exacting, his tastes changed. He read with pleasure certain poetic compo- sitions, which friends commended, and now and thenanovel. Theatrical amusement often attracted him, and he was sometimes pleased to hear the music of his daughter’s piano in the parlor while he was engaged in his study. He daily read newspapers, and, as a good citizen, voted at elec- tions of city, State and United States officers. In some respects he resembled Charles Darwin. Matthew Arnold says: ‘‘Mr. Darwin once owned to a friend that, for his part, he did not experi- ence the necessity of two things, which most men find so necessary to them—religion and poetry ; science and the domestic affections he thought were enough.’’* In his autobiography Mr. Darwin says: ‘‘For many years I cannot endure to read a line of poetry; I have tried lately to read Shakespeare, and have found it so intolerably dull that it nauseated me. I have almost lost my taste for pictures and music. * * * My mind seems to have become a kind of machine for grinding general laws out of a large collec- tion of facts.”’ Dr. Leidy, however, sought chiefly to ascertain facts ; he did not attempt to deduce general Jaws from them. He accepted, without reserve, all the theories of evolution, etc., of Mr. Darwin, with whom he had correspondence, but their religious views were very different. * Discourses in America. By Matthew Arnold. Macmillan & Co., London, 1885, p. 113. Ruschenberger.] 162 : [April 1, In a letter, dated February 28, 1879, addressed to his friend, the Rev. Dr. Henry C. McCook, he said: ‘‘I mark what you say in reference to quoting from the Cosmic Philosophy of Prof. Fiske, instead of expressing my opinions in my own language. I preferred doing so because my relig- ious views so fully accord with those he so clearly presents to the reader. I have always had an antipathy to enter into a discussion of religious opinions, and when persons, curious to know mine, have questioned me, to avoid discussion, I have the last few years referred them to the admir- able work of John Fiske. ‘‘ While I am disposed to avoid public notice, I feel some recompense in your having read my note to your audience, as it may tend to remove the reproach of atheism, which you know is so unreasonably and freely im- puted to all naturalists and philosophers. “Through life I have been conscious of having been a devoted wor- shiper (again to quote Mr. Fiske) ‘ of an ever-present God, without whom not a sparrow falls to the ground;’ and I have often felt annoyed at the implied reproach of infidelity from the self-sufficient who consider that they fulfill all religious duty in lip-service to the same Deity.’”’ Though nota regular attendant of any church, he was pleased to listen occasionally to sermons of the Rev. Drs. Phillips Brooks (Episcopalian), Ed. R. Beadle (Presbyterian) and William H. Furness (Unitarian). The teaching of the last was in accordance with his own religious views. The genius of Dr. Leidy—an innate force that seems to dominate the exercise of the natural aptitudes or talents—a force none of his ancestors possessed, and is therefore not ascribable to heredity—impelled him to investigate natural objects and portray those which had not been previ- ously described. His strong egoism was more gratified in this occupation than in any other. Some of his contemporaries, who wrought in the same field, possibly may have done more, but in the accuracy of their work none surpassed him. Prof. Cesare Lombroso, of Turin, forcibly argues that genius of every kind is always associated with abnormal conditions of the organism, and for such reason its presence is significant of some degree or kind of degen- eration.* Dr. Leidy was, as geniuses generally are said to be, precocious and sterile ; also, emotional and so far, neuropathic. During his visits to Europe, too long and too eager quest of whatever he sought was some- times followed by a feverish state and an unpleasant degree of nervous depression ; but perfect rest for a day, as his diaries show, enabled him to resume his pursuits. Dr. Leidy had a rare experience of living nearly sixty-eight years with- out provoking personal hostility, without making an enemy. Troops of friends encouraged his pursuits, and among them some were ever ready to give him, when needed, substantial help to publish his works. No votary of natural history was helped more or more favored or more popular. *The Manof Genius, By Cesare Lombros, Professor of Legal Medicine at the Univer- sity of Turin; with tllustrations, Walter Scott, 24 Warwick Lane, London, and Charles Scribner's Sons, Now York, 1891, 1892.] = 163 {Ruschenberger. Announcement of his death brought expressions of regret for the loss sustained and of admiration of his character from many citizens. News- papers published sketches of his career and praised his works and ways. The Alumni Society of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania held its annual meeting in the evening of the same day. The President, Dr. Alfred Stillé, officially announced that Dr. Leidy had died in the morning, and said, among other things, that by the death of Dr. Leidy the University ‘‘looses the profoundest and most consummate teacher that ever held the Chair of Anatomy, and whose fame as a comparative anatomist, paleontologist, geologist, zodlogist and botanist was not bounded by his native city or country, but was coextensive with the civilized world. ‘«No man, who had such reason to be proud, was ever more humble, His simple and amiable manners attached to him the old as well as the young, and made him revered in the gravest circles of the learned and loved by the students, whom he inspired by his example and enriched by his knowledge.’’ The Wagner Free Institute of Science recorded sits sense of loss in a minute, as follows : “With feelings of deep sorrow we record the death of Dr. Joseph Leidy, who, for the past six years has stood at the head of the science work of our Institute as President of the Faculty and Director of the Museum. ‘The death of this true and honest man, as gentle as he was strong, as humble as he was great, is to the whole civilized world, as itis to ourown country, the loss of one of the most distinguished scientists of the day ; while to Philadelphia, the city of his birth and life-long home, it is the loss, not only of one of her greatest men, but as well of a true and faith- ful son, who loyally spent his whole life in her service, and who died, as he lived, in entire devotion to duty, wholly forgetful of himself, and mind- ful of the welfare of others. «To the Wagner Free Institute of Science the loss occasioned by his death is beyond repair. The place he has left vacant cannot be filled. ‘To him, more than any other man, and to his good guidance more than anything else, is due whatever has been accomplished by the Institute since the death of its founder, in the organization and conduct of its work in the cause of science. It is impossible to express in words the debt of gratitude we owe to him ; only by deeds can we give expression to it, by striving to carry out the work which he has planned for us with such consummate skill, that it may become a living memorial of his earnest labors, his broad intelligence and his commanding knowledge.’’ And in the first paragraph of his Valedictory Address to the graduating classes in medicine and dentistry of the University, delivered at the annual commencement, May 1, 1891, Prof. James Tyson said : ‘‘ The ink was scarcely dry on my page when came the intelligence that Joseph Leidy was seriously ill, and close on this fact of his death. This most Ruschenberger.] 164 . (April 1, unexpected calamity has changed the present occasion from one of rejoic- ing to one of mourning—scarcely mitigated by the circumstance that Dr. Leidy died as he wished, after a short illness and with his shoulder, as it were, still at the wheel. For Dr. Leidy never ceased to work. His industry was only equaled by his intellect, and these by the sweet simplicity of his life. He loved science for science's sake, and neither poverty nor promise of riches, nor ambition, nor princely decoration could swerve him from his purpose. We are stupefied by the suddenness of our loss. And there is a fitness in the Association of the end of your greatest teacher’s life, and the new commencement of your own, which ought not to be without its effect in keeping green his precious memory, and in stimulating you to emulate his example.’’ The funeral services were at the First Unitarian Church, May 2. Members of the societies to which he belonged, the Faculties of the Uni- versity, and prominent citizens in large numbers were present. The venerable and Rev. Dr. Furness officiated, and delivered an eloquent and touching tribute to his worth. His remains, and at the same time those of his brethen Dr. Philip Leidy, who died April 29, were cremated, May 9. Not long afterwards representatives of the University solicited contribu- tions to an endowment of $50,000 to be raised at once and exclusively devoted to the use of his widow ; and ultimately revert to the University, ‘to establish and endow the Leidy Memorial Musewm as an independent part of the great museum”’ projected for the Institution. Dr. Leidy be- queathed a modest sufficiency for his family. For such reason, probably, the necessity of the proposed endowment was not generally regarded to be urgent. About the same time it was decided to obtain an endowment for the Chair of Anatomy, the sum to be counted in the General Endow- ment Fund of $250,000 for the Medical Department, which, to make Dr. Pepper's conditional subscription of $50,000 payable, ‘‘ must be secured before June 1, 1892, and then designate this chair by “ the illustrious name of Leidy, whose labors gave it imperishable fame.’’ ‘‘No more fitting memorial,’’ says the circular, ‘‘can be found for this great man and beloved teacher.”’ And the other circular says, ‘‘ No memorial of Joseph Leidy can be more fitting than a museum in which will be garnered the infinite variety of natural objects which formed the basis of his admirable studies.”’ Prof. J. P. Lesley, his personal and scientific friend, early in May pub- lished in the Chrixtian Register a warm tribute to his worth and memory. He said among other statements: ‘The eulogy of the dead runs easily into exaggeration. In this case that cannot happen. Rare men are so rare—a few in a generation, here and there one whose excellence is above degrees, the perfect man, the ideal man. He is like a statue set up in the public park of the metropolis, veiled until the day of showing comes, Death drops the veil, and the splendid apparition smites the heart of the community with a strange astonishment,’’ ER SUE Le yotor 5 _ 1892.] 165 [ Ruschenberger. He also said, in substance, that while Cope and Marsh were working the fossiliferous field into which Dr. Leidy had entered long before, and by his labor made, in a sense, his own, they fell! into disputes over priority of dates of different names of genera and species found in the later strata of a Western Territory, in which contention Leidy, the friend of both, refused to take any part. And, it seems proper to add, so dominant was his repugnance to controversy of every kind that he left his friends, freed from his participation, to compete with each other, and for a considerable period engaged in an entirely different field of investigation, to return long afterwards to his beloved paleontology. The Trustees of the Building Fund of the Academy of Natural Sciences ordered, May 15, 1891, a memorial notice to be preserved with the record of their proceedings, in which it is stated that ‘“‘his modest, amiable de- portment at all times, his abiding interest in the welfare of the Academy and in the progress of the natural sciences, won for him the unreserved confidence and respect of his colleagues on the Board, and made his pres- ence at its meetings always welcome. But his connection with the Trustees and his many official positions in the Academy cculd not add to the high estimation in which he was held in the community. His accu- rate and extensive knowledge of natural history in all its departments, his writings, his most acceptable teachings as Professor of Natural History in Swarthmore College, and as Professor of Human Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania during more than a third of a century, from May, 1853, obtained for him a deserved reputation and fame among the friends of the Natural Sciences at home and abroad.’’ In his Address to the Graduating Class of 1891, at Swarthmore College, June 16, the President of the Board of Managers, Mr. Joseph Wharton, said: ‘‘And since nothing more potently aids us in the struggle to be- come wiser and better than observation of those who stand above us, and study of their methods, I can do nothing more fitting this occasion than endeavor to show you how this great man came to be so eminent, so trusted and so beloved. “Joseph Leidy inherited excellent constitution of mind and body ; he was transparently sincere and absolutely devoted to truth; he was re- markably devoid of selfishness in any form ; he had persistent and life- long diligence ; he was systematic in his expenditure and careful in his economy of time; he held firmly to whatever tésk he undertook ; his temper was cheerfully equable and his disposition affectionate.’’ Commenting on each of these characteristics successively, in a lucid style, Mr. Wharton thus happily concludes his pleasing address : ‘If now I have succeeded in showing you that every part of Dr. Leidy’s great eminence grew out of the cultivation of such natural powers as your own, and out of the constant practice of such simple virtues as should also be yours, that, in a word, you may hope to scale such heights, to breathe such lofty air, to serve so well your kind, and to attain such universal respect and affection, without possessing other genius than that which has 166 [April 1, Ruschenberger.] been defined as ‘an infinite capacity for taking pains ;’ and if in showing this I have stirred in you a secret resolution to make your lives bear some resemblance to his clean and fruitful life, my aim has been reached.’’ The tribute delivered at the opening session of the Congress of Ameri- can Physicians, assembled at Washington, D. C., September 21, 1891, is the last. Dr. Pepper, the distinguished Provost of the University of Pennsylvania, said: ‘‘In the death of Joseph Leidy, which occurred April 30, 1891, at the age of sixty-eight years, the medical profession in America lost its most loved and honored member, and American science its most illustrious representative.* It makes a difference to the world when such a man passes away. At his birth Nature gave him her accolade, and all-his life long he was loyal to the holy quest of truth, which is the vow imposed on those whom she invests as her chosen knights. Who can say how much of the marvelous and inexhaustible knowledge of nature this great man possessed came from the singleness of his life and the purity of his heart,’’ etc., etc. Leidy’s life sustains rather Arthur Schopenhaur’s opinion, that ‘‘thinkers and men of genius are those who have gone straight to the book of Nature ; it is they who have enlightened the world and carried humanity further on its way.’’} Postscript.—In the preparation of the preceding sketch, the writer has earnestly endeavored to avoid errors and hopes that he may have fairly succeeded. Incidents connected with the career of Dr. Leidy, though some of them may be unimportant or even trivial, have been narrated under an impression that they may assist in conveying a true representa- tion of him. The degree of usefulness to the world of his life-long work, according to the opinion that may be formed of it in the future, will be the criterion of its worth as well as the measure of the duration of his reputation. * Knowing that Dr. Leidy had entirely ceased to practise medicine more than forty years before, a witty friend of the Provost, after reading his graceful eulogy, remarked in substance that it was like telling an assembly, representative of all the tanners of the United States that, in the death of General Grant, they had lost the most beloved mem- ber of the trade. + November 17, 1891, Dr. William Hunt delivered an address on his University career before the alumni and studgnts of the Medical Department of the University of Penn- sylvania. 1892.] 167 [Ruschenberger. APPENDIX. _. §ocrerres At HOME AND ABROAD OF WHICH Dr. JosEPH LEIDY WAS A MEMBER, Boston Society of Natural History, 1845. _ Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, July 29, 1845. _ Naturhistorischer Verein fir das Grossherzogthum Hesse und Umgebung, 1848. American Academy of Arts and Sciences, 1849, _ American Philosophical Society, Oct., 1849. _ Fellow of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, 1851. Philadelphia County Medical Society. _ Société de Biologie, Paris, 1851. - Medical Society of Virginia, 1852. Linnean Society of Pennsylvania College, Gettysburg, 1853. Société Imperiale de Naturalistes de Moscow, 1853. "Logan Institute, Virginia, 1953. iy esageeten Society of the University of Pennsylvania, 1853. Beeedomathian Society of the University of Pennsylvania, 1854, des Sciénces des Arts et des Lettres de Hainault, 1853. Historical Society, 1855. - Natural History Society of Charleston, 8. C., 1855. Be rserican Medical Association, 1856, - Academy of Sciences, St. Louis, Mo., 1856. _ K. Leopoldinisch Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher, 1857. ‘Zoblogical Society of London, 1857. x. Bairische Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1858. - Dublin University Zodlogical and Botanical Association, 1859. - Burlington County |N. J.] Lyceum of History and Natural Science, 1859. K. Bémische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, 1860. Academia economicoagraria dei Georafili di Firenze, 1861. _K.K. Zoologisch-botanischer Verein, Wien, 1861. - Geological Society of London, 1861. ; blin Natural History Society, 1863. nal Academy of Sciénces [an original member], 1863. esota Historical Society, 1863. Entomological Society of Pennsylvania, 1864, lege of Physicians and Surgeons, Reading, 1870. Alumr Society of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania, 1871. ithropological Society of London, 1872. n Society of London, 1872. ota Academy of Natural Science, 1873. Nationale des Sciénces Naturelles de Strasbourg, 1873. dad Mexicana de Historia Natural, 1874. gical Society of Philadelphia, 1876. and Philosophical Society of Liverpool, 1877, torical Society of Pennsylvania, 1884. Biological Society of Washington, D. C., 1884. ‘ew York Microscopical Society, 1884. . Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, 1886, sex Institute, 1837, Victoria Institute, or Philosophical Society of Great Britain, 1888, ithropometric Society, P. Ruschenberger.] 168 [April 1, Dr. Letpy’s MEDICAL PAPERS AND Books, The Medical Journal of the Medical Sciences : On Several Important Points in the Anatomy of the Human Larynx. Vol. 12, pp. 141-43, 1846. Researches into the Comparative Structure of the Liver. Vol. 15, pp. 13-25, 3 plates, Jan., 1848. On the Intimate Structure and History of the Articular Cartilages. Vol. 17, pp. 277-94, 2 plates, April, 1849. Intermaxillary Bone in the Embryo of the Human Subject. Vol. 17, p. 577, 1819. Also reported Jan. 9, 1819, in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Vol. 4, pp. 145-47. Notice of Certain Bodies observed in the Human Subject. Vol. 20, pp. 89-91, 1850. Human Anatomy. By James Quain, M.D. Edited by Richard Quain, F.R.S., and Wil- liam Sharpey, M.D., F.R.S , Professor of Anatomy and Physiology in University Col- lege, London. First American from the Fifth London Edition. Edited by Joseph Leidy, M.D. In 2 Vols., with over 5U0 illustrations. Lea & Blanchard, Philadel- phia, 1819. Atlas of Pathological Histology. By Gottlieb Gluge, Professor of Physiology and Patho- logical Anatomy in the University of Bruxelles; Member of the Royal Academy of Bruxelles. Translated from the German by Joseph Leidy, M.D., Pathologist to St. Joseph’s Hospital, Philadelphia; Fellow of the College of Physicians of Philadel- phia ; Honorary Fellow of the Medical Society of Virginia Corresponding Member of the Biological Society of Paris, etc. With 320 figures, plain and colored, on 12 copperplate engravings. Folio, pp. 100. Blanchard & Lea, Philadelphia, 1853. The Medical and Surgical History of the War of the Rebellion. Quarto. Parti, Vol. 2, 1870. Surgical History : Report of Case of Gunshot Wound of the Cervical Vertebre, with Autopsy and Specimen, p. 431, 1863. Gunshot Wound of Rib, with Autopsy and Specimen. p. 569. Part ii, Vol. 2, 1876. Surgical History: Gunshot Flesh Wound, with Autopsy. p. 439. Excision of Humerus necrosed after Gunshot Wound, with Autopsy. p. 596. Gunshot Wound of Forearm, with Autopsy and Specimen. p. 927. Specimen of Ulna successfully excised on Account of Gunshot Wound, with Report of the Case. p. 962. Part ii, Vol. 1, 1879. Medical History : Reports of Cases and Autopsies made from July 30, 1852, to Oct. 25, 1861. pp. 109-122; and subsequently p. 300, p. 518 and p, 581. Nore.—Dr. J. Leidy's official communications to Surgeon-General Barnes embrace reports of more than sixty autopsies and cases, An Elementary Treatise on Human Anatomy. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania; Curator of the Academy of Natural Sciences; Member of the American Philosophical Society, American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Natural History Society, Boston, Lyceum of Natural History, New York, Elliot Natural History Society, Charleston, 8. C., Medical Society of Virginia, Academy of Sciences of St. Louis, Imperial Society of Moscow, Royal Academy of Sciences, Munich, Imperial Leopold Carol. Academy of Sciences of Jena, Biological Society of Paris, Society of Arts and Sciences, Mons, Zodlogical Society, London, United ZoSlogical and Botanical Association, Berlin, ete, With 392 illustrations, J. B. Lippincott & Co,, Philadelphia, 1861. Intestinal Worms, Svo, pp. 980-064 incl,, In Vol. 2 of A System of Practical Medicine, By American Authors, Edited by Willlam Pepper, M D., LL.D., ete, ; assisted by Louls Starr, M.D,, ete, Lea, Brothers & Co,, Philadelphia, 1888, 1892. 1 69 [Ruschenberger. An Elementary Treatise on Human Anatomy. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D., Professor of Human and Comparative Anatomy and Zoélogy in the University of Pennsylya- nia ; President of the Academy of Natural Sciences, and of the Faculty of the Wag- ner Free Institute of Science. Second Edition, rewritten, with 495 illustrations. 8yo, pp. 950. J. B.Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, 1889. Dr. LEIDY’s BooKs AND PAPERS ON NATURAL HISTORY. Anatomical Description of the Animal of Littorina angulifera, Illustrated. [Presented July 16, 1845.] Boston Journal of Natural History, Vol. 5, pp. 314-17. Boston, 1847. On the Anatomy of the Animal of Helix albolabris, Say. Illustrated. Proceedings of the Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 2, p. 57, 1845, On the Sack of the Dart, and of the Dart in Several Species of American Pneumo- branchiate Mollusks. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 2, pp. 59-60, 1845. A Notice of Helix lithophaga, p. 207, Official Report of the United States Expedition to Explore the Dead Sea and River Jordan. By Lieut. W. F. Lynch, U.S.N. Published at the National Observatory, Washington. Quarto, printed in Baltimore, 1852. Dr. LEIDY’s PAPERS PUBLISHED IN THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMER. PHILOS. Soc. Octayo. ‘Verbal Remarks, March 4, 1859, on the Geology of the Headwaters of the Missouri. Vol. 7, p. 10. A Biographical Notice of Isaac Lea, LL.D. Read Nov. 18, 1887. Vol. 14, pp. 400-3. Dr. LEmDY’s PAPERS PUBLISHED IN THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE AMER. PHILOs. Soc, Vol. 10, New Series, Quarto, Published 1853 : On the Organization of the Genus Gregarina of Dufour. Read Jan. 3, 1851, pp. 233-40, 2 plates. Some Observations on Nematoidea imperfecta, and Description of Three Parasitic Infu- soria. pp. 241-44, 1 plate. Description of an Extinct Species of American Lion. Read May 7, 1852, pp. 319-24, 1 plate. A Memoir on the Extinct Dicotylina of North America. Read May 21, 1852, pp. 323-43, 4 plates. In Vol. 11, New Series, Quarto, 1860: Notice of the Remains of the Walrus discovered on the Coast of the United States. pp. 83-86. Descriptions of the Remains of Fishes from the Carboniferous Limestone of Illinois and Missouri. Read July 15, 1856, pp. 87-90. Saurocephalus and its Allies. Read Noy. 21, 1856, pp. 90-95. Observations on the Extinct Peccary of North America ; being a Sequel to a Memoir on the Extinct Dicotylinze of America, Read Noy. 21, 1856, pp. 96-105. Extinct Vertebrata from Judith River and Great Lignite Formations of Nebraska, pp. 139-54, plate. UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. ‘Description of the Remains of Extinct Mammalia and Chelonia from Nebraska Terri- tory, collected during the Geological Survey under the Direction of Dr. David Dale Owen. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., of Philadelphia. Quarto. Pp. 540-72 of the Report of the Geological Survey of Wisconsin, Iowa and Minnesota. By D. D. Owen, under instructions of the U.S. Treasury Department. Lippincott, Grambo & Co., Philadel- phia, 1852. Contributions to the Extinct Vertebrate Fauna of the Western Territories. By Prof. Joseph Leidy. Quarto, pp. 358, 37 plates. Being Vol. 1 of the Report of the United _ States Geological Survey of the Territories. By F. V. Hayden, United States Geologist in Charge. In Five Volumes. Government Printing Press, Washington, 1873, Ruschenberger. ] 170 {April 1, Freshwater Rhizopods of North America. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania, and of Natural History in Swarthmore College, Pennsylvania. Government Printing Office, Washington, 1879. Quarto, pp. 324+48 =372. Illustrated by six figures intercalated in the text, and 48 plates which contain 1180 figures of 31 genera and 84 species, of which Dr. Leidy originally described 52 species. All the figures were first drawn and colored by Dr. Leidy, to be copied by artists. JOURNAL OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Second Series. Quarto. 1. History and Anatomy of the Hemipterous Genus Belostoma. 2. Miscellanea Zodlog- ica. Vol. 1, pp. 5.-67 and 67-70, 1 plate, 1847. Descriptions of two species of Distoma, with the partial history of one of them. Vol. 1, pp. 301-309, 1 plate, 1850. Descriptions of Some American Annelida abranchia. Vol. 2, pp. 43-50, 1 plate, 1850. Description of a New Species of Crocodile from the Miocene ,of Virginia. Vol. 2, pp. 135-8, 1 plate, printed Dec. 1851. On the Osteology of the Head of Hippopotamus, and a Description of the Osteological Characters of a New Genus of Hippopotamide. Vol. 2, pp. 207-24, 1 plate, 1853. On Bathygnathus borealis, an Extinct Saurian of the New Red Sandstone of Prince Ed- ward's Island. Vol. 2, pp. 327-30, 1 plate, 1854. Contributions towards a Knowledge of the Marine Invertebrate Fauna of the Coasts of Rhode Island and New Jersey. Vol. 3, pp. 185-152, 2 plates, 1855. Descriptions of Some Remains of Fishes from the Carboniferous and Devonian Forma- tions of the United States. Vol. 3,-pp. 159-65, 1 plate, 1856. Descriptions of Some Extinct Mammalia. Vol. 3, pp. 166-71, 2 plates, 1856. The Extinct Mammalian Fauna of Dakota and Nebraska. Including an Account of Some Allied Forms from Other Localities, together with a Synopsis of the Mamma- * lian Remains of North America. Illustrated with 80 plates. Preceded with an In- troduction on the Geology of the Tertiary Formations of Dakota and Nebraska, accompanied with a Map. By F. V. Hayden, M.D., Professor of Mineralogy and Geology in the Univ. of Pa., U. 8. Geologist, etc., ete. Vol. 7, pp. 472, 1869. Nore.—The authors of the above-named work were enabled to execute it chiefly through the generosity of Messrs. Joseph Jeanes and William P. Wilstach, to whom, as well as to some others, they acknowledge indebtedness. Description of Vertebrate Remains chiefly from the Phosphate Beds of South Carolina, Vol. 8, pp. 200-01, 5 plates, 1874-81. Parasites of the Termites. Vol. 8, pp. 425-17, 2 plates, 1874-81, Remarks on Bathygnathus borealis. Vol. 8, pp. 449-51. Urn atella gracilis, a Fresh-water Polyzoan, Vol. 9, pp. 5-16, 1 plate, 1884, _ SMITHSONIAN CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE, Quarto. A Flora and Fauna within Living Animals. (Accepted for publication 1851.) Vol. 5, pp. - 68, 10 plates, 1853, Memotr on the Extinct Species of Fossil Ox. (Accepted for publication 1852.) Vol. 5, pp. 20, 5 plates, 1853, The Ancient Fauna of Nebraska; or a Description of Extinct Mammalia and Chelonia from the Mauvalses terres of Nebraska, (Accepted for publication 1852.) Vol. 6, pp. 126, 25 plates, 1851. A Memolr on the Extinct Sloth Tribe of North America, (Accepted for publication Dec., 1853; published June, 1855.) Vol. 7, 1855, pp. 70, 16 plates, retaceous Reptiles of the United States. (Accepted for publication Dec,, 1864.) Vol. 4, 1865, pp. 140, 20 plates, 1392.] 1 T 1 [Ruschenberger. ANNUAL REPORTS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Brief Review of a Memoir on the Cretaceous Reptiles of the United States, published in the Fourteenth Volume of the Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge. By the Author, Joseph Leidy, M.D. 8vo, pp. 66-73. For the year 1864, Washington, D. C., 1865. WRITTEN AND VERBAL COMMUNICATIONS BY Dr. JosEPH LEIDY PUBLISHED IN THE ,PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1845. Notes taken on a Visit to White Pond, Warren Co., N. J., and a List of Ten Species of Fossil Shells collected there. Vol. 2, p: 279. Verbal, Noy. 18, That his microscopic observation of a portion of a vertebra of the Fossil Zeuglodon shows that it has all the characteristics of recent bone. Vol. 2, p. 292. 1846. Remarks on the Anatomy of the Abdominal Viscera of the Sloth, Bradypus tridactylis. Vol. 8, pp. 72-4, 2 figures. On the Anatomy of Spectrum femoratum, Say. Vol. 3, pp. 80-4. Illustrated by 18 figures on 2 plates. On the mechanism which closes the membranous wings of the genus Locusta. Vol. 3, p. 104, 1 fig. Descriptions of a new genus and species of Entozoén, Cryptobia helicis. Vol. 3, p. 100, 1 fig. [Finding that this name, Cryptobia, had been previously appropriated he changed it, August, 1847, to Cryptoicus. | Verbal, Oct. 6, notice that he had lately detected an Entozoén [ Trichina spiralis] in the superficial part of the extensor muscle of the thigh of a hog. Vol. 3, pp. 107-8. On the Situation of the Olfactory Sense in the Terrestrial Tribe of Gasteropodous Mol- lusca. Vol. 3, pp. 136-7, Verbal, April 15, remarks on the great fecundity of the Cryptogamia indicated in a specimen Puffball. Vol. 3, p. 195. 1847. Verbal, May 4, statement that he has observed numerous octagonal crystals, supposed to be oxalate of lime, in the cellular structure of several species of Parmelia. Vol. 3, p. 210. Verbal, June 8, notice of the remains of sutures of the incisive bone distinctly trace- able in the cranium of a New Hollander, then exhibited. Vol. 3, p. 217. Verbal, June 22, description of Distoma helicis, an Entozoén found in the pericardium of Helix alternata. Vol. 3, p. 220. Verbal, Aug. 24, remarks on the teeth of the specimen of Squatina Dumerli exhibited. Vol. 3, p. 247. Description and Anatomy of a New and Curious Subgenus Planaria, Vol. 3, pp. 248-51. Description of two new species of Planaria. Vol. 3, pp. 251-2. On the Fossil Horse of America, Vol. 3, p. 262, 1 plate, 6 figs. Verbal, Noy. 9, remarks on the slow destructibility of Animal Tissues in certain states. Vol. 3, p. 318. On a new genus and species of Ruminantia, Poebrotherium Wilsonii. Vol. 3, pp. 822-6, 1 plate, 6 figs. Verbal, Dec. 14, observations, in addition, on the Fossil Horse. Vol. 3, p. 328, 1848. Verbal, Jan. 11, notice that he had found an eye in Balanus rugosus, heretofore ad- mitted to exist only in the larva or imperfect stage of the Cirrhopoda. Vol. 4, p. 1. Verbal, Feb. 15, notice of the Hair of a Hottentot boy. Vol. 4, p. 7. On some Pecvliar Bodies in the Boa constrictor, resembling Pacinian Bodies. Vol. 4, pp. 27-8, 4 figs. a Ruschenberger.} 172 [April 1, A new fossil genus and species of ruminatoid pachydermata, Merycoidodon Culbert- sonii. Vol. 4, pp. 47-50, 5 figs. Verbal, Dec. 5, remarks on the development of the Purkenjean Corpuscle in bone; the intimate structure of cartilage, and on the arrangement of the areolar sheath of muscular fasciculi and its relations to the tendon. Vol. 4, pp. 116-20. 1849. Verbal, Jan. 9, remarks on the existence of the intermaxillary bone in the embryo of the human subject. Vol. 4, pp. 145-7, 2 figs. Remarks on fragmerits of the fossil Tapir deposited in the Academy. Vol. 4, pp. 180-2. Remarks on species of Confervacez ; on a new genus of Enterobrus elegans ; Cladophy- tum; a new genus of Entophyta; Cladophytum somatum; Anthromitus (a second new genus) ; new Genera of Entozoa. Vol. 4, pp. 225-33. On the Existence of Entophyta in Healthy Animals, as a Natural Condition. Vol. 4, pp. 225-33. Observations on the Character and Intimate Structure of the Odoriferous Glands of the Invertebrata. Vol. 4, p. 234-6, 3 figs. New genus and species of Entophyta. Vol. 4, pp. 249-50. 1850. Remarks on Entophyta. Vol. 5, pp. 7-8. Verbal, April 9, that he had observed in the stomach of the larva of Arctia isabella that the nucleus of every epithelial cell contained an octahedral crystal, the axis of which measured about 1.3750th of an inch, etc., ete. Vol. 5, p. 32. On Crystalline Bodies in the tissues of plants. Vol. 5, pp. 82-3. On Rhinoceros occidentalis, Vol. 5, p. 119. Descriptions of new Entophyta growing within Animals. Vol. 5, p. 35. Eucrotaphus Jacksoni, and Archeotherium Mortoni, from Fragments of Crania found in Cumberland Co., Pa. Vol. 5, pp. 92-3. Contributions to Helminthology. Vol. 5, pp. 96-3. : Notes on the Development of the Gordius aquaticus. Vol. 5, pp. 98-100. Two New Species of Infusorial Entozoa. Vol. 5, p. 100. Descriptions of some Nematoid Entozoa infesting Insects. Vol. 5, pp. 190-202. Descriptions of Three Filaria. Vol. 5, pp. 117-8. Remarks on the Nettling Organs of the Hydra. Vol. 5, pp. 119-121. On some fossil mammalian remains: Rhinoceros Nebraskensis; Paleotherium Bairdii ; Merycoidodon Culbertsonii and Agriochcerus antiquus. Vol. 5, pp. 121-2. Descriptions of New Genera of Vermes, Vol. 5, pp. 124-6. 1851. Descriptions of New Species of Entozoa. Vol. 5, p. 155. On Some Fragments of Paleotherium Proutii. Vol. 5, pp. 170-1. Fossil Tortoise, Stylemys Nebrascensis. Vol. 5, p. 172. Testudo lata—Emys hemispherica. Vol. 5, p. 173. On the Fungus Disease of Cicada septemaecem. Vol. 5, p. 285. Verbal, May 6, on transplanting cancer. Vol. 5, p. 201. Verbal, May 16, that he had found a dead Mole Cricket (Grillo talpa Americana), perfect in all ite parts, the body of which was everywhere filled with a parasitic fungus, the elliptical or globular sporules of which averaged 1,2833d of an inch in diameter. Vol. 6, p. 204. Contributions to Helminthology. Vol. 5, pp. 205-9. Helminthological Contributions, No. 2, Vol. 5, pp. 224-7. Remarks on Fragments of fossil ruminant ungulates. Vol. 5, p. 237-9, Helminthological Contributions, No, 8. Vol. 5, p. 239-44. Piumatella diffusa, a branching fresh-water ciliated Polyp. Vol. 5, pp. 261-2. Description of Cristatella magnifica, Vol. 5, p. 265 Description of Spongilla fragilis. Vol, 5, p. 278, Corrections and additions to former papers on Helminthology. Vol. 5, pp. 281-90. 1892.] 173 [Ruschen berger. Verbal, Noy. 4, that he had examined the fossil saurian bones presented by Mr. Nash, and found that they belong to a new species of Crocodile which he had named Cro- codilus antiquus. Vol. 5, p 307. Descriptions of Balzena palzatlantica and Balena prisca, Leidy, based on fragments of fossil bones from the Miocene formation of Virginia. Vol. 5, pp. 308-9. On some American fresh-water Polyzoa. Vol. 5, pp. 320-2, 1 plate with 5 figs. Verbal, on fossil reptilian and mammalian remains found in the green sand of New Jersey: Cimoliasaurus magnus; Discosaurus vetustus; Priscodelphinus Harlani ; Priscodelphinus grandzeyus; Crocodilus fastigiatus ; Emys Oweni, all Leidy. Vol. 5, p. 325-8. Fossils from the Green Sand of New Jersey, named Chelonia grandeva; Trionyx pris- cus; Machairodus primeevus, Leidy. Vol. 5, pp. 329-30. Contributions to Helminthology. Vol. 4, pp. 349-51. 1852. Verbal, Jan. 6, remarks on Rhinoceros Americanus, named from fragments of fossil bones collected in Nebraska. Vol. 6, p. 2. Verbal, Jan. 13, that the Cetacean remains, which he had named Priscodelphinus, are the first relics of mammals found in the Cretaceous group. Vol. 6, p. 3. Verbal, Feb. 10, on Emys Culbertsonii, a new species. Vol. 6, p. 31. Verbal, Feb. 17, on Delphinus Conradi, and a new genus and species, Thoracosaurus grandinis. Vol. 6, p. 35. Verbal, March 2, on Pontogeneus priscus. Vol. 6, p. 52. Verbal, March 15, Pointing out that heads of the Hippopotamus from N. W. Africa differ from those from Southern Africa. Vol. 6, p. 53. Verbal, March 28, on a fine skeleton of Troglodytes Gorilla, presented by Dr. Henry A. Ford of Liberia. Vol 6, p. 53. On Fossil Tortoises from Nebraska. Vol. 6, p. 59, Verbal, May 4, notice of an extinct species of Ox, and Bootherium. Vol. 6, p. 71. On the Red Snow of the Arctic Regions. Vol. 6, p. 59. On the Honey Ant of Mexico. Vol. 6, p. 72. Remarks on various fossil teeth. Vol. 6, p. 241, On some fossil fragments from Natches. Vol. 6, p. 303. Verbal, July 6, remarks on Bison latifrons (Leidy) and B. antiquus Leidy ; and on several species of Megalonyx (3 Leidy). Vol. 6, p. 117. 1853. Verbal, March 8, notice of three species of fossil Ursus. Vol. 6, p. 303. Verbal, Aug. 2, remarks on Cetacean fossil bones in the green sand of N. J.; and on Cetacean fossils from other localities. Vol. 6, p. 377 Verbal, Noy. 1, notice of fishes being infested with a parasitic worm of the genus Distoma, Vol. 6, p. 433. Remarks on a collection of fossil mammalia and chelonia from the Mauvaises Terres of Nebraska. Vol. 6, pp. 392-4. 1854. Verbal, May 23, account of fossil vertebrae of extinct saurians, which he named Breino- > saurus grandis and Cimoliasaurus magnus, illustrated by 6 figs. on a plate. Vol. 7, a 12. Verbal, June 6, on Bison latifrons, Arctodus pristinus, Hippodon speciosus and Meryco- dus necatus. Vol. 7, pp. 89-90. Synopsis of Extinct Mammalia from Nebraska. Vol. 7, pp. 156-7. On Denictis felina. Vol. 7, p. 127. On Hydrachma. Vol. 7, p. 202. Description of a fossil apparently Indicating an extinct Species of the Camel Tribe. Vol. 7, pp. 172-3. On Urnatella gracilis and a New Species of Plumatella. Vol. 7, pp. 191-2. Ruschenberger.] 174 {April 1, Notice of some Fossil Bones Discovered by Mr. Francis A. Lincke in the Banks of the Ohio River. Vol. 7, pp. 199-201. Remarks on the question of the identity of Bootherium cavifrons with Ovibos mos- chatus, or O. maximus. Vol.7, pp. 209-10. 1855. On aso-called Fossil Man. Vol. 7, p. 34. Indications of twelve species of Fossil Fishes. Vol. 7, pp. 395-7. Indications of five species with two new genera of Extinct Fishes. Vol. 7, p. 414, . Notices of some Tape Worms. Vol. 7, pp. 443-4. 1856. Verbal, Jan. 15, on Filaria canis cordis filling the right auricle and right ventricle of the heart of a dog, which was exhibited. Vol. 8, p. 2. Description of two Ichthyodorulites. Vol. 8, pp. 11-2. Synopsis of Entozoa and some of their Ecto-congeners, observed by the Author. Vol. &, pp. 42-58. Notices of some Remains of Extinct Mammalia recently discovered by Dr. F. V. Hay- | den in the Bad Lands of Nebraska. Vol. 8, p. 59. Notices of Extinct Reptiles and Fishes, discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden in the Bad Lands of Judith River, Nebraska Territory. Vol. 8, pp. 72-6. | Notices of Remains of Extinct Mammalia, discovered by Dr. F. Vv. “Hayden in Nebraska Territory. Vol. 8, pp. 90-1. Notice of the Remains of a species of Seal from the postpliocene deposit of the Ottowa River. Vol. 8, pp. 90-1, with a plate. Notices of several genera of Extinct Mammalia previously less perfectly characterized. Vol. 8, pp. 91-2. Verbal, Sept. 16, in reference to the color of the eyes of Platyphyllum concerum (Katy- did) being greenish by day and cherry red at night. Vol. 8, p. 162. Verbal, Sept. 16, that oyster and clam shells are perforated by a sponge of the genus _ Cliona. Vol. 8, p. 162-3. Notice of some remains of Extinct Vertebrated Animals. Vol. 8, pp. 163-5. Notices of remains of extinct vertebrated animals of New Jersey, collected by Prof. Cook of the State Geological Survey, under the direction of Dr, W. Kitchell. Vol. 8, pp. 220-1. Notices of remains of extinct vertebrated animals discovered by Proj. E. Emmons. Vol. 8, pp. 255-6. Notice of some Remains of Fishes discovered by Dr. John E. Evans. Vol. 8, pp. 256-7, Notice of Remains of two species of Seal. Vol. 8, p. 265. Remarks on certain extinct species of Fishes. Vol. 8, pp. 301-2. Notices of remains of extinct turtles of New Jersey, collected by Prof. Cook, of the State Geological Survey, under the direction of Dr. W. Kitchell. Vol. 8, pp. 303-4, Notices of Extinct Vertebrata discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden during the Expedition to the Sioux Country under the Command of Lieut. G. K. Warren. Vol. 8, pp, 811-2. 1857. List of Extinct Vertebrata, the Remains of which have been discovered in the Region of the Missouri River; with Remarks on their Geological Age. Vol. 9, pp. 89-01, Notices of some Remains of Extinct Fishes. Vol. 9, pp. 167-8, Rectification of the References of certain of the extinct mammalian genera of Nebras- ka, Vol. 9, p. 175. Verbal, Dec. 1, on a large species of Gordius and a larva of Ostrea, Vol. 9, p. 204, Verbal, Feb, 17, observations on Entozoa found in the Nalades, Vol. 9, p. 18. Verbal, June 2, on Coprolites and Shales with Posodinim, Vol. 9, p. 149. Verbal, June 16, on the new red sandstone fossils from the Gwynned tunnel North Pa, R. R. Vol, 9, p. 160. Verbal, Sept. 1, on the dentition of Mososaurus; also on Occanthus, Vol. 9, pp. 176-7 1892.] 175 [Ruschenberger. Verbal, Dee. 22, on a curious animalcule found on stones and dead plants in the Schuyl- kill and Delaware rivers. Vol. 9, p. 204. Verbal, Dec. 22, observations on the introduction of camel into North America. Vol. 9, p. 210. 1858. Verbal, Jan. 12, that the stomachs of Urnatella gracilis contained voluntary moving bodies, which might prove to be generative bodies. Vol. 10, p. 1. Verbal, Jan. 19, that the extinct camel seemed to be about two-thirds the size of the recent species. Vol. 10, p. 2. Verbal, Feb. 2, that the fossil remains from the Niobrara river belong to some twenty or more species which are distinct from those found in the Miocene of the Mauvaises Terres, as well as from those of a subsequent age. Vol. 10, p. 7. Verbal, March 2, that with the collection of fossils received from the vicinity of Kansas river, were several masses of a yellowish magnesian limestone containing numerous casts of a very peculiar group of fossils; that among the specimens found in the val- ley of the Niobrara river, Nebraska, is the lower jawof a new species of Mastodon. Vol. 10, p. 10. Verbal, March 9, that after inspecting numerous equine remains from Niobrara, he in- clines to believe that the remains of the horse found in the Postpliocene deposits of the United States indicate two species, Vol. 10, p. 11. Notices of remains of Extinct Vertebrata from the valley of the Niobrara River, col- lected during the Exploring Expedition of 1857, in Nebraska, under the command of Lieut. C. K. Warren, U. 8. Top. Eng., by Dr. F. V. Hayden, Geologist to the Expe- dition. Vol. 10, pp. 20-9. Verbal, April 6, that in the collection from Niobrara two additional species of the ancient camel are indicated : Procamelus robustus and P. gracilis, He mentioned that frac- tured fossils are best mended by saturating them with melted beeswax. Vol. 10, p. 89. Verbal, April 13, that he had named a fresh-water worm which lives in tubes of mud Manayunkia speciosa. Vol. 10, p. 90. Contributions to Helminthology. Vol. 10, pp. 110-2. Verbal, June 29, that one-half of the chrysalides of the canker-worm were infected by two species of Ichneumon, Vol. 10, p. 187. Verbal, Nov. 2, that he and Dr. Bridges, in Lily pond, near Newport, R. I., had found a species of Cristatella. Vol. 10, pp. 188-90. Verbal, Dec. 14, that the fossil bones obtained from Haddonfield, N. J., and given to him by Mr. Foulke for description, belonged to a huge extinct herbivorous Saurian, which he named Hadrosaurus Foulkii. Vol. 10, pp. 215-8. 1859. Verbal, Jan. 11, that he had found the Manayunkia speciosa (a curious fresh-water worm, a drawing of which he exhibited) in great abundance at the foot of the cliffs washed by the ocean near Newport, R. I. Vol. 11, p. 2. Verbal, Jan. 18, that from fossil remains of cartilaginous fishes, found in the earbonifer- ous formations of Kansas, he had made three species. Vol. 11, p. 3. Verbal, March 22, remarks on a Mastodon tooth from Tambla, Honduras ; and teeth and fragments of teeth of Mososaurus from the green sand of New Jersey. Vol. 11, p. 91. Verbal, April 12, in reference to ferruginous rock containing remains of fishes. Vol. 11, p. 110. Verbal, April 19, in reference to fossil bones contained in so-called guano from Sombrero, W. I.. which were exhibited. Vol. 11, p. 111, Verbal, May 17, on specimens of Pataobrochus from subsilurian strata which he con- sidered fossil, though its organic nature had been denied, Vol. 11, p. 150, Verbal, Aug. 23, remarks on an antler of a reindeer, and on an animalcule, a drawing of which was submitted, found at Newport, R. I., named Freyia Americana, Vol. 11, p. 194, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xxx. 188. w. PRINTED MAY 6, 1892. Ruschenberger.] 176 (April 1, 1860. Verbal, Feb. 11, that Albertite is a product from the distillation of bituminous coals or shales, and is perfectly amorphous. Vol. 12, p. 54. Verbal, March 13, on Hyalomena from Japan. Vol. 12, p. 85. Verbal, April 3, that experiments with Trichina spiralis, by Prof. Leuckart, of Giessen, imply that the animal finds its way into the human body through food or drink. Vol. 12, p. 96. Verbal, July 24, notice of a specimen of Hyla. Vol. 12, p. 305. Verbal, Oct. 9, that the specimens of fossil bones from Washington Co., Texas, indi- cated a new equine genus, and a species of Hippotherium. Vol. 12, p. 416. Verbal, Oct. 16, notice of an extinct Peecary. Vol. 12, p. 416. 1861. Verbal, April 16, that lignite had been discovered at the border of the new red sand- stone on Plymouth creek, near Norristown, Pa. Vol. 13, p. 77. 1862. Verbal, Noy. 18, that he had noticed a boulder, apparently of Potsdam sandstone, at the corner of Thirty-seventh and Market streets, exposed by digging gravel, which is the largest transported block he had observed in our vicinity. Vol. 14, p. 307. 1863. ef Verbal, Sept. 15, that he had found a Phalangopsis rolled in a leaf of a spice bush. Vol. 15, p. 212. Verbal, Noy. 3, on specimens of Nostoe pruneiforme. Vol. 15, p. 281. 1865. Verbal, May 23, that a boring sponge existed during the Cretaceous period. Vol. 17, p. 77. Verbal, June 6, that fossil remains of horses had been found throughout the length and breadth of the North American continent. Vol. 17, p. 94. Verbal, June 20, that he had found at Cape Henlopen, in a kitchen refuse heap, a clay pipe. Vol. 17, p. 95. Verbal, Sept. 5, remarks on a foetal dog-shark. Vol. 17, p. 175. Verbal, Sept. 19, in reference to fossil bones of Rhinoceros. Vol. 17, p. 176. Verbal, Oct. 10, remarks on specimens of odlitic phosphates of lime and alumina ; also on human bones from a guano deposit on the Island Orchilla, W. I. Vol. 17, p. 181. 1866. Verbal, Jan. 2, on part of a human skullof the so-called pigmy race, from near the mouth of Stone river, Tennessee. Vol. 18, p. 1. Verbal, March 20, on a large phalanx of an extinct reptile; and stated that he was the first to discover the Trichina spiralis in the hog (while eating a slice of pork, he no- ticed some minute specks which recalled to mind the Trichina spots seen in the mus- cles of a human subject only a few days previously). Vol. 18, p. 9. Verbal, May 22, that in the salt mine of the Island of Petite Anse, La., were grains of precious garnet, olivine, bones of the elephant, ete. Vol. 18, p. 109. Verbal, June 5, in reference to a small collection of fossils from Bangor, Maine. Vol, 14, p. 237. Verbal, Oct. 23, in reference to molar teeth of Mastodon ohioticus. Vol. 18, p. 290. Verbal, Dec. 4, in reference to Drepanodon or Machairodus occidentalis, fragments of bones of which were shown. Vol. 18, p. 345. 1867. Verbal, June 25, in reference to Bison antiquus. Vol. 19, p, 85. Verbal, Sept, 10, on a fowedl skull of Geomys bursarius, Vol. 19, p. 97. Verbal, Sept. 17, on a fossil skull of Castoroides ohioensis. Vol. 19, p. 97. Verbal, Oct. 1, in reference to specimens of black horustone exhibited, Vol. 19, p. 125, 1892.} 177 [Ruschenberger. 1868. Verbal, June 2, that some Sombrero guano contains ninety per cent. of phosphate of lime. Vol. 20, p. 156. Notice of some Vertebrate Remains from Harden County, Texas. Vol. 20, pp. 174-6. Indications of an Elotherium in California. Vol. 20, p. 177. Notice of some Reptilian Remains from Nevada. Vol. 20, pp. 177-8. Notice of some Vertebrate Remains from the West Indian Islands. Vol. 20, pp. 178-30. Notice of some Remains of Horses. Vol. 20, p. 195. Notice of some Extinct Cetaceans. Vol. 20, pp. 196-7. Remarks on a Jaw fragment of Megalosaurus. Vol. 20, pp. 197-200. Remarks on Conosaurus of Gibbes. Vol. 20, pp. 200-2. Notice of American species Ptychodus. Vol. 20, pp. 205-8. Verbal, Oct. 20, that he found the stomach of a shad full of small fishes. Vol. 20, p. 228. Notice of some American Leeches. Vol. 20, 229-30. Notice of the remains of extinct Pachyderms, Vol. 20, pp. 230-2. Verbal, Nov. 3, in reference to specimens seemingly of coprolites from the Huronian slates. Vol. 20, pp. 302-3. Verbal, Noy. 2, that iridescence in opals is caused by strize, 6000 tothe inch. Vol. 20, p. 303, Verbal, Dec. 1, on asterism in mica. Vol. 20, p. 313. Notice of some remains of extinct Insectivora. Vol. 20, p. 315. 1869. Notice of some extinct vertebrates from Wyoming and Dakota. Vol. 21, pp. 63-7. 1870. Verbal, Jan. 4, description of Megacerops Coloradensis. Vol. 22. pp. 1, 2. Verbal, Jan. 11, remarks on Poicilopleuron and other fossils submitted for examination by Prof. Hayden. Vol. 22, pp. 3-5. Verbal, March 1, remarks on the right humerus of one of the extinct giant Sloths re- sembling Mylodon robustus, and on Dromotherium sylvestre, submitted for exam- ination by the Smithsonian Institution. Vol. 22, pp. 8, 9. Verbal, March 8, remarks on reptilian remains from the Cretaceous formation near Fort Wallace, Kansas, described by Prof. Cope under the name of Elasmosaurus platyu- rus. Vol. 22, p. 9. Verbal, March 22, observations on ichthyodorulites, of which specimens were shown ; on a metacarpal bone of Megalonyx Jeffersoni, and on a last lower grinder of Bison antiquus. Vol. 22, pp. 12-3. Verbal, April 5, remarks on Discosaurus and its allies. Vol. 22, pp. 18-22. Verbal, May 8, description of the internal generative organs of a hog, which were ex- hibited. Vol. 22, p. 65. Verbal, May 17, remarks on some fossil bones from the Pliocene formation in the Mau- vaises Terres of Dakota, which were shown. Vol. 22, pp. 65-6. Verbal, June 14, observations on mammalian fossil remains, submitted for examination, from Idaho, from Utah, and from Oregon; also, on Hadrosaurus and its allies. * Vol. 22, pp. 66-9. Verbal, June 21, notice of two fossil fragments belonging to Bison americanus and Ele- phas americanus. Vol. 22, pp. 69-71. Verbal, July 5, remarks on differences between animals of the sume species inhabiting Europe and America. Vol. 22, p. 72. Verbal, July 12, remarks on a mutilated portion of the lower jaw of a large ruminant Supposed to belong to Ovibos cavifrons. Vol. 22, p. 73. Verbal, July 19, observations on a fossil, which he exhibited and named Nothosaurus occiduus. Vol. 22, p. 74. . Verbal, Aug. 2, description of Nephelis punctata, a new leech. Vol. 22, pp. 89-90. Ruschenberger.] j 178 [April 1, Verbal, Sept. 20, account of a fossil crocodile, which he named Crocodilus Elliotti ; re- marks on Urnatella and Manayunkia. Vol. 22, pp. 100-2. Verbal, Oct. 4, reference toa small collection of fossils from Wyoming, most of which pertain to Merycocheerus. Vol. 22, pp. 109-10. Verbal, Oct. 18, remarks on some fossil remains which belong to Oreodon. Vol. 22, pp. 111-3. Verbal, Oct. 25, observations in reference to several boxes of fossils from Fort Bridger, among which were Microsus cuspidatus and Notharctus tenebrosus, etc. Vol. 22, p. 113. Verbal, Nov. 1, notice of Graphiodon vincarius. Vol. 22, p. 122. Verbal, Nov. 8, descriptions of fossil species: Emys Jeanesi, ee Haydeni, Baena arenosa, Saniwa ensidens. Vol. 22, pp. 123-4. Verbal, Nov, 15, observations on fossils submitted for examination by Prof. J. D. Whitney, among which are fragments representative of the lama, camel, Hipparion and Pro- tohippus. Vol. 22, pp. 125-7. 1871. Verbal, Feb. 6, remarks on fossil bones from California. Vol. 23, p. 50. Verbal, March 21, notice of Tzenia canallata. Vol. 23, p. 53. Verbal, April 18, observations on extinct turtles from Wyoming. Vol. 23, p. 102, Verbal, May 9, remarks on polydactylism in a horse. Vol. 23, p. 112. Verbal, May 16, observations on some fossil remains of Mastodon and horse in North Carolina; and of mammals from Wyoming. Vol. 23, pp. 113-6. Verbal, June 5, on fossil Testudo of Wyoming ; on supposed fossil turtle eggs; and on gar- nets from Green’s creek, Delaware Co., Pa. Vol. 23, pp. 154-5. Verbal, July 4, on some fossils from Fort Bridger. Vol. 23, p. 197. Verbal, Aug. 1, on Mastodon remains from California; on Anchitherium. -Vol. 23, pp. 198-9. Verbal, Aug. 8, on fossil vertebrates from Wyoming. Vol. 23, pp. 228-9. Verbal, Aug. 29, on extinct Rodents. Vol. 23, pp. 130-2. Verbal, Oct. 10, on the minerals of Mount Mica. Vol. 23, pp. 245-7. Verbal, Oct. 17, on fossils from Oregon. Vol. 23, pp. 247-3. Verbal, Noy. 21, on the communication of contagion by flies. Vol. 23, p. 297. Verbal, Dec. 12, on several worms. Vol. 23, pp. 303-7. 1872. Verbal, Jan. 2, that Dr. C. S. Turnbull had found a mite on the membrana tympani of an ox. Vol. 24, p. 9. Named Gamasus auris, p. 138. Verbal, Feb. 4, notices of Corundum, and of fossils from Wyoming. Vol. 24, pp. 19-21. Verbal, April 2, in reference to extinct mammals from the PONT, of Wyoming. Vol. 2, p. 37. Verbal, April 9, in reference to fossils from Niobrara river. Vol. 24, p. 38. Verbal, Jane 11, in reference to a Mastodon of New Mexico. Vol. 24, p. 142. Verbal, July 2, on the genus Chisternon and some Cretaceous fishes. Vol. 24, pp. 162-3, Verbal, July 9, on Artemia Salina from Salt Lake, Utah ; and on fossil shark-teeth. Vol. 24, pp. 164-6, Letter dated Fort Bridger, Uinta Co., Wyoming, July 24, 1872, from Dr, Leidy to Mr, G. W. Tryon, Jr., in reference to fossil mammals found there. Vol. 24, pp. 167-9." Verbal, Sept, 3, in reference to ants observed at Fort Bridger. Vol, 24, p. 218. Verbal, Sept. 10, about mineral springs in Wyoming and Utah, Vol. 24, pp. 218-20, Verbal, Oct, 1, in reference to a recently opened corundum mine in Chester Co., Pa. Vol. 24, pp. 238-9, * Dr, Leldy sent a copy of this letter to The American Jour. of Science and Arts, be- cause in it he referred to Elasmosaurus platyurus, Cope, 1892.) 179 Verbal, Oct. 15, in reference to Uintatherium and other fossil remains; to chipped stones ; a stone implement; and to the action of sand and wind on rocks of Wyo- ming. Vol. 24, pp. 240-3. Verbal, Noy. 5, notice of fossils from Wyoming. Vol. 24, oe 267-8. Verbal, Dec. 10, notices of fossils from Wyoming. Vol. 24, pp. 277-8. [Ruschenberger. 1873. Verbal, Jan. 21, notice of fossil vertebrates from Virginia. Vol. 25, p. 15. Verbal, Feb. 4, notice of remains of fishes in the Bridger Tertiary formation. Vol. 25, pp. 97-9, Verbal, March 18, notice of an extinct hog found in the Pliocene sands of Niobrara river. Vol. 25, p. 207. Verbal, April 1, notices of bituminous coal from Westmoreland, Pa.; of a black rat; and of a specimen of iron ore. Vol. 25, p. 257. Verbal, April 15, notices of extinct mammals of California. Vol. 25, pp. 259-60. Verbal, April 22, notice of a fungus parasite ona mouse. Vol. 25, p. 260, Verbal, Oct. 14, notice of Distoma hepaticum. Vol. 25, p. 364. Verbal, Dec. 9, notice of Lingula found in the stomach of a fish taken in the Susque- hanna river. Vol. 25, p. 215. Verbal, Dec. 16, notice of fossil elephant teeth. Vol. 25, pp. 216-7. Verbal, Dec, 23, notice of intercellular circulation in plants, as in Vaucheria. Vol. 25, p. 420. 1874. Verbal, Jan. 18, notice of Hydra, Vol. 26, p. 10. Verbal, Feb, 3, notice of Protozoa. Vol. 26, pp. 13-5. Verbal, Feb. 17, on the mode of growth of Desmids. Vol. 26, p. 15, Verbal, March 24, on Actinophrys. Vol. 26, pp. 23-4. Verbal, April 21, on the enemies of Difflugia; and on a supposed compound derived from leather. Vol. 26, p. 75. Verbal, May 12, notice of some new fresh-water Rhizopods. Vol. 26, pp. 77-9. Verbal, June 16, observations on some fresh-water and terrestrial Rhizopods. Vol. 26, pp. 86-9, Verbal, Aug. 25, observations on Pectinatella magnifica; on a parasitic worm which infests the house-fly ; and on some fresh-water Infusoria. Vol. 26, pp. 189-40. Verbal, Sept. 8, notice of a remarkable Amceba; its process or mode of swallowing. Vol, 26, pp. 162-3, Verbal, Sept. 15, on the motive power of Diatomes. Vol. 26, p. 143. Verbal, Sept. 22, on sponges. Vol. 26, p. 144. Verbal, Oct. 5, notice of some Rhizopods. Vol. 26, pp, 155-7. Verbal, Oct. 20, notice of Dryocampa. Vol. 26, p. 160. Verbal, Nov. 10, notices of remains of Titanotherium; on supposed spermaries in Ameceba; and of Rhizopods. Vol. 26, pp. 165-8. Verbal, Dec. 15, notice of some fossils presented. Vol. 26, p. 223. Verbal, Dec. 22, observations on Rhizopods. Vol. 26, pp. 225-7. 1875. Verbal, Jan. 19, report of afungusin a Flamingo. Vol. 27, p. 11. Verbal, Feb. 2, account of some parasitic worms. Vol. 27, pp. 14-5. Verbal, Feb. 9, notices of some nematoid worms. Vol. 27, pp. 17-8. Verbal, March 16, observations on marine Rhizopods. Vol. 27, pp. 73-6. Verbal, April 6, observations on a coal fossil; on elephant remains ; and on Stephano- ceros. Vol. 27, pp. 120-2. Verbal, April 20, observations on a curious Rhizopod ; on Psorosperms in a mallard duck ; on a mouthless fish ; and on Ouramceba. Vol. 27, pp. 124-7. Verbal, Sept. 7, on Mermis acuminata. Vol. 27, p. 400. Ruschenberger.] 180 (April 1, Verbal, Oct. 4, observations on Rhizopods, and on Quercus heterophylla. Vol. 27, pp. 413-5. 1876. Verbal, Jan. 4, observation on Petalodus. Vol. 28, p. 9. Verbal, March 21, notice of Mastodon andium. Vol. 28, p. 38. Verbal, April 11, remarks on Arcella. Vol. 28, pp. 54-8. Verbal, May 9, remarks on fossils from the Ashley phosphate beds. Vol. 28, pp. 80-1. Verbal, June 20, observations on vertebrate fossils from South Carolina. Vol. 23, p, 114. Verbal, June 27, remarks on the rhizopod genus Nebela. Vol. 28, pp. 115-9. Verbal, Oct. 10, on the structure of precious opal; and on Rhizopods. Vol. 28, pp. 195-9. Verbal, Dec. 5, remarks on Ozocerite and Hyraceum. Vol. 28, pp, 325-6, 1877. Verbal, Jan. 30, on the present contamination of the drinking water; on Eozoén cana- dense ; and an instance in which the dome of the human diaphragm was elevated to a level of the anterior extremity of the first rib. Vol. 29, p. 20. Verbal, April 3, remarks on the yellow ant. Vol. 29, p. 145. Verbal, May 15, remarks on gregarines. Vol. 29, pp. 196-8. Verbal, May 29, in reference to flukes which infest common fresh-water mollusks. Vol. 29, pp. 200-2, Verbal, June 12, on parasitic Infusoria. Vol. 29, pp. 259-60. Verbal, June 19, remarks on seventeen-year locust, the Hessian fly and a Chelifer. Vol. 29, pp. 260-1. Verbal, June 26, account of the birth of a Rhizopod. Vol. 29, pp. 261-5. Verbal, Sept. 4, remarks on the bedbug and itsallies. Vol. 29, p. 284. Verbal, Oct. 2, account of the Dinamceba’s mode of feeding. Vol. 29, pp. 288-90. Verbal, Oct, 9, remarks on the discrimination of a Heliozoén in selecting food. Vol. 29, pp. 291-2. Verbal, Oct. 23, remarks on Rhizopods, and on fossil fishes. Vol. 29, pp. 298-4. Verbal, Nov. 13, remarks on ants. Vol. 29, p. 34. Verbal, Noy. 27, remarks on the American species of Difflugia. Vol. 29, p, 306, Verbal, Dec, 18, notice of Rhizopods in an apple tree. Vol. 29, p. 821. 1878. Verbal, Feb, 19, remarks on citrine or yellow quartz. Vol. 80, p. 40. Verbal, March 5, on the tusk of hippopotamus; and on Amba. Vol. 80, p. 99. Verbal, March 26, remarks on lice found on the pelican. Vol. 30, p. 100. Verbal, May M4, about parasitic worms of the shad. Vol. 30, p. 171. Verbal, Aug. 27, that he had found Foraminifera in the sand about Cape May, Atlantic City, ete. Vol. 30, p, 292. Verbal, Sept. 3, remarks on the black mildew of walls. Vol. 30, p. 331. Verbal, Oct. 1, on foraminiferous shells on the New Jersey coast. Vol. 30, p. 336. Verbal, Oct. 8, remarks on Crustaceans of Cape May. Vol. 80, p, 336, Verbal, Oct. 15, notice of Tetrarhynchus, Vol. 80, p. 340. Verbal, Nov. 12, on Donax fossor. Vol. 30, p. 382. Verbal, Noy, 19, notice of the Gordius in the cockroach and leech, Vol. 80, p. 883. Verbal, Dec, 3, on Tania mediocanallata. Vol, 30, p, 405, 1879. Verbal, Jan. 28, on Gordius ; and on parasites of the rat. Vol. 81, pp. 10-1. Verbal, Feb. 4, remarks on fossil remains of a Caribou, Vol. 31, pp, 42-3. Verbal, Feb. 14, remarks on Bothriocephalus latus, Vol. 81, p. 40. Verbal, June 17, statement in reference to Rhizopods in Sphagnum, Vol. 81, pp. 162-3. a a 1892,] 181 [Ruschenberger, Verbal, July 8, notice of fossil foot-tracks in the anthracite coal measures, Vol. 31, pp. 164-5. Verbal, July 22, account of the explosion of a diamond. Vol. 31, p. 195. Verbal, Sept. 5, remarks about some small animals on the coast of New Jersey. Vol. 31, p. 198, Verbal, Sept. 30, on Cristatella Idx. Vol. 31, p. 203. Verbal, Oct. 7, onthe Amoeba Blatts, Vol. 31, pp. 204-5. 1880, Verbal, Jan. 20, remarks on specimens of Filaria immitis of the dog. Vol. 32, pp. 10-2. Verbal, March 2, remarks on a species of Filaria, alleged to have been drawn from a man. Vol. 32, pp. 130-1. i Verbal, April 13, notices of pond life near Woodbury, N. J. Vol. 32, pp. 156-8. Rhizopods in the mosses of the summit of Roan mountain, North Carolina. Vol. 32, pp. 833-10. Verbal, Sept. 21, account of a visit to a bone cave near Stroudsburg, Pa. Vol. 32, pp. 1881, Verbal, Jan. 4, notice that Rhizopods are eaten by young fishes. Vol. 33, pp. 9-10. 1882. Verbal, Jan, 3, remarks on some rock specimens. Vol. 31, pp. 10-2. Verbal, Feb. 7, notice of Filaria in black bass. Vol. 34, p. 69. Verbal, Feb. 28, remarks on his collection of Tourmalines, which he exhibited. Vol. 34, pp. 71-3. Verbal, March 7, notice of Balanoglossus aurantiacus; and of Scolithus. Vol. 34, p. 93. Verbal, April 4, remarks on Suagitta. Vol. 34, p. 102. Verbal, May 2, remarks on some Entozoa found in birds; also on a coprolite and a peb- ble resembling an Indian hammer. Vol. 34, pp. 109-10. Verbal, May 23, remarks on Bacillus anthracis; on Enchytreus, Di-tichopus and their parasites. Vol. 34, pp. 145-8, Verbal, May 30, notice of the yellow ant. Vol. 34, p. 148. Verbal, Sept. 5, remarks on Balanus. Vol. 34, p. 224-5. Verbal, Sept. 26, remarks on a collection of tobacco worms, which he exhibited. Vol. 24, pp. 237-8, Verbal, Oct. 17, notice of a new species of Pyxicola. Vol. 34, pp. 252-3. Verbal, Oct, 31, remarks on Actinospherium Eichornii. Vol. 34, p. 260. Verbal, Noy. 7, notice of topaz and biotite. Vol. 34, p. 261. Verbal, Noy. 14, on Actinospherium, and Tubularia crocea. Vol. 34, pp. 261-2, Verbal, Dec. 12, remarks on fossil remains of horses. Vol. 34, pp. 290-1. Verbal, Dec. 19, remarks on an extinct peceary. Vol. 34, pp. 301-2. Verbal, Feb. 12, remarks on the reproduction of Anodonta fluviatilis and its parasites, >» [Vol. 35], pp. 44-6. i Verbal, April 24, remarks on a social Heliozoan. [Vol 85], pp. 95-6. Manayunkia speciosa. [Vol. 35], pp. 204-12, 24 figures. Verbal, Dec. 11, notice of a fungus infesting flies; and remarks on Manayunkia. [Vol. 85], p. 302, 1884. Verbal, Jan. 1, notice of an ant infested by a fungus; and of Cassiterite from Dakota, [Vol. 36], p, 9. Ruschenberger.] 182 [April 1, Verbal, Jan. 16, account of the effects of the storm, Jan. 8, on marine animals of the New Jersey coast. [Vol. 36', pp. 12-3. Verbal, Jan. 29, remarks on a collection of fossil bones from Louisiana; and on Fora- minifera in the drift of Minnesota. [Vol. 35], p. 22. Verbal, Feb. 26, notice of Distoma and Filaria. [Vol. 35], p. 47. Verbal, March 4, reference to Dictyophora and Apsilus vorax. [Vol. 35!, p. 50, Verbal, March 18, notice of Eumeces chaleides. [Vol. 35], p. 66. Verbal, April 22, remarks on vertebrate fossils from Florida. Vol. 35, pp. 118-9. Verbal, May 6, account of arare human tapeworm. [Vol. 35], p. 137. Verbal, May 13, description of Pentastomum proboscideum. [Vol. 35 , p. 140. Verba!, Oct. 28, notice of living organisms found inice. [Vol. 35], p. 260. 1885. Verbal, Jan. 13, notice of parasitic worms found in birds. [Vol. 36], pp. 9-11. Verbal, March 10, notice of fossil remains of Rhinoceros and Hypotherium from Florida, [Vol. 36], pp. 32-3. Verbal, March 24, remarks on fossil Mylodon. [Vol. 86], pp. 49-51. Verbal, May 19, notice of Bothriocephalus in a trout. [Vol. 36], pp. 122-3. Verbal, Dec. 22, notice of living worms in ice; Lumbricus glacialis. [Vol. 36], p. 408. 1886. aed Verbal, Jan. 19, remarks on fossil bones of Mastodon and Llama from Florida. [Vol. 36), p. 11. Verbal, Feb. 23, description of an extinct boar from Florida; and notice of caries in the Mastodon. [Vol. 36], pp. 37-8. Verbal, March 23, notice of Amia andits probable Tenia. [Vol. 36], pp. 62-3. Verbal, June 1, notice of Toxodon and other remains from Nicaragua. [Vol. 36], pp. 275-7. Notices of Nematoid worms. [Vol. 36], pp. 308-13. 1887. Notice of some parasitic worms. [Vol. 37], pp. 20-4. Verbal, Feb. 1, notice of a parasite of a bat. [Vol. 37], p. 38. Verbal, May 31, notice of Asplanchna Ebbesbornii. [ Vol. 37], p. 157. Verbal, Oct. 11, remarks on fossil bones from Florida. [Vol. 37], pp. 809-10. Verbal, Oct. 25, remarks on Hydra. Vol. 37, pp. 310-3. Verbal, Dec. 13, remarks on the bot-larye of the terrapin, [ Vol. 37], pp. 393-4, 1888. Verbal, Jan. 10, remarks on a fossil of the Puma, [Vol. 38], pp. 9-10. Verbal, Feb. l4, notice of Cheetopterus from Florida. [Vol. 38 , p, 73. Verbal, Feb. 28, notice of Lepas fascicularis ; and of a tapeworm inacucumber, [Vol. 38), pp. 80-1. Verbal, March 20, notice of the habit of Cirolana concharum ; and remarks on parasites of the striped bass. [Vol. 38), pp. 124-5, Verbal, March, 27, notice of the Trematodes of the muskrat ; remarks on Entozoa of the terrapin. (Vol. 38}, pp. 126-8, Verbal, April 8, notice of a Crustacean parasite of the red snapper. [Vol. 38], p. 138, Distinctive characters of Odontapsis littoralis, [| Vol. 38), pp. 162-4. Parasitic Crustacea, Vol. 38, p. 165, Verbal, May 1, notice of parasites of the Rockfish; and of the louse of the Pelican, [ Vol. 38), pp. 166-8, Verbal, May 8, notice of the parasites of the Pickerel, [Vol, 88], p. 169, Verbal, Oct, 2, notice of anomalies of the human skull, [Vol. 88], p. 278. ll al i i i ee 1892.] 183 [Ruschenberger. Verbal, Noy. 27, remarks on the fauna of Beach Haven, N. J. [Vol. 88], pp. 329-33. Verbal, Dec. 11, notice of the food of barnacles. [Vol. 38}, p. 431. 1889. Verbal, Jan, 1, remarks, with illustrations, on several gregarines, and a singular mode of conjugation of one of them. [Vol. 39], pp. 9-11. F Verbal, Feb. 19, remarks on a fossil remnant of the sabre-tooth tiger from Florida. [Vol. : 3%], pp. 29-81, Verbal. March 5, notice of Gonyleptes and Solpuga. he 39], p. 15. The Boring Sponge, Cliona. [ Vol. 39], pp. 70-5. Verbal, April 16, notice of a parasitic Copepod. [Vol. 39), p. 95. Verbal, April 23, remarks on fossil vertebrates from Florida. [Vol. 39], pp. 96-7. 1890. Verbal, March 4, notice of Hypoderas in the Little Blue Heron; and of an ichneumon fly. [Vol. 39], p. 63. Verbal, March 25, remarks on fossil vertebrates from Florida. [Vol. 39], p. 64. Verbal, May 20, remarks on Hippotherium and Rhinoceros from Florida. [Vol. 39], pp. 182-3. Verbal, May 27, remarks on Mastoden and Capybara of South Carolina. [Vol. 39], pp. 184-5. Verbal, Sept. 23, remarks on Ticks. [Vol. 39], pp. 278-80. Verbal, Sept. 30, notice of parasites of Mola rotunda, [Vol. 39], pp. 281-2. Verbal, Oct. 7, notice of Beroe on the New Jersey coast. [Vol. 39], p. 341. Notices of Entozoa, [Vol. 39], pp. 410-8. Verbal, Noy. 11, notice of Velella. | Vol. 39}, p. 408. 1891. ‘Verbal, Feb. 17, notice of the Boring Sponge of the Oyster. [Vol. 40], p. 122. Notice of some Entozoa. [Vol. 40], pp. 234-6. Dr. Leidy presided for the last time at thé meeting of April 14. Many of the above communications were copied by foreign and domestic periodicals, _ and many of them he included in elaborate essays on the same subjects. TRANSACTIONS OF THE WAGNER FREE INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE OF PHILADELPHIA. (Small Quarto. ] - Notice of some fossil human bones. Vol. 2, pp. 9-12, 2 plates, Dec., 1889. _ Description of Mammalian remains from a rock crevice in Florida. Vol. 2, pp. 15-7, 2 plates, Dec., 1889. Description of Vertebrate remains from Peace Creek, Florida. Vol. 2, pp. 19-31, 2 plates, Dec., 1889. - Notice of some Mammalian remains from the salt mine of Petite Anse, Louisiana. Vol. 2, pp. 33-40, 1 plate, Dec., 1889. 4 _ On Platygonus, an extinct genus allied to the Peccaries. Vol. 2, pp. 41-50, Dec., 1889. Remarks on the nature of Organic Species. Vol. 2, pp. 51-3. MISCELLANEOUS, Notice of the formation of some crystalline bodies in Collodion. Amer. Jour. Phar. -- macy, Vol. 16, pp. 24-6, 1850, Remarks on some curious Sponges. American Naturalist, Vol. 4, pp. 17-22, 12 figures, whe 1871. PROC, AMER. PHILOS. sOC. xxx. 188. X. PRINTED MAY 9, 1892. Ruschenberger.] 184 [April 1, In Science : Study of the temporal bone. Illustrated. Vol. 1, Part 1, pp. 380-5; Part 2, pp. 475-7 ; Part 3, pp. 506-7, 1883. Crystals in the bark of trees. Illustrated. Vol. 2, pp. 707-8, 1883. Manayunkia is no- ticed p. 762. The Journal of Comparative Medicine and Surgery [Dr. Leidy was one of its col- laborators in the department of Comparative Anatomy and Physiology] : Tapeworm in Birds. Vol. 8, pp. 1-11, 27 figures, Jan., 1887. Parasites of the Shad and Herring. Vol. 9, pp. 211-5, July, 1888. ADDRESSES BY Dr. JOSEPH LEIDY. A lecture introductory to the Course of Anatomy, delivered in the University of Penn- sylvania, 1853. 8yo, pp. 22. Valedictory address to the class of medical graduates at the University of Pennsylvania, March 27, 1858. 8vo, pp 32. Lecture introductory to the Course of Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania, for the session 1858-9. 8vo, pp. 24. Introductory lecture to the Course of Anatomy in the University a Pennsylvania, Oct. 11, 1859. 8vo, pp. 23. An address on Evolution and the pathological importance of the lower forms of Life, delivered before the graduating class of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania, May 1, 1886. Reprinted from the Therapeutic Gazette for June 15, 1886. Svyo, pp. 21. George S. Davis, Detroit, Mich., 1886. BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES, Biographical Notice of Joseph Leidy, M.D. By Joseph Parrish, M.D. In the New Jersey Medical Reporter and Transactions of the New Jersey Medical Society, Burlington, N.J. Sept. 30, 1853. [Approved by Dr. Leidy.] Sketch of Joseph Leidy. By Edward J. Nolan. The Popular Science Monthly, Sept., 1880. {Approved by Dr. Leidy.] Biographical Sketch of Joseph Leidy, M.D. International Clinies, July, 1891. In Memoriam. Dr. Joseph Leidy. Personal History. Read at the Academy of Natu- ral Sciences, May 12, 1891. By William Hunt, M.D. Memoir of Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D. By Henry C. Chapman, M.D., Professor of the Institutes of Medicine in the Jefferson Medical College. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. of Phila., June 30, 1891. An Address upon Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D. His University Career. By William Hunt, M.D. Delivered Noy. 17, 1891, before the alumni and students of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania. Brief biographical notices of Dr. Leidy may be found in the following works : A Critical Dictionary of English Literature. By 9, Austin Allibone. 1870, A Supplement to Allibone’s Critical Dictionary of English Literature. 1891. Dictionary of American Biography. By Francis 8. Drake. Boston, 1872. Appleton's American Cyclopedia, or Popular Dictionary. New York, 1878. Johnson's New Universal Encyclopedia, New York, 1878. The Physicians and Surgeons of the United States. By William B. Atkinson, 1878, Also in Second Edition, 1880. A Blographical Dictionary of Contemporary American Physicians and Surgeons, By Willlam B. Atkinson, 1880, Universal Pronouneing Dictionary of Biography. By Joseph Thomas, M.D., LL.D. Philadelphia, 1886, Men of the Times. London, 1887, Appleton's Encyelope ta of American Blography. New York, 1887, : 1892] 185 [Cope. The Osteology of the Lacertilia. By EZ. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 18, 1892.) In the following pages is presented « review of the osteology of the -Lacertilia with especial reference to the genera represented in the Nearc- tic fauna. It is based on the skeletons placed at my disposal by the U. 8. National Museum, the Academy of Natural Sciences, and those con - tained in my private collection. It includes also the record of my observations and notes made in the principal European museums twenty- five years ago. The characters discovered by me at that time, which I found to be of the greatest taxonomic importance, I enumerated in a paper which is p*inted in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy for 1864, p. 224. The use then made of those characters has been generally accepted by subsequent writers.* There are, however, many other char- acters whose value is of uncertain taxonomic value, which were not then mentioned, and which I now record. The first description of the osteology of the Lacertiliais that of Cuvier, which is contained in his Ossemens Fossiles ; (Vol. x, ed. 1836). This isan excellent one, but the many types discovered since his time render it nec- essary that a new survey of the subject should be made. In 1856 the Zootomie der Amphibien, by Stannius, appeared. The account of the osteology of lizards given in this work is more complete than that of Cuvier, but it is incomplete in many points, and is not up to the re- quirements of the present time. The present study is made with especial reference to the necessities of the paleontology of the order ; therefore the description of characters is made as specific as possible. The principal novelty will be found in the references to North American Genera, and in the descriptions of the hyoid apparatus. The description of the scapular and pelvic arches in certain genera with the extremities degenerate or wanting, where they have not been previously described, is contained in a separate illustrated paper now in the hands of the editor of the Ameri- can Journal of Morphology for publication. Sxouu.—The prem vxillary bone is single except in the Scincide, Acon- tiide, and some Gecconide (Phyllurus sp.). It is very small in the Iguanid genus Phrynosoma, and in the Agamide it is excluded from con- tact with the vomer by processes of the maxillaries which meet on the mid- dle line. In the Chameleonide the premaxillary is still smaller, the body being narrower than the superior spine, and supporting but one tooth. In the Anguidee the premaxillary is bounded posteriorly on each side by a fora- men which is sometimes large, which is wanting in other families, includ- ing the Helodermide. In Lepidosternum it is principally on the inferior * See Boulenger, Ann. Magaz. Nat. History, 1884, p. 117; and Catalogue of Lizards in British Museum, i, 1885; ii, 1885; iii, 1887. This author has added osteological charac- ters of the Eublepharide, Uroplatidz, Pygopodidz and Dibamide. 186 {March 18, Cope.] face of the muzzle. The nasal bones are generally distinct, but in the Varanide they are fused into a single narrow median element. In the Chameleonide they do not attain the nasal border, being cut off by the junction of the prefrontal with the premaxillary and maxillary bones. In the genus Feylinia the nasal bones are fused into a broad plate. In ° Lepidosternum they are completely cut off from the nasal border by the maxillary, which is broadly in contact with the premaxillary spine. In Rhineiira the nasal bone reaches the nares as in Amphisbena. The frontal bones are separate in the Varanide, Helodermide, Anguide, Scincide, Anelytropide, Anniellide and Amphisbenide, and in some Gecconide. They are codssified in some Gecconide ; in the Iguanide, Agamide, Xenosauride, Eublepharide, Chameleonide and Tiide. The parietalsare generally fused, the only exception being the Gecconide, Uroplatide, and Xantusiide. Prefontals are always present, and in Anniellide, Helodermide and Chameleonide they extend posteriorly to the postfrontals, excluding the frontal from the orbital border. Lach- rymals are present, but they are fused with the prefrontal in the Scin- cide. The jugal is generally present, even when there is no postorbital arch, as in Gecconidse, where it is a splint; but in the Amphisbenia, Annielloidea, and in Feylinia, the splint-like element attached to the maxillary extends to the pterygoid posteriorly and the prefrontal ante- riorly, and may include the lachrymal. The jugal extends anteriorly as far as the lachrymal except in the Scincide. The postfrontal is want- ing and in most cases is fused with the postorbital in the Varanide and Agamide ; but in other families it is distinct, with sporadic cases of fusion, as in Cnemidophorus. Superciliary bones are present in Va- ranus, Phrynosoma and several genera of Agamide. They belong to the tegumentary system, and articulate, the anterior with the pre- frontal, the posterior (absent in Varanus) with the postfrontorbital bone. The supraoccipital is undivided and forms the superior part of the edge of the foramen magnum. Its anterior border is generally loosely articu- lated with the parietal, joining it by a rudimental or developed median gomphosis with the process supraoccipital. It is generally overhung by the parietal, always so when the parietoquadrate arches are present. It is entirely overroofed by the parietal in the Xantusiidw, the two elements being connected by a vertical laminiform septum. It is not overhung in the Annielloidea and Amphisbeenia, and in these the articulation is a firm complete transverse union, The parietoquadrate arch consists proxi- mally of a process of the parietal, which is directed outwards and poste- riorly, which may represent the supramastoid element of the primitive Cotylosauria, Distally this process receives an ascending process of the paroccipital on its inferior aspect, sometimes anteriorly, sometimes poste- riorly. This arch is shortened and depressed in the Anelytropide and is absent from the Anniellide and Amphisbenia, In the Chameleonide it is differently composed, consisting of a superior posterior process of the supratemporal, which rises upwards and reaches the produced apex of the 1892. | 187 [Cope. undivided parietal. The supratemporal is accompanied for a short distance above the quadrate by the ascending process of the paroccipital. The pi- neal foramen is present in the Chameleonide, Agamide, Iguanide, Anoli- dx, Xenosauride, Anguide, Lacertide, Varanide and Scincide. It is * wanting in the Helodermide, Eublepharide, Tiide, Anniellide and in the Amphisbenia. It perforates the parietal bone clear of all sutures in most of the families, but it is near to or on the frontoparietal suture in Iguani- dex and Anolide, and is in the frontal in Dipsosaurus and the Chameleon- ide. The occipital condyle is compound, consisting of portions of the exoccipitals and basioccipital. In many genera these segments become so thoroughly coéssified at maturity as to be undistinguishable. In some of the Gecconidx (as Gecco, Uroplates) the occipital segment is so reduced as to give the appearance of two condyles. In the Amphisbenia the condyle is transverse and concave at the center, leaving the lateral por- tions prominent. The postorbital bone when present sends a process posteriorly to the supratemporal, forming the supratemporal arch. In the genera without this arch the postorbital may be wanting, as in Heloderma, or be rudi- mental as in Anniella. In the genera whose degeneration is advanced, the supratemporal bone is appressed to the parietal, enclosing no foramen supratemporale, as in Feylinia. In limbless genera of Anguide# the su- pratemporal touches the parietal anterior to the paroccipital, thus redu- cing the supratemporal foramen. This occurs also in Gerrhonotus, Celestus, Xenosaurus and Xantusiide. In,Heloderma the supratemporal is a rudiment on the external side of the base of the paroccipital. The remarkable upward production of the supratemporal in Chameleon has been mentioned. Here this process takes the place of the parieto- quadrate arch. The exoccipitals are produced laterally, each embracing, with the petrosal in front, the small paroccipital. This sustains the superior extremity of the quadrate. In the snake-like genera, as Fey- linia, Anniella and the Amphisbeenia, this lateral elongation does not exist. The exoccipital is scale-like, and the quadrate is sessile on the side of the skull. The quadrate is generally convex at the upper part of its anterior face, and its external anterior border is produced outwards so as to embrace a longitudinal concavity or conch, with the vertical mass or column of the bone. This column is itself more or less concave, its upper extremity being produced a little backwards. In the Iguanide _ there is another concavity, internal to the column, similar to the external. _ This is much narrowed in the majority of the families, and in the Varani- de and Helodermide, and in Phrynosoma, Eublapharis, and Celestus it is wanting. In Chameleon, Anniella and the Amphisbzenia there is no external conch, the quadrate being simply a rod ; while in Feylinia it is flattened in an anteroposterior plane. The mandibular articulation is _ more or less bilobate in all except Varanus, where it is plane. In Gecco _ the bilobation is strongly marked, as in the Permian Theriodonta. The Cope.] 188 [March 18, in contact in all forms except Chameleon, towards the middle line. This portion is generally grooved, but in Xenosaurus it isa slender rod. They are received on the basipterygoid processes of the sphenoid, and then di- verge and assume a longitudinal position without meeting on the middle line. They are produced in an angle or process towards the posterior ex- - tremity of the maxillary bone, from which they are separated by the ectopterygoid. The pterygoids then join the palatines. In a few genera they bear a few small teeth. The palatines are separate from each other and from the maxillaries, but send a process outwards and forwards to the latter. They join in front each its corresponding half of the vomer. The internal nares are situated each between the vomer and the maxil- lary, and it notches more or less deeply the palatine, which forms its pos- terior border. The vomers are separate in all forms excepting Chameleon, and they have various forms. In Gecconide and Anolide they are flat and fit closely together, and they have the same character in many Agamide and Iguanide. Ina few members of these families (Uromastix and Sauromalus), they are divided by a groove, which becomes a fissure posteriorly, which is the character in most other lizards. . In the Varani- dz each vomer is produced posteriorly on each side this fissure to a greater distance than in other forms. The planes of the palate differ much in different families and groups. Thus the vomer is on a much higher plane than the palatines in Chameleonide and Gecconide, the palatines curving downwards to meet the pterygoids. The latter are gen- erally horizontal, but in Chameleon they are in a subvertical plane, their free rounded extremities descending and fitting on the inner side of the mandible. They do not quite reach the quadrate. In the Agamide, Ig- uanide and Gecconide the internal extremity of the ectopterygoid is di- rected inferiorly, forming a downwardly directed angle on each side of the palate. In the Amphisbenia the structure of the palate is much more compact than in other lizards. The palatines are in contact on the middle line and there is no palatomaxillary foramen. That is, the pala- tine is in close contact with the maxillary, the ectopterygoid being tightly wedged in between them, The pterygoids are in contact throughout their length with the sphenoid, and the proximal end of each is tightly wedged between the latter and the quadrate. The character of the petrosal must be attended to by any one who de- sires to understand the relations of the Lacertilia among themselves, In no member of the Lacertilia is the trigeminus foramen closed anteriorly by bony tissue, but it is enclosed by the membrane which forms the ante- rior wall of the brain case. The petrosal is divided into two parts by the deep notch whose fundus forms the posterior border of this foramen, which may be culled the supra- and infraforaminal portions. The infra- foraminal portion is divided in most of the families by a longitudinal, keel-like ridge, which forms the superior border of a groove whose infe- rior wall is formed by the sphenoid. This groove is not present in Helo- derma and is very shallow in Xenosaurus, It is wanting in the Anniel- — 1892.] 189 [C..pe. lide and Amphisbenia. In the Gecconide it does not exist, nor is the petrosal notched by the foramen, while the anterior border of the petrosal forms a free crest which extends from above downwards and backwards. In the Chameleonide, Agamide, Iguanide and Anolide (families with papillose tongues), the supraforaminal part of the petrosal is short and is bounded by a convex anterior border which marks the position of the an- terior semicircular canal. In the Nyctisaura, Thecaglossa, Diploglossa, Leptoglossa and Amphishenia (families with smooth or squamous tongues, except Anniella, Diploglossa and Nyctisaura) the petrosal is produced beyond this curved border below the parietal. In many forms an outline of the semicircular canal, which forms the boun- dary in the other superfamilies, may be traced, whence I have termed this part of the petrosal posterior to it ‘‘the arched body’’ in my former system of the Lacertilia.* The petrosal is produced furthest beyond this arcade in the snakelike forms of the Anniella and Amphisbenia, reach- ing almost to the orbit in Lepidosternum. The relation to the parie- tal differs, the differences resulting from the greater or less reduction of the primitive supratemporal roof and the greater or less entrance of the parietal into the lateral wall of the brain case. In most of the families it is little or not decurved to meet the petrosal; and in the [guania, where it is decurved, it does not come in contact with the petrosal owing to the shortness of the latter. In certain families where the petrosal is produced beyond the arcade, and the parietal is decurved, the two elements are in contact for a short distance, as in the Varanidee. In the Tiide and Scin- cide the contact is mainly effected by a short descending process of the parietal. This process is especially elongate in the Scincide. The arcade is the anterior border of the petrosal in the Permian Theriodonta, and it marks the position of the anterior semicircular canal. The membranous wall of the brain case, anterior to the petrosal, contains an ossification which is of uncertain homology. It reaches or approaches by its superior extremity the frontal, and might hence be supposed to be the orbito- sphenoid ; but this homology is vitiated by the fact that its inferior por- tion passes behind the optic foramen. The latter position is that of the alisphenoid, and so the bone is named by Parker.+ But there is another element, the epipterygoid, posterior to it and immediately anterior to the petrosal, which has been supposed to be the true alisphenoid. Leaving this question, and adopting for the bone in question the provisional name of postoptic, I remark that is typically triradiate, sending two branches — upwardsand one downwards. This is its characterin Agamide, Varanidse and Tiide. The posterior superior branch is much reduced in many Ig- uanide and Lacertide and in some Agamide (Megalochilus), and it is ab- solutely wanting in Gerrhosaurus and Chameleon. There is nopostoptic in Heloderma. In the Rhynchocephalian genus Sphenodon these two elements coéxist with an orbitosphenoid, lying between the optic and tri- * Proceeds. Academy Philadelphia, 1864, p. 224. + Transac. Royal Society, 1879, p. 605, on the ‘‘ Development of the Skullin Lacertilia.” Cope.] 190 [March 18, geminal foramina. The two together may be homologous with the mam- malian alisphenoid. The epipterygoid is present in all Lacertilia except- ing the Chameleonide and Annulati (Amphisbeenia). Its superior con- nections are quite characteristic of the different families. Inferiorly it rests on the pterygoid posterior to its ectopterygoid process, excepting in the Gecconide, where its point of attachment is opposite to that process. In the same family it does not reach the parietal, but the superior ex- tremity rests on the apex of the supraforaminal part of the petrosal. In the remaining families there are three modes of superior attachment. In most of the Iguania and Acrodonta it reaches the parietal and does not touch the short petrosal. In the other superfamilies it is in contact with the petrosal. In the Varanide, Helodermide and most Anguide it reaches the parietal, which does not meet it with a conspicuous descend- ing process. In Scincide and Tiide a conspicuous descending process meets it. In a certain number of genera of various families it does not quite reach the parietal. Such are Eublepharide, Gerrhosauride, Anguis, Lacerta, Phrynosoma (where it rests on the arcade.of the petrosal), Igu- ana, Uromastix, Agama and Gonyocephalus (subcristatus). In Lyrioceph- alusand Phrynocephalus the epipterygoid is very short. The semicireular canals perforate the supraoccipital, the exoccipital and the petrosal. The internal is in a subtransverse vertical plane, causing a convexity on the internal side of the supra- and exoccipitals, and in some types a visible rib on the superoexternal surface of the same. The external canal is in a horizontal plane and perforates the base of the exoc- cipitopetrosal suspensorium, causing « horizontal rib on the anterior face of the latter in some forms. The anterior is in a vertical anteroposterior plane, and perforates principally the petrosal, occupying its anterior border, which forms the ‘‘arcade’’ in most of the thick-tongued super- orders, but crossing the bone much behind the anterior border in the slender-tongued superorders and the Diploglossa, The fenestra ovale is tightly closed by the disk of the stapes, which is continued externally as 4 the rod-like columella. This rod is slender except in Anniella, where it is remarkably robust. In the other Amphisbenia its tympanic extremity is somewhat thickened. The columella is continued externally into a carti- lage which is more or less expanded in the vertico-transverse plane, the distal portion always so, forming a vertical lamina in contact with thetym- — panic membrane. Thisis the epistapedial cartilage. It is frequently pro- duced upwards beyond its point of attachment into a supraustapedial pro- cess. The plate thus formed is almost separate from the proximal axial part of the cartilage in Heloderma,* The axial portion has a descending pro- — cess, the infrastapedial of Parker, in Lacerta, Heloderma, but not in Bu. — blepharis, Thecadactylus and Phyllodactylus. The rami of the lower jaw are united at the symphysis by ligament only. The angle isa prolongation of the articular bone ; it is elongate and simple, — * Memoirs U, 8. Natl. Academy Sciences, 1884, Vol. iil, 4 1892.] : eae [Cope. except in Anniella and Chameleon, where it is absent. The angular bone never reaches the angle, and has an anterior position, being some- times fused with the articular. The relations of the segments of the lower jaw are very characteristic in the divisions of the Lacertilia. The splenial bone is wanting in the Chameeleonide, and is very smallin the Agamide ; in other families it is well developed. The dentary extends posteriorly on the external face of the ramus, as the splenial diminishes, having the greatest posterior extent in the two families mentioned. The coronoid is differently extended in asimilar ratio. Thusitis extended posteriorly on the external side of the ramus, and not anteriorly, in the Chameleonide and Agamidee ; both forwards and back wards in the Gecconide ; and forwards in the other families. The angular is absent (fused with the articular Boulenger) in the Gecconide, Anolide, Acontiide, Anelytropside, Anniellide and the Annulata, and is distinct in all other families. The articular and surangular are fused in several genera of Iyguanide ; and there are but three bones in the ramus of Xantusia, q. v. The angular extends well anteriorly on the inferior border of the jaw in this order, but is differently developed on the innerand outer faces. The Chameleonide and Agamide again show their similarity in having this element chiefly exposed on the interior side, while in other types the exposure is external. _ The Meckelian groove is open in the Chameleonide, Agamide and Va- ranide, but is roofed over more or less completely in all other families. The hyoid system is not connected with the skull except in Gecconide, _Eublepharide and Lepidophyma, so far as I have examined them. Thus in Thecadactylus, Phyllodactylus and Eublepharis, the ceratohyal is con- tinuous with a cartilage which projects from the paroccipital above the posterior part of the auditory meatus. In Lepidophyma the free epi- branchial is attached to the inferior lateral angle of the basioccipital. In - forty-two genera of other families enumerated below, this is not the case. In no genus have I discovered any connection with the stapedial carti- ‘lages. The hyoid system in lizards consists of a glossohyal which is con- ‘tinuous with a basihyal tract; a hypohyal often continuous with the ‘basihyal tract’; a ceratohyal ; a first ceratobranchial, and a second cerato- branchial which is always continuous with the basihyal tract. There may be in addition an epibranchial, which belongs to the first ceratobranchial. _ In some genera, there is a free epibranchial, which may be then closely _ approximated to the ceratohyal (Eumeces, Oligosoma, Gerrhonotus), or to | the second ceratobranchial (Lacerta, Xantusia, Lepidophyma). The only ' constantly ossified element is the first ceratobranchial. . The genera and families differ in the presence or absence of the second ceratobranchials and epibranchials; and the proximity or separation of the former. In " general the Varanide, Anguide, Zonuride, Gerrhosauride, Scincide, Lacertide and Xantusiide have epibranchials, while the thick-tongued and most degraded types are without them. In the Tiidw the hypo- branchials are much produced anteriorly beyond the bases of the cera- } tohyals, and there are no second ceratobranchials. In Anguide the PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 1388. y. PRINTED MAY 9, 1892. | Cope.] 192 { March 18, hypobranchials are also greatly produced forwards, but carry the cerato- hyals with them. Ceratobranchials of the second pair are also wanting in Varanide, Helodermide, Chameleonide, Anguide, Anniellide and Rhineura ; Phyllodactylus, Thecadactylus and Gecko, among Gecconide ; and Egernia and Gongylus in Scincide. Ceratohyals are wanting in Cha- meleon, Anguis, Anniella and Annulata generally. In both Agamide and Iguanide the second ceratobranchials are separated from. each other in the depressed genera of terrestrial habits, and in close contact with each other in those of arboreal habits ; but they are in close contact in Callisaurus and Crotophytus, both terrestrial genera. In Calotes, Iguana and Anolis they act as the rim on which the gular pouch or fan is stretched. The characters of Lacertilian hyoids may be tabulated as fol- lows: Most of the-genera referred to are figured in Plates iii to vi. I. Ceratohyal present. IL. Ceratohyal absent. A. A second ceratebranchial. a. Free epibranchials present. Scincide. Lacertide. Xantusiide. aa, No free epibranchials. (Scincide) Mabuia agilis ; Gongylus ocellatus. Anolide. Iguanide. Agamide. Zonuride. Enblepharide. Chirotide. (Gecconide) Aristelliger. Amphisbenide. AA. No second ceratobranchial. a. No free epibranchials, Gecconide. Rhineiira, Varanide. Chameleonide. Helodermide. Anguis. Tiida. Anniellide. Gerrhosauride. Anguide, 2. VerrepraL Cotumn.—Except in the families of the Gecconide and — Uroplatide, the vertebral centra are procelous. In the families named, they areamphicwlous, The zygosphen articulation is present in the Tiida and the larger Iguanida, including a rudimentin Crotaphytus. In smaller — Iguanide (Sceloporus Phrynosoma) and in Lacertilia generally this kind of articulation is wanting. Ina good many families the caudal vertebrae are divided by a transverse fissure or suture in front of the middle, which | 1892 ] 193 [Cope. often splits the base and sometimes the length of the diapophysis. Such a structure is seen in Iguanide (Iguana Sauromalus Sceloporus Dipso- saurus); Anolide; Anguide (Celestus); Tiide (Tupinambis Cnemidoph- orus); Lacertids (Lacerta) and Scincide (Gongylus Eumeces). In Dipsosaurus, Anolis and Lacerta, the neural spines of the caudal vertebrae are double; in the other genera named, single. In Varanide, Heloder- midx, Gerrhonotus, Crotaphytus and Phrynosoma, the caudal centra are undivided, and the neural spines are single. In Ophisaurus the certra are undivided and the neural spines double. The centra are excessively thin in Ophisaurus, so that they break more readily than they disarticu- late. There are two sacral vertebre except in genera with the posterior _ limbs rudimental or absent. In some of these however, especially the _ degenerate genera of the Anguide, the rudimental ilium is attached to _ two diapophyses which join each other distally. The first dorsal vertebra is that one which is first connected with the » sternum by a hemapophysis. In genera with a well-developed sternum, _ the number of vertebra auterior to the first dorsal is eight, except in the Varanus niloticus (Cuvier) and V. griseus, where it is nine. In the extinct Dolichosauria of the Cretaceous period, the cervical vertebre are stated by, Owen to number seventeen. The number of ribs attached to the sternum diminishes with the reduc- _ tion of the limbs, from the normal number of four on each side to one, and total disconnection. A common hxemapophysis or ‘‘ xiphoid rod,’’ suc- ceeds these on each side, which gives attachment to two separate haema- _ pophyses for ribs. ‘The common hemapopbysis is a segmentation of the _ anterior part of the fifth hemapophysis, and it is not distinct in some gen- era, as ¢. g., Sauromalus. In Heloderma, the fifth haemapophysis has no _ sternal segment or connection, and the sixth is wanting. In Varanus the _ fourth, fifth and sixth are wanting. In genera with the two appendicular _ heemapophyses, they are closely appressed on the middle line in the majority of the genera, but in genera of depressed form, they are sepa- rated often widely. They are separated in Stenodactylus guttatus, in Phy- _ maturus, Crotaphytus and Sceloporus. They are more widely separated in Dipsosaurus, and most widely in Sauromalus and Phrynoosma. Cer- vical ribs are present in varying numbers, and the posterior ones are generally quite elongate. In certain genera and families the ribs pos- terior to those attached to the sternum have their hemapophyses fused on the middle line below, thus constituting a series of abdominal ribs. In the Iguanid genus Scartiscus there are two such ribs. In the Anolide _ there are four and five pairs; in the Polychroine Iguanide there are seven to ten, In the Chameleonide and Gecconide there are several pairs. The ribs of Lepidosternum are remarkable for the presence of a _ vapitular process, which has no distinct capitular articulation. 8. ScapuLar Arcu.—The clavicle is present in all the families except _ the Chameeleonide, and in certain genera with degenerate fore limbs. In such genera it is the last portion of the scapular arch to remain, and it is Cope.] 194 {March 18, the only element present in Feylinia (Anelytropside). It is always osse- ous. The form of its proximal extremity varies in the different families. It is simple in the Nyctisaura, Uroplatoidea, Acrodonta, Iguania, Diplo- glossa and Thecaglossa; and expanded and generally perforate in the other superfamilies where present, except in some degenerate genera where it is simple (see Plate ii, Fig. 2). In Trachysaurus and Cophias, its proximal end is dilated but not perforate. The scapula varies in form from elongate to short and wide. It presents a proscapular process in many families and genera. It is present in Iguania and Nyctisaura ; in the last named often decurved and acuminate; and in Lophura, in Acrodonta, It is present among Leptoglossa in Cnemidophorus, and in some Amivee, while in other Amiv it is wanting. It is wanting generally in Acro- donta, Diploglossa,.Thecaglossa and Leptoglossa, but it is present in Celestus striatus. It is wanting in Rhiptoglossa. The coracoid is ex- tended anteriorly to the sternum, and it is generally deeply emarginate on its anterior interior border. These emarginations are closed by the pro- coracoid, which extends to the middle line, and is only partially or not at all ossified. There are two coracoid emarginations in most Iguania ; exceptions being the terrestrial genera Urocentrum, Sceloporus and Phrynosoma, and the Anolide. There are also two in Varanide and Tiide. The Agamide generally have but one, but Uromastix is an exception. There is but one in Anguide and Scincide (two in Tiliqua) ; and none in Helodermide and Chameleonide. The interclavicle isa very characteristic element in the Lacertilia. It is wanting in Chameleonide and in some genera with fore limbs rudi- mental or absent. It is a simple splint in Helodermide and some degen- erate genera. In other families it has a transverse limb on each side, which may be anterior, producing the “ anchor-shaped ”’ form, or median, producing the ‘‘cruciform’”’ type. It is anchor shaped in Acrodonta, Ig- uania, and Thecaglossa, and cruciform in Diploglossa and Leptoglossa, In Nyctisaura it is cruciform with the lateral processes wide at the base. The sternum is a broad subrhombic plate which articulates by its antero- lateral borders with the procoracoid and coracoid, and by its posterolateral borders with the ribs. In genera with well-developed limbs its principal differences are seen in the nature of its fontanelles when present. In the Agamide there are two, and in most Iguanide there isone. Exceptions are the genera Polychrus, Sauromalus and Dipsosaurus, where there is no fontanelle. There is none in the Anolide. In Tiide and Lacertide it is present, but in Scincide it is mostly absent, exceptions being the North American species of Eumeces. The fontanelle is wanting in Gecconide, Diploglossa, Helodermatoidea, Thecaglossa and Leptoglossa, with the exceptions above noted, The single median fontanelle is frequently con- cealed by the median limb of the interclavicle. It is nearly divided in some species of Sceloporus, 4. Tue Petvie Ancn.—It is characteristic of the Lacertilia that the flium is directed upwards and posteriorly, and that the obturator foramina ee ae ee ee ———E——— EE SCT ee at hall ll 1892, ‘195 [Cope. are well developed. The latter are only separated from each other by ligament or cartilage, which may sometimes contain some lime salt. It is produced posterior to the ischia in a triangular process, and less fre- quently into a similar one in front of the pubic symphysis. The pubic foramen is always present. The pectineal process is present except in Gecconide, but it is rudimental in some forms, as Phrynosoma. The fol- lowing table shows the forms of the pubis in twenty-three genera of dif- ferent families : I. Pubes uniting at an acute angle. 1. Pectineal process anterior.......... ee Rr Chameleon. RP MEIURN ICON, TNOGIOIL. bc oc cece: secccccestecsonces Calotes, Draco, Iguana Dipsosaurus Anolis, Gerrhonotus, Tupinambis Cnemidophorus. 8. Pectineal process near acetabulum ............... ost esunsee a OneUn, Lacerta, Eumeces (rudimental). 4. No pectineal process, .....cccsvecscsece: ceecereceveese Gonyocephalus. IL. Pubes uniting at an obtuse or very open angle. 1. Pectineal process median....... eecees--elyuana Cyclura Crotaphytus, Histiurus. 2. Pectineal process near acetabulum. .........see-esceeveee s+» Agama, thrynosoma Sauromalus Sceloporus, Heloderma, Varanus. 8. Pectineal process none..........++++: Gecko ( Phrynosoma, rudiment). There is a tuber ischii in all of the genera which have come under my observation except Varanus. In Heloderma and some other forms it is small. 5. Tae AnTerror Lims.—The humerus is much alike in all Lacertilia, Chameleo only presenting peculiarities. The proximal end is expanded nearly in one plane, and the middle portion of the flattened extremity forms the oval head. This is not distinctly isolated, except by the pres- ence of articular surface, from the greater and lesser tuberosities which _ occupy the angles of the expansion. The shaft betrays no twist. The distal end is chiefly occupied by the condyles; but there are epicondyles, of which the internal is the more prominent, except in Chameleon, where they are wanting. The condyles consist of an external rib and a medio- internal roller, which is generally bounded at the internal extremity by a tuberosity, which is, however, wanting in Chameleon. The ulna artic- ulates with the median roller, its external edge being beveled by the ex- ternal rib. ‘The head of the radius articulates with the external rib, hav- ing shifted from its primitive position on the inner side. It results from this that in pronation the radius crosses the ulna. There is a short ole- Cope.] 196 [March 18, cranon except in Chameleon. The ulna and radius have about an equal share in the carpal articulation, sometimes the ulna a little the greater. The constitution of the carpus is very uniform in Lacertilia with devel- oped anterior limbs, the principal diversity being displayed by the Cha- mzleonide. In all, we have in the proximal row three distinct elements, the radiale, intermedium and ulnare (= pisifurme), the latter mainly ex- ternal to the ulna and directed posteriorly. Distal to the radiale and intermedium, and between them and the carpalia of the second row, is a single small centrale. There are five carpalia, each corresponding to a metacarpal. I have failed to find in any of the genera at my disposal any of the carpalia fused together or wanting. In Chameleon, on the con- trary, Cuvier has shown that there is no ulnare, and that the centrale and carpalia are fused into a single round median piece, to which the meta- carpals are articulated. In all the normal Lacertilia the tendons of the flexors of the digits are combined on the palm, and the point of junction is occupied by a large flat sesamoid bone. The number of phalanges is also remarkably uniform. They number in each digit, commencing with the pollex, 2-3-4-5-3. The sole exception in the genera with well-de- veloped extremities is Chameleon, where the numbers are 2-3-4-4-3, This genus differs also from other forms in the shapes of the metacarpals. Normally they are cylindric and subparallel in position and united in a common integument; but in Chameleon they are flattened, with ex- panded extremities, and divided into two bundles by a fissure, three within and two without, enabling the three inner digits to oppose the two outer round a branch of a tree. The number of digits in Lacertilia is normally 5-5, but reductions take place presenting variations from 4-5 to 1-1, the posterior limb usually displaying a lesser degree of degener- acy than the anterior, although not always. 6. Postertor Lims.—The femur differs from the humerus in having a distinct head, which is marked off from a trochanter. The former is not hemispherical as in Mammalia, but is somewhat compressed, and is oval in section. The trochanter is on the inferior anterior side of the head, or in the position of the little trochanter of the Mammalian femur. There is no great trochanter, nor third trochanter. The condyles of the femur are not as well defined as in the Mammalia, and the patellar groove is represented by a shallow concavity without lateral ridges. Patella none, with some exceptional rudiments, as in Varanus, ¢. g. In Chameleo all the promi- nent features of the femur are toned down ; the trochanter being repre- sented by aridge. The fibula is more slender than the tibia, and is larger distally than proximally, the reverse of whit obtains in the tibia. The latter has no crest, Like the carpus, the tarsus is very uniform in the Lacertilia, the sole important modification being exhibited by the Chameleonide. There are two fused proximal elements, which are probably tibiale-intermedium and fibulare. They are only distinct in Heloderma among North American genera, but a trace of the suture is seen in Varanus, In most Lucertilia a. ee 1892.] 197 [Cope. there is then, but one bone of the proximal row, which is flat and wider than long. No centrale, and but two tarsalia, the third and fourth, the latter much the larger. The second metatarsal projects alongside of t. iii, so as to approximate the tibiale ; its head is figured by Cuvier as a distinct bone, but he does not describe it as such. In Chameleon there is a single proximal tarsal element, which is not flattened as in other lizards, and this articulates with a single subglobular tarsale, from which the metatarsals radiate.* The phalanges number, like those of the anterior foot, 2-3-4-5-3, in ordinary Lacertilia, and 2-3-4-4-3 in Chameleonide. PHYLLODACTYLUS Gray. In their osteology the species of this genus conform strictly to the Gecconid type as already described. I have before me the skeleton of P. tuberculosus, from which the following description is derived. The premaxillary is single and has a long superior spine; inferiorly it has the posterior border emarginate. Nasals elongate, distinct, emarginate poste- riorly for the frontal. Frontal single, rather narrow, completely under- arching olfactory lobes. Parietals distinct, wide, without pineal foramen, lying rather closely on supraoccipital, sending backwards the parietoquad- rate arch, which encloses a small foramen with the exoccipital. Supraoc- cipital distinguished from exoccipital by suture. Prefrontal narrow, forming the preorbital border to the middle above ; no lachrymal ; jugal represented by a splint which extends from the prefrontal to the extremity of the maxillary on the superior surface of the latter. Postfrontal a rather wide V-shaped bone, its longest limb extending posteriorly more than half way to the base of the parietoquadrate arch. No postorbital. Quadrate with a single large, concave, external conch. Paroccipital in the usual position, splint-like. Vomers in close‘ contact throughout, with a common convex pos- terior border; an external longitudinal convexity of the inferior surface, apd a groove on each side of the median suture, which divides a keel. Palatines sbort and wide, and with a longer vomerine than maxillary pro- cess, and curving downwards below the level of the vomers. Nareal ori- fices fissure-like except posteriorly and anteriorly, the external border with a dentate process of the maxillary bone directed posteriorly near the middle. Pterygoids much expanded anteriorly, forming with tke ecto- pterygoids and palatines a thin plate, which closes up the palatine fura- men; contracting rather rapidly posteriorly to the subcylindric rod-like portion. Epipterygoid extending from the pterygoid at the basipterygoid process, and resting on the apex of the petrosal. Latter produced above * Cuvier (Ossemens Fossiles, ed. 1836, p. 98) describes a distinct tibiale and fibulare in Chameeleo, and figures them (Plate 245, Fig.52). These are not represented by Boulenger (Proe. Zodl. Soc., London, 1891, p. 118). They are in fact not distinct tarsal ele- ments, but are the epiphyses of the tibia and fibula such as exist also in Heloderma and other genera. The tibiale and fibulare are fused iuto a single element as in other Lacertilia, Cope.] 198 (March 18, anterior to semicircular canal; the anterior border continued into a crest which runs posteriorly above the trigeminal foramen. This terminates at the down-looking crest of the subforaminal portion, which bounds exter- nally a wide down-looking groove. Basipterygoid processes long. Sphe- noid distinct from basioccipital. Occipital condyle subequally divided into three parts, two prominent exoccipitals and a contracted basioccipital. The result is an apparently double condyle. Mandible with the Meckelian groove closed, and with the splenial small and but little produced beyond the splenial foramen. Coronoid produced a little horizontally at the base. Angular not distinct; suran- gular and articular distinct. Angle simple, direct, spoon-shaped, with superior concavity. I have observed the following peculiarities in the otic and hyoid regions. There is no infrastapedial cartilage, and the supra- stapedial and epistapedial cartilages are continuous. The hyoid system is characterized by the fact that the ceratohyal is attached to the paroc- cipital, which carries a cartilage on its extremity. There is a short second ceratobranchial, and no free epibranchial. Vertebre amphicelous. Intercentra present throughout the vertebral column, continued into chevrons on the caudal region. Cervical ribs widened and truncate at extremities. In the specimen described the diapo- pbyses of the second sacral vertebra are deeply longitudinally grooved on the inferior side so as to be nearly split. Diapophyses of anterior candals elongate. Neural spines distinct but low throughout the column. In the scapular arch | note the following peculiarities. There is no proscapula, and the clavicle is much enlarged, and is perforate at the median extremity. The interclavicle is cruciform with the angles filled up so as to have con- cave borders. It is codssified with the clavicle in P. tuberculatus, and ex- tends but a little way posteriorly on the sternum. The coracoid has one large foramen. The sternum has no fontanelle. There are four hema- pophyses attached to the sternum on each side; and two to each of the slender closely approximated xiphoid rods. There are several very slender abdominal ribs. The ilium has no angulus cristae, and the acetabulum is entire. The pubes join at a little less than a right angle, and the pectineal processes are short and a little posterior to the middle. Pubes uniting at less than a right angle below, with the tuberosities distal, The most distinctive feature of the skeleton of this genus is the pres- ence of intercentra throughout the vertebral column, a point in which it resembles the extinct Theromora of the Permian epoch. Evusieraaris Gray. * Owing to the isolated position of this genus its osteology is worthy of especial attention. The premaxillary is undivided, and has a long supe- rior spine but no inferior spine. The nasals are distinct. The frontals * I include in this genus the Coleonyx of Gray, which does not differ generically from the other American species of the family, ee ee eee Tl — 1892.] 199 [Cope. are codssified and the interorbital space is very narrow. The parietals are cooéssified and there is no pineal foramen. The supraoccipital is loosely articulated anteriorly, but is codssified with the exoccipitals. No lachry- mal bone; prefrontal large but not reaching far posteriorly over orbit. Postfrontal small, crescentic ; no postorbital. No postorbital or supra- temporal arches. Parietoquadrate arch depressed ; paroccipital lying over the parietal at the inferior extremity. No jugal bone. No orbito- sphenoid ; the olfactory lobes enclosed below by the frontal bone. Pe- trosal produced beyond semicircular canal at the superior anterior angle, and without the oblique crest such as is characteristic of the Gecconide. A. subforaminal projection and groove, the external wall of the groove as prominent downwards as the internal, so that the groove is open infe- riorly. Vomers swollen, separated for most of their length by a deep groove. Palatines short and wide, sending a postnareal process to the maxillary. Pterygoids broad and flat in front, narrower posteriorly, with a short ectoptery goid without descending angle, enclosing a maxillopala- tine foramen. Basipterygoids elongate. Sphenoid and basioccipital dis- tinct ; the latter distinct also from exoccipitals. Occipital condyle convex, without exoccipital portion. Epipteryguid oblique, articulating below posterior to ectopterygoid process of pterygoid and above with petrosal only. Quadrate straight, oblique, with a single conch, which is external to the rod-like axis ; condyle emarginate. In the mandible the angular bone is small but distinct, and the coronoid is produced much further an- teriorly than posteriorly on the external face of the ramus. The dentary extends to about opposite the middle of the coronoid on the external face of the ramus. The splenial extends posteriorly but not anteriorly. The Meckelian groove closed. In the hyoid apparatus all the elements are ’ present, including a pair of elongate second ceratobranchials. There is a free process of the ceratohyal anterior to its junction with the hypvu- hyal. The scapular arch is much like that of the Gecconide. The clavicle is expanded and perforate proximally. The interclavicle is subcruciform with the limbs connected by laminate expansion. There is a small pro- scapula which is connected at its apex with the epicoracoid. Coracoid with one large emargination. Sternum without fontanelle, supporting three ribs and a ziphoid rod, which supports but one rib. No abdomi- nal ribs. Awnonis Daudin. The following osteological description is taken principally from the A. carolinensis, but other species which I have examined do not differ from it. Premaxillary with long superior spine, and no inferior spine, but a notch. Nasals distinct, separated by premaxillary spine. Frontal and parietal bones each undivided, the pineal foramen on the coronal suture. Prefrontal large, not extending over orbit ; lachrymal narrow, in contact with jugal. Postfrontal small, distinct; postorbital large. Supratem- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxx. 188. zZ. PRINTED MAY 6, 1892. Cope.] 200 [March 18, poral slender, forming the greater part of the supratemporal arch, its an- terior extremity in contact with the postorbital and postorbital process of jugal bones. Paroccipital small; parietoquadrate arch well developed. Supraoccipital loosely attached, codssified with exoccipital. The frontal bone is grooved on the median line below. The postoptics are within the epipterygoids, and are curved, enclosing a subcircular space, and have a short external branch. The epipterygoid leaves the pterygoid behind the ectopterygoid process, and articulates with the pari- etal, passing some distance in front of the petrosal. The petrosal is very short above ; the subforaminal process is distinct, and the inferior groove looks outwards as well as downwards. Quadrate with wide exter- nal conch and no internal conch. Stapes not deeply sunk; columella slender. The vomers are flat and elongate, and are not separated by a groove. The palatines are broad and flat, and the maxillopalatine fora- men is small. The pterygoids are broad and flat in front, and are then abruptly contracted from the outside to a narrow posterior part. This curves outwards from the long basipterygoid processes to the quadrate, The ectopterygoids are short and are deflected at the proximal extremity. Presphenoid long and rod-like. Occipital condyle convex, simple, with- out exoccipital divisions. The mandible has marked peculiarities. The Meckelian groove is closed, and the splenial bone, if present, is minute. I do not detect it in the A. carolinensis. There is a fossa on the inside of the ramus at the base of the coronoid. The latter bone is developed much anterior to its apex on the external face, and not posteriorly. The dentary is produced far posterior to the coronoid. The angular and articular are fused, and the angle is rather short and has an internal angular projection (Xiphocercus valenciennii, Anolis equestris,, A. marmoratus, A. carolinen- sis). The hyoid apparatus has the extreme development seen in all the lizards with a gular compressed pouch or fan. That is, the ceratobranchials of the second pair are closely appressed and produced to a great length. First pair of ceratobranchials and ceratohyals sithple, the latter attached to the extremities of the moderately developed hypohyals. The scapular arch conforms to the Iguanid type. There isa proscapula well above the coracoid, and a single coracoid notch. The sternum has a smal! median fontanelle which is reached by the long posterior limb of the interclavicle. Two ribs attached to each side of sternum, and three to each of the slender, closely appressed xiphoid rods. There are five pairs of abdominal ribs in Anolis carolinensis, and four, five and six in other species. The vertebre have no zyosphen nor elongate diapophyses, There are eight cervical vertebre, of which only the last four have ribs, all of which have simple heads, the last two being elongate and reaching to the plane of the sternum. The caudal vertebra have no supplementary dividing suture, and there 2 ee ee 1892.] 201 [Cope. is but one neural spine. The chevron bones sre attached at the extremity of the centrum. The pubes unite at an acute angle, and have well-developed pectineal process at the middle of their length. The ischia have a prominent tuber. The premaxillary and anterior maxillary teeth are simple; the others are tricuspid. Dresosaurus Hallow. The osteology of this genus presents a number of interesting peculiari- ties which constitute difference from Crotaphytus, to which its general appearance suggests affinity. Premaxillary bone with elongate superior spine, and posterior emargi- nation of inferior face. Nasals large, distinct, not shortened in front, since the nostrils open forwards. Frontal narrow, entire, grooved on the middle line below, its posterior region pierced by the pineal foramen which is entirely anterior to the coronal suture (D. dorsalis). Supraoc- cipital loosely articulated anteriorly, and not distinct from exoccipitals. Prefrontals large, not extending over orbit ; lachrymal smaller, touched by jugal. Postfrontal small, distinct from the large postorbital. The latter articulates extensively with both the jugal and supratemporal. Paroc- cipital small. Parietoquadrate arch well elevated. The vomers together as broad as long, not produced posteriorly, with a median fossa. Palatine flat, with a short maxillary process; pterygoid flat in front, concave on the inner side behind for contact with the long basipterygoid process. Ectopterygoid decurved at its inner extremity. Quadrate with a narrow internal and a wide external conch. Postoptic an open sigmoid, reaching frontal above, with a median expansion with rudiment of posterior limb. Petrosal very short above; subforaminal portion prominent, with a wide inferior groove looking downwards. Epipterygoid leaving pterygoid behind ectopterygoid process, and reaching parietal without contact with petrosal. Presphenoid’ rudimental; sphenoid and basioccipital united, and with prominent lateral edges. Occipital condyle with exoccipital elements feebly distinguished. In the mandible the Meckelian groove is completely curved. The coro- noid has little horizontal extent, and that is principally anteriorly on the external side. The surangular and articular are tused together, and the splenial is small. The dentary extends as far posteriorly as the posterior border of the coronoid. The angle is prominent, flattened so as to be horizontal, and has an internal angle. The scapula has a large proscapula directed upwards, and the coracoid has one emargination, which is large. The sternum has a narrow median fontanelle which is not covered by the interclavicle. There are four pairs of ribs articulated to the sternum, and two continue into the approxi- mated xiphoid rods. The ribs reach the sacrum. Cope.] 202 [March 18, Vertebre with a zygosphen articulation. Eight cervical vertebre, the anterior with a compressed hypapophysis, which soon becomes a keel, which is absent on the eighth cervical and all following vertebree. Four anterior vertebre without ribs ; seventh and eighth with long ribs. Di- apophyses very short, except in the caudal region, where they are present for half its length, increasing in length to the base where they are quite elongate. Chevron bones intercentral. Neural spines of dorsal region low, of caudal region rather elevated, oblique, and preceded by a com- pressed vertical prominence or anterior neural spine. The Centra are transversely segmented just in front of the diapophysis, except in the an- terior part of the series. The angle of junction of the pubes is nearly right, and the pectineal process is median, short and decurved. The ischia have a long common suture, and are deflected downwards, meeting at less than a right angle. Tuber a prominent angle. The ilium presents a short subacute angle representing the crista. There is a deep posterior notch of the acetab- ulum. In Dipsosaurus dorsalis all the teeth on the maxillary bone are tricuspi- date; theseon the premaxillary are mostly simple, but one or two external ones show a rudimental lateral cusp. Crotrapuytus Holbrook. The skeletons of the two most abundant species are before me, viz., the ©. collaris Holbr. and (. wislicenti B. & G. The following description includes both, and if any differences between the two exist, they are mentioned, The premaxillary has a long spine above and a concave border behind on the palate, from which projects forwards a pair of juxtaposed processes which together form a button-like process which has an anterior free border. The nasals are wide and shortened by the removal of their anterior border on account of the large size and partly vertical direction of the nostrils. Frontal single, narrow ; pineal foramen touching coronal suture, in the frontal bone in C. collaris, and in the parietal in C. wisli- cenit. Prefrontal large, with a prominent preocular boss, not extending posteriorly over the orbit, Lachrymal small in line with and touching the jugal. Postfrontal wanting; its place taken by a process of the frontal. Postorbital large, uniting exteriorly with jugal and supra- temporal. Parietoquadrate arch elevated ; supraoccipital bone loosely articulated, not distinct from exoccipital. Quadrate with rather flat conchs, the external the larger, and with straight external border. Post- optics not reaching frontal, curved, with short posterior branch, Petrosal with prominent subforaminal portion which has an open groove looking downwards. Vomers short and wide, not separated by a groove. Puala- tines flat, with short maxillary process. Pterygoids rather narrowed by the large palatine foramina; posterior part grooved and receiving basi- | 4 , 1892.] 203 | [Cope. . pterygoid processes. Ectopterygoids depressed internally. Epipterygoid originating behind ectopterygoid process, and reaching parietal without contact with petrosal. Presphenoid rudimental ; sphenoid and basioccip- ital confluent. Occipital condyle plain, with exoccipital elements not distinct. The fenestra ovale and foramen of viii nerve sunk in deep fosse. In the mandible the terminal part of Meckel’scartilage is exposed. The coronoid has no extension on the external face, and extends a short distance forwards on the inner face. The splenial is rather elongate, and extends anterior to the splenial foramen. The dentary extends to the line of the posterior border of the coronoid above, and of its anterior border below. In old individuals the surangular and articular are fused. The angle is pinched, and sends inwards a horizontal process similar to its posterior process. In the hyoid apparatus the ceratobranchials of the second pair are closely appressed, thus supporting a median gular angle. The hypohyals are moderately long, and they join by their extremities the ceratohyals, which have no expansions, and are of only moderate length. The scapula has a well-developed proscapula, and there are two deep emarginations of the coracoid. The sternum has a narrow longitudinal median fontanelle in the @. collaris, and no fontanelle in C. wislicenii (one specimen of each examined). There are four ribs articulating directly with the sternum on each side, and two via each xiphoid rod. The latter are not closely appressed as in some, nor so widely separated as in other Tguanide. Vertebree without zygosphenal articulation, but the prezygapophyseal faces concave. Cervical vertebre eight, the anterior five vertebra with six free intercentra in C. wislicenii, and four vertebree with five intercentra in CO. collaris, anterior three vertebree without ribs in both species. The neural spines are very low on the dorsal vertebra, and are a little more elevated on the caudals. The latter have a projecting keel towards the anterior part in the CO wislicenit (wanting in OC. collaris), which represents _ the anterior neural spine of Dipsosawrus dorsalis. The centra in Crotaphy- tus are not segmented. Diapophyses are present, but are nowhere long. - Short ribs extend to the sacrum. The teeth are tricuspid, but in the two species examined the lateral cusps are rudimental. Anterolateral and incisor teeth simple, subequal. The pubes unite at an exceedingly open angle, and the pectineal pro- cess is submedian. Tuber ischii prominent ; a small angle or crista ilii. - Acetabulum entire posteriorly. The principal characters in which the skeleton of the Crotaphytus differs from Dipsosaurus are the following : Nasal bones shortened in front ; no _ postfrontals ; pineal foramen connected with coronal suture ; Meckelian a canal partly open ; two notches of coracoid ; xiphoid rods not appressed ; no zygosphen; caudal centra not divided ; acetabulum not deeply notched. 1. ee Cope.] 204 - [March 18, SauroMaLus Duméril. The following description of the osteology of this genus is based on a skeleton of the S. ater, belonging to the National Museum. The premaxillary has a long spine above and a transverse posterior border below with the anteriorly directed button process. The nasals are well developed and distinct in spite of the large size of the nares. Frontal entire, rather narrow, grooved on the middle line below, and including pineal foramen, which touches the coronal suture. Parietals divided per- haps abnormally in specimen. Supraoccipital loosely attached, but fused with exoccipitals. Prefrontals large, not extending over orbits ; lach- rymals small, in contact with jugal. Postfrontal distinct, small. Apex of postorbital cartilaginous, inferior face in long contact with jugal and supratemporal. Paroccipital not large ; parietoquadrate arch well separated from exoccipital. Postoptic not reaching frontal, superior extremity ex- panded backwards and forwards. Petrosal very short above, prolonged below, inferior groove looking laterally. Fenestra ovale and foramen nervi octavi sunk in deep fossee. Vomers entirely separated from maxillaries, not produced, but separated by a groove behind. Palatines with a short maxillary process. Palatine foramen moderate ; pterygoids divaricating from each other outwards. Ectopterygoid produced downwards at the posterointernal angle. Pterygoids grooved from basipterygoids backwards on internal side. Quadrate with two conchs, the internal one flat. The epistapedial cartilage is largely ossified. Presphenoid a slender rod ; sphenoid and basioccipital confluent. Oc- cipital condyle with exoccipital elements slightly marked above. In the mandible Meckel’s cartilage is completely enclosed. The splenial is produced but little beyond the splenial foramen. Coronoid extended a little anteriorly at base on external face of ramus; and a little further on the inner side. Dentary extending as far back as coronoid. Articular and surangular distinct. The premaxillary and anterior maxillary teeth are simple; the other maxillaries have two or three denticles anteriorly and one posteriorly. In the dentary bone the teeth (except in front) have two denticles on each edge. The hyoid apparatus displays a pair of parallel but separate second ceratobranchials about half as long as the first ceratobranchials. Cerato- hyals slightly expanded proximally, articulated at end of moderately long hypobyals. The vertebre display a zygosphenal articulation. Five cervicals dis- play free intercentra, and four of them have no ribs, Ribs extending to sacrum. The two sacral centra and diapophyses are distinct, but the second diapophysis has a median longitudinal groove. Caudal centra of the distal half of the tail segmented, and possessed for the middle of the length of double diapophyses, between which the fissure passes, Diapo- physes long on basal third of tail, Neural spines low everywhere ; on the caudal vertebra they stand at the posterior end, and send a keel to a ee 1892.] 205 [Cope. the anterior end, where it is elevated into a low anterior spine. Chevron bones intercentral. Four sternal ribs and two from the xiphoid rod. Scapula very short, with a large superior proscapula. Coracoid with two notches. Sternum wide and emarginate posteriorly, spreading the xiphoid rods far apart. No fontanelie. Pelvis with the pubis transverse and the pectineal process external. Ischia rather slender, with a short symphysis, and each with a long tuber- osity. This genus is remarkable for the combination of characters it displays. The zygosphenal articulation allies it to Dipsosaurus and the larger Ig- uanidse, but the separated ceratobranchials, and the wide sternum are like that of the Phrynosomas, with the exception of the funtanelles. The transverse pubes have a similar significance. SceLororus Wiegmann. Asa basis for an examination of the osteology of this genus I have before me two skeletons of the S. wndulatus and one of the 8. spinosus, from the National Museum. The premaxillary bone has a long superior spine, and is truncate on the palatal face, and has the button-like process. The nostrils are partially vertical so that the nasals are a little shortened in front. The latter are rather large and are distinct. The frontal is simple and narrow, and is strongly grooved on the middle line below. The parietal is short and wide, and is perforated by a large pineal foramen which touches the coronal sature. Parietoquadrate arch distinct. Supraoccipital broadly but loosely attached, confluent with exoccipitals. Prefrontals large, not reaching postfrontals above; lachrymal small and joining jugal. Postfrontal a small splint ; postorbital large, extensively in contact with jugal and supra- temporal. Paroccipital small. Vomers short, divaricate and separated by a deep notch behind. Palatine with the vomerine process longer than the maxillary ; palatine foramen large. Palatines and pterygoids well separated from each other on the middle line ; ectopterygoid deflected at its internal extremity. Basipterygoids developed. Quadrate with two conchs, the internal the narrower. Presphenoid rudimental ; sphenoid and basioccipital codssified ; descending lateral processes of the latter strongly developed. The supraforaminal part of the petrosal is very short; the infraforaminal portion is produced beyond it and is nearly hor- izontal in position. The foramen nervi octavi is at the bottom of a fossa. Epipterygoid resting on pterygoid much posterior to ectopterygoid and reaching parietal without touching petrosal. Occipital condyle not sub- divided by grooves. - The hyoid system includes a pair of well-separated short second cerato- branchials, and rather long and slender first ceratobranchials and cerato- hyals, which have no expansions. Hypobranchials moderate, supporting ceratohyals at extremities. Mandible with Meckel’s cartilage exposed at the distal part. Coronoid Cope.] 206 [March 18, not horizontally produced on external face. Articular and surangular united. Splenial moderately elongate ; dentary extending behind coro- noid on external face and deeply notched. Angle short, horizontal, with short internal angle. Five cervicals with intercentra in 8S. undulatus and six in S. spinosus ; three without ribs in both. Ribs extending to sacrum. Sacral centra not codssified. Sacral diapophyses coéssified dis- tally ; the second with a posterior free angle distally. Caudal diapophyses well developed at base of tail. From about the eighth caudal the centra are segmented in front of the middle. Scapula with proscapular process ; coracoid with one notch. Sternum with a very large fontanelle. Two ribs join the sternal plate ; one comes off the base of the xiphoid rod, and two articulate with the latter ; total, five pairs. The ilium has a small angulus criste, and the acetabulum is not emarginate bchind. The pubes are nearly transverse, and the pecti- neal angle is external. The ischia are rather slender, and the tuber is an angle. The middle and posterior teeth are feebly tridentate; the others are simple. é Parynosoma Wiegmann. The following account of the osteology is derived from the skeletons of three species, the P. douglassii, P. cornutum and P. coronatum. The de- scription applies equally to each of these species unless otherwise stated. The premaxillary has a very short alveolar portion which does not bound the nostrils below (or very little P. coronatum). It has a superior spine and concave palatal border. The nasals are distinct and are exca- vated in front by the large nareal openings. The frontal is single, is much narrowed in front by the prefrontals, but extends transversely pos- terior to the orbits, where it sends forwards an acute process in the super- ciliary angle. The prefrontal is large and extends posteriorly to or be- yond the middle of the supraorbital border. It sends posteriorly an acute superciliary process, which meets that of the frontal from behind, over the eye in P. cornutum ; does not quite meet it in P. coronatum, and fails to meet it by a longer interval in P. douglassit. The lachrymal is small and is not reached by the anterior angle of the jugal. The parietal is broad and short, and the pineal foramen pierces it at the coronal suture, Its lateral border is very little decurved to meet the petrosal. Its strong parietoquadrate arch supports a horn or tuberosity, and in most of the species the middle of the posterior border supports the same. The occipital is broadly articulated with the parietal in P. douglassii and P. coronatum ; in the former loosely, in the latter closely. In P. cornutum it affords a narrow but firm support for the parietal. Paroccipital small, visible from behind. The postfrontal is visible asa rudiment in P. douw- glaseti, but it is apparently codssified in the two other species. The post- orbital is slender, expanding below for union with jugal and supratem- poral. The former bears two sharp tuberosities in P. coronatum, aud the supratemporal two, In P. cornutum there is none on the jugal but there soe 5892.] 207 ropa) are three on the supratemporal ; and in P. douglassii the arrangement is similar. Owing to the inferior position of the supratemporal, the quad- rate is oblique forwards and downwards. It presents one conch, the ex- ternal. The vomers are short, and are separated from each other for the posterior half or more of their length by a hiatus, which continues pos- teriorly of about equal width between the palatine and pterygoid pairs. The latter are short, wide and flat, and the palatine foramen is small ; least and oval in P. coronatum ; small and round in P. cornutum ; larger and elongate in P. dowglassii. The ectopterygoid is decurved at its inner extremity. The presphenoid is wanting, and the suture between the sphenoid and the basioccipital is persistent. The supraforaminal part of the petrosal is very short, and the infraforaminal part is not much pro- duced, and hasa wide inferior groove. The epipterygoid originates be- | hind the ectopterygoid process, and has the peculiarity among Iguanidee of not reaching the parietal, but of resting on the anterior border of the petrosal. The occipital condyle shows traces of its tripartite composition. The postoptic is curved and simple and does not reach the frontal bone. The latter is grooved on the middle line below. The groove of Meckel’s cartilage is open throughout in P. cornutum and P. coronatum and distally only in P. dowglassii. The coronoid is not produced horizontally on the external face of the mandible, and the den- tary is not produced beyond its posterior border. This element has a re- flected inferior border in the P. cornutwm which is acutely dentate posterior to the middle ; characters absent from P. coronatum and P. douglassit, In P. douglassii the surangular is not coéssified with the articular, while it is so united in the other two species. The angle is short, and is directed downwards and obliquely inwards. The basihyal is wide and is ossified, and the second ceratobranchials are very short and widely separated. The hypohyals are short and carry the ceratohyals on their extremities. No expansions of lateral elements. The vertebree have no zygosphen articulation, but the prezygapophy- seal facet is carried upon the side of the neurapophysis at an angle with the usual position. This furnishes the initial step in the production of a zygosphen. I find five cervical intercentra in P. cornutum and P. corona- twm, and six in P. douglassii, exclusive of the intercentrum of the atlas, which has no hypapophysis. Ribs extend to the sacrum, and are attached to very short diapophyses. The two sacral diapophyses are separated by a wide fissure in the P. coronatwm and P. douglassii, but are closely ap- pressed in P. cornutum. On one side of the skeleton of P. douglassii the last lumbar vertebra carries, abnormally, a third sacral diapophysis which reaches the ilium. Proximal part of caudal vertebre with long diapophyses. Caudal centra not segmented. Chevron bones intercen- tral, not wniting distally. Neural spines everywhere very low, those of the caudal vertebre single. The suprascapula is exceptionally elongate, and the scapula is of mod- erate length and has a proscapular process. The coracoid has one emar- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOC. xxx. 138. 2A. PRINTED MAY 6, 1892. Cope.] 208 " [March 18, gination. The interclavicle is remarkable for the shortness of its poste- rior limb, which is shorter than the transverse limb in P. cornutum and P. douglassii, and equal to it in P. coronatum. The sternum has a very © large fontanelle which approaches the posterior border. In P. coronatum and PF. douglassii three ribs articulate with the sternum, but in P. cornu- tum two only in my skeleton. The xiphoid rods are widely separated, and carry but one rib. j The ilium has a short angulus criste, and the acetabulum is entire. The pubis and ischium are slender and transverse in position, and ap- proach nearly at their symphyses, which are connected by a short, narrow cartilage. The pectineal process is obsolete, while the tuber ischii is a prominent angle. Two peculiarities. especially distinguish this genus among Iguanide : first, the connection of the epipterygoid with the petrosal; and, second, the absence of symphysis of the chevron bones. The characters of the sternum are an extreme of what is seen in Sceloporus. GERRHONOTUS Wiegm. A skeleton of the G. multicarinatus from the U. 8. National Museum, furnishes the material for an osteology of this genus. The premaxillary has a well-developed spine and a truncate palatal border. Its alveolar border is short, and it forms but a small part of the inferior nareal border. Nasal bones not short in front, rather nar- rowed by the mavxillary and prefontals on each side. Frontal narrow, single, partly enclosing olfactory lobes of the brain below, but the in- curved lateral walls not touching. Parietal with small pineal foramen far behind coronal suture. Supraoccipital loosely articulated, and sepa- rated by suture from exoccipitals. Prefrontal not tuberiferous, produced posterior to middle of supraorbital border. Postfrontal crescentic equally united with frontal and parietal. Postorbital splint-shaped, with very slight contact with the jugal, and long contact with the supratemporal. Jugal slender, reaching anteriorly the small lachrymal. Paroccipital nar- rowly exposed posteriorly, well produced upwards on the distinct parieto- quadrate arch. Quadrate with one deeply excavated conch, which is external. Vomersin close apposition in front, separated by a fissure poste- riorly ; the anterior portion excavated medially. -Pulatines descending from the plane of the vomers, the vomerine and maxillary processes about equal; main plate rather narrow. Palatine foramen large. Pterygoid contracting gradually into posterior slender portion ; basiptery- goid well developed. Presphenoid wanting. Sphenoid and basioccipital separated by suture; descending tuberosities of the latter strong, com- pressed. Epipterygoid originating below opposite basipterygoid ; above resting on anterior process of petrosal, and touching parietal just behind an obtuse descending angle of the decurved border of the same. Sub- foramina! portion of petrosal shorter than supraforaminal portion, en- — a ae 1892.] 209 [Cope. closing a very narrow down-looking groove. Basioccipital and exoccipitals coéssified ; condyle small, simple. Meckel’s canal closed except distally, where it is open on the wnder side of the ramus. Coronoid developed anteriorly on external face of ramus, the dentary not reaching behind its anterior border. Splenial elongate, partly external ; angular mostly external; surangular confluent with articular. Angle horizontal incurved with rounded border and concave superior surface. Hyoid apparatus displays no second and rather short first ceratobran- chials. Hypohyal rather long, the ceratohyal extending a little beyond its extremity, and widened at the posterior third. A free epibranchial which has a bifurcate anterior extremity at that of the ceratohyal, and extends posteriorly but little behind the ceratobranchial. Five cervical intercentra, and two cervicals besides atlas without ribs. The odontoid is coéssified with the axis. Ribs extend to sacrum. Sacral diapophyses distinct from each other. Dorsal vertebrae without zygosphen, prezygapophyseal facets not continued on neural arch. Caudal diapo- physes present; centra of middle region segmented through them ; chevron bones intercentral. Neural spines low, higher on caudal region. Suprascapula much larger than scapula; no proscapula. One large coracoid notch. Sternum without fontanelle, with three ribs and two attached to xiphoid rod. Ilium without prominent angulus criste; acetabulum entire; pubes uniting at an acute angle; pectineal angle medium. Ischia with promi- nent tuber. CNEMIDOPHORUS Wiegmann. For characters of the skeleton I have three individuals of the C. tessel- latus from my own, and one of the C. sexlineatus from the National collection. The alveolar portion of the premaxillary is prominent, and is marked off from that of the maxillary bone by a shallow emargination on each side. The superior spine is long, and the palatal border is deeply emarginate to receive the narrow anterior production of the vomers. The nasals are distinct and rather elongate, although encroached on in front by the enlarged nostrils. The frontal is single and is rather narrow. The parietal is without pineal foramen in the adult. The parietoquadrate arch is well elevated, and is braced below by the small paroccipital. The supraoccipital is in close con- tact with the parietal by its middle portion, and it is distinct from the exoccipital by suture. The prefrontal does not extend above the orbit ; the lacbrymal is smaller, but rather large, and forms a suture with the jugal. The postfrontal is wanting, being fused with the postorbital. The latter is produced downwards and has a longer suture with the supratemporal than with the narrow jugal. The quadrate has an external conch only. The vomers are elongate and are in contact throughout, but each is swollen on the middle line so that they are divided by a 210 [March 18, Cope.] groove along their common suture. The nareal fissure is long and narrow, and is contracted anteriorly, and then enlarged foramen-like at the anterior extremity. The vomerine branch of the palatines is longer than the maxillary branch; the pterygoid branch is not very wide, and the pala- tine foramen is of moderate size. The ectopterygoid is rather wide and has an anterior suture with the palatine bone as well as with the maxil- lary ; it is deflected posteriorly. Pterygoid moderately expanded ante- riorly and contracting gradually; the posterior portion but slightly grooved, and attached to the basipterygoid process by its entire width, and not by the groove only. Presphenoid rudimental ; sphenoid distin- guished from basioccipital by suture; the latter with descending com- pressed lateral processes. Petrosal with a short presemicircular process, and a long subforaminal process ; the latter presenting an open groove downwards. Inferior face of frontal grooved; postoptic not reaching frontal, triradiate, the two superior limbs shorter than the inferior. Epipterygoid arising opposite ectopterygoid and in contact with a de- scending lateral process of the parietal and not touching petrosal. The hyoid apparatus is distinguished, like that of other Tiide, by the great prolongation of the hypohyals anterior to the point of attachment of the ceratohyals. No second ceratobranchials or free epibranchials. In the mandible the Meckelian groove is closed except at the distal por- tion. The coronoid is produced far anteriorly and not at all posteriorly on the external face, and the dentary does not extend much beyond the tooth line. Surangular distinct; angle horizontal, expanded, and forming an angle inwards. A distinct masseteric fossa, bounded below by the angular. Splenial elongate, extending far anterior to the splenial foramen. Teeth with the crowns moderately compressed and unequally bicuspid ; those of premaxillary and adjacent part of maxillary bone and correspond- ing part of mandible, simple. Dorsal vertebre with zygosphen. In both C. tessellatus and C. sexlinea- tus there are five cervical intercentra besides that of the atlas, and the first rib is on the third or fourth vertebra. Two sacral diapophy- ses, both robust. Neural spines distinct, moderate, highest in the caudal series ; ribs extending to sacrum. Diapophyses very short except in cau- dal region, where they extend for a considerable part of the length, origi- nating posterior to the middle of the centrum, On the distal part of the caudal series there is an additional short spine-like diapophysis in front of the normal one, and the centrum is segmented between the two, The segmentation disappears anteriorly with the disappearance of this pre- diapophysis. Chevrons intercentral. The suprascapula is of moderate dimensions and extends to the summit of the neural spine. Scapula elongate, and with a large proscapula. Coracoid with two deep notches. Interclavicle with a very long median limb, which is wide at the base and which covers an elongate oval median fontanelle. Three sternal ribs, and two attached to the xiphoid rod. Tlium with a prominent angulus cristw#, Acetabulum entire; pubis di- 1892.) 211 [Cope. rected anteriorly at an acute angle, with median pectineal angle. Ischia directed vertically downwards, with angulus tuberosus, and pre- and post- ischiadic acuminate cartilages. It is remarkable that in the large species of the allied genus Tupinambis the proscapular process is wanting. XANTUSIIDA. In addition to the characters which I have previously given, Mr. Bou- lenger states (Catal. Brit. Mus.) that the sternum is without fontanelle. I find the hyoid apparatus has characters somewhat similar to those of the Lacertide. The ceratohyals and second ceratobranchials are both present and there is a well-developed free epibranchial. Its proximal end overlaps the distal end of the second ceratobranchial. It passes round the extremity of the first ceratobranchial and extends forwards. In Lepidophyma it has the peculiarity, which I have not seen in any other lizard, of being inserted on the lateral process of the basioccipital. In Xantusia riversiana (Plate vi, Fig. 41) it terminates before reaching this point. In Lepidophyma it displays a concave expansion as it passes the extremity of the first ceratobranchial, in which lies the helicoid cartilag- inous extremity of the latter. In neither genus are the hypohyals pro- longed with the ceratohyals, as in Anguide, nor beyond them as in the Tiide. The stapedial disk in Lepidophyma is not sunk in a canal as in the Ig- uanide and some other Lacertilia. The columella is slender, and termi- nates in the interstapedial cartilage. This supports an oblique cartilaginous rod, one end of which (suprastapedial) is attached to the osseous wall above, and the other longer one (epistapedia}) is in contact by a flat sur- face of its extremity with the membranum tympani (Plate v, Fig. 26). The remarkable characters of the skull in Xantusia are described under the head of that genus. Bocourt (Mission Sci. de Mewxique, Pl. xxg, Fig. 2), represents a probably similar structure in Lepidophyma. XAanrTusia Baird. My knowledge of the osteology of this genus is derived from the X. riversiana, specimens of which I owe to my friend, Dr. J. J. Rivers, of Oakland, Cal. The os premazillare has an elongate spine above and a nearly transverse posterior border below. Nasals well developed, distinct. Frontal single, grooved below. Parietal single, without pineal foramen, produced poste- riorly so as to overhang the occipital bone and foramen magnum ; being connected with the former by a median keel which it sends downwards. The supraoccipital is subhorizontal and is not articulated in the usual way with the parietal, having only the median contact above mentioned. It is codssified with the exoccipitals. The prefrontal is small and is not produced far over the orbit. Lachrymal absent. Jugal with the super- Cope.] 212 [March 18, posterior limb expanded. Postfrontal and postorbital fused into a trian- gular bone which bounds the parietal externally, thus, with the supra- temporal, roofing over the temporal fossa. Supratemporal in contact throughout with the parietal except where separated by the narrow splint of a paroccipital. Quadrate with one, a large external conch. Vomers closely juxtaposed throughout, codssified anteriorly, the median por- tion of the two elements with an excavation. Nareal orifices nearly — closed except posteriorly, where the vomerine process of the palatine overarches them. The latter are in contact in front but soon spread apart. Maxillary processes rather shorter than vomerine, depressed be- low them. Pterygoids narrow throughout, not wider than palatines, their posterior part with a groove which looks upwards and inwards. Basipterygoids overlapping their entire internal face. Ectopterygoids wide, reducing the palatine foramen to a mere slit ; with a considerable contact with the palatine, and a recurved portion in contact with the ex- tremity of the maxillary ; the internal extremity depressed. No presphe- noid ; sphenoid separated by suture from basioccipital, whose lateral pro- cesses are compressed and decurved. The postoptic bone seems to be wanting. The petrosal is well produced beyond the semicircular canal, and is equally produced below the trigeminal foramen, where it joins a backwards directed process of the basipterygoid. The groove below it is well defined and looks downwards. The epipterygoid rises at the basi- pterygoid and rests on the anterior border of the petrosal and the poste- rior border of the well-marked descending process of the parietal. Fen- estra ovale not sunk in the fundus of a fossa. The mandible is remarkable in having but three bones. The articular, angular and surangular are codssified, and the splenial and dentary. The coronoid has little horizontal production on the outside of the ramus, and the angle of the dentary extends considerably posterior to it. The Mecke- lian groove is entirely closed. The hyoid apparatus is described under the head of the genus Xantusia, There is no zygosphen. There are six cervical intercentra besides that of the atlas. The cervical ribs commence on the fourth vertebra. Four of these ribs are of peculiar form, being expanded and truncate at the extremity so as to be somewhat fan-shaped. Neural spines rather low on the cervical and caudal regions, and lower on the dorsal vertebrae. Cau- dal vertebrw segmented towards the anterior part, the fissure passing through the middle of the diapophyses. Neural spine single, oblique, posterior; chevron bones normal. Suprascapula short and wide; scapula without proscapula. Coracoid with one notch; sternum without fontanelle. Interclavicle with moder- ate posterior limb. Sterna) ribs three; xiphoid rods not juxtaposed, supporting two ribs. No abdominal ribs. Pubes meeting at about a right angle; pectineal angles near the mid- die, decurved. Pubis with tuber exterior. [lium without angulus criste ; acetabulum entire. he oe “il Le 1892.] 213 [Cope. The teeth have compressed tridentate crowns; those of the premaxil- lary bone are not conic, but have also compressed crowns, where traces of denticles are sometimes apparent. The remarkable features in the osteology of this genus are (1) the peculiar relations between the parietal and supraoccipital bones, which resemble the structure seen in a sea-turtle; (2) the wide ectopterygoid ; (3) the absence of lachrymal ; (4) the presence of only three mandibular elements. The affinities are a mixture of those of the Lacertide and Scincide ; the large pustfrontal bones; the descending processes of the parietals, and the form of the pubes, resembling the corresponding parts in the latter family. The expanded cervical ribs resemble those of the Gecconid genus Phyllodactylus. The relations of the parietal and occip- ital bones are quite different from those found in the Lacertide and Anguide (Gerrhonotus, Celestus, Ophisaurus), where the temporal fosse are also roofed over. In these forms the contact is normal, @. e¢., by the elevated median portion of the anterior border of the occipital. EumMeEces Wiegmann. For the determination of the skeletal characters of this genus I have skeletons of the Z. obsoletus and H. fasciaius, from the National collec- ‘tion. The premaxillary is split as in other Scincids, and the halves are in the closest contact. The common spine is rather elongate, while the palatal suture is simply emarginate. The nasals are not shortened, and are dis- tinct. The frontal is double, and is simply grooved on the middle line below. The parietal is single, and is pierced by the pineal foramen at about its middle. The parietoquadrate arch is well elevated. The supraoccipital is loosely articulated, presenting a truncate median pro- cess towards, but not to, a median notch of the parietal. Exoccipital dis- tinct by suture. Prefrontal rather large, not sending posteriorly a super- ciliary process, and not produced far above the orbit. Lachrymal small ; not, or very little visible on external facial surface, and reached by a long internal process of the jugal. External surface of jugal separated widely from prefrontal, its postorbital portion much longer, slender, and rising to meet the postfrontal. The latter is large and unequally V-shaped, the posterior limb broad and covering the temporal fossa between tbe parietal and sup:atemporal bones, with more or less of a fissure next the parietal posteriorly. Postfrontal a splint separating the jugal and supratemporal from the postfrontal. Supratemporal well produced anteriorly, and in contact with the parietoquadrate arch for the posterior two-thirds the length of the latter. Quadrate with one, a deep external conch. The vomers are elongate, and also expanded laterally, passing above the prominent palatine laminw of the maxillary bones. They are in close apposition on the median line, but are so swollen longitudinally as to leave a groove at the common suture. The longitudinal ribs terminate in a pair of appressed hooks which look downwards and backwards at the posterior extremities of the bones. The vomerine branch of the palatine Cope.] 214 [March 18, is not quite as long as the maxillary branch, and is on a superior plane, being in close contact with its mate on the middle line, and forming with the maxillary plate a half tube opening inwards. Pterygoids not very wide, gradually narrowing to the posterior rod which is openly grooved on the inner side. The basipterygoid processes overlap the entire width of the internal face. Ectopterygoid reaching maxillary and jugal, but not palatine ; little deflected posteriorly. Presphenoid not ossified ; sphenoid distinguished from basioccipital by suture. Latter with subconic descending lateral processes, which enclose a deep fossa on the external side. Postoptic small, simple, crescentic. Petrosal extended well in advance of semicircular canal above ; subforaminal portion still more produced bounding a down-looking open groove. Parietal sending downwards a rather elongate process in front of petrosal. Epipterygoid originating opposite basipterygoid below, and resting above on the descending pro- cess of the parietal and the anterior margin of the petrosal. Occipital condyle tripartite. Meckel’s cartilage exposed from the anteriorly placed splenial foramen. Coronovid a little produced auteriorly on external face of ramus, not at all posteriorly. Surangular and articular distinct ; angle flat, rounded, not produced or angular inwards. Dentary produced as far posteriorly as coronoid ; splenial rather elongate (forming the inferior border of Meckel’s groove in Z. obsoletus). In the hyoid system, HZ. fasciatus presents a short second cerato- - branchial. The first ceratobranchial has a cartilaginous terminal seg- ment, as has also the ceratohyal. The latter is of moderate length, 1s without expansions, and is articulated with the extremity of the rather short hypobranchial. There is a large free epibranchial, which com- mences near the free extremity of the second ceratobranchial, and curv- ing backwards, outwards and then forwards, terminates nearly opposite the middle of the ceratohyal. The cervical intercentra in the 2. obsoletuws number four, and those of the Z. fasciatus three, posterior to that of the atlas, There is no zygos- phen. The caudal diapophyses are well developed at the base of the series, and are split lengthwise at the middle and distal part of the series by the segmentation of the vertebra. Neural spine single at posterior extremity of neural arch, The suprascapula is expanded anteroposteriorly, and the scapula is rather elongate. The latter has no proscapula, while the coronoid has one emargination, The sternum has a small fontanelle posteriorly placed, There are three costal articulations and a xiphoid rod with two ribs. The latter is in close apposition to its mate, and is expanded out- wards at the junction of the first hemapophysis. The ilium has no angulus crista, and the acetabulum is entire. The pubes converge at a subacute angle, and the small pectineal process is nearer the proximal extremity, and is turned downwards. The ischia are subtransverse, and present a wide emargination posteriorly, since the processus tuberosus is near the acetabulum, Ee ee ee ee 1892.] 215 [Cope. Besides the family characters, this genus is well distinguished among American lizards by the divided frontal ; the overroofing the temporal fossa by the postfrontal and supratemporal ; the descending process of the parietal ; forms of the xiphoid rods, and forms of the pelvic bones. ANNIELLA Gray. My observations on this genus are based on specimens from San Diego, Cal., presented to me by my friend, James 8. Lippincott. The premaxillary has an elongate spine, and the palatal suture pre- sents backwards two concavities separated by a median projection. The nasals are distinct and rather short and wide. The frontals are dis- tinct and rather wide. The parietal is very large everyway, is single, and has no pineal foramen. The supraoccipital forms a close suture with it, sending forwards a median process for internal gomphosis, and an angle on each side of it. It is cotssified with the exoccipital, and is expanded to accommodate the large circle of the superior semicircular canal.. The facial plate of the maxillary is large. The prefrontal is above the eye, and is cut off from the postfrontal by an entrant angle only. The lachrymal is small, and is below and separated from the prefrontal. No jugal. Postfrontal crescentic, bounded by both frontal and parietal. Postorbital a caducous scale lying in contact with the posterior limb of the postfrontal. Petrosal with its superior border in close contact with the decurved lateral borders of the parietal, as in a snake, The latter do not, however, descend to the presphenoid, but leave a wide fissure below it which deeply notches the anterior border of the petrosal. Supraforaminal part of petrosal produced to an acute angle, terminating at the parietal border much in advance of the anterior semicircular canal. Body of petrosal perforated by a large foramen just in front of the superior part of the quadrate. No parietoquadrate arch, but a posteroexternal angle of the parietal extending near to the proxi- mal extremity of the quadrate. No distinct supratemporal or paroccipi- tal. Stapes with large disk and short stout columella, with thickened tympanic extremity. Vomers continuous anteriorly, slightly divergent posteriorly ; excavated by a deep groove posteriorly, which terminates in a fossa medially. The external borders of the posterior apices are turned outwards so as to enclose partially the posterior nares below. The pala- tines are short, the groove separating the maxillary from the vomerine processes extending to the suture with the pterygoid, so that the maxil- lary process only appears as the inferior face of the bone. Pterygoids elongated anteriorly, reaching to beyond the middle of the palatine fora- men. They extend directly back to the quadrates, being well separated on the middle line, and abruptly notched on the inner side to receive the short angular basipterygoids. They are separated from the sphenoid by a fissure, and are grooved on the inner side posterior to the basipterygoid. Ectopterygoids present, rather slender, enclosing rather large palatine PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 8O0C. xxx. 188.2 B. PRINTED MAY 24, 1892. Cope. ] 216 [March 18, foramina. No epipterygoid. Nareal fissure overhung by the free edge of the maxillary and palatine bones. Sphenoid and basioccipital and ex- occipital codssified. Occipital condyle convex and perfectly simple. The mandible has an open Meckclian groove, and the surangular and articular bones are codssified, while the angular and splenial bones are dis- tinct. The latter extends well anteriorly. The coronoid extends a little forwards on the exterior face of the ramus, and in both directions on the inner face. The hyoid apparatus is the most simple among lizards. It consists of a continuous cartilaginous glossobasihyal rod, which is bifurcated poste- riorly ; and a simple osseous first branchihyal, attached to each of the branches. Other elements wanting. Ten cervical vertebree with compressed inferior processes of the centra or hypapophyses. They are coissified with the centra, and are not inter- central in position, hence it is not evident that they are intercentra. No zygosphen. In the Anniella pulchra there are seventy-three rib-bear- ing vertebre, and two cervicals without ribs. The sacral and proximal caudal vertebre have diapophyses, those of the furmer little different from those of the latter. The fifth vertebra with a diapophysis supports a pair of parallel plates coissified with its inferior face like the chevron or double hypapophysis of a snake. In the succeeding vertebre similar plates form the basis of a chevron, whose symphysis is turned rather ab- ruptly posteriorly. The position of these chevrons is central and not intercentral. Caudal vertebre not segmented. Scapular elements,and fore limb wanting. Pelvicarch represented by a pair of slender simple bones which lie near the extremities of the last ribs, one on each side of the vent, They are slightly curved, and are well separated in front. They are very similar to the bones which occupy the same position in the Amphisbeenide, and are probably the iliopectineal bones of Fiirbringer. Teeth simple, acutely conic. The affinities of the Anniellids, as indicated by the above description, are interesting. When I first, in 1864,* pointed out the cranial peculiari- ties of the genus Anniella, I created for it a distinct family, which I asso- ciated with the Acontiide and Anelytropside. Subsequently, in 1887,+ I proposed for it a still more independent position, making it the type of a special superfamily, which I called the Anguisauri; a course which had been already adopted by Gill a short time previously,{ who proposed for it the superfamily of the Annielloidea. The further knowledge of its structure above recorded brings out more clearly its true position. This is, I think, in the Annulati or Amphisbenia. The characters which indicate this reference are: (1) The continuity of the parietal with the petrosal and supraoccipital elements. (2) The absence of epipterygoid. (3) The absence of ceratohyal elements, (4) The hypopophyses of the * Proceedings Academy Philada,, 1864, p. 230, ? Bullet. U. 8. Natl, Museum No. 82, p. 25, 1887, } Smithsonian Report, 1886, The Progress of Zoblogy for 1885, p. 40, a — 1892.] 217 [Cope. cervical vertebree which are continuous with the centra. (5) The par- tially open chevron bones, which are also continuous with the centra. (6) The sublongitudinal ileopectineal bone and absence of other pelvic elements. There is agreement in various subordinate features, as the single pre- maxillary, double frontal, and single parietal; and the absence of supra- temporal bone ; also the fusion of the surangular and articular bones. There are some differences to be noted. Thus, in some of the Amphisbe- nia at least, there is apparently an orbitosphenoid bone, which is wanting in Anniella, The pterygoid is more closely adherent to the basis cranii in the Amphisbeenia, and there is no palatine foramen, which is present in Anniella. The splenial is of full size in Anniella and the Meckelian groove is open. In the Amphisbeenia the groove is closed and the splen- ial is much reduced. The presence of scales, the papillose tongue and the distinct tegumentary eye fissure, with the characters above cited, define the Anniellidx as a very distinct family of the Amphisbeenia. RAINEURA Cope. A specimen of the R. floridana Baird from Volusia, Fla., furnishes the characters of the skeleton. ; The alveolar border of the premaxillary is very short, and supports only one, a median tooth. The spine is divided into two portions, that below the projecting angle of the muzzle and that above it. The former is contracted a little by a process of the maxillary which enters from the alveolar portion, separating it from the nostril, which is inferior in posi- tion. It then expands a little, to form on the upper side of the muzzle a terminal expansion twice as wide as long. The nasals are distinct, and extend to the border of the muzzle, overroofing the nostrils. Frontals wide, distinct, deeply emarginate posteriorly for the parietal. Prefrontal rather large, triangular, sending its apex posteriorly over the orbit and reaching the parietal. Its free border and a narrow band of the parietal form a crista temporalis, which do not unite on the middle line into a crista sagittalis. Parietal single, without pineal foramen, continuous lat- erally with the petrosal and alisphenoid, and posteriorly with the supra- occipital, from which it receives on the middle line a gomphosis. Supra- occipital bounding foramen magnum, of which it forms a rather narrow border. A small triangular bone at the extremity of the maxillary may be a jugal ora lachrymal. The alisphenoid and petrosal form the inferior part of the side walls of the brain case, and are separated from the ptery- goids and presphenoid below them by a narrow fissure which is widest below the petrosal. ‘The latter sends an angle upwards and backwards be- tween the parietal and exoccipital. The exoccipital sends a prolongation (paroccipital ?) downwards and forwards, which gives articulation to the quadrate, bounding the fenestra ovale above. The latter is large and is closed by the large disk of the stapes. The quadrate has no posterior Cope.] 218 [March 18, proximal process, and is oblique proximally, but is more nearly vertical distally. In its posterior angle rests the club-shaped head of the robust columella auris. The vomer presents as its anterior extremity a process which separates a transverse process from each maxillary, and enters a notch in the poste- rior border of the premaxillary. The vomers are plane in front but become convex and separated by a fissure posteriorly, ending each in an acumi- nate apex lying on the presphenoid. The palatine is narrow and lies along the inner side of the ectopterygoid, consisting chiefly of its maxillary process ; it is doubtful whether it possesses a vomerine process. Posteri- orly it lies scale-like on the pterygoid, reaching nearly to the line of the quadrate (Pl. i, Fig. 5, B pl.). The nareal fissure is nearly closed ante- riorly, except a foramen-like portion at the anterior extremity. The pre- sphenoid, sphenoid and basioccipital are codéssified. To these the ptery- goid is closely appressed by the one side, while on the outer side the latter carries the narrow splint-like ectopterygoid as far as the maxillary. No palatine foramen. Occipital condyle simple, transverse, ‘medially con- cave, The mandible displays no Meckelian groove, and the splenial is small. The small angular is only visible on the internal side of the ramus. Sur- angular and articular confluent. Coronoid large, triangular, not concave below, and overlaid at base externally by anterior extremity of surangu- Jar; anteriorly not extended over dentary. Angle short, longer than wide, a little inflected, simple; its plane an angle of 45° to that of the ramus, The hyoid apparatus is very simple. It consists of a glossobasihyal car- tilage which is deeply bifurcate posteriorly. At the posterior extremity each posterior limb sends a process forwards, which is about half as long as the anterior elements, the hypohyal. No ceratohyal nor second cerato- branchial. A rather short and simple osseous first ceratobranchial on each side. The vertebral column consists of many cervico-dorsals and a relatively small number of caudals. The second vertebra has a strong keel-like hypapophysis, which is also strong on the third, but which diminishes from that point so that on the sixth it is no longer perceptible. The first rib is short and is attached to the third vertebra. Diapophyses and neu- ral spines very short. The ribs do not display a vertical process at the head as in Lepidosternum octostegum. Diapophyses very short and simple on caudal vertebre, Caudal hypapophyses commencing on the anterior fourth of the caudal series, at first the halves widely separated. They soon converge downwards, and finally touch, but are never codssified to form a chevron, Position on the middle of the length of the centrum, Rib-bearing vertebre without trace of zygosphen. Scapular arch absent, Pelvic arch represented by a single curved rod on each side of and anterior to the vent, which is connected with the extremities of two ribs by ligament only. This is the ileopectineal bone of Firbringer. No trace of posterior limb, 1892.] : 219 [Cope. Teeth simple, conic; situated on premaxillary, maxillary and dentary bones only. Premaxillary with but one, a median tooth. The genus Lepidosternum, as typified by the L. octostegum, differs from Rhineura in that the nasal bones are excluded from the nareal borders by the maxillary, and from contact with each other by the prolonged spine of the premaxillary. In both of these points Rhineura agrees with Amphisbena. In Lepidosternum also there is a Meckelian groove, and the angle is turned vertically downwards. In Amphisbena ( fuliginosa) there is a groove and no angle. Puate II. Figs. 1-3. Feylinia currorit Gray ; X 2; from Gaboon, West Africa ; specimen in Museum Academy Natl. Sciences, Philadelphia. Fig. 1. Skull, three views ; 2, skeleton of pectoral region ; 3, skeleton of sacro-pelvic region. Fig. 4. Anniella pulchra Gray ; skull, x 3; from San Diego, California; from specimen in my private collection presented by Mr. James §, Lippincott. Fig. 5. Rhineura floridana Baird ; skull, x 3; from Volusia, Fla.; from specimen in my private collection from Mrs. A. D. Lungren. The principal characters of the osteology of the Feylinia and Anniella are described in Proceeds. Academy Philadelphia, 1864, pp. 228-230 ; and the pelvic arch of the latter and of Rhineura in a paper now in press in the American Journal of Morphology. Additional characters of all the above furms are described in the preceding pages. Lettering.—Pmz., premaxillary ; V., Nasal; /, frontal; P., parietal ; So., supraoccipital ; Mz., Maxillary ; Pef., prefrontal ; Z., lachrymal ; J/., jugal; Pof:, postfrontal; Pob., postorbital ; Pyfd., postfrontodrbital ; St., supratemporal ; Puo., paroccipital ; Ho., exoccipital ; 0s., orbitosphenoid ; Pop., postoptic ; Hpg., epipterygoid; Pe., petrosal; Q., quadrate; St., stapes; V., vomer; Pl., palatine; Py., pterygoid ; Hep., ectopterygoid ; Sp., sphenoid ; Bo., basioccipital; Art., articular; Co., coronoid; Ang., angular; Spl., splenial ; D., dentary. Puate III. Hyoid bones of Lacertilia. Fig. 1. Sphenodon punctatum Gray; nat. size; from specimen pre- sented by Sir James Hector. Chameleon sp.; from Cuvier ; nat. size. Gecko verticillatus Laur. ; nat. size ; from Cuvier. Aristelliger presignis Hallow. ; nat. size.; dissected and drawn by Dr. E. E. Galt. pee Cope.] Fig. Fig. Fig. or 4S58 220 : [March 18, . Phyllodactylus tuberculatus Wiegm.; X 2; dissected and drawn by Dr. E. E. Galt. Thecadactylus rapicaudus Houtt.; X 2. Eublepharis elegans Gray ; X 2; Dr. Galt. Eublepharis variegatus Baird ; X 2. Calotes cristatellus Kuhl; nat. size. Phrynocephalus mystaceus Pallas ; nat. size. Uromastiz hardwickii Gray ; nat. size ; from the Zoilogical Gar- den of Philadelphia. Holbrookia maculata Gir.; x 2; from specimen from Otto Lerch, San Angelo, Tex. Puiate IY. Phrynosoma coronatum Blv.; X 3; Dr. Galt. Sceloporus undulatus Daud.; X 2. Uta stansburiana B. & G.; X §. Sauromalus ater Dum.; nat. size. Crotaphytus wislicenit B. & G.; X 2. Anolis carolinensis D. & B.; X 2. Ctenosaura teres Harl.; nat. size (not adult). Iguana tuberculata Laur.; from Cuv.; nat. size. Anguis fragilis L.; x 4; from Northern Italy. Dracena guianensis Daud.; nat. size; from specimen from Zoilogical Garden, Philadelphia. PLATE V. Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Blv.; X 2; Dr, Galt. | Ophisaurus ventralis Daud.; X 2; Dr. Galt. Heloderma suspectum Cope ; nat. size; Dr. Galt. Lepidophyma flavomaculatum Dum.; three times nat. size. Varanus niloticus Linn.; nat. size; Dr. Galt. Scineus officinalis Laur.; x 2; from Cuvier. Bumeces fasciatus L.; X 3; Dr. Galt. Oligosoma laterale Say; X 2; from Hidalgo, Mexico (0. gem- mingerit). Gongylus ocellatus Forsk.; §. Egernia cunninghamii Gray ; nat. size ; the ends of the cerato- branchials are cut off in the specimen. Puate VI. Celestus striatus Gray ; nat. size. Lacerta ocellata Daud.; nat. size. Psammodromus algirus Linn.; x 2. Zonurus cordylus Linn,; X 2. Gerrohaurus nigrolineatus Hallow.;: X 2. Proceedings Amer, Philos, Soc, Vol, XXX; No, 138, Plate Il, Pee eee hen oe we oe Co D ae 5 Art ws pL D And ‘ D FIG. 5 1-3, Feylinia currorii. 4, Anniella pulchra. 5, Rhinetira floridana, Proceedings Amer, Philos, Soc, > Vol, XK, No. 198, Plate Ut Rhiptoglossa Acrodonta Iquanida. —— = —rwedings Ame, Philos, Su, Vol, MUL, No. 86, Plate I » PEI ES TT, Fe arn -—Procedings Amer, Pils, Su, Wal XXX, No, 138, Plat Dinloalossa Theranlnsen T.entonlosea. —EIRUCUES AMMeL, PMNOS, OC, Vol, AKA No, 136, Plate Vi, Leptoglossa Annulatt. 1892.) 221 [Cope. Fig. 38. Manceus macrolepis Cope; x 8. 39. Onemidophorus tessellatus Say ; x 2. 40. Tupinambis teguexin Daud.; nat. size; from Cuvier. 41. Xantusia riversiana Cope ; % nat. size. 42. Anniella pulchra Gray ; X 4; from specimen from James 8. Lip- pincott. 43. Ohirotes canaliculatus Bonn.; x 4. 44. Amphisbena alba L.; 3 nat. size. 45. Rhinewra floridana Baird ; x 4. Lettering.—Gh., glossohyal ; Bh., basihyal ; Hh., hypohyal; Ch., cera- tohyal; OB. J, first ceratobranchial; OB. IZ, second ceratobranchial ; Eh., epilyal. On Some New and Little Known Paleozoic Vertebrates. By £. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 1, 1892.) It has been long known that the Catskill-Chemung beds of Northern Pennsylvania contain a fish bed rich in specimens. This deposit has been traced from Warren, on the west, to Susquehanna county, inclusive, on the east. It is now known that at the close of the Chemung epoch, as at the close of the Devonian in Belgium and Scotland, land emergences took place, producing more or less continued brackish and fresh-water condi- tions. The latter received the deposits known as the Catskill in the East- ern United States, and these alternations with Chemung beds containing Chemung invertebrate fossils are now well established as facts of our geological history. A recent visit to Tioga and Bradford counties, in Pennsylvania, has recently afforded me the opportunity of inspecting some of the localities where vertebrate fossils occur. These have been already referred to by Prof. J. 8. Newberry in his work on the Paleozoic fishes of North America, Guided by two geologists residing in the regions in question—Mr. Andrew Sherwin, of Mansfield, Tioga county, and Mr. A. T. Lilley, of Leroy, Bradford county—I had an excellent opportunity of observing the mode of occurrence of the fossils and of obtaining speci- mens. I wish here to express my particular indebtedness to these gentle- men for the aid they have rendered me. The locality I visited, near Mansfield, is typical Catskill. The Jist of species obtained is not large. They are : Bothriolepis nitidus Leidy. Holonema rugosa Clayp. Ganorhynchus oblongus, sp. nov. Osteolepis or Megalichthys, fragments. Cope.] 222 | {April i, Holoptychius americanus Leidy. Holoptychius giganteus Agass. From Chemung beds near Leroy I obtained : Holonema rugosa Clayp. Holonema horrida, sp. nov. Holoptychius filosus, sp. nov. From another locality, probably Chemung, near Leroy : Bothriolepis minor Newb. Coccosteus macromus, sp. NOV. Osteolepis or Megalichthys, fragments. At the last-named locality the specimens are very abundant, but mostly dissociated, so that it is rarely that two pieces of the same fish are found in their natural relations. The bed where they occur is in some places carbonaceous from the abundant organic matter deposited there. Frag- ments of the Osteolepid fish above referred to are abundant, but they are too scattered for identification. BF £ To the species found in Pennsylvania, I add the description of a fine Megalichthys from the Carbonic of Kansas. OSTRACOPHORI. HOLONEMA HORRIDA, sp. ROV. This large species is represented by the nearly perfect mold of a plate whose position may be determined by the following considerations. It has almost exactly the form of the lateral plate of the specimen of the Holonema rugosa Clayp., to which I referred in describing the supposed pectoral spine of that species.* From the fact that the specimen referred to presents two median scuta, I have supposed that it is a part of the car- apace. It is, however, true that the exposed surface of the long anterior median plate is acuminate in front, showing that the anterior lateral plates join anterior to it. This is not known to occur in the carapace, but is characteristic of the plastron. That this conclusion is correct is shown by the character of the median posterior scute of HZ. rugosa, shortly to be described. This being the case, it is necessary to admit that there are two median seuta, a character thus fur unknown in the Antiarcha, and one which distinguishes the genus Holonema from Bothriolepis. On this interpretation, the scute to be described is the posterior lateral of the left side of the plastron. It is about three-fifths the size of that of the Holonema rugosa and is considerably longer than that of the Bothri- olepis nitidus Leidy. It differs from both species in its superficial sculp- ture. In the last-named species this is generally concentric to a non-cen- tral point. In the Holonema rugosa the sculpture radiates from a more or less central point. In the present species the pattern is longitudinal * Proceedings U. 8, Natl. Museum, 1891, p. 456. 1992.] 223 [Cope. from end to end of the plate. The anterior part of the external border of the plate is present in the rock mold, so that a cast of its surface was not obtained ; but, with this exception, the cast is nearly complete. On the middie of the plate, commencing at the anterior extremity, the ridges are least interrupted. Anteriorly they are oblique or slightly imbricate, looking outwards, and are connected at longer intervals ; near the inner border, but little connected. Posteriorly they are more direct and are more frequently joined by transverse connecting ridges. Near the mid- dle of the external region the ridges so inosculate as to produce a non- linear arrangement of round pits. On the inner side of the plate the sculpture is finer and is longitudinally honeycombed. MM. Total length of plate. ....06..-.e0+- Ue aia eae iebiee aeee errr’. I Ice eSUeneee s sanictsuseessemnenper sic POE Length of anterior internal border...... b swash: Lalale hele im dataigia 90 Length of posterior internal border........... baienbneapadet ae In the roughness of its surface this species exceeds those that are known to belong to the Antiarcha. Chemung bed, Bradford county, Pa., A. T. Lilley. HOLONEMA RUGOSA Clayp. Newberry Paleozoic Fishes of N. Amer., 1889, p. 92. , Pterichthys rugosus Claypole, Proceeds. Amer, Philosophical Soc., 1883, p. 664. Fragments of the exoskeleton of this species are common in the Che- mung beds, and they are generally of large size, much exceeding that of any other species of the Bothriolepidide. They are generally so much broken as to render their location difficult. I obtained from Mr. Lilley a number of fragments of such a plate, which, on reconstruction, proves to belong to the posterior median dorsal plate, enough of which remains to give a good idea of its furm and sculpture. The anterior margia only is entirely wanting. The plate is obtusely rounded at the median line, giving an obtusely roof-shaped form. It is relatively rather narrow anteriorly, and widens gradually to the posterior border, where it is also flatter. The edges (lat- eral and posterior) are rather thin, and the lateral are obscurely beveled below, as though to overlap the lateral posterior plates. The middle line below is openly grooved on the anterior half, while a longitudinal thick- ening marks the middle line of the posterior fourth below. The inferior surface is smooth, while the superior surface is sculptured with the par- allel grooves characteristic of the species. These grooves extend to the Jateral and posterior borders. The median ones are longitudinal and without interruption throughout the length of the fragment. Those on each side of the middle line diverge slightly and reach the margin, the lateral at an acute angle as far forward as the middle of the length of the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C., Xxx. 188.2. PRINTED MAY 24, 1892. Cope.] 224 {April 1, fragment. From this point forward they diverge in a direction gradually approaching and thus reaching a right angle with the margin. The transverse grooves form a band which increases in width anteriorly until it is nearly one-third the width of the plate in front. The grooves are fine and are separated by interspaces wider than themselves. They be- come coarser anteriorly, the interspaces measuring 1.5 mm. ; posteriorly they measure 1 mm. The middle line above shows some unsymmetrical low tuberosities which do not correspond to cavities on the inferior side. The plate is generally thin. ; Measurements. MM. Length of fragment. .....cacesseccdscccecsesccveacs oasecs 222 Width of plate at front of fragment...............- ies neue G40 Thickness of plate at front of fragment.............ee0005 Rite | Width of plate at posterior border..........ceesseeres iene ee This piece, together with the pectoral limb which I have already de- scribed, demonstrates the position of the genus to be with the Antiarcha, and not with the Arthrodira, as has been suspected by Mr. A. 8. Wood- ward. Chemung, Bradford county, Pa., A. T. Lilley. BOTHRIOLEPIS MINOR Newb. Paleozoic Fishes of North America, 1889, p. 112; Pl. xx, Figs. 6-8. Fragments of this species are exceedingly abundant in the Chemung rocks in Bradford county, but generally dissociated. The examination of a large number of these demonstrates the correctness of the generic references made by Prof. Newberry. The most abundant pieces are the lateral ventral plates, the anterior median dorsal plate, and the median occipital. Thelatter sometimes remains in conjunction with the plates on either side of it. These specimens are unaccompanied by any trace of scales or fins, thus agreeing with other species ofthe genus, There is also but one median abdominal plate, showing that the B. minor is not to be referred to Holo- nema. One of the characters ofthe species is seen in the fact that the sen- sory grooves of the median occipital plate do not extend to the smooth articular border, but are separated from it by a band of sculpture, The premedian plate is crossed by a groove which presents an abrupt loop back- wards at the middle. The species always remains much smaller than the B. nitidus Leidy (B, kidyi Newb.). Leroy, Bradford county, Pa., A. T, Lilley. 1892] 225 rope. DIPNOI. GANORHYNCHUS OBLONGUS, sp. nov. Established on what is either the symphyseal element of a mandible, or _ a median bone of the superior mouth-arch. It consists of an oblong trough- shaped plate with a thickened, somewhat revolute border, which is concave in two directions ; that is, in the direction of the concavity of the trough, - and asaconcavity of its free margin. This form indicates that it occupied ; an oblique position, like the elements mentioned, so that the thickened _ surface should fit closely the corresponding elements of the opposite jaw. _ There is no enamel covering the masticatory border, but this may have _ scaled off. There are no lateral denticles as in the Holodus of Pander. _ Ascompared with the G. beecherii of Newberry, this bone has the length relatively much greater as compared with the width. The width in that species exceeds the length several times, while in the @. oblongus the width but slightly exceeds the length. The concavity of the masticating _ border is greater; the size is very much less. As compared with the G. wooduardii Traqu., this species is very much smaller; there are no ‘‘na- real’’ notches ; and no tubercles on the edge. The sides of the body of the bone are nearly parallel, and the posterior border is gently convex. Two layers are visible ; the interior one, like the external, has a coarsely punctate surface. MM. Le th at middle eeteeeweee Seeeerecerecosecersece eeeeeereees 9 tha tat DOTIEE atic k be nsdman® 0000066 0 case setiedanecdne 10.5 Width { at proximal extremity.......++eeeseeees soccvecses 8.5 at masticatory extremity...c.cccccccceeceescececes 13.5 From near Mansfield, Tioga county, Pa.; from the Catskill formation. From Andrew Sherwin. TELEOSTOMATA. CoccosTEUS MACROMUS, sp. Nov. Fragments of this species are abundant in the Chemung rocks at Leroy, and I select as typical of it a pair of supraclavicular and adjacent pieces, _ which display its characters best. The supraclavicle has lost the condylar articulation. Both extremities display the unsculptured surface, and the _ usual groove extends obliquely across the sculptured portion at about two- fifths the length from one of the extremities. The sculpture consists of obtuse tubercles with delicate radiate-grooved bases, which are usually _ separated by spaces equal to their own diameters, sometimes by narrower spaces, but never by spaces which are wider. At some points they have - alinear arrangement. This sculpture is coarser than in the C. americanus Newberry (see the Paleozoic Fishes of North America, by this author), but resembles that of the Q. decipiens Agass. of Scotland. From this _ species the C. macromus differs in the elongate form of the supraclavicle, Cope.] 226 [April 1, which is relatively short and wide in the C. decipiens (see Agassiz, in the Poissons de la Vieux Gres Rouge, and Zittel, Handbuch der Paleontologie). MM. Length of supraclavicle............sseese. ein OOM bis sla Dente . 35 Width just. above condyle......sc.cccce.secscees Codvews wees 16 Associated and in contact with these pieces are two acuminate oval bones which may be opercula. Each is pierced by a groove. They dis- play the inferior side, which is smooth. MEGALICHTHYS MACROPOMUS, sp. nov. Established on the greater part of an individual from the Carbonic system of Kansas. With the exception ofa short interval just behind the head, the specimen is complete as to its length ; the pectoral and ventral fins are damaged, and the extremity of the anal is broken off. The scales of one side of the body only are visible in the present state of the specimen, and a good many of those of the abdominal region are lost. The general characters may be enumerated as follows: The form is slender. The scales are large and rhombic, with rounded extremities, The supratemporal (cheek) bones and opercula are very large, and are much extended posteriorly. The enamel is present on the superior aspect of the skull in small and irregular patches only, but it covers the rest of the external surfaces. It is everywhere closely and minutely impressed- punctate. The bones of the skull are thin and light. The elements of the skull are distinguishable for the most part, the sutures being obliterated on the nasal region. The pterotics (squamosals Traquair) are longer than the postfrontals, and the parietals are longer than the frontals. The supratemporals (cheek-bones Traqu.) are very large, extending posterior to the posterior border of the parietals. The intercalaria are large (supratemporals Traqu.). The opercula are very large, and in this specimen they are shoved upwards so as to overlap at the median line. Their length enters the total length of the skull, three and a half times, and is a little greater than that of the parietal bones. Their superior margin is leveled off from a low longitudinal thickening, from which some low wrinkles radiate downwards. Enamelis present on the superior surface of the skull, on the border of the frontal bone posterior to the orbit, and on the anterior part of the postfrontal bone. There are grains of enamel scattered on the parietals. On the supratemporals there are closely placed concentric interrupted lines on the superior part, and irregular patches of larger size on the inferior part. There are large patches of enamel on the opercula, The superior bones of the skull are everywhere roughened with minute tuberosities, which fuse into trans - verse ridges on each side of the sagittal suture. The maxillary bones are displayed partly on the superior, partly on the inferior faces of the speci- men, They are rather slender, and their distal extremities are broken off. There is a short pyriform symphyseal, entirely enclosed by the mandib-. I ee, ee ey ee ee ee a a ; —— 1892.] 227 [Cope. ular rami, and a median gular bone which joins the gulars with a con- cave suture. The gulars are large, and measure three times as long as wide at the middle. They are cut off obliquely on the inner side poste- riorly, by the chevron-shaped arrangement of the pectoral scales. Several large external gulars. The posterior extremities of the mandibles are broken so that their proportions cannot be exactly ascertained, but the length preserved is six times the width opposite the anterior gular. The surface of their inferior portions is marked by coarse impressed punctures besides the usual minute ones. The former are not present on any other part of the fish. The scales are large ; between the bases of the pectoral and ventral fins can be counted about twenty-one rows, and between the ventral and the first dorsal immediately above, eight rows. The first dorsal fin is above the ventral, and the second dorsal above the anal. There are two large scales on each side which embrace the base of the first ray of the first dorsal and anal; the other fins are tooimperfect at the base for description. The caudal fin is shortly heterocercal, and there are six broad fulcral scales protecting the side of its inferior border. In all the fins the rays are seg- mented. A half dozen rays near the border are coarse, but the remain- ing rays are finer. In all the fins the coarse rays are distally subdivided. Measurements. MM. Total length of specimen (20 mm. intercalated behind head) 950 Length to anterior border of orbits........cceeseeeeesesees 43 Length to posterior border of parietals .............. Geauee bee Length to posterior border of operculum.............++.+.+ 230 Length to anterior base first dorsal fin.............. eataan ee eee PPA ME OOT OLDIES 6a Sac. addccccscscvccsees eceavesver ae Width of parietals + postfrontals anteriorly..... covccevese 88 Width of parietals and pterotics posteriorly .. ...........+. 75 Length of symphyseal bone ...........eseseeescees ¢-vie!ate ons Length of anterior gular...... WEMRmaNeasaecs. po widaye ree TT a oP peaaveugeeniah ~» 120 Length of first dorsal fin....... Bada ewidelh b0dsc se ceermniclals 110 Length of caudal from inferior base to superior free apex.... 130 Depth of body at first dorsal..........seeeseccceescceeses . 85 Depth of body at second dorsal.........ccsecccececereeees 50 This species is not nearly allied to the species from the Permian of Texas, the M. nitidus Cope, which is smaller and more robust in form, It has its scales and ganoine, generally, perfectly smooth, and there are but fourteen rows of scales between the pectoral and ventral fins. From the European species with punctate ganoine it differs in the longer gular bones and more elongate head, so far, at least, as concerns the M. hibbertit and MM. laticeps. In M. pygmeus the scales are described as coarsely punctate by A. 8. Woodward. Its dimensions are about equal to those Cope.] 228 [April 1, of the M. hibbertii. The crescentic ganoine scales of the muzzle of that species and the ¥. nitidus are absent from the A. macropoma. I owe the opportunity of examining the beautiful specimen which is described above to my friend, Mr. R. D. Lacoe, of Pittston, Pa., whose collection of Paleozoic fossils is so valuable, and has been of such utility to students of the subject. (2) HoLOPTYCHIUS FILOSUS, sp. nov. Represented by a large scale which has a peculiar and characteristic sculpture. But a small part, if any, of the proximal border is smooth. There is an area of coarse tubercles whose centre marks the proximal fourth of the long diameter, and whose vertical diameter somewhat ex- ceeds the longitudinal. From this area there radiate in all directions to the circumference, ridges, of which the proximal are very coarse, but which become finer to the posterior side of the central area. The longer and finer ridges divide dichotomously at various points as they approach the border, the division being most conspicuous in two lines above and two below the longitudinal middle line. The ridges are quite fine and are separated by spaces rather wider than their diameter, except proximal to the area, where the reverse is the case. This species is represented by a mold from which a cast has been made. The distal border is evidently thin, and has been more or less broken, so that its outline is not certainly known. The following longi- tudinal measurement may, therefore, require revision at some future time. MM. longitudinal........,...4. cevccescceee (268 vertical. ..occees Cevcccccccvcceecocces ODO Diasitars OF Cabalete axes { longitudinal vetva sweeney ety | VOrtlcal Jie icccscpatcvesss. “ae Width proximal to area......ccesececcescsecs Five distal radii in...... Diameters of scale { eee eer eee neee 9 eee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee | 5 It will be observed that this is the equal in dimensions of the largest species of Holoptychius known. Its sculpturé serves to connect the species of the H. nobilissimus type with those of the group Glyptolepis. The apparent absence of proximal smooth border may be due to accident, as the border is not complete ; but it is, in any case, narrower than in the known species. From the Chemung beds of Leroy, Bradford county, A. T. Lilley, I have, like Prof. Newberry, obtained the HZ. americanus Leidy, and the H. giganteus Agass., from the Catskill beds of Bradford county, Pa., through Mr, Andrew Sherwin, to whom I am under many obligations, Proceedings Amer. Philos, See, Vol. XX, No. 198, Plate Vil FIC 3 LA) i” fs Ge FIG I, Proceedings Amer, Philos. Soc, Vol, XXX, Ho, 138 Plate Vill, -—_—_ Pel Pree J an rey Ps, eas Ee Pek Megalichthys macropomus Cope. —— das i aati i ei Vol.xAX=X . NY, Proc.Am. Philos. Soc. BASE 1892.] 229 [Bache. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate VII. Fig. 1. Holonema horrida Cope ; lateral ventral plate ; two-thirds natural size. Fig. 2. Holonema rugosa Claypole ; lateral ventral plate ; one-half natural size. Fig. 3. Holoptychius filosus Cope ; scale ; two-thirds natural size. Puate VIII. Megalichthys macropomus Cope; skull from above; about three-fourths natural size; from the collection of R. D. Lacoe. Civil and Military Photogrammetry. By R. Meade Bache. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1892.) Photogrammetry is recognized as a legitimate mode of survey- ing. It is, in fact, if practiced with due regard to the limitations involved through spherical aberration from object-glasses of too wide aperture, a mode of surveying of considerable accuracy, although not for a moment to be compared to other perfected. _ modes of the present day. It can never rival these in their sphere, _ which is the sphere of extreme precision, but at the same time it - must be admitted that, within its own, it is capable of doing good service. _ The diagram on the blackboard has been made as simple as _ possible, to illustrate the mode of obtaining a single vertical and a single horizontal determination. It is evident, however, that the sectors of horizon and intervening landscape belonging to each picture, assumed to have been taken from the respective stations, A and B, might be filled with objects. Many of these, from the fact of their having been visible from both stations, would be determinable by this method of cartography. _ AB isa base to serve for the determination of some of the details of asurvey. The optical axis of the camera being set at each sta- _ tion respectively upon a prominent, distant object, say a lone tree, the angle at each station between the base and that object is taken. Bache.] 230 [May 6, The rays of light eA and cB, respectively, proceed from a steeple to the photographic points of view 4 and Z. The intersection of these rays at S gives, according to the scale of the plotted base, the horizontal position by scale of the steeple with reference to those points of view. In deference to a misunderstanding of which I heard lately, as to the relations of the horizons to each other, as represented in this diagram, I shall endeavor to preclude it now by calling attention to the fact that the horizons are here laid down as to direction, but — in order to secure the utmost simplicity in the diagram, not as to their possibility of lateral extension. Objects, for instance, in the middle distance of the steeple, as seen in elevation on horizon 4, from station A, would, at station ZB, fall to the left of the steeple, as seen in elevation on horizon &. Conversely, objects in the gen- eral direction, and in the background of the steeple, as seen in the elevation on horizon A, from station A, would fall to the right of the steeple, as seen in elevation on horizon &, from station B. The chief method of photogrammetry in use at the present time is illustrated by this diagram, and is based on very simple princi- ples. The angles and distances obtained in ordinary surveying are merely natural or artificial selections. They are merely arbitrary subdivisions of space, convenient selections from an infinite num- ber of similar elements. But it is also true that, the relations of a few of those elements being judiciously selected and determined, all others secondarily deduced fall into harmony with them. ‘The photographic camera, however, as compared with other surveying instruments, does not lend itself at first to selection, but giving all visible nature from various points of view, enables the employer of it finally to make his selection from the resulting pictures, as if from nature itself. From all points of view, then, angles and distances exist in nature, and although they apparently change, as the observer changes place, the correspondences among them, as seen from all points of view, are perfect. Hence, if we delegate to the photo- graphic camera the duty of making a permanent record of nature, — as seen from two or more points of view, the intersection of the rays of light, reaching those points of view respectively from the same objects, as pictured in photographs properly placed, will, by | their intersection on paper to become a map, give the positions of 1892.) 231 [Bache. those objects relatively, as plotted, to the points of view and to one another. Occupying with a photographic camera the points formed by the termini of a base line on the surface of the earth, having on its photographic plate imaginary vertical and horizontal lines, suscep- tible of being developed into real ones, the intersection of these lines corresponding with the centre of the prospective picture (the former enabling the operator to set the camera accurately to any’ horizontal direction, the latter giving, when the camera is leveled, the horizon for each picture), the camera is fixed in turn at the two stations upon some distant determinate object by its line of sight, its position being otherwise so adjusted that the objects to be de- termined in the landscape, within a given sector of the horizon, _ Shall appear on the picture as taken from each of the two stations. _ The azimuth of the base line, and of the lines of sight from it, being determined by the theodolite, field transit, or compass, the survey for a particular sector of the horizon at the two stations lacks but one factor to make it complete, as soon as the pictures shall have been taken by the camera. The camera has given, by its occupation of the two stations at the ends of the base line of _ assumed length, only one portion of the data necessary to consti- _ tuting a survey, namely, the angles subtended in nature by the vari- _ ous objects which come within the scope of both resulting pictures. A very simple addition, however, suffices to make the survey com- _ plete. To secure that, to introduce the element of scale, ‘it is necessary to know the length of the base line. The scale to which the base line is plotted on paper becomes, then, through the acquisition of knowledge of the length of the base on the ground, _ the scale of the whole resultant map; which, it should be inciden- tally noted, must range by scale no further from each station than to a distance where rays of light to the two stations give good _ graphical intersection, the extent of the range by scale being con- _ditioned upon the length of the rays by scale relatively to the length of the base line by scale. Not only do rays proceeding from the same object, as introduced _on two pictures properly placed, give by their intersection the hori- zontal position by scale of the object with reference to the base, but the angle subtended on any pictorial horizon by two objects, as ‘seen from the properly plotted point of view of that horizon, repre- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. s0c. xxx. 188. 2D. PRINTED MAY 27, 1892. Bache.] 232 (May 6, sents on a map the actual visual angle as seen from that point of view in nature. In fact, the latter truth is that which is in nature the fundamental one in this connection. It is axiomatic that the visual angles in nature between all objects whatsoever, as projected on a given sector of the horizon, as seen by the eye of the observer, or that of the camera, from a yiven point of. view, are the true angles between those objects, and that their sides, con- verged at the point of view, represent the true directions of the rays from those objects, corresponding with a base in nature with reference to which their angles are cither directly or indirectly, in this case indirectly, known. Therefore it is because, in a single picture, the angles between different objects, in fact between all objects there, at the distance of the focal length of the camera, as seen in the picture from its plotted point of view, are the same as in nature from its point of view, that the intersection of rays from the same object, as seen on different pictures, placed in position corresponding with the way in which the landscape was photo- graphed from nature, must represent by scale the horizontal posi- tion of the object as it stands in nature. That is to say, if what we see from one point of view in nature is true by angle, and also by angle true, although different, as seen from another point of | view in nature, then the intersection of the individual rays, by means of which we have seen the objects in their angular positions with reference to each other, must represent their true horizontal positions with reference to the base which we have traversed between our respective points of view. And if this holds good with respect to nature, it must hold good with respect to corre- — sponding pictures of nature, placed horizontally with relation to each other as nature had presented itself from those individual — points of view from which the pictures were taken. The result, expressed as a surveyor would state the case, depends upon the fact — that, if a point lies somewhere on a line, and’also somewhere on a line intersecting the other, then the point will be at the intersec- tion of the two lines. In this case the two lines are simply the visual rays, shown in the respective pictures, in the positions and with the angular effects as seen in nature, intersecting each other on their passage to the respective points of view. } In practice, a round of pictures, each taking in a certain sector” of the horizon and intervening landscape, and slightly overlapping one another, is made to cover the tract of which it is contemplated 1892.] 233 ; [Bache. to execute a survey, and the area comprised by them is pictorially duplicated from one or more stations. It is always desirable that the same objects shall be seen, if good intersection of rays can be secured from the different pictures, from three stations instead of two, because an error in one of the azimuths at the end of a single base, which of course gives only two lines for an intersection of rays, would vitiate a whole survey, whereas, with two bases, involv- ing three points of view, and the intersection of three rays, accu- racy throughout a survey receives a crucial test. The adoption of this plan, which is like that employed in ordinary triangulation, is also desirable on account of its securing accuracy of plotted re- sults ; because graphical differences in the positions, as given by the intersection of only two lines, are virtually eliminated by obtaining for intersections the mean positions as derived from three lines. : ‘The survey, so far as the instrumental part of it is concerned, _ being complete, it only remains that the plotting of it shall be done. ‘The base line being laid down to scale on paper, lines are drawn from its termini, at the angles with it represented by the azimuths of the lines of sight as determined there on the ground. On this representation on paper of the lines of sight, at the respec- tive plotted stations, are placed, at right angles, printed on thin paper, the photographs taken at the two stations, in such manner that the individual plotted line of sight shall point on the photo- graph upon the representation of the object upon which the real line of sight was directed in nature, after that representation shall have been vertically projected on the horizon line of the photo- graph, and that the horizon line of the photograph shall be distant from the individual plotted station by the focal length of the par- ticular camera that was used in taking the pictures. The eye then, placed in position over a plotted station, and looking at a photo- graph corresponding to the view taken from that station, sees, as already demonstrated, that view under precisely the same angular effect as the view is presented by nature on the ground. Conse- quently, as angles formed by rays of light with the base line are given truly in nature, are also given truly by the camera, and are now given truly as plotted on paper to become a map, the intersec- tion on that paper of these rays, as proceeding from the pictorial representation of the obiects from which they are derived in nature, after their pictorial source has been vertically projected on the hori- Bache.] 234 [May 6, zon line of the photographs, will be the positions of the objects on the map, with due relation by scale and angles to the stations of the base line and to one another. The contemplated map will, in a word, be susceptible of being drawn throughout to scale. It is clear that a great number of objects may be thus plotted from two stations representing the ends of a base line, and that if we know the length and azimuth of a base line, and the azimuths of the lines of sight from its termini, the elements of scale and orienta- tion will inhere in all the resulting work that goes to form a map. Used for the function described, the photographic camera is there- fore very aptly ca'led the camera-theodolite. Adopting the same diagram to illustrate the mode of determining - height by the camera-theodolite, we see the steeple, as observed upon from the point of view 4, having the ray eA coming from the photographic position of the steeple as projected on the _hori- zon line of the photograph taken from 4. Draw from the point e the height of the steeple, as derived from the photograph taken from A, perpendicularly to the ray eA, and draw also the hypothe- nuse 4d. Any one intuitively perceives that the pictorial height of the steeple being ed at e, at the end of the focal length of the camera, its height at S, the horizontal position by scale of the steeple, must be Sf and that that by scale is the true height. The length of the line Sf may therefore be obtained numerically by applying to it the scale of the base, which may be the scale of a whole map. With a greater degree of precision the same result ad ea may be reached by computation, because Sf= 4S = ; = being the tangent of the vertical angle @ A e, and 4S the distance from the point of view 4 to the steeple S. Of course the height of any natural as well as of any artificial object above the plane of the horizon may be ascertained by simi- lar means. A steeple was chosen to illustrate both horizontal and vertical methods of determination, because it affords points that — are so conspicuous as compared with those of many other objects that offer themselves to the sight in most surveys. Surveys from this kind of photogrammetry may be plotted to any scale, within reasonable limits of size, by adopting for the base — line of the survey the scale desired, In all cases, however, the photographic pictures must, in order to enable them to present cor- — rect angles for the map, be placed in the manner already pre- ee 1892.] 235 [Bache. scribed, on the respective horizons as plotted on the paper to become a map. - Balloon photogrammetry has been practiced to some extent ever since the invention of the photographic dry plate. This method, however, has belonged rather to the sphere of reconnoissance than to that of surveying. When some prominent objects appear on the landscape, whose geographical relations to one another are known, the balloon photographic product may be of considerable value, if too large a circle has not been included by the camera; and this method indicated, if the desirable conditions are strictly fulfilled, may be utilized to advantage if the resulting map is not required to be of rigid accuracy. When, however, such objects are very remote from one another, even when their geographical positions are known, the spherical aberration resulting trom employing a large aperture of object-glass makes a product which cannot be regarded as of high value, one which cannot properly be dignified with the name of survey in the restricted sense of the term, and to which we should prefer to apply the name of reconnoissance. Without adjusted height for the camera, without near objects of known geographical relations to one another, to obtain orientation for the results, without precise regulation of the angular aperture of the object-glass of the camera, nothing can be produced by balloon photographic process that, in the restricted sense noted, merits the name of survey. It is on account of my perception of this low estate of balloon photogrammetry that my attention is especially drawn to devising a method of applying the art upon true principles. By my method the balloon must be captive, not free, and being captive it may be made quite small, easily managed, and inexpensive, thus rendering its employment practicable for ordinary use, especially as, accord- _ ing to the plan sometimes adopted in the case of the military cap- . tive balloon (to the consideration of which we shall presently come), the gas requisite for inflating the balloon can readily be carried under high pressure in metallic cylinders. _ The traverse line of land surveying is merely a zigzag course, consisting of stations, the angle between each successive three of _ which, and distance between each successive two, is measured. From these stations details of the terrene are generally procured. Bache.] 236 {May 6, To enable a traverse line to form a portion of a general survey, there must be means adopted to place at least its initial and termi- nal points in relation to that survey, whereby all intermediate points fall into due relation with it. This premised, I will now describe how my plan for introducing precision into balloon photogrammetry could be applied in various useful ways for delineations of portions of the earth’s surface. The appliances needed for carrying out the plan are a small spherical balloon capable of supporting a light photographic appa- ratus, swung in gimbals, and protected from injury in descent by a thin encircling cylinder of metal or of wood. A zone of cord would pass horizontally around the balloon, to which would be attached four equidistant guys of the size of codfish lines. A broad colored stripe would pass vertically around the balloon. From below the balloon would depend reophores enclosed in a graduated cord, the graduation serving the purpose of adjusting the balloon to any given height above the earth. The reophores* would be electro-magnetically connected with the shutter of the camera, actuated from the ground by a small, but strong, galvanic battery. The balloon, being inflated, would be compelled, by means of the four equatorially fastened guys, to assume a position regulated as to height by the graduated cord. This height will have been previously determined upon with reference to the scale of the map that may be desired, the focus of the camera having also been ad- justed with reference to the contemplated height of the instrument. above the earth. The position of the balloon would be over the middle of a given link of a traverse line, the orientation of the camera being secured by causing the vertical stripe on the balloon to range along the given link of the traverse line. Two disks, made of hoops covered with white cotton cloth, one of which should be larger than the other, would give on the photograph, points representing the termini of the link corresponding to those on the ground, and the direction in which the link, as a portion of the traverse line, is lying. A very low grade of accuracy could be obtained by the balloon photogrammetrical process by the method of omitting all angular and linear measurements on the ground, and letting the balloon camera, placed in a generalized position with reference to the parts of a traverse line, accomplish the whole work of determining the 1392,] 237 : [Bache. angles and directions of the parts of the line successively submitted to its operation, as well as of delineating what it must perforce in- clude by the photographic process in the representation of the details of the subjacent terrene. In this method the end link of a given section of the line would have to be duplicated in the advancing survey of the line, so that the relations with one another of all parts of the line should be maintained. If, additionally, the ‘azimuth of one of the links of the line were obtained, it would communicate azimuth to all the other links. But this method can, at best, be recommended for nothing beyond the requirements of reconnoissance. The photographing of a link of a traverse line in the precise manner first described involves, of course, the necessity that the balloon and each of the two stations representing the link over the middle of which it is floating, should be intervisible. A similar condition, as between the two stations as viewed on the ground, is indispensable. It is evident, however, that if there are trees or other obstructions on the ground, the stations might be intervisible below, and yet that each might not be intervisible with the balloon. Consequently, as not only these conditions but the condition of ample space for the management of the guys must be fulfilled, pre- cise operations with the balloon imply the existence of open ground, or ground substantially free from obstructions to sight. In proportion as the balloon is allowed to attain a greater and greater height, so as to include more and more of the earth’s sur- face, the scale of the resultant map would become smaller and smaller, and the apparatus more and more unmanageable, because at a great height the guys cannot be maintained at the angles requisite to control its exact position. Therefore, it will in practice probably be found that heights of from three hundred and fifty to five hundred feet will be those most convenient for surveying by this method. One gain made by elevation is more than counterbalanced by the loss of the clearness of delineation that belongs to a large scale. It is evident that, at moderate heights, the photographic projection of an abrupt rise of ground or other object, as, for instance, a house, on the plane of the photograph is at a greater distance by scale from the vertical passing through the balloon than it should be as related to nature, but that, as the height of the balloon above the earth increases, this error proportionately decreases. There- Bache.} 238 [May 6, fore, for the moderate elevation that must be adopted for the bal- loon in order to manage it, we must, with broken surface, accept greater error in delineation than would attach to the same surface if greater elevation of the balloon were permissible. But we should be reconciled to this fact from the consideration that, even were it possible to manage the balloon at the height which would virtually eliminate the error of projection mentioned, the scale of the re- sulting map would be so small as to approach in character the results of a reconnoissance. Another circumstance should recon- cile us to the insuperable fact mentioned, and that is that there are thousands of square miles in our country where, from the very fact that the surface is essentially level, the optical difficulty attaching to moderate elevation for the balloon would not exist. Such a survey, by balloon photogrammetry, as that described could be very easily plotted by final process of photographic print- ing. In consequence of the fact that the balloon would be kept at a fixed height throughout a given survey, the scale of the links of the traverse line would be established through the photographic presentment of the length of those links. The scale of those links may also be fixed by the measurement of them on the ground. So the photographic scale and the other scale may be made the same, and therefore they would be made the same. The traverse line having finally been laid down on helios paper, before the paper is sensitized, the paper would then be sensitized, and the photographic plates representing the links of the traverse line would be simul- taneously adjusted upon it along the traverse line as plotted, one scale, as derived from adjusting the balloon at a certain height, and the other scale, virtually the same, as derived from linear measure- ment along the ground, being made to accommodate themselves graphically to each other, thus eliminating error in the resultant map. ‘This resultant map, if the picture of a plane surface, would have but one defect, that of exhibiting minute triangles of blank space where the photographic plates, cut off so as to fit along the links of the plotted traverse line, would necessarily not fill out entirely the delineation of the ground at those points, although otherwise perfecting it elsewhere, from the fact that they would form with one another a continuous series. The captive balloon, if used only on days fit for ordinary field work, would occupy a position of almost stable equilibrium, if its power of flotation were sufficient, not only to support the photo- ee 1392 ] 239 (Bache. graphic apparatus, but to strain upward upon the controlling guys, because the attachment of the guys would be made to the equator of the balloon, and the weight of the dependent apparatus would be close to its periphery, and therefore to the centre of the spheri- cal figure of the balloon. In addition, for the purpose of increas- ing the stability of the balloon at the critical moment of taking a photograph, the operator would steady it with a gentle draught upon the dependent cord containing the reophores, at the precise point of time when he makes the electrical contact with the shutter of the camera. I here conclude the description of that one of my proposed ad- ditions to the art of photogrammetry which relates to precision of results obtainable from it for a continuous line of survey, and in- vite your attention for a moment to a method I suggest of using a similar captive balloon in a manner which would be useful in mili- tary operations. It need hardly be said that, whether captive or not, balloons have heretofore been used at great disadvantage in military operations, unless we except the use made of them for escape, with indirect reference to those operations during the recent siege of Paris. If the free aéronautic balloon passes over the enemy at such a distance as to make useful what can be observed from it, the glimpse is but transient, while its nearness and immense volume place it in great danger. If, on the other hand, a captive aéronautic balloon be used for military observation, it must ascend far from the enemy, to a height which measurably neutralizes the accuracy of the information sought. The use for military purposes of a modification of the small spherical captive balloon which I have described would be con- ditioned solely upon the circumstance that the wind should be blow- ing towards the enemy’s lines. The only change in it from the one described, that would be entailed by its new purpose, would be that it should be mounted with a simple network similar to that which is used on the kite, and to which the string for flying it, fastened similarly to the way in which it is fixed on the kite, should be attached. This string, with which the balloon would be flown _ like a tailless kite, would contain ordinary filigree reophores, _ through whose instrumentality the photographic shutter of the - camera would be controlled by the operator. Lying several hun- dred yards away, or even a mile or two, if desirable, outside of an PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 188. 25. PRINTED MAY 27, 1892. Cope.] 240 [May 6, enemy’s lines of circumvallation, or line of battle, with the wind blowing in his direction, the balloon could be sent up with ballast proportioned to the general elevation intended for its soaring over his position. I have said ‘‘ general elevation,’’ because change of volume in the balloon, in accordance with the change of tempera- ture, or increased weight on it, from an accession of moisture, pre- clude the possibility of calculating upon obtaining precise prede- termined elevation for the balloon. The weight of the string for the length to be paid out to the contemplated distance would of course enter into the amount of ballast needed to secure an approximately special elevation at a special distance. The distance to the enemy’s position being known, and the vertical angle being taken to the balloon from its point of departure, when it is approxi- mately delivered at its destination, the exact remaining length of string, with allowance for sagging, necessary to, pay out so as to cause the balloon fairly to dominate the enemy’s military works or line of battle, would at once be known by a simple computation, or could be taken from a table of angles and distances. This operation being completely performed at several points along the opposing military lines, a series of pictures, at varying distances from front to rear, and from right to left of the enemy’s position could be secured by means of the electro-magnetic attachment to the shutters of the photographic cameras, each individual one of which could take a number of pictures without replenishment of plates. It is evident-that such a use of the balloon and the photo- graphic camera would have proved greatly advantageous to either side in such modern sieges as those of Sebastopol, Richmond, and Paris. On the Skull of the Dinosaurian Lelaps incrassatus Cope. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1892.) The characters of the skull in the carnivorous Dinosauria are only par- tially known, so the present opportunity is improved to add to our knowl- edge a considerable number of points, if not to exhaust the subject. I have temporarily in my possession two incomplete crania of the Lalaps — inerassatua, from the Laramie formation of the Red Deer river, in the — Dominion of Canada, which have been submitted to me by the Geological Ee ey ee 1892.] 241 [Cope. Survey of the country for determination and description. I express here my thanks to the honorable Director of the Survey, Dr. A. R. C. Selwyn, for the opportunity of examining these important specimens. The first specimen consists of the skull, from the orbits to the muzzle inclusive, with the two dentary bones with teeth adhering to the inferior surface. The second specimen includes most of the parts absent from the first. The muzzle and orbital region are wanting, but the parietal and occipital regions are present, with the hasiscranii and palate; parts of the quadrate bones and both mandibular rami nearly complete with teeth. The bones of the skull are dense and light, and some of them are pneu- matic, The sutures separating the premaxillary, maxillary and nasal bones are not distinguishable in the specimen, and both are considerably injured. There is a large subround preorbital foramen whose centre is a little nearer the superior plane of the skull than the alveolar border. It is separated from the orbit by a narrow isthmus. The frontal bone is very narrow between the orbits. The prefrontal forms a vertical convex » crest on each side, as represented by Marsh to exist in the Megalosaurus — — ~ nasicornis, The orbits are longitudinally widely parallelogrammic, and are of enormous size, equaling in long diameter the length of the muzzle in frontof them. The postfrontal and postorbital elements appear to be fused, and form an L-shaped bone, whose horizontal limb is supraorbital, extending forwards over the orbit anterior to its middle, and terminating in an acute apex. The other limb is vertical and postorbital, extending to the jugal bone. A small piece on the inner side of the postfrontoérbital at its posterior angle on the superior face of the skull is of uncertain deter- mination. The maxillary diminishes rapidly in depth below the orbit and terminates a little posterior toit. The jugal overlaps it above, and prob- ably terminated at about the posterior third of the orbit, but the suture is not clear at this point. The frontal is supported below by two vertical elements posterior to the middle of the orbit. These closely resemble the corresponding pieces in Sphenodon, and are the postoptic* and epiptery- _ goid respectively. They are preceded by a vertical compressed element which corresponds with the orbitosphenoid of Sphenodon, but it is not perforate, and the optic foramen is posterior to it. It is elongate antero- posteriorly, and its anterior extremity is concealed anterior to the orbit. The postoptic is strongly concave at its anterior margin, and the inferior part of this border is produced anteriorly. The epipterygoid, on the other hand, is openly concave posteriorly, its inferior portion being di- rected posteriorly and enclosing a large foramen with the postoptic. The external face of the maxillary bones is rugose with fine ridges, and rather numerous foramina. The jugal extends well posteriorly, and increases in depth, but its posterior extremity is broken from the specimen. The mandibular rami are compressed, and the symphysis is oblique and ligamentous. The dentary bone is followed posteriorly above by a deep surangular, with rounded superior border, whose superior outline, though -* For the definition of this element, see Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1892. Cope.) 24 2 [May 6, convex, rises but little above the level of the dentary. The dentary is produced below it. On the inner side is seen a large splenial foramen, from which extends anteriorly a narrow strip, the splenial. The other borders of the foramen are formed by a large laminiform bone, the oper- cular of Cuvier, which extends to the superior border of the ramus, cut- ting off the dentary posteriorly. It is apparently homologous with the inferior anterior part of the coronoid. For the remaining parts of the~ mandibular ramus see the description of the second specimen. The exter- nal face of the dentary is roughened and presents foramina which are most numerous anteriorly, where they are connected by shallow grooves, like the rims between the holes of small Mammalia. Opposite each tooth is one or two shallow vertical grooves. The teeth have the usual Megalosaurian form and have long roots sunk in very deep alveoli. There are eleven present in the maxillary bone, of which the terminal ones are rapidly reduced in dimensions. Fourteen - teeth in the dentary bone which diminish in size at the posterior end of the series. The premaxillary teeth are lost, but none of those in the an- terior part of the dentary bone have the incisor-like character of those of — the genus Amblypodon of Leidy. The first tooth of the dentary is smaller than the second, and both have more convex external faces than the teeth which succeed them. ; Measurements of Skull No. 1. MM Total length of specimen...........ccevesccsccccerecseses COU Length (axial) to front border of preorbital foramen........ 140 Length to anterior border of orbit...... ic ee 'aeeiea on sasecsine ake Length to posterior border of orbit..... idm sie oa neepciegael eee Vertical diameter Of OFDIt. 6.0... ccccccusscccncecsesceeses AMO Vertical diameter of skull at middle of orbit............... 180 Width of front at middle of orbit..........02 ceee soeeseee 80 Depth of dentary at posterior end of symphysis...........- 90 Depth of dentary at end of dental series............ eescene, AME Length of dental series....... oeseesdeuuees gesaccegs aesces MOU Length of dentary bone above..... eb ececsece nes bee ate eenmnene Length of sixth tooth above alveolus...... ene es eee hewn ec ane Width of sixth tooth at alveolus...... 9h Sie. 50's penepen senses hl ae . . In the second skull the only part of the superior portion remaining is the brain case, and this is distorted by pressure which has forced it to the left side of the middle line. The postorbital region and the arches are gone. The occipital appears to be continuous and subhorizontal and is obtusely angulate medially above. The basioccipital is vertical as in the crocodiles — proper, and the brain case is closed in front of the petrosal in much the same way, with thin ossifications. The foramen magnum is small, as is also the transversely oval occipital condyle, which looks directly posteri- orly, and not downwards, On each side of the basioccipital are two large 1892.] 243 [Cope, foramina, one above the other, the inferior issuing in a deep groove or fossa. They are bounded externally by a broad vertical ala. Anterior to this ala are two other large foramina, one above the other, both issuing from fosse. One or both of these is the trigeminal. The middle line of the brain case is keeled below, except near and at the anterior extremity, where it is flat and is perforated by a transverse foramen. This is possibly a pituitary foramen, which thus penetrates the palatal roof as in the Opis- thoccelus Dinosauria as stated by Marsh. The rami of the mandible are pressed obliquely against the inferior aspect of the skull, but are separated far enough to permit the palato- pterygoid elements to be seen. These form a rather narrow, flattened rod on each side the middle line, which extend to the robust basipterygoid processes, which look downwards. Each pterygoid then turns abruptly outwards with its edge downwards towards the quadrate, but the speci- men does not permit me to discover whether it reaches that element or not. It sends a robust process to the inner side of the basipterygoid, thus extensively embracing it. The anterior part of the palate is invisible. The relations of the dentary and surangular bones are the same as in the specimen No. 1. This specimen shows that the angularand articu- lar are distinct elements. The angular is an elongate element, which is extensively exposed anteriorly on the internal face of the ramus, and then passes to the external face, terminating in an acuminate lamina below the articular cotylus, but not reaching the angle. The articular is only de- veloped anteriorly on the internal border of the ramus, where it extends well forwards, extensively overlapping the angular. The surangular extends posteriorly to the borders of the articular cotylus, and spreads out below the articular as though it would enter into the composition of the angle of the jaw, which it does not, It is perforated by a round fora- men near its interior border, and its inferior face is separated from the external face by a prominent longitudinal down-looking angle. The artic- ular cotylus is transverse and is not bifossate. The quadrate contracts immediately above its condyle and is then broken off in the specimen, but it probably has a rather slender shaft. There is a large foramen in the internal wall of the ramus which is bounded below by the articular. A singular bone occurs in both skulls whose position I cannot deter- mine. It is a slender, strongly curved cylindric cone, which rises from the posterior palatal region and turns upwards, outwards and then back- wards and a little downwards, with a compressed acute apex. It is not articulated with any element at the apex, which lies near the jugal bone, and its basal connections are broken away in both skulls. It is possiblya part of the hyoid apparatus, but if so it is difficult tu identify it with any known element. The hypohyal is more appropriate than any other, but I do not make any identification. Cope] 244 [May 6 Measurements of Skull No. 2. MM. Length of supraoccipital on middle line........ bib etch unis de Length of supraoccipital including occipital condyle........ 230 Width of basioccipital posteriorly .........00....eese0e oan ee AES Width of foramen magnum .......... os kipihtlje Wins lakh leibleieba dh me ; £4 OWEICRD a 5 ak cl oid pithibaiaace - 40 Diameters occipital condyle SERMON STEOL i ai0icin dis eels bis chiens ve . 7 Width of distal end of quadrate........cceccceceeecewecews 135 7 Total length of mandibular ramus ............ceeeeeeeeeee 950 : Length of dentary above....... BOA 6s sedpioawinte being beeen eee . 480 ; Length of fourth tooth from alveolus..............eeeeeeee 55 Width of fourth tooth at alveolus.............0008 adicnininw « (2 History.—I described this gigantic reptile in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy for October, 1876, from teeth derived from the Laramie formation of Montana, and afterwards (/. c. December, 1876, p. 340), I described it more fully from a nearly entire dentary bone with © teeth from the same region. This individual did not differ much in dimen- — sions from those now described. Our knowledge of the structure of the cranium of the carnivorous Dinosauria has been very slowly acquired. Buckland and Mantell orig- inally knew only the mandibular rami, but Phillips much later obtained a maxillary bone. From these fragments he proposed a restoration on the basis of the skull of the Lacertilia, with but a single postorbital — bar. In this kind of restoration Prof. Owen coincided on the occasion of his description of another maxillary bone in the Quarterly Journal, — Geological Soc. of London, 1883, p. 334. In a figure of a restoration, he adopted the Lacertilian model instead of the Crocodilian, and he therefore inserted a triangular postorbital, and an elevated coronoid ele-— ment. He also omitted the preorbital foramen. Dr. J. W. Hulke, at that time President of the Geological Society, expressed the opinion, on hearing Prof. Owen’s paper, that Megalosaurus has two postorbital bars, an anticipation proven to be correct at a later date. In 1884, Prof. Marsh published a paper which contains a description of the skull of a species of carnivorous Dinosaur which he calls Ceratosaurus nasicornis. While this anima] is probably a species distinct from the Megalosaurus buck- landii,* it has not yet been shown to belong to adifferent genus. In this paper the presence of a zygomatic arch like that of the Crocodilia is’ demonstrated for this sole order, and the preorbital foramen is also de- scribed. The general and more obvious characters of the cranium are given, but many of those which are necessary for an exact understanding of the position of the genus are not given; especially are the characters * Amer. Jour. Sel. Arts, 1854, p. 330, It has been shown that the character on which Prof. Marsh relied to distinguish the genus Ceratosaurus, and the family Ceratosauride, viz., the confluent metapodials, is pathological. The keeled process on the nose is prob- ably only a specific character, 1897.) 245 (Baur. of the mandibular ramus omitted. In the present paper these omissions are mostly supplied, but a number of important problems remain to be definitely settled. See Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1892, Vol. xvii, p. 17, where one of these is stated. I pointed out in 1866, when the genus Lelaps was described, and later, in 1869 (Vol. xiv, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc.), that it differs from Megalosaurus in the much more acute and com- pressed claws. I add that the present species differs from the M. nase- cornis of Marsh in the much larger and more anteriorly placed orbits, and in the much smaller prerobital foramen. Figures of these remains will be given in the final publication by the Geological Survey of Canada. Addition to the Note on the Taxonomy of the Genus Hmys C. Duméri. By G. Baur. } (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1892.) In a discussion about the type of Emys with Dr. L. Hejneyer, this gentleman called my attention to the fact that, according to the Code of Nomenclature adopted by the American Ornithologists’ Union, the type species could not be 7. picta, because this species is not named by Brog- niart. According to his view not only the name Hmydes ought to be used, as originally introduced by Brogniart in 1805 (Emys Dum., 1806), but also one of the species enumerated by Brogniart taken as the type. Brog- niart mentions the following species with his genus Hmydes: H. feroz, E. rostrata, B. matamata, EL. lutara, EH. pensilvanica, E. clausa. In 1806 Duméril referred the 2. matamata to a new genus Chelus ; in 1809 Geof- frey H. ferox and H. rostrata to Trionyx, E. pensilvanica belonging to kinosternon Spix; either Z. lutaria or clausa has to be considered as type of Emydes. JZ. lutaria= T. orbicularis L. being the common Emy- sean form, ought to be taken as type of Hmydes, and Z. clausa= T. caro- lina L. ought to be considered as type of Terrapene Merrem., of which Cistuda Fleming is a synonym. According to this we would have the following : Emydes Brogniart, 1805, Type, 7. orbicularis L. Terrapene Merrem, 1820, Type, 7. carolina L. Chrysemys Gray, 1844, Type, 7. picta (Herrm. MSS.) Schn Phillips.] 246 [March 18, Second Contribution to the Study of Folk-Lore in Philadelphia and Vicinity. . By Henry Phillips, Jr. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 18, 1592.) S1ens, PORTENTS AND OMENS. Sunday is always the best or the worst day of the week, If one sews anything upon a garment that is already on, it isasure sign that some one will tell a falsehood about you. It is unlucky to measure a child with a yardstick before it can walk. It is unlucky to get out of bed left foot foremost. It is unlucky to count one’s money, as it will surely decrease. One must never count what is eaten, as hunger and poverty will be the result later in life. A servant who comes on Saturday makes a short flitting. If a man dies suddenly, leaving any B ctofot unfulfilled, his ghost — will keep them. It is lucky to dream of excrement. Children who pick dandelions will urinate in their bed (pis-en-lit). Bachelors’ and old maids’ children are always well brought up and 4 well behaved. Vessels named after women are unlucky as compared with those bearing _ the names of men. Vessels with a boasting or high-sounding title (such as Monarch of the 4 Seas, Dreadnaught, etc.) are unlucky. q It is unlucky to name a child after one of the same name, that has died, ; When speaking of one’s good fortune, one must always add: ‘‘I hope — I speak in a lucky hour.’’ One must always wear something new on Easter day, One must always wear something new on New Year's day. A four-leaved clover is considered to bring good luck to its finder, The tick of the ‘death watch’’ announces the speedy death of a mem- 4 ber of the family. If you can’t make a fire you'll get a bad husband, Throw pepper after a disagreeable person to prevent his return, 1892.] 247 [Phillips. Make a wish when a spotted horse is seen. It is unlucky to twirl a chair upon one of its legs. Crusts make whiskers grow. An M marked in the palm of the hand indicates good fortune. A woman who cuts bread into thin slices will make a poor stepmother. Scissors and other steel articles should be hid during a thunder storm to prevent a thunderbolt. Touching a corpse prevents bad dreams of it. To dream of the dead is lucky. Nose itching means sight of a stranger. Heads of snakes never die until sundown. Eels put on the land turn to snakes. Never look over a person’s shoulder into a mirror. A fork dropped foretells a male visitor; a knife, a woman. When the wind closes a shutter a stranger is announced. If one drops a morsel in putting it to the mouth some one wants it. If the first visitor to the house on a New Year is a man, good luck. Go to watch meeting New Year’s eve to obtain good luck throughout the year. To rock an empty rocking chair will make angry its most constant oc- - cupant. A Scotchman should never give a Bible. Meeting eyebrows denote a contrary disposition ; likewise hard to trust. Very light eyes denote a shallow, variable disposition. Blue eye beauty, do its mother’s duty ; Brown eye ran away and told a lie. —_— oe To see the new moon over the right shoulder is lucky ; over the left, unlucky. : Two white feet look, well about him ; Three white feet, do well without him ; Four white feet and a white nose— Throw him to the crows, : It is unlucky, when walking with a person in the street, to permit any one to pass between and divide you. It is unlucky to pass under a ladder. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xxx. 188, 2 F, PRINTED MAY 80, 1892, Phillips.] 248 [March 18, If the left hand itches or burns it is a sign of paying out money ; if the right, of receiving it. ee Birtu, DEATH AND MARRIAGE. Two spoons accidentally placed in the tea saucer signifies a wedding. Rhymes for brides-elect : Married in white, you have chosen all right ; Married in gray, you will go far away ; Married in black, you will wish yourself back. A white animal entering foretells death. A child born face downwards never lives. To drop a wedding ring from the finger indicates divorce. If you marry in May You will live a year and a day. If you marry in Lent You will live to repent. Fotx MEDICINE. To cure fits in a cat one should bite off a small piece of its tail. Warts will be produced if one handles a frog or a toad. Warts can be removed by anointing with fasting spittle. When one sneezes he must say: ‘‘To your everlasting beauty.” An eelskin worn about the ankle will keep off cramps. Piercing the ears will improve the sight. April snow applied to the face will improve the complexion. It is il) luck to change a sick person’s bedding. The hair of a seventh son, in succession, prevents whooping-cough. A drop of the sufferer’s urine in the ear will cure earache, Swinging a baby completely by the skirts prevents liver trouble. A seventh months child can live, an eighth months cannot, A copper penny dipped in vinegar and applied to a ring-worm cures it. Tie your stocking around your neck on retiring to cure sore throat. Sleeping towards the east produces headache, Steal a potato, rub one-half on a wart and lose it to remove the wart, — 1892.] 249 (Brinton. SEAsONs, WEATHER, ETC. Evening red and morning gray Will send the traveler on his way. A dried snake hung up in a draught will produce a rain. A star near the moon means a storm. The first three days of a month declare its character. On the second of July the Virgin Mary goes to visit her cousin Eliza- beth ; the weather on that day indicates the weather for the next six weeks, that being the length of the visit. A green Christmas means a white Easter. The departure and return of wild geese and crows announces winter and spring. When the white side of the leaves is exposed by the wind a storm ap- proaches. When the dandelions are closed there will be rain. In the spring there comes the blossom storm. There is always a heavy storm to fill the streams before they freeze. On the 2d of August comes the Lammas floods. Ember days indicate the weather of the seasons. The rain that makes large bubbles as it falls will be of long continu- q ance, If it clears up at night, the next night will be rainy. further Notes on Fuegian Languages. By D. G. Brinton, M.D., LL.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1892.) Since the publication of my study on the Patagonian and Fue- gian dialects in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society (No. 137, 1892), several important vocabularies ca come _ to my notice. Brinton.] 250 i [May 6, An Earty FuEGIAN VOCABULARY. One of these is the oldest known collected on the shores of Tierra del Fuego itself, that of Pigafetta having been derived from the Tsoneca, on the main land of Patagonia. That to which I refer was collected by the French navigator, Jouan de la Guilbau- diére, during a sojourn of eleven months in the Straits of Magellan during the year 1695. It includes about three hundred words and short phrases, and no part of it has been published. The MS. copy in my possession I owe to the courtesy of M. Gabriel Marcel, the Librarian ofthe Geographical Section of the National Library of France. As, however, he intends giving it publicity in the ~ Compte-rendu of the Congress of Americanists, it will be sufficient to illustrate its character by a limited selection of words. These show that the basis of the tongue is Alikuluf, and it differs scarcely more from the Alikuluf of the present generation than do between themselves the vocabularies of that tongue by Fitzroy and Dr, Hyades in the present century. A few words belonging to the ‘Tsoneca and the Yahgan may be detected, probably introduced by trading natives. In the vocabulary the bracketed words preceded by an A. are from the Alikuluf of Fitzroy. FUEGIAN (ALIKULUF) VOCABULARY OF 1695. dog, chalqui (A. shiloké). nose, loutche. ears, couercal. oar, oyeque (A. wy’te). egg, lescheley (A. lith’le). sea, chapte (A. chahb’ucl). eyes, titche (A. tet-élo). skin, alac (A. uc’ cdlayk). fire, ollay (A. tet-élé). smoke, telgueche. forehead, arcacol (A. lakoukal). sun, arlocg. head, yacabed chepy (A. yuccaba). teeth, chereedye. house, hasthe (A. hiit). tongue, patleaf. man, accheleche (A. ackinish). water, arret. moon, yacabed churlo (comp. Alik, woman, acche letep. yuccaba). wrist, yacabed charcal. mouth, asflet (A. uffeare). A few words show Tsoneca affinities, as; FUEGIAN, TSONECA, water, arret, karra, teeth, chereedye, curr, oer, 1892.] 251 (Brinton. LANGUAGE OF THE ONAS (AONAS). Up to the present time no linguistic material from Eastern Tierra del Fuego has been available; and consequently the ethnic affini- ties of the tribes that live there have been but guessed at. Collectively these tribes are known to the Tehuel-het of Southern Patagonia as Yakana-cunny, ‘‘ foot Indians,’’ as having no horses and but few boats, their journeys are made on foot; while the Yah- gans refer to their territory as Onégin, the ‘‘ land of men,’’ whence the appellation ‘‘ Onas.”’ The Onas are taller and stronger than the aquatic Yahgans and Alikulufs, who inhabit the Fuegian archipelago, and are described as in face and figure closely resembling the typical North American Indian (Popper). For this reason, apparently, it has been assumed by recent writers that they are a branch of the tall and large- limbed Patagonians north of the Straits of Magellan. This is the opinion advanced by Drs. Hyades and Deniker in their Report in Vol. vii of the Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn (Paris, 1891). ‘They acknowledge, however, that they had been unable to obtain any linguistic material on which to institute com- _ parisons. Such material has fortunately been secured lately by Dr. Poli- _ doro A. Segers, and he has printed a short vocabulary in the Bole- tin del Instituto Geografico Argentino (Buenos Ayres, 1891), for which he claims exactness. It is printed apparently in the pho- netics of the Spanish alphabet, which, one would think, would be far from adequate to express the sounds of the language, if we may credit the statement of the English missionary, Mr. Brydges, that they are peculiarly harsh and guttural, ‘‘ resembling the sounds made by a person who is gargling with difficulty !”’ _ The location of the Onas is described in the Boletin above referred to, both by Dr. Julio Popper and Dr. Segers. The tribe is divided into a number of bands, in constant feud with each other, and all without fixed habitations. To the north, between the Bay of St. Sebastian and Cape Sunday, are the Parrikens, the ‘Shella and the Uenenke; to the south, from about Cape Penas to the Straits of Lemaire, roam the Kau-ketshe, the Koshpijom and ’ the Loualks. These differ among themselves in dialect, but not to such an extent as to be mutually unintelligible. The precise band Brinton.] 252 [May 6, from which the following vocabulary was obtained by Dr. Segers is not clearly stated, but apparently from the Parrikens. A slight examination of this list of words is sufficient to disprove the statement made by the writers of the Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn that the language of the Onas is a dialect of the South- ern Patagonian or Tehuelhet. Its affinities are much closer with the Yahgan, although perhaps not near enough to allow us to speak of it as a dialect of that stock. In the eighty-four words in Segers’ vocabulary, I do not find the Yahgan correspondents for fourteen. Of the seventy remaining, twenty-three, or about one-third, are identical with the Yahgan or allied to it. Allowing for the very great difficulties in the way of a comparison of material such as I have at command, it is probable that with vocabularies carefully constructed on the same phonetic bases, and with correct identification of objects, a closer relation- ship between the two stocks would be demonstrated. In the vocabulary I have placed the Yahgan equivalent in brack- ets, preceded by the letter Y. The Yahgan vocabularies I have employed are those of Fitzroy, Bove and the more detailed one in the Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn. The bracketed words pre- ceded by Ts. are from the Tsoneca language. VOCABULARY OF THE ONAS LANGUAGE, TIERRA DEL FUEGO. 7 : L , . ] accouch, to, tshé-ia. drink, to, kaieto (Y. kayenhama, to angry, ddld. drink from a cup). arrow, (d-al. eat, to, tsham-ka (Y. a-tama). arrowhead, tash (Y. takouch). enough, canoe. ashes, dwen (Y. owan). eyebrows, oshel etshel (see eye and awaken, to, pash. hair). back hair, iani. fall, to, wa-da. basket, touel (Y. taouala). fat (grueso), ell6 CY. oulow). beard, anu-etskel. fire, 3d-ol (Y. tgouali, “lepierge & © belly, kashtom (Y. kashtamin, liver). _feu’’). black, mdi. flame, taloé. bow, a, wat-en (Y. uaiana). fog, dstau. bowstring, tanet-sel (Y. chali-sel). for me, tak-ka, brain, koiar,. for you, mak-ka, brother, i4-togte. friend, male, éosh-lelk. " call, to, cud-eke. female, ¢osh-ka, crab, kdmel. good, shatke, defecate, to, sha-dshteré, good-by ! eant-malk, dirty, keskd-a. good-night! ooken, ——<——-— - 1892. 253 (Brinton. go out! shoim. sad, eshen. hair (in general), etshel (Y. atcela, saliva, compé. all short hair). sea, paieke (Y. payaka, or hayeca). heart, sd-sa (Y. sa-skin). shut, to, ojeme. heaven, mata. sick, péué. hot, pomushk. sister, 2é-eke. I, me, tag (Ts. ia). skull, aletaia, ice, tal. sleep, to, ashté (Y. dshd). knife, a, el (Y. owila). slowly, la-ié. labial commissure, tsha-leke. small, tshool. large, eish (Ts. chaish). smell, to, ke-shonuan. lie, a, léke. smoke, te#. mamma, tam. snow, teu. moon, anien. soon, to-ok. morning, wanko. sun, anigke (Ts. gengenko). mother, tecdm. thanks ! pé-ieukom-iamski. mouth, conken. thick, kdtetshé. nail, of finger, kaiu (Y. galouf). thou, you, mag (Ts. ma). neck, késsel (Y. kaouheul, larynx). to-day, md, open, to, diepam. urinate, to, akketten (Y. owakour). play, to, tal-i4. vagina, pa-al. rain, shen-mush. water, oten. ready, tshé-iéke. weak, tshe-uel. red, potietel. winter, shewke. run, to, wa-akka. yawn, to, tsha-isal. It will be noticed that the personal pronouns are derived from the Tsoneca, while the words for bow, bowstring and arrowhead are Yahgan. This indicates that this weapon originated with them from the latter elemént of their population. The result of this comparison is to place the Onas nearer to the Yahgans than to the natives of the mainland. They are evidently a mixed people, not an independent stock, physically allied to the Patagonians, linguistically belonging in the main to the Yahgan group. YAHGAN VOCABULARIES. A few words may be added on the accessible material for the study of the Yahgan language. Its grammar has been made the theme of an able analysis by Mr. Lucien Adam, and a vocabulary has been studied from the translation of the New Testament by Mr. Julius Platzmann. Both these rest on the labors of the English missionary, the Rev. Mr. Brydges. The same is apparently the 254 [April 1, case with the quite extensive and satisfactory list of words presented in the Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn. The authors of the latter point out the important fact that of the 200 Yahgan (Tekenika) words collected by Fitzroy in 1830-32, 120 are wholly erroneous, most of them belonging to the Alikuluf tongue. In the report of Commander Giacomo Bove (Patagonia, Terra del Fuoco, Mari Australi, Parte i, Genova, 1883), there is a Yah- gan vocabulary of 164 words. It also was obtained through the instrumentality of Mr. Brydges, and is satisfactorily accurate. THE HONGOTE VOCABULARIES. In my previous communication on Fuegian dialects, I quoted two short vocabularies from a MS. in the British Museum said to be from the ‘‘Hongote’’ language, and which, from the paper forming a part of a record relating to Patagonia, I took to be dialects of that region. This is the first opportunity I have to correct this error. Dr. Franz Boas has pointed out to me that one vocabulary is clearly Salish, and must have been collected in Fuca strait on the north- west coast. He thinks it may be the Songish dialect, a name which remotely resembles ‘‘ Hongote.’’ How it came to forma part of a mass of documents relating with this exception wholly to South America, I cannot explain. The other he considers Tlinkit. Under such circumstances and in view of the hundreds of languages on the continent, it is easy to see how such a mistake could occur. I am glad to be able to correct it promptly. Stated Meeting, April 1, 1892. Present, 17 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne (135); Musée Colonial, Haar- lem, Holland (186); Dr. Paul Albrecht, Hamburg, Germany (184); Prof. Guido Cora, Turin, Italy (185); Victoria Insti- | os heii 1604.) 255 tute, London, England (136); Pennsylvania State College Agricultural Experiment Station (136). The following societies were placed on the Proceedings exchange list: Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Schleswig- Holstein, Kiel, Prussia; American Institute of Electrical Engineers, New York, N. Y.; Sociedad Cientifica Argentina, Buenos Ayres; Agricultural Experiment Stations at Blacks- burg, Va., Burlington, Vt., College Station, Tex., Geneva, N. Y., Agricultural College, Mich., Baton Rouge, La., New- ark, Del., and St. Anthony Park, Minn. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Govern- ment Observatory, Madras, India; Osservatorio Marittimo, Trieste, Austria; Biblioteca N.C. V. E., Rome, Italy ; Essex Institute, Salem, Mass.; Connecticut Agricultural Experiment Station, New Haven; American Museum of Natural History, New York; Agricultural Experiment Station, Newark, Del. ; Dr. Charles K. Mills, Philadelphia; Department of State, Bureau of Ethnology, Superintendent of Documents, U. §. Civil Service Commission, U.S. Lighthouse Board, Washing- ton, D. C.; Agricultural Experiment Stations at Bryan, Tex., St. Anthony Park, Minn., Topeka, Kans.; Sociedad Cientifica Argentina, Buenos Ayres, S. A.; Deutscher Wissenschaften Verein, Santiago, Chili. Dr. Ruschenberger read an obituary notice of the late Dr. Joseph Leidy. The decease of the following members was announced: Dr. D. Hayes Agnew, Philadelphia, March 22, 1892, wet. 74; Ario Pardee, Hazleton, March 26, 1892, set. 82. The President subsequently appointed Dr. William Pepper to prepare the usual obituary notice of Dr. Agnew and W. A. Ingham that of Mr. Pardee. Prof. Cope presented a communication upon “Some Little Known Paleozoic Vertebrates.” On motion, Dr. Cope’s paper on “The Osteology of the Lacertilia,” offered at the last meeting for the T'ransactions, _ was authorized to be printed in the Proceedings. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxx. 188. 2G. PRINTED MAY 80, 1892. 256 Lay 6 Pending nomination No. 1233 and new nomination No. 1241 were read. The Curators reported progress in the matters committed to them by resolution of March 18. The following resolutions offered by Mr. Bache at the last meeting then came up: Resolved. That, if the funds of the Society permit, this room be now put in charge of a Committee, for the purpose of receiving such treat- ment as to its walls, ceiling and columns as accord with the character of the Society, and that the Society instruct the Curators to exclude from the cases everything but such printed matter as is desirable for ready refer- ence, and from the floor any articles which are not conducive to the primary purpose in this room of convenience of the members of the Society. The first resolution, referring to the decoration of the room, was withdrawn, and, owing to the lateness of the hour, the further consideration of the second resolution was postponed, On motion of Dr. Hays, the Librarian was requested to re- move from their present place of storage the books, MSS., etc., belonging to the Society. The Committee appointed February 5, 1892, on the Colum- bian Celebration, was increased to five members, Dr. Ryder and Mr. Horner being added. | And the Society was adjourned by the President. Apri 15 falling on Good Friday, no meeting of the So- ciety was held. Stated Meeting, May 6, 1892. Present, 8 members. Mr. RIcHARD VAUX in the Chair. Letters were received as follows: A circular inviting subscriptions for the erection of a mon- ument to Prof. G. A. Hirn, in Colmar, Alsace. 1892.] 257 _ Program of the First Anniversary of the Tacoma Academy of Sciences, April 28, 1892. A circular letter from the Musée D’Oaxaca, Mexico, an- nouncing the death of M. le Général Mariano Jiménez, Gouv- erneur constitutional de l’Etat de Michoacan d’Ocampo, February 28, 1892. A letter from Mrs. Caroline Lewis, Secretary of the Loan Exhibition in connection with the University Lecture Associ- ation, Philadelphia, returning thanks to the Society for the loan of the busts of La Fayette and Franklin. The following donations to the cabinet were received: A photograph for the Society’s album from Charles E, Sajous, M.D., Philadelphia. A framed engraving of David Rittenhouse, LL.D., by EK. Savage, Philadelphia, 1796, after the portrait by C. W. Peale, from Miss Emily Phillips. Letters of envoy were received from the K. K. Astrono- misch-Meteorologisches Observatorium, Triest, Austria; Bath and West and Southern Counties Society, Bath, England; Department of Science and Art, London, England; Depart- ment of the Interior, Washington, D. C.; Museo Nacional de Buenos Ayres. Letters of acknowledgment of diploma were received from Rt. Rev. William Stubbs, Oxford, England; Prof. E. Mascart, Paris, France; Marquis Antonio De Gregorio, Palermo, Italy ; Sir George G. Stokes, Cambridge, England; Mr. Charles God- frey Leland, London, England; Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown, Pa.; Prof. Henry Willis, Philadelphia; Dr. W. J. Hoffman, Washington, D. C. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne (186); Colonial Museum, Haarlem, Holland (136); Dr. Aristides Brezina, Vienna (136); Prof. Peter P. v. Tunner, Leoben, Austria (136) ; Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde, Prof. F. Reuleaux, Berlin (136); Royal Saxon Society of Sciences (128, 185); Dr. Julius Platzmann, Leip- zig (136); Union Geographique du Nord de la France, Donai, France (96-130 and Catalog, Parts i-iv); Ecole Nationale 258 [May 6, D’ Agriculture, Montpellier, France (136); Editors of Cosmos, Profs. Abel Hovelacque, Emil Levasseur, Marquis de Nadail- lac (136); Prof. E. Mascart, Paris (131-186); Philosophical Society, University Library, Cambridge, England (136); Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society, Halifax, Eng- land (136); Zoélogical Society (Trans. xvi, 8 and 130-136), _ Royal Society, R. Astronomical Society, Linnean Society, Royal Institution, Geological Society, R. Meteorological Society, Prof. William Crookes, Dr. William H. Flower, Sir Rawson W. Rawson, London, England (136); Mr. Samuel Timmins, Arley, Coventry, England (136); Natural History Society of Northumberland, ete., Newcastle-on-Tyne (136); Geographical Society, Manchester, England (96-130 and Catalog); Royal Society, Royal Observatory, Edinburgh (136); Mr. Hamilton A. Hill, Boston, Mass. (184); Harvard College, Cambridge, Mass. (Catalog, Part iv); Mrs. Helen Abbott Michael, Phila- delphia (135, 186); Agricultural Experiment Station, Newark, Del. (135, 136); U.S. Naval Institute, Annapolis, Md. (136); U. 8. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. (186); Rev. Henry S. Osborne, Oxford, O. (136); State Agricultural Col- lege, Manhattan, Kans. (136); State University, lowa City, Ta. (134, 136); California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco (136); Texas Agricultural Experiment Station, College Sta- tion (135, 136 and pams.); Musée de La Plata, Argentine Republic, S. A. (135); Mr. Everard F. im Thurn, Georgetown, British Guiana, S. A. (136). Letters of acknowledgment (137) were received from the Geological Survey, Ottawa, Canada; Hon. J. M. Le Moine, Quebec; Sir Daniel Wilson, Canadian Institute, Toronto ; Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Me.; Historical Society, Society of Natural History, Portland, Me.; Prof. C. H. Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H.; Vermont Historical Society, Montpelier; Amberst College Library, Amherst, Mass.; Museum of Com- parative Zodlogy, Prof. Alexander Agassiz, Mr. Robert N. Toppan, Cambridge, Mass.; Institute of Technology, Boston Society of Natural History, Mass. Historical Society, Athe- neum, Messrs, Thomas M. Drown, Hamilton Hill, Robert C, eee eee ee 1892.] - 259 Winthrop, Boston; Mr. James B. Francis, Lowell, Mass.; Free Public Library, New Bedford, Mass.; Dr. Pliny Earle, North- ampton, Mass.; Essex Institute, Salem; Prof. Elihu Thomson, Swampscott, Mass; American Antiquarian Society, Worces- ter, Mass.; Prof. George F. Dunning, Farmington, Conn.; Conn. Historical Society, Hartford; N. H. Colony Historical Society; Prof. James Hall, Albany; Prof. W. Le Conte Stevens, Brooklyn; Buffalo Library; Prof. Edward North, Clinton, N. Y.; Profs. T. F. Crane, J. M. Hart, B. G. Wilder, Ithaca, N. Y.; University of the City of New .York, Histori- cal Society, Amer. Institute of Electrical Engineers, N. Y. Hospital, Amer. Museum of Natural History, Profs. J. A. _ Allen, Daniel Draper, R. W. Raymond, J. J. Stevenson, W. P. Trowbridge, New York; Vassar Brothers’ Institute, Poughkeepsie; Oneida Historical Society, Utica ; Prof. Henry M. Baird, Yonkers; U. 8. Military Academy, West Point; Dr. Charles R. Dudley, Altoona, Pa; Dr. Robert H. Alison, Ardmore; Prof. Robert W. Rogers, Carlisle; Hon. Eckley B. Coxe, Drifton; Profs. J. W. Moore, Thomas C. Porter, Traill Green, Kaston; Mr. Andrew 8S. McCreath, Harrisburg ; Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown; Linnean Society, Lancaster ; College of Physicians, Engineers’ Club, Library Company of Philadelphia, Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, Academy of Natural Sciences, Wagner Free Institute, Messrs, Cadwala- der Biddle, Arthur E. Brown, 8S. Castner, Jr., Robert Patterson Field, William W. Jefferis, G. deB. Keim, Benjamin Smith Lyman, James T. Mitchell, Robert Patterson, Franklin Platt, Theodore D. Rand, J. G. Rosengarten, Coleman Sellers, Wil- liam P. Tatham, D. K. Tuttle, Louis Vossion, Ellis Yarnall, Profs. John Ashhurst, Jr., E. D. Cope, F. A. Genth, Jr., H. D. Gregory, Benjamin Sharp, Albert H. Smyth, H. W. Spangler, Admiral Macauley, Drs. D. G. Brinton, John H. Brinton, George Friebis, Charles A. Oliver, C. N. Pierce, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, William H. Wahl, Philadelphia; Prof. John F. Carll, Pleasantville; Rev. G. W. Anderson, Rosemont; Dr. John Curwen, Warren, Pa.; Philosophical Society, Messrs. Philip P. Sharples, Washington Townsend, West Chester ; 260 [May 6, Agricultural Experiment Station, Newark, Del.; Mr. William M. Canby, Wilmington, Del.; Mr. Isaac C. Martindale, Camden; Free Public Library, Jersey City; Profs. Charles W. Shields, C. A. Young, Princeton; Va. Historical Society, Richmond ; Mr. Jed. Hotchkiss, Staunton, Va.; University of Virginia, Leander McCormick Observatory, Dr. J. W. Mallet, Univer- sity of Virginia; West Va. University, Prof. J. C. White, Morgantown, W. Va. Prof. Lyon G. Tyler, Williamsburg, Va.; U.S. Naval Institute, Annapolis, Md. Maryland Insti- tute, Peabody Institute, Baltimore; Agricultural Experiment Station, College Park, Md.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Raleigh, N. ©.; Georgia Historical Society, Savannah ; University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa; Prof. E. W. Clay- pole, Akron, O.; University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati Observatory ; Journal of Comparative Neurology, Granville, O.; Rev. Henry 8. Osvorn, Oxford, O.; Dr. Robert Peter, Lexington, Ky.; Atheneum, Columbia, Tenn; Prof. J. L. Campbell, Crawfordsville, Ind.; Purdue Experiment Station, LaFayette, Ind.; Col. William Ludlow, Detroit, Mich.; Acad- emy of Natural Sciences, Davenport, Ia.; Iowa State Univer- sity, Iowa City; Agricultural Experiment Station, State Historical Society of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.; University of California, Berkeley; Prof. J.C. Branner, Menlo Park, Cal.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Lincoln, Neb.; Agricultural Experiment Station, Manhattan, Kans; Kansas Academy of Science, Topeka. Accessions to the Library were reported from the Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne; Bataviaasche Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen; Osservatorio Marittimo, Trieste; K. K. Geographische Gesellschaft, Vienna, Austria ; Physikalische Gesellschaft, K. P. Akademie der Wissen- schaften, Berlin; Deutsche Seewarte, Hamburg; Verein fiir Erdkande, Metz; Koloniaal Museum, Haarlem, Holland; Société des Sciences, Liége; Institut R. Grandducal, Luxem- bourg; Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft, St. Gall; Natur- forschende Gesellschaft, Zurich; Societd Africana D’Italia, Naples; R. Osservatorio Astrenomice, Turin; Société Lan- ee DD EN —<— eee ee Oe : 1992. 261 guedocienne de Geographie, Montpellier, France; M. Désiré Pector, Paris; Bath and West of England Society, and South- ern Counties Association, Bath; Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society, Halifax, England ; Royal Meteorological Society, British Association for Advancement of Science, Solar Physics Committee, London; Natural History and Phil- osophical Society, Belfast; Philosophical Society, Glasgow ; Mr. Horatio Hale, Clinton, Ontario, Canada; Marine Biolog- ical Laboratory, Boston; Public Library, Salem; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester; Yale University, New Haven; Historical Society, Buffalo; Columbia College, His- torical Society, Prof. J. A. Allen, Hon. Seth Low, New York; Penna. State College, Harrisburg; University of Pennsyl- vania, Mercantile Library, Prof. Albert H. Smyth, Drs. D. G. Brinton, Charles K. Mills, C. A. Oliver, W. T. Parker, Messrs. W.S. Baker, Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; U.S. Naval Institute, Annapolis; Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore ; Department of the Interior, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Bureau of Ethnology, Dr. A. C. Peale, Washington, D. C.; Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, Raleigh, N. C.; General Society of the Sons of Revolution, Savannah, Ga.; Society of Natural History, Cincinnati; Academy of Science, St. Louis, Mo.; University of California, Berkeley ; Academy of Sciences, Mercantile Library Association, San Francisco; State Board of Agriculture, Lansing, Mich.; State Historical Society, Fre- mont, Neb; University of Nebraska; Observatorio Meteoro- logico-Magnetico Central, Mexico; Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires, 8. A.; Agricultural Experiment Stations: Hanover, N. H., Amherst, Mass., Uniontown, Ala., Lexington, Ky., Knoxville, Tenn., Agricultural College, Mich., Madison, Wis., Topeka, Kans., Las Cruces, N. M., Brookings, S. Dak., Tucson, Ariz. Mr. Bache read a paper on “Civil and Military Photo- grammetry.” A paper by Prof. Daniel G. Brinton, entitled “ Further Notes on Fuegian Languages,” was presented. 262 [May 6, Prof. Cope presented a paper “On the Skull of the Dino- saurian Leelaps Incrassatus.” ' A paper by Prof. G. Baur (Worcester, Mass.), entitled “ Additional Note on the Taxonomy of the Genus Emys,” was presented. Pending nominations Nos, 1233 and 1241 were read. The following report of the Curators was pene and its consideration was postponed. In response to the resolution of the Society, in which the Curators are instructed to state the nature of the Society’s collections at present housed outside of this Hall, together with the space they would occupy if prop- erly displayed, we have to report as follows : 1. Coins at Memorial Hall, deposited about 1878. The collection is small, probably not five hundred pieces. These could be easily displayed in a case such as that now at the southwest corner of this meeting room. There is, however, a fine oak cabinet belonging to the Society, at present in charge of the Numismatic Society, which is of ample capacity, and could be utilized if necessary. 2. The Poinsett and Keating collections of Mexican and other objects. These comprise about twenty-eight hundred objects of archeological inter- est. The combined collection is perhaps unique in some respects, and was deposited at the Academy of Natural Sciences in 1878. We believe that this collection could be displayed fairly well in such space as that now occupied by the cases on the north wall of this meeting room, west of the door. 8. Various paleontological specimens deposited at the Academy of Nat- ural Sciences in 1864. 4. The French metre, loaned to the Coast Survey some forty or fifty years ago, and in use by them as a standard. 5. A stone cannon ball fired at Queen Mary and Douglass as they were escaping from Loch Leven Castle. Loaned to the Historical Society March 81, 1874. Parrerson Du Bots, R. Meape Bacug, J, Cugston Morris, And the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. 1892, ] 263 Stated Meeting, May 20, 1892. Present, 24 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Correspondence was submitted as follows: A letter from the Committee of Philadelphia Councils on the Columbian Celebration at Chicago, in 1898, requesting the loan of certain articles owned by the Society was read and the consideration of the subject was postponed. Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; K. P. Meteorologische Institut, Berlin; K. Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Akademie, Halle a. S.; K. Siichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig; Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle, Geneva, Switzerland ; Royal Statistical Society, Zodlogical Society, London, Eng. ; Geographical Society, Manchester, Eng.; U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey Office, Washington, D. C. Letters of acknowledgment were received from Captain Richard C. Temple, Mandalay, Birmah (135); Comité Geolo- gique de la Russie, St. Petersburg (136) ; Société Hongroise de Géographie, Budapest (96-180, and Catalog, Parts i-iv); Prof. A. E. Nordenskiéld, Stockholm, Sweden (136); Prof. Senat G. Capellini, Bologna, Italy (182, 183, 134, 185); Naturfor- schende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes, Altenburg, Germany (186); K. Geodiitisches Institut, Berlin (96-130, 1386, ‘and Catalog, Parts i-iv); Redaction der Naturwissenschaftlichen Wochenschrift, Berlin (186); Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Bremen (136); Verein fiir Erdkunde, Dresden (136); Wetterauische Gesellschaft fiir die Gesammte Naturkunde, - Hanau (135); Bibliothek der Astronomischen Gesellschaft, _K. Sternwarte, Prof. J. Victor Carus (135), Dr. Caspar _ René Gregory (136), Leipzig; Académie Royale des Sciences, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxx. 138. 2H. PRINTED JUNE 8, 1892. 264 ; [May 20, Lisbon, Portugal (131-134); Entomological Society, London (136); Prof. James Geikie, Edinburgh (136); Natural History Society, Sir J. W. Dawson, Montreal (137) ; U.S. Institute of Science, Halifax, N.S. (1387); State Library of Massachusetts, Boston (187); R. I. Historical Society, Providence; Franklin Society, Providence, R. I. (1387); Yale University, New Haven (187); Academy of Sciences (137); Editor of the Popular Science Monthly, New York (119, 181, 138); N. J. Historical Society, Newark (137); Prof. L. B. Hall, Haver- ford, Pa. (137);-Mrs. Helen Abbott Michael, Messrs. Thomas M. Cleeman, Louis A. Scott, Philadelphia (1387); Patent Office, Anthropological Society, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Departments of the Interior and Agriculture, Naval Observatory, U. S. Geological Survey, Mr. William B. Taylor, Profs. S. F. Emmons, Herman Haupt, C. V. Riley, Charles A. Schott, Rt. Rev. John J. Keane, Dr. W. J. Hoffman, Wash- ington, D. C. (137); Agricultural Experiment Station, Baton Rouge, La. (187); Lick Observatory, Mount Hamilton, Cal. (187); Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, Riverside, Cal. (187); Prof. George Davidson, San Francisco, Cal. (137); Sociedad Cien- tifica “ Antonio Alzate,” Mexico (187); Museo Michoacano, Morelia, Mexico (187); Colorado Scientific Society, Denver (187). Accessions to the Library were reported from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; K. P. Meteorologische Institut, Berlin; K. Leopoldino-Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher, Halle a. 8.; Wiirtembergische Kommission fiir Landesgeschichte, Stuttgart; M. J. H. Schwarz, Kladno, Bohemia; Mittelschweizerische Geographische-Commercielle Gesellschaft, Aarau; Société de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle, Geneva; R. Académie des Sciences, Turin, Italy ; Sociedade de Geographia, Lisbon ; Royal Institution, London ; Royal Irish Academy, Dublin; Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba, Winnipeg; M. Edward Collom, Rock- wood, Ont.; University of Vermont, Agricultural Experi- ment Station, Burlington, Vt.; R. I. Historical Society, Provi- dence, R. I.; Yale University, New Haven; Profs. J. A. 1892.] 265 Allen, Mr. Edward L. Youmans, New York, N. Y.; Mr. William J. Potts, Camden, N.J.; Messrs. William 8S. Baker, Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Interstate Commerce Com- mission, Washington, D. C.; Academy of Science, Mercantile Library Association, St. Louis; Colorado Scientific Society, Denver. The following deaths were reported: Dr. C. A. Dohrn (Stettin), May 6, 1892, set. 87. August William Hoffman (Berlin), May 6, 1892, zt. — The minutes of the Board of Officers and Council were sub- mitted and the following preambles and resolutions therefrom were read and considered. Mr. Phillips moved : ‘*Whereas, This Society did in the year 1843 celebrate the Centennial Anniversary of its foundation by a series of addresses, meetings, recep- tions, exercises, etc., upon the 25th, 26th, 27th, 28th, 29th, and 30th days of May, the results of which were published in a special volume of over two hundred pages ; and, ‘‘Whereas, We are approaching the Sesqui-Centennial Anniversary of the same auspicious event; therefore, be it ‘‘Resolwed, That the Society will celebrate the same in a worthy and becoming manner. ‘Resolved, That the President be authorized to appoint a Committee of five members to make all necessary arrangements for the same and with full power to act, and that the President be ez officio a member of said Committee.” The preamble and resolutions being considered by the Society were unanimously agreed to. ‘The President subsequently appointed as said Committee Messrs. Henry Phillips, Jr., Chairman, J. Sergeant Price, Daniel G. Brinton, Richard Vaux and William V. Keating. Pending nominations Nos. 1233 and 1241 were read, spoken to and balloted for. _ New nomination No. 1242 was read. 266 [May 20, The following report and resolutions were presented by Mr. Williams: Your Committee, appointed under a resolution passed as follows : ** Resolved, That a Committee of three be appointed by the President to consider and report to the Society upon the advisability of an annual grant for the purpose of aiding the publication or assuming the entire cost of publishing transcripts of the Babylonian tablets on deposit in the Museum of the University of Pennsylvania ”’ has the honor to report that the collection of clay tablets inscribed in cuneiform from the Temple of Bel at Niffer, now deposited in the Museum of the University of Pennsylvania, numbers nearly seven thousand specimens and constitutes the most important collection of this character in the country, and one of the most important in the world, ranking third among such collections. The consecutive character of these temple archives, the long period they cover, and their complete and varied character, render their publication of the utmost importance to the world of learning, while the circumstanee that similar records are frequently repeated render it possible to give a fair summary by publishing portions arranged in selected series, by dynasties and with reference to the subjects treated. It is therefore prac- ticable to publish successive volumes of these texts, each of which shall be complete in itself, and which do not necessarily involve the publication of others in the series, though the value of all will be greatly increased by the publication of the whole. © The first cuneiform text was published by the East India Company in 1804, the inscription in its collection being engraved. Publications of texts have since been made by the British Museum, by the French and German Governments, by various learned societies and by private pub- lishers, aided by subscriptions and grants. The experience of nearly a century has conclusively established that the best results in development of research and in aid of study are secured by publishing a transcription ‘of cuneiform texts, without translations. The texts once published, the material for study now inaccessible in the Museum is opened to all scholars. The transcription of a series of these tablets is now nearly completed by a member of this Society, Dr. H. V. Hilprecht. Its publication will fill about seventy plates of a size similar to the quarto page of the Trans- actions of the Society, and cost, if reproduced by any photo.lithographic process, about $500. Other similar volumes will be produced in the future, and while the publication of the first of these issues will not pledge the Society to publish its successors, this fact ought to receive due con- sideration. In any case, only a small portion of the 7000 tablets will be published, and years will pass before even eight or ten volumes of like size will be presented for publication. 1892.] 267 The publication of the first volume presents therefore a single issue on a subject of the utmost importance to sound scholarship, a credit to American learning, and a work which will not see the light by private enterprise. Your Committee feels that this is a case which appeals directly to this Society, coincides with its past policy, and is certain to add to the value and importance of its Transactions. On inquiry it appears that a sum nearly sufficient for this expenditure can be secured out of this year’s appropriations, and the remainder can be provided for out of next year’s income. The Transactions offer a medium in all respects suitable, its page being of the proper size and the method of publication enabling the volume to be issued separately and should the series be continued, they can be numbered consecutively. Your Commit- tee therefore recommend the passage of the following resolutions . PPA: O16 f November4 ...... PUES NES! f | | MMe es cs Ge a's 120 November18......6... . - 809 April 1 Mint neet es ol Falla ie co 254 December: 25. scsrere ss a) evans 312 OSE ES Se ors art oe 6 256 DeceMbEr 16 ois. aes at New Members Elected. February 19, 1892. No. 2199. George William Curtis ......NewYork..... ste hai a ae Corns 117 2200. Anthony J. Drexel ..... o\ja: se RO OLBRIA . on a aren et ee bie. Rae ey eer A POON. sew 6 +o Washington, D.C... cas» ene em 117 TLE TIOW 16 ge 5: bes ee aoe OW SOME. 35s seca RR Pe 117 May 20, 1892. Ol an. EerOIG GOOOWIN. . . « «+ + + « «Philadelphia... 0. cae se ew 268 2204, Joseph D. Potts. ......- ais s Potladelphia.. i. \.o0 easements - . 268 December 16, 1892. No. 2205. Charles H. Cramp. .... ig eb MURCIA. 6. Vc Geen eee sts aisew Ie MOEA DP EOM oc: al ois a a PUB OIPHIR: oo. 5) 5 ectateveaeeetares eens 2207. John M. Macfarlane. ..... . . Lansdowne, Phila........ een alee 2208. Francis X.Dercum ........Philadelphia ....... » eleteceiiw te ae 2209. James Ellis Humphrey ...... Amherst, Mass. ......... or ecal Soe Decease of Members. Montgomery C. Meigs .........107 | C.A.Dohen.......0...0 6 © «265 Madison May <2 ss os .....107 | August William Hoffman ..... - . 265 Mdward Fonington, . . . <0 0s e's 107 | Miers Fisher Longstreth. ...... 291 Jean Louis Armand de Quatrefages . .107 | H. Burmeister. ........... .291 oy Cte bs 111'-|: John B Baker...) i-S<3)aeh ee Andrew C. Ramsay ... .....-.111 | George William Curtis ........ 291 Thomas Jefferson Lee .....-...- 11014: John: Ge Whittlety: ot:5 oe - - 302 Joseph C. Garrison. ......-. - . 111 | Joseph Lovering. ....... SRM TheodoreMommsen ........--+. 115°; |> Ernest Renan. 3) 40 feted ae ~» . 304 BEES UBS gay cea sw cic' - » 115 | ThomasChase....... & Sle 620 OOS John Couch Adams .......+4-. *221, | - Pliny EBarle:3. 5. sis 6 tees et es 309 Thomas Hockley ........- <6 SRE ls Daniel Wileon gs)isehe- ihe Stee ee D. Hayes Agnew. ........-...253 | JamesB. Francis .......... .309 Atrio Pardee... wee cee . . .255 | John S. Newberry. .... 314 PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxx. 189. 2P. PRINTED JAN. 18, 1893. 326 Obituary Notices. Page. Obituary Notice ordered —Joseph F. Garrison by William John Potts .........111 T. Sterry Hunt by James Douglass ........... . - 116 Ario Pardee by W. A. Ingham ..........2+.-. - . 205 D. Hayes Agnew by William Pepper ...... rapreeretter yess” Obituary Notices RGR) 45555. 5 ra oe W 10 ua eis sha hate ue teiiesie > wits 135, 255 Obituary Notice received from Linnea Society of New South W168 i.e) aie iste t ace, Manchester Geographical Society ...........110 Musée D’Oaxaca, Mexico . . 2. 658 6 ce cee ee 3 DDT Officers and Council. POGUES o'Su i eens ext ates Va ee ee Tr mG PO erin tastes cc Mea SUSE ce 1,3 Proceedings of. ....... Pee ae aU [ne eee rie ety Sn ere Acceptance of Membership. Anthony J. Drexel. ...... ode o LIT. 1. Joseph -D, Potts .i..)6)) 6 ee. si eecee Gee BUR LOW. «(wn 0! Um enone eee Harold Goodwin. .......... .3800 Written Communications. Bacue, R. MEADE. Civil and Military Photogrammetry . . 2... 0605 0 0+ eee ce 0 0 0 220, 201 Baur, GEORGE. Taxonomy of the Genus Emys, C. Duméril ............. AT TSH Addition to the Note on the Taxonomy of the Genus Enive, C. Duméril . . 245, 262 Boaz, FRANZ. Kiwakilutl Vocabulary. «<< 23's a bisie. je too ere as ces cae 6 Senin eee ae eae BonwI1u, W. G. A. Geometry and Mechanics Deny Evolution... ...........6.4 + +112,119 Brinton, DANIEL G. Observations on the Chinantec Language of Mexico... ...... +. + + 22,108 On the Mazatecan Language of Mexico, and Its Affinities. .......... .108 Studies in the South American Native Languages. ....+s..ee....-.-.112 Further Notes on Fuegian Languages .... 2... 02s ee eee ee ee » 249,261 Further Notes on the Betoya Dialects; from Unpublished Sources . . . . . 271, 305_ On the Etrusco-Libyan Elements in the Song of the Aryal Brethren . . . . 309, 317 Core, Epwarp D. P A Synopsis of the Species Tied, Genus Cnemidophorus..........62. 8 The Homologies of the Posterior Cranial Arches in the Reptilia. ......10,112 Tiaporus, a New Genus of Telidm . 1... wwe ee te tee eee ee ede Ue A Contribution to the Vertebrate Paleontology of Texas ........ +64 +128 The Osteology of the Lacertilia. .. 6. 1 1 ee ee ee ew ee ew « 185, 256, 806 Some Little-known Palmozoic Vertebrates. . 2. 6 6 ee ee ee ee ee ew ee OOS On the Skull of the Dinosaurian Lelaps Incrassatus .......... + + 240,262 — On the Phylogeny of the Vertebrata... . 0.66 2 ee eee were, On Some Points in the Kinetogenesis of the Limbs of Vertebrate + ee « 5 282, 808. = On False Hibow. Joiste i.e ei weid: oh ek lal ae eye te, on: nc la aii a A Valeo Elbow in a Homes’. ccs ss velo soe tee eee) os 0 ily Oe 327 Herprin, ANGELO. Page. The Temperate and Alpine Floras of the Giant Volcanoes of Mexico. .. . . 4, 108 HuMPHREY, JAMES ELLIS. The Saprolegniacez of the United States, with Notes on Other Species. . . . . 311 Krrxwoop, DANIEL. On the Mutual Relations Between the Orbits of Certain Asteroids ..... 269, 300 Puaruuies, Henry, Jr. A Second Contribution to the Study of the Folklore of Philadelphia and its ERNE tar eA 5k ew) oe si 9) 0 6igo Naor ee ogee es o 0 0 «0 122, 246 RUSCHENBERGER, W.S. W. A Sketch of the Life of Joseph Leidy .........2..44. Oral Communications. Biopeett, Lorin. A Cosmical Map of the Northern Hemisphere. ........-..06+5-6 ove Corr, Epwarp D. On the Geology of the Staked Plainsof Texas .......262050:22588. 116 Miscellaneous. American Chemical Society, New York, announcement of fifth general meeting. . . 292 Babylonian Tablets ... 222s cceeversees i es Nea Rae “ws bane 120, 266, 309 Bache, R. Meade, resolution br decoration ‘of meeting room. . . er et | Blodgett, Lorin, letter from, in — to a National University to be erected in Wash- ington, D.C...+---++.- a Sighted d/iG? wiih “ak a ee oy Gat Ge ae ag oe MRNGN DT THIPPODOD DUCCUAROG «5. 6.6. 5.6.5 6&0 8s 0 0) be Miele ees 4 . 116 Buffalo Historical Society, invitation from, to unveiling of status of Red Jncket, hoes Busts of Lafayette and Franklin loaned to the University Lecture Association . 122, 257 Slaudio, Jannet, letter from,» . 26s os ee bee se i pap. ig ea ee » » 257 EON. coal gigi gry hg aaa nie «+ 8 Cele) ol eee 268 Columbian Celebration, letter from Committee of Philadelphia Councils on die. * 268, 306 Committees : EE ION OS Aad gnc cb. ea GRAS Ae. 4 2 Ree eee > wat gals Ree ET Se ea PE oe cae are er re ane at oleae 4 OCHROS ERTIES ACOUISTMLIONY a gg hme sae ras seh isos a ate a De - « 112, 256 On Sesqui-Centennial Anniversary. . 0.662 eee wee we wae eres. On Henry M. Phillips’ Prize Essay Fund .... 1... ee eee 5 her a ee 108 RN ag! 5.9 Gl ag 60 80,0. ° 8: 619 we le ee: 8 aloe yo RPO ED 108, eee 122, 313 rat at a OG le ve ae be «1a 028) AN wr iednpat ia . 8, 107, 314 . On Extended Accommodations ........ diese i ee Prarie ore On Publication. . ea) SSR iar el we pee oe ter Mee ead BIER - . 107, 119, 313 OS) ES a Lea ie OP me ce eer aE die oh pipe - «107, 108, 119 On the Publications Of the Boniety : cis) sis ese Noe 4.) are SOS On DrJ. ©. Humphrey’s Paper ... . 20. 6). 8 ee oe dl gta 811, 318, 314 To Mxamine Paper of Prof. Cope 2. cece ee ee ee te eee 108, 111, 115 Congrésdes Américanistes. 8 6 2 2 te tet te ee ee ee aa arne BOB Internationale des Orientalistes, announcement of tenth session to be held. . . . 292 Géologique International, program of meetings to take place at Zurich in 1894. . 292 ~ Cope, Dr. E. D., presented additional matter for his paper in Transactions .... . . 121 Offers an amendment to Chapter ix, Section 1, of the Laws............117 328 Page. Coues, Elliott, request for loan of Lewis and Clark Notebooks. ........ Clete sO Resolution in regard to ........ aa tok Sitar tartar oh ae oe Wak SE, Ee Curators’ Report. .......... Se ae a ee Deposits belonging to the Society, resolution in regard to. ........... «122,268 Deutsche Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Wien, invitation from. .......... . 292 Donations to the Cabinet ........ 6 6 Se ang ek Saag ees - » 111, 257, 297, 304 Exchanges ordered... 0. 6 020s oe es shee bs ew vetteh ote late akUOS aDOs DUT tne Dincontimte 2620 015 joes ee Wi See oe cae ta eae ROM a an ak pane Nae bate erie Careene O00 PRGA G oie a eck ice eee Si OTe See eee PRPS a er are Saree Goodwin, Harold, letter from. 5.6 ees on 8 kw ene eatin a SR ee ee .« 314 Hart, Cris Vetter Pron 6.5) 0 oie ag. eee ee os ee a gos ae aes ete . 292 Historical Society, Chicago, invitation from, to laying eomerstone of its new build- Hopkinson, Francis, portrait of . galletas che ralee “pale cnnal RPh TD DT e9e, sou Keating and Poinsett collections ........0.+2-+2ee008-.8 wg ee eRe ee K. K. Geographische Gesellschaft, Vienna, letter from, discontinuing exchanges. . . 313 Leidy, Joseph, obituary of. ...... Se a ee eee aris Librarian, nominations for. esse Seek SSA Rh tien ose Teh cal Election of. P gel tee Rew o! BS 6 eee cele en wie Pelee et Locket containing hair of Gen. Andrew Jackson see ee ee ne wee oe ew oo LG Monument to G. A. Hirn, Colmar, Alsace ..........-. Pg Saya at Deh Sirgen oy To M, A; de QuatreMpen oe ee tw ss ere wees ea hereto Morris, J. C., articles found by him in the Museum. ..........4-....-.8,8iL Minority Report < . «< uo} es _ J Ke = LS Es gee hy © ee oe rr 2152. CATTELL, J. MCKEEN...... 1675. CATTELL, WILLIAMC....... 1908. CHANCE, HENRY MARTYN ’ 1763. CHANDLER; C.F... 0. 6 1778. CHAPMAN, HENRYC...... . 2132. CHARENCEY, COMTE HYACINTH DE 2111. CHILDS, GEORGE W........ 2158. CLARK, CLARENCE H....... 1921, 2063. Name. CARSON, HAMPTON L...... CLARKE, THOMASC....... re ee “8 ee eer aS ie . CASSATT, ALEXANDER JOHNSON . . CASTNER, SAMUEL, JR. .... ASA OUML SE Wiele> do: wieia sce pM Ae TS DE yey ew are aglebrc uib oo. Shy earner . COHEN, J, SoLIs. . . COLERIDGE, LORD. ...... . COPE, EDWARD D... . . CoppkE, HENRY... . CORA, GUIDO .... . CORNELIUS, ROBERT... .. .« . CovEs, ELLIOTT. . CRANE, THOMASF. .. 2... . CRESSON, CHARLES M.... . CROOKES, WILLIAM .. . Cruz, FERNANDO (of Guatemala . CURWEN, JOHN . . PPR ONT RS a Ds a can eet ee antale PO DAMA, SAMO DoS aie) oon . DANNEFELD, C. JUHLIN . PO Wis ee’ a eee ae ace DAVENPORT, SAMUEL... . . . DAVIDSON, GEORGE........ . DAWKINS, WILLIAMB...... PSA WEON. DORN, Wos.a: crc «2 . DELGADO, JUAN DE DIAS DE LA TOMAS iatig- <6 a 50 aa . DICKSON, SAMUEL. ...... DIxON, SAMURLG:.. . 5.2 5.8) Woke es oe ae eS Pa el ae Gee See DOUGLASS, JAMES, JR... .... . DRAPER, DANIEL . DREXEL, A. J.. . Drown, THOMASM . . . Du Bois, PATTERSON . DUDLEY, CHARL Me a ot ee ES BENJAMIN. . DuDLEY, THomaSH....... DuNcAN, Louis De. ee Lo Po tan Me $ Date of Election. April 16, 1880, Oct. 18, 1872, Dec. 16, 1887, May 18, 1888, Jan’y 20, 1871, April 16, 1880, April 16, 1875, April 16, 1875, Dec. 17, 1886, Dec. 17, 1886, May 17, 1889, Jan’y 17, 1873, Jan’y 19, 1883, Oct. 16, 1835, Oct. 18, 1879, Jan’y 18, 1884, Jan’y 18, 1884, Jan’y 19, 1866, Jan’y 18, 1856, Dec. 17, 1886, Oct. 17, 1862, Sept. 20, 1878, April 15, 1870, Oct. 21, 1870; Dec. 16, 1892, Feb’y 2, 1877, April 17, 1857, May 21, 1886, Dec. 20, 1889. April 18, 1861, 1D Oct. 19, 1866, July 21, 1854, April 21, 1876, July 17, 1863, Oct. 20, 1876, Jan’y 19, 1866, Oct. 15, 1880, April 18, 1862, Dec. 17, 1886, April 18, 1884, Dec. 16, 1892, Dec. 17, 1886, May 21, 1886, Oct. 21, 1881, April 20, 1877, Oct. 15, 1880, Feb’y 19, 1892, July 16, 1875, Oct. 15, 1880, Jan’y 17, 1879, Oct. 15, 1880, Feb’y 19, 1886, Present Address. Philadelphia. “oe oe New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. “ce New York, N. Y. . Philadelphia. St. Maurice les Charencey, France, Philadelphia. New York, N. Y. Akron, Ohio. Philadelphia. Paris, France. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. Bethlehem, Pa. Turin, Italy. Philadelphia. Washington, D, C. Cincinnati, O. Drifton, Pa. Philadelphia. Ithaca, N. Y. Philadelphia. London, England. Warren, Pa. Philadelphia. New Haven, Conn. Stockholm, Sweden. Paris, France. Adelaide, S. Australia. San Francisco, Cal. Manchester, England. Montreal, Canada. Madrid, Spain. Philadelphia. ““ Helsingfors, Finland. Bethlehem, Pa. Spuytenduyvil, N. Y. New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. Altoona, Pa. Camden, N, J. U.S. Navy. 5 Name. Date of Election. Present Address. 1578, DUNNING, GEORGE F....... Jan’y 18, 1867, Farmington, Conn. 1727, DUPONT, EDOUARD ....... April 18, 1873, Brussels, Belgium. 2086, DuRUy, VICTOR ..... .. May 21, 1886, Paris, France. 1679. DUTTON, CLARENCE E...... Jan’y 20, 1871, Washington, D. C. Name. Date of Election. Present Address. 2208. DERCUM, FRANCIS X....... Dec. 16, 1892, Philadelphia. 2180. FIELD, ROBERT PATTERSON ... May 16, 1890, Philadelphia. 1901, FLINT, AUSTIN, JR. ....... April 16, 1880, New York, N. Y. 1621, FLOWER, WM. HENRY. ..... Jan’y 15, 1869, London, England. 1875. Foaco, EpwaRD A........ Oct, 18, 1879, Philadelphia. 2197. FORBES, GEORGE ........ Oct. 16, 1891, London, England. 1170, FRALEY, FREDERICK ...... July 15, 1842, Philadelphia. 1912, FRALEY, JOSEPH C. ....... April 16, 1880, i 1695. FRAZER, PERSIFOR ....... Jan’y 19, 1872, « 2171, FRIEBIS, GEORGE ........ Dec. 20, 1889, & SABO PROUDE, be AG sna. <6 00 se) Jan'y 17, 1862, London, England. 2179. FULLERTON, GEORGES... .... May 16, 1890, Philadelphia. 1739, FULTON, JOHN. ......... April 18, 1873, Johnstown, Pa. 1914, FuRNEsS, HORACE HowarRD... April 16, 1880, Philadelphia. 1130, FURNESS, WILLIAM H....... April 17, 1840, u GS 1988, GARRETT, PHILIPC ....... April 2), 1883, Philadelphia. 2079. GATES, M.E.......-++».+- May 21, 1886, Amherst, Mass. 1025. GATSCHET, ALBERTS. ...... Oct. 17, 1884, Washington, D. C. 1897. GEIKIE, ARCHIBALD. ...... Jan’y 16, 1880, London, England. 1808. GEIKIE, JAMES, .. 2... we April 21, 1876, Edinburgh, Scotland. 1339, GENTH, FRED, AUGUSTUS. .... Jan’y 20, 1854, Philadelphia. 2067. GENTH, F. A., JR... ...... Feb’y 19, 1886, “ 1855. GIBBS, OLIVER WoLcoTT. ..... July 21, 1834, Cambridge, Mass. 1587, GILL, THEODORE NICHOLAS - July 19, 1867, Washington, D. C. 1800. GILMAN, DANIELC. .. . . April 21, 1876, Baltimore, Md. 1910. Giraldes, J. P. C. Cuseado de. -- July 20, 1827. 1950. GLADSTONE, WM. Ewart .... Oct. 2I, 1881, London, England. 2162. GoopE, G. BROWN. ....... Oct. 18, 1889, Washington, D. C. 1835. GOODELL, WILLIAM ....... Feb’y 2, 1877, Philadelphia. 1680. GOODFELLOW, EDWARD... . . . Jan’y 20, 1871, Washington, D. C. 22038. GoopWIN, HAROLD ....... May 20, 1892, Philadelphia. 1271. GOULD, BEN. APTHORPE. .... Jan’y 17, 1851, Cambridge, Mass. 1851. GRAY, ELISHA. ......... Jan’y 18, 1878, Chicago, Ill. 1006. GREEN, TRATLL). 6... 5 ee Oct. 16, 1868, Easton, Pa. 1504. GREEN, WILLIAM HENRY .... April 17, 1863, Princeton, N. J. 1880. GREENE, WILLIAMH....... April 18, 1879, Philadelphia. 2155. GREGORIO, IL MARCHESE ANTONIO DE. ..++eeeee-ess Dec, 21, 1888, Palermo, Italy. ’ eed i : r ‘5 oT kee Rp NE NE ge hy 2 * 3 pag - a ag re | MoT? wt ay ‘ ti ei Se ag ey. F a ae"te ys ot : 5 ao ri & 3 ts: ri ‘ ye Gane s =@ ira“ 2 he mitre et fi “fa EF . . cals ; ae is ae eet Ree» eres e Pik oe ind i r ‘ . est, : a: \ ae ae pu pe SRT 3 r ee ‘e ca a, ast , 7 +g Coy ae a ise eras rye SEE" yall vrateaeh gles, Cau eRe (ey I aE Or NWT, WR eR eam per TW yy Se targa! wv «sae ag ; 7 av p ines gee : F poe ue t ; Phe Pe Pitle 4 oy ae SHULD Ces 4s De 7 ks ae a ian Sel oe i fad We Abie ; ‘ we A pide, i a ee eee Name. 2159. GREGORY, HENRY D....... 2188. GREGORY, CASPAR RENE..... I22E GPM AIOly CE08 68 oc 0 se eee 1939. GRISCOM, WM. WOODNUTT.. . 1815. GROTE, AUGUSTUS RADCLIFFE. . 2090, GUBERNATIS, ANGELO DE... ., 1438. Guyangos, Puscual de... .... 2054. HAECKEL, ERNEST. ....... 2066. HaGEN, H. A... . 1658. HALE, Epw. EVERETT. ..... M709) SEALS, FIORATIO (6:00 0 os ee DROS DATA ASAPH ye ase a 3. 0 8 1795, HALL, CHARLES EDWARD... . 4656. HALL, JAMES . 1.0 5 et oe Mats) PAD SEMAN jc eis se eae 1412. HAMMOND, WILLIAM A Po eS ty SE ea 1387, HARDING, GEORGE 21386. HARRIS, JOSEPHS. .... Ve iar Wea, Oe on. © 6 ea 1827. HART, JAMES MORGAN. ..... 1510. HARTSHORNE, HENRY. ..... 1764, HAUER, FRANZ RITTER VON, 1681, HAUPT, HERMANN. ....... 1862, Haupt, LEWIS M......-¢.-.- 2082, HAYES, R. SOMERS. .... ee Pouyelabow hy Reng. fio 1) ieee a 2165. HAZLEHURST, HENRY ..... 1985, HEILPRIN, ANGELO ....... 1734. HELMHOLTZ, HEINRICH .... 1963. HILL, HAMILTON ANDREWS... 2110. HILPRECHT, HERMANN V..... 1768, Himes, CHARLES FRANCIS ... 1663. HircHcock, CHARLES HENRY. . 2160, HOFFMAN, WALTER J....... 2068, HOLLAND, JAMES W. .....-. 1898. HOLMES, OLIVER WENDELL .. . 1624. HooKER, JosepH D.. .....-. 1652. HOPPER, EDWARD. ....... 1607. Horn, GEORGE HENRY ry 2070, HORNER, INMAN. ........ 1941. HorcHKIss, JEDEDIAH. 1696. HouGH, GEORGE W........ 1698. Houston, EDWIN J........ “2148. HousToN, HENRY H....... 2084. HOVELACQUE, ABEL....... 1645) THUMPHREY FEC we ee ee 2211, HUMPHREY, JAMES ELLIS. ... 1628. HUXLEY, THOMAS HENRY... . 1426, HyRTL, JOSEPH ......--- 2052, Im THURN, EVERARD F...... 1773. INGHAM, WM. ARMSTRONG. ... 6 Date of Election. May 17, 1889, May 15, 1891, Oct. 16, 1846, April 15, 1881, Oct. 20, 1876. May 2l, 1886, April 19, 1861, Present Address, Philadelphia. Leipzig. Naples, Italy. Haverford, Pa. Florence, Italy. Madrid, Spain, Jena, Prussia. Cambridge, Mass. Roxbury, Mass. Clinton, Canada. Washington, D. C. Westport, N. Y. Albany, N. Y. Haverford, Pa. New York, N. Y. Paris, France. Philadelphia. “ Ithaca, N. Y. Philadelphia. Vienna, Austria. St. Paul, Minn. Philadelphia. New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. oe Lad Berlin, Prussia. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. Carlisle, Pa. Hanover, N. H. Washington, D. C. Philadelphia. Boston, Mass. London, England. Philadelphia. o Staunton, Va. Chicago, Ill. Philadelphia. o Paris, France. Amherst, Mass. London, England. Vienna, Austria. Georgetown, British Guiana. Philadelphia. ieee ce) PT Ee ee fe Fy + s y j ras ‘ fs “>: » re wae a ie AF a, iPad oe ie en on - smb eett ea bees BaP one Shee ewan, aS rigikease ye Rae ae ye) he \ Me Ari ae, at hewn #2, ei i RN Bes Dt pa “af « - bet Kens 4 face Name. 2010. JAMES, EpMuND J. . 1933. JANNET, CLAUDIO, .... 2049, JAYNE, HORACE... . 1954, JEFFERIS, WILLIAM W.. . 1942, JONES, CHARLES C., JR... 2017. JORDAN, FRANCIS, JR. 1989. KANE, ELIsHA KENT... . 2169. KEANE, JOHN J... . 1348, KEATING, WILLIAMYV. . 2021. KEEN, WILLIAM W........ 1962, KEIM, GEO. DE BENNEYVILLE. . 2118. RIEPERT, HENRI: . 2... ee 1161. KENDALL, E. OTIS. ..... 1708, KING, CLARENCE .. . 1284, KIRKWOOD, DANIEL. ..... 1767, KONIG, GEORGEA..... 2167, KRAUSS, FRIEDERICHS. . 1026, Labouderie, J... . - 20 1694, LAMBERT, GUILLAUME. . . 1858. LANDRETH, BURNET. .. . 1781, LANGLEY, SAMUELP, ... 1721. LA ROCHE, C. PERCY . . 1711, LAUTH, FRANZ JOSEPH .... 1974. LAWES, JOHN BENNETT . . 5 eine 1595. LEA, HENRY CHARLES, . . 1737. LE CoNTE, JOSEPH. .... 2125, LEEMANS, CONRAD. .... 1986. LEHMAN, AMBROSEE...... 2182, LELAND, CHARLESG. ... 2174. LE MOINE,J.M........ 1934. LE Roy-BEAULIEU, PAUL. . 1382. LESLEY, J. PETER. .... 1376. LETCHWORTH, ALBERTS. .. . 2085, LEVASSEUR, EMILE..... 1415. LEwis, FRANCIS W. .... 1383, Leyburn, John. ..... 1756, LOCKYER, JOSEPH NORMAN. BOOA IORI. <. o eva sea 1872. LONGSTRETH, MORRIS. . . 1015. Lorin, Theodore. ..... 2019. LUBBOCK, JOHN. ..... 2003. LUDLOW, WILLIAM. ... . 1629, LYMAN, BENJAMIN SMITH . 1058. Macedo, J. L. DaCosta .. 2209. MACFARLANE, JOHN M.... 1994, MAISCH, JOHN M...... 1970. MALLERY, GARRICK, JR. . 2042. MALLET, JOHN WM..... 7 J Date of Election. April 18, 1884, April 15, 1881, Oct. 16, 1885, Jan’y 20, 1882, Oct. 21, 1881, April 18, 1884, —_ April 20, 1883, Dec. 20, 1889, April 21, 1854, July 18, 1884, April 21, 1882, Dec. 17, 1886, Jan’y 21, 1842, Oct. 18, 1872, April 18, 1851, Oct. 16, 1874, Dec. 21), 1889, Jan’y 18, 1884, Jan’y 18, 1884, Oct. 20, 1882, Jan’y 16, 1885, Present Address. Philadelphia. Paris, France. Philadelphia. Augusta, Ga, Philadelphia. Kane, Pa. Washington, D. C. Philadelphia. Berlin, Prussia. Philadelphia. New York, N. Y. Riverside, Cal. Houghton, Mich. Vienna, Austria. Paris, France. Louvain, Belgium. Bristol, Pa. Washington, D. C. Rome, Italy. Munich, Bavaria. Rothamstead, Herts, Eng. Philadelphia. Berkeley, Cal. Leyden, Holland. Philadelphia. London, Eng. Quebec, Canada, Paris, France. Philadelphia. “ce Paris, France. Philadelphia. Baltimore, Md, London, England. New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. Paris, France. London, England. U. 8. A. Philadelphia. Lisbon, Portugal. Lansdowne, Pa. Philadelphia. Washington, D.C. University of Virginia, Va ee ee ee ee Name. 1847. MANSFIELD, IRA FRANKLIN... MARCH, FRANCIS ANDREW ... MARKS, WILLIAM D....... 1857, 1861, 1604, 2078. 1018, 2184, 1572. 2196. 1654, MARSH, OTHNIEL C MASCART, E..... MARSHALL, JOHN... . 2... Martinez, Juan Jose... . MASON, ANDREW ..... MASPERO, GASTON. ....... MAYER, ALFRED M 1928. 2107. MCALISTER, JAMES ...... MCCAULEY, EDWARD Y.... 1685. McCosH, JAMES. ........ 1888. MCCREATH, ANDREWS... . 1821. MCKEAN, WILLIAM V 2004: MCMASTER, JOHN BACH. . . 1677, MEEHAN, THOMAS 1908. MERRICK, JOHN VAUGHAN . . aie 8 8 8 1947. MERRIMAN, MANSFIELD... . 1744. MESSCHERT, MATHEW HUIZINGA. 2142, MICHAEL, HELEN ABBOTT. . 2175. MITCHELL, JAMES T...... 1461, MITCHELL, S. WEIR 2114, MONIER-WILLIAMS, MONIER . . 1791. Moorr, GIDEONE. . 2029. MoorE, JAMES W . i; 1841, MOREHOUSE, GEORGER .... 1054, Morelli... . ale 6 6 @¢ 2 « ¢ «a 1976. MORRIS, J. CHESTON. ...... 1577. MorTON, HENRY . . MucH, MATTHZUS. . MUHLENBERG, F.A....... . MUELLER, FRIEDERICH .... . MUELLER, F. Max........ "_2e.e ew © ee. ~~. . . —<" - ee eee ee - MuRDOCK, J.B... . . NADAILLAC, MARQUIS DE.. . . MUNROE, CHARLES E....... . MUONI, DAMIANO... . e+: & Se . MurRRAY, James A. H...... NEWCOMB, SIMON. ...... . Norris, ISAAC. . NorRIs, WILLIAM F.. . PO MOMTE: IEW ARDS. 4 oe ec« 26 . NEWTON, HUBERT ANSON... . . NICHOLS, STARR Hoyt . NIKITIN, SERGE... . . NORDENSKIOLD, ADOLF ERIC . . o. & 9 oe 6) 6 «el @ OSBORN, HENBY F. ..5.. 2 8s . OSBORN, HENRY S... . . OSLER, WILLIAM... . 1801. OWEN, P. CUNLIFFE . . 8 Date of Election. Jan’y 18, 1878, Jan’y 15, 1881, 21, 1886, 18, 1878, 19, 1869, 19, 1872, 19, 1866, 21, 1876, 18, 1872, 17, 1886, 16, 1885, Feb’y Jan’y May Feb’y 19, 1886, 17, 1878, 15, 1891, 18, 1887, Jan’y 18, 1867, Jan’y 16, 1885, April 21, 1876, Present Address. Cannelton, Pa. Easton, Pa. Philadelphia. New Haven, Conn. Philadelphia. Spain, ‘Paris, France. New York, N. Y. Paris, France. Hoboken, N. J. Philadelphia. “oe Harrisburg, Pa. Philadelphia. “oe Bethlehem, Pa. Douglassville, Pa. Philadelphia. “ee “ce London, England. New York, N. Y. Easton, Pa. Philadelphia. Naples, Italy. Philadelphia. Hoboken, N. J. Vienna, Austria. Greenville, Pa. Vienna, Austria. Oxford, England. Washington, D.C. Milan, Italy. U. S. Navy. Oxford, England. Paris, France. — Washington, D. C. New Haven, Conn. New York, N. Y. St. Petersburg, Russia. Stockholm, Sweden. Philadelphia. ae Clinton, N. Y. Philadelphia. Ithaca, N. Y. Paris, France. Princeton, N. J. Oxford, O. Baltimore, Md. London, England. ae Fie fe sed Sake Ee Fre Name. PACKARD, JOHN H. . PAGET, JAMES PANCOAST, WILLIAM PACKARD, A. S., JR. rea a ee eae HENRY... 1673. PARIEU, ESQUIRONDE...... . PASTEUR, LOUIS. . PEARSE, JOHN B.. . PEIRCE, C, NEWLIN . PENAFIEL, ANTONIO 1518. PENROSE, R. A. F. . . PEPPER, EDWARD . . PEPPER, WILLIAM. . PETER, ROBERT. . PLATT, FRANKLIN . PLATZMAN, JULIUS. 2208. 2044, Ports, WILLIAM JOHN 2097. PosTGATE, J. P 2161. POWELL, J. W. . . 1619. PRESTWICH, JOSEPH 1592. Price, J. SERGEANT 1780. PRIME, FREDERICK, 2088, PULZSKY, FRANCIS 1758. 978. . PARVIN, THEOPHILUS . PATTERSON, C. STUART...... . PATTERSON, ROBERT....... PATTERSON, THOMAS L...... . PEMBERTON, HENRY....... . PENNYPACKER, SAMUEL W... . . Pereira, Jose Maria Dantes... . . PHILLIPS, HENRY, JR. ...... . POMIALOWSKY, JOHN...... . PorTER, THOMAS CONRAD. . . +e we eee oa. eo 0 See te oe ee PS ae Se ie oe oe at ae a oe ‘1 ares PUMPELLY, RAPHAEL... . 1143. Quaranta, Barnardo. ...... De ta We ee De ne ee ee he 9 A a Date of Election. Sept. Jan’y 16, 1829, 15, 1841, 18, 1878, 18, 1878, 15, 1869, 16, 1874, 21, 1886, 16, 1875, 19, 1867, 19, 1867. 21, 1886, 18, 1879, 21, 1881, 20, 1854, 18, 1879, Present Address. Providence, R. I. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. Paris, France. Philadelphia. Paris, France. Philadelphia. Cumberland, Md. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. Mexico. Philadelphia. “ae Paris. Philadelphia. Lisbon, Portugal. Lexington, Ky. Philadelphia. Leipzig, Germany. St. Petersburg, Russia. Easton, Pa. Philadelphia. Camden, N. J. Cambridge, England. Washington, D. C. Shoreham, England. , Philadelphia. Buda-Pesth, Hungary. Newport, R. I. Madrid, Spain. Naples, Italy. Philadelphia. Warren, Pa. Oxford, England. London, ef Essex, England. New York, N. Y. Detroit, Mich. Philadelphia. Baltimore, Md. Brussels, Belgium. Moscow, Russia. Lausanne, Switzerland, 10 Name.. Date of Election. Present Address. DOs0e MRA Rl phic aes a eich tats Feb’y 2, 1877, Berlin, Prussia. C122) BREVILLE; ALBERT. so es Dec. 17, 1886, Paris, France. 1500. RICHARDSON, BEN. WARD... . April 17, 1863, London, England. 1808, RILEY, CHarRLesV ....... April 21, 1876, Washington, D.C. 1957. RoBINS, JAMES W ....... April 21, 1882, Philadelphia. 1390. RoGers, FAIRMAN. ...... - Jan’y 16, 1857, Newport, R. I. 2177. RoGERS, ROBERT W........ Feb’y 21, 1890, Carlisle, Pa. 1906. RoGeRS, WILLIAMB.,JR .... April 16, 1880, Philadelphia. eee. Ome FG,’ Oe oe 6 eres April 18, 1862, Los Angeles, Cal. 2050. ROLLETT,HERMANN....... Oct. 16, 1885, Vienna, Austria. 1907. Roop, OGDENN......... April 16, 1880, New York, N. Y. 1064. ROSNY, DE, LEON. ....... July 21, 1882, Paris, France. 1732. Rossi, GIOVANNI Battista. ... April 18, 1873, Rome, Italy. 2198, ROSENGARTEN, JOSEPH G..... Oct. 16, 1891, Philadelphia. 1718, ROTHERMEL, PETER F. .... « Jan’y 17, 1878, Limerick P. O., Pa. 1838. ROTHROCK, JOSEPH T...... April 20, 1877, Philadelphia. “oe 1264. RUSCHENBERGER, WM. S. W... . Oct. 19, 1849, 1620. RUTIMEYER, CARLL....... Jan’y 15, 1869, Basel, Switzerland. 2109. RypDER, JOHNA......... Dec. 17, 1886, Philadelphia. 1766. SADTLER, SAMUEL PHILIP. ... Oct. 16, 1874, Philadelphia. 2148. SAJous, CHARLES E........ Feb’y 17, 1888, Paris, France. 1563. SANDBERGER, FRIDOLIN..... April 20, 1866, Wiirtzburg, Bavaria. 1958. SARGENT, CHARLES SPRAGUE .. April 21, 1882, Brookline, Mass. 1730. SAUSSURE, HENRI DE....... April 18, 1873, Geneva, Switzerland. 1877. SCHORLEMMER, C......... Oct. 18, 1878, Manchester, England. 1498, ScHoTT, CHARLES ANTHONY... April 17, 1863, Washington, D. C. 1864. SCHURZ, CARL.......... Sept. 20, 1878, 1725. SCLATER, PHILLIP LuTLEY.... April 18, 1873, London, England, 1919: BOOTT, Lewis A. oe. ce ws Oct. 15, 1880, Philadelphia. See OEE We ci eie ev aled a eh'a? s/s ole Dec. 17, 1886, Princeton, N. J. 1870. SCUDDER, SAMUEL HUBBARD... Sept. 20, 1878, Cambridge, Mass. 1656. SEIDENSTICKER, OSWALD. .... Jan’y 21, 1870, Philadelphia. oe 1888. SEILER, CARL. ......... April 18, 1879, 1704, SELLERS, COLEMAN ....... July’ 19, 1872, * 1583. SELLERS, WILLIAM....... - April 15, 1864, “ 1770. SELWYN, ALFRED R.C. ..... Oct. 16, 1874, Montreal, Canada. 1728. SELYs, DE, LONGCHAMPS. ... . April 18, 1873, Liége, Belgium. 2057. SERGI, GIUSEPPE. ....... Oct. 16, 1885, Rome, Italy. 1965. SEVE DE BAR, Epovarp..... July 21, 1882, Ramsgate, England. 2076. SHARP, BENJAMIN. ....... May 21, 1886, Philadelphia. 1944. SHARPLES, PHILIP PRICE .... Oct. 21, 1881, West Chester, Pa. 1960. SHARPLES, STEPHEN PASCHALL.. April 21, 1882, Boston, Mass. 2002. SHARPLEsS, Isaac. ....... Jan’y 18, 1884, Haverford, Pa. 1792. SHEPPARD, FURMAN. ...... Oct. 15, 1875, Philadelphia. 1797. SHERWOOD, ANDREW ..... - Oct. 15, 1875, Mansfield, Pa. 1822. SHIELDS, CHARLES W....... Feb’y 2, 1877, Princeton, N. J. ce A ee Saree April 15, 1864, Strasburg, Germany. (?) 2146. SmirH, EpcarF..... -... Oct. 21, 1887, Philadelphia. 1544, SMITH, GOLDWIN.. ....... Jan’y 20, 1865. 1789, SMITH, STEPHEN... ..... - Oct. 15, 1875, New York, N. Y. 2141, SMYTH, ALBERTH....... : May 20, 1887, Philadelphia. 1742, SNOWDEN, A. LoUDON. . .... Oct. 17, 1873, s 2009. SNYDER, MONROE B... ..... Jan’y 18, 1884, “ 2189. SPANGLER, HENRY W...... May 15, 1891, as a, eh<— ae. oe tee ee ee ee ee eee eee re FS . STOKES, GEORGE G. . . . STRAWBRIDGE, GEORGE . STRONG, WILLIAM... . STUART, GEORGE... . 2193. STUBBS, WILLIAM. . . 2093. STUER, DIONYS. . 1844. SYLVESTER, J.J..... 2092. SZOMBATHY, JOSEF.. . 1786, TATHAM, WILLIAM P, . 1846. TAYLOR, WILLIAM B. . . STEVENS, WALTER LECONTE.. . . STEVENSON, JOHN JAMES... 2098. TEMPLE, RICHARD CARNAC ... 2006. THOMAS, ALLEN C... . 1807. THOMSON, ELIHU... 1993. THOMPSON, HEBER &. . 1726. THOMPSON, HENRY.. . ~ a er er a 1755, THOMPSON, ROBERT ELLIS... . 1754, THOMSON, FRANK. . . 1723. THOMSON, WdLLIAM. . 1909. THOMSON, WILLIAM. . 3580; DRURY, A... sce nt 1688, TILGHMAN, BENJAMINC... . 1233. TILGHMAN, RICHARD A 1657. TILGHMAN, WILLIAM M. 2176. TIMMINS, SAMUEL .. . 2123. TOPINARD, PAUL. . . . eS 8) och. Riieo a aw 2065. TOPPAN, ROBERT NOXON..... 1597. TOWNSEND, JOSEPH B . 1955. TOWNSEND, WASHINGTON... . 1691. TROWBRIDGE, WILLIAMP.... 2024, TRUMBULL, HENRY CLAY... . 1973. TSCHERMAK, GUSTAF . See Rie 1983. TURRETTINI, THEODORE... . 2166. TUTTLE, DAvIDK... 2168. TYLER, LYONG.... 1529. TUNNER, PETER... . 1602. TYNDALL, JOHN... . 2188. TYSON, JAMES. .... 2185. UNWIN, WILLIAM C . 2000. VAUX, RICHARD. ..... . VERE, DE, SCHEELE M. 1475. VincHOW, RUDOLPH. . 1646. VoGT, CARL. ..... 2115. VON MELTZEL, HuGo wee, er ee “ee ee ® 1670, VOSE, GEORGE LEONARD. .... 2186. VossION, LOUIS... . Present Address. Washington, D. C. Cincinnati, O. Copenhagen, Denmark. Troy, N. Y. New York, N. Y. London, England. Philadelphia. Washington, D.C. Philadelphia. Oxford, England. Vienna, Austria. “ ca) ‘Philadelphia. Oxford, England. Vienna, Austria. Philadelphia. Washington, D. C. Upper Burmah, India. Haverford, Pa. Swampscott, Mass. Pottsville, Pa. London, England. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. Geneva, Switzerland. Philadelphia. “ Arley, near Coventry, Eng. Paris, France. Cambridge, Mass. Philadelphia. West Chester, Pa. New York, N. Y. Philadelphia. Vienna, Austria. Geneva, Switzerland. Philadelphia. Williamsburg, Va. Leoben, Austria. London, England. Philadelphia. London, England. Philadelphia. University of Virginia, Va. Berlin, Prussia. Geneva, Switzerland. ' Koloszyar, Hungary. Boston, Mass. Philadelphia. 12 WW Name. Date of Election. Present Address. 2034. WAGNER, SAMUEL. ....... Jan’y 16, 1885, Philadelphia. 1748. WAHL, WILLIAM HH. ...... Jan’y 16, 1874, 43 1724. WALLACE, ALFREDR...... April 18, 1878, Parkston, Dorset, England. 2156. WARD, LESTER F......... May 17, 1889, Washington, D. C. 2033. WEIL, EDWARD HENRY ..... Jan’y 16, 1885, Philadelphia, 2028. WEISBACH, ALBIN. ....... Jan’y 16, 1885, Freiburg, Saxony. 1639. WHARTON, JOSEPH. ....... April 16, 1869, Philadelphia. 1637. WHITE, ANDREW D........ April 16, 1869, Ithaca, N. Y. 1848. WHITE, ISRAELC......... Jan’y 18, 1878, Morgantown, W. Va. 1487. WHITNEY, JosIAH DwicHt ... Jan’y 16, 1863, Cambridge, Mass. 1502. WHITNEY, WILLIAM Dwicut.. . April 17, 1863, New Haven, Conn. 1863. WILDER, BURT GREEN. .... - May 8, 1878, Ithaca, N. Y. 2151. WILLIAMS, TALCOTT. ...... May 18, 1888, Philadelphia. 2178. WILLIS, HENRY. ......-> - Feb’y 21, 1890, fy 2150. WILSON, EpMUND B....... Feb’y 17, 1888, Bryn Mawr, Pa. 2041. WILSON, JAMESC....... . . Jan’y 16, 1885, Philadelphia. 1747. WILSON, JOSEPH M........ Jan’y 16, 1874, " 2187. WILSON, WILLIAM POWELL ... May 20, 1887, m 1896. WINTHROP, ROBERT C. ..... Jan’y 16, 1880, Boston, Mass. 2140. WIREMAN, HENRY D....... May 20, 1887, Philadelphia. 1561. WIsTER, OWEN JONES. .... . April 20, 1866, 3 2854, ‘WOOD; RICHARD. 4). sce eee April 18, 1879, e 1762. WOODWARD, HENRY. ...... July 17, 1874, London, England. TIDE. WY OOTUMN, le Wiss cous arenes - - Jan’y 16, 1874, Reading, Pa. 1854. WoRMLEY, THEODOREG. .... Jan’y 18, 1878, Philadelphia. 1982. WuRTS, CHARLES STEWART... Jan’y 21, 1881, " WSL. WYOROFS, Ao Bok a ste ace ee Feb’y 19, 1886, U.S. Navy. er 1904. YARNALL, ELLIS... ......--. April 16, 1880, Philadelphia. 1759. Youne, CHARLES AuGuUsTUS... April 17, 1874, Princeton, N. J. ' : ; ; , “3 a e < sin o is i a eae oe he hagas mm $e 8 as rl an E gk 5 ‘ i . ‘ = “tu Me , ’ ry ‘ nee. d ‘ i : . . i < é . or ; lw ~ Q American Philosophical 11 Society, Philadelphia P45 Proceedings v.28=30 Physical & Applied Sei. Serials PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY moe Al L 4 can oe ata iJ i